JP7657443B2 - Gaming Machines - Google Patents

Description

The present invention relates to gaming machines such as pachinko machines.

Conventionally, gaming machines are known that can execute a display effect using a display device when a gaming ball enters a starting hole (see, for example, Patent Document 1).

In these types of gaming machines, it is possible to create display effects using character images, patterns, etc.

JP 2016-202930 A JP 2016-198339 A JP 2016-182376 A

However, even with the gaming machines described above, there is still room for improvement in terms of technology to enhance the enjoyment of the game.

The present invention was made to solve the above-mentioned problems, and aims to improve the entertainment value of the game.

The present invention has been made to solve at least some of the problems described above, and can be realized as the following application examples. Note that the reference symbols and supplementary explanations in parentheses in this section indicate the correspondence with the embodiments described below in order to aid in understanding the present invention, and do not limit the present invention in any way.

[Application example 1]
A gaming machine having a display means capable of executing a plurality of display effects,
A first display effect may be performed as one of the plurality of display effects,
A second display effect may be performed as one of the plurality of display effects,
A third display effect may be performed as one of the plurality of display effects,
A fourth display effect may be performed as one of the plurality of display effects,
The first display effect is an effect of displaying a first decorative pattern,
The second display effect is an effect in which a part of the first decorative pattern is missing ,
The third display effect is an effect in which a part of the missing part of the first decorative pattern returns to its original state,
The fourth display effect is an effect in which another part of the missing part returns to its original state,
A combination effect including the first display effect, the second display effect, the third display effect, and the fourth display effect may be performed.
In the combination performance, the first display performance is performed, then the second display performance is performed, then the third display performance is performed, and then the fourth display performance is performed.
A gaming machine characterized by:

The present invention can increase the enjoyment of games.

FIG. FIG. A block diagram showing the electrical configuration of the main control board of the gaming machine. A block diagram showing the electrical configuration of the sub-control board of the gaming machine. FIG. 2 is a diagram for explaining a main ROM and a main RAM. FIG. 2 is a diagram for explaining a sub-ROM and a sub-RAM. 1 is a diagram for explaining various random numbers used in gaming machines. FIG. 11 is a diagram for explaining judgment tables T1 to T4. An explanatory diagram of the jackpot type determination table T5. An explanatory diagram of the fluctuation pattern determination table T6 during non-time-saving mode. An explanatory diagram of the fluctuation pattern determination table T6 during time-saving mode. This is an explanatory diagram of the electric chute opening pattern determination table T7. 13 is an explanatory diagram of the large prize opening pattern determination table T8. FIG. 13 is an explanatory diagram of a V opening/closing member opening pattern determination table T9. 4 is a flowchart of a main control process. 13 is a flowchart of a main-side timer interrupt process. 13 is a flowchart of a start port sensor detection process. This is a flowchart of the special chart 2 pre-determination processing. This is a flowchart of the special diagram 1 pre-judgment processing. 13 is a flowchart of a normal operation process. 13 is a flowchart of a special action process. 13 is a flowchart of a special symbol waiting process. 13 is a flowchart of a jackpot determination process. 13 is a first flowchart of the variation pattern selection process. This is a second flowchart of the variation pattern selection process. This is a flowchart of processing during special pattern change. 13 is a flowchart of a special symbol determination process. 13 is a flowchart of a game status management process. 13 is a flowchart of a game status reset process. 13 is a flowchart of special electric device processing. 13 is a flowchart of a V-type opening/closing member operation process. 13 is a flowchart of a game status setting process. 13 is a flowchart of a V-area sensor detection process. This is a flowchart for processing the number of reserved balls. 13 is a flowchart showing a sub-control main process. 13 is a flowchart of a sub-side timer interrupt process. 13 is a flowchart of a received command analysis process. 13 is a flowchart of a pre-reading performance determination process. 11 is a diagram for explaining a configuration of a pre-determination information storage area; FIG. FIG. 13 is an explanatory diagram of a pre-reading performance pattern determination table T51. 13 is a flowchart of the variable performance start processing. An explanatory diagram of the core performance pattern determination table T52. 13 is an explanatory diagram of a chance-up effect pattern determination table T53. This is a flowchart of processing during variable performance. 13 is a flowchart of a display control process. An explanatory diagram illustrating the movement pattern of the first movable part 14. An explanatory diagram illustrating the second state of the first movable part 14. An explanatory diagram illustrating the second state of the second movable part 15. An explanatory diagram illustrating the second state of the frame movable part 69. 13 is an explanatory diagram illustrating an example of the display presentation of a sub-display screen 64. FIG. This is a diagram to explain the confirmed stop pattern remaining display performance A. A diagram to explain the confirmed stop pattern remaining display presentation B. A diagram to explain the confirmed stop pattern remaining display presentation C. A diagram to explain the variable display area change performance A. A diagram to explain the variable display area change presentation B. A diagram to explain the variable display area change presentation C. A diagram to explain the variable display area overlapping effect A. A diagram to explain the variable display area overlapping effect B. A diagram to explain the variable display area overlapping presentation C. A diagram to explain the decorative pattern stopping position uncertain performance A. A diagram to explain the decorative pattern stopping position uncertain performance B. A diagram to explain the decorative pattern stopping position uncertain performance C. A diagram to explain the decorative pattern sudden confirmation stop performance A. A diagram to explain the decorative pattern sudden confirmation stop performance B. A diagram to explain the decorative pattern sudden confirmation stop performance C. A diagram to explain the reel linking performance A. A diagram to explain the reel linking performance B. A diagram to explain the reel linking performance C. FIG. 13 is a diagram for explaining scroll effect A. FIG. 13 is a diagram for explaining scroll effect B. FIG. 13 is a diagram for explaining scroll effect C. A diagram to explain the decorative pattern special change performance A. A diagram to explain the decorative pattern special change performance B. A diagram to explain the decorative pattern special change performance C. FIG. 13 is a diagram for explaining decorative pattern missing case A. A diagram to explain decorative pattern missing performance B. FIG. 13 is a diagram for explaining decorative pattern loss C. This is a diagram to explain the ceiling reaching imminent indication performance A. This is a diagram to explain the ceiling reaching imminent indication performance B. This is a diagram to explain the ceiling reaching imminent indication performance C. A diagram to explain mode suggestion image display presentation A. A diagram to explain mode suggestion image display presentation B. A diagram to explain mode suggestion image display presentation C. A diagram to explain mode suggestion image continuation presentation A. A figure to explain mode suggestion image continuation presentation B. A diagram to explain mode suggestion image continuation presentation C. A diagram to explain multiple section display presentation A. A diagram to explain multi-section display presentation B. A diagram to explain multiple section display presentation C. A diagram to explain functional timer display presentation A. A diagram to explain functional timer display presentation B. A diagram to explain functional timer display presentation C. A figure to explain specific image transition performance A. A figure to explain specific image transition presentation B. A figure to explain specific image transition presentation C. A diagram for explaining specific image absorption performance A. A diagram for explaining specific image absorption presentation B. A diagram for explaining specific image absorption presentation C. A diagram to explain string decomposition performance A. A diagram to explain character string decomposition performance B. A diagram to explain string decomposition performance C. A diagram to explain the jackpot game count display presentation A. A diagram to explain the jackpot game count display presentation B. A diagram to explain the jackpot game count display presentation C. A diagram to explain double timer display performance A. A diagram to explain double timer display effect B. A diagram to explain double timer display presentation C. A diagram for explaining the final screen display performance A. FIG. 13 is a diagram for explaining the final screen display effect B. FIG. 13 is a diagram for explaining the final screen display presentation C. A diagram to explain promotion hold consecutive performance A. A diagram to explain promotion hold consecutive performance B. A diagram to explain the promotion hold consecutive performance C. A figure to explain operation instruction display presentation A. A figure to explain the operation instruction display presentation B. A figure to explain the operation instruction display presentation C. A diagram to explain special button display effect A. A diagram to explain special button display effect B. A diagram to explain special button display effect C. A diagram to explain the effect button valid/invalid display effect A. A diagram to explain the effect button valid/invalid display effect B. A diagram to explain the effect button enable/disable display effect C. A diagram for explaining operation automation performance A. A diagram to explain operation automation performance B. A diagram for explaining operation automation performance C. A diagram to explain the relationship between the first movable part and the frame movable part. A diagram to explain double gimmick performance A. A diagram to explain double role performance B. A diagram to explain movable member contact presentation A. A diagram to explain movable member contact presentation B. A diagram to explain movable member contact presentation C.

First Embodiment
1. Structure of the gaming machine Fig. 1 is a front view of a gaming machine 1 according to one embodiment of the present invention. In the following description, the left-right direction of the gaming machine 1 will be described as coinciding with the left-right direction as seen by a player facing the gaming machine 1. The front direction of the gaming machine 1 will be described as the direction from the gaming machine 1 toward the player, and the rear direction of the gaming machine 1 will be described as the direction from the player toward the gaming machine 1.

The gaming machine 1 is a pachinko gaming machine that shoots gaming balls based on the player's shooting operation, and when a gaming ball wins a specific winning device, a predetermined number of gaming balls is paid out to the player based on the winning. The gaming machine 1 comprises a gaming machine frame 50 and a gaming board 2, and the gaming board 2 is attached to the inside of the gaming machine frame 50. In addition to a front frame (front frame portion) 53, the gaming machine frame 50 comprises an outer frame (base frame portion) that forms the outer hull of the gaming machine, and an inner frame to which the gaming board 2 is attached inside the outer frame. The front frame (front frame portion) 53 is a vertically rectangular unit located on the front side of the outer frame and inner frame, and includes a handle 60, a ball supply tray (upper tray) 61, a surplus ball receiving tray (lower tray) 62, a performance button 63, a sub-display screen 64 (right sub-display screen 64R, left sub-display screen 64L, and upper sub-display screen 64U), a sword member 65, a frame lamp 66, a speaker 67, and a frame movable body 69. An opening is formed in the center of the front frame 53, and the play area 3 of the game board 2 can be seen through the opening.

The handle 60 is located at the lower end of the right side of the front frame 53, and launches the game ball with a launch strength according to the rotation angle. On the right and left sides of the handle 60, a movable frame movable body 69 (also called a frame movable gadget 69), which is a movable so-called gimmick, is provided. The frame movable body 69 is configured so that two members arranged on the left and right sides of the handle 60 can move left and right in the left and right directions. Each of the two members is formed of a flexible flat plate-like member, and is configured so that the main surface approaches and moves away from the handle 60. The frame movable body 69 is normally stationary at a retreat position (FIG. 1) away from the handle 60 on the left and right sides of the handle 60, and can move (advance) from the retreat position toward the handle 60 so as to approach each other and stop at a position where it touches the handle 60. When in the advanced position, the frame movable body 69 touches the handle 60 or the right hand of the player operating the handle 60.

The ball supply tray (upper tray) 61 is provided below the front frame 53 and stores game balls. The surplus ball receiving tray (lower tray) 62 is located below the ball supply tray (upper tray) 61 and stores game balls that cannot be accommodated in the ball supply tray 61. The performance button 63 is an operation unit located near the ball supply tray (upper tray) 61 and is operated (pressed) by the player during performances that are performed as the game progresses. A vibration motor is located inside the performance button 63, and the button itself is configured to vibrate up, down, left, and right depending on the performance. The sword member 65 is an operation unit imitating the shape of a sword and can be pushed downward by the player during performances that are performed as the game progresses. The sword member 65 is configured to be able to perform a first operation of pushing the entire sword member 65 downward and a second operation of pushing the entire sword member 65 upward. The sub-display screen 64 is a screen of a liquid crystal display device, and includes a right sub-display screen 64R, a left sub-display screen 64L, and an upper sub-display screen 64U. The right sub-display screen 64R is provided on the right side of the front frame 53, the left sub-display screen 64L is provided on the left side of the front frame 53, and the upper sub-display screen 64U is provided on the upper side of the front frame 53. The right sub-display screen 64R and the left sub-display screen 64L are arranged in a pair across the game board 2. The upper sub-display screen 64U is arranged above the game board 2. The right sub-display screen 64R, the left sub-display screen 64L, and the upper sub-display screen 64U are arranged so as to surround the opening of the front frame 53. The sub-display screen 64 may be a liquid crystal display device, or may be another image display device such as an organic EL display device, a plasma display, a projector, or a dot matrix. The frame lamps 66 include a right frame lamp and a left frame lamp, and are arranged above the front frame 53 to provide light effects during play. The right frame lamp is a diagonal light-emitting element arranged between the upper sub-display screen 64U and the right sub-display screen 64R. The left frame lamp is a diagonal light-emitting element arranged between the upper sub-display screen 64U and the left sub-display screen 64L. The speakers 67 are arranged at the upper left and upper right of the front frame 53 to provide sound effects during play.

The game board 2 includes a game area 3, a rail member 4, a board lamp 5, an image display device 7, a first board movable body 14, a second board movable body 15, a fixed winning device (center) 19, a normal variable winning device (electric chute) 22, a gate (through chucker) 28, a first large winning device (first attacker) 31, a second large winning device (second attacker) 36, a large winning opening start port 17, a normal winning port 27 (normal winning port 27), an outlet 16, and displays 40.

The play area 3 is an area where game balls launched by operating the handle 60 flow down, and has multiple game nails protruding therein to guide the game balls. The rail member 4 is disposed at the left end of the play area 3, and guides the game balls launched by operating the handle 60 toward the top of the play area 3. The board lamp 5 is disposed on the rear side of the play area 3, and irradiates light from the rear side of the play area 3. Here, some of the board lamps 5 are connected to the right frame lamp and the left frame lamp, and are configured to have a continuous shape and light emission.

The image display device 7 is provided near the center of the play area 3 and has a display screen 7a. The image display device 7 may be a liquid crystal display device, or may be another image display device such as an organic EL display device, a plasma display, a projector, or a dot matrix. The display screen 7a of the image display device 7 has a performance pattern display area in which performance patterns (decorative patterns) 8L, 8C, and 8R are variably displayed (also called variable display), a reserved image display area in which reserved images 9A and 9B are displayed, and a reserved digestion image display area (respective reserved display area) in which a reserved digestion image 9C is displayed. The reserved images 9A and 9B are images that represent a reserved play, and are also called reserved icons 9A and 9B. The reserved digestion image 9C is an image that represents the reserved play, and is also called the reserved image 9C, the reserved icon 9C, the variable icon 9C, or the variable icon 9C. The reserved icon 9C may also be simply called a reserved icon.

The effect symbol display area includes three symbol display areas, "left", "center", and "right". The left symbol display area displays a left effect symbol (left decorative symbol) 8L. The center symbol display area displays a center effect symbol (center decorative symbol) 8C. The right symbol display area displays a right effect symbol (right decorative symbol) 8R. The effect symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are composed of a plurality of symbols representing numbers, for example, from "1" to "9". The variable display of the effect symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R is synchronized with the variable display of the first special symbol and the second special symbol, which will be described later. The image display device 7 can display the results of the variable display of the first special symbol and the second special symbol displayed by the first special symbol display device 41a and the second special symbol display device 41b, which will be described later, (the result of the big win lottery) in an easy-to-understand manner to the player, by the combination of the effect symbols displayed in the left, center, and right symbol display areas.

For example, if a jackpot is won, the display will stop with a repeat number such as "777". If a loss occurs, the display will stop with a random number such as "637". This makes it easier for the player to grasp the progress of the game. The player can grasp the jackpot lottery result from the first special symbol display 41a and the second special symbol display 41b, as well as the image display device 7. The position of the symbol display area does not have to be fixed. In addition, the variable display of the variable symbols may be a vertical scroll or may be other than that. The combination of the variable symbols to be displayed according to each lottery result is not limited to the above and can be set arbitrarily. Hereinafter, the display of the variable symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R will be referred to as "variable symbol display", "variable decorative symbol display", or simply "variable display" or "variable display". In addition, this decorative pattern change performance counts the performance during the period from when the special pattern starts changing to when it stops (also called the special pattern change period) as one change performance (one cycle of change performance). Therefore, even if the decorative pattern is temporarily stopped during the period from when the special pattern starts changing to when it stops, the temporary stop performance is included in the decorative pattern change performance.

The image display device 7 can display on the display screen 7a not only the performance symbol changing performance, but also a jackpot performance performed in parallel with a jackpot game (an example of a special game), a demo performance for waiting for customers, and the like. In the performance symbol changing performance, in addition to the performance symbol, performance images such as background images and character images may also be displayed. Furthermore, the image display device 7 may display on the display screen 7a, in addition to the performance symbol, an identification display (fourth symbol, not shown) that can indicate that a special symbol is changing or indicate the result of a lottery for a special symbol. The identification display (fourth symbol) may be displayed by a light-emitting device such as an LED provided in the game area 3.

The reserved image display area includes a first reserved display area that displays reserved images 9A according to the number of reserved first special symbols described below, and a second reserved display area that displays reserved images 9B according to the number of reserved second special symbols described below. By displaying the reserved images 9A and 9B, the number of reserved first special symbols displayed on the reserved first special symbol display 43a described below and the number of reserved second special symbols displayed on the reserved second special symbol display 43b can be displayed in an easy-to-understand manner to the player. The reserved consumption image display area includes a reserved consumption display area that displays reserved consumption image 9C. The reserved consumption image 9C corresponds to the effect pattern (effect pattern 8L, 8C, 8R) currently changing on the display screen 7a or the display screen 7b, and by displaying the reserved consumption image 9C, it can be displayed in an easy-to-understand manner to the player that the reserved first special symbol or reserved second special symbol is consumed ("reserved special symbol consumption" described below).

On the left side of the image display device 7, there is provided a first movable board 14 (also called the first movable gadget 14), which is a movable so-called gimmick. The first movable gadget 14 is configured as a vertically long rod-shaped member that can move left and right in front of the image display device 7. The first movable gadget 14 is normally stationary in a retracted position (Figure 1) on the left side of the image display device 7, and can move (advance) from the retracted position toward the right end of the display screen 7a and stop at any advanced position in front of the display screen 7a. The first movable gadget 14 is formed to be approximately the same length as the vertical direction of the image display device 7, and in the advanced position, it covers a part of the image display device 7 from top to bottom.

A second movable board 15 (also called the second movable gadget 15), which is a movable so-called gimmick, is provided above the image display device 7. The second movable gadget 15 is configured so that a rectangular member (decorative part) marked "OARO" can move up and down. The second movable gadget 15 is normally stationary in a retracted position (Fig. 1) above the image display device 7, and can move (advance) downward from the retracted position toward the center of the display screen 7a and come to rest at an advanced position in front of the display screen 7a. The second movable gadget 15 covers a part of the image display device 7 when stopped at the advanced position.

A stage section 11 is formed below the image display device 7. The stage section 11 has a shape that can guide game balls rolling on the upper surface of the stage section 11 to a first starting hole 20 described below. A warp section 12 is provided at the lower left of the image display device 7. The warp section 12 has an entrance section through which game balls flow and an exit section through which game balls flow out, and causes game balls that flow in from the entrance section to flow out from the exit section to the stage section 11.

The fixed winning device (center) 19 is disposed below the image display device 7 in the game area 3, and is equipped with a first starting hole (first starting winning hole, first ball entry hole, fixed starting hole) 20, which always allows the game ball to enter with a constant ease. The entry of a game ball into the first starting hole 20 triggers the drawing of a lottery for a first special symbol (jackpot lottery). In other words, the entry of a game ball into the first starting hole 20 triggers the acquisition of a jackpot random number, etc., and the determination of a jackpot, etc.

The normal variable winning device (electric chute) 22 is disposed below the first starting hole 20 in the game area 3, and includes a second starting hole (second starting winning hole, second ball entry hole, variable starting hole) 21. The entry of a game ball into the second starting hole 21 triggers the drawing of a lottery for a second special symbol (a big win drawing). The electric chute 22 includes a movable member 23 in front of the second starting hole 21, and the second starting hole 21 is opened and closed by the operation of the movable member 23. The movable member 23 is driven by an electric chute solenoid 24 (Fig. 3). The second starting hole 21 is capable of receiving a game ball when the movable member 23 is in an open state. It is sufficient that the electric chute 22 allows a ball to enter the second starting hole 21 more easily when the movable member 23 is in an open state than when it is in a closed state, and may allow a ball to enter the second starting hole 21 when the movable member 23 is in a closed state.

The gate (through chucker) 28 is located above the first big prize device (first attacker) 31 in the game area 3, and is configured to allow the game ball to pass through. The passage of the game ball through the gate 28 triggers a normal pattern lottery that determines whether or not the electric chute 22 will open. In other words, the passage of the game ball through the gate 28 triggers the acquisition of a normal pattern random number (winning random number) and a win determination, etc.

Here, "special symbol lottery" refers to a process in which, when a game ball enters the first starting hole 20 or the second starting hole 21, a random number for determining the special symbol is obtained, and this obtained random number is compared with a value corresponding to a predetermined "jackpot" to determine whether or not there is a jackpot. The lottery result of this "jackpot" is not immediately notified to the player, but the first special symbol display device 41a or the second special symbol display device 41b described below displays a variable special symbol, and after a predetermined variable time has elapsed, the special symbol corresponding to the lottery result is displayed stationary (determined display), and the lottery result is notified to the player. The image display device 7 plays a pattern matching game in which the performance symbols are displayed in a variable manner in synchronization with the variable display of the special symbols, and this pattern matching game more effectively notifies the player of the lottery result of the jackpot.

"Drawing a normal pattern" refers to the process of obtaining a random number for determining the normal pattern when the gaming ball passes through gate 28, and comparing this obtained random number with a value corresponding to a predetermined "win" to determine whether or not there is a win. The result of the drawing for the normal pattern is also not immediately announced when the gaming ball passes through gate 28. Instead, a fluctuating display of the normal pattern is performed on normal pattern display 42 (described below), and after a predetermined fluctuating time has elapsed, the normal pattern corresponding to the drawing result is displayed as a confirmed one (lit or unlit), and the player is notified of the drawing result.

The first large prize winning device (first attacker, first special variable prize winning device) 31 is located above and to the right of the first starting hole 20 in the game area 3, and includes a first large prize winning hole (first special prize winning hole) 30, a V area 39, a non-V area 70, and a V opening and closing member 71. The first large prize winning hole 30 includes an opening and closing member (first special prize winning hole opening and closing member) 32 that allows or prevents the reception of game balls by a swing-type opening and closing action. The opening and closing member 32 is driven by a first large prize winning hole solenoid 33 (Figure 3). Game balls can enter the first large prize winning hole 30 when the opening and closing member 32 is in the open state.

The first large prize winning device 31 is equipped with a V area (specific area) 39, a V area sensor 39a (Figure 3), a non-V area (non-specific area) 70, a non-V area sensor 70a (Figure 3), a first large prize winning port sensor 30a (Figure 3), a V opening/closing member 71, and a V opening/closing member solenoid 73 (Figure 3). The V area (specific area) 39 and the non-V area (non-specific area) 70 are configured inside the first large prize winning device 31 as areas through which a game ball that has passed through the first large prize winning port 30 can pass. The first large prize winning port sensor 30a is disposed upstream of the V area 39 and the non-V area 70, and detects the entry of a game ball into the first large prize winning port 30. The V area sensor 39a is disposed in the V area 39, and detects the passage of a game ball into the V area 39. The non-V area sensor 70a is disposed in the non-V area 70 and detects the passage of the game ball into the non-V area 70. The V opening/closing member 71 distributes the game ball that has passed through the first large winning opening 30 to either the V area 39 or the non-V area 70. The V opening/closing member solenoid 73 drives the V opening/closing member 71. The V opening/closing member 71 is configured to rotate (clockwise and counterclockwise with respect to the game board 2), and when the V opening/closing member solenoid 73 is energized, it rotates counterclockwise from the origin position to distribute the game ball to the V area 39 in a first state (rotating state), and when the V opening/closing member solenoid 73 is not energized, it is located at the origin and distributes the game ball to the non-V area 70 in a second state (stopped state). In addition, the V-opening member 71 may be configured to move in a left-right direction with respect to the game board 2, as long as it has a function of distributing the game ball that has passed through the first large winning opening 30 to either the V area 39 or the non-V area 70, without being limited to rotational movement. That is, when the V-opening member solenoid 73 is energized, it is in a retreat state (first state) in which the game ball is distributed to the V area 39, and when the V-opening member solenoid 73 is not energized, it is in an advance state (second state) in which the game ball is distributed to the non-V area 70. In addition, in the gaming machine 1, the passage of the game ball into the V area 39 is a trigger for transition to a high probability state described later. In other words, the V area 39 is a probability variable operation port. On the other hand, the non-V area 70 is not a probability variable operation port. The first large winning device 31 of this embodiment further includes a first large winning device discharge sensor (not shown) that counts the number of game balls discharged from the first large winning device 31. The first big prize device discharge sensor is installed at the point where the V area 39 and the non-V area 70 join downstream, and counts the number of game balls that pass through the V area sensor 39a or the non-V area sensor 70a.

The second large prize winning device (second attacker, second special variable prize winning device) 36 is located above and to the right of the first large prize winning opening 30 in the game area 3, and is equipped with a second large prize winning opening (second special prize winning opening) 35. The second large prize winning opening 35 is equipped with an opening/closing member (second special prize winning opening opening/closing member, movable member) 37 that prevents or allows the reception of game balls by swinging open and closed. The opening/closing member 37 is driven by a second large prize winning opening solenoid 38 (Figure 3). Game balls can enter the second large prize winning opening 35 when the opening/closing member 37 is in the open state.

The large prize opening start port 17 is located above the first large prize opening 30 in the game area 3, and the first large prize opening 30 opens when the game ball passes through. However, the game machine 1 does not have to be equipped with the large prize opening start port 17.

The general winning opening 27 is provided at the bottom of the play area 3. The outlet 16 is provided at the bottom of the play area 3, and ejects game balls that do not win at any of the winning openings out of the play area 3. The indicators 40 are located near the center of the right side of the play board 2. Details of the indicators 40 will be described later. The general winning opening 29 is located at the bottom right of the play area 3, adjacent to the right side of the first large winning opening 30.

The game area 3 has a left game area 3A on the left side of the center in the left-right direction, and a right game area 3B on the right side. A hitting style in which the game ball is shot so that it flows down the left game area 3A is called a "left hit". On the other hand, a hitting style in which the game ball is shot so that it flows down the right game area 3B is called a "right hit". The game machine 1 is configured so that a left hit can aim for winning at the first start port 20. On the other hand, a right hit can aim for passing through the gate 28 and winning at the second start port 21, the first large winning port 30, and the second large winning port 35.

Figure 2 is an enlarged view of the displays 40. The displays 40 include a first special symbol display 41a, a second special symbol display 41b, a normal symbol display 42, a first special symbol reserved display 43a, a second special symbol reserved display 43b, and a normal symbol reserved display 44. The first special symbol display 41a variably displays the first special symbol. The second special symbol display 41b variably displays the second special symbol. The normal symbol display 42 variably displays the normal symbol. The first special symbol reserved display 43a displays the number of reserved activations (first special symbol reserved) of the first special symbol display 41a. The second special symbol reserved display 43b displays the number of reserved activations (second special symbol reserved) of the second special symbol display 41b. The regular symbol reserve display 44 displays the number of reserved activations (regular symbol reserves) stored in the regular symbol display 42. The variable display of the first special symbol is triggered by the entry of a game ball into the first starting hole 20. The variable display of the second special symbol is triggered by the entry of a game ball into the second starting hole 21. Hereinafter, the first special symbol and the second special symbol are collectively referred to as "special symbols." The first special symbol display 41a and the second special symbol display 41b are collectively referred to as "special symbol display 41." The first special symbol reserve display 43a and the second special symbol reserve display 43b are collectively referred to as "special symbol reserve display 43."

The special symbol display 41 variably displays (varies) the special symbol (identification information) and then displays it in a stopped state to notify the result of a lottery (special symbol winning lottery, jackpot lottery) based on winning at the first start port 20 or the second start port 21. The special symbol (stopped symbol, special symbol derived and displayed as a display result of the variable display) that is stopped is one special symbol selected from a plurality of types of special symbols by the special symbol lottery. If the stopped symbol is a special symbol (jackpot symbol) of a predetermined jackpot stopping mode, a special game (jackpot game) is played in which the first jackpot opening 30 or the second jackpot opening 35 is opened in an opening pattern according to the type of jackpot symbol that is stopped and displayed (the type of jackpot that has been won). The opening patterns of the jackpot openings (first jackpot opening 30 and second jackpot opening 35) in the special game will be described later.

The special symbol display 41 is composed of eight LEDs arranged side by side, and displays a special symbol according to the result of the special symbol winning lottery depending on the lighting state of the LEDs. For example, if a big win (one of the multiple types of big wins described below) is won, the big win symbol is displayed with the first, second, fifth, and sixth LEDs from the left lit, as in "○○●●○○●●" (○: lit, ●: off). If it is a loss, a loss symbol is displayed with only the rightmost LED lit, as in "●●●●●●●○". A mode in which all LEDs are turned off as a loss symbol may be adopted. Before the special symbol is displayed in a stopped state, the special symbol is displayed in a variable display (variable display) for a predetermined variable time. The variable display mode may be, for example, each LED is lit so that light flows repeatedly from left to right. The variable display mode is not limited to the above mode and can be any lighting mode as long as each LED is not displayed in a stopped state (lighting display in a specific mode). For example, the variable display mode may be all LEDs flashing at once.

In the gaming machine 1, when a game ball enters the first start hole 20 or the second start hole 21, the values (numerical information) of various random numbers such as the jackpot random number obtained for that entry are temporarily stored in the special pattern reservation memory area 85 (Fig. 5). Specifically, if the game ball enters the first start hole 20, it is stored in the first special pattern reservation memory area 85a (Fig. 5) as the first special pattern reservation, and if the game ball enters the second start hole 21, it is stored in the second special pattern reservation memory area 85b (Fig. 5) as the second special pattern reservation. There is an upper limit to the number of special pattern reservations that can be stored in each special pattern reservation memory area 85, and in this embodiment, the upper limit is four for both the first special pattern reservation memory area 85a and the second special pattern reservation memory area 85b. The special pattern reservation stored in the special pattern reservation memory area 85 is consumed when it becomes possible to variably display the special pattern based on the special pattern reservation. "Consuming a special reserved symbol" means determining the jackpot random number or the like corresponding to the reserved symbol, and executing a variable display of a special symbol to indicate the result of the determination. Therefore, in the gaming machine 1, even if the variable display of a special symbol based on the winning of a game ball into the first starting hole 20 or the second starting hole 21 cannot be performed immediately after the winning, that is, even if a winning occurs during the variable display of the special symbol or during the execution of a special game, the right to a jackpot lottery for that winning can be reserved up to a predetermined number. The number of reserved special symbols is displayed on the reserved special symbol display 43. The first reserved special symbol display 43a and the second reserved special symbol display 43b are each composed of, for example, four LEDs. Each reserved special symbol display 43 displays the number of reserved special symbols by lighting the LEDs for the number of reserved special symbols.

The variable display of the normal symbol is triggered by the passage of the game ball through the gate 28. The normal symbol display 42 variably displays (varies) the normal symbol, and then displays it in a stopped state to notify the result of the normal symbol lottery based on the passage of the game ball through the gate 28. The stopped normal symbol (normal symbol stop symbol, normal symbol derived and displayed as the display result of the variable display) is one normal symbol selected from a plurality of normal symbols by the normal symbol lottery. If the normal symbol stop symbol is a specific normal symbol determined in advance (a normal symbol in a predetermined stopping state, i.e., a normal winning symbol), an auxiliary game is performed in which the second start hole 21 is opened in an opening pattern corresponding to the current game state. The opening pattern of the second start hole 21 will be described later.

The normal pattern display 42 is composed of two LEDs, and displays a normal pattern according to the result of the normal pattern lottery depending on the lighting state of the LEDs. For example, if the lottery result is a win, a normal winning pattern with both LEDs lit is displayed as "○○" (○: lit, ●: off). If the lottery result is a loss, a normal loss pattern with only the right LED lit is displayed as "●○". A mode in which all LEDs are turned off as a normal loss pattern may be adopted. Before the normal pattern is displayed as a stopped pattern, the normal pattern is displayed as a variable pattern for a predetermined variable time. The variable display mode may be, for example, both LEDs alternately lit. The variable display mode is not limited to the above mode and can be any lighting mode as long as each LED is not displayed as a stopped pattern (lighting display in a specific mode). For example, the variable display mode may be all LEDs flashing at once.

In the gaming machine 1, when a game ball passes through the gate 28, the value of the normal pattern random number (winning random number) acquired for that passage is temporarily stored as a normal pattern reserve in the normal pattern reserve memory area 86 (Figure 5). There is an upper limit to the number of normal pattern reserves that can be stored in the normal pattern reserve memory area 86, and the upper limit in this embodiment is four. The normal pattern reserve stored in the normal pattern reserve memory area 86 is consumed when it becomes possible to variable display the normal pattern based on that normal pattern reserve. The consumption of the normal pattern reserve means determining the normal pattern random number (winning random number) corresponding to that normal pattern reserve and executing the variable display of the normal pattern to show the result of the determination. Therefore, in the gaming machine 1, even if the variable display of the normal pattern based on the passage of the game ball through the gate 28 cannot be performed immediately after the passage, that is, even if a prize is won during the execution of the variable display of the normal pattern or during the execution of the auxiliary game, the right to draw the normal pattern for that passage can be reserved up to a predetermined number. The number of reserved maps is displayed on the reserved map display 44. The reserved map display 44 is composed of, for example, four LEDs, and displays the number of reserved maps by lighting up the LEDs corresponding to the number of reserved maps.

2. Electrical Configuration of the Gaming Machine The electrical configuration of the gaming machine 1 will be described with reference to Figs. 3 and 4. Fig. 3 is a block diagram showing the electrical configuration of the main control board of the gaming machine 1. Fig. 4 is a block diagram showing the electrical configuration of the sub-control board of the gaming machine 1. The gaming machine 1 includes a main control board 80 (Fig. 3), a sub-control board 90 (Fig. 4), an image control board 100 (Fig. 4), a lamp control board 107 (Fig. 4), a sound control board 106 (Fig. 4), and a payout control board 110 (Fig. 3). The main control board 80 is a game control board that controls game profits such as big win lottery and transition of game state, and constitutes a main control unit. The sub-control board 90 is a performance control board that controls performances executed as the game progresses, and constitutes a sub-control unit together with the image control board 100, the lamp control board 107, and the sound control board 106. The sub-control unit can be configured by at least including the sub-control board 90.

The main control board 80 includes a game control microcomputer 81 and an input/output circuit 87. The game control microcomputer 81 is a one-chip microcomputer mounted on the main control board 80, and controls the progress of the game on the gaming machine 1 according to a program. The game control microcomputer 81 includes a main ROM 83 that stores programs for controlling the progress of the game, a main RAM 84 used as a work memory, and a main CPU 82 that executes the programs stored in the main ROM 83. Details of the data stored in the main ROM 83 and the details of the storage area provided in the main RAM 84 will be described later. The main ROM 83 may be configured as an external ROM. The game control microcomputer 81 transmits and receives data to and from other boards, etc. via an input/output circuit (I/O port section) 87. The input/output circuit 87 may be built into the game control microcomputer 81.

Various sensors and solenoids are connected to the main control board 80 via an input/output circuit 87 and a relay board 88. The main control board 80 receives signals output from each sensor and outputs signals to each solenoid. Examples of sensors connected via the relay board 88 include the large prize opening start port sensor 17a, the first start port sensor 20a, the second start port sensor 21a, the gate sensor 28a, the first large prize port sensor 30a, the second large prize port sensor 35a, the V area sensor 39a, the non-V area sensor 70a, and the normal prize port sensors 27a and 29a. Examples of solenoids connected via the relay board 88 include the electric chute solenoid 24, the first large prize port solenoid 33, the second large prize port solenoid 38, and the V opening and closing member solenoid 73. The large prize opening start opening sensor 17a is provided inside the large prize opening start opening 17 and detects a game ball that has entered the large prize opening start opening 17. The first start opening sensor 20a is provided inside the first start opening 20 and detects a game ball that has entered the first start opening 20. The second start opening sensor 21a is provided inside the second start opening 21 and detects a game ball that has entered the second start opening 21. The gate sensor 28a is provided inside the gate 28 and detects a game ball that has passed through the gate 28. The first large prize opening sensor 30a is provided inside the first large prize opening 30 and detects a game ball that has entered the first large prize opening 30. The second large prize opening sensor 35a is provided inside the second large prize opening 35 and detects a game ball that has entered the second large prize opening 35. The V-area sensor 39a is provided in the V-area 39 inside the first large prize opening 30, and detects game balls that have passed through the V-area 39. The non-V-area sensor 70a is provided in the non-V-area 70 inside the first large prize opening 30, and detects game balls that have passed through the non-V-area 70. The regular prize opening sensor 27a is provided inside the regular prize opening 27, and detects game balls that have won in the regular prize opening 27. The regular prize opening sensor 29a detects game balls that have passed through the regular prize opening 29. The electric chute solenoid 24 drives the movable member 23 of the electric chute 22. The first large prize opening solenoid 33 drives the opening/closing member 32 of the first large prize device 31. The second large prize opening solenoid 38 drives the opening/closing member 37 of the second large prize device 36. The V-shaped opening/closing member solenoid 73 drives the V-shaped opening/closing member 71 of the first big prize device 31.

The main control board 80 is connected to the displays 40 via an input/output circuit 87. The game control microcomputer 81 controls the display of the first special symbol display 41a, the second special symbol display 41b, the normal symbol display 42, the first special symbol reserved display 43a, the second special symbol reserved display 43b, and the normal symbol reserved display 44.

The payout control board 110 is connected to the main control board 80 via the input/output circuit 87. The main control board 80 transmits various commands to the payout control board 110 and receives signals from the payout control board 110 to monitor payouts. The payout control board 110 is connected to the prize ball payout device 120, the loan ball payout device 130, and the card unit 135, and is connected to the launch device 112 via the launch control circuit 111. The prize ball payout device 120 pays out prize balls. The payout control board 110 drives the prize ball motor 121 of the prize ball payout device 120 based on a signal from the game control microcomputer 81 to pay out prize balls. The paid out prize balls are detected by the prize ball sensor 122 for counting. The loan ball payout device 130 pays out loan balls. The payout control board 110 drives the ball-lending motor 131 of the ball-lending device 130 to dispense balls based on a signal from a card unit 135 connected to the gaming machine 1. The dispensed balls are detected by a ball-lending sensor 132 for counting. The card unit 135 is disposed adjacent to the gaming machine 1 and outputs information about ball lending based on information such as an inserted prepaid card. The launching device 112 includes a handle 60 (FIG. 1), a launching motor 113, a touch switch 114, and a launching volume 115. When the player operates the handle 60, the launching device 112 detects the contact of the handle 60 by the touch switch 114 and detects the amount of rotation of the handle 60 by the launching volume 115. Then, the launching motor 113 is driven so that the game balls are launched with a strength corresponding to the magnitude of the detection signal of the launching volume 115.

The sub-control board 90 (Figure 4) is connected to the main control board 80 via an input/output circuit 87. The main control board 80 transmits various commands to the sub-control board 90. The connection between the main control board 80 and the sub-control board 90 is a one-way communication connection that only allows signals to be transmitted from the main control board 80 to the sub-control board 90. In other words, a unidirectional circuit (not shown, for example, a circuit using a diode) is interposed between the main control board 80 and the sub-control board 90 as a means for restricting the direction of communication.

The sub-control board 90 includes a performance control microcomputer 91 and an input/output circuit 95. The performance control microcomputer 91 is a one-chip microcomputer mounted on the sub-control board 90, and controls the performance of the game of the gaming machine 1 according to a program. The performance control microcomputer 91 includes a sub-ROM 93 that stores programs for controlling the performance as the game progresses, a sub-RAM 94 used as a work memory, and a sub-CPU 92 that executes the programs stored in the sub-ROM 93. Details of the data stored in the sub-ROM 93 and details of the storage area provided in the sub-RAM 94 will be described later. The sub-ROM 93 may be configured as an external ROM. The performance control microcomputer 91 transmits and receives data to and from other boards, etc. via an input/output circuit (I/O port section) 95. The input/output circuit 95 may be built into the performance control microcomputer 91. The sub-control board 90 is connected to an image control board 100, an audio control board 106, a lamp control board 107, and a relay board 108 via an input/output circuit 95.

The image control board 100 includes an image control microcomputer 101, an input circuit 105a, and an output circuit 105b. The image control microcomputer 101 is a one-chip microcomputer mounted on the image control board 100, and controls the display of the image display device 7 and the sub-display screen 64 according to a program. The image control microcomputer 101 includes a CPU 102, a ROM 103, and a RAM 104. In addition to a program for performing display control, the ROM 103 stores still image data and video data to be displayed on the image display device 7 and the sub-display screen 64, specifically image data such as characters, items, figures, letters, numbers, and symbols (including performance patterns) and background images. The RAM 104 is used as a memory for expanding the image data. The CPU 102 executes the program stored in the ROM 103. Based on commands received from the main control board 80, the performance control microcomputer 91 causes the image control microcomputer 101 to control the display of the image display device 7 and the sub-display screen 64. Based on instructions from the performance control microcomputer 91, the image control microcomputer 101 reads image data from the ROM 103 and controls the display based on the read image data.

The speaker 67 is connected to the audio control board 106, and the performance control microcomputer 91 outputs voice, music, sound effects, etc. from the speaker 67 via the audio control board 106 based on commands received from the main control board 80. Sound data such as voice output from the speaker 67 is stored in the sub-ROM 93 of the sub-control board 90. The audio control board 106 may be equipped with a CPU, and the CPU may execute audio control based on commands. Furthermore, the audio control board 106 may be equipped with a ROM, and audio data may be stored in the ROM. The speaker 67 may also be connected to the image control board 100, and the CPU 102 of the image control board 100 may execute audio control. Furthermore, audio data may be stored in the ROM 103 of the image control board 100.

The lamp control board 107 is connected to the frame lamp 66, the board lamp 5, the first movable role 14, the second movable role 15, and the frame movable role 69, and controls them. The performance control microcomputer 91 controls the lighting of lamps such as the frame lamp 66 and the board lamp 5 through the lamp control board 107 based on commands received from the main control board 80. In other words, the performance control microcomputer 91 creates light pattern data (data that determines the on/off and light color, etc., also called lamp data) that determines the light emission mode of lamps such as the frame lamp 66 and the board lamp 5, and controls the light emission of lamps such as the frame lamp 66 and the board lamp 5 according to the light emission pattern data. The data stored in the sub-ROM 93 of the sub-control board 90 is used to create the light emission pattern data. The performance control microcomputer 91 operates the first movable role 14, the second movable role 15, and the frame movable role 69 based on commands received from the main control board 80. The performance control microcomputer 91 creates operation pattern data (drive data) that determines the operation modes of the first movable role 14, the second movable role 15, and the frame movable role 69, and controls the operation of the first movable role 14, the second movable role 15, and the frame movable role 69 according to the operation pattern data. Data stored in the sub-ROM 93 is used to create the operation pattern data. The lamp control board 107 may be equipped with a CPU, and the CPU may be made to control the lighting of the lamps and the operation of the movable roles 14 and 15 based on commands. In this case, the lamp control board 107 may be equipped with a ROM, and data regarding the light emission pattern and operation pattern may be stored in the ROM.

The relay board 108 is connected to a performance button detection switch 63a and a select button detection switch 68a. The performance button detection switch 63a detects that the performance button 63 (Figure 1) has been pressed. When the performance button 63 is pressed, a switch signal is output from the performance button detection switch 63a to the sub-control board 90 via the relay board 108. A vibration motor is also attached to the performance button detection switch 63a, which can be driven in response to a signal from the relay board 108 to vibrate the performance button 63. The select button detection switch 68a detects that the select button 68 has been pressed. In addition, a sword component detection switch that detects that the sword component 65 has been searched is also connected to the relay board 108.

3. Data Structure of the Gaming Machine The data structure of the gaming machine 1 will be described with reference to Figures 5 and 6. Figure 5 (A) is a diagram for explaining a table stored in the main ROM 83. Figure 5 (B) is a diagram for explaining a storage area provided in the main RAM 84. Figure 6 (A) is a diagram for explaining a table stored in the sub ROM 93. Figure 6 (B) is a diagram for explaining a storage area provided in the sub RAM 94.

The main ROM 83 (FIG. 5(A)) stores a jackpot determination table T1, a reach determination table T2, a normal symbol hit determination table T3, a normal symbol change pattern determination table T4, a jackpot type determination table T5, a change pattern determination table T6, an electric chute opening pattern determination table T7, a large prize opening pattern determination table T8, and a V-shaped opening member opening pattern determination table T9. These determination tables are referenced by the game control microcomputer 81 in the main control main process (described later) executed by the game control microcomputer 81. The specific contents of each determination table will be described later.

The main RAM 84 (FIG. 5B) includes a command set area 84a, a flag set area 84b, a counter set area 84c, a special action status set area 84d, a special chart reserved memory area 85, and a normal chart reserved memory area 86. The command set area 84a is an area (output buffer) in which commands output from the main control unit to the sub-control unit in the main control main process (described later) are set, and a pre-determination command, reserved ball number command, fluctuation start command, fluctuation stop command, opening command, round designation command, ending command, game state designation command, V pass command, customer waiting standby command, etc. are set. The flag set area 84b is an area in which flags indicating the state of the gaming machine and the game state are set in the main control main process (described later), and a jackpot flag, a jackpot end flag, a first winning flag, a second winning flag, a ceiling flag, a V flag, a probability change flag, a time reduction flag, etc. are set. The counter set area 84c is an area where counters used in the main control main process (described later) are set, and a random number counter, a round counter, a ceiling counter, a probability change counter, a time reduction counter, etc. are set. The special operation status set area 84d is an area where a status in the special operation process described later is set. The special pattern reserved memory area 85 includes a first special pattern reserved memory area 85a in which the first special pattern reserved is stored, and a second special pattern reserved memory area 85b in which the second special pattern reserved is stored. The first special pattern reserved memory area 85a is provided with a first memory area, a second memory area, a third memory area, and a fourth memory area for storing random number groups (reserved information) such as random numbers for special patterns corresponding to the first, second, third, and fourth pieces of the first special pattern reserved, respectively. The second special symbol reserved memory area 85b is provided with a first memory area, a second memory area, a third memory area, and a fourth memory area for storing random number groups (reserved information) corresponding to the first, second, third, and fourth pieces of the second special symbol reserved. The normal symbol reserved memory area 86 is provided with a first memory area, a second memory area, a third memory area, and a fourth memory area for storing random number groups (reserved information) such as normal symbol random numbers (winning random numbers) corresponding to the first, second, third, and fourth pieces of the normal symbol reserved. In addition to the above areas, the main RAM 84 is provided with a winning type set buffer in which special symbol stop symbol data is set, and a drive data buffer in which drive data for driving the movable parts 14, 15 and the frame movable body 600 is set. The information stored in the main RAM 84 is not cleared even when the power of the gaming machine 1 is turned off or on, and is maintained as it is. That is, the above commands, flags, counters, status information, and pending information do not change state even when the power is turned OFF or ON, and the information is maintained. Meanwhile, the information stored in the main RAM 84 is reset by clearing the RAM of the gaming machine 1. When reset, the ceiling flag is set to "ON" as the initial state of the flags, and the other flags are set to "OFF". Also, the ceiling counter is set to "500" as the initial state of the counters, and the other counters are set to "0".

The sub-ROM 93 (FIG. 6(A)) stores a look-ahead performance pattern determination table T51, a core performance pattern determination table T52, a chance-up performance pattern determination table T53, and a stop symbol pattern determination table T54. These determination tables are referenced by the performance control microcomputer 91 in the sub-control main process (described later) executed by the performance control microcomputer 91. The specific contents of each determination table will be described later.

The sub-RAM 94 (FIG. 6B) is provided with a command memory area 94a, a performance command set area 94b, a pre-judgment information memory area 94c, and a counter set area 94d. The command memory area 94a is an area (input buffer) in which commands input from the main control unit side in the sub-control main processing (described later) are stored, and pre-judgment commands, reserved ball number commands, fluctuation start commands, fluctuation stop commands, opening commands, round designation commands, ending commands, game state designation commands, V pass commands, customer waiting standby commands, etc. are stored. The performance command set area 94b is an area (output buffer) in which commands output from the sub-control board 90 to the image control board 100, the sound control board 106, the lamp control board 107, and the relay board 108 in the sub-control main processing (described later) are set, and a fluctuation performance start command, a pre-fluctuation end command, a fluctuation performance end command, an opening performance start command, a round performance start command, an ending performance start command, etc. are set. The pre-judgment information storage area 94c stores pre-judgment information in the sub-control main process (described later). The counter set area 94d is an area in which counters used in the sub-control main process (described later) are set, and a random number counter, a first special reserved effect counter, a second special reserved effect counter, a normal reserved effect counter, a ceiling effect counter, an overnight effect counter, a probability change effect counter, a time-saving effect counter, and the like are set. Of the information stored in the sub-RAM 94, the information other than the overnight effect counter is not cleared even when the power supply of the gaming machine 1 is turned OFF or ON, and is maintained as it is. In other words, the above-mentioned commands, counters other than the overnight effect counter, and pre-judgment information are not changed even when the power supply is turned OFF or ON, and the information is maintained. The overnight effect counter is reset by turning the power supply of the gaming machine 1 OFF or ON, and 0 is set as the initial state. The information stored in the sub-RAM 94 is reset by the RAM clear of the gaming machine 1. When reset, the ceiling effect counter is set to 500 as the initial state of the counters, and the other counters are set to 0.

Figure 7 is a diagram for explaining various random numbers used in the gaming machine 1. Figure 7 (A) shows the random numbers acquired by the gaming control microcomputer 81 on the main control unit side, and Figure 7 (B) shows the random numbers acquired by the performance control microcomputer 91 on the sub-control unit side. The gaming control microcomputer 81 is configured to acquire a "jackpot random number", a "jackpot type random number", a "reach random number", a "variable pattern random number", and a "normal pattern random number (win random number)" at the timing described below. The "jackpot random number" is a random number used in the lottery to determine whether or not there is a jackpot (jackpot determination), and takes a value in the range of 0 to 65535. The "jackpot type random number" is a random number used in the lottery to determine the type of jackpot that has been won (jackpot type determination), and takes a value in the range of 0 to 127. The "reach random number" is a random number used to determine whether or not a reach occurs in the performance pattern change performance that indicates the result when the jackpot judgment is a miss, and takes a value in the range of 0 to 127. The reach is a state in which there is only one performance pattern remaining among multiple performance patterns (decorative patterns) that are displayed in a changing manner, and depending on which of the performance patterns that are displayed in a changing manner are displayed as stopped, a combination of performance patterns that indicates a jackpot win (for example, a "7↓7" state). Note that the performance pattern that is displayed in a stopped state in the reach state may be displayed as if it is flickering on the display screen 7a. The "change pattern random number" is a random number used to determine a change pattern including a change time, and takes a value in the range of 0 to 127. The "normal pattern random number (win random number)" is used in a lottery (normal pattern lottery) to determine whether or not to play an auxiliary game that opens the electric chute 22. The normal pattern random number takes a value in the range of 0 to 255. The "jackpot random number", "jackpot type random number", "reach random number", and "variation pattern random number" are obtained based on the ball entering the start port (first start port 20 or second start port 21). The random number group obtained based on the ball entering the first start port 20 is stored in the first special symbol reserve memory area 85a, and the random number group obtained based on the ball entering the second start port 21 is stored in the second special symbol reserve memory area 85b. The "normal symbol random number (winning random number)" is obtained based on the passage through the gate 28. The obtained normal symbol random number value is stored in the normal symbol reserve memory area 86.

The performance control microcomputer 91 is configured to acquire a "look-ahead performance random number" and a "chance up random number" at the timing described below. The "look-ahead performance random number" is a random number used to determine the look-ahead performance during a variable performance, and takes a value in the range of 0 to 127. The "chance up random number" is a random number used to determine the chance up performance during a variable performance, and takes a value in the range of 0 to 127. The "look-ahead performance random number" is acquired based on a pre-determination command being output from the main control unit to the sub-control unit. The acquired random value group is stored in the sub-RAM 94. The "chance up random number" is acquired based on a variation start command being output from the main control unit to the sub-control unit. The acquired random value group is stored in the sub-RAM 94.

Figure 8 is a diagram for explaining the judgment tables T1 to T4. Figure 8 (A) shows a diagram for explaining the big win judgment table T1, Figure 8 (B) shows a diagram for explaining the reach judgment table T2, Figure 8 (C) shows a diagram for explaining the normal pattern hit judgment table T3, and Figure 8 (D) shows a diagram for explaining the normal pattern change pattern judgment table T4.

The jackpot determination table T1 is a table that the game control microcomputer 81 refers to in the main control main process (described later) to determine whether the acquired jackpot random number (any of 0 to 65535) corresponds to a "jackpot" or a "miss." In FIG. 8(A), it is shown that in the "normal probability state," if the jackpot random number is "0 to 164," it is determined to be a "jackpot," and if the jackpot random number is "a number other than 0 to 164 (165 to 65535)," it is determined to be a "miss." Also, in the "high probability state," if the jackpot random number is "0 to 649," it is determined to be a "jackpot," and if the jackpot random number is "a number other than 0 to 649 (650 to 65535)," it is determined to be a "miss." The contents of the "normal probability state" and "high probability state" will be described later.

The reach judgment table T2 is a table that the game control microcomputer 81 refers to in the main control main process (described later) to judge whether the acquired reach random number value (any of 0 to 127) corresponds to "reach" or "no reach". In FIG. 8 (B), it is shown that in the "non-time-saving state", when the reach random number value is "0 to 13", it is judged as "reach", and when the reach random number value is "a number other than 0 to 13 (14 to 127)", it is judged as "no reach". Also, in the "time-saving state", when the reach random number value is "0 to 5", it is judged as "reach", and when the reach random number value is "a number other than 0 to 5 (6 to 127)", it is judged as "no reach". The contents of the "time-saving state" and "non-time-saving state" will be described later. In the reach judgment table T2, it is more difficult to reach when losing in the time-saving state than in the non-time-saving state. This is because when in the time-saving mode, more no-reach misses with short fluctuation times are selected, speeding up the consumption of reserved special charts.

The normal symbol hit determination table T3 is a table that the game control microcomputer 81 refers to in the main control main process (described later) to determine whether the acquired normal symbol random number value (any of 0 to 255) corresponds to a "hit" or a "miss." FIG. 8(C) shows that in the "non-time-saving state," if the normal symbol random number value is "0 to 2," it is determined to be a "hit," and if the normal symbol random number value is "a number other than 0 to 2 (3 to 255)," it is determined to be a "miss." It also shows that in the "time-saving state," if the normal symbol random number value is "0 to 254," it is determined to be a "hit," and if the normal symbol random number value is "a number other than 0 to 254 (255)," it is determined to be a "miss."

The normal symbol change pattern determination table T4 is a table that is referenced by the game control microcomputer 81 in the main control main process (described later) to determine how many seconds the normal symbol change time is depending on the game state (non-time-saving state or time-saving state). Figure 8 (D) shows that in the "non-time-saving state", the normal symbol change time is determined to be "30 seconds", and in the "time-saving state", the normal symbol change time is determined to be "1 second".

Figure 9 is a diagram for explaining the jackpot type determination table T5. The jackpot type determination table T5 is a table that the game control microcomputer 81 refers to in the main control main process (described later) to determine the "jackpot type" and the "type of special symbol" according to the acquired jackpot type random number value (any of 0 to 127). In Figure 9, when the first special symbol (special symbol 1) is selected in the lottery, if the jackpot type random number value is "0 to 24", the jackpot type is determined to be "16RV passing jackpot" and the special symbol 1 stopping symbol (special symbol stopping symbol) is determined to be "jackpot symbol 1". If the jackpot type random number value is "25 to 49", the jackpot type is determined to be "16RV passing jackpot" and the special symbol stopping symbol is determined to be "jackpot symbol 2". When the jackpot type random number value is "50-55", the jackpot type is determined to be "16R (actually 15R) V-scheduled jackpot" and the special symbol stopping pattern is determined to be "jackpot pattern 3". When the jackpot type random number value is "56-67", the jackpot type is determined to be "16R (actually 13R) V-scheduled jackpot" and the special symbol stopping pattern is determined to be "jackpot pattern 4". When the jackpot type random number value is "68-127", the jackpot type is determined to be "16R (actually 13R) V-scheduled non-passing jackpot" and the special symbol stopping pattern is determined to be "jackpot pattern 5". On the other hand, when the second special symbol (special symbol 2) is selected, if the jackpot type random number value is "0-82", the jackpot type is determined to be "16RV scheduled jackpot", and the special symbol 2 stopping symbol (special symbol stopping symbol) is determined to be "jackpot symbol 1". If the jackpot type random number value is "83-127", the jackpot type is determined to be "16R (actually 13R) V scheduled non-passing jackpot", and the special symbol stopping symbol is determined to be "jackpot symbol 5". By referring to the jackpot type determination table T5, the "special symbol stopping symbol data" corresponding to the special symbol stopping symbol, the "opening (OP) command", the "round designation command", and the "ending (ED) command" of the special game can also be specified. The specific details of the "16RV scheduled to pass jackpot", "16R (actually 15R) V scheduled to pass jackpot", "16R (actually 13R) V scheduled to pass jackpot", and "16R (actually 13R) V not scheduled to pass" will be described later.

Figure 10 is a diagram for explaining the fluctuation pattern determination table T6 in the non-time-saving state. Figure 11 is a diagram for explaining the fluctuation pattern determination table T6 in the time-saving state. The fluctuation pattern determination table T6 is a table that is referenced by the game control microcomputer 81 in the main control main process (described later) to determine the fluctuation pattern according to the acquired fluctuation pattern random number value (0 to 127). Figure 10 shows, for example, that in the non-time-saving state, when a ball enters the first starting hole 20, the jackpot determination table T1 determines it as a "miss", the reach determination table T2 determines it as a "reach", the number of reserved balls is "1 to 2", and the fluctuation pattern random number value is "0 to 60", the fluctuation pattern is determined as "P7". In FIG. 11, for example, when the second starting hole 21 is won in the time-saving state, the jackpot determination table T1 determines it as a "jackpot", the jackpot type determination table T5 determines it as a "jackpot expected to pass 16RV", and the fluctuation pattern random number value is "0 to 10", the fluctuation pattern is determined as "P61". As shown in FIG. 10 and FIG. 11, when the fluctuation pattern is determined, the fluctuation time is also determined. In addition, when a reach occurs, it is also determined whether the reach will be a normal reach or a super reach (SP reach). A super reach is a reach performance in which the fluctuation time after the reach is longer than that of a normal reach. Here, five types of super reaches (SP1, SP2, SP3, SP4, SP5) with different fluctuation times are set. In SP1 to SP3, it is executed in a developed manner after a normal reach. The difference between SP1 to SP5 may be, for example, the presence or absence of a pseudo consecutive.

Figure 12 is a diagram for explaining the electric chute opening pattern determination table T7. The electric chute opening pattern determination table T7 is a table that the game control microcomputer 81 refers to in the main control main process (described later) to determine the opening pattern of the electric chute 22 depending on the game state (non-time-saving state or time-saving state). In Figure 12 (A), it is shown that in the "non-time-saving state", the opening pattern of the electric chute 22 is determined to be "opening pattern 11", and in the "time-saving state", the opening pattern is determined to be "opening pattern 12". In Figure 12 (B), the contents of opening pattern 11 and opening pattern 12 are shown. In opening pattern 11, the electric chute 22 is opened once and for an opening time of 0.2 seconds. In opening pattern 12, the electric chute 22 is opened three times, with an opening time of 2.0 seconds per time, and an interval (opening interval) of 1.0 seconds. However, if a predetermined number of game balls are won (a maximum of 10 balls), the electric chute 22 will close even if there is still time left to open it.

Figure 13 is a diagram for explaining the large prize opening pattern determination table T8. The large prize opening pattern determination table T8 is a table that is referred to by the game control microcomputer 81 in the main control main process (described later) to determine the opening pattern of the first large prize opening 30 and the second large prize opening 35 according to the special symbol stop pattern data (Figure 9). In Figure 13 (A), when the special symbol stop pattern data is "11H", "12H", or "21H", the opening pattern of the first large prize opening 30 and the second large prize opening 35 is determined to be "opening pattern 21", when the special symbol stop pattern data is "14H", "15H", or "22H", the opening pattern is determined to be "opening pattern 22", and when the special symbol stop pattern data is "13H", the opening pattern is determined to be "opening pattern 23". In Figure 13 (B), the contents of the opening pattern 21, the opening pattern 22, and the opening pattern 23 are shown. In the opening pattern 21, the first large prize opening 30 is opened once and for an opening time of 29.5 seconds (long opening) in the 1st to 13th and 15th rounds, and the second large prize opening 35 is opened once and for an opening time of 29.5 seconds (long opening) in the 14th and 16th rounds. In the opening pattern 22, the first large prize opening 30 is opened once and for an opening time of 29.5 seconds (long opening) in the 1st to 13th rounds, the second large prize opening 35 is opened once and for an opening time of 0.1 seconds (short opening) in the 14th and 16th rounds, and the first large prize opening 30 is opened once and for an opening time of 0.1 seconds (short opening) in the 15th round. In opening pattern 23, the first large prize opening 30 is opened once and for an opening time of 29.5 seconds (long opening) in rounds 1 to 13 and 15, the second large prize opening 35 is opened once and for an opening time of 0.1 seconds (short opening) in round 14, and the second large prize opening 35 is opened once and for an opening time of 29.5 seconds (long opening) in round 16. However, if a predetermined number of game balls have won (prescribed number of winnings, up to 9 balls), the first large prize opening 30 and the second large prize opening 35 are closed even if there is still opening time remaining.

14 is a diagram for explaining the V-shaped opening/closing member opening pattern determination table T9. The V-shaped opening/closing member opening pattern determination table T9 is a table that is referred to by the game control microcomputer 81 in the main control main process (described later) to determine the opening pattern of the V-shaped opening/closing member 71 according to the special symbol stop pattern data (FIG. 9). In FIG. 14(A), when the special symbol stop pattern data is "11H", "12H", or "21H", the opening pattern of the V-shaped opening/closing member 71 is determined to be "opening pattern 31", when the special symbol stop pattern data is "13H", the opening pattern is determined to be "opening pattern 32", when the special symbol stop pattern data is "14H", the opening pattern is determined to be "opening pattern 33", and when the special symbol stop pattern data is "15H" or "22H", the opening pattern is determined to be "opening pattern 34". 14B shows the contents of the opening pattern 31, the opening pattern 32, the opening pattern 33, and the opening pattern 34. In the opening pattern 31, when the first prize is won in the first large prize opening 30 in the 2nd, 4th, 6th, and 8th rounds, the V-shaped opening/closing member 71 is opened in a short time of 0.1 seconds. In the 10th and 12th rounds, when the first prize is won in the first large prize opening 30, the V-shaped opening/closing member 71 is opened in a short time of 0.1 seconds, and when the second prize is won, the V-shaped opening/closing member 71 is opened in a long time of up to 31.5 seconds. In the opening pattern 32, when the first prize is won in the first large prize opening 30 in the 2nd, 4th, 6th, and 12th rounds, the V-shaped opening/closing member 71 is opened in a short time of 0.1 seconds. In the 8th and 10th races, when the first prize is won in the first large prize opening 30, the V-shaped opening/closing member 71 is opened in a short time of 0.1 seconds, and when the second prize is won, the V-shaped opening/closing member 71 is opened in a long time of up to 31.5 seconds. In the opening pattern 33, when the first prize is won in the first large prize opening 30 in the 2nd and 6th races, the V-shaped opening/closing member 71 is opened in a short time of 0.1 seconds, and when the second prize is won, the V-shaped opening/closing member 71 is opened in a long time of up to 31.5 seconds. In the 4th, 8th, 10th, and 12th races, the V-shaped opening/closing member 71 is opened in a short time of 0.1 seconds, when the first prize is won in the first large prize opening 30. In the opening pattern 34, when the first winning ball is won in the first large winning hole 30 in the 2nd, 4th, 6th, 8th, 10th and 12th rounds, the V-shaped opening member 71 is short-opened with an opening time of 0.1 seconds.
The port will be opened.

4. Description of jackpots, etc. In the gaming machine 1, there are "jackpots" and "losses" as a result of the jackpot lottery (special symbol lottery). In the case of a "jackpot", a "jackpot symbol" is displayed on the special symbol display 41. In the case of a "loss", a "loss symbol" is displayed on the special symbol display 41. When a jackpot is won, a "jackpot game" is executed in which the jackpot winning holes (the first jackpot winning hole 30 and the second jackpot winning hole 35) are opened in an opening pattern according to the type of the special symbol (type of jackpot) that is displayed. The jackpot game is an example of a special game. The jackpot game includes a plurality of round games (unit opening games), an opening (OP) before the first round game starts, and an ending (ED) after the last round game ends. Each round game starts with the end of the opening or the end of the previous round game, and ends with the start of the next round game. The time (interval time) for closing the big prize opening between rounds of play is included in the open round of play before that closure.

There are several types of jackpots. The types of jackpots are as shown in FIG. 9. Here, the types of jackpots are roughly divided into two types: "V-passing jackpot" and "V-non-passing jackpot". A "V-passing jackpot" is a jackpot that activates the opening/closing member 32, the opening/closing member 37, and the V-opening/closing member 71 in an opening pattern (V-passing opening pattern) that allows the game ball to pass through to the V area 39 during the jackpot game. Here, a jackpot with special stop pattern data of 11H to 14H, 21H corresponds to a "V-passing jackpot (probable jackpot)". When the combination of the opening pattern of the opening/closing member 32 and the opening/closing member 37 shown in FIG. 13 and the opening pattern of the V-opening/closing member 71 shown in FIG. 14 is (opening pattern 21: opening pattern 31), (opening pattern 22: opening pattern 33), or (opening pattern 23: opening pattern 32), the game ball can pass through to the V area 39 during the jackpot game. A "V non-passing scheduled jackpot (normal jackpot)" is a jackpot that activates the opening/closing members 32, 37, and 71 in an opening pattern (V non-passing scheduled opening pattern) that makes it impossible for the game ball to pass through to the V area 39 during the jackpot game. Here, a jackpot with special stop pattern data of 15H and 22H corresponds to a "V non-passing scheduled jackpot". When the combination of the opening pattern of the opening/closing members 32 and 37 shown in FIG. 13 and the opening pattern of the V opening/closing member 71 shown in FIG. 14 is (opening pattern 22: opening pattern 34), it becomes impossible for the game ball to pass through to the V area 39 during the jackpot game. As described above, the opening pattern 22 of the opening/closing members 32 and 37 serves as both the V passing scheduled opening pattern and the V non-passing scheduled opening pattern.

The "V passing jackpot" includes the "16RV passing jackpot", the "16R (actually 13R) V passing jackpot", and the "16R (actually 15R) V passing jackpot". The "16RV passing jackpot" has a total of 16Rs. The first large prize opening 30 is opened for a maximum of 29.5 seconds per R in Rs 1 to 13 and R 15. The second large prize opening 35 is opened for a maximum of 29.5 seconds per R in Rs 14 and 16 (Figure 13: opening pattern 21). In Rs 10 and 12, the V opening/closing member 71 is opened for a long time (Figure 14: opening pattern 31), and it is easy to pass through to the V area 39 in the first large prize opening 30.

In the "16R (actually 13R) V-pass scheduled jackpot", the total number of rounds is 16R, but the actual total number of rounds is 13R. In other words, from 1R to 13R, the first large prize opening 30 is opened for a maximum of 29.5 seconds per R, but in 15R, the first large prize opening 30 is opened for only 0.1 seconds per R, and in 14R and 16R, the second large prize opening 35 is opened for only 0.1 seconds per R (Figure 13: Opening pattern 22). Therefore, in this "16R (actually 13R) V-pass scheduled jackpot", the opening time of the large prize opening is extremely short from 14R to 16R, making it a round in which no prize balls are expected. In other words, the "16R (actually 13R) V-pass scheduled jackpot" is a jackpot of 13R in effect. In rounds 2 and 6, the V-shaped opening and closing member 71 is opened long (Figure 14: opening pattern 33), making it easy to pass through to the V-shaped area 39 inside the first large winning opening 30.

In the "16R (actually 15R) V-pass scheduled jackpot", the total number of rounds is 16R, but the actual total number of rounds is 15R. In other words, from 1R to 13R and 15R, the first large prize opening 30 is opened for a maximum of 29.5 seconds per R, and in 16R, the second large prize opening 35 is opened for a maximum of 29.5 seconds per R, but in 14R, the second large prize opening 35 is only opened for 0.1 seconds per R (Figure 13: Opening pattern 23). Therefore, in this "16R (actually 15R) V-pass scheduled jackpot", the opening time of the large prize opening is extremely short in 14R, making it a round in which no prize balls are expected to be won. In other words, the "16R (actually 15R) V-pass scheduled jackpot" is a jackpot of 15R in effect. In rounds 8 and 10, the V-shaped opening and closing member 71 is opened long (Figure 14: opening pattern 32), making it easy to pass through to the V-shaped area 39 inside the first large prize opening 30.

The "V non-passing scheduled jackpot" is a "16R (actually 13R) V non-passing scheduled jackpot" of opening pattern 22, in which the total number of rounds is 16R, but the actual total number of rounds is 13. In other words, from 1R to 13R, the first large prize winning hole 30 is opened for a maximum of 29.5 seconds per round, but in 15R, the first large prize winning hole 30 is opened for only 0.1 seconds per round, and in 14R and 16R, the second large prize winning hole 35 is opened for only 0.1 seconds per round (Figure 13: opening pattern 22). Therefore, in this "16R (actually 13R) V non-passing scheduled jackpot", the opening time of the large prize winning hole is extremely short from 14R to 16R, making it a round in which no prize balls are expected. In other words, the "16R (actually 13R) V non-passing scheduled jackpot" is a jackpot of essentially 13R. At 2R, 4R, 6R, 8R, 10R and 12R, the V-shaped opening/closing member 71 is opened, but the opening is a short opening (Figure 14: opening pattern 34), making it nearly impossible for the game ball to pass through the V-shaped area 39 inside the first large winning opening 30.

As is clear from the above explanation, the "16R (actual 13R) V non-passing scheduled jackpot" and the "16R (actual 13R) V passing scheduled jackpot" have the same opening pattern (opening pattern 22) between the first large prize winning opening 30 and the second large prize winning opening 35 (opening member 32 and opening member 37), and only the opening pattern of the V opening and closing member 71 is different (opening pattern 34 and opening pattern 33). As will be described later, the "16R (actual 13R) V non-passing scheduled jackpot" and the "16R (actual 13R) V passing scheduled jackpot" are designed to play a time-saving game (100 times in this example) after the jackpot game ends. In other words, in the "16R (actual 13R) V non-passing scheduled jackpot", it is almost impossible for the game ball to pass through the V area 39 in the first large prize winning opening 30, and the game state after the jackpot becomes a low-probability time-saving state (low-probability high base state). On the other hand, in the "16R (actual 13R) V-passing scheduled jackpot", the game ball can easily pass through the V area 39 in the first big winning port 30, and the game state after the jackpot becomes a high-probability time-saving state (high-probability high-base state). For this reason, it becomes difficult for the player to distinguish between the "16R (actual 13R) V-non-passing scheduled jackpot" and the "16R (actual 13R) V-passing scheduled jackpot", and it becomes difficult to determine whether the game state after the jackpot becomes a low-probability time-saving state (low-probability high-base state) or a high-probability time-saving state (high-probability high-base state). In addition, after the time-saving game ends, the game state becomes a low-probability low-base state (normal state) in the "16R (actual 13R) V-non-passing scheduled jackpot", and the game state becomes a high-probability low-base state that appears to be the normal state in the "16R (actual 13R) V-passing scheduled jackpot". That is, in the "16R (actually 13R) V passing scheduled jackpot", when the game ball passes through the V area 39 in the first large winning port 30, when the time-saving state after the jackpot game ends, the game state becomes a high probability low base state but a latent state in which a high probability is hidden (latent high probability state), and this latent high probability state is difficult for the player to distinguish. That is, the low-probability time-saving state (low-probability high base state) after the jackpot play of "16R (actual 13R) V non-passing jackpot" and "16R (actual 13R) V passing jackpot", the high-probability time-saving state (high-probability high base state) after the jackpot play of "16R (actual 13R) V passing jackpot", and the low-probability low base state after the time-saving end of "16R (actual 13R) V non-passing jackpot" and the high-probability low base state after the time-saving end of "16R (actual 13R) V passing jackpot" are performed in a manner that is difficult for the player to distinguish.

As shown in FIG. 9, the distribution rate of the jackpot in the drawing for the first special symbol (special symbol 1) is 68/128 (about 53%) for the V-passing jackpot and 60/128 (about 47%) for the V-non-passing jackpot. In contrast, the distribution rate of the jackpot in the drawing for the second special symbol (special symbol 2) is 83/128 (about 64.8%) for the V-passing jackpot and 45/128 (about 35.2%) for the V-non-passing jackpot. In this way, the gaming machine 1 is set up so that the jackpot lottery (lottery for the second special symbol) held when the gaming ball enters the second starting hole 21 is more advantageous to the player than the jackpot lottery (lottery for the first special symbol) held when the gaming ball enters the first starting hole 20.

5. Description of the gaming state The gaming state of the gaming machine 1 will be described. The gaming control microcomputer 81 can execute "probability variation control" and "variation time reduction control" for the special symbols displayed on the special symbol display 41 and the normal symbols displayed on the normal symbol display 42, respectively. Here, the state in which the gaming control microcomputer 81 performs probability variation control on the special symbols of the special symbol display 41 is called a "high probability state (high probability state, probability variation state, probability change state)," and the state in which the probability variation control is not performed is simply called a "normal probability state (non-high probability state, low probability state, normal state)." The gaming control microcomputer 81 realizes the high probability state by performing a jackpot determination using a jackpot determination table (FIG. 8(A)) in which the number of jackpot random numbers determined to be a jackpot is greater in the high probability state than in the normal probability state, as the probability variation control of the special symbols. Therefore, the high probability state has a higher probability of jackpot than the normal probability state. In other words, when the game control microcomputer 81 is executing probability fluctuation control on the special pattern of the special pattern display device 41, the probability that the display result (stopped pattern) of the variable display of the special pattern by the special pattern display device 41 will be a jackpot pattern is higher than when the probability fluctuation control is not being executed.

In addition, the state in which the game control microcomputer 81 controls the time-shortening of the special symbol of the special symbol display 41 is called the "time-shortening state", and the state in which the time-shortening of the special symbol is not controlled is simply called the "non-time-shortening state". In the time-shortening state, the time-shortening of the special symbol (the time from the start of the display of the special symbol to the derivation of the display result) is shorter than in the non-time-shortening state. The game control microcomputer 81 judges the variation pattern using the variation pattern judgment table T6 (FIGS. 10 and 11) that is determined so that a variation pattern with a short variation time is selected more often than in the non-time-shortening state in the time-shortening state. In other words, when the game control microcomputer 81 is executing the variation time-shortening control for the special symbol of the special symbol display 41, a short variation time is more likely to be selected as the variation time of the variable display of the special symbol compared to when the variation time-shortening control is not executed. As a result, in the time-shortening state, the pace of consumption of the special symbol reservation is faster, and effective winning (winning that can be stored as the special symbol reservation) at the starting port is more likely to occur. This allows players to aim for a big win while playing smoothly. The game control microcomputer 81 may simultaneously execute probability fluctuation control and fluctuation time reduction control for the special symbols on the special symbol display 41, or may execute only one of them.

The game control microcomputer 81 executes the probability fluctuation control and the fluctuation time shortening control for the normal pattern of the normal pattern display 42 in synchronization with the fluctuation time shortening control for the special pattern of the special pattern display 41. That is, the game control microcomputer 81 executes the probability fluctuation control and the fluctuation time shortening control for the normal pattern in the time-shortening state, but does not execute them in the non-time-shortening state. The game control microcomputer 81 performs the hit judgment (judgment of the normal pattern) using the normal pattern hit judgment table T3 (FIG. 8(C)) in which the number of normal pattern random number values (hit random number values) judged as a hit is higher in the time-shortening state than in the non-time-shortening state, as the probability fluctuation control for the normal pattern. Therefore, in the time-shortening state, the hit probability is higher than in the normal pattern normal probability state. In other words, when the game control microcomputer 81 is executing probability fluctuation control on the normal pattern of the normal pattern display device 42, the probability that the display result (stop pattern) of the variable display of the normal pattern by the normal pattern display device 42 will be a winning pattern is higher than when the probability fluctuation control is not executed. In the time-saving state, the fluctuation time of the normal pattern is shorter than that in the non-time-saving state. Here, the fluctuation time of the normal pattern is 30 seconds in the non-time-saving state, but is 1 second in the time-saving state (FIG. 8 (D)). Furthermore, in the time-saving state, the opening time of the electric chute 22 in the auxiliary game is longer than that in the non-time-saving state (FIG. 12). That is, the game control microcomputer 81 is executing the opening time extension control on the electric chute 22. In addition, in the time-saving state, the number of times the electric chute 22 is opened in the auxiliary game is greater than that in the non-time-saving state (FIG. 12). That is, the game control microcomputer 81 is executing the opening number increase control on the electric chute 22. In a situation where the game control microcomputer 81 is executing the probability fluctuation control and the fluctuation time shortening control for the normal symbol of the normal symbol display 42, and the opening time extension control and the opening number increase control for the electric chute 22, the electric chute 22 is opened more frequently and the game balls enter the second start hole 21 more frequently than when these controls are not executed. As a result, the base, which is the ratio of the number of winning balls to the number of shot balls, becomes higher. Therefore, the state in which these controls are executed is called a "high base state", and the state in which they are not executed is called a "low base state". In the high base state, it is possible to aim for a jackpot without significantly reducing the number of game balls in hand. The high base state is a state in which the so-called electric support control (control that supports the entry into the second start hole 21 by the electric chute 22) is executed. The high base state (electric support control state) does not have to execute all of the above controls. That is, by executing one or more of the following controls, it is sufficient that the electric chute 22 is more likely to open than when the control is not executed: probability fluctuation control for the normal symbol on the normal symbol display 42, fluctuation time reduction control for the normal symbol on the normal symbol display 42, opening time extension control for the electric chute 22, and opening count increase control for the electric chute 22. Also, the high base state (electric support control state) may be controlled independently without being associated with the time-saving state.

In the gaming machine 1, the game state after a jackpot game due to winning a V-passing jackpot is a high probability state, a time-saving state, and a high base state if the game passes through the V area 39 during the jackpot game. This game state is particularly called a "high probability high base state" or a "high probability time-saving state." Specifically, the jackpots that result in a high probability high base state after a jackpot game are the "16RV-passing jackpot," the "16R (effectively 15R) V-passing jackpot," and the "16R (effectively 13R) V-passing jackpot" among the jackpot types shown in FIG. 9. For the "16RV-passing jackpot" and the "16R (effectively 15R) V-passing jackpot," the high probability high base state ends when the next jackpot (next jackpot) is won after the jackpot game and the jackpot game is executed. In the "16R (actually 13R) V-passing scheduled jackpot", the high probability high base state ends when the special pattern is displayed a predetermined number of times (here, 100 times) after the jackpot game, resulting in a high probability low base state (latent probability change state), or when the next jackpot (next jackpot) is won and the jackpot game is played. In addition, the game state after the jackpot game due to the winning of the V non-passing scheduled jackpot is a normal probability state (non-high probability state, i.e., low probability state), time-saving state, and high base state if the V area 39 is not passed during the jackpot game (almost never). This game state is particularly called the "low probability high base state" and the "low probability time-saving state". Specifically, the jackpot in which the game state after the jackpot game becomes a low probability high base state is the "16R (actually 13R) V non-passing scheduled jackpot" among the jackpot types shown in FIG. 9. In this jackpot, the low probability high base state ends when the special symbol is displayed a predetermined number of times (here, 100 times) after the jackpot game, or when the next jackpot (next jackpot) is won and the jackpot game is played. When playing the gaming machine 1 for the first time, the game state after the power is turned on is a normal probability state, a non-time-saving state, and a low base state (non-electric support control state). This game state is particularly called a "low probability low base state." The low probability low base state is sometimes called a "normal game state" or a "low probability non-time-saving state (also simply called a non-time-saving state)." In addition, the state during which a special game (jackpot game) is being played is sometimes called a "special game state (jackpot game state)." Furthermore, the state controlled to at least one of the high probability state and the high base state is sometimes called a "specific game state."

In a high base state such as a high probability high base state or a low probability high base state, it is more advantageous to advance the game by hitting the ball to the right game area 3B (Fig. 1). This is because the electric support control makes it easier to open the electric chute 22 than in the low base state, and it is easier to enter the second start hole 21 than the first start hole 20. For this reason, in a high base state, the ball is hit to the right to enter the second start hole 21 while passing through the gate 28, which is the trigger for the normal pattern lottery. This allows more start wins (entry into the start hole) to be obtained than by hitting to the left. In addition, in the gaming machine 1, the game is played by hitting to the right even during a jackpot game. On the other hand, in a low base state, it is more advantageous to advance the game by hitting the ball to the left game area 3A (Fig. 1) by hitting to the left. Because electric support control is not being executed, the electric chute 22 is less likely to open than in the high base state, making it easier to win in the first starting hole 20 than in the second starting hole 21. For this reason, in the low base state, the ball is hit from the left in order to get the game ball to win in the first starting hole 20. This allows more start wins to be obtained than if the ball was hit from the right.

6. Operation of the game control microcomputer 81 The operation of the game control microcomputer 81 provided on the main control board 80 (Fig. 3) will be described with reference to Figs. 15 to 34. Counters, flags, status, buffers, etc. that appear in the description of the operation of the game control microcomputer 81 are provided in the main RAM 84. The game control microcomputer 81 corresponds to the win/lose determination means (Fig. 23) and the win/lose advance determination means (Figs. 18 and 19).

[Main control main processing]
FIG. 15 is a flow chart of the main control process. When the power supply of the gaming machine 1 is turned on, the gaming control microcomputer 81 reads out a program for executing the main control process from the main ROM 83. In the main control process, the gaming control microcomputer 81 first performs an initial setting (step S001). In the initial setting, for example, the main CPU 82 is set, and various flags, statuses, counters, etc. are reset. The initial value of the flag is the ceiling flag, i.e., "1", i.e., "ON", and the initial value of the other flags is "0", i.e., "OFF". The initial value of the status is "1". The initial value of the counter is the ceiling counter, i.e., "500", and the other counters are "0". The initial setting is performed only once after the power supply is turned on, and is not performed thereafter.

After the initial setting, the game control microcomputer 81 prohibits interrupts from the interrupt process (step S002) and performs the normal and special symbol main random number update process (step S003). In this normal and special symbol main random number update process, the game control microcomputer 81 updates the various random number counter values (jackpot random number, jackpot type random number, reach random number, variable pattern random number, normal symbol random number) shown in FIG. 7(A) by adding 1. When each random number counter value reaches the set upper limit value, it returns to "0" and is added again. Note that the initial value of each random number counter may be a value other than "0" and may be changed randomly. Also, each random number may be a so-called hardware random number generated using a known random number generation circuit consisting of a counter IC or the like.

After the normal and special symbol main random number update process, the game control microcomputer 81 allows the interrupt process to be interrupted (step S004). While the interrupt is allowed, the main timer interrupt process (step S005) can be executed. The main timer interrupt process is executed based on an interrupt pulse repeatedly input to the main CPU 82 at a predetermined cycle (for example, every 4 msec). That is, the main timer interrupt process is executed at a predetermined cycle (for example, every 4 msec). Then, from the end of the main timer interrupt process to the start of the next main timer interrupt process, the update process of various counter values by the normal and special symbol main random number update process is repeatedly executed. Note that if an interrupt pulse is input to the main CPU 82 when the interrupt is prohibited, the main timer interrupt process does not start immediately, but starts after the interrupt is allowed.

[Main timer interrupt processing]
FIG. 16 is a flow chart of the main timer interrupt process (FIG. 15: step S005). In the main timer interrupt process, the game control microcomputer 81 first performs a random number update process (step S101). Specifically, the game control microcomputer 81 updates various random number counter values shown in FIG. 7 (A). This random number update process is the same as the normal and special pattern main random number update process performed in the main control main process (FIG. 15) described above. That is, the update process of various random number counter values is performed both during the execution period of the main timer interrupt process and during other periods (the period from the end of the main timer interrupt process to the start of the next main timer interrupt process).

After the random number update process, the game control microcomputer 81 performs input processing (step S102). In the input process, the game control microcomputer 81 reads the detection signals detected by the various sensors attached to the gaming machine 1, and sets payout data for paying out prize balls according to the type of winning hole in the output buffer of the main RAM 84. The various sensors are, for example, the first start hole sensor 20a, the second start hole sensor 21a, the first large winning hole sensor 30a, the second large winning hole sensor 35a, the normal winning hole sensor 27a, and the normal winning hole sensor 29a (Figure 3).

After the input process, the game control microcomputer 81 executes the start hole sensor detection process (step S103), the normal operation process (step S104), the special operation process (step S105), the V-area sensor detection process (step S106), and the reserved ball number process (step S107) in that order. Details of these processes will be described later. After the reserved ball number process, the game control microcomputer 81 performs the output process (step S108). In the output process, the game control microcomputer 81 outputs the commands and the like set in the command set area 84a of the main RAM 84 in each of the above processes to the sub-control board 90. After the output process, the game control microcomputer 81 performs other processes (step S109). In the other processes, for example, the second special chart reserved display 43b is controlled to a display mode indicating the number based on the reserved ball number of the special chart 2 described later, and the first special chart reserved display 43a is controlled to a display mode indicating the number based on the reserved ball number of the special chart 1.

[Starting port sensor detection process]
FIG. 17 is a flow chart of the start-hole sensor detection process (FIG. 16: step S103). The game control microcomputer 81 first judges whether or not a game ball has passed through the gate 28 (step S201). This judgment is made based on whether or not a game ball has been detected by the gate sensor 28a. If the game ball has not passed through the gate 28 (step S201: NO), the process skips to step S205. If the game ball has passed through the gate 28 (step S201: YES), the game control microcomputer 81 judges whether or not the number of reserved balls for normal symbols is "4 (upper limit value)" (step S202). The number of reserved balls for normal symbols is the number of reserved normal symbols, and more specifically, is the value of a counter that counts the number of reserved normal symbols provided in the main RAM 84. If the number of reserved balls for normal symbols is "4" (step S202: YES), the process skips to step S205. If the number of reserved normal symbol balls is "3" or less (step S202: NO), "1" is added to the number of reserved normal symbol balls (step S203), and then a normal symbol random number acquisition process is performed (step S204). Here, the game control microcomputer 81 acquires the value of the normal symbol random number counter (FIG. 7: value of label-TRND-H), and stores the acquired random number value in the first to fourth memory areas of the normal symbol reserved memory area 86 of the main RAM 84 according to the current number of reserved normal symbol balls.

In step S205, the game control microcomputer 81 judges whether or not a game ball has entered the second start hole 21. This judgment is made based on whether or not a game ball has been detected by the second start hole sensor 21a. If a game ball has not entered the second start hole 21 (step S205: NO), the process skips to step S210. If a game ball has entered (step S205: YES), the game control microcomputer 81 judges whether or not the number of reserved balls in the special chart 2 is "4 (upper limit value)" (step S206). The number of reserved balls in the special chart 2 is the number of reserved second special charts, and more specifically, is the value of a counter that counts the number of reserved second special charts provided in the main RAM 84. If the number of reserved balls in the special chart 2 is "4" (step S206: YES), the process skips to step S210. If the number of reserved balls for the special chart 2 is "3" or less (step S206: NO), "1" is added to the number of reserved balls for the special chart 2 (step S207), and then a special chart 2 related random number acquisition process is performed (step S208). Here, the value of the jackpot random number counter (Figure 7: value of label-TRND-A), the value of the jackpot type random number counter (Figure 7: value of label-TRND-AS), the value of the reach random number counter (Figure 7: value of label-TRND-RC), and the value of the variation pattern random number counter (Figure 7: value of label-TRND-T1) are acquired. The game control microcomputer 81 stores the acquired random number group in the storage area corresponding to the current number of reserved balls for the special chart 2 among the first to fourth storage areas of the second special chart reservation storage area 85b. The game control microcomputer 81 temporarily stores (holds) the acquired random number group in a buffer (pre-determination buffer) different from the second special chart reserve memory area 85b for the special chart 2 pre-determination process (FIG. 18) described later. After the special chart 2 related random number acquisition process, the game control microcomputer 81 performs the special chart 2 pre-determination process (step S209). The details of the special chart 2 pre-determination process will be described later.

In step S210, the game control microcomputer 81 judges whether or not a game ball has entered the first starting hole 20. This judgment is made based on whether or not a game ball has been detected by the first starting hole sensor 20a. If a game ball has not entered the first starting hole 20 (step S210: NO), this process is terminated. If a game ball has entered the first starting hole 20 (step S210: YES), the game control microcomputer 81 judges whether or not the number of reserved balls in the special chart 1 is "4 (upper limit value)" (step S211). The number of reserved balls in the special chart 1 is the number of reserved first special charts, and more specifically, is the value of a counter that counts the number of reserved first special charts provided in the main RAM 84. If the number of reserved balls in the special chart 1 is "4" (step S211: YES), this process is terminated. If the number of reserved balls for special chart 1 is "3" or less (step S211: NO), "1" is added to the number of reserved balls for special chart 1 (step S212), and then a random number acquisition process related to special chart 1 is performed (step S213). Here, as in the above-mentioned special chart 2 related random number acquisition process (step S208), the value of the jackpot random number counter, the value of the jackpot type random number counter, the value of the reach random number counter, and the value of the variation pattern random number counter are acquired. The game control microcomputer 81 stores the acquired random number group in a storage area corresponding to the current number of reserved balls for special chart 1 among the first to fourth storage areas of the first special chart reservation storage area 85a. The game control microcomputer 81 also temporarily stores (holds) the acquired random number group in a buffer (pre-determination buffer) different from the first special chart reservation storage area 85a for the special chart 1 pre-determination process (FIG. 19) described later. After the special chart 1 related random number acquisition process, the game control microcomputer 81 performs special chart 1 pre-determination process (step S214). The details of the special chart 1 pre-determination process will be described later.

[Special Drawing 2 Pre-Decision Processing]
FIG. 18 is a flow chart of the special chart 2 pre-judgment process (FIG. 17: step S209). The game control microcomputer 81 first judges whether the probability of winning is ON or not (step S301). If the probability of winning is OFF (step S301: NO), this process is terminated. That is, if the probability of winning is OFF, the pre-judgment is not performed. On the other hand, if the probability of winning is ON, the game control microcomputer 81 performs the jackpot pre-judgment by referring to the high probability state table in the jackpot judgment table T1 (FIG. 8) (step S302). Specifically, the game control microcomputer 81 first acquires the jackpot random number value as the judgment value temporarily stored in the pre-judgment buffer by the special chart 2 related random number acquisition process (FIG. 17: step S208). Next, the game control microcomputer 81 performs a pre-determination of whether or not a jackpot has been generated by using the jackpot determination table T1 (FIG. 8) and the jackpot random number value to be referred to. Here, since the probability state is high (the probability variable flag is ON), the game control microcomputer 81 performs a pre-determination of whether or not a jackpot has been generated by referring to the table for the high probability state (the jackpot determination value is "0" to "649") in the jackpot determination table T1. That is, when the jackpot random number value is "0" to "649", the pre-determination is a "jackpot", and when it is any other value, the pre-determination is a "miss". In this embodiment, the pre-determination is performed by using the jackpot determination table T1 used in the jackpot determination process (FIG. 23) to be described later. However, in another embodiment, the pre-determination may be performed by using a jackpot determination table for pre-determination different from the jackpot determination table T1.

If the result of the jackpot pre-determination is "miss" (step S304: NO), the process skips to step S306. On the other hand, if the result of the jackpot pre-determination is "jackpot" (step S304: YES), the game control microcomputer 81 performs a jackpot type pre-determination (step S305). In the jackpot type pre-determination, the game control microcomputer 81 first acquires a jackpot type random number value as a determination value temporarily stored in the pre-determination buffer by the special chart 2 related random number acquisition process (FIG. 17: step S208). Next, the game control microcomputer 81 performs a pre-determination of the jackpot type based on the acquired jackpot type random number value and the jackpot type determination table T5 (FIG. 9). Here, regardless of whether the jackpot type random number value is "0" to "127", the pre-determination is "16RV expected to pass jackpot". In this embodiment, the pre-determination is performed using the jackpot type determination table T5 used in the jackpot determination process (FIG. 23) described later, but in other embodiments, the pre-determination may be performed using a jackpot type determination table for pre-determination that is different from the jackpot type determination table T5.

In step S306, the game control microcomputer 81 performs a pre-determination of the fluctuation pattern. Specifically, the game control microcomputer 81 first obtains the fluctuation pattern random number value and the reach random number value as the judgment value temporarily stored in the pre-determination buffer by the special chart 2 related random number acquisition process (FIG. 17: step S208). Next, since the time-saving state (time-saving flag is ON) is in effect here, the game control microcomputer 81 refers to the fluctuation pattern determination table T6 for the time-saving state (FIG. 11) and specifies the fluctuation pattern from the jackpot pre-determination result of step S304, the reach pre-determination result obtained from the reach random number value, and the fluctuation pattern random number value. In addition, in the fluctuation pattern determination table T6 in FIG. 11, the fluctuation pattern selected may differ depending on the number of reserved balls. Here, it is assumed that all fluctuation patterns that may be selected depending on the number of reserved balls are selected. For example, if a reach or miss is determined in advance based on the jackpot advance determination result and the reach/no reach advance determination result, and the fluctuation pattern random number value is "60", the game control microcomputer 81 selects two patterns: fluctuation pattern "P64" which is selected if the number of reserved balls is "1 to 2", and fluctuation pattern "P68" which is selected if the number of reserved balls is "3 to 4". In this embodiment, the advance determination is performed using the fluctuation pattern determination table T6 used in the fluctuation pattern selection process (FIGS. 24 and 25) described later, but in other embodiments, the advance determination may be performed using a fluctuation pattern determination table for advance determination that is different from the fluctuation pattern determination table T6.

In step S307, the game control microcomputer 81 creates a pre-determination command. The pre-determination command includes the jackpot pre-determination result (in the case of a win, the jackpot type pre-determination result) and the fluctuation pattern pre-determination result. The game control microcomputer 81 sets the created pre-determination command in the command set area 84a of the main RAM 84 (step S308), and ends this process.

[Special Figure 1 Pre-judgment Processing]
FIG. 19 is a flow chart of the special chart 1 pre-judgment process (FIG. 17: step S214). The game control microcomputer 81 first judges whether the probability variable flag is ON or not (step S401). Contrary to the above-mentioned special chart 2 pre-judgment process, if the probability variable flag is ON (step S401: YES), this process is terminated. That is, if the probability variable flag is ON, pre-judgment is not performed. On the other hand, if the probability variable flag is OFF (step S401: NO), the game control microcomputer 81 performs a jackpot pre-judgment by referring to the table for the normal probability state in the jackpot judgment table T1 (FIG. 8) (step S402). Specifically, the game control microcomputer 81 first acquires a jackpot random number value as a judgment value temporarily stored in the pre-judgment buffer by the special chart 1 related random number acquisition process (FIG. 17: step S213). Next, since the state is normal probability (the probability flag is OFF), the game control microcomputer 81 pre-determines whether or not there is a jackpot based on the table for normal probability (the jackpot determination value is "0" to "164") in the jackpot determination table T1. That is, when the jackpot random number value is "0" to "164", it is pre-determined as a "jackpot", and when it is any other value, it is pre-determined as a "miss". Note that the jackpot pre-determination may use a jackpot determination table for pre-determination different from the jackpot determination table T1. The process of steps S404 to S408 is the same as steps S304 to S308 of the special chart 2 pre-determination process (FIG. 18) described above, so the description will be omitted.

[Normal operation processing]
FIG. 20 is a flow chart of the normal operation process (FIG. 16: step S104). The game control microcomputer 81 first judges whether the electric chute 22 is in operation (step S501). If the electric chute 22 is in operation (step S501: YES), the process proceeds to step S520. If the electric chute 22 is not in operation (step S501: NO), the game control microcomputer 81 judges whether the normal pattern is changing (step S502). If the normal pattern is changing (step S502: YES), the process skips to step S508. If the normal pattern is not changing (step S502: NO), the game control microcomputer 81 judges whether the number of reserved balls of the normal pattern is "0" (step S503). If the number of reserved balls is "0" (step S503: YES), the process ends. If the number of reserved balls is 1 or more (step S503: NO), the number of reserved balls of normal symbols is decremented by 1 (step S504). Therefore, when the game ball passes through the gate 28 with the number of reserved balls of normal symbols being "0", the number of reserved balls of normal symbols becomes "1" once in step S203 of the start hole sensor detection process (FIG. 17), and then the reserved balls are consumed in this step S504, and the reserved balls of normal symbols immediately become "0". This is the same for the number of reserved balls of special symbols. That is, in steps S207 and S212 of the start hole sensor detection process (FIG. 17), the reserved balls of special symbols become "1" once, and then the reserved balls are consumed in steps S1404 and S1410 of the special symbol waiting process (FIG. 22) described later, and the reserved balls of special symbols become "0". Next, the game control microcomputer 81 performs a win judgment by referring to the normal symbol win judgment table T3 (FIG. 8(C)) (step S505). Specifically, the game control microcomputer 81 first reads out the normal symbol random number value (win random number value) stored as a judgment value in the first memory area (corresponding to the first normal symbol reserved) of the normal symbol reserved memory area 86. Then, it judges whether or not there is a win by using the normal symbol random number value, the game state (whether or not there is a time-saving state), and the normal symbol win judgment table T3. For example, in the non-time-saving state, if the normal symbol random number value is "0" to "2", it is judged as a "win", and if the normal symbol random number value is other than that, it is judged as a "lose" (see FIG. 8(C)).

Next, the game control microcomputer 81 selects a variation pattern by referring to the normal symbol variation pattern determination table T4 (FIG. 8(D)) (step S506). Specifically, the game control microcomputer 81 first determines the game state (whether or not the game is in a time-saving state), and selects the normal symbol variation time as the normal symbol variation pattern using the game state determination result and the normal symbol variation pattern determination table T4. Here, in the non-time-saving state, the normal symbol variation time is determined to be "30 seconds," and in the time-saving state, the normal symbol variation time is determined to be "1 second" (see FIG. 8(D)). The game control microcomputer 81 sets the selected normal symbol variation pattern to start displaying the normal symbol variation (step S507).

In step S508, the game control microcomputer 81 determines whether the normal symbol fluctuation time has elapsed and ended. The normal symbol fluctuation time is the fluctuation time selected in step S506 (see FIG. 8 (D)). If the fluctuation time has not ended (step S508: NO), the game control microcomputer 81 ends this process. That is, the normal symbol fluctuation display continues. On the other hand, if the fluctuation time has ended (step S508: YES), the game control microcomputer 81 stops the fluctuation display (step S509), and if the above-mentioned hit determination (step S505) is a "miss" (step S510: NO), this process ends. On the other hand, if the above-mentioned hit determination is a "win" (step S510: YES), the game control microcomputer 81 sets the electric chute opening pattern (step S511). The opening pattern of the electric chute 22 is selected by referring to the electric chute opening pattern determination table T7 (Figure 12 (A)). Specifically, the game control microcomputer 81 determines the game state (whether or not it is in a time-saving state), and selects the opening pattern of the electric chute 22 using the game state determination result and the electric chute opening pattern determination table T7. Here, when it is in a non-time-saving state, "opening pattern 11" is selected, and when it is in a time-saving state, "opening pattern 12" is selected. After selecting the opening pattern, the game control microcomputer 81 starts the operation of the electric chute in accordance with the selected opening pattern (step S512), and ends this process.

In the above-mentioned step S501, if the electric chute 22 is in operation (step S501: YES), the game control microcomputer 81 judges whether the closing condition of the electric chute 22 is satisfied (step S520). The closing condition here is that either the number of winning balls in the electric chute 22 has reached a specified maximum number of winning balls (for example, 6 balls) or the operation time of the electric chute 22 has elapsed and it has reached the time to close the electric chute 22. The operation time of the electric chute 22 is the operation time corresponding to the opening pattern selected in step S511. If the closing condition of the electric chute 22 is not satisfied (step S520: NO), the game control microcomputer 81 ends this process. On the other hand, if the closing condition of the electric chute 22 is satisfied (step S520: YES), the game control microcomputer 81 closes (blocks) the electric chute 22 and stops its operation (step S521), and ends this process.

[Special Action Processing]
FIG. 21 is a flow chart of the special operation process (FIG. 16: step S105). Here, the process related to the special symbol display 41 and the big prize device (first big prize device 31 and second big prize device 36) is divided into four stages, and each stage is called "1", "2", "3", and "4" of the "special operation status". When the "special operation status" is "1" (step S1301: YES), the game control microcomputer 81 performs a special symbol standby process (step S1302). In the special symbol standby process, a big win determination, a change pattern selection, and the like are executed. When the "special operation status" is "2" (step S1301: NO, step S1303: YES), a special symbol change process is executed (step S1304). In the special symbol change process, a change stop command is output after the change time has elapsed. When the "special operation status" is "3" (steps S1301, S1303: NO, step S1305: YES), a special symbol determination process is performed (step S1306). In the special symbol determination process, an opening command is output when a jackpot occurs. When the "special operation status" is "4" (steps S1301, S1303, S1305: NO), a special electric device process is performed (step S1308). In the special electric device process, a jackpot game is executed. Details of each of the above processes will be described later. The special operation status is initially set to "1".

[Special symbol standby process]
FIG. 22 is a flowchart of the special symbol waiting process (FIG. 21: step S1302). In the special symbol waiting process, the game control microcomputer 81 first judges whether the number of reserved balls of the special symbol 2 is "0" or not (step S1401). If the number of reserved balls of the special symbol 2 is "0" (step S1401: YES), that is, if the second special symbol reserved memory area 85b does not store a random number group acquired due to winning the second starting hole 21, the process proceeds to step S1407. If the number of reserved balls of the special symbol 2 is "1" or more (step S1401: NO), the game control microcomputer 81 executes a jackpot determination process (step S1402) and a variation pattern selection process (step S1403). Details of these processes will be described later. After the variation pattern selection process, the number of reserved balls of the special symbol 2 is decremented by one (step S1404). Next, the game control microcomputer 81 shifts the storage location of reserved information (various random numbers) stored in the first to fourth storage areas of the second special chart reserved storage area 85b from the current position to the side to be read, and clears the reserved information stored in the farthest place from the side to be read in the second special chart reserved storage area 85b (step S1405). For example, when reserved information is stored in the first to third storage areas, the reserved information stored in the third storage area is cleared, and when reserved information is stored in the first to fourth storage areas, the reserved information stored in the fourth storage area is cleared. By the above steps, the reserved second special charts are consumed in the order in which they were reserved. In this case, on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, the reserved image 9B (the leftmost reserved image 9B among the four reserved images 9B) corresponding to the first storage area of the second special chart reserved storage area 85b is shifted to the reserved consumption image display area side and is displayed as the reserved consumption image 9C. Also, the reserved images 9B (the second, third, and fourth reserved images 9B from the left out of the four reserved images 9B) corresponding to the second to fourth storage areas of the second special symbol reserved storage area 85b are each shifted one position to the left (FIG. 1). This allows the player to recognize that one reserved second special symbol has been consumed. Next, the game control microcomputer 81 performs special symbol 2 variation start processing (step S1406). In the special symbol 2 variation start processing, a variation start command is set in the command set area 84a of the main RAM 84, the variation display of the second special symbol is started, and the variation time timer is set. The variation time timer is set to a variation time determined according to the variation pattern selected in the variation pattern selection processing. Also, the game control microcomputer 81 sets the special operation status to "2". In addition, the fluctuation start command (special chart 2 fluctuation start command) set in the special chart 2 fluctuation start process includes information regarding the special chart stop pattern data set in the jackpot determination process (step S1402) and information regarding the fluctuation pattern set in the fluctuation pattern selection process (step S1403) (including information regarding the fluctuation time).

In step S1401, if the number of reserved balls in the special chart 2 is "0" (step S1401: YES), the game control microcomputer 81 determines whether the number of reserved balls in the special chart 1 is "0" or not (step S1407). If the number of reserved balls in the special chart 1 is "0" (step S1407: YES), that is, if the first special chart reserved memory area 85a does not store a random number group obtained due to winning the first starting hole 20, the process proceeds to step S1413. If the number of reserved balls in the special chart 1 is "1" or more (step S1407: NO), the game control microcomputer 81 executes a jackpot determination process (step S1408) and a variation pattern selection process (step S1409). Details of these processes will be described later. After the variation pattern selection process, the number of reserved balls in the special chart 1 is decremented by one (step S1410). Next, the game control microcomputer 81 shifts the storage location of various random numbers stored in the first to fourth storage areas of the first special chart reserved storage area 85a from the current position to the side to be read, and clears the reserved information stored in the farthest location from the side to be read in the first special chart reserved storage area 85a (step S1411). Through the above steps, the first special chart reserved is consumed in the order in which it was reserved. In this case, on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, the reserved image 9A (the rightmost reserved image 9A out of the four reserved images 9A) corresponding to the first storage area of the first special chart reserved storage area 85a is shifted to the reserved consumption image display area side and displayed as a reserved consumption image 9C. Also, the reserved images 9A (the second, third, and fourth reserved images 9A from the left out of the four reserved images 9A) corresponding to the second to fourth storage areas of the first special chart reserved storage area 85a are each shifted one to the right (FIG. 1). This allows the player to recognize that one first special chart reserved has been consumed. Next, the game control microcomputer 81 performs special symbol 1 variation start processing (step S1412). In the special symbol 1 variation start processing, a variation start command is set in the command set area 84a of the main RAM 84, the variation display of the first special symbol is started, and the variation time timer is set. The variation time timer is set to a variation time determined according to the variation pattern selected in the variation pattern selection processing. In addition, the game control microcomputer 81 sets the special operation status to "2" (step S1406). Note that the variation start command (special symbol 1 variation start command) set in the special symbol 1 variation start processing includes information on the special symbol stop pattern data set in the big win determination processing (step S1408) and information on the variation pattern set in the variation pattern selection processing (step S1409) (including information on the variation time).

In step S1407, if the number of reserved balls for special symbol 1 is "0" (step S1407: YES), the game control microcomputer 81 judges whether the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 is a waiting screen or not (step S1413). The waiting screen is a demo screen for waiting for customers. The game control microcomputer 81 may judge, for example, by the ON/OFF of the demo screen display flag for waiting for customers. If it is a waiting screen (step S1413: YES), this process ends. If it is not a waiting screen (step S1413: NO), the game control microcomputer 81 waits for a predetermined waiting time to elapse, sets a customer waiting waiting command for displaying a waiting scene in the command set area 84a of the main RAM 84 (step S1414), and ends this process. As described above, according to the special symbol waiting process of this embodiment, the variable display of the special symbol based on the first special symbol reservation is executed only when the second special symbol reservation is "0". That is, the consumption of the second reserved special chart is executed in priority to the consumption of the first reserved special chart. Also, according to the jackpot type determination table T5 of this embodiment, the lottery based on the second reserved special chart makes it easier for the player to win a jackpot (a jackpot scheduled to pass V) that is more profitable for the player than the lottery based on the first reserved special chart.

[Jackpot detection process]
FIG. 23 is a flow chart of the jackpot determination process (FIG. 22: steps S1402, S1408). The jackpot determination process for special chart 2 (step S1402) and the jackpot determination process for special chart 1 (step S1408) are similar in process flow, so they will be described together. In the jackpot determination process, the game control microcomputer 81 first determines whether the probability variable flag is ON (step S1501). If the probability variable flag is ON (step S1501: YES), the game control microcomputer 81 performs the jackpot determination by referring to the high probability state table in the jackpot determination table T1 (FIG. 8) (step S1502). Specifically, the game control microcomputer 81 first reads out the jackpot random number value as the determination value. For example, in the jackpot determination process for special chart 2, the jackpot random number value stored in the first storage area (corresponding to the first one of the second special chart reserved) of the second special chart reserved storage area 85b is read out. In the jackpot determination process for special chart 1, the jackpot random number stored in the first storage area (corresponding to the first reserved first special chart) of the first special chart reserved storage area 85a is read. Next, the game control microcomputer 81 determines whether or not a jackpot has occurred by using the jackpot determination table T1 and the jackpot random number value to which it refers. Here, since the probability of a jackpot is high (the probability flag is ON), the jackpot determination is determined based on the table for the high probability state (the jackpot determination value is "0" to "649") in the jackpot determination table T1.

In step S1501, if the probability change flag is OFF (step S1501: NO), the game control microcomputer 81 refers to the table for the normal probability state in the jackpot determination table T1 (FIG. 8) to determine whether or not there is a jackpot (step S1504). Specifically, the game control microcomputer 81 first reads out the jackpot random number value in the same manner as in step S1502. Next, since the normal probability state (the probability change flag is OFF) is in this case, it determines whether or not there is a jackpot based on the table for the normal probability state (the jackpot determination value is "0" to "164") in the jackpot determination table T1.

If the result of the jackpot determination is "jackpot" (steps S1503, S1505: YES), the game control microcomputer 81 turns on the jackpot flag (step S1506) and determines the type of jackpot (step S1507). Specifically, the game control microcomputer 81 first reads out the jackpot type random number value as a determination value. For example, in the jackpot determination process for special chart 2, the jackpot type random number value stored in the first storage area of the second special chart reserved storage area 85b is read out. In the jackpot determination process for special chart 1, the jackpot type random number value stored in the first storage area of the first special chart reserved storage area 85a is read out. Next, the game control microcomputer 81 determines the type of jackpot based on the read jackpot type random number value and the jackpot type determination table T5 (FIG. 9). After determining the type of jackpot, the special stop pattern data (FIG. 9) corresponding to the identified jackpot type is set in the jackpot type buffer provided in the main RAM 84 (step S1520), and this process ends. On the other hand, in step S1503 or step S1505, if the result of the jackpot determination is "miss," the special stop pattern data (01H) corresponding to the miss pattern is set in the jackpot type buffer provided in the main RAM 84 (step S1520), and this process ends.

[Variation pattern selection process]
24 and 25 are flow charts of the variation pattern selection process (FIG. 22: steps S1403, S1409). The variation pattern selection process of the special chart 2 (step S1403) and the variation pattern selection process of the special chart 1 (step S1409) are similar in flow of processing, so they will be described together. In the variation pattern selection process, first, the game control microcomputer 81 judges whether the game state is in a time-saving state (step S1600). The judgment of whether the game state is in a time-saving state is made by whether the time-saving flag is ON or not. If the game state is in a time-saving state (step S1600: YES), the process proceeds to step S1612. If the game state is not in a time-saving state (step S1600: NO), the game control microcomputer 81 judges whether the jackpot flag is ON or not (step S1602). If the jackpot flag is OFF (step S1602: NO), the process proceeds to step S1607. When the jackpot flag is ON (step S1602: YES), the game control microcomputer 81 judges whether the jackpot is a special symbol 2 or not (step S1603). When the jackpot is a special symbol 2 (step S1603: YES), the jackpot type is always a V-passing jackpot, so the process skips to step S1605. When the jackpot is a special symbol 1 (step S1603: NO), the game control microcomputer 81 judges whether the jackpot type is a V-passing jackpot or not (step S1604). The jackpot type is judged based on the special symbol stop pattern data set in the main RAM 84.

When the jackpot type is a V-passing jackpot (step S1604: YES), the game control microcomputer 81 refers to the table for the non-time-saving state V-passing jackpot in the fluctuation pattern determination table T6 (FIG. 10) to select a fluctuation pattern (step S1605). Specifically, the game control microcomputer 81 first reads out a fluctuation pattern random number value as a judgment value. For example, in the fluctuation pattern selection process for special chart 2, the fluctuation pattern random number value stored in the first storage area (corresponding to the first of the second special chart reserved) of the second special chart reserved storage area 85b is read out. In the fluctuation pattern selection process for special chart 1, the fluctuation pattern random number value stored in the first storage area (corresponding to the first of the first special chart reserved) of the first special chart reserved storage area 85a is read out. Next, the game control microcomputer 81 selects a fluctuation pattern using the fluctuation pattern determination table T6 and the fluctuation pattern random number value. Here, as a table for a non-time-saving state V-passing jackpot, the portion of the non-time-saving state fluctuation pattern determination table T6 shown in FIG. 10 that corresponds to a V-passing jackpot (the portion with fluctuation patterns "P1" to "P3" in special chart 1, and the portion with fluctuation patterns "P21" to "P23" in special chart 2) is referenced (the address is set). From the read fluctuation pattern random number value, one of "P1" to "P3" is selected as the fluctuation pattern in special chart 1, and one of "P21" to "P23" is selected in special chart 2.

If the jackpot type is a V non-pass scheduled jackpot (step S1604: NO), the game control microcomputer 81 refers to the table for a non-time-saving state V non-pass scheduled jackpot in the fluctuation pattern determination table T6 (Figure 10) to select a fluctuation pattern (step S1606). Here, as the table for a non-time-saving state V non-pass scheduled jackpot, the part of the fluctuation pattern determination table T6 for the non-time-saving state shown in Figure 10 that corresponds to a V non-pass scheduled jackpot (the part "P4" to "P6"). From the read fluctuation pattern random number value, one of "P4" to "P6" is selected as the fluctuation pattern.

In step S1602, if the jackpot flag is OFF (step S1602: NO), the game control microcomputer 81 judges whether the reach random number value is a reach establishment random number value or not (step S1607). Specifically, the game control microcomputer 81 first reads the reach random number value as a judgment value. In the variation pattern selection process of the special chart 2, the reach random number value stored in the first memory area (corresponding to the first of the second special chart reserved) of the second special chart reserved memory area 85b is read. In the variation pattern selection process of the special chart 1, the reach random number value stored in the first memory area (corresponding to the first of the first special chart reserved) of the first special chart reserved memory area 85a is read. Next, the game control microcomputer 81 judges whether or not there is a reach using the reach judgment table T2 (FIG. 8 (B)) and the reach random number value. In this case, since the time-saving state is not in effect, the presence or absence of a reach is determined based on the table for the non-time-saving state (the portion of the reach determination value (reach establishment random number value) between "0" and "13") in the reach determination table T2.

If the reach random number is a reach establishment random number (step S1607: YES), that is, in the case of a reach with miss, the game control microcomputer 81 refers to the table for reach with miss in the non-time-saving state in the fluctuation pattern determination table T6 (Fig. 10) and selects the fluctuation pattern (step S1608). Here, as the table for reach with miss in the non-time-saving state, the part corresponding to reach with miss (the part with the fluctuation pattern "P7" to "P14" in the special chart 1, and the part with the fluctuation pattern "P24" to "P31" in the special chart 2) in the fluctuation pattern determination table T6 for the non-time-saving state shown in Fig. 10 is referred to. In the special chart 1, one of the fluctuation patterns "P7" to "P14" is selected as the fluctuation pattern from the read fluctuation pattern random number value and the current number of reserved balls in the special chart 1 (1 to 4). In Special Chart 2, one of the patterns "P24" to "P31" is selected as the pattern from the read-out random number value for the pattern and the current number of reserved balls for Special Chart 2 (1 to 4). Because the pattern selected changes depending on the number of reserved balls, a shortened pattern function is activated according to the number of reserved balls. In other words, in both Special Chart 1 and Special Chart 2, when the number of reserved balls is between "3" and "4", more patterns with shorter change times are selected than when the number of reserved balls is between "1" and "2". This makes it possible to speed up the consumption of reserved special charts when there are a large number of reserved balls.

If the reach random number is not a reach establishment random number (step S1607: NO), that is, in the case of a miss without a reach, the game control microcomputer 81 refers to the table for a miss without a reach in the non-time-saving state in the fluctuation pattern determination table T6 (Fig. 10) and selects a fluctuation pattern (step S1609). Here, as the table for a miss without a reach in the non-time-saving state, the part corresponding to a miss without a reach (the part with the fluctuation pattern "P15" to "P16" in the special chart 1, and the part with the fluctuation pattern "P32" to "P33" in the special chart 2) in the fluctuation pattern determination table T6 for the non-time-saving state shown in Fig. 10 is referred to. In the special chart 1, either "P15" or "P16" is selected as the fluctuation pattern from the read fluctuation pattern random number value and the current number of reserved balls in the special chart 1 (1 to 4). In the special chart 2, either "P32" or "P33" is selected as the variation pattern based on the read variation pattern random number value and the current number of reserved balls in the special chart 2 (1 to 4). Here too, the variation pattern selected changes depending on the number of reserved balls, so the shortened variation function works according to the number of reserved balls.

If it is determined in step S1600 that the game state is in the time-saving state, the game control microcomputer 81 determines whether the jackpot flag is ON or not (FIG. 25: step S1612). Thereafter, the processing of steps S1613 to S1619 is the same as the processing of steps S1603 to S1609 described above, except for the following points, so explanations will be omitted. The difference between the processing of steps S1613 to S1619 and the processing of steps S1603 to S1609 is that the part of the fluctuation pattern determination table T6 referenced in steps S1615, S1616, S1618, and S1619 is different from that of the already-described steps S1605, S1606, S1608, and S1609. Specifically, in S1605, S1606, S1608, and S1609, the fluctuation pattern determination table T6 (FIG. 10) for the non-time-saving state is referenced, whereas in steps S1615, S1616, S1618, and S1619, the fluctuation pattern determination table T6 (FIG. 11) for the time-saving state is referenced. For example, in the case of step S1615, that is, when the jackpot type is a V-passing jackpot, the part of the fluctuation pattern determination table T6 for the time-saving state shown in FIG. 11 that corresponds to the V-passing jackpot (the part where the fluctuation pattern is "P41" to "P43" in the special chart 1, and the part where the fluctuation pattern is "P61" to "P63" in the special chart 2) is referenced. From the read fluctuation pattern random number value, one of "P41" to "P43" is selected as the fluctuation pattern in the special chart 1, and one of "P61" to "P63" is selected as the fluctuation pattern in the special chart 2. Also, for example, in the case of step S1616, that is, when the jackpot type is a V non-passing scheduled jackpot, the portion of the fluctuation pattern determination table T6 for the time-saving state shown in FIG. 11 that corresponds to the V non-passing scheduled jackpot (the portion "P44" to "P46") is referenced. From the read fluctuation pattern random number value, one of "P44" to "P46" is selected as the fluctuation pattern.

After selecting the variation pattern as described above, the game control microcomputer 81 sets the selected variation pattern (step S1630) and ends this process. Information on the set variation pattern is included in a variation start command and is sent to the sub-control board 90 in the output process (Figure 16: step S108). This starts the variation display of the special symbol.

[Special pattern change processing]
FIG. 26 is a flow chart of the special symbol variation process (FIG. 21: step S1304). The game control microcomputer 81 first judges whether the variation time of the special symbol has elapsed and ended (step S1701). The variation time of the special symbol is a variation time determined according to the variation pattern selected in the variation pattern selection process (FIG. 24, FIG. 25) described above. If the variation time has not ended (step S1701: NO), this process is terminated. That is, the variation display of the special symbol started in step S1406 or S1412 of the special symbol standby process (FIG. 22) is continued. On the other hand, if the variation time has ended (step S1701: YES), a variation stop command is set (step S1702), and the special operation status is set to "3" (step S1703). In addition, the game control microcomputer 81 performs other processes associated with the variation stop (step S1704). For example, the game control microcomputer 81 performs a process of stopping the variable display of the special symbol at a symbol corresponding to the set special symbol stop symbol data, etc. After that, the game control microcomputer 81 ends this process.

[Special design confirmation process]
FIG. 27 is a flow chart of the special symbol determination process (FIG. 21: step S1306). The game control microcomputer 81 first performs a game status management process (step S1801). The game status management process is a process for managing the number of STs and the number of time-saving times, and the details of which will be described later. After the game status management process, it is determined whether the jackpot flag is ON (step S1802). If the jackpot flag is OFF (step S1802: NO), the game control microcomputer 81 sets the special operation status to "1" (step S1808) and ends this process. As a result, the jackpot game is not started, and the process moves to the special symbol waiting process (FIG. 22) again, and the jackpot determination for the next reserved game is executed.

If the jackpot flag is ON (step S1802: YES), the game control microcomputer 81 sets the opening pattern of the large prize opening and the V-shaped opening member according to the type of the jackpot that has been won (step S1803). Specifically, the game control microcomputer 81 refers to the large prize opening opening pattern determination table T8 (FIG. 13), determines the opening pattern of the large prize opening from the special symbol stop pattern data, and sets the determined opening pattern. For example, when the special symbol stop pattern data is "11H", "opening pattern 21" is set as the opening pattern of the large prize opening. In addition, the game control microcomputer 81 refers to the V-shaped opening and closing member opening pattern determination table T9 (FIG. 14), determines the opening pattern of the V-shaped opening and closing member 71 from the special symbol stop pattern data, and sets the determined opening pattern. For example, when the special symbol stop pattern data is "11H", "opening pattern 31" is set as the opening pattern of the V-shaped opening and closing member 71. Along with setting the opening pattern of the big prize opening and the V-shaped opening/closing member, the round counter value is set to the number of rounds according to the type of big prize that was won. The round counter counts the number of unit opening games (round games) that were executed during the big prize game. In this case, the round counter is set to "16" (Figure 13 (B)).

After setting the opening pattern, the game control microcomputer 81 performs a game state reset process (step S1804). The game state reset process is a process for resetting (returning to OFF) the probability bonus flag and time-saving flag, and will be described later. After the game state reset process, in order to start a jackpot game, a jackpot opening command is set (step S1805), and opening is started (step S1806). Thereafter, the special operation status is set to "4" (step S1807), and this process ends.

[Game Status Management Processing]
FIG. 28 is a flow chart of the game state management process (FIG. 27: step S1801). The game control microcomputer 81 first judges whether the probability variable flag is ON or not (step S2001). If the probability variable flag is OFF (step S2001: NO), the process skips to step S2010. If the probability variable flag is ON (step S2001: YES), the value of the probability variable counter is decremented by 1 (step S2002). The probability variable counter counts the number of times the special pattern is changed during the high probability state. Here, the probability variable counter is set to "100" when the state transitions to the high probability state. The game control microcomputer 81 judges whether the counter value becomes "0" as a result of decrementing the probability variable counter by 1 (step S2003). If the value of the probability variable counter is not "0" (step S2003: NO), the process skips to step S2005. If the value of the probability change counter is "0" (step S2003: YES), the probability change flag is switched to OFF (step S2004).

In step S2005, the game control microcomputer 81 determines whether the time-saving flag is ON or not. If the time-saving flag is OFF (step S2005: NO), the process skips to step S2009. If the time-saving flag is ON (step S2005: YES), the value of the time-saving counter is decremented by 1 (step S2006). The time-saving counter counts the number of times the special pattern changes during the time-saving state. Here, the time-saving counter is set to "100" when the time-saving state is entered. The game control microcomputer 81 determines whether the counter value has become "0" as a result of decrementing the time-saving counter by 1 (step S2007). If the value of the time-saving counter is not "0" (step S2007: NO), the process skips to step S2009. If the time-saving counter value is "0" (step S2007: YES), the time-saving flag is switched to OFF (step S2008).

In step S2009, the game control microcomputer 81 sets the game state designation command in the command set area (output buffer) 84a of the main RAM 84, and ends this process. The game state designation command includes information about the set current game state (whether the ceiling flag is ON or not, the ceiling counter value, whether or not the game is in a special state, the special state counter value, whether or not the game is in a time-saving state, the time-saving counter value, etc.).

In step S2010, the game control microcomputer 81 judges whether the ceiling flag is ON or not. If the ceiling flag is OFF (step S2010: NO), the process skips to step S2005. If the ceiling flag is ON (step S2010: YES), the value of the ceiling counter is decremented by 1 (step S2011). The ceiling counter is for counting the specified number of rotations until the b time reduction (play time) is reached, and counts the number of times the special pattern changes when the ceiling flag is ON (during the low probability state). Here, when the ceiling flag is set to ON, the ceiling counter is set to "500" as the specified number of rotations. The game control microcomputer 81 judges whether the counter value becomes "0" as a result of decrementing the ceiling counter by 1 (step S2012). In other words, it judges whether the specified number of rotations until the b time reduction (play time) is reached has elapsed. If the value of the ceiling counter is not "0" (step S2012: NO), the process skips to step S2005. If the value of the probability bonus counter is "0" (step S2012: YES), the time-saving flag is switched ON (step S2013), and the time-saving counter is set to "700" as the number of time-saving times (number of times awarded). Then, the ceiling flag is switched OFF (step S2015). After that, the process of step S2009 is executed.

[Game Status Reset Processing]
FIG. 29 is a flow chart of the game state reset process (FIG. 27: step S1804). The game control microcomputer 81 first judges whether the high probability flag is ON or not (step S2101). If the high probability flag is OFF (step S2101: NO), the process skips to step S2103. If the high probability flag is ON (step S2101: YES), the high probability flag is switched OFF (step S2102). In step S2103, the game control microcomputer 81 judges whether the time-saving flag is ON or not. If the time-saving flag is OFF (step S2103: NO), the process skips to 2105. If the time-saving flag is ON (step S2103: YES), the time-saving flag is switched OFF (step S2104). In step S2105, the game control microcomputer 81 judges whether the ceiling flag is ON or not. If the ceiling flag is OFF (step S2105: NO), this process is terminated. If the ceiling flag is ON (step S2105: YES), the ceiling flag is switched to OFF (step S2106). In other words, during the execution of a jackpot game, the ceiling flag is OFF in a non-high probability state and a non-time-saving state. In the gaming machine 1, since the non-time-saving state is always in a low base state, the low base state is maintained during the execution of a jackpot game.

[Special electric accessory processing]
FIG. 30 is a flow chart of the special electric device processing (FIG. 21: step S1308). The game control microcomputer 81 first judges whether the big win end flag is ON or not (step S2200). The "big win end flag" is a flag indicating that the opening of all the big win devices (the first big win device 31 and the second big win device 36) based on the opening pattern in the ongoing big win game has ended. If the big win end flag is ON (step S2200: YES), the process proceeds to step S2230. If the big win end flag is OFF (step S2200: NO), the V opening and closing member operation process is performed to operate the V opening and closing member 71 (step S2201). The V-shaped opening/closing member 71 of this embodiment is configured to operate when a predetermined number of game balls enter the first large winning opening 30, and in the V-shaped opening/closing member operation process, the V-shaped opening/closing member 71 is opened for a predetermined period of time when a predetermined number of game balls enter according to the V-shaped opening/closing member opening pattern T9. Details of the V-shaped opening/closing member operation process will be described later. After the V-shaped opening/closing member operation process, the game control microcomputer 81 determines whether the large winning openings (the first large winning opening 30 and the second large winning opening 35) are open or not (step S2202). If they are open (step S2202: YES), the process proceeds to step S2210.

If the large prize opening is not open (step S2202: NO), the game control microcomputer 81 determines whether it is time (timing) to open the large prize opening (step S2203). The time to open the large prize opening includes, for example, when the opening time for the large prize opening has elapsed and it is time to start opening for the first round of play, and when the interval time (closing time) until the large prize opening is temporarily closed after opening has elapsed and it is time to start opening again. If it is not time to open the large prize opening (step S2203: NO), the process proceeds to step S2220.

If it is time (timing) to open the big prize opening (step S2203: YES), the game control microcomputer 81 performs the big prize opening opening process (step S2207). Specifically, the game control microcomputer 81 opens the big prize opening (first big prize opening 30 or second big prize opening 35) according to the opening pattern (FIG. 13) according to the type of big prize. After the big prize opening opening process, the game control microcomputer 81 sets a round designation command (step S2208). The round designation command includes information regarding the number of rounds of the big prize game being executed, and the game control microcomputer 81 sets the round designation command in the output buffer of the main RAM 84. In this embodiment, the big prize opening is not opened multiple times during one round of game. However, in another embodiment, when the large prize opening is opened multiple times during one round of play, the game control microcomputer 81 may determine whether the large prize opening is the first opening during one round, and set the round designation command only if it is the first opening. After setting the round designation command, this process ends.

In the above-mentioned step S2202, if the large prize opening is open (step S2202: YES), the game control microcomputer 81 judges whether the closing condition of the large prize opening is satisfied (step S2210). The closing condition here is that either the number of winnings in the large prize opening in that round of play has reached a specified maximum number of winnings (e.g., 9 winnings per round), or the time to close the large prize opening has arrived (i.e., a predetermined opening time (FIG. 13) has elapsed since the large prize opening was opened) is satisfied. If the closing condition of the large prize opening is not satisfied (step S2210: NO), the game control microcomputer 81 ends this process. On the other hand, if the closing condition of the large prize opening is satisfied (step S2210: YES), the game control microcomputer 81 closes (blocks) the large prize opening (step S2211).

If it is not the time (timing) to open the large prize opening in step S2203 described above, the game control microcomputer 81 judges whether the round of play has ended (step S2220). Here, one round ends a predetermined time (here, 2 seconds) after the large prize opening is closed. As described above, this is because the time (interval time) for the large prize opening to be closed between rounds of play is included in the open round of play before the closure. The game control microcomputer 81 judges whether the round of play has ended based on whether a predetermined interval time has passed since the large prize opening was closed. If the round of play has not ended (step S2220: NO), the game control microcomputer 81 ends this process.

If the round play has ended (step S2220: YES), the game control microcomputer 81 decrements the round counter by 1 (step S2221) and determines whether the round counter value is "0" or not (step S2226). If the round counter value is not "0" (step S2226: NO), that is, if the specified number of rounds has not yet been played, this process ends in order to start the next round play. On the other hand, if the round counter value is "0", a jackpot ending command is set as a jackpot ending process that ends the jackpot play (step S2227), and the jackpot ending is started (step S2228). In this embodiment, the ending time (e.g., 18 seconds) when the game ball passes through the V region 39 in the "16R (actual 13R) V-passing scheduled jackpot" is the same length as the ending time when the game ball does not pass through the V region 39 in the "16R (actual 13R) V-non-passing scheduled jackpot". This allows the player to recognize that the game ball did not pass through the V region 39 in the "16R (actual 13R) V-non-passing scheduled jackpot" even if the game ball passed through the V region 39 in the "16R (actual 13R) V-passing scheduled jackpot". Note that the ending time when the game ball did not pass through the V region 39 in the "16R (actual 13R) V-passing scheduled jackpot" is also the same length. After the jackpot ending starts, the jackpot end flag is set to ON (step S2229), and this process ends.

In the above-mentioned step S2200, if the jackpot end flag is ON (step S2200: YES), the final round has ended, so the game control microcomputer 81 determines whether the jackpot ending time has elapsed (step S2230). If the ending time has not elapsed (step S2230: NO), the game control microcomputer 81 ends this process. On the other hand, if the ending time has elapsed (step S2230: YES), the game control microcomputer 81 turns off the jackpot end flag (step S2231), turns off the jackpot flag (step S2232), and sets the special operation status to "1" (step S2233). As a result, in the next special operation process, the special symbol waiting process (step S1302) is executed again. After that, the game state setting process (step S2234) described later is executed, and this process ends.

[V opening/closing member operation process]
FIG. 31 is a flow chart of the V opening/closing member operation process (FIG. 30: step S2201). The game control microcomputer 81 first judges whether the current round game (the relevant round) is the opening round of the V opening/closing member 71 (step S2501). Here, the second round, the fourth round, the sixth round, the eighth round, the tenth round, and the twelfth round correspond to the opening round of the V opening/closing member 71. The game control microcomputer 81 can judge that it is an opening round when the round counter value is "15", "13", "11", "9", "7", or "5". If it is not the opening round of the V opening/closing member 71 (step S2501: NO), this process is terminated. This is because there is no need to operate the V opening/closing member 71 in the relevant round.

If it is the round in which the V-shaped opening/closing member 71 is opened (step S2501: YES), the game control microcomputer 81 judges whether the first winning flag is ON or not (step S2502). The "first winning flag" is a flag indicating that the first ball has won in the first large winning port 30 in the relevant round. If the first winning flag is ON (step S2502: YES), the process proceeds to step S2520. If the first winning flag is OFF (step S2502: NO), the process judges whether the first ball has won (step S2503). If the first ball has not won (step S2503: NO), the process ends. This is because there has been no winning in the first large winning port 30 in the relevant round, and there is no need to operate the V-shaped opening/closing member 71.

When the winning of the first ball is detected (step S2503: YES), the game control microcomputer 81 short-opens the V opening/closing member 71 and performs the V effective period setting process (step S2504). The reason for short-opening the V opening/closing member 71 is to execute a short opening (here, 0.1 seconds) when the first ball wins, regardless of whether the opening pattern of the V opening/closing member 71 (FIG. 14(B)) is "short opening" or "long opening". In addition, in the short opening of the V opening/closing member 71, the opening time of the V opening/closing member 71 is very short, so that the first game ball that wins the first large winning hole 30 passes through the non-V area 70 without passing through the V area 39. In the V effective period setting process, the V effective period during which the V opening/closing member 71 is open and for several seconds after the V opening/closing member 71 is closed is set to be the V effective period during which the detection of the game ball by the V area sensor 39a is valid. Here, the game control microcomputer 81 short-opens the V opening/closing member 71 (here, 0.1 seconds) according to the opening pattern of the V opening/closing member 71 (FIG. 14(B)), and sets the V effective period during the opening of the V opening/closing member 71 and 1 second after closing. The game control microcomputer 81 sets the period other than the V effective period (including when a jackpot game is not being executed) as the V invalid period in which the detection of the game ball by the V area sensor 39a is judged to be invalid. Here, "judging the detection of the game ball by the V area sensor 39a to be valid" means that the V flag is turned ON based on the detection of the game ball by the V area sensor 39a (see the V area sensor detection process (FIG. 33) described later). Also, "judging the detection of the game ball by the V area sensor 39a to be invalid" means that the V flag is not turned ON even if the game ball is detected by the V area sensor 39a. The reason why the V effective period includes several seconds (ball brushing period) after the V opening/closing member 71 is closed is that, since there is a physical distance between the V opening/closing member 71 and the V area sensor 39a, the period until the game ball that entered the V area 39 side just before the V opening/closing member 71 is closed is taken into consideration until it is detected by the V area sensor 39a. That is, here, the V flag is turned ON only when V passage (passage of the game ball into the V area 39) is detected during the V effective period, and the V flag is not turned ON when V passage is detected outside the V effective period (V invalid period). When the V flag is ON, the probability variable flag is turned ON, that is, the game state after the big win game is set to a high probability state (see the game state setting process (FIG. 32) described later). By doing so, the V flag is not turned ON based on V passage due to fraudulent acts and is not set to a high probability state. After the V opening/closing member 71 is short-circuited and the V valid period is set, the game control microcomputer 81 switches the first winning flag to ON (step S2505) and proceeds to step S2540.

In step S2502, if the first winning flag is ON, that is, if the first ball has already won (step S2502: YES), the game control microcomputer 81 judges whether the second winning flag is ON or not (step S2520). The "second winning flag" is a flag indicating that the second ball has won in the first large winning port 30 when the opening pattern of the V opening and closing member 71 in the round is a long opening. If the second winning flag is ON (step S2520: YES), the process proceeds to step S2540. If the second winning flag is OFF (step S2520: NO), the game control microcomputer 81 judges whether the opening pattern of the V opening and closing member 71 in the round is a long opening or not (step S2521). If it is not a long opening (step S2521: NO), that is, if it is a short opening, the process proceeds to step S2540. On the other hand, if the opening is long (step S2521: YES), the game control microcomputer 81 determines whether or not the winning of the second ball has been detected (step S2522). If the winning of the second ball has not been detected (step S2522: NO), the process proceeds to step S2540.

When the winning of the second ball is detected (step S2522: YES), the game control microcomputer 81 opens the V opening/closing member 71 long and performs the V effective period setting process (step S2523). The reason for opening the V opening/closing member 71 long is to execute the long opening (maximum 31.5 seconds here) when the second ball wins in the case of "long opening" in the opening pattern of the V opening/closing member 71 (FIG. 14 (B)). Note that here, the maximum play time for one round is 31.5 seconds (maximum opening time of the large winning port 29.5 seconds + interval closing time 2 seconds), so generally, the time from the winning of the second ball to the end of the round is shorter than 31.5 seconds. As described later, the V opening/closing member 71 is forcibly closed at the end of the round, so the opening time of the long opening of the V opening/closing member 71 is shorter than 31.5 seconds. However, the long opening of the V opening/closing member 71 is configured such that at least a portion of the second and subsequent game balls that enter the first large winning port 30 pass through the V area 39 because the opening time of the V opening/closing member 71 is relatively long. In the V valid period setting process, the game control microcomputer 81 sets the V valid period while the V opening/closing member 71 is open, and sets the V invalid period together with the closing of the V opening/closing member 71 at the end of the round. After the long opening of the V opening/closing member 71 and the V valid period setting process, the game control microcomputer 81 switches the second winning flag to ON (step S2524) and proceeds to step S2540.

In step S2540, the game control microcomputer 81 determines whether the V-shaped opening/closing member 71 is open or not. If the V-shaped opening/closing member 71 is open (step S2540: YES), the game control microcomputer 81 determines whether the round of play has ended or not (step S2550). As described above, the game control microcomputer 81 determines whether the round of play has ended or not based on whether a predetermined interval time (here, 2 seconds) has elapsed since the big prize opening was closed.

If the round of play has ended (step S2550: YES), the game control microcomputer 81 switches the first winning flag and the second winning flag to OFF (step S2551), and performs V opening/closing member closing processing and V invalid period setting processing (step S2552). Here, at the end of the round of play, the game control microcomputer 81 forcibly closes the V opening/closing member 71, and sets the V invalid period several seconds (here, 1 second) after the V opening/closing member 71 is closed, and ends this processing.

If the round of play has not ended (step S2550: NO), the game control microcomputer 81 determines whether the closing condition of the V opening/closing member 71 is met (step S2560). For example, the closing condition of the V opening/closing member 71 may be, for example, that a predetermined period (e.g., 0.1 seconds) has elapsed since the V opening/closing member 71 was opened in the case of a short opening. If the closing condition is met (step S2560: YES), the V opening/closing member closing process and the V invalid period setting process are performed (step S2552), and the process ends. If the closing condition is not met (step S2560: NO), the V opening/closing member 71 is left open and the V valid period is continued, and the process ends.

If the game control microcomputer 81 determines in step S2540 that the V-shaped opening/closing member 71 is closed (step S2540: NO), it determines whether the round of play has ended (step S2571). If the round has ended (step S2571: YES), the game control microcomputer 81 switches the first winning flag and the second winning flag to OFF (step S2572) and ends this process. If the round has not ended (step S2571: NO), it ends this process.

[Game Status Setting Process]
FIG. 32 is a flow chart of the game state setting process (FIG. 30: step S2234). The game control microcomputer 81 first judges whether the V flag is ON or not (step S2301). If the V flag is OFF (step S2301: NO), the time-saving flag is turned ON (step S2302), and the time-saving counter is set to "100" (step S2303). As a result, the game state after the current big win game becomes "non-high probability state", "time-saving state", and "high base state" (i.e., low probability high base). This low probability high base state ends when either of the following conditions is met: the variable display of the special pattern is performed 100 times, or the next big win is won.

On the other hand, in step S2301, if the V flag is ON (step S2301: YES), the game control microcomputer 81 turns the high probability flag ON (step S2304), sets the high probability counter to "100" (step S2305), and turns the V flag OFF (step S2306). The game control microcomputer 81 also turns the time-saving flag ON (step S2307), and sets the time-saving counter to "100" (step S2308). As a result, the game state after the current jackpot game becomes a "high probability state", a "time-saving state", and a "high base state" (i.e., high probability, high base). This high probability, high base state ends when either of the following conditions is met: the variable display of the special pattern is performed 100 times, or the next jackpot is won.

In step S2310, the game control microcomputer 81 turns the ceiling flag ON, and the ceiling counter is set to "500" as the specified number of spins until the b time reduction (play time) is reached (step S2311). As a result, when the probability change flag is OFF after a jackpot game, the game will enter the b time reduction (play time) after 500 spins. In step S2309, the game control microcomputer 81 sets a game state designation command in the command set area (output buffer) 84a of the main RAM 84, and ends this process. The game state designation command contains information about the set game state (time reduction flag, time reduction counter, probability change flag, probability change counter, ceiling flag, ceiling counter).

[V-area sensor detection process]
FIG. 33 is a flow chart of the V-area sensor detection process (FIG. 16: step S106). The game control microcomputer 81 first judges whether or not a game ball has been detected by the V-area sensor 39a (step S2601). If the game ball has not been detected by the V-area sensor 39a (step S2601: NO), this process is terminated. On the other hand, if a game ball has been detected (step S2601: YES), the game control microcomputer 81 judges whether or not the V-effective period is in progress (step S2602). The V-effective period is a period set by the V-effective period setting process (steps S2504, S2523) of the V-opening/closing member operation process (FIG. 31). The V-effective period is set during the second, fourth, sixth, eighth, tenth, and twelfth rounds, during which the V-opening/closing member 71 is opened or closed for several seconds (ball brushing period). If the V valid period is not in progress (step S2602: NO), this process ends. On the other hand, if the V valid period is in progress (step S2602: YES), the game control microcomputer 81 turns on the V flag (step S2603), sets the V pass command (step S2604), and ends this process.

[Reserved ball count processing]
34 is a flow chart of the reserved ball number processing (FIG. 16: step S107). The game control microcomputer 81 first reads the reserved ball number of special pattern 1, the reserved ball number of special pattern 2, and the reserved ball number of normal pattern stored in the main RAM 84 (step S2701). Next, the game control microcomputer 81 sets the reserved ball number command in the command set area (output buffer) 84a of the main RAM 84 (step S2702). The reserved ball number command is a command for notifying the sub-control board 90 of the reserved ball number, and includes information on the reserved ball number of special pattern 1, the reserved ball number of special pattern 2, and the reserved ball number of normal pattern. After setting the reserved ball number command, the game control microcomputer 81 ends this process.

7. Operation of the performance control microcomputer 91 The operation of the performance control microcomputer 91 provided on the sub-control board 90 (FIG. 4) will be described with reference to Figures 35 to 45. Counters, flags, status, buffers, etc. that appear in the description of the operation of the performance control microcomputer 91 are provided in the sub-RAM 94.

[Sub-control main processing]
35 is a flow chart showing the sub-control main process. When the power supply of the gaming machine 1 is turned on, the performance control microcomputer 91 reads out a program for executing the sub-control main process from the sub ROM 93. In the sub-control main process, the performance control microcomputer 91 first performs a CPU initialization process (step S4000). In the CPU initialization process, for example, the sub-CPU 92 is set, and various flags, statuses, counters, etc. are reset. The initial value of the flag is "0" or "OFF", the initial value of the status is "1", and the initial value of the counter is "0". The CPU initialization process is executed only once after the power supply is turned on, and is not executed thereafter.

After the CPU initialization process, the performance control microcomputer 91 prohibits interrupts from the interrupt process (step S4015) and performs a random number update process (step S4020). In this random number update process, the performance control microcomputer 91 updates the random number counter value shown in FIG. 7(B) by adding 1. When each random number counter value reaches a set upper limit value, it returns to "0" and is incremented again. Note that the initial value of each random number counter may be a value other than "0" and may be changed randomly. In addition to incrementing the random number value by 1, it may also be configured to increment by 2 or more. Each random number may be a so-called hardware random number.

After the random number update process, the performance control microcomputer 91 allows the interrupt process to be interrupted (step S4025). While the interrupt is allowed, the sub-side timer interrupt process (step S4035) can be executed. The sub-side timer interrupt process is executed based on an interrupt pulse that is repeatedly input to the sub-CPU 92 at a predetermined cycle. In other words, the sub-side timer interrupt process is executed at each predetermined cycle. Then, the random number update process is executed repeatedly between the end of the sub-side timer interrupt process and the start of the next sub-side timer interrupt process.

[Sub-side timer interrupt processing]
FIG. 36 is a flow chart of the sub-side timer interrupt process (FIG. 35: step S4035). The performance control microcomputer 91 first performs a received command analysis process (step S4300). The received command analysis process will be described later in detail. After the received command analysis process, the performance control microcomputer 91 performs a variable performance process (step S4305). The variable performance process is a process for setting a pre-variation end command at a specific timing during the variable performance to execute a specific display performance on the display screen 7a, and the details will be described later. After the variable performance process, the performance control microcomputer 91 performs a switch process (step S4310). In the switch process, the performance control microcomputer 91 sets the display contents of the display screen 7a based on the switch data (edge data and level data) output based on the detection signal from the performance button detection switch 63a. After the switch process, the performance control microcomputer 91 performs a command transmission process (step S4315). In the command transmission process, the performance control microcomputer 91 transmits various commands set in the performance command set area 94b (output buffer) of the sub-RAM 94 in the received command analysis process, etc., to the image control board 100, the voice control board 106, the lamp control board 107, and the relay board 108. The image control board 100 that has received various commands executes a display performance according to the received command using the image display device 7. In addition, the voice control board 106 that has received various commands executes a sound performance that outputs sound from the speaker 67 according to the received command. The lamp control board 107 that has received various commands executes a lamp performance that controls the light emission of the board lamp 5 and the frame lamp 66 according to the received command. After the command transmission process, the performance control microcomputer 91 performs other processes (step S4320) and ends this process. In the other processes, for example, a random number update process is performed.

[Received command analysis process]
FIG. 37 is a flowchart of the received command analysis process (FIG. 36: step S4300). The performance control microcomputer 91 first judges whether or not a pre-judgment command has been received from the main control board 80 (step S4415). If it has been received (step S4415: YES), a pre-reading performance determination process is performed (step S4420). The "pre-reading performance determination process" is a process for determining whether or not to execute a pre-reading performance, and a pre-reading performance pattern if executed. Details of the pre-reading performance determination process will be described later. On the other hand, if it has not been received (step S4415: NO), the above-mentioned pre-reading performance determination process is skipped. The pre-reading performance is a performance that suggests that the reserved information newly stored in the special chart reserved memory area 85 is highly likely to contain a jackpot, and is performed during a variable performance.

Next, the performance control microcomputer 91 judges whether or not a reserved ball number command has been received from the main control board 80 (step S4445). If it has been received (step S4445: YES), a reserved display process is performed (step S4450). In the reserved display process, the values of the first special reserved performance counter, the second special reserved performance counter, and the normal reserved performance counter provided in the counter set area 94d of the sub-RAM 94 are updated based on the information on the reserved ball number of the special pattern 1, the reserved ball number of the special pattern 2, and the reserved ball number of the normal pattern included in the reserved ball number command. This allows the information on the number of reserved balls to be held not only on the main control board 80 side but also on the sub-control board 90 side. In addition, the performance control microcomputer 91 updates the reserved images 9A and 9B displayed on the display screen 7a based on the values of the first special reserved performance counter, the second special reserved performance counter, and the normal reserved performance counter. On the other hand, if the reserved ball count command has not been received (step S4445: NO), the reserved ball display process described above is skipped.

Then, the performance control microcomputer 91 determines whether or not a fluctuation start command has been received from the main control board 80 (step S4455). If a fluctuation start command has been received (step S4455: YES), a fluctuation performance start process is performed (step S4460). The "fluctuation performance start process" is a process for selecting the fluctuation performance pattern (contents) to be executed during the special pattern fluctuation. The details of the fluctuation performance start process will be described later. On the other hand, if a fluctuation start command has not been received (step S4455: NO), the above-mentioned fluctuation performance start process is skipped.

Then, the performance control microcomputer 91 judges whether or not a change stop command has been received from the main control board 80 (step S4465). If a change stop command has been received (step S4465: YES), a change performance end process is performed (step S4470). The "change performance end process" is a process for stopping the change performance executed during the change of the special pattern. In the change performance end process, the performance control microcomputer 91 sets a counter based on the analysis result of the change stop command, and sets a change performance end command for ending the change performance. As a result, the decorative pattern corresponding to the special pattern 1 or special pattern 2 that is changing is stopped and displayed. In addition, the performance control microcomputer 91 performs a pre-determination information shift process (FIG. 39) described later. Note that if the change stop command has not been received (step S4465: NO), the change performance end process described above is skipped.

Next, the performance control microcomputer 91 judges whether an opening command has been received from the main control board 80 (step S4475). If an opening command has been received (step S4475: YES), an opening performance pattern determination process is performed (step S4480). The "opening performance pattern determination process" is a process for selecting an opening performance pattern (content) to be executed at the start of a special game (jackpot game). In the opening performance pattern determination process, the performance control microcomputer 91 first analyzes the opening command, and sets information about the special symbol stop pattern data set at the time of the jackpot winning determination, which is included in the opening command, in the sub-RAM 94. Then, the performance pattern of the opening performance that is preset in accordance with the winning type indicated by the special symbol stop pattern data is selected, and an opening performance start command for starting the selected opening performance is set in the performance command set area 94b of the sub-RAM 94. When the opening effect start command set in the effect command set area 94b is sent to the image control board 100 in the command sending process (FIG. 36: step S4315), the CPU 102 of the image control board 100 reads out a predetermined opening effect image from the ROM 103 and displays it on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7. Note that if an opening command has not been received in step S4475 (step S4475: NO), the above-mentioned opening effect pattern determination process is skipped.

Next, the performance control microcomputer 91 judges whether or not a round designation command has been received from the main control board 80 (step S4485). If a round designation command has been received (step S4485: YES), a round designation pattern determination process is performed (step S4490). The "round designation pattern determination process" is a process for selecting an open game designation pattern (content) to be executed during the opening of the big prize opening or during the interval between openings in a special game (big prize game). In the round designation pattern determination process, the performance control microcomputer 91 first analyzes the round designation command, and sets information on the special stop pattern data and information on the number of rounds included in the round designation command in the sub-RAM 94. Then, a designation pattern of the round designation that is preset in accordance with the winning type and the number of rounds indicated by the special stop pattern data is selected, and a round designation start command for starting the selected round designation is set in the designation command set area 94b of the sub-RAM 94. When the round effect start command set in the effect command set area 94b is sent to the image control board 100, the CPU 102 reads out a predetermined round effect image from the ROM 103 and displays it on the display screen 7a. Note that if a round designation command has not been received in step S4485 (step S4485: NO), the above-mentioned round effect pattern determination process is skipped.

Next, the performance control microcomputer 91 determines whether an ending command has been received from the main control board 80 (step S4495). If an ending command has been received (step S4495: YES), an ending performance pattern determination process is performed (step S4500). The "ending performance pattern determination process" is a process for selecting an ending performance pattern (content) to be executed during the ending of a special game (big win game or small win game). In the ending performance pattern determination process, the performance control microcomputer 91 first analyzes the ending command and sets information regarding the special chart stop pattern data included in the ending command in the sub-RAM 94. Then, the microcomputer 91 selects an ending performance pattern according to the type of win indicated by the special chart stop pattern data, and sets an ending performance start command to start the selected ending performance in the output buffer of the sub-RAM 94. When the ending performance start command set in the performance command set area 94b is sent to the image control board 100, the CPU 102 reads out a specific ending performance image from the ROM 103 and displays it on the display screen 7a. If no ending command has been received (step S4495: NO), the above-mentioned ending performance pattern determination process is skipped.

Next, the performance control microcomputer 91 performs other processing (step S4535). In other processing, for example, when the performance control microcomputer 91 receives a game state designation command, it stores information about the game state included in the game state designation command (time-saving flag, time-saving counter, probability flag, probability counter, ceiling flag, ceiling counter, etc.) in the sub-RAM 94. Specifically, based on the information included in the game state designation command, the values of the time-saving performance counter, probability-changing performance counter, and ceiling performance counter provided in the counter set area 94d of the sub-RAM 94 are updated. For example, the remaining number of fluctuations during the time-saving performance (number of games) is set in the time-saving performance counter, the remaining number of fluctuations during the probability-changing performance is set in the probability-changing performance counter, and the remaining number of fluctuations until the ceiling is reached is set in the ceiling performance counter. This allows information about the number of time-saving times, the probability-changing times, and the ceiling times to be stored not only on the main control board 80 side but also on the sub-control board 90 side. In addition, when the performance control microcomputer 91 receives a V-pass command, it stores the V-pass information in the sub-RAM 94. In addition, the performance control microcomputer 91 performs processing based on commands other than those mentioned above (such as a customer waiting command or a RAM clear notification command) and then ends this processing.

[Pre-reading performance decision processing]
38 is a flowchart of the pre-reading performance determination process (FIG. 37: step S4420). The performance control microcomputer 91 first performs a pre-judgment information rewrite process (step S4601). Specifically, the performance control microcomputer 91 stores the jackpot pre-judgment result (jackpot judgment information), the jackpot type pre-judgment result (jackpot type information), and the fluctuation pattern pre-judgment result (fluctuation pattern information) contained in the pre-judgment command received from the main control board 80 in the pre-judgment information storage area 94c.

Figure 39 is a diagram for explaining the configuration of the pre-judgment information storage area 94c. In addition to the jackpot judgment information, jackpot type information, and fluctuation pattern information described above, the pre-judgment information storage area 94c stores pre-reading performance pattern information. The pre-reading performance pattern information is information indicating the contents of the pre-reading performance executed during the fluctuation performance, and is selected in step S4604 described later. Figure 39 (A) shows a state in which the jackpot judgment information "miss" and the fluctuation pattern information "P72" and "P73" are stored in the first to third storage areas as pre-judgment results corresponding to the first to third reserved special charts 2, respectively, and the pre-judgment results corresponding to the fluctuations are stored in the corresponding areas. Figure 39 (B) shows a state in which the special chart 2 wins from the state of Figure 39 (A), and the pre-judgment information included in the pre-judgment command received from the main control board 80 is stored in the fourth storage area corresponding to the fourth reserved special chart 2. Here, the jackpot determination information "jackpot", the jackpot type information "21H", and the variation pattern information "P61" are stored as the pre-determination information. In addition, "Pattern A" is set as the pre-reading performance pattern information in the first to fourth storage areas corresponding to the first to fourth reserved special chart 2 pieces and the area corresponding to the variation. FIG. 39(C) shows the state in which the variation has ended from the state in FIG. 39(B) and the pre-determination information shift process has been executed. Specifically, the pre-determination information stored in the first storage area is shifted to the area, the pre-determination information stored in the second to fourth storage areas is shifted to the first to third storage areas, and the pre-determination information in the fourth storage area is cleared. The pre-determination information shift process is executed in the variation performance end process (FIG. 37: step S4470).

Returning to FIG. 38, the performance control microcomputer 91 then determines whether or not the pre-reading performance pattern information is stored in the pre-judgment information storage area 94c (step S4602). Specifically, the performance control microcomputer 91 determines whether or not the pre-reading performance pattern information is stored in the relevant area or any of the first to fourth storage areas of the pre-judgment information storage area 94c. If the pre-reading performance pattern information is stored (step S4602: YES), this process is terminated. That is, if the pre-reading performance pattern information is stored in the relevant area or any of the first to fourth storage areas of the pre-judgment information storage area 94c, the pre-reading performance pattern information is not newly selected and stored. On the other hand, if the pre-judgment information is not stored in the pre-judgment information storage area 94c (step S4602: NO), the performance control microcomputer 91 determines whether or not the pre-judgment result included in the received pre-judgment command is a "jackpot" or a "miss with reach" (step S4603). Whether or not the result is a "jackpot" or a "miss with reach" can be determined, for example, by the result of the preliminary determination of the variation pattern (variation pattern information). When the result of the preliminary determination included in the received preliminary determination command is "miss without reach" (step S4603: NO), the microcomputer 91 for controlling the performance ends this process. This is because there is no need to perform a look-ahead performance. On the other hand, when the result of the preliminary determination included in the received preliminary determination command is "jackpot" or "miss with reach" (step S4603: YES), a look-ahead performance execution determination is performed to determine whether or not to perform a look-ahead performance, and a look-ahead performance pattern selection is performed (step S4604). Specifically, the microcomputer 91 for controlling the performance acquires the value of the counter of the look-ahead performance random number, and determines whether or not to perform a look-ahead performance and the look-ahead performance pattern selection table T51 stored in the sub-ROM 93 by referring to the acquired random number value and the look-ahead performance pattern selection table T51 stored in the sub-ROM 93.

Figure 40 is a diagram for explaining the look-ahead performance pattern determination table T51. In Figure 40, if the pre-determination result is "big win" and the look-ahead performance random number value is "0-55", the look-ahead performance is "none", if the look-ahead performance random number value is "56-67", "pattern A" is selected as the look-ahead performance, and if the look-ahead performance random number value is "68-127", "pattern B" is selected as the look-ahead performance. Also, if the pre-determination result is "reach with miss" and the look-ahead performance random number value is "0-107", the look-ahead performance is "none", if the look-ahead performance random number value is "108-114", "pattern A" is selected as the look-ahead performance, and if the look-ahead performance random number value is "115-127", "pattern B" is selected as the look-ahead performance. Note that the type, content, and range of the random number value to be selected of the look-ahead performance pattern can be set arbitrarily.

Returning to FIG. 38, if it is determined in step S4604 that a look-ahead performance is to be executed (step S4605: YES), the selected look-ahead performance pattern is stored in the pre-determination information storage area 94c (step S4606). Here, when the look-ahead performance pattern is stored in the pre-determination information storage area 94c, the look-ahead performance pattern is stored not only in the storage area corresponding to the received pre-determination command among the first to fourth storage areas, but also in the storage area before the corresponding storage area and in the area. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 39 (B), not only is "Pattern A" set in the fourth storage area corresponding to the received pre-determination command, but "Pattern A" is also set in the first to third storage areas and the area. As a result, the look-ahead performance pattern A is also executed in the variable performance executed before the variable performance corresponding to the fourth storage area is executed (the variable performance corresponding to the area and the first to third storage areas). Note that whether or not the look-ahead performance is executed in the variable performance corresponding to the area depends on the progress of the variable performance. That is, in the variable performance, if the timing for executing the look-ahead performance has already passed, the look-ahead performance will not be executed, but if it is before the timing for executing the look-ahead performance, it will be executed at that timing. This will be described later. If it is determined in step S4604 that the look-ahead performance will not be executed (step S4605: NO), the processing ends.

[Variable performance start processing]
41 is a flow chart of the variable performance start process (FIG. 37: step S4460). The performance control microcomputer 91 first analyzes the variable start command (step S5000). Here, the performance control microcomputer 91 sets information on the special chart stop pattern data included in the variable start command and information on the variable pattern in the sub-RAM 94. The set information includes game status information indicating the current game status, pattern information indicating the pattern as the judgment result of the hit judgment process of the special chart 1 or special chart 2, etc. The game status information and pattern information acquired here can be appropriately referred to by the performance control microcomputer 91.

Then, the performance control microcomputer 91 performs a core performance pattern determination process (step S5010). The core performance pattern determination process is a process for determining the basic configuration of the variable performance (for example, the display and switching of background images on the image display device 7, the display and movement of predetermined characters, the output of melodies and sound effects using the speaker 67, the lighting control of lamps, etc.). The variable performance is completed by superimposing additional performances such as chance-up performances and pre-reading performances on this core performance. The performance control microcomputer 91 determines the core performance pattern by referring to the core performance pattern determination table T52 stored in the sub-ROM 93.

Figure 42 is a diagram for explaining the core performance pattern determination table T52. In Figure 42, multiple types of core performance patterns that perform normal reach performance, multiple types of core performance patterns that perform SP1 performance, multiple types of core performance patterns that perform SP2 performance, multiple types of core performance patterns that perform SP3 performance, and multiple types of core performance patterns that perform no reach miss performance are set. The type of core performance pattern can be set arbitrarily. Here, for example, if the fluctuation pattern included in the fluctuation start command is "P1", a core performance pattern that performs an SP1 performance is selected. Also, if the fluctuation pattern included in the fluctuation start command is "P72", a core performance pattern that performs a no reach miss performance is selected.

Returning to FIG. 41, after determining the core performance pattern, the performance control microcomputer 91 performs chance-up performance pattern determination processing (step S5015). The chance-up performance pattern determination processing is processing for determining additional performance to be superimposed on the variable performance. The performance control microcomputer 91 acquires the value of the chance-up random number counter, and determines the chance-up performance pattern by referring to the acquired random number value and the chance-up performance pattern determination table T53 stored in the sub-ROM 93.

Figure 43 is a diagram for explaining the chance-up performance pattern determination table T53. Here, only the portion of the chance-up performance pattern determination table T53 that determines the variation performance pattern of special chart 1 in the non-time-saving state is shown. That is, Figure 43 shows the chance-up performance pattern that is executed when the variation pattern included in the variation start command is "P1" to "P16". Note that the chance-up performance pattern determination table T53 may or may not include a portion that determines the chance-up performance pattern that is executed when the variation pattern is "P21" to "P33", "P41" to "P56", or "61" to "73".

In FIG. 43, the chance-up effect patterns are set as "2-NO", "2-SP1", "2-SP2", "2-SP3", "3-NO", "3-SP1", "3-SP2", "3-SP3", "4-NO", "4-SP1", "4-SP2", "4-SP3", and "ANO". These chance-up effect patterns correspond to the various chance-up effects described below.

Returning to FIG. 41, after determining the chance-up presentation pattern, the presentation control microcomputer 91 performs a count presentation pattern determination process (step S5016). Here, the count presentation pattern determination process is a process for displaying on the display screen 7a the remaining number of fluctuations (number of games) during the special bonus period, the remaining number of fluctuations during the time-saving period, the remaining number of fluctuations until the ceiling is reached, the number of fluctuations since the power was turned on, the number of fluctuations since the big win was played, etc. During the special bonus period, the presentation control microcomputer 91 displays the remaining number of times in the special bonus period on the display screen 7a based on the value of the special bonus presentation counter. Also, during the time-saving period, the presentation control microcomputer 91 displays the remaining number of times in the special bonus period based on the value of the time-saving presentation counter.

The performance control microcomputer 91 can execute various performances based on the value of the ceiling performance counter and the value of the overnight performance counter. The ceiling performance counter stores the number of remaining variations until the ceiling is reached, and the overnight performance counter records the number of variations since the power is turned on. For example, the performance control microcomputer 91 can set the number of variations since the power is turned on by incrementing the overnight performance counter every time it receives a variable performance end command from the main control board 80. The performance control microcomputer 91 determines whether the value of the ceiling performance counter is equal to or less than TH2 (for example, TH2 = 200) when the value of the overnight performance counter is TH1 (for example, TH1 = 10). If the value of the ceiling performance counter is equal to or less than TH2, a predetermined chance image is displayed. If the value of the ceiling performance counter is greater than TH2, the chance image is not displayed. This allows a player who sees the chance image to recognize that the gaming machine 1 has inherited the number of games from the previous day and that RAM clearing has not been performed. The performance control microcomputer 91 may also display the value of the ceiling performance counter when the value of the overnight performance counter is TH3 (e.g., TH3=50). The performance control microcomputer 91 may also erase the display or chance image indicating the value of the ceiling performance counter when the value of the overnight performance counter is TH4 (e.g., TH4=100). The performance control microcomputer 91 may also display the value of the ceiling performance counter when the value of the overnight performance counter is TH5 (e.g., TH5=200) again. The performance control microcomputer 91 may determine whether or not to display the value of the ceiling performance counter based on the value of the overnight performance counter as described above, or may also determine based on the value of the ceiling performance counter. For example, the performance control microcomputer 91 may display the value of the ceiling performance counter when the value of the ceiling performance counter is TH6 (e.g., TH6 = 100), may turn off the display of the value of the ceiling performance counter when the value of the ceiling performance counter is TH7 (e.g., TH7 = 70), and may display the value of the ceiling performance counter again when the value of the ceiling performance counter is TH8 (e.g., TH8 = 50).

After the count effect pattern determination process, the effect control microcomputer 91 may refer to the random number value and the stop pattern pattern determination table T54 to determine the combination of effect patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R to be displayed. This determines what kind of effect will be performed as the variable effect.

The performance control microcomputer 91 sets a variable performance start command in the performance command set area 94b (output buffer) of the sub-RAM 94 so that a variable performance based on the variable performance pattern determined in steps S5010 to S5016 above is realized (step S5020). When the variable performance start command set in the performance command set area 94b of the sub-RAM 94 is sent to the image control board 100 in the command sending process (Figure 36: step S4315), the CPU 102 of the image control board 100 reads the variable performance image from the ROM 103 and displays it on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7.

Then, the performance control microcomputer 91 sets the variable performance timer (step S5030) and ends this process. The variable performance timer is set to a variable time (Figure 42) that corresponds to the variable pattern included in the variable start command. For example, when the variable pattern is "P1", the variable performance timer is set to "40 seconds".

[Processing during variable performance]
FIG. 44 is a flow chart of the process during the variable performance (FIG. 36: step S4305). The performance control microcomputer 91 judges whether or not the variable performance is in progress (step S4701). Whether or not the variable performance is in progress can be judged, for example, by whether or not the variable performance timer is set to zero. If the variable performance is not in progress (step SS4701: NO), this process is terminated. On the other hand, if the variable performance is in progress (step SS4701: YES), the performance control microcomputer 91 judges whether or not it is time to set the pre-variation end command in the performance command set area 94b of the sub-RAM 94 (step S4702). The pre-variation end command is a command that the performance control microcomputer 91 notifies the image control board 100 and the like that it is a specific timing during the variable performance, and when the image control board 100 receives the pre-variation end command, it switches the performance content or displays a specific image according to the information contained in the pre-variation end command.

If it is not the time to set the pre-change end command (step S4702: NO), this process is terminated. On the other hand, if it is the time to set the pre-change end command (step S4702: YES), a determination is made as to whether or not there is pre-reading performance pattern information in the area of the advance judgment information storage area 94c (step S4703). If there is pre-reading performance pattern information in the area (step S4703: YES), a pre-change end command including the pre-reading performance pattern information is set in the performance command set area 94b of the sub-RAM 94 (step S4704). On the other hand, if there is no pre-reading performance pattern information in the area (step S4703: NO), a pre-change end command not including the pre-reading performance pattern information is set in the performance command set area 94b of the sub-RAM 94 (step S4705). As a result, if there is pre-reading performance pattern information in the area, a pre-change end command including the pre-reading performance pattern information is sent to the image control board 100 two seconds before the end of the change performance. Then, the image control microcomputer 101 starts a look-ahead performance in which a look-ahead performance image is displayed on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7. On the other hand, even if there is no look-ahead performance pattern information in the area, a pre-variation end command is sent to the image control board 100 two seconds before the end of the variation. Here, if a preview image is already displayed on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, the image control microcomputer 101 starts a preview fade performance in which the preview image fades.

9. Operation of movable body and display performance of sub display screen 64 Using Figures 46 to 50, the operation of the board movable body (first movable role 14, second movable role 15), the operation of the frame movable body (frame movable role 69), and the display performance of the sub display screen 64 (right sub display screen 64R, left sub display screen 64L, and upper sub display screen 64U) will be described. The performance control microcomputer 91 performs drive control to operate the first movable role 14, the second movable role 15, and the frame movable role 69 during the game performance (display performance) or in the initial operation when the power is turned on. In addition, the performance control microcomputer 91 performs a display performance to display a specific image on the sub display screen 64 during the game performance (display performance) or in the initial operation when the power is turned on.

Figure 46 is an explanatory diagram illustrating the movement mode of the first movable role 14. Figure 47 is an explanatory diagram illustrating the second mode of the first movable role 14. The first movable role 14 is a vertically long rod-shaped member, with its upper end located near the upper end of the image display device 7 and its lower end located near the lower end of the image display device 7. The upper and lower ends of the first movable role 14 are difficult to see, and the central area is visible in front of the image display device 7. As shown in Figure 1, the first movable role 14 can be stationary at a retracted position (home position) on the left side of the image display device 7 (first mode). In the retracted position, only a part of the first movable role 14 may be stored and the remaining part may be visible, or the entirety may be stored and difficult to see. As shown in Figure 46, the first movable role 14 is configured to be movable in the left and right directions in front of the image display device 7. It is configured to be able to move (advance) from a retracted position toward the right end of the display screen 7a and move left and right in front of the display screen 7a. It can also stop at any advanced position in front of the display screen 7a. The movement mode of the first movable prop 14 can be set arbitrarily. Also, as shown in FIG. 47, the first movable prop 14 can move to the right end of the display screen 7a and stop at that position (second mode). At least a part of the first movable prop 14 may be formed with a decorative part, or may be transparent.

Figure 48 is an explanatory diagram illustrating the second mode of the second movable role 15. The second movable role 15 has a rectangular decorative part marked "OARO" and is configured to be movable up and down. As shown in Figure 1, the second movable role 15 can be stopped at a retreat position (home position) on the upper side of the display screen 7a (first mode). At this time, a part of the second movable role 15 becomes difficult to see. The second movable role 15 can move downward from the state shown in Figure 1 toward the center of the display screen 7a and can be stopped at the advanced position (deployed position) shown in Figure 48 (second mode). In this second mode, the decorative part stops in front of the image display device 7 so as to cover the vicinity of the center of the display screen 7a. The second movable role 15 can move upward (retract) from the advanced position in Figure 48 to the retreat position shown in Figure 1 and can be stopped there.

Figure 49 is an explanatory diagram illustrating the second mode of the movable frame gadget 69. The movable frame gadget 69 is composed of a pair of flat plate-shaped members arranged on the left and right sides of the handle 60, and each is configured to be movable in the left and right directions. The two members are made of flexible materials, and one main surface of each member is configured to approach and move away from the handle 60. As shown in Figure 1, the two members of the movable frame gadget 69 are normally stationary at retreated positions (home positions) away from the handle 60 on the left and right sides of the handle 60 (first mode). As shown in Figure 49, the two members of the movable frame gadget 69 can move (advance) from the retreated positions toward the handle 60, that is, move toward each other, and stop at a position where they touch the handle 60 (second mode). When in the advanced position, the movable frame gadget 69 touches the handle 60 or the right hand of the player operating the handle 60. The movable frame part 69 can move in a direction in which the two components move away from each other so that the frame moves from the second position to the first position.

Figure 50 is an explanatory diagram illustrating the display effects of the sub-display screens 64 (right sub-display screen 64R, left sub-display screen 64L, and upper sub-display screen 64U). The right sub-display screen 64R, left sub-display screen 64L, and upper sub-display screen 64U can each display images independently. They can also display effects linked to the images on the display screen 7a.

10. Examples of the performance, effect, modification, and mode of this embodiment Below, each of the performance examples (display performance example, role-moving performance example) of this embodiment will be described. In addition, the effect example, modification, and mode example for the performance example will also be described. The performance described below is a performance realized by the performance control microcomputer 91 (image control microcomputer 101) based on various information (jackpot determination information, jackpot type information, variation pattern information, advance determination information, etc.) transmitted from the game control microcomputer 81, as described above. Note that the following display performance examples are executed on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, etc. Also, the hold display (hold icon) may be omitted in the display performance examples.

The following describes the confirmed stop pattern remaining display effects A to C using Figures 51 to 53. These confirmed stop pattern remaining display effects are executed during decorative pattern variation effects, etc. In other words, the image control microcomputer 101 analyzes the command received from the sub-control board 90, and when it contains an instruction to execute the confirmed stop pattern remaining display effect, it reads out the corresponding image data from the ROM 103 and displays the image on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 and the sub-display screen 64 (right sub-display screen 64R, left sub-display screen 64L, and upper sub-display screen 64U).

[Determined stop symbol remaining display effect A]
Fig. 51 is a diagram for explaining the fixed stop symbol remaining display performance A. The fixed stop symbol remaining display performance is a performance in which, when the decorative symbol is stopped after being displayed in a variable manner, the display of the stopped decorative symbol is maintained, and a variable display of the decorative symbol corresponding to the next special symbol variation is displayed. In the fixed stop symbol remaining display performance A, first, as shown in Fig. 51 (A), the display screen 7a displays the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R, the decorative symbols 8l, 8c, and 8r, the reserved icon 9A, and the variable icon (the reserved icon) 9C.

The decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R are a set of patterns including a left decorative pattern 8L, a middle decorative pattern 8C, and a right decorative pattern 8R displayed in the first area DA1 of the display screen 7a, and the variable display of the set of patterns represents the variable display of the special pattern (special pattern variation), and the stationary display of the set of patterns notifies the result of the special pattern lottery. The special pattern here may be either the first special pattern or the second special pattern. The decorative patterns 8l, 8c, and 8r are a set of patterns including a left decorative pattern 8l, a middle decorative pattern 8c, and a right decorative pattern 8r displayed in the second area DA2 of the display screen 7a, and the variable display of the set of patterns represents the variable display of the special pattern (special pattern variation), and the stationary display of the set of patterns notifies the result of the special pattern lottery. Here, the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are displayed as "789" after changing, indicating the result of the previous special drawing. The decorative symbols 8l, 8c, and 8r are displayed as changing, and correspond to the current special drawing change (the change in question).

The second area DA2 of the display screen 7a is located below the first area DA1 and is a different area that does not overlap with the first area DA1. Therefore, the changing display of the decorative patterns 8l, 8c, and 8r in the second area DA2 does not overlap with the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R displayed stationary in the first area DA1. The decorative patterns 8l, 8c, and 8r may be displayed partially overlapping with the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R, and in that case, they may be displayed in front of or behind the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R.

Four hold icons 9A are displayed vertically on the right side of the display screen 7a. The variable icon (the hold icon in question) 9C is displayed in a variable icon display area in the lower right of the display screen 7a. Here, a pedestal image is displayed below the variable icon display area. Both the hold icon 9A and the variable icon 9C have a round (spherical) shape.

As shown in FIG. 51 (B), the decorative patterns 8l, 8c, and 8r that were being displayed in a variable manner are displayed as stopped at "234." The decorative patterns 8l, 8c, and 8r that are displayed in a stopped state do not overlap with the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R. In conjunction with the stopped display of the decorative patterns 8l, 8c, and 8r, the variable icon (the reserved icon in question) 9C disappears. Of the four reserved icons 9A lined up, the lowest one 9A begins to move toward the variable icon display area where the variable icon 9C is displayed. The remaining reserved icons 9A shift and move.

As shown in FIG. 51(C), when the next special pattern change starts, decorative patterns 8f, 8s, and 8t are newly displayed in a variable display mode. The decorative patterns 8f, 8s, and 8t are a set of patterns including a left decorative pattern 8f, a middle decorative pattern 8s, and a right decorative pattern 8t displayed in the third area DA3 of the display screen 7a, and the variable display of the set of patterns represents the variable display of the special pattern (special pattern change), and the static display of the set of patterns notifies the result of the special pattern selection. When the decorative patterns 8f, 8s, and 8t are newly displayed in a variable display mode, the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R and the decorative patterns 8l, 8c, and 8r are maintained in a static display state.

The third area DA3 of the display screen 7a is located below the second area DA2, and is a different area that does not overlap with the second area DA2. Therefore, the variable display of the decorative patterns 8f, 8s, and 8t in the third area DA3 does not overlap with the decorative patterns 8l, 8c, and 8r displayed stationary in the second area DA2. The decorative patterns 8f, 8s, and 8t may be displayed partially overlapping with the decorative patterns 8l, 8c, and 8r, and in that case, they may be displayed in front of or behind the decorative patterns 8l, 8c, and 8r.

As shown in FIG. 51 (D), the decorative patterns 8f, 8s, and 8t that were being displayed in a variable manner are displayed as stopped at "567". The decorative patterns 8f, 8s, and 8t that are displayed in a stopped state do not overlap with the decorative patterns 8l, 8c, and 8r. In conjunction with the stopped display of the decorative patterns 8f, 8s, and 8t, the variable icon (the reserved icon in question) 9C disappears. Of the three reserved icons 9A lined up, the lowest one 9A begins to move toward the variable icon display area where the variable icon 9C is displayed. The remaining reserved icons 9A shift and move.

As shown in FIG. 51(E), when the next special pattern change starts, the decorative patterns 8x, 8y, and 8z are newly displayed in a variable display mode. The decorative patterns 8x, 8y, and 8z are a set of patterns including the left decorative pattern 8x, the center decorative pattern 8y, and the right decorative pattern 8z displayed in the fourth area DA4 of the display screen 7a, and the variable display of the set of patterns represents the variable display of the special pattern (special pattern change), and the stopped display of the set of patterns notifies the special pattern lottery result. When the decorative patterns 8x, 8y, and 8z are newly displayed in a variable display mode, the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R, the decorative patterns 8l, 8c, and 8r, and the decorative patterns 8f, 8s, and 8t are maintained in a stopped display state. Here, the display of decorative patterns 8x, 8y, and 8z changes in the same manner as the display of decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R, 8l, 8c, and 8r, and 8f, 8s, and 8t. These decorative patterns are displayed so that the left, center, and right patterns move from top to bottom.

The fourth area DA4 of the display screen 7a is located below the third area DA3 and is a different area that does not overlap with the third area DA3. Therefore, the changing display of the decorative patterns 8x, 8y, and 8z in the fourth area DA4 does not overlap with the decorative patterns 8f, 8s, and 8t displayed stationary in the third area DA3. The decorative patterns 8x, 8y, and 8z may be displayed partially overlapping with the decorative patterns 8f, 8s, and 8t, and in that case, they may be displayed in front of or behind the decorative patterns 8f, 8s, and 8t.

As shown in FIG. 51(F), while the varying display of decorative patterns 8x, 8y, and 8z continues in the fourth area DA4 of the display screen 7a, the display of decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R that are displayed as stopped in the first area DA1 of the display screen 7a, decorative patterns 8l, 8c, and 8r that are displayed as stopped in the second area DA2 of the display screen 7a, and decorative patterns 8f, 8s, and 8t that are displayed as stopped in the third area DA3 of the display screen 7a disappear.

After that, as shown in FIG. 51(G), the decorative symbols 8x, 8y, and 8z, which were displayed in a variable manner in the fourth area DA4 of the display screen 7a, are displayed as stopped at "735." No decorative symbols are displayed in the first area DA1, the second area DA2, and the third area DA3 of the display screen 7a. In conjunction with the stopped display of the decorative symbols 8x, 8y, and 8z, the variable icon (the pending icon in question) 9C disappears.

After that, as shown in FIG. 51(H), the decorative patterns 8x, 8y, and 8z that were displayed frozen at "735" in the fourth area DA4 of the display screen 7a disappear, and no decorative patterns are displayed on the display screen 7a. The lowest of the two reserved icons 9A lined up next to each other begins to move toward the variable icon display area where the variable icon 9C is displayed, and the next special pattern fluctuation begins. Then, as shown in FIG. 51(I), the decorative patterns 8x, 8y, and 8z are newly displayed in a variable display mode in the fourth area DA4 of the display screen 7a.

After that, as shown in FIG. 51(J), the decorative patterns 8x, 8y, and 8z that were being displayed in a variable manner in the fourth area DA4 of the display screen 7a are displayed frozen at "135," and the variable icon (the pending icon in question) 9C disappears. The remaining pending icon 9A starts to move toward the variable icon display area where the variable icon 9C is displayed, and the next special pattern variation starts.

[Determined stop symbol remaining display effect B]
FIG. 52 is a diagram for explaining the fixed stop pattern remaining display performance B. The fixed stop pattern remaining display performance is a performance in which, when a decorative pattern is stopped after being displayed in a variable manner, the display of the decorative pattern that has been stopped is maintained, and a variable display of the decorative pattern corresponding to the next special pattern variation is displayed. The fixed stop pattern remaining display performance B is mainly different from the fixed stop pattern remaining display performance A in that a plurality of decorative patterns are displayed so as to overlap with each other, and a specific image that covers some of the decorative patterns is displayed. In the fixed stop pattern remaining display performance B, first, as shown in FIG. 52 (A), the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R, the decorative patterns 8l, 8c, and 8r, the reserved icon 9A, and the variable icon (the reserved icon) 9C are displayed on the display screen 7a.

The decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R are a set of patterns including a left decorative pattern 8L, a middle decorative pattern 8C, and a right decorative pattern 8R displayed in the first area DA1 of the display screen 7a, and the variable display of the set of patterns represents the variable display of the special pattern (special pattern variation), and the stationary display of the set of patterns notifies the result of the special pattern lottery. The special pattern here may be either the first special pattern or the second special pattern. The decorative patterns 8l, 8c, and 8r are a set of patterns including a left decorative pattern 8l, a middle decorative pattern 8c, and a right decorative pattern 8r displayed in the second area DA2 of the display screen 7a, and the variable display of the set of patterns represents the variable display of the special pattern (special pattern variation), and the stationary display of the set of patterns notifies the result of the special pattern lottery. Here, the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are displayed as "789" after changing, indicating the result of the previous special drawing. The decorative symbols 8l, 8c, and 8r are displayed as changing, and correspond to the current special drawing change (the change in question).

The second area DA2 of the display screen 7a is an area that partially overlaps with the first area DA1. Therefore, the variable display of the decorative patterns 8l, 8c, and 8r in the second area DA2 is displayed partially overlapping with the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R displayed stationary in the first area DA1. Here, the decorative patterns 8l, 8c, and 8r in the second area DA2 are displayed in front of the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R in the first area DA1. The decorative patterns 8l, 8c, and 8r may be displayed behind the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R, or may completely overlap the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R.

Four hold icons 9A are displayed vertically on the right side of the display screen 7a. The variable icon (the hold icon in question) 9C is displayed in a variable icon display area in the lower right of the display screen 7a. Here, a pedestal image is displayed below the variable icon display area. Both the hold icon 9A and the variable icon 9C have a round (spherical) shape.

As shown in FIG. 52(B), the decorative patterns 8l, 8c, and 8r that were being displayed in a variable manner are displayed as stopped at "234." Parts of the decorative patterns 8l, 8c, and 8r that are displayed as stopped overlap with the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R, and the overlapping parts are displayed in front of the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R. In conjunction with the stopped display of the decorative patterns 8l, 8c, and 8r, the variable icon (the reserved icon in question) 9C disappears. Of the four reserved icons 9A lined up, the lowest one 9A starts to move toward the variable icon display area where the variable icon 9C is displayed. The remaining reserved icons 9A shift and move.

As shown in FIG. 52(C), when the next special pattern change starts, decorative patterns 8f, 8s, and 8t are newly displayed in a variable display mode. The decorative patterns 8f, 8s, and 8t are a set of patterns including a left decorative pattern 8f, a middle decorative pattern 8s, and a right decorative pattern 8t displayed in the third area DA3 of the display screen 7a, and the variable display of the set of patterns represents the variable display of the special pattern (special pattern change), and the static display of the set of patterns notifies the result of the special pattern selection. When the decorative patterns 8f, 8s, and 8t are newly displayed in a variable display mode, the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R and the decorative patterns 8l, 8c, and 8r are maintained in a static display state.

The third area DA3 of the display screen 7a is an area that partially overlaps with the second area DA2. Therefore, the variable display of the decorative patterns 8f, 8s, and 8t in the third area DA3 is displayed partially overlapping with the decorative patterns 8l, 8c, and 8r displayed in the second area DA2. Here, the decorative patterns 8f, 8s, and 8t in the third area DA3 are displayed in front of the decorative patterns 8l, 8c, and 8r in the second area DA2. The decorative patterns 8f, 8s, and 8t may be displayed on the back side of the decorative patterns 8l, 8c, and 8r, and may entirely overlap with the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R. The third area DA3 may also partially overlap with the first area DA1, in which case the decorative patterns 8f, 8s, and 8t may partially overlap with the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R.

As shown in FIG. 52 (D), the decorative patterns 8f, 8s, and 8t that were being displayed in a variable manner are displayed as stopped at "567". Parts of the decorative patterns 8f, 8s, and 8t that are displayed as stopped overlap with the decorative patterns 8l, 8c, and 8r, and the overlapping parts are displayed in front of the decorative patterns 8l, 8c, and 8r. In conjunction with the stopped display of the decorative patterns 8f, 8s, and 8t, the variable icon (the reserved icon in question) 9C disappears. Of the three reserved icons 9A lined up, the lowest one 9A starts to move towards the variable icon display area where the variable icon 9C is displayed. The remaining reserved icons 9A shift and move.

As shown in FIG. 52(E), when the next special pattern change starts, the decorative patterns 8x, 8y, and 8z are newly displayed in a variable display mode. The decorative patterns 8x, 8y, and 8z are a set of patterns including the left decorative pattern 8x, the center decorative pattern 8y, and the right decorative pattern 8z displayed in the fourth area DA4 of the display screen 7a, and the variable display of the set of patterns represents the variable display of the special pattern (special pattern change), and the static display of the set of patterns notifies the special pattern lottery result. When the decorative patterns 8x, 8y, and 8z are newly displayed in a variable display mode, the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R, the decorative patterns 8l, 8c, and 8r, and the decorative patterns 8f, 8s, and 8t are maintained in a static display state. Here, the display of the decorative patterns 8x, 8y, and 8z changes in a different manner than the display of the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R, the decorative patterns 8l, 8c, and 8r, and the decorative patterns 8f, 8s, and 8t. The display of the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R, the decorative patterns 8l, 8c, and 8r, and the decorative patterns 8f, 8s, and 8t changes in such a way that the left, center, and right patterns move from top to bottom. On the other hand, the display of the decorative patterns 8x, 8y, and 8z changes in such a way that the left, center, and right patterns rotate horizontally around the vertical axis.

The fourth area DA4 of the display screen 7a is an area that partially overlaps with the third area DA3. Therefore, the variable display of the decorative patterns 8x, 8y, and 8z in the fourth area DA4 is displayed partially overlapping with the decorative patterns 8f, 8s, and 8t displayed stationary in the third area DA3. Here, the decorative patterns 8x, 8y, and 8z in the fourth area DA4 are displayed in front of the decorative patterns 8f, 8s, and 8t in the third area DA3. The decorative patterns 8x, 8y, and 8z may be displayed on the back side of the decorative patterns 8f, 8s, and 8t, or may entirely overlap the decorative patterns 8f, 8s, and 8t. Additionally, the fourth area DA4 may partially overlap the second area DA2 or the first area DA1, in which case the decorative patterns 8x, 8y, and 8z may partially overlap the decorative patterns 8l, 8c, and 8r or the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R.

52(F)(G), while the variable display of the decorative symbols 8x, 8y, and 8z continues in the fourth area DA4 of the display screen 7a, a specific image TG appears from the top to the bottom of the display screen 7a. The specific image TG is an image like a shutter, and the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R displayed in a stopped state in the first area DA1 of the display screen 7a, the decorative symbols 8l, 8c, and 8r displayed in a stopped state in the second area DA2 of the display screen 7a, and the decorative symbols 8f, 8s, and 8t displayed in a stopped state in the third area DA3 of the display screen 7a are covered by the specific image TG, and the display disappears from the display screen 7a. On the other hand, the decorative symbols 8x, 8y, and 8z in the fourth area DA4, the reserved icon 9A, and the variable icon (the reserved icon) 9C are displayed on the front side of the specific image TG, so that the display is maintained even if the specific image TG covers the entire display screen 7a. That is, the specific image TG is displayed behind the decorative patterns 8x, 8y, and 8z in the fourth area DA4, and in front of the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R in the first area DA1, the decorative patterns 8l, 8c, and 8r in the second area DA2, and the decorative patterns 8f, 8s, and 8t in the third area DA3.

Here, because the number of changes has reached a predetermined number, an effect is executed in which a specific image TG appears. The timing at which the specific image TG appears can be set arbitrarily. For example, the specific image TG may appear when the reserve icon 9A that has changed in anticipation becomes the change icon 9C, or when the reserve icon 9A that has changed in anticipation appears. The specific image TG may also appear when switching from a special chart 1 change to a special chart 2 change, or when the ceiling (b time reduction (play time)) is reached.

After that, as shown in FIG. 52(H), the decorative patterns 8x, 8y, and 8z, which were displayed in a variable manner in the fourth area DA4 of the display screen 7a, are displayed as "678". At this time, the specific image TG is displayed in the first area DA1, the second area DA2, and the third area DA3 of the display screen 7a, and the decorative patterns on the back side of the specific image TG are not displayed. In accordance with the display of the decorative patterns 8x, 8y, and 8z in a stopped manner, the variable icon (the reserved icon) 9C disappears. The lowest reserved icon 9A of the two reserved icons 9A lined up next to each other starts moving toward the variable icon display area, and the next special pattern change starts. Then, as shown in FIG. 52(I), the decorative patterns 8x, 8y, and 8z are displayed in a variable manner in the fourth area DA4 of the display screen 7a. When switching from the static display of decorative patterns 8x, 8y, and 8z in FIG. 52(H) to the variable display of decorative patterns 8x, 8y, and 8z in FIG. 52(I), the display of decorative patterns 8x, 8y, and 8z may continue, or the static display of the decorative patterns may disappear and a new variable display of the decorative patterns may be displayed.

After that, as shown in FIG. 52(J), the decorative patterns 8x, 8y, and 8z that were being displayed in a variable manner in the fourth area DA4 of the display screen 7a are displayed as stopped at "767", and the variable icon (the pending icon in question) 9C disappears. The remaining pending icon 9A starts to move toward the variable icon display area where the variable icon 9C is displayed, and the next special pattern variation starts.

[Determined stop symbol remaining display effect C]
FIG. 53 is a diagram for explaining the fixed stop pattern remaining display performance C. The fixed stop pattern remaining display performance is a performance in which, when a decorative pattern is stopped after being displayed in a variable manner, the display of the decorative pattern that has been stopped is maintained and a variable display of the decorative pattern corresponding to the next special pattern variation is displayed. The fixed stop pattern remaining display performance C is mainly different from the fixed stop pattern remaining display performance A in that a plurality of decorative patterns are displayed so as to overlap with each other, and a specific image that covers some of the decorative patterns is displayed. In the fixed stop pattern remaining display performance C, first, as shown in FIG. 53 (A), the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R, the reserved icon 9A, and the variable icon (the reserved icon) 9C are displayed on the display screen 7a.

The decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R are a set of patterns including a left decorative pattern 8L, a middle decorative pattern 8C, and a right decorative pattern 8R that are displayed in the first area DA1 of the display screen 7a, and the variable display of the set of patterns indicates the variable display of the special pattern (special pattern change), and the stationary display of the set of patterns notifies the result of the special pattern selection. The special pattern here may be either the first special pattern or the second special pattern. The decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R are displayed in a variable manner and correspond to the current special pattern change (the change in question).

Two hold icons 9A are displayed side by side at the bottom of the display screen 7a. The variable icon (the hold icon in question) 9C is displayed in a variable icon display area at the bottom center of the display screen 7a. Here, a pedestal image is displayed below the variable icon display area. Both the hold icon 9A and the variable icon 9C have a round (spherical) shape.

As shown in FIG. 53 (B), the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R, which were being displayed in a variable manner, are stopped and displayed as "234." In conjunction with the stopped display of the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R, the variable icon (the pending icon in question) 9C disappears. Then, of the pending icons 9A lined up, the rightmost one 9A begins to move toward the variable icon display area where the variable icon 9C is displayed. The remaining pending icons 9A shift and move. Here, an example is shown in which one pending icon 9A is added as a result of winning.

As shown in FIG. 53(C), when the next special pattern change starts, decorative patterns 8x, 8y, and 8z are newly displayed in a variable display mode. Decorative patterns 8x, 8y, and 8z are a set of patterns including a left decorative pattern 8x, a middle decorative pattern 8y, and a right decorative pattern 8z displayed in the second area DA2 of the display screen 7a, and the variable display of the set of patterns represents the variable display of the special pattern (special pattern change), and the static display of the set of patterns notifies the result of the special pattern selection. When decorative patterns 8x, 8y, and 8z are newly displayed in a variable display mode, decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R are maintained in a static display state.

The second area DA2 of the display screen 7a overlaps with the first area DA1. Therefore, the changing display of the decorative patterns 8x, 8y, and 8z in the second area DA2 overlaps with the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R displayed stationary in the first area DA1. Here, the decorative patterns 8x, 8y, and 8z in the second area DA2 are displayed in front of the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R in the first area DA1. Note that the decorative patterns 8x, 8y, and 8z may also be displayed behind the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R.

Here, the change display of decorative patterns 8x, 8y, and 8z has a different change mode from that of decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R. The change mode of decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R is that the left, center, and right patterns are each displayed as moving from top to bottom. On the other hand, the change mode of decorative patterns 8x, 8y, and 8z is that the left, center, and right patterns are each displayed as rotating horizontally with the up-down direction as the axis of rotation.

As shown in FIG. 53(D)(E), while the decorative patterns 8x, 8y, and 8z are continuously displayed in the second area DA2 of the display screen 7a, a specific image TG appears from the left side to the right side of the display screen 7a. The specific image TG is an image like a shutter, and the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R displayed in a stopped state in the first area DA1 of the display screen 7a are covered by the specific image TG, and the display disappears from the display screen 7a. On the other hand, the decorative patterns 8x, 8y, and 8z in the second area DA2, the reserved icon 9A, and the variable icon (the reserved icon) 9C are displayed on the front side of the specific image TG, so that the display is maintained even if the specific image TG covers the entire display screen 7a. In other words, the specific image TG is displayed on the back side of the decorative patterns 8x, 8y, and 8z in the second area DA2 and on the front side of the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R in the first area DA1.

Here, because the number of changes has reached a predetermined number, an effect is executed in which a specific image TG appears. The timing at which the specific image TG appears can be set arbitrarily. For example, the specific image TG may appear when the reserve icon 9A that has changed in anticipation becomes the change icon 9C, or when the reserve icon 9A that has changed in anticipation appears. The specific image TG may also appear when switching from a special chart 1 change to a special chart 2 change, or when the ceiling (b time reduction (play time)) is reached.

After that, as shown in FIG. 53(F), the decorative patterns 8x, 8y, and 8z, which were displayed in a variable manner in the second area DA2 of the display screen 7a, are displayed as "567". At this time, the specific image TG is displayed in the first area DA1 of the display screen 7a, and the decorative patterns on the back side of the specific image TG are not displayed. In conjunction with the display of the decorative patterns 8x, 8y, and 8z in a variable manner, the variable icon (the reserved icon in question) 9C disappears. Of the two reserved icons 9A lined up next to each other, the rightmost reserved icon 9A begins to move toward the variable icon display area, and the next special pattern variation begins. Then, as shown in FIG. 53(G), the decorative patterns 8x, 8y, and 8z are displayed in a variable manner in the second area DA2 of the display screen 7a. When switching from the static display of decorative patterns 8x, 8y, and 8z in FIG. 53(F) to the variable display of decorative patterns 8x, 8y, and 8z in FIG. 53(G), the display of decorative patterns 8x, 8y, and 8z may continue, or the static display of the decorative patterns may disappear and a new variable display of the decorative patterns may be displayed.

After that, as shown in FIG. 53(H), the decorative patterns 8x, 8y, and 8z that were being displayed in a changing state in the second area DA2 of the display screen 7a are displayed as stopped at "678", and the changing icon (the reserved icon) 9C disappears. The remaining reserved icon 9A starts moving toward the changing icon display area where the changing icon 9C is displayed, and the next special pattern change begins. When the next special pattern change begins, as shown in FIG. 53(I), the specific image TG disappears, the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R are displayed in a changing state in the first area DA1, and the decorative patterns 8x, 8y, and 8z are displayed in a changing state in the second area DA2. The changing display of the decorative patterns 8x, 8y, and 8z in the second area DA2 is displayed overlapping with the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R that are displayed in a stopped state in the first area DA1. The changing display of the decorative patterns 8x, 8y, and 8z and the changing display of the decorative patterns 8x, 8y, and 8z correspond to the same special pattern change.

Here, the reserved icon 9A, which has changed in advance, becomes the variable icon 9C, so an effect is executed in which the specific image TG disappears. The timing at which the specific image TG disappears can be set arbitrarily. For example, the specific image TG may disappear when a predetermined number of variations have been performed since the specific image TG appeared, or the specific image TG may appear when the special chart 1 varies and disappear when the special chart 2 varies. In addition, the specific image TG may appear when the ceiling (b time reduction (play time)) is reached and disappear when the special chart 2 varies.

After that, as shown in FIG. 53(J), the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R that were being displayed in a variably manner in the first area DA1 of the display screen 7a, and the decorative patterns 8x, 8y, and 8z that were being displayed in a variably manner in the second area DA2 of the display screen 7a are all displayed stopped at "678."

[Example of effect]
An example of the effect of the confirmed stop pattern remaining display is shown below.
[Effect 1]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in Fig. 51 (C) to (E), a first performance in which a set of decorative symbols 8f, 8s, 8t displayed in response to a first special symbol change are displayed in a stopped state, and a second performance in which a set of decorative symbols 8x, 8y, 8z corresponding to a second special symbol change following the first special symbol change are displayed in a state in which the display of the set of decorative symbols 8f, 8s, 8t displayed in a stopped state is maintained after the first performance. According to this configuration, a novel performance that has never been seen before can visually entertain the player, and can improve the interest. The same applies to Figs. 52 and 53.
[Effect 2]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in Fig. 51 (E) (F), after the second performance, a third performance can be executed in which a set of decorative symbols 8f, 8s, 8t that were displayed in a stopped state after being displayed in a stopped state in response to the first special symbol change disappears while maintaining the display of a set of decorative symbols 8x, 8y, 8z that were displayed in a changed state in response to the second special symbol change. According to this configuration, a novel performance that has never been seen before can visually entertain the player, and can improve the interest. The same applies to Figs. 52 and 53.
[Effect 3]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in Fig. 51 (G) to (I), after the third performance, a set of decorative symbols 8x, 8y, 8z displayed in response to the second special pattern change is stopped and displayed, and in a state where the set of decorative symbols 8x, 8y, 8z displayed in the stopped state is not displayed, a fourth performance can be executed in which a set of decorative symbols 8x, 8y, 8z corresponding to the third special pattern change following the second special pattern change is displayed. According to this configuration, the unprecedented and novel performance in which the performance in which the previous stopped pattern remains is switched to a performance in which the stopped pattern does not remain can visually entertain the player and improve the interest. The same applies to Figs. 52 and 53.
[Effect 4]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in Fig. 52 (F) (G), in the third performance, a specific image TG is displayed on the back side of a set of decorative patterns 8x, 8y, 8z that are displayed in response to the second special pattern change, and on the front side of a set of decorative patterns 8f, 8s, 8t that are displayed in response to the first special pattern change and then stopped, and the display of a set of decorative patterns 8f, 8s, 8t that are displayed in response to the first special pattern change and then stopped disappears by being covered by the specific image TG. According to this configuration, a novel performance that has never been seen before can visually entertain the player, and can improve the interest. The same applies to Fig. 53.
[Effect 5]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in Fig. 52 (D) (E), in the second performance, the variable display of a set of decorative symbols 8x, 8y, 8z corresponding to the second special pattern variation is displayed overlapping a set of decorative symbols 8f, 8s, 8t that are stopped and displayed. According to this configuration, the player can be visually entertained by a novel performance that has never been seen before, and the interest can be improved. The same applies to Fig. 53.
[Effect 6]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in Fig. 52 (E), the display of the set of decorative symbols 8f, 8s, and 8t corresponding to the first special symbol change and the display of the set of decorative symbols 8x, 8y, and 8z corresponding to the second special symbol change have different change patterns. According to this configuration, the player can be visually entertained by a novel presentation that has never been seen before, and the interest can be improved. The same applies to Fig. 53.

[Modification]
Below, modified examples of the confirmed stop pattern remaining display presentation are shown.
[Modification 1]
In Fig. 51 (I) of the ceiling reaching indication performance A, the decorative symbols 8x, 8y, and 8z are newly displayed in a variable display mode in the fourth area DA4 of the display screen 7a. However, the decorative symbols may be newly displayed in a variable display mode in an area other than the fourth area DA4 of the display screen 7a.
In addition, in Fig. 52 (H) (I) of the ceiling reaching scheduled indication performance B, after the decorative symbols 8x, 8y, and 8z are displayed stationary in the second area DA2 of the display screen 7a, the display of the decorative symbols 8x, 8y, and 8z corresponding to the next special symbol change starts. However, the display of the decorative symbols corresponding to the next special symbol change may be displayed in an area other than the second area DA2 of the display screen 7a.
53(F)(G) of the ceiling reaching indication performance C, after the decorative symbols 8x, 8y, and 8z are stopped and displayed in the second area DA2 of the display screen 7a, the display of the decorative symbols 8x, 8y, and 8z corresponding to the next special symbol change starts. However, the display of the decorative symbols corresponding to the next special symbol change may be displayed in an area other than the second area DA2 of the display screen 7a.

[Example of embodiment]
In the gaming machine of this embodiment, the following aspects can be realized.
◇[Aspect A1-1]
A gaming machine having a display means capable of displaying a plurality of types of images,
One of the plurality of types of images is a set of decorative patterns capable of informing a winner or loser,
A first performance in which the set of decorative patterns displayed in a variable manner in response to a first special pattern change is stopped and displayed;
A second performance in which, after the first performance, a display of the set of decorative patterns corresponding to a second special pattern variation following the first special pattern variation is displayed while maintaining the display of the set of decorative patterns stopped and displayed.
A gaming machine characterized by:
◇[Aspect A1-2]
The gaming machine according to aspect A1-1,
A third performance can be executed in which, after the second performance, the display of the set of decorative patterns displayed in a variable manner in response to the first special pattern change disappears while maintaining the display of the set of decorative patterns displayed in a variable manner in response to the second special pattern change.
A gaming machine characterized by:
◇[Aspect A1-3]
The gaming machine according to aspect A1-2,
After the third performance, the set of decorative patterns displayed in a variable manner in response to the second special pattern change are displayed in a stopped state, and a fourth performance is executed in which a variable display of the set of decorative patterns corresponding to a third special pattern change following the second special pattern change is displayed in a state in which the set of decorative patterns displayed in a stopped state is not displayed.
A gaming machine characterized by:
◇[Aspect A1-4]
A gaming machine according to aspect A1-2 or A1-3,
In the third performance, a specific image is displayed on the back side of the set of decorative patterns that are displayed in a variable manner in response to the second special pattern change, and on the front side of the set of decorative patterns that are displayed in a stopped manner after being displayed in a variable manner in response to the first special pattern change, and the display of the set of decorative patterns that are displayed in a stopped manner after being displayed in a variable manner in response to the first special pattern change disappears by being covered by the specific image.
A gaming machine characterized by:
◇[Aspect A1-5]
A gaming machine according to any one of Aspects A1-1 to A1-4,
In the second performance, the change display of the set of decorative patterns corresponding to the second special pattern change is displayed superimposed on the set of decorative patterns displayed in the stopped state.
A gaming machine characterized by:
◇[Aspect A1-6]
A gaming machine according to any one of Aspects A1-1 to A1-5,
The display of the change in the set of decorative patterns corresponding to the first special pattern change and the display of the change in the set of decorative patterns corresponding to the second special pattern change have different change modes.
A gaming machine characterized by:

The variable display area change presentations A to C are explained below using Figures 54 to 56. These variable display area change presentations are executed during the decorative pattern change presentation, etc. In other words, the image control microcomputer 101 analyzes the command received from the sub-control board 90, and when it finds that an instruction to execute a variable display area change presentation is included, it reads out the corresponding image data from the ROM 103 and displays the image on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 and the sub-display screen 64 (right sub-display screen 64R, left sub-display screen 64L, and upper sub-display screen 64U).

[Variable display area change performance A]
FIG. 54 is a diagram for explaining the variable display area change performance A. The variable display area change performance is a performance in which the display area in which the variable display of the decorative pattern is displayed changes on the display screen 7a when the special pattern 1 changes and when the special pattern 2 changes. The special pattern 1 change means the change of the special pattern on the first special pattern display 41a, and the special pattern 2 change means the change of the special pattern on the second special pattern display 41b. In the variable display area change performance A, first, as shown in FIG. 54 (A), the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R, the reserved icon 9A, and the variable icon (the reserved icon) 9C are displayed on the display screen 7a. Here, it is assumed that the special pattern 1 change is executed when the game state is normal (low probability low base state).

The decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R are a set of patterns including a left decorative pattern 8L, a middle decorative pattern 8C, and a right decorative pattern 8R displayed in the horizontally long area YA of the display screen 7a, and the display of the set of patterns indicates the display of the change of the special pattern (special pattern change), and the display of the set of patterns stops to notify the result of the special pattern selection. The decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R are displayed as changes, and correspond to the current special pattern 1 change (the change in question). Here, the change mode of the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R is displayed as the left, middle, and right patterns move from top to bottom, respectively.

Two hold icons 9A are displayed side by side at the bottom of the display screen 7a. The variable icon (the hold icon in question) 9C is displayed in a variable icon display area at the bottom center of the display screen 7a. Here, a pedestal image is displayed below the variable icon display area. Both the hold icon 9A and the variable icon 9C have a round (spherical) shape.

As shown in FIG. 54(B), the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R that were being displayed changeably are displayed as "234". In conjunction with the display of the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R being stopped, the changeable icon (the reserved icon) 9C disappears. Then, the reserved icon 9A at the rightmost position among the reserved icons 9A lined up starts to move toward the variable icon display area where the variable icon 9C is displayed. The remaining reserved icons 9A shift and move. Here, an example is shown in which one reserved icon 9A is added due to a win. Also, here, the display of the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R stops, and the number of changes in the normal state (normal probability state, non-time-saving state, and low base state) reaches 500, and the game state switches to the time-saving state (normal probability state, time-saving state, and high base state).

When the game state is switched to the time-saving state and the next special pattern 1 variation is started, the variation display of the decorative patterns 8x, 8y, and 8z is displayed as shown in FIG. 54 (C). The decorative patterns 8x, 8y, and 8z are a set of patterns including the upper decorative pattern 8x, the middle decorative pattern 8y, and the lower decorative pattern 8z displayed in the vertically long area TA of the display screen 7a, and the variation display of the set of patterns represents the variable display of the special pattern (special pattern variation), and the stop display of the set of patterns notifies the special pattern lottery result. The decorative patterns 8x, 8y, and 8z are displayed in a variable manner and correspond to the special pattern 1 variation (the variation). Here, the variation mode of the decorative patterns 8x, 8y, and 8z is displayed in a variable manner so that the upper, middle, and lower patterns move from the left side to the right side, respectively. The area TA of the display screen 7a is a vertically long area that partially overlaps with the area YA, and the area is approximately the same. Along with the changing display of the decorative patterns 8x, 8y, and 8z, a text image of "vertical mode" is displayed. In other words, it notifies the state in which the decorative patterns are arranged vertically. When switching from FIG. 54(B) to FIG. 54(C), that is, when switching from a state in which the decorative patterns are displayed horizontally to a state in which they are displayed vertically, the background image may also be switched accordingly.

As shown in Figure 54 (D), while the decorative patterns 8x, 8y, and 8z continue to change in area TA of the display screen 7a, a game ball enters the second starting hole 21, and a reserve icon 9B corresponding to the second special pattern reserve is newly displayed on the display screen 7a. In Figure 54 (D), the same background image as in Figure 54 (C) is displayed, while the text image for "vertical mode" disappears.

After that, as shown in FIG. 54(E), the decorative patterns 8x, 8y, and 8z that were being displayed in a changing manner in area TA of the display screen 7a are displayed as stopped at "789". Together with the stopped display of the decorative patterns 8x, 8y, and 8z, the changing icon (the reserved icon in question) 9C disappears. Here, the consumption of the second special reserved pattern is executed in priority to the consumption of the first special reserved pattern, so the two reserved icons 9A that are lined up next to each other remain as they are, and the reserved icon 9B begins to move toward the changing icon display area, and the next special pattern change (special pattern 2 change) begins. The game state remains in the time-saving state.

Then, as shown in FIG. 54(F), decorative patterns 8x, 8y, and 8z are displayed in a changing manner in area TA of display screen 7a. Here, a game ball enters second starting hole 21, and a hold icon 9B corresponding to the second special symbol hold is newly displayed on display screen 7a. When switching from FIG. 54(E) to FIG. 54(F), that is, when the next special symbol change (special symbol 2 change) starts, the background image may also be switched at the same time.

After that, as shown in Figure 54 (G), the decorative patterns 8x, 8y, and 8z, which were being displayed in a variable manner in area TA of the display screen 7a, are displayed as stopped at "567". Together with the stopped display of the decorative patterns 8x, 8y, and 8z, the variable icon (the reserved icon in question) 9C disappears. In Figure 54 (G), the same background image as in Figure 54 (F) is displayed. Here, the consumption of the second special reserved pattern is executed in priority to the consumption of the first special reserved pattern, so the two reserved icons 9A lined up next to each other remain as they are, and the reserved icon 9B begins to move toward the variable icon display area, and the next special pattern variation (special pattern 2 variation) begins. The game state remains in the time-saving state.

When the next special pattern change starts, the change display of the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R is displayed as shown in FIG. 54(H). The decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R are the same as those in FIG. 54(A), and include the left decorative pattern 8L, the center decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R displayed in the horizontally long area YA of the display screen 7a. The decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R are displayed in a changing manner and correspond to the current special pattern 2 change (the change in question). The change mode of the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R is displayed in such a way that the left, center, and right patterns move from top to bottom, respectively. When switching from FIG. 54(G) to FIG. 54(H), that is, when switching from a state in which the decorative patterns are displayed vertically to a state in which they are displayed horizontally, the background image may also be switched.

Here, the display mode of the decorative pattern switches from the decorative patterns 8x, 8y, and 8z in area TA to the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R in area YA depending on the time that has elapsed since the next variation (Figure 54 (C)) that reaches the ceiling (b time reduction (play time)). The timing at which the display mode of the decorative pattern switches can be set arbitrarily. For example, the switch may occur when the reserved icon 9A or reserved icon 9B in a pre-reading changed state becomes the variation icon 9C, or when a predetermined number of variations have been performed after the ceiling is reached. The switch may also occur when the ceiling (b time reduction (play time)) is reached and return when the play time ends.

After that, as shown in FIG. 54(I), the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R, which were being displayed in a changing state in the area YA of the display screen 7a, are displayed as stopped at "735". In conjunction with the stopped display of the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R, the changing icon (the reserved icon in question) 9C disappears. In FIG. 54(I), the same background image as in FIG. 54(H) is displayed. Of the two reserved icons 9A lined up next to each other, the rightmost one 9A starts to move toward the changing icon display area, and the next special pattern change (special pattern 1 change) starts. Here, the game state remains in the time-saving state. When the next special pattern change starts, the changing display of the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R is displayed as shown in FIG. 54(J).

[Variable display area change performance B]
FIG. 55 is a diagram for explaining the variable display area change performance B. The variable display area change performance is a performance in which the display area in which the variable display of the decorative pattern is displayed changes on the display screen 7a when the special pattern 1 changes and when the special pattern 2 changes. The special pattern 1 change means the change of the special pattern in the first special pattern display 41a, and the special pattern 2 change means the change of the special pattern in the second special pattern display 41b. The variable display area change performance B is mainly different from the variable display area change performance A in the change mode of the decorative pattern display area. In the variable display area change performance B, first, as shown in FIG. 55 (A), the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R, the reserved icon 9A, the variable icon (the reserved icon) 9C, and the first background image HK1 are displayed on the display screen 7a. Here, it is assumed that the special pattern 1 change is executed when the game state is normal (low probability low base state).

The decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R are a set of patterns including a left decorative pattern 8L, a middle decorative pattern 8C, and a right decorative pattern 8R displayed in the horizontally long area YA of the display screen 7a, and the display of the set of patterns indicates the display of the change of the special pattern (special pattern change), and the display of the set of patterns stops to notify the result of the special pattern selection. The decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R are displayed as changes, and correspond to the current special pattern 1 change (the change in question). Here, the change mode of the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R is displayed as the left, middle, and right patterns move from top to bottom, respectively.

Two hold icons 9A are displayed side by side at the bottom of the display screen 7a. The variable icon (the hold icon in question) 9C is displayed in a variable icon display area at the bottom center of the display screen 7a. Here, a pedestal image is displayed below the variable icon display area. Both the hold icon 9A and the variable icon 9C have a round (spherical) shape. The first background image HK1 is an oval image, and is displayed on the back side of the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, 8R, the hold icon 9A, and the variable icon (the hold icon in question) 9C.

As shown in FIG. 55(B), the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R, which were being displayed in a variable manner, are displayed as stopped at "234." In conjunction with the stopped display of the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R, the variable icon (the reserved icon in question) 9C disappears. Then, of the reserved icons 9A lined up, the rightmost one 9A starts to move toward the variable icon display area where the variable icon 9C is displayed. The remaining reserved icons 9A shift and move. Here, the stopped display of the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R causes the number of fluctuations in the normal state (normal probability state, non-time-saving state, and low base state) to reach 500, and the game state switches to the time-saving state (normal probability state, time-saving state, and high base state).

When the game state is switched to the time-saving state and the next special pattern 1 change is started, the change display of the decorative patterns 8x, 8y, and 8z is displayed as shown in FIG. 55 (C). The decorative patterns 8x, 8y, and 8z are a set of patterns including an upper decorative pattern 8x, a middle decorative pattern 8y, and a lower decorative pattern 8z displayed in a relatively small horizontally elongated area YB of the display screen 7a, and the change display of the set of patterns represents the variable display of the special pattern (special pattern change), and the stop display of the set of patterns notifies the result of the special pattern lottery. The decorative patterns 8x, 8y, and 8z are displayed in a changeable manner and correspond to the special pattern 1 change (the change). Here, the change mode of the decorative patterns 8x, 8y, and 8z is displayed in a changeable manner such that the left, middle, and right patterns move from the top to the bottom, respectively. Area YB of the display screen 7a is a horizontally elongated area below area YA that does not overlap with area YA, and has a smaller area than area YA. A first mode image MG1 including a text image of "small display mode" is displayed in conjunction with the varying display of decorative patterns 8x, 8y, and 8z. In other words, it notifies the user that the decorative patterns are displayed relatively small. When switching from FIG. 55(B) to FIG. 55(C), that is, when the position and size of the display area of the decorative patterns change, the background image switches from the first background image HK1 to the first mode image MG1.

As shown in FIG. 55(D), while the decorative patterns 8x, 8y, and 8z continue to change and are displayed in the area YB of the display screen 7a, a game ball enters the second starting hole 21, and a new hold icon 9B corresponding to the second special symbol hold is displayed on the display screen 7a. In FIG. 55(D), the display of the first mode image MG1 continues.

After that, as shown in FIG. 55(E), the decorative patterns 8x, 8y, and 8z, which were being displayed in a variable manner in the area YB of the display screen 7a, are displayed as stopped at "567". Together with the stopped display of the decorative patterns 8x, 8y, and 8z, the variable icon (the reserved icon in question) 9C disappears. Here, the consumption of the second special pattern reservation is executed in priority to the consumption of the first special pattern reservation, so the reserved icon 9A remains as it is, and the reserved icon 9B starts to move toward the variable icon display area, and the next special pattern change (special pattern 2 change) starts. The game state remains in the time-saving state, and the display of the first mode image MG1 continues.

Then, as shown in FIG. 55(F), the decorative symbols 8x, 8y, and 8z are displayed in a variable manner in the area YB of the display screen 7a. Here, a game ball enters the second starting hole 21, and a hold icon 9B corresponding to the second special symbol hold is newly displayed on the display screen 7a. In conjunction with the variable display of the decorative symbols 8x, 8y, and 8z, a second mode image MG2 including a text image of "continuous small display mode" is displayed. In other words, this notifies the user that the state in which the decorative symbols are displayed relatively small will continue. When switching from FIG. 55(E) to FIG. 55(F), that is, when the next special symbol variation (special symbol 2 variation) begins, the background image switches from the first mode image MG1 to the second mode image MG2.

After that, as shown in Figure 55 (G), the decorative patterns 8x, 8y, and 8z, which were being displayed in a variable manner in area YB of the display screen 7a, are displayed as stopped at "789". Together with the stopped display of the decorative patterns 8x, 8y, and 8z, the variable icon (the reserved icon in question) 9C disappears. In Figure 55 (G), the display of the second mode image MG2 continues. Here, the consumption of the second special pattern reserved is executed in priority to the consumption of the first special pattern reserved, so the two reserved icons 9A lined up next to each other remain as they are, and the reserved icon 9B begins to move toward the variable icon display area, and the next special pattern variation (special pattern 2 variation) begins. The game state remains in the time-saving state.

When the next special pattern change starts, as shown in FIG. 55(H), the change display of the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R is displayed. The decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R are the same as those in FIG. 55(A), and include the left decorative pattern 8L, the center decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R displayed in the horizontally long area YA of the display screen 7a. The decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R are displayed in a changing manner, and correspond to the current special pattern 2 change (the change in question). The change mode of the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R is displayed in such a way that the left, center, and right patterns move from top to bottom, respectively. Here, a game ball has entered the second starting hole 21, and a hold icon 9B corresponding to the second special pattern hold is newly displayed on the display screen 7a.

A second background image HK2 having a gourd shape is displayed in conjunction with the changing display of the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R. The second background image HK2 is displayed behind the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R, the hold icon 9A, and the changing icon (the hold icon in question) 9C. When switching from FIG. 55(G) to FIG. 55(H), that is, when the size of the decorative pattern switches from a small state to a large state, the background image also switches from the second mode image MG2 to the second background image HK2.

Here, the display mode of the decorative pattern switches from the decorative patterns 8x, 8y, and 8z in area YB to the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R in area YA depending on the time that has elapsed since the next variation (Figure 55 (C)) that reaches the ceiling (b time reduction (play time)). The timing at which the display mode of the decorative pattern switches can be set arbitrarily. For example, the switch may occur when the reserved icon 9A or reserved icon 9B in a pre-reading changed state becomes the variation icon 9C, or when a predetermined number of variations have been performed after the ceiling is reached. The switch may also occur when the ceiling (b time reduction (play time)) is reached and return when the play time ends.

After that, as shown in FIG. 55(I), the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R, which were displayed in a changing state in the area YA of the display screen 7a, are displayed as stopped at "735". In conjunction with the stopped display of the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R, the changing icon (the reserved icon) 9C disappears. In FIG. 55(I), the display of the second background image HK2 continues. Here, the consumption of the second special reserved symbol is executed in priority to the consumption of the first special reserved symbol, so the reserved icon 9A remains as it is, and the reserved icon 9B starts to move toward the changing icon display area, and the next special symbol change (special symbol 2 change) starts. The game state remains in the time-saving state. When the next special symbol change starts, the changing display of the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R is displayed as shown in FIG. 55(J).

[Variable display area change performance C]
FIG. 56 is a diagram for explaining the variable display area change performance C. The variable display area change performance is a performance in which the display area in which the variable display of the decorative pattern is displayed changes on the display screen 7a when the special pattern 1 changes and when the special pattern 2 changes. The special pattern 1 change means the change of the special pattern in the first special pattern display 41a, and the special pattern 2 change means the change of the special pattern in the second special pattern display 41b. The variable display area change performance C is mainly different from the variable display area change performance A in the change mode of the display area of the decorative pattern. In the variable display area change performance C, first, as shown in FIG. 56 (A), the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R, the reserved icon 9A, the variable icon (the reserved icon) 9C, and the frame image WK are displayed on the display screen 7a. Here, it is assumed that the special pattern 1 change is executed when the game state is normal (low probability low base state).

The decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R are a set of patterns including a left decorative pattern 8L, a center decorative pattern 8C, and a right decorative pattern 8R displayed inside the frame image WK, and the display of the set of patterns changes to indicate the display of the change in the special pattern (special pattern change), and the display of the set of patterns stops to notify the result of the special pattern selection. The decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R are displayed as changes, and correspond to the current special pattern 1 change (the change in question). Here, the change mode of the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R is displayed as the left, center, and right patterns move from top to bottom, respectively.

Two hold icons 9A are displayed side by side at the bottom of the display screen 7a. The variable icon (the hold icon in question) 9C is displayed in a variable icon display area at the bottom center of the display screen 7a. Here, a pedestal image is displayed below the variable icon display area. Both the hold icon 9A and the variable icon 9C have a round (spherical) shape. The frame image WK is an image with a horizontally long rectangular shape, and is displayed on the back side of the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R, with the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R displayed inside.

As shown in FIG. 56(B), the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R, which were being displayed in a variable manner, are displayed as stopped at "234." In conjunction with the stopped display of the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R, the variable icon (the reserved icon in question) 9C disappears. Then, of the reserved icons 9A lined up, the rightmost one 9A starts to move toward the variable icon display area where the variable icon 9C is displayed. The remaining reserved icons 9A shift and move. Here, the stopped display of the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R causes the number of fluctuations in the normal state (normal probability state, non-time-saving state, and low base state) to reach 500, and the game state switches to the time-saving state (normal probability state, time-saving state, and high base state).

When the game state switches to the time-saving state and the next special pattern 1 variation starts, as shown in FIG. 56(C), a shutter appears inside the frame image WK, moving from top to bottom, and as the shutter closes, the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R gradually become invisible.

When the shutter is completely closed, as shown in FIG. 56(D), the decorative patterns 8x, 8y, and 8z are displayed on the shutter. The decorative patterns 8x, 8y, and 8z are a set of patterns including an upper decorative pattern 8x, a middle decorative pattern 8y, and a lower decorative pattern 8z displayed in a relatively small horizontally elongated area SA of the display screen 7a. The display of the set of patterns indicates the variable display of the special pattern (special pattern change), and the stop display of the set of patterns notifies the result of the special pattern lottery. The decorative patterns 8x, 8y, and 8z are displayed in a variable manner and correspond to the special pattern 1 change (the change in question). Here, the change mode of the decorative patterns 8x, 8y, and 8z is displayed in a variable manner such that the left, center, and right patterns move from the top to the bottom, respectively. The area SA of the display screen 7a is inside the frame image WK, is a horizontally elongated area overlapping with the shutter image, and has an area smaller than the frame image WK. The background image may be switched between Figures 56(B) and 56(D), i.e., when the position and size of the display area of the decorative pattern changes.

As shown in FIG. 56 (D), while the decorative patterns 8x, 8y, and 8z continue to change and are displayed in the area SA of the display screen 7a, a game ball enters the second starting hole 21, and a new hold icon 9B corresponding to the second special symbol hold is displayed on the display screen 7a.

After that, as shown in FIG. 56(E), the decorative patterns 8x, 8y, and 8z that were being displayed in a changing manner in area SA of display screen 7a are displayed as stopped at "567". Together with the stopped display of decorative patterns 8x, 8y, and 8z, the changing icon (the reserved icon in question) 9C disappears. Here, since the consumption of the second special reserved pattern is executed in priority to the consumption of the first special reserved pattern, the reserved icon 9A remains as it is, and the reserved icon 9B starts to move toward the changing icon display area, and the next special pattern change (special pattern 2 change) begins. The game state remains in the time-saving state.

Then, as shown in FIG. 56(F), the decorative patterns 8x, 8y, and 8z are displayed in a variable manner in the area SA of the display screen 7a. When switching from FIG. 56(E) to FIG. 56(F), that is, when the next special pattern variation (special pattern 2 variation) starts, the background image may be switched.

After that, as shown in FIG. 56(G), the decorative patterns 8x, 8y, and 8z that were being displayed in a changing manner in area SA of display screen 7a are displayed as stopped at "789". Together with the stopped display of decorative patterns 8x, 8y, and 8z, the changing icon (the reserved icon in question) 9C disappears. Here, since the consumption of the second special chart reserved is executed in priority to the consumption of the first special chart reserved, the two reserved icons 9A that are lined up next to each other remain as they are, and the reserved icon 9B begins to move toward the changing icon display area, and the next special chart change (special chart 2 change) begins. The game state remains in the time-saving state.

When the next special pattern change starts, as shown in FIG. 56 (H), the shutter moves upward inside the frame image WK, and as the shutter opens, the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R gradually become visible. The decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R are displayed frozen at "789," the same as the decorative patterns 8x, 8y, and 8z.

When the shutter is fully opened, as shown in FIG. 56(I), the stop display of "789" of the decorative patterns 8x, 8y, and 8z disappears, and the changing display of the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R is displayed. The decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R are the same as those in FIG. 56(A), and include the left decorative pattern 8L, the center decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R displayed inside the frame image WK. The decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R are displayed in a changing manner, and correspond to the current special pattern 2 change (the change in question). The changing manner of the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R is displayed in a changing manner such that the left, center, and right patterns move from the top to the bottom, respectively. The background image may be switched between FIG. 56(G) and FIG. 56(I), that is, when the position and size of the display area of the decorative patterns change.

Here, the display mode of the decorative pattern switches from the decorative patterns 8x, 8y, and 8z in area SA to the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R inside the frame image WK depending on the time that has elapsed since the next change (Figure 56 (C)) that reaches the ceiling (b time reduction (play time)). The timing at which the display mode of the decorative pattern switches can be set arbitrarily. For example, the switch may occur when the reserved icon 9A or reserved icon 9B in a pre-reading changed state becomes the change icon 9C, or when a predetermined number of changes have been performed after the ceiling is reached. Also, the switch may occur (the shutter closes) when the ceiling (b time reduction (play time)) is reached, and return (the shutter rises) when the play time ends.

After that, as shown in Figure 56 (J), the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R, which were being displayed inside the frame image WK, are displayed as stopped at "735". In conjunction with the stopped display of the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R, the variable icon (the reserved icon in question) 9C disappears. In Figure 56 (J), the same background image as in Figure 56 (I) is displayed. The reserved icon 9A starts to move toward the variable icon display area, and the next special pattern variation (special pattern 1 variation) begins. Here, the game state remains in the time-saving state. When the next special pattern variation begins, the variable display of the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R is displayed.

[Example of effect]
Below are some examples of the effects of the variable display area change presentation.
[Effect 1]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in Fig. 54 (C) to (G), a first performance in which a set of decorative patterns 8x, 8y, and 8z corresponding to the special pattern 1 change is displayed in the area TA of the display screen 7a, and a second performance in which a set of decorative patterns 8x, 8y, and 8z corresponding to the special pattern 2 change is displayed in the area TA in the special pattern change next to the special pattern change executed in the first performance can be executed. According to this configuration, it is possible to visually entertain the player with an unprecedented and novel performance, and to improve the interest. The same is true for Fig. 55 and Fig. 56.
[Effect 2]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in Figures 54(A)-(B), in the special chart change before the special chart 1 change executed in the first performance, a third performance can be executed in which a set of decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R corresponding to the special chart 1 change is displayed in an area YA of the display screen 7a different from the area TA. According to this configuration, a novel performance that has never been seen before can visually entertain the player, and can increase the interest. The same applies to Figures 55 and 56.
[Effect 3]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in Fig. 54 (C) to (H), in the special chart change after the special chart 2 change executed in the second performance, a fourth performance can be executed in which a set of decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R corresponding to the special chart 2 change is displayed in the area YA. According to this configuration, a novel performance that has never been seen before can visually entertain the player, and can increase the interest. The same applies to Fig. 55 and Fig. 56.
[Effect 4]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in Fig. 54, the first effect (time-saving state) and the third effect (normal state) are different game states, and the first effect (time-saving state) and the second effect (time-saving state) are the same game state. With this configuration, the player can be visually entertained by the unprecedented novel effect, and the interest can be improved. The same is true for Figs. 55 and 56.
[Effect 5]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in Figures 54 to 56, the first effect and the third effect have different background images, and the first effect and the second effect have different background images. With this configuration, the player can be visually entertained by the unprecedented novel effects, and the interest can be increased.
[Effect 6]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in Fig. 54, the area YA and the area TA are partially overlapped. With this configuration, a novel presentation that has never been seen before can be provided to the player visually, and the player's interest can be enhanced. The same is true for Fig. 56.
[Effect 7]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, in the first and second effects, a set of decorative symbols is displayed in a third area of the display screen 7a, which is different from the first and second areas, as shown in Modification 2. With this configuration, a novel effect not seen in the past can visually entertain the player, and can increase the player's interest.

[Modification]
Below, modified examples of the variable display area change presentation are shown.
[Modification 1]
In the variable display area change performance A, the variable display of the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R1 in the area YA and the variable display of the decorative patterns 8x, 8y, and 8z in the area TA may be executed in one change. That is, during one change, the variable display of the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R1 in the area YA may be switched to the variable display of the decorative patterns 8x, 8y, and 8z in the area TA, or during one change, the variable display of the decorative patterns 8x, 8y, and 8z in the area TA may be switched to the variable display of the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R1 in the area YA. The same is true for the variable display area change performances B and C.

[Modification 2]
In the variable display area change performance A, when the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R are displayed in the area YA, and when the decorative patterns 8x, 8y, and 8z are displayed in the area TA, decorative patterns other than the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R and the decorative patterns 8x, 8y, and 8z may be displayed in an area of the display screen 7a different from the area YA and the area TA. The same applies to the variable display area change performances B and C.

[Modification 3]
In the variable display area change performances A to C, the special chart 1 change and the special chart 2 change may be reversed. That is, in the variable display area change performances A to C, the part described as the special chart 1 change may be executed as the special chart 2 change, and the part described as the special chart 2 change may be executed as the special chart 1 change.

[Example of embodiment]
In the gaming machine of this embodiment, the following aspects can be realized.
◇[Aspect A2-1]
A gaming machine having a display means capable of displaying a plurality of types of images,
One of the plurality of types of images is a set of decorative patterns capable of informing winning or losing,
A first performance in which a change display of the set of decorative patterns corresponding to one of the special pattern changes of the special pattern 1 change and the special pattern 2 change is displayed in a first area of the display means;
A second performance in which a change display of the set of decorative patterns corresponding to the other of the special pattern change 1 and the special pattern change 2 is displayed in the first area in the special pattern change next to the special pattern change executed in the first performance;
A gaming machine characterized by:
◇[Aspect A2-2]
The gaming machine according to Aspect A2-1,
In the special pattern change before the special pattern change executed in the first performance, the change display of the set of decorative patterns corresponding to one of the special pattern changes of the special pattern 1 change and the special pattern 2 change is displayed in a second area of the display means different from the first area, a third performance can be executed.
A gaming machine characterized by:
◇[Aspect A2-3]
The gaming machine according to aspect A2-2,
In the special chart change after the special chart change executed in the second performance, a fourth performance in which a change display of the set of decorative patterns corresponding to the other special chart change of the special chart 1 change and the special chart 2 change is displayed in the second area can be executed.
A gaming machine characterized by:
◇[Aspect A2-4]
A gaming machine according to Aspect A2-2 or A2-3,
The first effect and the third effect are different in game state, and the first effect and the second effect are the same in game state.
A gaming machine characterized by:
◇[Aspect A2-5]
A gaming machine according to any one of Aspects A2-2 to A2-4,
The first effect and the third effect have different background images, and the first effect and the second effect have different background images.
A gaming machine characterized by:
◇[Aspect A2-6]
A gaming machine according to any one of Aspects A2-2 to A2-5,
The first region and the second region partially overlap each other.
A gaming machine characterized by:
◇[Aspect A2-7]
A gaming machine according to any one of Aspects A2-1 to A2-6,
In the first and second performances, a variable display of the set of decorative symbols is displayed in a third area of the display means different from the first and second areas.
A gaming machine characterized by:

The variable display area overlapping effects A to C are explained below using Figures 57 to 59. These variable display area overlapping effects are executed during the variable display of decorative patterns, etc. In other words, the image control microcomputer 101 analyzes the command received from the sub-control board 90, and if it contains an instruction to execute the variable display area overlapping effect, it reads out the corresponding image data from the ROM 103 and displays the image on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 and the sub-display screen 64 (right sub-display screen 64R, left sub-display screen 64L, and upper sub-display screen 64U).

[Variable display area overlap effect A]
FIG. 57 is a diagram for explaining the variable display area overlap performance A. The variable display area overlap performance is a performance in which a decorative pattern in the same state as the decorative pattern in the first area is newly displayed in the second area of the display screen 7a while the display of the decorative pattern is maintained in the first area of the display screen 7a. In the variable display area overlap performance A, first, as shown in FIG. 57 (A), the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R, the reserved icon 9A, and the variable icon (the reserved icon) 9C are displayed on the display screen 7a. Here, it is assumed that the special chart 1 variation is executed when the game state is normal (low probability low base state).

The decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R are a set of patterns including a left decorative pattern 8L, a center decorative pattern 8C, and a right decorative pattern 8R displayed in the first area DA1 of the display screen 7a, and the variable display of the set of patterns represents the variable display of the special pattern (special pattern variation), and the stationary display of the set of patterns notifies the result of the special pattern selection. The special pattern here may be either the first special pattern or the second special pattern. The decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R are displayed in a variable manner, and correspond to the current special pattern variation (the variation in question). Here, the variation mode of the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R is displayed in a variable manner such that the left, center, and right patterns move from top to bottom, respectively.

Four hold icons 9A are displayed lined up horizontally at the bottom of the display screen 7a. The variable icon (the hold icon in question) 9C is displayed in a variable icon display area at the bottom center of the display screen 7a. Here, a pedestal image is displayed below the variable icon display area. Both the hold icon 9A and the variable icon 9C have a round (spherical) shape.

As shown in FIG. 57(B), the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R that were displayed in a variable manner are displayed as stopped at "234". In accordance with the display of the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R in a stopped state, the decorative patterns 8l, 8c, and 8r are newly displayed in a state in which they are displayed as stopped at "234". The decorative patterns 8l, 8c, and 8r are a set of patterns including the left decorative pattern 8l, the middle decorative pattern 8c, and the right decorative pattern 8r displayed in the second area DA2 of the display screen 7a, and are in the same state as the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R. The same state here means that the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R change when they change and stop when they stop, and correspond to the same special pattern change. In other words, the decorative patterns 8l, 8c, and 8r and the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R are in a synchronized state with each other. The decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R and the decorative patterns 8l, 8c, and 8r may have the same pattern switching (changing pattern) during changing display, or may be different from each other. Here, the changing pattern of the decorative patterns 8l, 8c, and 8r is displayed so that the left, center, and right patterns move from top to bottom, similar to the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R. The changing pattern of the decorative patterns 8l, 8c, and 8r may be displayed so that the left, center, and right patterns rotate horizontally with the vertical direction as the rotation axis, for example.

When decorative patterns 8l, 8c, and 8r are newly displayed in a stopped display mode, decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R are maintained in a stopped display state. Here, decorative patterns 8l, 8c, and 8r are newly displayed in a stopped display mode almost simultaneously with the stopped display of decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R, but decorative patterns 8l, 8c, and 8r may be newly displayed in a stopped display mode a while (e.g., 1 to 3 seconds) after decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R are stopped. Also, when decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R are still displaying variably just before they stop, decorative patterns 8l, 8c, and 8r in a variably displayed state may be newly displayed and stopped at the same time as decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R stop.

The second area DA2 of the display screen 7a is located below the first area DA1 and is a different area that does not overlap with the first area DA1. Therefore, the variable display of the decorative patterns 8l, 8c, and 8r in the second area DA2 does not overlap with the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R displayed stationary in the first area DA1. The decorative patterns 8l, 8c, and 8r may be displayed at least partially overlapping with the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R, and in that case, they may be displayed in front of or behind the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R.

In conjunction with the stopping of the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R, the variable icon (the pending icon in question) 9C disappears. Then, of the pending icons 9A lined up, the rightmost one 9A begins to move toward the variable icon display area in which the variable icon 9C is displayed. The remaining pending icons 9A shift and move.

As shown in FIG. 57(C), when the next special pattern change starts, the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, 8R and the decorative patterns 8l, 8c, 8r are displayed at the same time. After that, as shown in FIG. 57(D), the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, 8R and the decorative patterns 8l, 8c, 8r are displayed at the same time as stopping at "567". The timing at which the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, 8R and the decorative patterns 8l, 8c, 8r start changing and the timing at which they stop may be different. In accordance with the stopping of the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, 8R and the decorative patterns 8l, 8c, 8r, the changing icon (the reserved icon) 9C disappears. Then, the rightmost reserved icon 9A among the reserved icons 9A lined up starts moving toward the changing icon display area where the changing icon 9C is displayed. The remaining reserved icons 9A shift and move.

As shown in FIG. 57(E), when the next special pattern change starts, the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R that were displayed as stopped in the first area DA1 disappear, and the decorative patterns 8l, 8c, and 8r that were displayed as stopped in the second area DA2 change and are displayed. After that, as shown in FIG. 57(F), the decorative patterns 8l, 8c, and 8r are displayed as stopped at "789." In conjunction with the stopped display of the decorative patterns 8l, 8c, and 8r, the changing icon (the reserved icon in question) 9C disappears. Then, of the reserved icons 9A lined up, the rightmost one 9A starts to move toward the changing icon display area where the changing icon 9C is displayed. The remaining reserved icons 9A shift and move.

As shown in FIG. 57(G), when the next special pattern change starts, decorative patterns 8l, 8c, and 8r are displayed in a changing state. During the display of decorative patterns 8l, 8c, and 8r, decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R are displayed in a changing state in the first area DA1 as shown in FIG. 57(H). That is, here, a performance is executed in which decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R are displayed in the same state as decorative patterns 8l, 8c, and 8r. The timing at which decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R appear is a predetermined time after the display of the changing decorative patterns 8l, 8c, and 8r is displayed. The timing at which decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R appear may be the same as the display of the changing decorative patterns 8l, 8c, and 8r.

After that, as shown in FIG. 57(I), decorative patterns 8L, 8C, 8R and decorative patterns 8l, 8c, 8r are simultaneously displayed stopped at "735". The timing of the stopped display of decorative patterns 8L, 8C, 8R and decorative patterns 8l, 8c, 8r may be different. In conjunction with the stopped display of decorative patterns 8L, 8C, 8R and decorative patterns 8l, 8c, 8r, the variable icon (the reserved icon in question) 9C disappears. Then, reserved icon 9A begins to move toward the variable icon display area where variable icon 9C is displayed.

As shown in FIG. 57(J), when the next special pattern change starts, the decorative patterns 8l, 8c, and 8r that were statically displayed in the second area DA2 disappear, and the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R that were statically displayed in the first area DA1 change and are displayed. The state in FIG. 57(J) is the same as FIG. 57(A), and then changes to the state in FIG. 57(B).

[Variable display area overlap effect B]
FIG. 58 is a diagram for explaining the variable display area overlap performance B. The variable display area overlap performance is a performance in which a decorative pattern in the same state as the decorative pattern in the first area is newly displayed in the second area of the display screen 7a while the display of the decorative pattern is maintained in the first area of the display screen 7a. The variable display area overlap performance B is mainly different from the variable display area overlap performance A in that a plurality of sets of decorative patterns are displayed overlapping each other. In the variable display area overlap performance B, first, as shown in FIG. 58 (A), the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R, the reserved icon 9A, and the variable icon (the reserved icon) 9C are displayed on the display screen 7a. Here, it is assumed that the special chart 1 change is executed when the game state is normal (low probability low base state).

The decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R are a set of patterns including a left decorative pattern 8L, a center decorative pattern 8C, and a right decorative pattern 8R displayed in the first area DA1 of the display screen 7a, and the variable display of the set of patterns represents the variable display of the special pattern (special pattern variation), and the stationary display of the set of patterns notifies the result of the special pattern selection. The special pattern here may be either the first special pattern or the second special pattern. The decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R are displayed in a variable manner, and correspond to the current special pattern variation (the variation in question). Here, the variation mode of the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R is displayed in a variable manner such that the left, center, and right patterns move from top to bottom, respectively.

Four hold icons 9A are displayed lined up horizontally at the bottom of the display screen 7a. The variable icon (the hold icon in question) 9C is displayed in a variable icon display area at the bottom center of the display screen 7a. Here, a pedestal image is displayed below the variable icon display area. Both the hold icon 9A and the variable icon 9C have a round (spherical) shape.

As shown in FIG. 58(B), during the variable display of the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R, the decorative patterns 8l, 8c, and 8r are newly displayed in a variable display state. That is, a performance is executed in which the decorative patterns 8l, 8c, and 8r are newly displayed in the same state as the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R. The decorative patterns 8l, 8c, and 8r are a set of patterns including the left decorative pattern 8l, the middle decorative pattern 8c, and the right decorative pattern 8r displayed in the second area DA2 of the display screen 7a, and are in the same state as the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R. The same state here means that the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R vary when they vary and stop when they stop, corresponding to the same special pattern variation. That is, the decorative patterns 8l, 8c, and 8r and the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R are in a synchronized state with each other. The decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R and the decorative patterns 8l, 8c, and 8r may have the same pattern switching (changing pattern) during changing display, or may be different from each other. Here, the changing pattern of the decorative patterns 8l, 8c, and 8r is displayed so that the left, center, and right patterns move from top to bottom, similar to the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R. The changing pattern of the decorative patterns 8l, 8c, and 8r may be displayed so that the left, center, and right patterns rotate horizontally with the vertical direction as the rotation axis, for example.

The timing at which decorative patterns 8l, 8c, and 8r appear is a predetermined time (e.g., 1 to 3 seconds) after the display of the changing decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R. Note that the timing at which decorative patterns 8l, 8c, and 8r appear may be the same as the display of the changing decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R.

The second area DA2 of the display screen 7a is an area that partially overlaps with the first area DA1. Therefore, the changing display of the decorative patterns 8l, 8c, and 8r in the second area DA2 is displayed partially overlapping with the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R in the first area DA1. Here, the decorative patterns 8l, 8c, and 8r in the second area DA2 are displayed in front of the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R in the first area DA1. Note that the decorative patterns 8l, 8c, and 8r may be displayed behind the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R, or may entirely overlap the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R.

After the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, 8R and the decorative patterns 8l, 8c, 8r are displayed in a variable manner, as shown in FIG. 58(C), the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, 8R and the decorative patterns 8l, 8c, 8r are simultaneously displayed as stopped at "234". The timing of the stopped display of the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, 8R and the decorative patterns 8l, 8c, 8r may be shifted. In conjunction with the stopped display of the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, 8R and the decorative patterns 8l, 8c, 8r, the variable icon (the reserved icon in question) 9C disappears. Then, of the reserved icons 9A lined up, the rightmost reserved icon 9A starts to move toward the variable icon display area where the variable icon 9C is displayed. The remaining reserved icons 9A shift and move.

As shown in FIG. 58(D), when the next special pattern change starts, the decorative patterns 8l, 8c, and 8r that were statically displayed in the second area DA2 disappear, and the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R that were statically displayed in the first area DA1 change. After that, as shown in FIG. 58(E), while the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R are changing, the decorative patterns 8l, 8c, and 8r are newly displayed in a changing state. In other words, similar to FIG. 58(B), an effect is executed in which the decorative patterns 8l, 8c, and 8r are newly displayed in the same state as the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R.

After the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, 8R and the decorative patterns 8l, 8c, 8r are displayed in a variable manner, as shown in FIG. 58(F), the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, 8R and the decorative patterns 8l, 8c, 8r are simultaneously displayed in a stopped state at "789". As in FIG. 58(C), the timing at which the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, 8R and the decorative patterns 8l, 8c, 8r start to change and the timing at which they stop may differ. In conjunction with the stopped display of the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, 8R and the decorative patterns 8l, 8c, 8r, the variable icon (the reserved icon in question) 9C disappears. Then, the rightmost reserved icon 9A among the reserved icons 9A lined up starts to move toward the variable icon display area where the variable icon 9C is displayed. The remaining reserved icons 9A shift and move.

As shown in FIG. 58(G), when the next special pattern change starts, similar to FIG. 58(D), the decorative patterns 8l, 8c, and 8r that were statically displayed in the second area DA2 disappear, and the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R that were statically displayed in the first area DA1 change and are displayed. After that, as shown in FIG. 58(H), while the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R are changing and displayed, the decorative patterns 8l, 8c, and 8r are newly displayed in a changing state. In other words, similar to FIG. 58(B)(E), an effect is executed in which the decorative patterns 8l, 8c, and 8r are newly displayed in the same state as the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R.

After the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, 8R and the decorative patterns 8l, 8c, 8r are displayed in a variable manner, as shown in FIG. 58(I), the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, 8R and the decorative patterns 8l, 8c, 8r are simultaneously displayed in a stopped state at "735". As in FIG. 58(C)(F), the timings at which the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, 8R and the decorative patterns 8l, 8c, 8r start to change and the timings at which they are displayed in a stopped state may differ. After the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, 8R and the decorative patterns 8l, 8c, 8r are displayed in a stopped state, the front side and the back side are switched. Here, the stopped display of the decorative patterns 8l, 8c, 8r is displayed in front of the stopped display of the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, 8R, and then the stopped display of the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, 8R is switched to the back side of the stopped display of the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, 8R. After that, the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R and the decorative patterns 8l, 8c, and 8r are displayed with the front and back sides swapped. This front and back side swapping effect continues for multiple changes. The timing at which this swapping effect starts can be set arbitrarily. For example, it may be executed when the change corresponding to the change icon 9C in the pre-reading changed state occurs, or it may be executed when the ceiling is reached.

[Variable display area overlap effect C]
FIG. 59 is a diagram for explaining the variable display area overlap performance C. The variable display area overlap performance is a performance in which a decorative pattern in the same state as the decorative pattern in the first area is newly displayed in the second area of the display screen 7a while the display of the decorative pattern is maintained in the first area of the display screen 7a. The variable display area overlap performance C is mainly different from the variable display area overlap performance A in that a plurality of sets of decorative patterns are displayed overlapping each other. In the variable display area overlap performance C, first, as shown in FIG. 59 (A), the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R, the reserved icon 9A, the variable icon (the reserved icon) 9C, and the specific image IMG are displayed on the display screen 7a. Here, it is assumed that the special chart 1 change is executed when the game state is normal (low probability low base state).

The decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R are a set of patterns including a left decorative pattern 8L, a center decorative pattern 8C, and a right decorative pattern 8R displayed in the first area DA1 of the display screen 7a, and the variable display of the set of patterns represents the variable display of the special pattern (special pattern variation), and the stationary display of the set of patterns notifies the result of the special pattern selection. The special pattern here may be either the first special pattern or the second special pattern. The decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R are displayed in a variable manner, and correspond to the current special pattern variation (the variation in question). Here, the variation mode of the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R is displayed in a variable manner such that the left, center, and right patterns move from top to bottom, respectively.

Four hold icons 9A are displayed lined up horizontally at the bottom of the display screen 7a. The variable icon (the hold icon in question) 9C is displayed in a variable icon display area at the bottom center of the display screen 7a. Here, a pedestal image is displayed below the variable icon display area. Both the hold icon 9A and the variable icon 9C have a round (spherical) shape. The specific image IMG is an oval image, and is displayed on the back side of the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, 8R, the hold icon 9A, and the variable icon (the hold icon in question) 9C.

As shown in FIG. 59(B), the specific image IMG disappears while the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R are being displayed and changed. The specific image IMG may disappear by becoming smaller in size, may move out of the frame, or may fade out. It may also disappear after being split into multiple pieces. The timing at which the specific image IMG disappears can be set arbitrarily. For example, the specific image IMG may appear and disappear randomly for each change pattern, or may appear and disappear when a predetermined number of changes have occurred.

When the specific image IMG disappears, the decorative patterns 8l, 8c, and 8r that were hidden by the specific image IMG are displayed. In other words, the decorative patterns 8l, 8c, and 8r are displayed behind the specific image IMG, and the disappearance of the specific image IMG causes the effect to be executed.

The decorative patterns 8l, 8c, and 8r are newly displayed in a state of being displayed in a variable manner. That is, the decorative patterns 8l, 8c, and 8r are newly displayed in the same state as the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R. The decorative patterns 8l, 8c, and 8r are a set of patterns including the left decorative pattern 8l, the middle decorative pattern 8c, and the right decorative pattern 8r displayed in the second area DA2 of the display screen 7a, and are in the same state as the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R. The same state here means that the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R change when changing and stop when stopping, and correspond to the same special pattern change. That is, the decorative patterns 8l, 8c, and 8r and the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R are in a synchronized state with each other. The decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R and the decorative patterns 8l, 8c, and 8r may have the same pattern switching (changing pattern) during changing display, or may be different from each other. Here, the changing pattern of the decorative patterns 8l, 8c, and 8r is displayed so that the left, center, and right patterns move from top to bottom, similar to the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R. The changing pattern of the decorative patterns 8l, 8c, and 8r may be displayed so that the left, center, and right patterns rotate horizontally with the vertical direction as the rotation axis, for example.

The specific image IMG disappears and the decorative patterns 8l, 8c, and 8r appear a predetermined time (e.g., 1 to 3 seconds) after the changing display of the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R is displayed.

The second area DA2 of the display screen 7a overlaps with the first area DA1. Therefore, the changing display of the decorative patterns 8l, 8c, and 8r in the second area DA2 is displayed overlapping with the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R in the first area DA1. Here, the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R in the first area DA1 are displayed in front of the decorative patterns 8l, 8c, and 8r in the second area DA2. Note that the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R may also be displayed behind the decorative patterns 8l, 8c, and 8r.

After the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, 8R and the decorative patterns 8l, 8c, 8r are displayed in a variable manner, as shown in FIG. 59(C), the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, 8R and the decorative patterns 8l, 8c, 8r are simultaneously displayed as stopped at "234". The timing of the stopped display of the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, 8R and the decorative patterns 8l, 8c, 8r may be shifted. In conjunction with the stopped display of the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, 8R and the decorative patterns 8l, 8c, 8r, the variable icon (the reserved icon in question) 9C disappears. Then, of the reserved icons 9A lined up, the rightmost one 9A starts to move toward the variable icon display area where the variable icon 9C is displayed. The remaining reserved icons 9A shift and move.

As shown in FIG. 59(D), when the next special pattern change starts, the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R that were displayed as stopped in the first area DA1 disappear, and the decorative patterns 8l, 8c, and 8r that were displayed as stopped in the second area DA2 change and are displayed. After that, as shown in FIG. 59(E), the decorative patterns 8l, 8c, and 8r are displayed as stopped at "567." In conjunction with the stopped display of the decorative patterns 8l, 8c, and 8r, the changing icon (the reserved icon in question) 9C disappears. Then, of the reserved icons 9A lined up, the rightmost one 9A starts to move toward the changing icon display area where the changing icon 9C is displayed. The remaining reserved icons 9A shift and move.

As shown in FIG. 59(F), while the decorative patterns 8l, 8c, and 8r are being displayed in a changing state, the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R are newly displayed in a changing state. The timing at which the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R are newly displayed may be a predetermined time after the decorative patterns 8l, 8c, and 8r start to change (e.g., 1 to 3 seconds), or the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R may be newly displayed in a changing state at the same time that the decorative patterns 8l, 8c, and 8r start to change.

As shown in FIG. 59(G), while decorative patterns 8l, 8c, and 8r and decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R are all displayed in a variable manner, a specific image IMG is newly displayed. The timing at which the specific image IMG appears can be set arbitrarily. For example, the specific image IMG may appear and disappear randomly for each variable pattern, or the specific image IMG may appear and disappear when a predetermined number of variations have occurred.

The specific image IMG is displayed in front of the decorative patterns 8l, 8c, and 8r, and behind the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R. Therefore, when the specific image IMG is displayed, the decorative patterns 8l, 8c, and 8r are covered by the specific image IMG and disappear, and the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R are displayed in front of the specific image IMG. The specific image IMG may appear by framing in or fading in. It may also appear enlarged.

After that, as shown in FIG. 59(H), the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R are displayed as "735". With the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R displayed as stopped, the display of the specific image IMG disappears again as shown in FIG. 59(I). The method of disappearing the specific image IMG may be the same as that of FIG. 59(B), or may be different. When the display of the specific image IMG disappears, the decorative patterns 8l, 8c, and 8r that were covered and hidden by the specific image IMG are displayed. That is, the decorative patterns 8l, 8c, and 8r are displayed on the back side of the specific image IMG, and a performance is executed in which the decorative patterns 8l, 8c, and 8r become visible by disappearing the specific image IMG. The decorative patterns 8l, 8c, and 8r are newly displayed in a stopped state. That is, a performance is executed in which the decorative patterns 8l, 8c, and 8r are newly displayed in the same state as the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R.

After that, as shown in FIG. 59(J), when the next special pattern change starts, the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R that were statically displayed in the first area DA1 disappear, and the decorative patterns 8l, 8c, and 8r that were statically displayed in the second area DA2 change and are displayed. The state in FIG. 59(J) is the same as FIG. 59(D), and then changes to the state in FIG. 59(E).

[Example of effect]
Below are some examples of the effects of the overlapping variable display areas.
[Effect 1]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in Fig. 57 (A), (B), (G), and (H), a first effect is displayed in the first area DA1 of the display screen 7a, in which a set of decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are displayed in a variable display, and after the first effect, a second effect is displayed in the second area DA2 of the display screen 7a, which is different from the first area DA1, in a state in which the display of the set of decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R is maintained in the first area DA1, in which another set of decorative symbols 8l, 8c, and 8r in the same variable or stopped state as the variable or stopped state of the set of decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R displayed in the first area DA1 is newly displayed. According to this configuration, a novel effect that has never been seen before can visually entertain the player, and can improve the interest. The same applies to Figs. 58 and 59.
[Effect 2]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in Fig. 57 (A) (B) (G) to (I), in the second performance, when a set of decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R displayed in the first area DA1 is displayed in a variable manner, another set of decorative symbols 8l, 8c, 8r is displayed in the second area DA2 in a variable manner, and after the second performance, a third performance can be executed in which a set of decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R displayed in the first area DA1 and another set of decorative symbols 8l, 8c, 8r displayed in the second area DA2 are both displayed in a stationary manner. According to this configuration, a novel performance that has never been seen before can visually entertain the player, and can increase the interest. The same applies to Figs. 58 and 59.
[Effect 3]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in Fig. 57 (D), (E), (G) to (J), after the third performance, another set of decorative symbols 8l, 8c, and 8r displayed in the second area DA2 are displayed again in a variable manner, while the set of decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R displayed in the first area DA1 disappear without being displayed in a variable manner, which is a fourth performance. With this configuration, a novel performance that has never been seen before can visually entertain the player, and can increase the interest. The same applies to Fig. 59.
[Effect 4]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in Fig. 57 (A) to (C), in the second performance, when a set of decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R displayed in the first area DA1 are displayed in a stopped state, another set of decorative symbols 8l, 8c, and 8r are newly displayed in the second area DA2 in a stopped state, and after the second performance, a fifth performance can be executed in which the set of decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R displayed in the first area DA1 and the other set of decorative symbols 8l, 8c, and 8r displayed in the second area DA2 start to be displayed in a variable manner. According to this configuration, a novel performance that has never been seen before can visually entertain the player, and can improve the interest. The same applies to Fig. 53.
[Effect 5]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in Fig. 57(C)(D), after the fifth performance, a sixth performance is performed in which a set of decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R displayed in the first area DA1 and another set of decorative symbols 8l, 8c, 8r displayed in the second area DA2 are both displayed in a stopped state, and after the sixth performance, another set of decorative symbols 8l, 8c, 8r displayed in the second area DA2 are displayed in a variable state again, while the set of decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R displayed in the first area DA1 disappears without being displayed in a variable state. According to this configuration, a novel performance that has never been seen before can visually entertain the player, and can improve the interest. The same applies to Fig. 59.
[Effect 6]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in Fig. 57, the variable display of a set of decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R displayed in the first area DA1 and the variable display of another set of decorative symbols 8l, 8c, and 8r displayed in the second area DA2 have different variations. With this configuration, a novel presentation that has never been seen before can be visually entertaining to the player, and can increase the interest of the player. The same applies to Figs. 58 and 59.
[Effect 7]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in Figures 58 and 59, the variable display of a set of decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R displayed in the first area DA1 and the variable display of another set of decorative symbols 8l, 8c, and 8r displayed in the second area DA2 are displayed partially overlapping each other. With this configuration, a novel presentation that has never been seen before can be visually entertaining to the player, and the interest can be increased.
[Effect 8]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in Fig. 59, in the first effect, the specific image IMG is displayed in the second area DA2, and in the second effect, the specific image IMG disappears, and another set of decorative patterns 8l, 8c, and 8r is displayed in the area where the specific image IMG disappeared. According to this configuration, the player can be visually entertained by the unprecedented novel effect, and the interest can be increased.

[Modification]
Below, a modified example of the overlapping variable display area effect is shown.
[Modification 1]
In the variable display area overlapping effects A to C, the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R and the decorative patterns 8l, 8c, and 8r may have the same pattern switching (variation) mode during variable display, or may be different from each other. Also, the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R and the decorative patterns 8l, 8c, and 8r may at least partially overlap each other.

[Modification 2]
The variable display area overlapping effects A to C may be appropriately combined or some of them may be deleted. In addition, the variable display area overlapping effects A to C may be executed consecutively, or each effect may be executed repeatedly.

[Example of embodiment]
In the gaming machine of this embodiment, the following aspects can be realized.
◇[Aspect A3-1]
A gaming machine having a display means capable of displaying a plurality of types of images,
One of the plurality of types of images is a set of decorative patterns capable of informing winning or losing,
A first effect in which a variable display of the set of decorative symbols is displayed in a first area of the display means;
a second performance in which, after the first performance, another set of decorative patterns in the same varying or stopped state as the varying or stopped state of the set of decorative patterns displayed in the first area is newly displayed in a second area of the display means different from the first area while the display of the set of decorative patterns is maintained in the first area;
A gaming machine characterized by:
◇[Aspect A3-2]
The gaming machine according to Aspect A3-1,
In the second performance, when the set of decorative symbols displayed in the first area is variably displayed, the other set of decorative symbols is newly displayed in the second area in a variably displayed state,
After the second performance, a third performance can be executed in which the set of decorative symbols displayed in the first area and the other set of decorative symbols displayed in the second area are both stopped and displayed.
A gaming machine characterized by:
◇[Aspect A3-3]
The gaming machine according to aspect A3-2,
After the third performance, the other set of decorative symbols displayed in the second area are displayed again in a variable manner, while the set of decorative symbols displayed in the first area disappears without being displayed in a variable manner.
A gaming machine characterized by:
◇[Aspect A3-4]
A gaming machine according to any one of Aspects A3-1 to A3-3,
In the second performance, when the set of decorative symbols displayed in the first area is stopped and displayed, the other set of decorative symbols is newly displayed in the second area in a stopped and displayed state,
After the second performance, a fifth performance can be executed in which the set of decorative symbols displayed in the first area and the other set of decorative symbols displayed in the second area start to be displayed in a variable manner.
A gaming machine characterized by:
◇[Aspect A3-5]
The gaming machine according to aspect A3-4,
After the fifth performance, a sixth performance in which the set of decorative symbols displayed in the first area and the other set of decorative symbols displayed in the second area are stopped and displayed together;
After the sixth performance, the other set of decorative symbols displayed in the second area are displayed again in a variable manner, while the set of decorative symbols displayed in the first area disappears without being displayed in a variable manner.
A gaming machine characterized by:
◇[Aspect A3-6]
A gaming machine according to any one of Aspects A3-1 to A3-5,
The variable display of the set of decorative patterns displayed in the first area and the variable display of the other set of decorative patterns displayed in the second area have different variable modes.
A gaming machine characterized by:
◇[Aspect A3-7]
A gaming machine according to any one of Aspects A3-1 to A3-6,
The variable display of the set of decorative symbols displayed in the first area and the variable display of the other set of decorative symbols displayed in the second area are displayed in a partially overlapping manner.
A gaming machine characterized by:
◇[Aspect A3-8]
A gaming machine according to any one of Aspects A3-1 to A3-7,
In the first performance, a specific image is displayed in the second area,
In the second performance, the specific image disappears, and the other set of decorative patterns is displayed in the area where the specific image has disappeared.
A gaming machine characterized by:

The decorative pattern stop position variable effects A to C are explained below using Figures 60 to 62. In Figures 60 to 62, the various movable parts arranged around the front (forward) of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 have been omitted for ease of viewing.

This decorative symbol stop position variable effect can be executed when the special game mode is switched to. That is, the image control microcomputer 101 analyzes various commands received from the sub-control board 90, and if an instruction to execute a decorative symbol stop position variable effect is included, it reads corresponding image data from the ROM 103 and displays the image on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7.

Here, we will first explain decorative pattern stop position uncertain effect A, then decorative pattern stop position uncertain effect B, and decorative pattern stop position uncertain effect C.

[Decorative pattern stop position variable performance A]
The decorative symbol stop position undefined effect A will be described with reference to Fig. 60. Fig. 60 is a diagram for explaining the decorative symbol stop position undefined effect A. The decorative symbol stop position undefined effect A is performed when the game mode is shifted to the special game mode, and the following description will be given of the case where the game mode is shifted from the normal game mode to the special game mode in the normal game mode.

First, as shown in Figure 60 (A), the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 is provided with three vertically long rectangular areas (i.e., areas that divide the display screen 7a into three equal rows) as variable display areas for the three decorative symbols (also referred to as "variable display areas for decorative symbols"). The display mode in which the reels rotate from the top of each variable display area to the bottom of the display screen 7a displays the left decorative symbol 8L of the stereoscopic image, the center decorative symbol 8C of the stereoscopic image, and the right decorative symbol 8R of the stereoscopic image, starting with the rotation of the reels, starts the variable performance (variable display) of the decorative symbols (symbols: numbers "1" to "9"). Specifically, the left decorative pattern 8L starts changing (changing display) when the reel rotates from the top of the left variable display area 8Lr to the bottom of the left variable display area 8Lr, the middle decorative pattern 8C starts changing (changing display) when the reel rotates from the top of the middle variable display area 8Cr to the bottom of the middle variable display area 8Cr, and the right decorative pattern 8R starts changing (changing display) when the reel rotates from the top of the right variable display area 8Rr to the bottom of the right variable display area 8Rr. The vertical distance dimension of the left variable display area 8Lr, the vertical distance dimension of the middle variable display area 8Cr, and the vertical distance dimension of the right variable display area 8Rr are the same vertical distance dimension, and further, the horizontal distance dimension of the left variable display area 8Lr, the horizontal distance dimension of the middle variable display area 8Cr, and the horizontal distance dimension of the right variable display area 8Rr are the same horizontal distance dimension.

The decorative symbols change appearance (changing display) in such a way that the reels spin in the following order: Number "1" → Number "2" → Number "3" → Number "4" → Number "5" → Number "6" → Number "7" → Number "8" → Number "9" → Number "1" → Number "2" → ...

Of the numbers "1" to "9", the odd numbers "1", "3", "5" and "9" (excluding the number "7") are bright red, while the even numbers "2", "4", "6" and "8" are bright blue, and the number "7" is yellow (gold). The sizes of the numbers "1" to "9" are normal sizes, with their vertical distance dimensions each being approximately one-third the vertical distance dimension of the left variable display area 8Lr (middle variable display area 8Cr, right variable display area 8Rr) and their horizontal distance dimensions each being approximately one-half the horizontal distance dimension of the left variable display area 8Lr (middle variable display area 8Cr, right variable display area 8Rr). The numbers "1" through "9" are written in special typefaces (originally created typefaces) that are different from existing typefaces (generally available typefaces) such as regular script, Gothic, and Ming style, and are created specifically for the purpose.

In the normal game mode, when the decorative pattern change performance (changing display) starts, the decorative pattern displayed as still changes from an opaque state to a semi-transparent state while gradually increasing its speed from a low speed, and changes at high speed. This allows the background image placed behind the decorative pattern to be viewed through the semi-transparent decorative pattern that is changing at high speed. The decorative pattern slows down just before stopping, changes from a semi-transparent state to an opaque state again, and is displayed as temporarily stopped, or as still (displayed as temporarily stopped, then displayed as still). When the decorative pattern is displayed as temporarily stopped, it moves slowly up and down in small movements.

In addition, on the upper right side of the display screen 7a, there is provided a sub-variable area KSZ having a horizontally long rectangular shape in which small left decorative patterns, small middle decorative patterns, and small right decorative patterns corresponding to the left decorative pattern 8L, middle decorative pattern 8C, and right decorative pattern 8R, respectively, are displayed in a variable manner (variable display). The background image of the sub-variable area KSZ is fixed to a single color (for example, a dark color (dark-dark color series) or a color close to a dark color (for example, deep green) and does not change to other colors. The sub-variable area KSZ is located on the upper right side of the display screen 7a, so it overlaps with the right variable display area 8Rr, which is the variable area of the right decorative pattern 8R. However, by arranging the sub-variable area KSZ to be the foremost side, the right decorative pattern 8R is positioned behind the sub-variable area KSZ and the sub-variable area KSZ is not obstructed by the right decorative pattern 8R. Even if other performance images appear, the other performance images are positioned behind the sub-variable area KSZ and are not obstructed by the other performance images. In other words, the visibility of the content displayed in the sub-variable area KSZ is not hindered by the right decorative pattern 8R or other performance images.

The small decorative pattern is a number pattern, and is in a font (e.g., Mincho) different from the font of the left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R, and is unified in another monochrome color (e.g., a light color (yellow or white)) that contrasts highly with the monochrome color of the background image of the sub-variable area KSZ, and will not change to another color. The small decorative pattern is positioned in front of the background image of the sub-variable area KSZ and is always opaque; even when it starts to change, it will not become translucent, and will not disappear from the display screen 7a.

Unlike the left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R, the small decorative pattern is not changed (displayed) by the reel spinning, but by the number pattern appearing one after the other in the same size and opaque state in the same display position.

When the variable performance (variable display) of the left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R starts, a variable performance (variable display) of the small left decorative pattern, the small middle decorative pattern, and the small right decorative pattern starts in the sub-variable area KSZ, and the left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R are all displayed frozen, while the small left decorative pattern, the small middle decorative pattern, and the small right decorative pattern are also all displayed frozen.

Even if any one or more of the left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R are temporarily stopped (for example, the left decorative pattern 8L and the right decorative pattern 8R are temporarily stopped with the same pattern and a reach is formed), the small left decorative pattern, the small middle decorative pattern, and the small right decorative pattern are all in a state of continuing the variable performance (variable display). Specifically, even if the left decorative pattern 8L is temporarily stopped, the variable performance (variable display) of the small left decorative pattern continues, and even if the right decorative pattern 8R is temporarily stopped, the variable performance (variable display) of the small right decorative pattern continues, and at the same time that the left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R are all stopped, the small left decorative pattern, the small middle decorative pattern, and the small right decorative pattern are all stopped.

In addition, when the left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R are all stopped and displayed, and the same pattern is not aligned and a miss occurs, the small left decorative pattern, the small middle decorative pattern, and the small right decorative pattern may be the same as the left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R, or may be completely different patterns. Specifically, for example, when the left decorative pattern 8L is stopped and displayed with the number "1", the middle decorative pattern 8C is stopped and displayed with the number "2", and the right decorative pattern 8R is stopped and displayed with the number "3", the small left decorative pattern may be stopped and displayed with the number "1", the small middle decorative pattern may be stopped and displayed with the number "2", and the small right decorative pattern may be stopped and displayed with the number "3", or the small left decorative pattern may be stopped and displayed with the number "5", the small middle decorative pattern may be stopped and displayed with the number "6", and the small right decorative pattern may be stopped and displayed with the number "7".

In contrast, when the left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R are all stopped and displayed, and they line up to form the same pattern, resulting in a win, the small left decorative pattern, the small middle decorative pattern, and the small right decorative pattern will line up to form the same pattern as the left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R.

The variable icons 9C corresponding to the left decorative pattern 8L, middle decorative pattern 8C, and right decorative pattern 8R that are currently fluctuating as the first special chart reservation is consumed are displayed (placed) at the variable display position 9Cd (above a rectangular image (pedestal image)) displayed in the lower center of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7. In the area of the display screen 7a to the left of the variable display position 9Cd, a reserve display area is provided for the first special chart reservation. In this reserve display area, reserve icons 9A can be displayed (placed) at each of the four reserve display positions 9Ad (above a rectangular image (pedestal image)), and a maximum of four reserve icons 9A can be stored. The four hold display positions 9Ad are aligned and displayed in a straight line along the bottom edge of the display screen 7a in the following order from the position closest to the variable display position 9Cd toward the left edge of the display screen 7a: first hold display position 9Ad, second hold display position 9Ad, third hold display position 9Ad, and fourth hold display position 9Ad.

The variable display position 9Cd is located in the lower center of the display screen 7a, and the first reserved display position 9Ad is located to the left of the variable display position 9Cd, so that the variable display position 9Cd and the first reserved display position 9Ad overlap with the middle variable display area 8Cr, which is the variable area of the middle decorative pattern 8C, but the middle decorative pattern 8C is located behind the variable display position 9Cd and the first reserved display position 9Ad, so the variable display position 9Cd and the first reserved display position 9Ad are not blocked by the middle decorative pattern 8C. However, when another performance image appears, if the other performance image is located behind the variable display position 9Cd and the first reserved display position 9Ad, the variable display position 9Cd and the first reserved display position 9Ad will not be blocked by the other performance image, but if the other performance image is located in front of the variable display position 9Cd and the first reserved display position 9Ad, the variable display position 9Cd and the first reserved display position 9Ad will be blocked by the other performance image.

Since the second hold display position 9Ad to the fourth hold display position 9Ad are arranged on the lower left side of the display screen 7a, the second hold display position 9Ad to the fourth hold display position 9Ad overlap with the left variable display area 8Lr, which is the variable area of the left decorative pattern 8L, but the left decorative pattern 8L is arranged behind the second hold display position 9Ad to the fourth hold display position 9Ad and the left decorative pattern 8L does not block the second hold display position 9Ad to the fourth hold display position 9Ad. However, when another effect image appears, if the other effect image is arranged behind the second hold display position 9Ad to the fourth hold display position 9Ad, the second hold display position 9Ad to the fourth hold display position 9Ad will not be blocked by the other effect image, but if the other effect image is arranged in front of the second hold display position 9Ad to the fourth hold display position 9Ad, the second hold display position 9Ad to the fourth hold display position 9Ad will be blocked by the other effect image.

In this way, of the first hold display position 9Ad to the fourth hold display position 9Ad, the first hold display position 9Ad overlaps with the middle variable display area 8Cr, which is the variable area of the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the second hold display position 9Ad to the fourth hold display position 9Ad overlap with the left variable display area 8Lr, which is the variable area of the left decorative pattern 8L, so that the hold display area as the first special pattern hold consisting of the first hold display position 9Ad to the fourth hold display position 9Ad is arranged across the middle variable display area 8Cr and the left variable display area 8Lr.

Here, the change display position 9Cd displays the change icon 9C in the form of a white sphere, and the first hold display position 9Ad to the fourth hold display position 9Ad display the hold icon 9A. In other words, there are four hold icons that have not been consumed and are stored. In the following explanation, it is assumed that during the change display (change display) of the decorative pattern, a game ball enters the first start hole 20, resulting in a state in which three or four hold icons are present (i.e., the number of holds is three or four), but no game ball enters the second start hole 21. In addition, as the number of holds increases, the time from the start to the end of the change display (change display) (change time) becomes shorter. For example, in this embodiment, when the number of holds is three or four, the change time is 5000 milliseconds (0.5 seconds) in the case of a no-reach miss.

In addition, on the upper left side of the display screen 7a, facing the above-mentioned sub-variable area KSZ (along the same horizontal line), there is provided a reserve number display area HS having a horizontally long rectangular shape in which the first special reserve based on the game ball entering the first starting hole 20 and the second special reserve based on the game ball entering the second starting hole 21 are displayed as reserve numbers (numbers). The vertical distance dimension of the reserve number display area HS and the vertical distance dimension of the sub-variable area KSZ are the same vertical distance dimension, and the horizontal distance dimension of the reserve number display area HS and the horizontal distance dimension of the sub-variable area KSZ are the same horizontal distance dimension. In other words, the shape of the reserve number display area HS and the shape of the sub-variable area KSZ are the same shape.

The background image of the reserved number display area HS is fixed as colorless and transparent, unlike the background image of the sub-variable area KSZ, and does not become opaque or change to another color. The reserved number display area HS is positioned on the upper left side of the display screen 7a, and therefore overlaps with the left variable display area 8Lr, which is the variable area of the left decorative pattern 8L. However, by positioning the reserved number display area HS as the foremost side, the left decorative pattern 8L is positioned behind the reserved number display area HS and the reserved number display area HS is not obstructed by the left decorative pattern 8L, and even if another performance image appears, the other performance image is positioned behind the reserved number display area HS and the reserved number display area HS is not obstructed by the other performance image.

The number of reserved first special figures (reserved number (number)) and the number of reserved second special figures (reserved number (number)) are in a font (e.g., Gothic) different from the font of the small decorative pattern, and are set to other solid colors that have high contrast with the solid color of the background image of the reserved number display area HS, and do not change to other colors. The number of reserved first special figures (reserved number (number)) and the number of reserved second special figures (reserved number (number)) are arranged on the front side of the background image of the reserved number display area HS and are always opaque, and do not disappear from the display screen 7a. Specifically, the number of reserved first special figures based on the entry of game balls into the first starting hole 20 is always displayed as a blue number on the left side of the reserved number display area HS, and the number of reserved second special figures based on the entry of game balls into the second starting hole 21 is always displayed as a red number on the right side of the reserved number display area HS, spaced apart from each other. These numbers are displayed as the number of reserved balls, so they are easy to distinguish from the various background images and decorative images displayed on the display screen 7a, making them intuitively easy to understand. In other words, the content displayed in the reserved number display area HS is not hindered in visibility by other performance images. The blue color indicating the number of reserved first special symbols is a different color (not the same color) from the bright blue of the even-numbered symbols "2", "4", "6", and "8", but is a similar color. The red color indicating the number of reserved second special symbols is a different color (not the same color) from the bright red of the odd-numbered symbols "1", "3", "5", and "9", excluding the number "7", but is a similar color.

Here, briefly explaining the reserved icon 9A and the variable icon 9C (hereinafter sometimes simply referred to as "icon"), the differences in shape and color represent the differences in the expectation of winning at the time of the lottery corresponding to the icon. For example, of the four icons, namely, the yellow (gold) star icon, the black spherical icon, the smiling sphere icon, and the white spherical icon, the yellow (gold) star icon has the highest expectation of winning, the black spherical icon has the second highest expectation of winning, the smiling sphere icon has the third highest expectation of winning, and the white spherical icon has the lowest expectation of winning. For the smiling sphere icon, the expectation of winning is further set in the order of, for example, blue → green → red → gold (yellow) → seven colors (rainbow (high probability of winning)).

In the normal game mode, as shown in FIG. 60(A), the decorative pattern change performance (changing display) is started, and then the left decorative pattern 8L, which changes from the top to the bottom in the left changing display area 8Lr, is displayed temporarily stopped in the center of the left changing display area 8Lr, and moves slowly in small increments in the vertical direction. Then, the right decorative pattern 8R, which changes from the top to the bottom in the right changing display area 8Rr, is displayed temporarily stopped in the center of the right changing display area 8Rr, and moves slowly in small increments in the vertical direction. Then, the middle decorative pattern 8C, which changes from the top to the bottom in the middle changing display area 8Cr, is displayed temporarily stopped in the center of the middle changing display area 8Cr, and moves slowly in small increments in the vertical direction.

In addition, in the normal game mode, multiple types of background images for normal gameplay are provided as background images, and the background images are switched appropriately.

After that, as shown in FIG. 60(B), the left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R are all displayed (confirmed) as stopped in the center of their respective variable display areas, so that the left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R are displayed (confirmed) side-by-side on the same horizontal line. As a result, the variable icon 9C disappears from the display screen 7a.

Next, when the player starts moving toward the variable display position 9Cd to consume the reserved icon 9A placed at the first reserved display position 9Ad, as shown in FIG. 60(C), the left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, the right decorative pattern 8R, the variable display position 9Cd, the first reserved display position 9Ad to the fourth reserved display position 9ad, the variable icon 9C, and all the reserved icons 9A disappear from the display screen 7a. In the second sub-variable area CSZ described later, a variable performance (variable display) using medium-sized decorative patterns is started, and then the background image is switched from the background image for normal play to the background image for A mode only, and a large message image MSG saying "Enter A mode" is displayed in the center of the display screen 7a. This A mode is a special play mode. In the A mode, a decorative pattern stop position indefinite performance A is started, which is a display mode different from the variable performance (variable display) of the decorative pattern in the play mode in the normal play state of FIG. 60(A) and (B) described above.

The A-mode exclusive background image is a background image that is different from the normal game background image that is used as the background image in the game mode in the normal game state, and is a background image that is used exclusively in A-mode. There may be only one A-mode exclusive background image prepared, or multiple types may be prepared.

In this embodiment, the condition for the decorative pattern stop position uncertain performance A to occur is, for example, when the number of times a variable performance (variable display) has been performed without a win reaching 2.5 to 3 times the normal probability state (non-high probability state, low probability state, normal state). Also, in the decorative pattern stop position uncertain performance A, a predetermined number of variable performances (variable display) are performed. This "predetermined number" is, for example, up to 3.8 times the normal probability state (non-high probability state, low probability state, normal state), which is 115 times in this case.

When the decorative symbol stop position indefinite performance A starts, a second sub-variable area CSZ having a horizontally long rectangular shape is provided on the lower left side of the display screen 7a, in which the medium-sized left decorative symbol, medium-sized middle decorative symbol, and medium-sized right decorative symbol corresponding to the left decorative symbol 8L, middle decorative symbol 8C, and right decorative symbol 8R, respectively, are displayed in a variable manner (variable display). The vertical distance dimension of the second sub-variable area CSZ is approximately five times larger than the vertical distance dimension of the sub-variable area KSZ, and the horizontal distance dimension of the second sub-variable area CSZ is approximately five times larger than the horizontal distance dimension of the sub-variable area KSZ, and they have similar shapes.

The sizes of the medium-sized left decorative pattern, medium-sized middle decorative pattern, and medium-sized right decorative pattern that are displayed (displayed) in the second sub-variable area CSZ are larger (about 5 times larger) than the sizes of the small-sized left decorative pattern, small middle decorative pattern, and small right decorative pattern that are displayed (displayed) in the sub-variable area KSZ, but are smaller than the sizes of the left decorative pattern 8L, middle decorative pattern 8C, and right decorative pattern 8R. Also, unlike the small-sized left decorative pattern, small middle decorative pattern, and small right decorative pattern, the medium-sized left decorative pattern, medium middle decorative pattern, and medium-sized right decorative pattern have smaller shapes than the left decorative pattern 8L, middle decorative pattern 8C, and right decorative pattern 8R, have similar shapes, and are the same color. In other words, the medium-sized left decorative pattern is a smaller version of the left decorative pattern 8L and has the same color as the left decorative pattern 8L, the medium-sized middle decorative pattern is a smaller version of the middle decorative pattern 8C and has the same color as the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the medium-sized right decorative pattern is a smaller version of the right decorative pattern 8R and has the same color as the right decorative pattern 8R.

The background image of the second sub-variable area CSZ is fixed to be colorless and transparent, unlike the background image of the sub-variable area KSZ, and does not become opaque or change to another color. The second sub-variable area CSZ is arranged on the lower left side of the display screen 7a, and therefore overlaps with the left variable display area 8Lr, which is the variable area of the left decorative pattern 8L. However, in this embodiment, during the period in which the second sub-variable area CSZ is displayed on the display screen 7a, the left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R are in a state of disappearing from the display screen 7a, so that the left decorative pattern 8L does not block the sub-variable area KSZ. In addition, by arranging the second sub-variable area CSZ to be the foremost side, even if another performance image appears, the other performance image is arranged behind the second sub-variable area CSZ, and the second sub-variable area CSZ is not blocked by the other performance image. In other words, the visibility of the content displayed in the second sub-variable area CSZ is not hindered by the left decorative pattern 8L or other performance images.

Unlike the left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R, the medium-sized decorative pattern does not undergo a variable performance (variable display) in a display mode in which the reels are rotated, but instead undergoes a variable performance (variable display) in the same display position, for example, from the left edge of the medium-sized decorative pattern through the front to the right edge of the medium-sized decorative pattern, as if a coin were spinning. And when the variable performance (variable display) starts at the same timing for the medium-sized decorative patterns, that is, the medium-sized left decorative pattern, the medium-sized middle decorative pattern, and the medium-sized right decorative pattern, the medium-sized left decorative pattern, and the medium-sized middle decorative pattern, are displayed stopped at the same timing.

In this embodiment, when the decorative pattern stop position variable performance A, in which a maximum of 115 variable performances (variable display) are performed, is started, a variable performance (variable display) using medium-sized decorative patterns is started in the second sub-variable area CSZ and is performed a predetermined number of times (10 times in this embodiment). During the period in which the variable performance (variable display) using medium-sized decorative patterns is performed a predetermined number of times (10 times) in the second sub-variable area CSZ, the left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R are in a state of disappearing from the display screen 7a. When the variable performance (variable display) using medium-sized decorative patterns is started in the second sub-variable area CSZ and the second variable performance (variable display) is performed, a message image MSG with a gold color (gold color) saying "Entering A mode" is displayed. This message image MSG is displayed for a predetermined time (in this embodiment, 5 seconds) and then disappears from the display screen 7a. Thereafter, a message image reading "A mode" is displayed as a caption TP1 (see, for example, FIG. 60(D)) along the top edge of the display screen 7a, moving repeatedly from the right side to the left side of the display screen 7a in a caption display mode, for the period during which the decorative pattern stop position variable performance A is being performed.

The caption TP1, which is a message image saying "A mode", is the same color (gold) as the message image MSG saying "Entering A mode". The area in which the caption TP1 is displayed and moved is a strip-shaped area having a predetermined distance dimension from the top edge of the display screen 7a, and is about four times larger than the vertical distance dimension of the sub-variable area KSZ (or the reserved number display area HS). The area in which the caption TP1 is displayed and moved overlaps with the sub-variable area KSZ and the reserved number display area HS, but since the sub-variable area KSZ and the reserved number display area HS are positioned to be the foremost side as described above, the caption TP1 is positioned behind the sub-variable area KSZ and the reserved number display area HS, and the sub-variable area KSZ and the reserved number display area HS are not obstructed by the caption TP1. In other words, the visibility of the contents displayed in the sub-variable area KSZ and the reserved number display area HS is not hindered by the caption TP1.

As described above, the area in which the telop TP1 is displayed is a band-shaped area having a predetermined distance from the top edge of the display screen 7a, and this area overlaps with the upper area of the left variable display area 8Lr, which is the variable area of the left decorative pattern 8L, with the upper area of the middle variable display area 8Cr, which is the variable area of the middle decorative pattern 8C, and with the upper area of the right variable display area 8Rr, which is the variable area of the right decorative pattern 8R. In this embodiment, the area in which the telop TP1 is displayed is arranged behind the left variable display area 8Lr, the middle variable display area 8Cr, and the right variable display area 8Rr. Therefore, the left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R are not obstructed by the area in which the telop TP1 is displayed. In other words, the visibility of the left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R is not hindered by the area in which the telop TP1 is displayed.

When the caption TP1 is displayed moving from the right side to the left side of the display screen 7a along the top side of the display screen 7a, it does not suddenly disappear along the way, nor does it break down into particles and gradually disappear. The caption TP1 is displayed moving at a constant speed, which is the caption TP1 speed.

When the decorative pattern stop position indefinite performance A is performed and the medium-sized decorative pattern variable performance (variable display) starts for the specified number of times (10th time) in the second sub-variable area CSZ, just before this variable performance (variable display) ends, as shown in FIG. 60 (D), a counter image CNT with the message "105 remaining" is displayed in the lower center of the display screen 7a. The counter image CNT is arranged in front of the background image for the counter image having a semi-transparent horizontally elongated rectangular shape, and the vertical distance dimension of this background image for the counter image having a semi-transparent horizontally elongated rectangular shape is about three times larger than the vertical distance dimension of the sub-variable area KSZ (or the reserved number display area HS), and the horizontal distance dimension of this background image for the counter image having a semi-transparent horizontally elongated rectangular shape is about six times larger than the horizontal distance dimension of the sub-variable area KSZ (or the reserved number display area HS).

Although this translucent horizontally elongated rectangular background image for the counter image overlaps with the middle variable display area 8Cr, which is the variable area of the middle decorative pattern 8C, the background image for the counter image is positioned so that the middle decorative pattern 8C is positioned behind the background image for the counter image and the counter image CNT positioned in front of the background image for the counter image is not obscured by the middle decorative pattern 8C, and even if other performance images appear, the other performance images are positioned behind the background image for the counter image and do not obscure the counter image CNT positioned in front of the background image for the counter image by the other performance images. In other words, the visibility of the counter image CNT positioned in front of the background image for the counter image is not hindered by the middle decorative pattern 8C or other performance images. In addition, because the background image for the counter image is semi-transparent, in the area of the background image for the counter image where the counter image CNT is not placed (i.e., the area of the background image for the counter image that does not correspond to the counter image CNT), the middle decorative pattern 8C and other presentation images (background images of the left decorative pattern 8L, middle decorative pattern 8C, and right decorative pattern 8R) can be seen through the semi-transparent background image for the counter image.

When the counter image CNT "105 remaining" is displayed in the lower center of the display screen 7a, the left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R appear again (slightly later than the start of the display of the counter image CNT) and are displayed as stopped. At this time, the size of the left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R that have appeared again is the same as the size before disappearance, that is, the size of the left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R in the game mode shown in Figures 60 (A) and (B), but the positions where the left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R that have appeared again are displayed as temporarily stopped and stopped are different from the positions where the left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R in the game mode shown in Figures 60 (A) and (B) are displayed as temporarily stopped and stopped.

Specifically, in the game mode of FIG. 60(B), the position where the left decorative pattern 8L is temporarily stopped and stopped is the center of the left variable display area 8Lr, which is the variable area of the left decorative pattern 8L, whereas in the decorative pattern stop position indefinite performance A of FIG. 60(D), the position where the left decorative pattern 8L is temporarily stopped and stopped is not the center of the left variable display area 8Lr, which is the variable area of the left decorative pattern 8L, but the upper right side of the left variable display area 8Lr. At this time, when a medium-sized left decorative pattern is stopped and displayed as the number "1" in the second sub-variable area CSZ, the left decorative pattern 8L is stopped and displayed as the number "1".

In the game mode of FIG. 60(B), the position where the right decorative pattern 8R is temporarily stopped and stopped is the center of the right variable display area 8Rr, which is the variable area of the right decorative pattern 8R, whereas in the decorative pattern stop position indefinite performance A of FIG. 60(D), the position where the right decorative pattern 8R is temporarily stopped and stopped is not the center of the right variable display area 8Rr, which is the variable area of the right decorative pattern 8R, but the upper left side of the right variable display area 8Rr. At this time, when a medium-sized right decorative pattern is stopped and displayed as the number "2" in the second sub-variable area CSZ, the right decorative pattern 8R is stopped and displayed as the number "2".

In the game mode of FIG. 60(B), the position where the middle decorative pattern 8C is temporarily stopped and stopped is the center of the middle variable display area 8Cr, which is the variable area of the middle decorative pattern 8C, whereas in the decorative pattern stop position indefinite performance A of FIG. 60(D), the position where the middle decorative pattern 8C is temporarily stopped and stopped is not the center of the middle variable display area 8Cr, which is the variable area of the middle decorative pattern 8C, but the lower right side of the middle variable display area 8Cr. In this case, when a medium-sized middle decorative pattern is stopped and displayed as the number "3" in the second sub-variable area CSZ, the middle decorative pattern 8C is stopped and displayed as the number "3". Although the counter image CNT is provided below the middle variable display area 8Cr, since the counter image CNT is located at the frontmost side, a part of the middle decorative pattern 8C of the number "3" is covered by the counter image CNT.

In this embodiment, a predetermined number of times (10th time) of medium-sized decorative patterns are used in the second sub-variable area CSZ to perform a variable performance (variable display), and just before this variable performance (variable display) ends, a counter image CNT reading "105 remaining" is displayed in the center of the bottom of the display screen 7a, and the left decorative pattern 8L, middle decorative pattern 8C, and right decorative pattern 8R appear again and are displayed stopped. However, once the decorative pattern stop position indefinite performance A begins and a predetermined time (for example, 10 seconds) has elapsed, the counter image CNT may be displayed, and further, just before the time arrives when the left decorative pattern 8L, middle decorative pattern 8C, and right decorative pattern 8R are displayed stopped, the left decorative pattern 8L, middle decorative pattern 8C, and right decorative pattern 8R may appear again. When the left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R appear again, the second sub-variable area CSZ disappears from the display screen 7a, and the middle decorative patterns also disappear from the display screen 7a.

When the predetermined number (10 times) of fluctuation performances (fluctuating display) ends, then the predetermined number (10 times) + 1 (i.e. 11th) of fluctuation performances (fluctuating display) begins, and the medium-sized left decorative pattern, the medium-sized middle decorative pattern, and the medium-sized right decorative pattern start to rotate as coins at the same timing, as shown in Figure 60 (E), the second sub-fluctuating area CSZ disappears from the display screen 7a, the medium-sized decorative pattern also disappears from the display screen 7a, and the left decorative pattern 8L, middle decorative pattern 8C, and right decorative pattern 8R each emit light, and a fluctuation performance (fluctuating display) is performed in which the reels rotate downward in the corresponding left variable display area 8Lr, middle variable display area 8Cr, and right variable display area 8Rr, and the counter image CNT is updated to "104 remaining" and displayed. In other words, the left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R start changing (changing display) at the same timing as the medium-sized left decorative pattern, the medium-sized middle decorative pattern, and the medium-sized right decorative pattern. The left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R are stopped and displayed at the same timing.

At this time, the changing performance (changing display) of the left decorative pattern 8L, middle decorative pattern 8C, and right decorative pattern 8R in the decorative pattern stop position indefinite performance A is displayed in a different manner from the changing performance (changing display) of the left decorative pattern 8L, middle decorative pattern 8C, and right decorative pattern 8R in the game mode shown in Figures 60 (A) and (B). In the changing presentation (changing display) of each decorative pattern in the game modes shown in Figures 60 (A) and (B), as described above, the changing presentation (changing display) is performed in a display mode in which the reels rotate in the order of number "1" → number "2" → number "3" → number "4" → number "5" → number "6" → number "7" → number "8" → number "9" → number "1" → number "2" → ..., whereas in decorative pattern stop position indefinite presentation A, when the changing presentation (changing display) of each decorative pattern that is stopped and displayed begins, each decorative pattern emits light and then is changed toward the bottom of the changing display area of each decorative pattern, or each decorative pattern emits light and is changed toward the bottom of the changing display area of each decorative pattern, and then the number following one of each decorative pattern that is stopped and displayed does not appear, and a random number appears and is stopped and displayed opaquely as the number following one of each decorative pattern. This occurs when the second sub-variable area CSZ disappears from the display screen 7a, and the medium-sized decorative patterns also disappear from the display screen 7a, which makes it possible to realize a display mode in which random numbers suddenly appear, remaining opaque, as the number following each decorative pattern and are displayed stationary.

Specifically, when the variable performance (variable display) of the left decorative pattern 8L of the number "1" displayed in FIG. 60(D) starts, the left decorative pattern 8L emits light, and the number "2" following the number "1" of the left decorative pattern 8L displayed in FIG. 60(D) becomes opaque and is not displayed as a left decorative pattern 8L in FIG. 60(E), and a random number "4" appears opaque and is displayed as a static display. Furthermore, the position of the left decorative pattern 8L of the number "1" displayed in FIG. 60(D) is the upper right side of the left variable display area 8Lr, whereas the variable performance (variable display) starts and the position of the left decorative pattern 8L of the number "4" displayed in FIG. 60(E) becomes the lower left side of the left variable display area 8Lr instead of the upper right side of the left variable display area 8Lr.

When the variable performance (variable display) of the right decorative pattern 8R of the number "2" displayed in FIG. 60(D) starts, the right decorative pattern 8R emits light, and the number "3" following the number "2" of the right decorative pattern 8R displayed in FIG. 60(D) becomes opaque and is not displayed as a stopped right decorative pattern 8R in FIG. 60(E), and a random number "5" appears opaque and is displayed as a stopped right decorative pattern. Furthermore, the position of the right decorative pattern 8R of the number "2" displayed in FIG. 60(D) is the upper left side of the right variable display area 8Rr, whereas the variable performance (variable display) starts and the position of the right decorative pattern 8R of the number "5" displayed in FIG. 60(E) becomes the center right side of the right variable display area 8Rr, not the upper left side of the right variable display area 8Rr.

When the moving effect (variable display) of the center decorative pattern 8C of the number "3" displayed in FIG. 60(D) starts, the center decorative pattern 8C emits light, and the number "4" following the number "3" of the center decorative pattern 8C displayed in FIG. 60(D) becomes opaque and is not displayed as a center decorative pattern 8C in FIG. 60(E), and a random number "1" appears opaque and is displayed as a stationary object. Furthermore, the position of the center decorative pattern 8C of the number "3" displayed in FIG. 60(D) is the lower right side of the center variable display area 8Cr, whereas the position of the center decorative pattern 8C of the number "1" displayed in FIG. 60(E) after the variable effect (variable display) starts is not the lower right side of the center variable display area 8Cr but the center left side of the center variable display area 8Cr.

When the predetermined number (10 times) + 1 (i.e. 11th) of medium-sized decorative pattern fluctuation effects (fluctuation display) starts in the second sub-fluctuation area CSZ, a message image "It's still going on..." (here, three telops TP2) is displayed in a telop display mode, moving from the right side to the left side of the display screen 7a so as to be parallel to the top side of the display screen 7a. The telop TP2 is white, and the expectation of a win is higher for other colors (e.g., blue, red, rainbow) than for white (e.g., the expectation of a win is lowest for white, followed by blue, red, and then rainbow). The vertical distance dimension of the telop TP2 is about twice as large as the vertical distance dimension of the sub-fluctuation area KSZ (or the reserved number display area HS). The area in which the telop TP2 is moved and displayed is between the bottom side of the area in which the telop TP1 is moved and the top side of the background image for the counter image, and it straddles the left variable display area 8Lr which is the variable area of the left decorative pattern 8L, the middle variable display area 8Cr which is the variable area of the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right variable display area 8Rr which is the variable area of the right decorative pattern 8R. By arranging the telop TP2 so that it is the foremost side, even if the telop TP2 straddles the right variable display area 8Rr, the middle variable display area 8Cr, and the left variable display area 8Lr, the telop TP2 is arranged in front of the right decorative pattern 8R, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the left decorative pattern 8L, and the telop TP2 is not blocked by the right decorative pattern 8R, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the left decorative pattern 8L. In this respect, it differs in that the above-mentioned caption TP1 is placed behind the sub-variable area KSZ and the reserved number display area HS, and the caption TP1 is obscured by the sub-variable area KSZ and the reserved number display area HS.

Note that the telop TP2 differs from the above-mentioned telop TP1 in that once it reaches the left side of the display screen 7a, it does not reappear from the right side of the display screen 7a, and is instead repeatedly moved and displayed. The multiple telops TP2 may be set to move at different speeds, or may be set to the same speed. The multiple telops TP2 appear from the right side of the display screen 7a at different times, so that in the relevant fluctuation, some will reach the left side of the display screen 7a and disappear, some will reach the left side of the display screen 7a over the next fluctuation and disappear, and some will reach the left side of the display screen 7a over the next fluctuation (multiple fluctuations) and disappear.

Furthermore, when the caption TP2 appears from the right side of the display screen 7a and moves toward the left side of the display screen 7a, it may suddenly disappear along the way, become particleized and gradually disappear, or may be displayed in a manner that causes image information to be missing (for example, an image is divided into small blocks and arranged irregularly rather than regularly, resulting in an unclear image) making it difficult to read. The caption TP2 differs from the caption TP1 described above in that when it appears from the right side of the display screen 7a and moves toward the left side of the display screen 7a along the top side of the display screen 7a, it does not suddenly disappear along the way, do not become particleized and gradually disappear, or do not appear in a manner that causes image information to be missing.

Furthermore, the telop TP2 may be displayed moving at the same constant speed as the telop TP1 (the speed for telop TP1), may be displayed moving at a constant speed faster than the constant speed of the telop TP1 (the speed for telop TP1), or may be displayed moving at a constant speed slower than the constant speed of the telop TP1 (the speed for telop TP1). The speed of the telop TP2 may be accelerated when it is displayed moving from the right side to the left side of the display screen 7a, may be decelerated when it is displayed moving from the right side to the left side of the display screen 7a, or may be accelerated or decelerated when it is displayed moving from the right side to the left side of the display screen 7a. In this respect as well, it differs from the telop TP1 described above.

Furthermore, when the caption TP2 appears from the right side of the display screen 7a and moves toward the left side of the display screen 7a, it may suddenly stop midway, or it may decelerate and stop. When the caption TP2 stops, it may explode and simply disappear from the display screen 7a, or the display screen 7a may go black (a completely dark screen), as described below, and then the lottery results may be displayed. In this respect as well, it differs from the caption TP1 described above.

In addition, when the telop TP2 appears from the right side of the display screen 7a and moves toward the left side of the display screen 7a, the typeface may change along the way (for example, the font of all or some of the characters in the telop TP2 may change, all or some of the characters in the telop TP2 may become bold, all or some of the characters in the telop TP2 may become thin, all or some of the characters in the telop TP2 may become italic, the size of all or some of the characters in the telop TP2 may change significantly, the size of all or some of the characters in the telop TP2 may change significantly, or all or some of the characters in the telop TP2 may be underlined) or the content may change to something else. In these respects as well, it differs from the telop TP1 described above.

When the telop TP2 appears from the right side of the display screen 7a, the vertical distance dimension of the telop TP2 is about twice as large as the vertical distance dimension of the sub-variable area KSZ (or the reserved number display area HS), but there are cases where the vertical distance dimension of the telop TP2 is more than twice as large as the vertical distance dimension of the sub-variable area KSZ (or the reserved number display area HS) and the vertical distance dimension of the telop TP2 is less than twice as large as the vertical distance dimension of the sub-variable area KSZ (or the reserved number display area HS). When the vertical distance dimension of the telop TP2 is more than twice as large as the vertical distance dimension of the sub-variable area KSZ (or the reserved number display area HS) and the vertical distance dimension of the telop TP2 is less than twice as large as the vertical distance dimension of the sub-variable area KSZ (or the reserved number display area HS), the telop TP2 may be red or rainbow colored. This point also differs from the telop TP1 described above.

There are multiple contents of the telop TP2, and the player can select and set it by operating the effect button 63. The contents of the telop TP2 can be, for example, a comment made by a character selected from among a number of characters that represent the worldview of the gaming machine, or a comment that includes part of the lyrics of the music played in the decorative pattern stop position undefined effect A, or a comment made by multiple people that expresses the worldview of the background image of the decorative pattern stop position undefined effect A. Of course, it is also possible to select and set whether to display the telop TP2 or not. Such selection and setting may be made by the player in a setting mode during play, or in a setting mode in the waiting state (waiting for players).

In the decorative pattern stop position indefinite performance A, the variable icon 9C and the reserved icon 9A disappear from the display screen 7a, so the display mode of the variable icon 9C cannot be changed to notify the expectation of a big win for the variable, and the display mode of the reserved icon 9A cannot be changed by the pre-reading performance to suggest the expectation of a win. Therefore, in the decorative pattern stop position indefinite performance A, the display mode of the telop TP2 can be changed in various ways to suggest the expectation of a win. The telop TP1 notifies the player that it is in "A mode" and does not convey other information to the player. For this reason, the telop TP2, which can suggest the expectation of a win to the player, is placed in front of the left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R, while the telop TP1, which does not convey other information to the player other than the information that it is in "A mode," is placed behind the left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R. In addition, an A-mode exclusive background image is displayed as the background image in the decorative pattern stop position indefinite performance A. Therefore, if multiple types of A-mode exclusive background images are prepared, an A-mode exclusive background image corresponding to the expected degree of winning may be displayed.

In this way, unlike caption TP1, caption TP2 has a wide variety of presentations, and can contribute to suppressing a decrease in the player's desire to play due to the decorative pattern changing presentation (changing display) of the decorative pattern, which is an indefinite decorative pattern stopping position presentation A.

When the predetermined number (10 times) + 1 (i.e. 11th) of variable effects (variable display) ends and the predetermined number (10 times) + 2 (i.e. 12th) of variable effects (variable display) starts, as shown in FIG. 60(F), the left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R each emit light, and the corresponding left variable display area 8Lr, middle variable display area 8Cr, and right variable display area 8Rr are displayed with the reels spinning downward, and the counter image CNT is updated to "103 remaining" and displayed.

At this time, in the decorative pattern stop position indefinite performance A, the left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R are displayed as a changing performance (changing display) in which a random number appears opaquely as the number following each decorative pattern, as described above. When the changing performance (changing display) of the left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R starts at the same timing, they are displayed as stopped at the same timing.

Specifically, when the variable performance (variable display) of the left decorative pattern 8L of the number "4" displayed in FIG. 60(E) starts, the left decorative pattern 8L emits light, and the number "5" following the number "4" of the left decorative pattern 8L displayed in FIG. 60(E) becomes opaque and is not displayed as a left decorative pattern 8L in FIG. 60(F), and a random number "6" appears opaque and is displayed as a static display. Furthermore, the position of the left decorative pattern 8L of the number "4" displayed in FIG. 60(E) is the lower left side of the left variable display area 8Lr, whereas the variable performance (variable display) starts and the position of the left decorative pattern 8L of the number "6" displayed in FIG. 60(F) becomes the center of the left variable display area 8Lr instead of the lower left side of the left variable display area 8Lr.

When the variable performance (variable display) of the right decorative pattern 8R of the number "5" displayed in FIG. 60(E) starts, the right decorative pattern 8R emits light, and the number "6" following the number "5" of the right decorative pattern 8R displayed in FIG. 60(E) becomes opaque and is not displayed as a stopped right decorative pattern 8R in FIG. 60(F), and a random number "8" appears opaque and is displayed as a stopped right decorative pattern. Furthermore, the position of the right decorative pattern 8R of the number "5" displayed in FIG. 60(E) is the right center of the right variable display area 8Rr, whereas the variable performance (variable display) starts and the position of the right decorative pattern 8R of the number "8" displayed in FIG. 60(F) becomes slightly to the upper left of the center of the right variable display area 8Rr, not the right center of the right variable display area 8Rr.

When the moving effect (variable display) of the central decorative pattern 8C of the number "1" displayed in the stopped state in Fig. 60(E) is started, the central decorative pattern 8C emits light, and the number "2" following the number "1" of the central decorative pattern 8C displayed in the stopped state in Fig. 60(E) becomes opaque and is not displayed as the central decorative pattern 8C in Fig. 60(F), and a random number "8" appears opaque and is displayed as a stopped state. Furthermore, the position of the central decorative pattern 8C of the number "1" displayed in the stopped state in Fig. 60(E) is the left center of the central variable display area 8Cr, whereas the position of the central decorative pattern 8C of the number "8" displayed in the stopped state in Fig. 60(F) after the variable effect (variable display) is started is the right center of the central variable display area 8Cr, not the left center of the central variable display area 8Cr, and the central decorative pattern 8C of the number "8" jumps over the central variable display area 8Cr and straddles the right variable display area 8Rr. Therefore, the central decorative pattern 8C of the number "8" and the right decorative pattern 8R of the number "8" are partially overlapped. In other words, the central decorative pattern 8C of the number "8" is displayed in the direction in which the right decorative pattern 8R of the number "8" is changed (displayed) (the direction in which the right decorative pattern 8R changes toward the bottom of the right variable display area 8Rr (the direction of progress)) (the right decorative pattern 8R of the number "8" is displayed in the direction in which the central decorative pattern 8C of the number "8" is changed (displayed) (the direction in which the central decorative pattern 8C changes toward the bottom of the central variable display area 8Cr (the direction of progress))). Here, the central decorative pattern 8C of the number "8" is arranged in front of the right decorative pattern 8R of the number "8" as the front-back relationship between the central decorative pattern 8C of the number "8" and the right decorative pattern 8R of the number "8", and the central decorative pattern 8C of the number "8" is displayed in a manner in which it covers a part of the right decorative pattern 8R of the number "8".

When the predetermined number (10 times) + 2 times (i.e. 12 times) of variable performance (variable display) ends and then the predetermined number (10 times) + 3 times (i.e. 13 times) of variable performance (variable display) starts, as shown in Figure 60 (G), the left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R each emit light, and the variable performance (variable display) is performed so that the reels rotate downward in the corresponding left variable display area 8Lr, middle variable display area 8Cr, and right variable display area 8Rr, and the counter image CNT is updated to "102 remaining" and displayed.

At this time, in the decorative pattern stop position indefinite performance A, the left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R are displayed as a changing performance (changing display) in which a random number appears opaquely as the number following each decorative pattern, as described above. When the changing performance (changing display) of the left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R starts at the same timing, they are displayed as stopped at the same timing.

Specifically, when the variable performance (variable display) of the left decorative pattern 8L of the number "6" displayed in FIG. 60(F) starts, the left decorative pattern 8L emits light, and the number "7" following the number "6" of the left decorative pattern 8L displayed in FIG. 60(F) becomes opaque and is not displayed as a left decorative pattern 8L in FIG. 60(G), and a random number "1" appears opaque and is displayed as a stopped display. Furthermore, the position of the left decorative pattern 8L of the number "6" displayed in FIG. 60(F) is the center of the left variable display area 8Lr, whereas the variable performance (variable display) starts and the position of the left decorative pattern 8L of the number "1" displayed in FIG. 60(G) is not the center of the left variable display area 8Lr but the upper left side of the left variable display area 8Lr. Although the reserved number display area HS is provided to the upper left of the left variable display area 8Lr, because the left variable display area 8Lr is positioned at the frontmost side, part of the left decorative pattern 8L of the number "1" is covered by the reserved number display area HS.

When the variable performance (variable display) of the right decorative pattern 8R of the number "8" displayed in FIG. 60(F) starts, the right decorative pattern 8R emits light, and the number "9" following the number "8" of the right decorative pattern 8R displayed in FIG. 60(F) becomes opaque and is not displayed as a stopped right decorative pattern 8R in FIG. 60(G), and a random number "2" appears opaque and is displayed as a stopped right decorative pattern. Furthermore, the position of the right decorative pattern 8R of the number "8" displayed in FIG. 60(F) is slightly to the upper left of the center of the right variable display area 8Rr, whereas the variable performance (variable display) starts and the position of the right decorative pattern 8R of the number "2" displayed in FIG. 60(G) becomes the lower right side of the right variable display area 8Rr, not the slightly to the upper left of the center of the right variable display area 8Rr.

When the moving effect (variable display) of the central decorative pattern 8C of the number "8" displayed in the stopped state in Fig. 60(F) starts, the central decorative pattern 8C emits light, and the number "9" following the number "8" of the central decorative pattern 8C displayed in the stopped state in Fig. 60(F) appears opaque and is not displayed as the central decorative pattern 8C in Fig. 60(G), and a random number "7" appears opaque and is displayed as a stopped state. Furthermore, the position of the central decorative pattern 8C of the number "8" displayed in the stopped state in Fig. 60(F) is the center right side of the central variable display area 8Cr, whereas the position of the central decorative pattern 8C of the number "7" displayed in the stopped state in Fig. 60(G) after the variable effect (variable display) starts is not the center right side of the central variable display area 8Cr but is closer to the lower right side of the central variable display area 8Cr, and the central decorative pattern 8C of the number "7" jumps over the central variable display area 8Cr and straddles the right variable display area 8Rr. Although the counter image CNT is provided below the middle variable display area 8Cr, because the counter image CNT is positioned at the frontmost side, part of the middle decorative pattern 8C of the number "7" is covered by the counter image CNT.

When the specified number (10 times) + 3 times (i.e. the 13th time) of changing effects (changing display) starts, the message image "Now, now..." (telop TP2) is displayed in a telop display mode, moving from the right side to the left side of the display screen 7a so that it is parallel to the top side of the display screen 7a. The telop TP2 is white.

When the predetermined number (10 times) + 3 times (i.e. 13 times) of variable performance (variable display) ends and then the predetermined number (10 times) + 4 times (i.e. 14 times) of variable performance (variable display) starts, as shown in Figure 60 (H), the left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R each emit light, and the variable performance (variable display) is performed so that the reels rotate downward in the corresponding left variable display area 8Lr, middle variable display area 8Cr, and right variable display area 8Rr, and the counter image CNT is updated to "101 remaining" and displayed.

At this time, in the decorative pattern stop position indefinite performance A, the left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R are displayed as a changing performance (changing display) in which a random number appears opaquely as the number following each decorative pattern, as described above. When the changing performance (changing display) of the left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R starts at the same timing, they are displayed as stopped at the same timing.

Specifically, when the variable performance (variable display) of the left decorative pattern 8L of the number "1" displayed in a stopped state in FIG. 60(G) starts, the left decorative pattern 8L emits light, and the number "2" following the number "1" of the left decorative pattern 8L displayed in a stopped state in FIG. 60(G) appears opaque and is not displayed as a stopped state as the left decorative pattern 8L in FIG. 60(H), and a random number "9" appears opaque and is displayed as a stopped state. Furthermore, the position of the left decorative pattern 8L of the number "1" displayed in a stopped state in FIG. 60(G) is the upper left side of the left variable display area 8Lr, whereas the variable performance (variable display) starts and the position of the left decorative pattern 8L of the number "9" displayed in a stopped state in FIG. 60(H) is the lower right side of the left variable display area 8Lr rather than the upper left side of the left variable display area 8Lr.

When the change performance (change display) of the right decorative pattern 8R of the number "2" displayed in the stopped state in FIG. 60(G) starts, the right decorative pattern 8R emits light, and the number "3" following the number "2" of the right decorative pattern 8R displayed in the stopped state in FIG. 60(G) appears opaque and is not displayed as the right decorative pattern 8R in FIG. 60(H), and a random number "4" appears opaque and is displayed as a stopped state. Furthermore, the position of the right decorative pattern 8R of the number "2" displayed in the stopped state in FIG. 60(G) is the lower right side of the right variable display area 8Rr, whereas the change performance (change display) starts and the position of the right decorative pattern 8R of the number "4" displayed in the stopped state in FIG. 60(H) is closer to the upper left side of the right variable display area 8Rr rather than the lower right side of the right variable display area 8Rr, and the right decorative pattern 8R of the number "4" jumps over the right variable display area 8Rr and straddles the middle variable display area 8Cr.

When the moving effect (variable display) of the center decorative pattern 8C of the number "7" displayed in FIG. 60(G) starts, the center decorative pattern 8C emits light, and the number "8" following the number "7" of the center decorative pattern 8C displayed in FIG. 60(G) becomes opaque and is not displayed as the center decorative pattern 8C in FIG. 60(H), and a random number "3" appears opaque and is displayed as a stopped display. Furthermore, the position of the center decorative pattern 8C of the number "7" displayed in FIG. 60(G) is closer to the lower right side of the center variable display area 8Cr, whereas the position of the center decorative pattern 8C of the number "3" displayed in FIG. 60(H) after the variable effect (variable display) starts is not closer to the lower right side of the center variable display area 8Cr but is on the upper right side of the center variable display area 8Cr. Therefore, the center decorative pattern 8C of the number "3" and the right decorative pattern 8R of the number "4" overlap in part. In other words, the central decorative pattern 8C of the number "3" is displayed in the direction in which the right decorative pattern 8R of the number "4" is changed (displayed) (the direction in which the right decorative pattern 8R changes toward the bottom of the right variable display area 8Rr (the direction of progress)) (the right decorative pattern 8R of the number "4" is displayed in the direction in which the central decorative pattern 8C of the number "3" is changed (displayed) (the direction in which the central decorative pattern 8C changes toward the bottom of the central variable display area 8Cr (the direction of progress))). Here, the central decorative pattern 8C of the number "3" and the right decorative pattern 8R of the number "4" are in a front-to-back relationship, so that the right decorative pattern 8R of the number "4" is positioned in front of the central decorative pattern 8C of the number "3", and the right decorative pattern 8R of the number "4" covers part of the central decorative pattern 8C of the number "3".

As the change performance (change display) progresses and the predetermined number (10 times) + 54th (i.e. 64th) change performance (change display) ends, and then the predetermined number (10 times) + 55th (i.e. 65th) change performance (change display) begins, as shown in Figure 60 (I), the left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R each emit light, and the change performance (change display) is performed so that the reels rotate downward in the corresponding left variable display area 8Lr, middle variable display area 8Cr, and right variable display area 8Rr, and the counter image CNT is updated to "50 remaining" and displayed.

At this time, in the decorative pattern stop position indefinite performance A, the left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R are displayed as a changing performance (changing display) in which a random number appears opaquely as the number following each decorative pattern, as described above. When the changing performance (changing display) of the left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R starts at the same timing, they are displayed as stopped at the same timing.

Specifically, when the variable performance (variable display) of the left decorative pattern 8L of the number "2" displayed in the 64th time (not shown) starts, the left decorative pattern 8L emits light, and the number "3" following the number "2" of the left decorative pattern 8L displayed in the 64th time (not shown) becomes opaque and is not displayed as a left decorative pattern 8L in FIG. 60 (I), and a random number "4" appears opaque and is displayed as a static display. Furthermore, the position of the left decorative pattern 8L of the number "2" displayed in the 64th time (not shown) is the center of the left variable display area 8Lr, whereas the variable performance (variable display) starts and the position of the left decorative pattern 8L of the number "4" displayed in FIG. 60 (I) becomes slightly lower right of the center of the left variable display area 8Lr, not the center of the left variable display area 8Lr.

When the variable performance (variable display) of the right decorative pattern 8R of the number "3" displayed in the 64th time (not shown) starts, the right decorative pattern 8R emits light, and the number "4" following the number "3" of the right decorative pattern 8R displayed in the 64th time (not shown) becomes opaque and is not displayed as the right decorative pattern 8R in Fig. 60 (I), and a random number "1" appears opaque and is displayed as a stopped number. Furthermore, the position of the right decorative pattern 8R of the number "3" displayed in the 64th time (not shown) is the left center of the right variable display area 8Rr, whereas the variable performance (variable display) starts and the position of the right decorative pattern 8R of the number "1" displayed in the 64th time (not shown) becomes the upper right side of the right variable display area 8Rr instead of the left center of the right variable display area 8Rr. Although a sub-variable area KSZ is provided above the right variable display area 8Rr, because the sub-variable area KSZ is positioned at the frontmost side, part of the right decorative pattern 8R of the number "1" is covered by the sub-variable area KSZ.

When the moving effect (variable display) of the central decorative pattern 8C of the number "6" displayed in the 64th time (not shown) starts, the central decorative pattern 8C emits light, and the number "7" following the number "6" of the central decorative pattern 8C displayed in the 64th time (not shown) becomes opaque and is not displayed as a central decorative pattern 8C in Fig. 60 (I), and a random number "5" appears opaque and is displayed as a stationary display. Furthermore, the position of the central decorative pattern 8C of the number "6" displayed in the 64th time (not shown) is the upper left side of the central variable display area 8Cr, whereas the position of the central decorative pattern 8C of the number "5" displayed in the 64th time (not shown) is closer to the lower left side of the central variable display area 8Cr rather than the upper left side of the central variable display area 8Cr after the variable effect (variable display) starts, and the central decorative pattern 8C of the number "5" jumps over the central variable display area 8Cr and straddles the left variable display area 8Lr. Therefore, the central decorative pattern 8C of the number "5" and the left decorative pattern 8L of the number "4" are partially overlapped. In other words, the central decorative pattern 8C of the number "5" is displayed in the direction in which the left decorative pattern 8L of the number "4" is changed (displayed) (the direction in which the left decorative pattern 8L changes toward the bottom of the left variable display area 8Lr (the direction of progress)) (the left decorative pattern 8L of the number "4" is displayed in the direction in which the central decorative pattern 8C of the number "5" is changed (displayed) (the direction in which the central decorative pattern 8C changes toward the bottom of the central variable display area 8Cr (the direction of progress))). Here, the central decorative pattern 8C of the number "5" is arranged in front of the right decorative pattern 8R of the number "4" as the front-back relationship between the central decorative pattern 8C of the number "5" and the left decorative pattern 8L of the number "4", and the central decorative pattern 8C of the number "5" is displayed in a manner that covers a part of the right decorative pattern 8R of the number "4".

When the predetermined number (10 times) + 55th (i.e. 65th) of variable effects (variable display) ends and then the predetermined number (10 times) + 56th (i.e. 66th) of variable effects (variable display) begins, as shown in Figure 60 (J), the left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R each emit light, and the corresponding left variable display area 8Lr, middle variable display area 8Cr, and right variable display area 8Rr are displayed with the reels spinning downward, and the counter image CNT is updated to "49 remaining" and displayed.

At this time, in the decorative pattern stop position indefinite performance A, the left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R are displayed as a changing performance (changing display) in which a random number appears opaquely as the number following each decorative pattern, as described above. When the changing performance (changing display) of the left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R starts at the same timing, they are displayed as stopped at the same timing.

Specifically, when the variable performance (variable display) of the left decorative pattern 8L of the number "4" displayed stopped in Figure 60 (I) begins, the left decorative pattern 8L emits light, and the number "5" following the number "4" of the left decorative pattern 8L displayed stopped in Figure 60 (I) appears opaque and is not displayed stopped as the left decorative pattern 8L in Figure 60 (J), and instead a random number "2" appears opaque and is displayed stopped. Furthermore, the position of the left decorative pattern 8L of the number "4" displayed in a stopped state in Figure 60 (I) is slightly to the lower right of the center of the left variable display area 8Lr, whereas the variable performance (variable display) has started and the position of the left decorative pattern 8L of the number "2" displayed in a stopped state in Figure 60 (J) is closer to the upper right of the left variable display area 8Lr rather than slightly to the lower right of the center of the left variable display area 8Lr, and the left decorative pattern 8L of the number "2" jumps over the left variable display area 8Lr and straddles the middle variable display area 8Cr.

When the variable performance (variable display) of the right decorative pattern 8R of the number "1" displayed in FIG. 60(I) starts, the right decorative pattern 8R emits light, and the number "2" following the number "1" of the right decorative pattern 8R displayed in FIG. 60(I) becomes opaque and is not displayed as a stopped right decorative pattern 8R in FIG. 60(J), and a random number "7" appears opaque and is displayed as a stopped right decorative pattern. Furthermore, the position of the right decorative pattern 8R of the number "1" displayed in FIG. 60(I) is the upper right side of the right variable display area 8Rr, whereas the variable performance (variable display) starts and the position of the right decorative pattern 8R of the number "7" displayed in FIG. 60(J) becomes the lower center of the right variable display area 8Rr, not the upper right side of the right variable display area 8Rr.

When the moving effect (variable display) of the center decorative pattern 8C of the number "5" displayed in FIG. 60(I) starts, the center decorative pattern 8C emits light, and the number "6" following the number "5" of the center decorative pattern 8C displayed in FIG. 60(I) becomes opaque and is not displayed as a center decorative pattern 8C in FIG. 60(J), and a random number "8" appears opaque and is displayed as a stopped display. Furthermore, the position of the center decorative pattern 8C of the number "5" displayed in FIG. 60(I) is closer to the lower left side of the center variable display area 8Cr, whereas the position of the center decorative pattern 8C of the number "8" displayed in FIG. 60(J) after the variable effect (variable display) starts is not closer to the lower left side of the center variable display area 8Cr but is closer to the upper left side of the center variable display area 8Cr. Therefore, a part of the center decorative pattern 8C of the number "8" and the left decorative pattern 8L of the number "2" overlap. In other words, the central decorative pattern 8C of the number "8" is displayed in the direction in which the left decorative pattern 8L of the number "2" is changed (displayed) (the direction in which the left decorative pattern 8L changes toward the bottom of the left variable display area 8Lr (the direction in which the left decorative pattern 8L changes (the direction of progress))). Here, the central decorative pattern 8C of the number "8" and the left decorative pattern 8L of the number "2" are in a front-to-back relationship, with the left decorative pattern 8L of the number "2" being positioned in front of the central decorative pattern 8C of the number "8", and the left decorative pattern 8L of the number "2" covering a part of the central decorative pattern 8C of the number "8".

When the predetermined number (10 times) + 56th (i.e. 66th) of changing effects (changing displays) starts, this time the message image "Will it happen soon?", the message image "Oh, it's endless...", and the message image telop TP2 "Oh, I wonder if it's happening yet" are displayed moving in a telop display mode from the right side to the left side of the display screen 7a so as to be parallel to the top side of the display screen 7a. The message image "Will it happen soon?" is blue, and the message image "Oh, it's endless..." and the message image "Oh, I wonder if it's happening yet" are white.

After that, the variable performance (variable display) will proceed, and when the specified number (10 times) + 105th (i.e. 115th) of variable performances (variable display) have ended, A mode will end, and the decorative pattern stop position indefinite performance A will also end, and the game will return to the normal game mode, and a variable performance (variable display) will be performed with the left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R, as shown in Figures 60 (A) and (B).

In the decorative pattern stop position indefinite performance A, the performance in the case of "no reach and miss" is shown from Figure 60 (C) to Figure 60 (J), but in the case of "reach and miss", the left decorative pattern 8L and the right decorative pattern 8R are not temporarily stopped side by side on the same horizontal line, the display screen 7a goes black (becomes a completely black screen), and white shining light converges toward the center of the display screen 7a and then disappears, like the power to the cathode ray tube of an analog television is turned off. At this time, the contents of the reserved number display area HS and the sub-variable area KSZ are maintained in the displayed state. In other words, in the sub-variable area KSZ, the variable performance (variable display) of the small left decorative pattern, small middle decorative pattern, and small right decorative pattern continues. This state is maintained until the time arrives to notify the result of the lottery (miss). Then, when the time to announce the winning or losing result (losing) comes, as shown in Figures 60(C) to 60(J), the left decorative pattern 8L, the center decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R change appearance (changing display) as described above, with random numbers appearing opaquely as the number following each decorative pattern, and stopping and displaying at the same timing.

On the other hand, in the case of a win, as in the case of a miss, the display screen 7a first goes black (becomes a completely black screen), and then the white light beams converge toward the center of the display screen 7a and eventually disappear, as if the power to the cathode ray tube of an analog television had been turned off. At this time, the contents of the reserved number display area HS and the sub-variable area KSZ remain displayed. In other words, in the sub-variable area KSZ, the variable performance (variable display) of the small left decorative pattern, small middle decorative pattern, and small right decorative pattern continues. After that, the left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R appear as, for example, the number "7" in the center of the corresponding left variable display area 8Lr, middle variable display area 8Cr, and right variable display area 8Rr, respectively, and are temporarily stopped in line on the same horizontal line and then stopped, and the winning result is displayed as a confirmed win, and then the winning game begins. When a win is announced as the result of the draw, the left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R are displayed as stopped (confirmed display), and at the same time, in the sub-variable area KSZ, the small left decorative pattern, the small middle decorative pattern, and the small right decorative pattern are also displayed as stopped (confirmed display) with the same number (numerical pattern, in this case the number "7") as the left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R.

In decorative pattern stop position indefinite performance A, the longer the period during which the display screen 7a is blacked out (the period during which the screen is completely black), the higher the expectation of a win becomes. Therefore, even though the display screen 7a is a monotonous blacked-out screen (a completely black screen), it is possible to heighten and excite the player's sense of expectation.

In this way, in the decorative pattern stop position indefinite performance A, the stop positions of the left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R can change randomly (irregularly) each time the left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R stop in a definite manner. At this time, when one decorative pattern and another decorative pattern are displayed overlapping among the left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R, for example, in the positional relationship between the middle decorative pattern 8C and the right decorative pattern 8R among the left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R, when the middle decorative pattern 8C and the right decorative pattern 8R in Figure 60 (F) are displayed overlapping, the middle decorative pattern 8C is positioned in front of the right decorative pattern 8R, resulting in a display mode in which the middle decorative pattern 8C covers a part of the right decorative pattern 8R, whereas when the middle decorative pattern 8C and the right decorative pattern 8R in Figure 60 (H) are displayed overlapping, the right decorative pattern 8R is positioned in front of the middle decorative pattern 8C, resulting in a display mode in which the right decorative pattern 8R covers a part of the middle decorative pattern 8C. Furthermore, for example, in the positional relationship between the left decorative pattern 8L and the middle decorative pattern 8C among the left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R, when the left decorative pattern 8L and the middle decorative pattern 8C in Figure 60 (I) are displayed overlapping, the middle decorative pattern 8C is positioned in front of the left decorative pattern 8L, resulting in a display mode in which the middle decorative pattern 8C covers a portion of the left decorative pattern 8L, whereas when the left decorative pattern 8L and the middle decorative pattern 8C in Figure 60 (J) are displayed overlapping, the left decorative pattern 8L is positioned in front of the middle decorative pattern 8C, resulting in a display mode in which the left decorative pattern 8L covers a portion of the middle decorative pattern 8C. For this reason, in the decorative pattern stop position undefined performance A, the stop positions of the left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R change randomly (irregularly) every time the left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R are fixedly stopped, and the positional relationship (front-to-back relationship) between the middle decorative pattern 8C and the right decorative pattern 8R and the positional relationship (front-to-back relationship) between the left decorative pattern 8L and the middle decorative pattern 8C also change randomly (irregularly), so that the variation of the left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R change (variable display) can be increased. This can contribute to suppressing a decrease in the player's motivation to play the decorative pattern stop position undefined performance A.

In addition, in the decorative pattern stop position indefinite performance A, the left decorative pattern 8L does not protrude from the top, left, and bottom sides of the display screen 7a from the left variable display area 8Lr in the variable performance (variable display), but it may be displayed in a way that makes it look like it is protruding. In this case, the part where the left decorative pattern 8L protrudes is difficult to see. In addition, the middle decorative pattern 8C does not protrude from the top and bottom sides of the display screen 7a from the middle variable display area 8Cr in the variable performance (variable display), but it may be displayed in a way that makes it look like it is protruding. In this case, the part where the middle decorative pattern 8C protrudes is difficult to see. In addition, the right decorative pattern 8R does not protrude from the top, right, and bottom sides of the display screen 7a from the right variable display area 8Rr in the variable performance (variable display), but it may be displayed in a way that makes it look like it is protruding. In this case, the part where the right decorative pattern 8R protrudes is difficult to see.

[Decorative pattern stop position variable performance B]
Next, the decorative symbol stop position undefined effect B will be described with reference to Fig. 61. Fig. 61 is a diagram for explaining the decorative symbol stop position undefined effect B. The decorative symbol stop position undefined effect B is performed when the game mode is shifted to the special game mode, and the following describes the case where the game mode is shifted from the normal game mode to the special game mode in the normal game mode.

First, as shown in FIG. 61(A), the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 is provided with three vertically long rectangular regions (i.e., the display screen 7a is divided into three equal regions in a row) as variable display regions for the three decorative symbols (also referred to as "variable display regions for decorative symbols"). The display mode in which the reels rotate from the top of each variable display region to the bottom of the display screen 7a displays the left decorative symbol 8L of the stereoscopic image, the center decorative symbol 8C of the stereoscopic image, and the right decorative symbol 8R of the stereoscopic image, starting with the rotation of the reels, starts the variable performance (variable display) of the decorative symbols (symbols: numbers "1" to "9"). Specifically, the left decorative pattern 8L starts changing (changing display) when the reel rotates from the top of the left variable display area 8Lr to the bottom of the left variable display area 8Lr, the middle decorative pattern 8C starts changing (changing display) when the reel rotates from the top of the middle variable display area 8Cr to the bottom of the middle variable display area 8Cr, and the right decorative pattern 8R starts changing (changing display) when the reel rotates from the top of the right variable display area 8Rr to the bottom of the right variable display area 8Rr. The vertical distance dimension of the left variable display area 8Lr, the vertical distance dimension of the middle variable display area 8Cr, and the vertical distance dimension of the right variable display area 8Rr are the same vertical distance dimension, and further, the horizontal distance dimension of the left variable display area 8Lr, the horizontal distance dimension of the middle variable display area 8Cr, and the horizontal distance dimension of the right variable display area 8Rr are the same horizontal distance dimension.

The decorative symbols change appearance (changing display) in such a way that the reels spin in the following order: Number "1" → Number "2" → Number "3" → Number "4" → Number "5" → Number "6" → Number "7" → Number "8" → Number "9" → Number "1" → Number "2" → ...

Of the numbers "1" to "9", the odd numbers "1", "3", "5" and "9" (excluding the number "7") are bright red, while the even numbers "2", "4", "6" and "8" are bright blue, and the number "7" is yellow (gold). The sizes of the numbers "1" to "9" are normal sizes, with their vertical distance dimensions each being approximately one-third the vertical distance dimension of the left variable display area 8Lr (middle variable display area 8Cr, right variable display area 8Rr) and their horizontal distance dimensions each being approximately one-half the horizontal distance dimension of the left variable display area 8Lr (middle variable display area 8Cr, right variable display area 8Rr). The numbers "1" through "9" are written in special typefaces (originally created typefaces) that are different from existing typefaces (generally available typefaces) such as regular script, Gothic, and Ming style, and are created specifically for the purpose.

In the normal game mode, when the decorative pattern change performance (changing display) starts, the decorative pattern displayed as still changes from an opaque state to a semi-transparent state while gradually increasing its speed from a low speed, and changes at high speed. This allows the background image placed behind the decorative pattern to be viewed through the semi-transparent decorative pattern that is changing at high speed. The decorative pattern slows down just before stopping, changes from a semi-transparent state to an opaque state again, and is displayed as temporarily stopped, or as still (displayed as temporarily stopped, then displayed as still). When the decorative pattern is displayed as temporarily stopped, it moves slowly up and down in small movements.

In addition, on the upper right side of the display screen 7a, there is provided a sub-variable area KSZ having a horizontally long rectangular shape in which small left decorative patterns, small middle decorative patterns, and small right decorative patterns corresponding to the left decorative pattern 8L, middle decorative pattern 8C, and right decorative pattern 8R, respectively, are displayed in a variable manner (variable display). The background image of the sub-variable area KSZ is fixed to a single color (for example, a dark color (dark-dark color series) or a color close to a dark color (for example, deep green) and does not change to other colors. The sub-variable area KSZ is located on the upper right side of the display screen 7a, so it overlaps with the right variable display area 8Rr, which is the variable area of the right decorative pattern 8R. However, by arranging the sub-variable area KSZ to be the foremost side, the right decorative pattern 8R is positioned behind the sub-variable area KSZ and the sub-variable area KSZ is not obstructed by the right decorative pattern 8R. Even if other performance images appear, the other performance images are positioned behind the sub-variable area KSZ and are not obstructed by the other performance images. In other words, the visibility of the content displayed in the sub-variable area KSZ is not hindered by the right decorative pattern 8R or other performance images.

The small decorative pattern is a number pattern, and is in a font (e.g., Mincho) different from the font of the left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R, and is unified in another monochrome color (e.g., a light color (yellow or white)) that contrasts highly with the monochrome color of the background image of the sub-variable area KSZ, and will not change to another color. The small decorative pattern is positioned in front of the background image of the sub-variable area KSZ and is always opaque; even when it starts to change, it will not become translucent, and will not disappear from the display screen 7a.

Unlike the left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R, the small decorative pattern is not changed (displayed) by the reel spinning, but by the number pattern appearing one after the other in the same size and opaque state in the same display position.

When the variable performance (variable display) of the left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R starts, a variable performance (variable display) of the small left decorative pattern, the small middle decorative pattern, and the small right decorative pattern starts in the sub-variable area KSZ, and the left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R are all displayed frozen, while the small left decorative pattern, the small middle decorative pattern, and the small right decorative pattern are also all displayed frozen.

Even if any one or more of the left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R are temporarily stopped (for example, the left decorative pattern 8L and the right decorative pattern 8R are temporarily stopped with the same pattern and a reach is formed), the small left decorative pattern, the small middle decorative pattern, and the small right decorative pattern are all in a state of continuing the variable performance (variable display). Specifically, even if the left decorative pattern 8L is temporarily stopped, the variable performance (variable display) of the small left decorative pattern continues, and even if the right decorative pattern 8R is temporarily stopped, the variable performance (variable display) of the small right decorative pattern continues, and at the same time that the left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R are all stopped, the small left decorative pattern, the small middle decorative pattern, and the small right decorative pattern are all stopped.

In addition, when the left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R are all stopped and displayed, and the same pattern is not aligned and a miss occurs, the small left decorative pattern, the small middle decorative pattern, and the small right decorative pattern may be the same as the left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R, or may be completely different patterns. Specifically, for example, when the left decorative pattern 8L is stopped and displayed with the number "1", the middle decorative pattern 8C is stopped and displayed with the number "2", and the right decorative pattern 8R is stopped and displayed with the number "3", the small left decorative pattern may be stopped and displayed with the number "1", the small middle decorative pattern may be stopped and displayed with the number "2", and the small right decorative pattern may be stopped and displayed with the number "3", or the small left decorative pattern may be stopped and displayed with the number "5", the small middle decorative pattern may be stopped and displayed with the number "6", and the small right decorative pattern may be stopped and displayed with the number "7".

In contrast, when the left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R are all stopped and displayed, and they line up to form the same pattern, resulting in a win, the small left decorative pattern, the small middle decorative pattern, and the small right decorative pattern will line up to form the same pattern as the left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R.

The variable icons 9C corresponding to the left decorative pattern 8L, middle decorative pattern 8C, and right decorative pattern 8R that are currently fluctuating as the first special chart reservation is consumed are displayed (placed) at the variable display position 9Cd (above a rectangular image (pedestal image)) displayed in the lower center of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7. In the area of the display screen 7a to the left of the variable display position 9Cd, a reserve display area is provided for the first special chart reservation. In this reserve display area, reserve icons 9A can be displayed (placed) at each of the four reserve display positions 9Ad (above a rectangular image (pedestal image)), and a maximum of four reserve icons 9A can be stored. The four hold display positions 9Ad are aligned and displayed in a straight line along the bottom edge of the display screen 7a in the following order from the position closest to the variable display position 9Cd toward the left edge of the display screen 7a: first hold display position 9Ad, second hold display position 9Ad, third hold display position 9Ad, and fourth hold display position 9Ad.

The variable display position 9Cd is located in the lower center of the display screen 7a, and the first reserved display position 9Ad is located to the left of the variable display position 9Cd, so that the variable display position 9Cd and the first reserved display position 9Ad overlap with the middle variable display area 8Cr, which is the variable area of the middle decorative pattern 8C, but the middle decorative pattern 8C is located behind the variable display position 9Cd and the first reserved display position 9Ad, so the variable display position 9Cd and the first reserved display position 9Ad are not blocked by the middle decorative pattern 8C. However, when another performance image appears, if the other performance image is located behind the variable display position 9Cd and the first reserved display position 9Ad, the variable display position 9Cd and the first reserved display position 9Ad will not be blocked by the other performance image, but if the other performance image is located in front of the variable display position 9Cd and the first reserved display position 9Ad, the variable display position 9Cd and the first reserved display position 9Ad will be blocked by the other performance image.

Since the second hold display position 9Ad to the fourth hold display position 9Ad are arranged on the lower left side of the display screen 7a, the second hold display position 9Ad to the fourth hold display position 9Ad overlap with the left variable display area 8Lr, which is the variable area of the left decorative pattern 8L, but the left decorative pattern 8L is arranged behind the second hold display position 9Ad to the fourth hold display position 9Ad and the left decorative pattern 8L does not block the second hold display position 9Ad to the fourth hold display position 9Ad. However, when another effect image appears, if the other effect image is arranged behind the second hold display position 9Ad to the fourth hold display position 9Ad, the second hold display position 9Ad to the fourth hold display position 9Ad will not be blocked by the other effect image, but if the other effect image is arranged in front of the second hold display position 9Ad to the fourth hold display position 9Ad, the second hold display position 9Ad to the fourth hold display position 9Ad will be blocked by the other effect image.

In this way, of the first hold display position 9Ad to the fourth hold display position 9Ad, the first hold display position 9Ad overlaps with the middle variable display area 8Cr, which is the variable area of the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the second hold display position 9Ad to the fourth hold display position 9Ad overlap with the left variable display area 8Lr, which is the variable area of the left decorative pattern 8L, so that the hold display area as the first special pattern hold consisting of the first hold display position 9Ad to the fourth hold display position 9Ad is arranged across the middle variable display area 8Cr and the left variable display area 8Lr.

Here, the change display position 9Cd displays the change icon 9C in the form of a white sphere, and the first hold display position 9Ad to the fourth hold display position 9Ad display the hold icon 9A. In other words, there are four hold icons that have not been consumed and are stored. In the following explanation, it is assumed that during the change display (change display) of the decorative pattern, a game ball enters the first start hole 20, resulting in a state in which three or four hold icons are present (i.e., the number of holds is three or four), but no game ball enters the second start hole 21. In addition, as the number of holds increases, the time from the start to the end of the change display (change display) (change time) becomes shorter. For example, in this embodiment, when the number of holds is three or four, the change time is 5000 milliseconds (0.5 seconds) in the case of a no-reach miss.

In addition, on the upper left side of the display screen 7a, facing the above-mentioned sub-variable area KSZ (along the same horizontal line), there is provided a reserve number display area HS having a horizontally long rectangular shape in which the first special reserve based on the game ball entering the first starting hole 20 and the second special reserve based on the game ball entering the second starting hole 21 are displayed as reserve numbers (numbers). The vertical distance dimension of the reserve number display area HS and the vertical distance dimension of the sub-variable area KSZ are the same vertical distance dimension, and the horizontal distance dimension of the reserve number display area HS and the horizontal distance dimension of the sub-variable area KSZ are the same horizontal distance dimension. In other words, the shape of the reserve number display area HS and the shape of the sub-variable area KSZ are the same shape.

The background image of the reserved number display area HS is fixed as colorless and transparent, unlike the background image of the sub-variable area KSZ, and does not become opaque or change to another color. The reserved number display area HS is positioned on the upper left side of the display screen 7a, and therefore overlaps with the left variable display area 8Lr, which is the variable area of the left decorative pattern 8L. However, by positioning the reserved number display area HS as the foremost side, the left decorative pattern 8L is positioned behind the reserved number display area HS and the reserved number display area HS is not obstructed by the left decorative pattern 8L, and even if another performance image appears, the other performance image is positioned behind the reserved number display area HS and the reserved number display area HS is not obstructed by the other performance image.

The number of reserved first special figures (reserved number (number)) and the number of reserved second special figures (reserved number (number)) are in a font (e.g., Gothic) different from the font of the small decorative pattern, and are set to other solid colors that have high contrast with the solid color of the background image of the reserved number display area HS, and do not change to other colors. The number of reserved first special figures (reserved number (number)) and the number of reserved second special figures (reserved number (number)) are arranged on the front side of the background image of the reserved number display area HS and are always opaque, and do not disappear from the display screen 7a. Specifically, the number of reserved first special figures based on the entry of game balls into the first starting hole 20 is always displayed as a blue number on the left side of the reserved number display area HS, and the number of reserved second special figures based on the entry of game balls into the second starting hole 21 is always displayed as a red number on the right side of the reserved number display area HS, spaced apart from each other. These numbers are displayed as the number of reserved balls, so they are easy to distinguish from the various background images and decorative images displayed on the display screen 7a, making them intuitively easy to understand. In other words, the content displayed in the reserved number display area HS is not hindered in visibility by other performance images. The blue color indicating the number of reserved first special symbols is a different color (not the same color) from the bright blue of the even-numbered symbols "2", "4", "6", and "8", but is a similar color. The red color indicating the number of reserved second special symbols is a different color (not the same color) from the bright red of the odd-numbered symbols "1", "3", "5", and "9", excluding the number "7", but is a similar color.

Here, briefly explaining the reserved icon 9A and the variable icon 9C (hereinafter sometimes simply referred to as "icon"), the differences in shape and color represent the differences in the expectation of winning at the time of the lottery corresponding to the icon. For example, of the four icons, namely, the yellow (gold) star icon, the black spherical icon, the smiling sphere icon, and the white spherical icon, the yellow (gold) star icon has the highest expectation of winning, the black spherical icon has the second highest expectation of winning, the smiling sphere icon has the third highest expectation of winning, and the white spherical icon has the lowest expectation of winning. For the smiling sphere icon, the expectation of winning is further set in the order of, for example, blue → green → red → gold (yellow) → seven colors (rainbow (high probability of winning)).

In the normal game mode, as shown in FIG. 61(A), the decorative pattern change performance (changing display) is started, and then the left decorative pattern 8L, which changes from the top to the bottom in the left changing display area 8Lr, is displayed temporarily stopped in the center of the left changing display area 8Lr, and moves slowly in small increments in the up and down direction. Then, the right decorative pattern 8R, which changes from the top to the bottom in the right changing display area 8Rr, is displayed temporarily stopped in the center of the right changing display area 8Rr, and moves slowly in small increments in the up and down direction. Then, the middle decorative pattern 8C, which changes from the top to the bottom in the middle changing display area 8Cr, is displayed temporarily stopped in the center of the middle changing display area 8Cr, and moves slowly in small increments in the up and down direction.

In addition, in the normal game mode, multiple types of background images for normal gameplay are provided as background images, and the background images are switched appropriately.

After that, as shown in FIG. 61(B), the left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R are all displayed (confirmed) as stopped in the center of their respective variable display areas, so that the left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R are displayed (confirmed) side-by-side on the same horizontal line. As a result, the variable icon 9C disappears from the display screen 7a.

Next, when the player starts moving toward the variable display position 9Cd to consume the reserved icon 9A placed at the first reserved display position 9Ad, as shown in FIG. 61(C), the left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, the right decorative pattern 8R, the variable display position 9Cd, the first reserved display position 9Ad to the fourth reserved display position 9ad, the variable icon 9C, and all the reserved icons 9A disappear from the display screen 7a. In the second sub-variable area CSZ described later, a variable performance (variable display) using medium-sized decorative patterns is started, and then the background image is switched from the background image for normal play to the background image for A mode only, and a large message image MSG saying "Enter A mode" is displayed in the center of the display screen 7a. This A mode is a special play mode. In the A mode, a decorative pattern stop position indefinite performance B is started, which is a display mode different from the variable performance (variable display) of the decorative pattern in the play mode in the normal play state of FIG. 61(A) and (B) described above.

The A-mode exclusive background image is a background image that is different from the normal game background image that is used as the background image in the game mode in the normal game state, and is a background image that is used exclusively in A-mode. There may be only one A-mode exclusive background image prepared, or multiple types may be prepared.

In this embodiment, the condition for the decorative pattern stop position uncertain performance B to occur is, for example, when the number of times a variable performance (variable display) has been performed without a win reaching 2.5 to 3 times the normal probability state (non-high probability state, low probability state, normal state). Also, in the decorative pattern stop position uncertain performance B, a predetermined number of variable performances (variable display) are performed. This "predetermined number" is, for example, up to 3.8 times the normal probability state (non-high probability state, low probability state, normal state), which is 115 times in this case.

When the decorative pattern stop position indefinite performance B starts, a second sub-variable area CSZ having a horizontally long rectangular shape is provided on the lower left side of the display screen 7a, in which the medium-sized left decorative pattern, medium-sized middle decorative pattern, and medium-sized right decorative pattern corresponding to the left decorative pattern 8L, middle decorative pattern 8C, and right decorative pattern 8R, respectively, are displayed in a variable manner (variable display). The vertical distance dimension of the second sub-variable area CSZ is approximately five times larger than the vertical distance dimension of the sub-variable area KSZ, and the horizontal distance dimension of the second sub-variable area CSZ is approximately five times larger than the horizontal distance dimension of the sub-variable area KSZ, and they have similar shapes.

The sizes of the medium-sized left decorative pattern, medium-sized middle decorative pattern, and medium-sized right decorative pattern that are displayed (displayed) in the second sub-variable area CSZ are larger (about 5 times larger) than the sizes of the small-sized left decorative pattern, small middle decorative pattern, and small right decorative pattern that are displayed (displayed) in the sub-variable area KSZ, but are smaller than the sizes of the left decorative pattern 8L, middle decorative pattern 8C, and right decorative pattern 8R. Also, unlike the small-sized left decorative pattern, small middle decorative pattern, and small right decorative pattern, the medium-sized left decorative pattern, medium middle decorative pattern, and medium-sized right decorative pattern have smaller shapes than the left decorative pattern 8L, middle decorative pattern 8C, and right decorative pattern 8R, have similar shapes, and are the same color. In other words, the medium-sized left decorative pattern is a smaller version of the left decorative pattern 8L and has the same color as the left decorative pattern 8L, the medium-sized middle decorative pattern is a smaller version of the middle decorative pattern 8C and has the same color as the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the medium-sized right decorative pattern is a smaller version of the right decorative pattern 8R and has the same color as the right decorative pattern 8R.

The background image of the second sub-variable area CSZ is fixed to be colorless and transparent, unlike the background image of the sub-variable area KSZ, and does not become opaque or change to another color. The second sub-variable area CSZ is arranged on the lower left side of the display screen 7a, and therefore overlaps with the left variable display area 8Lr, which is the variable area of the left decorative pattern 8L. However, in this embodiment, during the period in which the second sub-variable area CSZ is displayed on the display screen 7a, the left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R are in a state of disappearing from the display screen 7a, so that the left decorative pattern 8L does not block the sub-variable area KSZ. In addition, by arranging the second sub-variable area CSZ to be the foremost side, even if another performance image appears, the other performance image is arranged behind the second sub-variable area CSZ, and the second sub-variable area CSZ is not blocked by the other performance image. In other words, the visibility of the content displayed in the second sub-variable area CSZ is not hindered by the left decorative pattern 8L or other performance images.

Unlike the left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R, the medium-sized decorative pattern does not undergo a variable performance (variable display) in a display mode in which the reels are rotated, but instead undergoes a variable performance (variable display) in the same display position, for example, from the left edge of the medium-sized decorative pattern through the front to the right edge of the medium-sized decorative pattern, as if a coin were spinning. And when the variable performance (variable display) starts at the same timing for the medium-sized decorative patterns, that is, the medium-sized left decorative pattern, the medium-sized middle decorative pattern, and the medium-sized right decorative pattern, the medium-sized left decorative pattern, and the medium-sized middle decorative pattern, are displayed stopped at the same timing.

In this embodiment, when the decorative pattern stop position indefinite performance B, in which a maximum of 115 changing performances (changing displays) are performed, is started, a changing performance (changing display) using medium-sized decorative patterns is started in the second sub-changing area CSZ, and is performed a predetermined number of times (10 times in this embodiment). During the period in which the changing performance (changing display) using medium-sized decorative patterns is performed a predetermined number of times (10 times) in the second sub-changing area CSZ, the left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R are in a state of having disappeared from the display screen 7a. When the changing performance (changing display) using medium-sized decorative patterns is started in the second sub-changing area CSZ and the second changing performance (changing display) is performed, a message image MSG with a gold color (gold color) saying "Entering A mode" is displayed. This message image MSG is displayed for a predetermined time (in this embodiment, 5 seconds) and then disappears from the display screen 7a. Thereafter, a message image reading "A mode" is displayed as a caption TP1 (see, for example, FIG. 61(D)) along the top edge of the display screen 7a, moving repeatedly from the right side to the left side of the display screen 7a in a caption display mode, for the period during which the decorative pattern stop position indefinite performance B is being performed.

The caption TP1, which is a message image saying "A mode", is the same color (gold) as the message image MSG saying "Entering A mode". The area in which the caption TP1 is displayed and moved is a strip-shaped area having a predetermined distance dimension from the top edge of the display screen 7a, and is about four times larger than the vertical distance dimension of the sub-variable area KSZ (or the reserved number display area HS). The area in which the caption TP1 is displayed and moved overlaps with the sub-variable area KSZ and the reserved number display area HS, but since the sub-variable area KSZ and the reserved number display area HS are positioned to be the foremost side as described above, the caption TP1 is positioned behind the sub-variable area KSZ and the reserved number display area HS, and the sub-variable area KSZ and the reserved number display area HS are not obstructed by the caption TP1. In other words, the visibility of the contents displayed in the sub-variable area KSZ and the reserved number display area HS is not hindered by the caption TP1.

As described above, the area in which the telop TP1 is displayed is a band-shaped area having a predetermined distance from the top edge of the display screen 7a, and this area overlaps with the upper area of the left variable display area 8Lr, which is the variable area of the left decorative pattern 8L, with the upper area of the middle variable display area 8Cr, which is the variable area of the middle decorative pattern 8C, and with the upper area of the right variable display area 8Rr, which is the variable area of the right decorative pattern 8R. In this embodiment, the area in which the telop TP1 is displayed is arranged behind the left variable display area 8Lr, the middle variable display area 8Cr, and the right variable display area 8Rr. Therefore, the left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R are not obstructed by the area in which the telop TP1 is displayed. In other words, the visibility of the left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R is not hindered by the area in which the telop TP1 is displayed.

When the caption TP1 is displayed moving from the right side to the left side of the display screen 7a along the top side of the display screen 7a, it does not suddenly disappear along the way, nor does it break down into particles and gradually disappear. The caption TP1 is displayed moving at a constant speed, which is the caption TP1 speed.

When the decorative pattern stop position indefinite performance B is performed and the medium-sized decorative pattern variable performance (variable display) starts for the specified number of times (10th time) in the second sub-variable area CSZ, just before this variable performance (variable display) ends, as shown in FIG. 61 (D), a counter image CNT with the message "105 remaining" is displayed in the lower center of the display screen 7a. The counter image CNT is arranged in front of the background image for the counter image having a semi-transparent horizontally elongated rectangular shape, and the vertical distance dimension of this background image for the counter image having a semi-transparent horizontally elongated rectangular shape is about three times larger than the vertical distance dimension of the sub-variable area KSZ (or the reserved number display area HS), and the horizontal distance dimension of this background image for the counter image having a semi-transparent horizontally elongated rectangular shape is about six times larger than the horizontal distance dimension of the sub-variable area KSZ (or the reserved number display area HS).

Although this translucent horizontally elongated rectangular background image for the counter image overlaps with the middle variable display area 8Cr, which is the variable area of the middle decorative pattern 8C, the background image for the counter image is positioned so that the middle decorative pattern 8C is positioned behind the background image for the counter image and the counter image CNT positioned in front of the background image for the counter image is not obscured by the middle decorative pattern 8C, and even if other performance images appear, the other performance images are positioned behind the background image for the counter image and do not obscure the counter image CNT positioned in front of the background image for the counter image by the other performance images. In other words, the visibility of the counter image CNT positioned in front of the background image for the counter image is not hindered by the middle decorative pattern 8C or other performance images. In addition, because the background image for the counter image is semi-transparent, in the area of the background image for the counter image where the counter image CNT is not placed (i.e., the area of the background image for the counter image that does not correspond to the counter image CNT), the middle decorative pattern 8C and other presentation images (background images of the left decorative pattern 8L, middle decorative pattern 8C, and right decorative pattern 8R) can be seen through the semi-transparent background image for the counter image.

In addition, when a counter image CNT saying "105 remaining" is displayed in the center of the lower part of the display screen 7a, the left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R appear again and are displayed stopped (slightly delayed from the start of the display of the counter image CNT). At this time, the size of the left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R that reappears is different from the size before it disappeared, that is, the size of the left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R in the game mode shown in Figures 61 (A) and (B), the orientation of the left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R that reappears is different from the orientation of the left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R in the game mode shown in Figures 61 (A) and (B), and the positions at which the left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R that reappears are temporarily stopped and stopped are different from the positions at which the left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R are temporarily stopped and stopped in the game mode shown in Figures 61 (A) and (B).

Specifically, the size of the left decorative pattern 8L that is temporarily stopped and stopped in the decorative pattern stop position undefined performance B of Fig. 61 (D) is larger than the normal size of the left decorative pattern 8L that is temporarily stopped and stopped in the game mode of Fig. 61 (B). Also, the position where the left decorative pattern 8L is temporarily stopped and stopped in the game mode of Fig. 61 (B) is the center of the left variable display area 8Lr, which is the variable area of the left decorative pattern 8L, whereas the position where the left decorative pattern 8L is temporarily stopped and stopped in the decorative pattern stop position undefined performance B of Fig. 61 (D) is not the center of the left variable display area 8Lr, which is the variable area of the left decorative pattern 8L, but the upper right side of the left variable display area 8Lr, and a part of the upper side of the left decorative pattern 8L protrudes from the upper side of the left variable display area 8Lr, making it difficult to see. In addition, in the game mode of FIG. 61(B), the left decorative pattern 8L displayed as a temporary stop and a stopped state is not tilted (the vertical lines passing through the midpoints of the upper and lower sides of the left decorative pattern 8L are parallel to the vertical direction in which the reels rotate), whereas in the decorative pattern stop position indefinite performance B of FIG. 61(D), the tilt of the left decorative pattern 8L displayed as a temporary stop and a stopped state is such that the vertical lines passing through the midpoints of the upper and lower sides of the left decorative pattern 8L are slightly tilted counterclockwise with respect to the vertical direction in which the reels rotate, and the left decorative pattern 8L is slightly tilted to the left. At this time, when the medium-sized left decorative pattern is stopped and displayed as the number "1" in the second sub-variable area CSZ, the left decorative pattern 8L is stopped and displayed as the number "1".

The size of the right decorative pattern 8R that is temporarily stopped and stopped in the decorative pattern stop position undefined performance B of Fig. 61 (D) is slightly larger than the normal size of the right decorative pattern 8R that is temporarily stopped and stopped in the game mode of Fig. 61 (B), but is smaller than the size of the left decorative pattern 8L. Also, the position where the right decorative pattern 8R is temporarily stopped and stopped in the game mode of Fig. 61 (B) is the center of the right variable display area 8Rr, which is the variable area of the right decorative pattern 8R, whereas the position where the right decorative pattern 8R is temporarily stopped and stopped in the decorative pattern stop position undefined performance B of Fig. 61 (D) is not the center of the right variable display area 8Rr, which is the variable area of the right decorative pattern 8R, but the upper left side of the right variable display area 8Rr, and a part of the upper side of the right decorative pattern 8R protrudes from the upper side of the right variable display area 8Rr, making it difficult to see. Although the sub-variable area KSZ is provided above the right variable display area 8Rr, since the sub-variable area KSZ is located at the frontmost side, a part of the right decorative pattern 8R of the number "2" is covered by the sub-variable area KSZ. In addition, the right decorative pattern 8R that is temporarily stopped and stopped in the game mode of Fig. 61 (B) is not tilted (the vertical lines passing through the midpoints of the upper and lower sides of the right decorative pattern 8R are parallel to the vertical direction in which the reel rotates), whereas the right decorative pattern 8R that is temporarily stopped and stopped in the decorative pattern stop position indefinite performance B of Fig. 61 (D) is tilted slightly clockwise with respect to the vertical direction in which the reel rotates, so that the right decorative pattern 8R is slightly tilted to the right. At this time, when the medium-sized right decorative pattern is stopped and displayed as the number "2" in the second sub-variable area CSZ, the right decorative pattern 8R is stopped and displayed as the number "2".

The size of the middle decorative pattern 8C that is temporarily stopped and stopped in the decorative pattern stop position undefined performance B in Fig. 61 (D) is considerably larger than the normal size of the middle decorative pattern 8C that is temporarily stopped and stopped in the game mode in Fig. 61 (B), and is larger than the size of the left decorative pattern 8L. Also, while the position where the middle decorative pattern 8C is temporarily stopped and stopped in the game mode in Fig. 61 (B) is the center of the middle variable display area 8Cr, which is the variable area of the middle decorative pattern 8C, the position where the middle decorative pattern 8C is temporarily stopped and stopped in the decorative pattern stop position undefined performance B in Fig. 61 (D) is not the center of the middle variable display area 8Cr, which is the variable area of the middle decorative pattern 8C, but is below the middle variable display area 8Cr. In addition, in the game mode of FIG. 61(B), the right decorative pattern 8R displayed as a temporary stop and a stopped state is not tilted (the vertical lines passing through the midpoints of the upper and lower sides of the right decorative pattern 8R are parallel to the vertical direction in which the reel rotates), and in the decorative pattern stop position indefinite performance B of FIG. 61(D), the right decorative pattern 8R displayed as a temporary stop and a stopped state is in a state in which the vertical lines passing through the midpoints of the upper and lower sides of the right decorative pattern 8R are parallel to the vertical direction in which the reel rotates, and the middle decorative pattern 8C is not tilted. At this time, when the medium-sized middle decorative pattern is stopped and displayed as the number "3" in the second sub-variable area CSZ, the middle decorative pattern 8C is stopped and displayed as the number "3". Although the counter image CNT is provided below the middle variable display area 8Cr, since the counter image CNT is arranged on the front side, a part of the middle decorative pattern 8C of the number "3" is covered by the counter image CNT.

In this embodiment, a predetermined number of times (10th time) of medium-sized decorative patterns are used in the second sub-variable area CSZ to perform a variable performance (variable display), and just before this variable performance (variable display) ends, a counter image CNT reading "105 remaining" is displayed in the center of the bottom of the display screen 7a, and the left decorative pattern 8L, middle decorative pattern 8C, and right decorative pattern 8R appear again and are displayed stopped. However, once the decorative pattern stop position indefinite performance B begins and a predetermined time (for example, 10 seconds) has elapsed, the counter image CNT may be displayed, and further, just before the time arrives when the left decorative pattern 8L, middle decorative pattern 8C, and right decorative pattern 8R are displayed stopped, the left decorative pattern 8L, middle decorative pattern 8C, and right decorative pattern 8R may appear again. When the left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R appear again, the second sub-variable area CSZ disappears from the display screen 7a, and the middle decorative patterns also disappear from the display screen 7a.

When the predetermined number (10 times) of fluctuation performances (fluctuating display) ends, then the predetermined number (10 times) + 1 (i.e. 11th) of fluctuation performances (fluctuating display) begins, and the medium-sized left decorative pattern, the medium-sized middle decorative pattern, and the medium-sized right decorative pattern start to rotate as coins at the same timing, as shown in Figure 61 (E), the second sub-fluctuating area CSZ disappears from the display screen 7a, the medium-sized decorative pattern also disappears from the display screen 7a, and the left decorative pattern 8L, middle decorative pattern 8C, and right decorative pattern 8R each emit light, and a fluctuation performance (fluctuating display) is performed in which the reels rotate downward in the corresponding left variable display area 8Lr, middle variable display area 8Cr, and right variable display area 8Rr, and the counter image CNT is updated to "104 remaining" and displayed. In other words, the left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R start changing (changing display) at the same timing as the medium-sized left decorative pattern, the medium-sized middle decorative pattern, and the medium-sized right decorative pattern. The left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R are stopped and displayed at the same timing.

At this time, the changing presentation (changing display) of the left decorative pattern 8L, middle decorative pattern 8C, and right decorative pattern 8R in the decorative pattern stop position indefinite presentation B has a different display mode from the changing presentation (changing display) of the left decorative pattern 8L, middle decorative pattern 8C, and right decorative pattern 8R in the game mode shown in Figures 61 (A) and (B). In the variable presentation (variable display) of each decorative pattern in the game modes shown in Figures 61 (A) and (B), as described above, the variable presentation (variable display) is performed in a display mode in which the reels rotate in the order of number "1" → number "2" → number "3" → number "4" → number "5" → number "6" → number "7" → number "8" → number "9" → number "1" → number "2" → ..., whereas in decorative pattern stop position indefinite presentation B, when the variable presentation (variable display) of each decorative pattern that is stopped and displayed begins, each decorative pattern emits light and then is varied toward the bottom of the variable display area of each decorative pattern, or each decorative pattern emits light and is varied toward the bottom of the variable display area of each decorative pattern, and then the number following one of each decorative pattern that is stopped and displayed does not appear, and a random number appears and is stopped and displayed opaquely as the number following one of each decorative pattern. This occurs when the second sub-variable area CSZ disappears from the display screen 7a, and the medium-sized decorative patterns also disappear from the display screen 7a, which makes it possible to realize a display mode in which random numbers suddenly appear, remaining opaque, as the number following each decorative pattern and are displayed stationary.

Specifically, when the variable performance (variable display) of the left decorative pattern 8L of the number "1" displayed as stopped in Fig. 61(D) starts, the left decorative pattern 8L emits light, and the number "2" following the number "1" of the left decorative pattern 8L displayed as stopped in Fig. 61(D) appears opaque and is not displayed as a stopped left decorative pattern 8L in Fig. 61(E), and a random number "4" appears opaque and is displayed as stopped. Furthermore, the size of the left decorative pattern 8L displayed as a provisional stop and as a stopped number in Fig. 61(E) is larger than the size of the left decorative pattern 8L of the number "1" displayed as stopped in Fig. 61(D). Furthermore, the position of the left decorative pattern 8L of the number "1" displayed in FIG. 61(D) is the upper right side of the left variable display area 8Lr, whereas the position of the left decorative pattern 8L of the number "4" displayed in FIG. 61(E) after the variable performance (variable display) is started is the lower side of the left variable display area 8Lr, not the upper right side. Furthermore, the inclination of the left decorative pattern 8L displayed in the provisional stop display and the stopped display in FIG. 61(D) is such that the vertical lines passing through the midpoints of the upper and lower sides of the left decorative pattern 8L are slightly inclined counterclockwise with respect to the vertical direction in which the reel rotates, and the left decorative pattern 8L is slightly inclined to the left, whereas the inclination of the left decorative pattern 8L displayed in the provisional stop display and the stopped display in FIG. 61(E) is such that the vertical lines passing through the midpoints of the upper and lower sides of the left decorative pattern 8L are parallel to the vertical direction in which the reel rotates.

When the variable performance (variable display) of the right decorative pattern 8R of the number "2" displayed in Fig. 61(D) starts, the right decorative pattern 8R emits light, and the number "3" following the number "2" of the right decorative pattern 8R displayed in Fig. 61(D) becomes opaque and is not displayed as the right decorative pattern 8R in Fig. 61(E), and a random number "5" appears opaque and is displayed as a stopped display. Furthermore, the size of the right decorative pattern 8R displayed as a provisional stop and a stopped display in Fig. 61(E) is considerably larger than the size of the right decorative pattern 8R of the number "2" displayed in Fig. 61(D), and is larger than the size of the left decorative pattern 8L. Furthermore, the position of the right decorative pattern 8R of the number "2" displayed in a stopped state in Figure 61 (D) is on the upper left side of the right variable display area 8Rr, whereas after the variable performance (variable display) starts, the position of the right decorative pattern 8R of the number "5" displayed in a stopped state in Figure 61 (E) is closer to the upper center of the right variable display area 8Rr rather than the upper left side of the right variable display area 8Rr, and a portion of the upper side and a portion of the right side of the right variable display area 8Rr protrude from the upper edge and right edge, respectively, of the right variable display area 8Rr, making them difficult to see. Furthermore, in FIG. 61(D), the inclination of the right decorative pattern 8R that is temporarily stopped and stopped is such that the vertical lines passing through the midpoints of the upper and lower sides of the right decorative pattern 8R are tilted slightly clockwise with respect to the up-down direction in which the reel spins, so that the right decorative pattern 8R is tilted slightly to the right, whereas in FIG. 61(E), the inclination of the right decorative pattern 8R that is temporarily stopped and stopped is such that the vertical lines passing through the midpoints of the upper and lower sides of the right decorative pattern 8R are tilted significantly counterclockwise with respect to the up-down direction in which the reel spins, so that the right decorative pattern 8R is tilted significantly to the left.

When the moving effect (variable display) of the central decorative pattern 8C of the number "3" displayed in a stopped state in Fig. 61(D) starts, the central decorative pattern 8C emits light, and the number "4" following the number "3" of the central decorative pattern 8C displayed in a stopped state in Fig. 61(D) appears opaque and is not displayed as a stopped central decorative pattern 8C in Fig. 61(E), and a random number "1" appears opaque and is displayed as a stopped central decorative pattern. Furthermore, the size of the central decorative pattern 8C displayed in a provisional stop state and as a stopped state in Fig. 61(E) is significantly smaller than the size of the central decorative pattern 8C of the number "3" displayed in a provisional stop state and as a stopped state in Fig. 61(D), and is also significantly smaller than the normal size. Furthermore, the position of the central decorative pattern 8C of the number "3" displayed in FIG. 61(D) is the lower side of the central variable display area 8Cr, whereas the position of the central decorative pattern 8C of the number "1" displayed in FIG. 61(E) after the variable performance (variable display) is started is not the lower side of the central variable display area 8Cr but slightly to the left of the center of the central variable display area 8Cr. Furthermore, the inclination of the central decorative pattern 8C displayed in the temporary stop display and the stopped display in FIG. 61(D) is such that the vertical lines passing through the midpoints of the upper and lower sides of the central decorative pattern 8C are parallel to the vertical direction in which the reel rotates, whereas the inclination of the central decorative pattern 8C displayed in the temporary stop display and the stopped display in FIG. 61(E) is such that the vertical lines passing through the midpoints of the upper and lower sides of the central decorative pattern 8C are slightly inclined counterclockwise with respect to the vertical direction in which the reel rotates, and the central decorative pattern 8C is slightly inclined to the left.

When the predetermined number (10 times) + 1 (i.e. 11th) of medium-sized decorative pattern fluctuation effects (fluctuation display) starts in the second sub-fluctuation area CSZ, a message image "It's still going on..." (here, three telops TP2) is displayed in a telop display mode, moving from the right side to the left side of the display screen 7a so as to be parallel to the top side of the display screen 7a. The telop TP2 is white, and the expectation of a win is higher for other colors (e.g., blue, red, rainbow) than for white (e.g., the expectation of a win is lowest for white, followed by blue, red, and then rainbow). The vertical distance dimension of the telop TP2 is about twice as large as the vertical distance dimension of the sub-fluctuation area KSZ (or the reserved number display area HS). The area in which the telop TP2 is moved and displayed is between the bottom side of the area in which the telop TP1 is moved and the top side of the background image for the counter image, and it straddles the left variable display area 8Lr which is the variable area of the left decorative pattern 8L, the middle variable display area 8Cr which is the variable area of the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right variable display area 8Rr which is the variable area of the right decorative pattern 8R. By arranging the telop TP2 so that it is the foremost side, even if the telop TP2 straddles the right variable display area 8Rr, the middle variable display area 8Cr, and the left variable display area 8Lr, the telop TP2 is arranged in front of the right decorative pattern 8R, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the left decorative pattern 8L, and the telop TP2 is not blocked by the right decorative pattern 8R, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the left decorative pattern 8L. In this respect, it differs in that the above-mentioned caption TP1 is placed behind the sub-variable area KSZ and the reserved number display area HS, and the caption TP1 is obscured by the sub-variable area KSZ and the reserved number display area HS.

Note that the telop TP2 differs from the above-mentioned telop TP1 in that once it reaches the left side of the display screen 7a, it does not reappear from the right side of the display screen 7a, and is instead repeatedly moved and displayed. The multiple telops TP2 may be set to move at different speeds, or may be set to the same speed. The multiple telops TP2 appear from the right side of the display screen 7a at different times, so that in the relevant fluctuation, some will reach the left side of the display screen 7a and disappear, some will reach the left side of the display screen 7a over the next fluctuation and disappear, and some will reach the left side of the display screen 7a over the next fluctuation (multiple fluctuations) and disappear.

Furthermore, when the caption TP2 appears from the right side of the display screen 7a and moves toward the left side of the display screen 7a, it may suddenly disappear along the way, become particleized and gradually disappear, or may be displayed in a manner that causes image information to be missing (for example, an image is divided into small blocks and arranged irregularly rather than regularly, resulting in an unclear image) making it difficult to read. The caption TP2 differs from the caption TP1 described above in that when it appears from the right side of the display screen 7a and moves toward the left side of the display screen 7a along the top side of the display screen 7a, it does not suddenly disappear along the way, do not become particleized and gradually disappear, or do not appear in a manner that causes image information to be missing.

Furthermore, the telop TP2 may be displayed moving at the same constant speed as the telop TP1 (the speed for telop TP1), may be displayed moving at a constant speed faster than the constant speed of the telop TP1 (the speed for telop TP1), or may be displayed moving at a constant speed slower than the constant speed of the telop TP1 (the speed for telop TP1). The speed of the telop TP2 may be accelerated when it is displayed moving from the right side to the left side of the display screen 7a, may be decelerated when it is displayed moving from the right side to the left side of the display screen 7a, or may be accelerated or decelerated when it is displayed moving from the right side to the left side of the display screen 7a. In this respect as well, it differs from the telop TP1 described above.

Furthermore, when the caption TP2 appears from the right side of the display screen 7a and moves toward the left side of the display screen 7a, it may suddenly stop midway, or it may decelerate and stop. When the caption TP2 stops, it may explode and simply disappear from the display screen 7a, or the display screen 7a may go black (a completely dark screen), as described below, and then the lottery results may be displayed. In this respect as well, it differs from the caption TP1 described above.

In addition, when the telop TP2 appears from the right side of the display screen 7a and moves toward the left side of the display screen 7a, the typeface may change along the way (for example, the font of all or some of the characters in the telop TP2 may change, all or some of the characters in the telop TP2 may become bold, all or some of the characters in the telop TP2 may become thin, all or some of the characters in the telop TP2 may become italic, the size of all or some of the characters in the telop TP2 may change significantly, the size of all or some of the characters in the telop TP2 may change significantly, or all or some of the characters in the telop TP2 may be underlined) or the content may change to something else. In these respects as well, it differs from the telop TP1 described above.

When the telop TP2 appears from the right side of the display screen 7a, the vertical distance dimension of the telop TP2 is about twice as large as the vertical distance dimension of the sub-variable area KSZ (or the reserved number display area HS), but there are cases where the vertical distance dimension of the telop TP2 is more than twice as large as the vertical distance dimension of the sub-variable area KSZ (or the reserved number display area HS) and the vertical distance dimension of the telop TP2 is less than twice as large as the vertical distance dimension of the sub-variable area KSZ (or the reserved number display area HS). When the vertical distance dimension of the telop TP2 is more than twice as large as the vertical distance dimension of the sub-variable area KSZ (or the reserved number display area HS) and the vertical distance dimension of the telop TP2 is less than twice as large as the vertical distance dimension of the sub-variable area KSZ (or the reserved number display area HS), the telop TP2 may be red or rainbow colored. This point is also different from the telop TP1 described above.

There are multiple contents of the telop TP2, and the player can select and set it by operating the effect button 63. The contents of the telop TP2 can be, for example, a comment made by a character selected from among a number of characters that represent the worldview of the gaming machine, or a comment that includes part of the lyrics of the music played in the decorative pattern stop position undefined effect B, or a comment made by multiple people that expresses the worldview of the background image of the decorative pattern stop position undefined effect B. Of course, it is also possible to select and set whether to display the telop TP2 or not. Such selection and setting may be made by the player in a setting mode during play, or in a setting mode in the waiting state (waiting for players).

In the decorative pattern stop position indefinite performance B, the variable icon 9C and the reserved icon 9A disappear from the display screen 7a, so the display mode of the variable icon 9C cannot be changed to notify the expectation of a big win for the variable, and the display mode of the reserved icon 9A cannot be changed by the pre-reading performance to suggest the expectation of a win. Therefore, in the decorative pattern stop position indefinite performance B, the display mode of the telop TP2 can be changed in various ways to suggest the expectation of a win. The telop TP1 notifies the player that it is in "A mode" and does not convey other information to the player. For this reason, the telop TP2, which can suggest the expectation of a win to the player, is placed in front of the left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R, while the telop TP1, which does not convey other information to the player other than the information that it is in "A mode," is placed behind the left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R. In addition, an A-mode exclusive background image is displayed as the background image in the decorative pattern stop position indefinite performance B. Therefore, if multiple types of A-mode exclusive background images are prepared, an A-mode exclusive background image corresponding to the expected degree of winning may be displayed.

In this way, unlike caption TP1, caption TP2 has a wide variety of presentations, and can contribute to suppressing a decrease in the player's desire to play due to the decorative pattern changing presentation (changing display) of the decorative pattern, which is an indefinite decorative pattern stopping position presentation B.

When the predetermined number (10 times) + 1 (i.e. 11th) of variable effects (variable display) ends and the predetermined number (10 times) + 2 (i.e. 12th) of variable effects (variable display) starts, as shown in FIG. 61 (F), the left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R each emit light, and the corresponding left variable display area 8Lr, middle variable display area 8Cr, and right variable display area 8Rr are displayed with the reels spinning downward, and the counter image CNT is updated to "103 remaining" and displayed.

At this time, in the decorative pattern stop position indefinite performance B, the left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R are displayed as a changing performance (changing display) in which a random number appears opaquely as the number following each decorative pattern, as described above. When the changing performance (changing display) of the left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R starts at the same timing, they are displayed as stopped at the same timing.

Specifically, when the variable performance (variable display) of the left decorative pattern 8L of the number "4" displayed in a stopped state in Fig. 61(E) starts, the left decorative pattern 8L emits light, and the number "5" following the number "4" of the left decorative pattern 8L displayed in a stopped state in Fig. 61(E) appears opaque and is not displayed as a stopped left decorative pattern 8L in Fig. 61(F), and a random number "6" appears opaque and is displayed as a stopped left decorative pattern. Furthermore, the size of the left decorative pattern 8L displayed as a provisional stop and a stopped left decorative pattern in Fig. 61(F) is slightly smaller than the size of the left decorative pattern 8L of the number "4" displayed in a stopped state in Fig. 61(E), but is larger than the normal size. Furthermore, the position of the left decorative pattern 8L of the number "4" displayed in FIG. 61(E) is the lower side of the left variable display area 8Lr, whereas the position of the left decorative pattern 8L of the number "6" displayed in FIG. 61(F) after the variable performance (variable display) is started is the center of the left variable display area 8Lr, not the lower side. Furthermore, the inclination of the left decorative pattern 8L displayed in the temporary stop display and the stopped display in FIG. 61(E) is such that the vertical lines passing through the midpoints of the upper and lower sides of the left decorative pattern 8L are parallel to the vertical direction in which the reel rotates, whereas the inclination of the left decorative pattern 8L displayed in the temporary stop display and the stopped display in FIG. 61(F) is such that the vertical lines passing through the midpoints of the upper and lower sides of the left decorative pattern 8L are greatly tilted counterclockwise with respect to the vertical direction in which the reel rotates, and the left decorative pattern 8L is greatly tilted to the left.

When the variable performance (variable display) of the right decorative pattern 8R of the number "5" displayed in Fig. 61(E) starts, the right decorative pattern 8R emits light, and the number "6" following the number "5" of the right decorative pattern 8R displayed in Fig. 61(E) becomes opaque and is not displayed as the right decorative pattern 8R in Fig. 61(F), and a random number "8" appears and is displayed as opaque. Furthermore, the size of the right decorative pattern 8R displayed as a provisional stop and as a stop in Fig. 61(F) is significantly smaller than the size of the right decorative pattern 8R of the number "5" displayed in Fig. 61(E), and is smaller than the normal size. Furthermore, the position of the right decorative pattern 8R of the number "5" displayed in Fig. 61 (E) is near the upper center of the right variable display area 8Rr, whereas the position of the right decorative pattern 8R of the number "8" displayed in Fig. 61 (F) after the variable performance (variable display) is started is not near the upper center of the right variable display area 8Rr but slightly to the upper left of the center of the right variable display area 8Rr. Furthermore, the inclination of the right decorative pattern 8R displayed in the provisional stop display and the stopped display in Fig. 61 (E) is such that the vertical lines passing through the midpoints of the upper and lower sides of the right decorative pattern 8R are greatly inclined counterclockwise with respect to the vertical direction in which the reel rotates, and the right decorative pattern 8R is greatly inclined to the left, whereas the inclination of the right decorative pattern 8R displayed in the provisional stop display and the stopped display in Fig. 61 (F) is such that the vertical lines passing through the midpoints of the upper and lower sides of the right decorative pattern 8R are parallel to the vertical direction in which the reel rotates.

When the moving effect (variable display) of the central decorative pattern 8C of the number "1" displayed in a stopped state in Fig. 61(E) starts, the central decorative pattern 8C emits light, and the number "2" following the number "1" of the central decorative pattern 8C displayed in a stopped state in Fig. 61(E) appears opaque and is not displayed as a stopped state as the central decorative pattern 8C in Fig. 61(F), and a random number "8" appears opaque and is displayed as a stopped state. Furthermore, the size of the central decorative pattern 8C displayed in a provisionally stopped state and stopped state in Fig. 61(F) is considerably larger than the size of the central decorative pattern 8C of the number "1" displayed in a provisionally stopped state and stopped state in Fig. 61(E), and is larger than the size of the left decorative pattern 8L. Furthermore, the position of the central decorative pattern 8C of the number "1" displayed in the stopped state in Fig. 61 (E) is slightly to the left of the center of the central variable display area 8Cr, whereas the position of the central decorative pattern 8C of the number "8" displayed in the stopped state in Fig. 61 (F) after the variable performance (variable display) is started is not slightly to the left of the center of the central variable display area 8Cr but is on the upper right side of the central variable display area 8Cr, and a part of the upper side of the central decorative pattern 8C of the number "8" jumps out from the upper side of the central variable display area 8Cr and is difficult to see, and the right side of the central decorative pattern 8C of the number "8" jumps over the right side of the central variable display area 8Cr and straddles the right variable display area 8Rr. Therefore, a part of the central decorative pattern 8C of the number "8" and the right decorative pattern 8R of the number "8" overlap. In other words, the central decorative pattern 8C of the number "8" is displayed in the direction in which the right decorative pattern 8R of the number "8" is changed (changed display) (the direction in which the right decorative pattern 8R changes toward the bottom of the right change display area 8Rr (the direction of progress)) (the right decorative pattern 8R of the number "8" is displayed in the direction in which the central decorative pattern 8C of the number "8" is changed (the direction in which the central decorative pattern 8C changes toward the bottom of the central change display area 8Cr (the direction of progress))). Here, since the size of the central decorative pattern 8C is larger than the size of the right decorative pattern 8R, the central decorative pattern 8C of the number "8" which is larger in size is arranged in front of the right decorative pattern 8R of the number "8", and the central decorative pattern 8C of the number "8" covers a part of the right decorative pattern 8R of the number "8". Furthermore, in FIG. 61(E), the inclination of the central decorative pattern 8C displayed as a temporary stop and a stopped state is such that the vertical lines passing through the midpoints of the upper and lower sides of the central decorative pattern 8C are tilted slightly counterclockwise with respect to the up-down direction in which the reels spin, and the central decorative pattern 8R is tilted slightly to the left, whereas in FIG. 61(F), the inclination of the central decorative pattern 8C displayed as a temporary stop and a stopped state is such that the vertical lines passing through the midpoints of the upper and lower sides of the central decorative pattern 8C are tilted slightly clockwise with respect to the up-down direction in which the reels spin, and the central decorative pattern 8C is tilted slightly to the right.

When the predetermined number (10 times) + 2 times (i.e. 12 times) of variable performance (variable display) ends and then the predetermined number (10 times) + 3 times (i.e. 13 times) of variable performance (variable display) starts, as shown in Figure 61 (G), the left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R each emit light, and the variable performance (variable display) is performed so that the reels rotate downward in the corresponding left variable display area 8Lr, middle variable display area 8Cr, and right variable display area 8Rr, and the counter image CNT is updated to "102 remaining" and displayed.

At this time, in the decorative pattern stop position indefinite performance B, the left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R are displayed as a changing performance (changing display) in which a random number appears opaquely as the number following each decorative pattern, as described above. When the changing performance (changing display) of the left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R starts at the same timing, they are displayed as stopped at the same timing.

Specifically, when the variable performance (variable display) of the left decorative pattern 8L of the number "6" displayed in a stopped state in Fig. 61(F) starts, the left decorative pattern 8L emits light, and the number "7" following the number "6" of the left decorative pattern 8L displayed in a stopped state in Fig. 61(F) appears opaque and is not displayed as a stopped left decorative pattern 8L in Fig. 61(G), and a random number "1" appears opaque and is displayed as a stopped left decorative pattern. Furthermore, the size of the left decorative pattern 8L displayed as a provisional stop and a stopped left decorative pattern in Fig. 61(G) is slightly smaller than the size of the left decorative pattern 8L of the number "6" displayed in a stopped state in Fig. 61(F), but is larger than the normal size. Furthermore, the position of the left decorative pattern 8L of the number "6" displayed in a stopped state in Fig. 61(F) is the center of the left variable display area 8Lr, whereas the variable performance (variable display) is started and the position of the left decorative pattern 8L of the number "1" displayed in a stopped state in Fig. 61(G) is not the center of the left variable display area 8Lr but the upper left side of the left variable display area 8Lr, and a part of the upper side of the left decorative pattern 8L protrudes from the upper edge of the left variable display area 8Lr and is difficult to see. Although the reserved number display area HS is provided on the upper left side of the left variable display area 8Lr, since the left variable display area 8Lr is positioned on the front side, a part of the left decorative pattern 8L of the number "1" is covered by the reserved number display area HS. Furthermore, in FIG. 61(F), the inclination of the left decorative pattern 8L displayed as a temporary stop and a stopped state is such that the vertical lines passing through the midpoints of the upper and lower sides of the left decorative pattern 8L are tilted significantly counterclockwise with respect to the up-down direction in which the reel spins, and the left decorative pattern 8L is tilted significantly to the left, whereas in FIG. 61(G), the inclination of the left decorative pattern 8L displayed as a temporary stop and a stopped state is such that the vertical lines passing through the midpoints of the upper and lower sides of the left decorative pattern 8L are tilted significantly clockwise with respect to the up-down direction in which the reel spins, and the left decorative pattern 8L is tilted significantly to the right.

When the variable performance (variable display) of the right decorative pattern 8R of the number "8" displayed in FIG. 61(F) starts, the right decorative pattern 8R emits light, and the number "9" following the number "8" of the right decorative pattern 8R displayed in FIG. 61(F) becomes opaque and is not displayed as the right decorative pattern 8R in FIG. 61(G), and a random number "2" appears and is displayed as opaque. Furthermore, the size of the right decorative pattern 8R displayed in FIG. 61(G) as a provisional stop and as a stop is larger than the size of the right decorative pattern 8R of the number "8" displayed in FIG. 61(F), and is slightly larger than the normal size. Furthermore, the position of the right decorative pattern 8R of the number "8" displayed in a stopped state in Figure 61 (F) is slightly to the upper left of the center of the right variable display area 8Rr, whereas after the variable performance (variable display) starts, the position of the right decorative pattern 8R of the number "2" displayed in a stopped state in Figure 61 (G) is not slightly to the upper left of the center of the right variable display area 8Rr but to the lower right of the right variable display area 8Rr, and part of the lower side of the right decorative pattern 8R protrudes from the bottom edge of the right variable display area 8Rr, making it difficult to see. Furthermore, in FIG. 61(F), the inclination of the right decorative pattern 8R that is temporarily stopped and stopped is such that the vertical lines passing through the midpoints of the top and bottom edges of the right decorative pattern 8R are parallel to the up-down direction in which the reel spins, whereas in FIG. 61(G), the inclination of the right decorative pattern 8R that is temporarily stopped and stopped is such that the vertical lines passing through the midpoints of the top and bottom edges of the right decorative pattern 8R are slightly tilted counterclockwise with respect to the up-down direction in which the reel spins, causing the right decorative pattern 8R to be tilted slightly to the left.

When the moving effect (variable display) of the central decorative pattern 8C of the number "8" displayed in FIG. 61(F) starts, the central decorative pattern 8C emits light, and the number "9" following the number "8" of the central decorative pattern 8C displayed in FIG. 61(F) becomes opaque and is not displayed as a central decorative pattern 8C in FIG. 61(G), and a random number "7" appears opaque and is displayed as a static display. Furthermore, the size of the central decorative pattern 8C displayed in FIG. 61(G) as a temporary stop and as a static display is slightly larger than the size of the central decorative pattern 8C of the number "8" displayed in FIG. 61(F) as a temporary stop and as a static display, and is larger than the size of the left decorative pattern 8L. Furthermore, the position of the central decorative pattern 8C of the number "8" displayed in a stopped state in Figure 61 (F) is on the upper right side of the central variable display area 8Cr, whereas after the variable performance (variable display) is started, the position of the central decorative pattern 8C of the number "7" displayed in a stopped state in Figure 61 (G) is not on the upper right side of the central variable display area 8Cr but on the right center side of the central variable display area 8Cr, and the central decorative pattern 8C of the number "7" jumps over the central variable display area 8Cr and straddles the right variable display area 8Rr. Furthermore, in FIG. 61(F), the inclination of the central decorative pattern 8C displayed as a temporary stop and a stopped state is such that the vertical lines passing through the midpoints of the upper and lower sides of the central decorative pattern 8C are tilted slightly clockwise with respect to the up-down direction in which the reels spin, and the right decorative pattern 8R is tilted slightly to the right, whereas in FIG. 61(G), the inclination of the central decorative pattern 8C displayed as a temporary stop and a stopped state is such that the vertical lines passing through the midpoints of the upper and lower sides of the central decorative pattern 8C are tilted significantly clockwise with respect to the up-down direction in which the reels spin, and the right decorative pattern 8R is tilted significantly to the right.

When the specified number (10 times) + 3 times (i.e. the 13th time) of changing effects (changing display) starts, the message image "Now, now..." (telop TP2) is displayed in a telop display mode, moving from the right side to the left side of the display screen 7a so that it is parallel to the top side of the display screen 7a. The telop TP2 is white.

When the predetermined number (10 times) + 3 times (i.e. 13 times) of variable performance (variable display) ends and then the predetermined number (10 times) + 4 times (i.e. 14 times) of variable performance (variable display) starts, as shown in Figure 61 (H), the left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R each emit light, and the variable performance (variable display) is performed so that the reels rotate downward in the corresponding left variable display area 8Lr, middle variable display area 8Cr, and right variable display area 8Rr, and the counter image CNT is updated to "101 remaining" and displayed.

At this time, in the decorative pattern stop position indefinite performance B, the left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R are displayed as a changing performance (changing display) in which a random number appears opaquely as the number following each decorative pattern, as described above. When the changing performance (changing display) of the left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R starts at the same timing, they are displayed as stopped at the same timing.

Specifically, when the variable performance (variable display) of the left decorative pattern 8L of the number "1" displayed in a stopped state in Fig. 61(G) starts, the left decorative pattern 8L emits light, and the number "2" following the number "1" of the left decorative pattern 8L displayed in a stopped state in Fig. 61(G) appears opaque and is not displayed as a stopped left decorative pattern 8L in Fig. 61(H), and a random number "9" appears opaque and is displayed as a stopped left decorative pattern. Furthermore, the size of the left decorative pattern 8L displayed as a provisional stop and a stopped left decorative pattern in Fig. 61(H) is significantly smaller than the size of the left decorative pattern 8L of the number "1" displayed in a stopped state in Fig. 61(G), and is smaller than the normal size. Furthermore, the position of the left decorative pattern 8L of the number "1" displayed in a stopped state in Figure 61 (G) is on the upper left side of the left variable display area 8Lr, whereas after the variable performance (variable display) is started, the position of the left decorative pattern 8L of the number "9" displayed in a stopped state in Figure 61 (H) is on the lower right side of the left variable display area 8Lr rather than the upper left side of the left variable display area 8Lr. Furthermore, in FIG. 61(G), the inclination of the left decorative pattern 8L displayed as a temporary stop and a stopped stop is such that the vertical lines passing through the midpoints of the upper and lower sides of the left decorative pattern 8L are tilted at a large angle clockwise with respect to the up-down direction in which the reel spins, with the left decorative pattern 8L tilted significantly to the right, whereas in FIG. 61(H), the inclination of the left decorative pattern 8L displayed as a temporary stop and a stopped stop is such that the vertical lines passing through the midpoints of the upper and lower sides of the left decorative pattern 8L are tilted even more clockwise with respect to the up-down direction in which the reel spins, with the left decorative pattern 8L tilted significantly to the right from the tilted state in FIG. 61(G).

When the variable performance (variable display) of the right decorative pattern 8R of the number "2" displayed in a stopped state in Fig. 61(G) starts, the right decorative pattern 8R emits light, and the number "3" following the number "2" of the right decorative pattern 8R displayed in a stopped state in Fig. 61(G) appears opaque and is not displayed as the right decorative pattern 8R in a stopped state in Fig. 61(H), and a random number "4" appears opaque and is displayed as a stopped state. Furthermore, the size of the right decorative pattern 8R displayed as a provisional stop and a stopped state in Fig. 61(H) is significantly larger than the size of the right decorative pattern 8R of the number "2" displayed in a stopped state in Fig. 61(G), and is also significantly larger than the normal size. Furthermore, the position of the right decorative pattern 8R of the number "2" displayed in a stopped state in Figure 61 (G) is on the lower right side of the right variable display area 8Rr, whereas after the variable performance (variable display) is started, the position of the right decorative pattern 8R of the number "4" displayed in a stopped state in Figure 61 (H) is closer to the upper left side of the right variable display area 8Rr rather than the lower right side of the right variable display area 8Rr, and the right decorative pattern 8R of the number "4" jumps over the right variable display area 8Rr and straddles the middle variable display area 8Cr. Furthermore, in FIG. 61(G), the inclination of the right decorative pattern 8R that is temporarily stopped and stopped is such that the vertical lines passing through the midpoints of the upper and lower sides of the right decorative pattern 8R are tilted slightly counterclockwise with respect to the up-down direction in which the reel spins, and the right decorative pattern 8R is tilted slightly to the left, whereas in FIG. 61(H), the inclination of the right decorative pattern 8R that is temporarily stopped and stopped is such that the vertical lines passing through the midpoints of the upper and lower sides of the right decorative pattern 8R are tilted significantly counterclockwise with respect to the up-down direction in which the reel spins, and the right decorative pattern 8R is tilted significantly to the left.

When the moving effect (variable display) of the central decorative pattern 8C of the number "7" displayed in a stopped state in Fig. 61(G) starts, the central decorative pattern 8C emits light, and the number "8" following the number "7" of the central decorative pattern 8C displayed in a stopped state in Fig. 61(G) appears opaque and is not displayed as a stopped central decorative pattern 8C in Fig. 61(H), and a random number "3" appears opaque and is displayed as a stopped central decorative pattern. Furthermore, the size of the central decorative pattern 8C displayed in a provisional stop state and as a stopped state in Fig. 61(H) is smaller than the size of the central decorative pattern 8C of the number "7" displayed in a provisional stop state and as a stopped state in Fig. 61(G), but is larger than the normal size and is larger than the size of the left decorative pattern 8L. Furthermore, the position of the center decorative pattern 8C of the number "7" displayed in the stopped state in Fig. 61(G) is the center right side of the center variable display area 8Cr, whereas the position of the center decorative pattern 8C of the number "3" displayed in the stopped state in Fig. 61(H) after the variable performance (variable display) is started is not the center right side of the center variable display area 8Cr but the upper right side of the center variable display area 8Cr. Therefore, the center decorative pattern 8C of the number "3" and the right decorative pattern 8R of the number "4" partially overlap each other. In other words, the central decorative pattern 8C of the number "3" is displayed in the direction in which the right decorative pattern 8R of the number "4" is changed (changed display) (the direction in which the right decorative pattern 8R changes toward the bottom of the right variable display area 8Rr (the direction of progress)) (the right decorative pattern 8R of the number "4" is displayed in the direction in which the central decorative pattern 8C of the number "3" is changed (the direction in which the central decorative pattern 8C changes toward the bottom of the central variable display area 8Cr (the direction of progress))). Here, since the size of the right decorative pattern 8R is larger than the size of the central decorative pattern 8C, the right decorative pattern 8R of the number "4" which is larger in size is arranged in front of the central decorative pattern 8C of the number "3" in the front-back relationship between the central decorative pattern 8C of the number "3" and the right decorative pattern 8R of the number "4", and the right decorative pattern 8R of the number "4" is displayed in a manner in which it covers a part of the central decorative pattern 8C of the number "3". Furthermore, in FIG. 61(G), the inclination of the central decorative pattern 8C that is temporarily stopped and stopped is such that the vertical lines passing through the midpoints of the upper and lower sides of the central decorative pattern 8C are tilted significantly clockwise with respect to the up-down direction in which the reels spin, and the right decorative pattern 8R is tilted significantly to the right, whereas in FIG. 61(H), the inclination of the central decorative pattern 8C that is temporarily stopped and stopped is such that the vertical lines passing through the midpoints of the upper and lower sides of the central decorative pattern 8C are parallel to the up-down direction in which the reels spin.

As the change performance (change display) progresses and the predetermined number (10 times) + 54th (i.e. 64th) change performance (change display) ends, and then the predetermined number (10 times) + 55th (i.e. 65th) change performance (change display) begins, as shown in FIG. 61 (I), the left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R each emit light, and the change performance (change display) is performed so that the reels rotate downward in the corresponding left variable display area 8Lr, middle variable display area 8Cr, and right variable display area 8Rr, and the counter image CNT is updated to "50 remaining" and displayed.

At this time, in the decorative pattern stop position indefinite performance B, the left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R are displayed as a changing performance (changing display) in which a random number appears opaquely as the number following each decorative pattern, as described above. When the changing performance (changing display) of the left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R starts at the same timing, they are displayed as stopped at the same timing.

Specifically, when the variable performance (variable display) of the left decorative pattern 8L of the number "2" displayed in the 64th time (not shown) starts, the left decorative pattern 8L emits light, and the number "3" following the number "2" of the left decorative pattern 8L displayed in the 64th time (not shown) becomes opaque and is not displayed as a left decorative pattern 8L in Fig. 61 (I), and a random number "4" appears opaque and is displayed as a stopped pattern. Furthermore, the size of the left decorative pattern 8L displayed as a provisional stop display and a stopped pattern in Fig. 61 (I) is considerably smaller than the size of the left decorative pattern 8L of the number "2" displayed in the 64th time (not shown), but is larger than the normal size. Furthermore, the position of the left decorative pattern 8L of the number "2" displayed in the 64th time (not shown) is the center of the left variable display area 8Lr, whereas the position of the left decorative pattern 8L of the number "4" displayed in FIG. 61 (I) after the variable performance (variable display) is started is not the center of the left variable display area 8Lr but is slightly lower right of the center of the left variable display area 8Lr. Furthermore, the inclination of the left decorative pattern 8L displayed in the provisional stop display and the stopped display in the 64th time (not shown) is such that the vertical lines passing through the midpoints of the upper and lower sides of the left decorative pattern 8L are parallel to the vertical direction in which the reel rotates, whereas the inclination of the left decorative pattern 8L displayed in the provisional stop display and the stopped display in FIG. 61 (I) is such that the vertical lines passing through the midpoints of the upper and lower sides of the left decorative pattern 8L are slightly tilted counterclockwise with respect to the vertical direction in which the reel rotates, and the left decorative pattern 8L is slightly tilted to the left.

When the variable performance (variable display) of the right decorative pattern 8R of the number "3" displayed in the 64th time (not shown) starts, the right decorative pattern 8R emits light, and the number "4" following the number "3" of the right decorative pattern 8R displayed in the 64th time (not shown) becomes opaque and is not displayed as the right decorative pattern 8R in FIG. 61 (I), and a random number "1" appears and is displayed as an opaque one. Furthermore, the size of the right decorative pattern 8R displayed as a provisional stop and as a stop in FIG. 61 (I) is significantly smaller than the size of the right decorative pattern 8R of the number "3" displayed in the 64th time (not shown), and is also significantly smaller than the normal size. Furthermore, the position of the right decorative pattern 8R of the number "3" displayed in the stopped state at the 64th time (not shown) is the left center of the right variable display area 8Rr, whereas the variable performance (variable display) is started and the position of the right decorative pattern 8R of the number "1" displayed in the stopped state in Fig. 61 (I) is not the left center of the right variable display area 8Rr but the right decorative pattern 8R is on the upper right side of the right variable display area 8Rr. Although the sub-variable area KSZ is provided on the upper side of the right variable display area 8Rr, the sub-variable area KSZ is located on the front side, so that a part of the right decorative pattern 8R of the number "1" is covered by the sub-variable area KSZ. Furthermore, in the 64th time (not shown), the inclination of the right decorative pattern 8R that is temporarily stopped and stopped is such that the vertical lines passing through the midpoints of the upper and lower sides of the right decorative pattern 8R are slightly tilted clockwise with respect to the up-down direction in which the reel spins, so that the right decorative pattern 8R is slightly tilted to the right, whereas in FIG. 61(I), the inclination of the right decorative pattern 8R that is temporarily stopped and stopped is such that the vertical lines passing through the midpoints of the upper and lower sides of the right decorative pattern 8R are significantly tilted counterclockwise with respect to the up-down direction in which the reel spins, so that the right decorative pattern 8R is significantly tilted to the left.

When the moving effect (variable display) of the central decorative pattern 8C of the number "6" displayed in the 64th time (not shown) starts, the central decorative pattern 8C emits light, and the number "7" following the number "6" of the central decorative pattern 8C displayed in the 64th time (not shown) becomes opaque and is not displayed as the central decorative pattern 8C in Fig. 61 (I), and a random number "5" appears opaque and is displayed as a stopped pattern. Furthermore, the size of the central decorative pattern 8C displayed as a temporary stop and stopped in Fig. 61 (I) is significantly larger than the size of the central decorative pattern 8C of the number "6" displayed as a temporary stop and stopped in the 64th time (not shown), and is also significantly larger than the left decorative pattern 8L. Furthermore, the position of the central decorative pattern 8C of the number "6" displayed at the 64th time (not shown) is the upper left side of the central variable display area 8Cr, whereas the position of the central decorative pattern 8C of the number "5" displayed at the 64th time (not shown) is the upper left side of the central variable display area 8Cr after the variable performance (variable display) is started, and the central decorative pattern 8C of the number "5" displayed at the 64th time (not shown) is not the upper left side of the central variable display area 8Cr but is closer to the left center of the central variable display area 8Cr, so that the central decorative pattern 8C of the number "5" jumps over the central variable display area 8Cr and straddles the left variable display area 8Lr. Therefore, the central decorative pattern 8C of the number "5" and the left decorative pattern 8L of the number "4" partially overlap each other. In other words, the central decorative pattern 8C of the number "5" is displayed in the direction in which the left decorative pattern 8L of the number "4" is changed (changed display) (the direction in which the left decorative pattern 8L changes toward the bottom of the left change display area 8Lr (the direction in which the left decorative pattern 8L changes (the direction of progress))). Here, since the size of the central decorative pattern 8C is larger than the size of the right decorative pattern 8R, the central decorative pattern 8C of the number "5" which is larger in size is arranged in front of the right decorative pattern 8R of the number "4" as the front-back relationship between the central decorative pattern 8C of the number "5" and the left decorative pattern 8L of the number "4", and the central decorative pattern 8C of the number "5" is displayed in a manner that covers a part of the right decorative pattern 8R of the number "4". Furthermore, in the 64th time (not shown), the inclination of the central decorative pattern 8C that is temporarily stopped and stopped is such that the vertical lines passing through the midpoints of the upper and lower sides of the central decorative pattern 8C are tilted significantly clockwise with respect to the vertical direction in which the reels rotate, and the right decorative pattern 8R is tilted significantly to the right, whereas in FIG. 61(I), the inclination of the central decorative pattern 8C that is temporarily stopped and stopped is such that the vertical lines passing through the midpoints of the upper and lower sides of the central decorative pattern 8C are tilted significantly clockwise with respect to the vertical direction in which the reels rotate, and the right decorative pattern 8R is tilted significantly to the right.

When the predetermined number (10 times) + 55th (i.e. 65th) of variable effects (variable display) ends and then the predetermined number (10 times) + 56th (i.e. 66th) of variable effects (variable display) begins, as shown in Figure 61 (J), the left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R each emit light, and the corresponding left variable display area 8Lr, middle variable display area 8Cr, and right variable display area 8Rr are displayed with the reels spinning downward, and the counter image CNT is updated to "49 remaining" and displayed.

At this time, in the decorative pattern stop position indefinite performance B, the left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R are displayed as a changing performance (changing display) in which a random number appears opaquely as the number following each decorative pattern, as described above. When the changing performance (changing display) of the left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R starts at the same timing, they are displayed as stopped at the same timing.

Specifically, when the variable performance (variable display) of the left decorative pattern 8L of the number "4" displayed in a stopped state in Fig. 61(I) starts, the left decorative pattern 8L emits light, and the number "5" following the number "4" of the left decorative pattern 8L displayed in a stopped state in Fig. 61(I) appears opaque and is not displayed as a stopped left decorative pattern 8L in Fig. 61(J), and a random number "2" appears opaque and is displayed as a stopped left decorative pattern. Furthermore, the size of the left decorative pattern 8L displayed as a provisional stop and as a stopped left decorative pattern 8L in Fig. 61(J) is significantly larger than the size of the left decorative pattern 8L of the number "4" displayed in a stopped state in Fig. 61(J). Furthermore, the position of the left decorative pattern 8L of the number "4" displayed in a stopped state in Figure 61 (I) is slightly to the lower right of the center of the left variable display area 8Lr, whereas after the variable performance (variable display) starts, the position of the left decorative pattern 8L of the number "2" displayed in a stopped state in Figure 61 (J) is not slightly to the lower right of the center of the left variable display area 8Lr but toward the upper right of the left variable display area 8Lr, and the left decorative pattern 8L of the number "2" jumps over the left variable display area 8Lr and straddles the middle variable display area 8Cr. Furthermore, in FIG. 61(I), the inclination of the left decorative pattern 8L displayed as a temporary stop and a stopped stop is such that the vertical lines passing through the midpoints of the upper and lower sides of the left decorative pattern 8L are tilted slightly counterclockwise with respect to the up-down direction in which the reel spins, and the left decorative pattern 8L is tilted slightly to the left, whereas in FIG. 61(J), the inclination of the left decorative pattern 8L displayed as a temporary stop and a stopped stop is such that the vertical lines passing through the midpoints of the upper and lower sides of the left decorative pattern 8L are tilted very slightly counterclockwise with respect to the up-down direction in which the reel spins, and the left decorative pattern 8L is tilted very slightly to the left.

When the variable performance (variable display) of the right decorative pattern 8R of the number "1" displayed in Fig. 61(I) starts, the right decorative pattern 8R emits light, and the number "2" following the number "1" of the right decorative pattern 8R displayed in Fig. 61(I) becomes opaque and is not displayed as the right decorative pattern 8R in Fig. 61(J), and a random number "7" appears opaque and is displayed as a stopped display. Furthermore, the size of the right decorative pattern 8R displayed as a provisional stop display and a stopped display in Fig. 61(J) is considerably larger than the size of the right decorative pattern 8R of the number "1" displayed in Fig. 61(I), but is smaller than the left decorative pattern 8L. Furthermore, the position of the right decorative pattern 8R of the number "1" displayed in a stopped state in Figure 61 (I) is on the upper right side of the right variable display area 8Rr, whereas after the variable performance (variable display) starts, the position of the right decorative pattern 8R of the number "7" displayed in a stopped state in Figure 61 (J) is not on the upper right side of the right variable display area 8Rr but on the lower center of the right variable display area 8Rr. Furthermore, in FIG. 61(I), the inclination of the right decorative pattern 8R that is temporarily stopped and stopped is such that the vertical lines passing through the midpoints of the upper and lower sides of the right decorative pattern 8R are tilted significantly counterclockwise with respect to the vertical direction in which the reel rotates, and the right decorative pattern 8R is tilted significantly to the left, whereas in FIG. 61(J), the inclination of the right decorative pattern 8R that is temporarily stopped and stopped is such that the vertical lines passing through the midpoints of the upper and lower sides of the right decorative pattern 8R are tilted slightly counterclockwise with respect to the vertical direction in which the reel rotates, and the right decorative pattern 8R is tilted slightly to the left, and compared to the right decorative pattern 8R in FIG. 61(I), the vertical lines passing through the midpoints of the upper and lower sides of the right decorative pattern 8R are more parallel to the vertical direction in which the reel rotates.

When the moving presentation (variable display) of the central decorative pattern 8C of the number "5" displayed in a stopped state in Fig. 61(I) starts, the central decorative pattern 8C emits light, and the number "6" following the number "5" of the central decorative pattern 8C displayed in a stopped state in Fig. 61(I) appears opaque and is not displayed as a stopped central decorative pattern 8C in Fig. 61(J), and a random number "8" appears opaque and is displayed as a stopped central decorative pattern. Furthermore, the size of the central decorative pattern 8C displayed in a provisionally stopped state and as a stopped central decorative pattern in Fig. 61(J) is significantly smaller than the size of the central decorative pattern 8C of the number "5" displayed in a provisionally stopped state and as a stopped central decorative pattern in Fig. 61(I), and is smaller than the normal size. Furthermore, the position of the central decorative pattern 8C of the number "5" displayed in the stopped state in Fig. 61 (I) is toward the left center of the central variable display area 8Cr, whereas the position of the central decorative pattern 8C of the number "8" displayed in the stopped state in Fig. 61 (J) after the variable performance (variable display) is started is not toward the left center of the central variable display area 8Cr but toward the upper left side of the central variable display area 8Cr. Therefore, the central decorative pattern 8C of the number "8" and the left decorative pattern 8L of the number "2" partially overlap each other. In other words, the central decorative pattern 8C of the number "8" is displayed in the direction in which the left decorative pattern 8L of the number "2" is changed (changed display) (the direction in which the left decorative pattern 8L changes toward the bottom of the left change display area 8Lr (the direction in which the left decorative pattern 8L changes toward the bottom of the left change display area 8Cr) (the left decorative pattern 8L of the number "2" is displayed in the direction in which the central decorative pattern 8C of the number "8" is changed (the direction in which the central decorative pattern 8C changes toward the bottom of the central change display area 8Cr)). Here, since the size of the left decorative pattern 8L is larger than the size of the central decorative pattern 8C, the left decorative pattern 8L of the number "2" which is larger in size is arranged in front of the central decorative pattern 8C of the number "8", and the left decorative pattern 8L of the number "2" is displayed in a manner in which it covers a part of the central decorative pattern 8C of the number "8". Furthermore, in FIG. 61(I), the inclination of the central decorative pattern 8C that is temporarily stopped and stopped is such that the vertical lines passing through the midpoints of the upper and lower sides of the central decorative pattern 8C are tilted significantly clockwise with respect to the up-down direction in which the reels spin, and the right decorative pattern 8R is tilted significantly to the right, whereas in FIG. 61(J), the inclination of the central decorative pattern 8C that is temporarily stopped and stopped is such that the vertical lines passing through the midpoints of the upper and lower sides of the central decorative pattern 8C are parallel to the up-down direction in which the reels spin.

When the predetermined number (10 times) + 56th (i.e. 66th) of changing effects (changing displays) starts, this time the message image "Will it happen soon?", the message image "Oh, it's endless...", and the message image telop TP2 "Oh, I wonder if it's happening yet" are displayed moving in a telop display mode from the right side to the left side of the display screen 7a so as to be parallel to the top side of the display screen 7a. The message image "Will it happen soon?" is blue, and the message image "Oh, it's endless..." and the message image "Oh, I wonder if it's happening yet" are white.

After that, the variable performance (variable display) progresses, and when the specified number (10 times) + 105th (i.e. 115th) variable performance (variable display) is completed, A mode ends, and the decorative pattern stop position indefinite performance B also ends, and the game returns to the normal game mode, and the variable performance (variable display) is performed with the left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R, as shown in Figures 61 (A) and (B).

In the decorative pattern stop position indefinite performance B, the performance in the case of "no reach miss" is shown from Figure 61 (C) to Figure 61 (J), but in the case of "reach miss", the left decorative pattern 8L and the right decorative pattern 8R are not temporarily stopped side by side on the same horizontal line, the display screen 7a goes black (becomes a completely black screen), and white shining light converges toward the center of the display screen 7a and then disappears, like the power to the cathode ray tube of an analog television is turned off. At this time, the contents of the reserved number display area HS and the sub-variable area KSZ are maintained in the displayed state. In other words, in the sub-variable area KSZ, the variable performance (variable display) of the small left decorative pattern, small middle decorative pattern, and small right decorative pattern continues. This state is maintained until the time arrives to notify the result of the lottery (miss). Then, when the time to announce the winning or losing result (losing) comes, as shown in Figures 61(C) to 61(J), the left decorative pattern 8L, the center decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R change appearance (changing display) as described above, with random numbers appearing opaquely as the number following each decorative pattern, and stopping and displaying at the same timing.

On the other hand, in the case of a win, as in the case of a miss, the display screen 7a first goes black (becomes a completely black screen), and then the white light beams converge toward the center of the display screen 7a and eventually disappear, as if the power to the cathode ray tube of an analog television had been turned off. At this time, the contents of the reserved number display area HS and the sub-variable area KSZ remain displayed. In other words, in the sub-variable area KSZ, the variable performance (variable display) of the small left decorative pattern, small middle decorative pattern, and small right decorative pattern continues. After that, the left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R appear as, for example, the number "7" in the center of the corresponding left variable display area 8Lr, middle variable display area 8Cr, and right variable display area 8Rr, respectively, and are temporarily stopped in line on the same horizontal line and then stopped, and the winning result is displayed as a confirmed win, and then the winning game begins. When a win is announced as the result of the draw, the left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R are displayed as stopped (confirmed display), and at the same time, in the sub-variable area KSZ, the small left decorative pattern, the small middle decorative pattern, and the small right decorative pattern are also displayed as stopped (confirmed display) with the same number (numerical pattern, in this case the number "7") as the left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R.

In decorative pattern stop position indefinite performance B, the longer the period during which the display screen 7a is blacked out (the period during which the screen is completely black), the higher the expectation of a win becomes. Therefore, even though the display screen 7a is a monotonous blacked-out screen (a completely black screen), it is possible to heighten and excite the player's sense of expectation.

In this way, in the decorative pattern stop position indefinite performance B, the stop positions of the left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R can change randomly (irregularly) each time the left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R stop in a fixed manner. At this time, when one decorative pattern and another decorative pattern are displayed overlapping among the left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R, for example, in the positional relationship between the middle decorative pattern 8C and the right decorative pattern 8R among the left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R, when the middle decorative pattern 8C and the right decorative pattern 8R in FIG. 61(F) are displayed overlapping, the middle decorative pattern 8C, which is larger, is positioned in front of the right decorative pattern 8R, resulting in a display mode in which the middle decorative pattern 8C, which is larger, covers a part of the right decorative pattern 8R, whereas when the middle decorative pattern 8C and the right decorative pattern 8R in FIG. 61(H) are displayed overlapping, the right decorative pattern 8R, which is larger, is positioned in front of the middle decorative pattern 8C, resulting in a display mode in which the right decorative pattern 8R, which is larger, covers a part of the middle decorative pattern 8C. Furthermore, for example, in the positional relationship between the left decorative pattern 8L and the middle decorative pattern 8C among the left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R, when the left decorative pattern 8L and the middle decorative pattern 8C in Figure 61 (I) are displayed overlapping, the middle decorative pattern 8C, which is larger, is positioned in front of the left decorative pattern 8L, resulting in a display mode in which the middle decorative pattern 8C, which is larger, covers a portion of the left decorative pattern 8L, whereas when the left decorative pattern 8L and the middle decorative pattern 8C in Figure 61 (J) are displayed overlapping, the left decorative pattern 8L, which is larger, is positioned in front of the middle decorative pattern 8C, resulting in a display mode in which the left decorative pattern 8L, which is larger, covers a portion of the middle decorative pattern 8C. For this reason, in the decorative pattern stop position undefined performance B, the stop positions of the left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R change randomly (irregularly) every time the left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R are fixedly stopped, and the positional relationship (front-to-back relationship) between the middle decorative pattern 8C and the right decorative pattern 8R and the positional relationship (front-to-back relationship) between the left decorative pattern 8L and the middle decorative pattern 8C also change randomly (irregularly) so that the larger decorative pattern is at the front, so that the variation of the left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R can be increased. This can contribute to suppressing a decrease in the player's desire to play the decorative pattern stop position undefined performance B.

Furthermore, in the decorative pattern stop position indefinite performance B, the sizes of the left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R can also change randomly (irregularly) each time the left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R are fixedly stopped. Therefore, in the decorative pattern stop position indefinite performance B, there is a wide variety of variations in the change performance (change display) of the left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R, which can further contribute to suppressing a decrease in the player's motivation to play in the decorative pattern stop position indefinite performance B.

Furthermore, in the decorative pattern stop position indefinite performance B, the inclination of the left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R can also change randomly (irregularly) each time the left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R are fixedly stopped. Therefore, in the decorative pattern stop position indefinite performance B, there is an even greater variety in the change performance (change display) of the left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R, which can further contribute to suppressing the decrease in the player's motivation to play with the decorative pattern stop position indefinite performance B.

[Decorative pattern stop position variable performance C]
Next, the decorative symbol stop position undefined effect C will be described with reference to Fig. 62. Fig. 62 is a diagram for explaining the decorative symbol stop position undefined effect C. The decorative symbol stop position undefined effect C is performed when the game mode is shifted to the special game mode, and the following describes the case where the game mode is shifted from the normal game mode to the special game mode in the normal game mode.

First, as shown in FIG. 62(A), the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 is provided with three vertically long rectangular areas (i.e., areas obtained by dividing the display screen 7a into three equal rows) as variable display areas for the three decorative symbols (also referred to as "variable display areas for decorative symbols"). The display mode in which the reels rotate from the top of each variable display area to the bottom of the display screen 7a displays the left decorative symbol 8L of the stereoscopic image, the center decorative symbol 8C of the stereoscopic image, and the right decorative symbol 8R of the stereoscopic image, starting with the reels rotating, starts a variable performance (variable display) of the decorative symbols (composed of number symbols (numbers "1" to "9") and symbols of various characters). Specifically, the left decorative pattern 8L starts changing (changing display) when the reel rotates from the top of the left variable display area 8Lr to the bottom of the left variable display area 8Lr, the middle decorative pattern 8C starts changing (changing display) when the reel rotates from the top of the middle variable display area 8Cr to the bottom of the middle variable display area 8Cr, and the right decorative pattern 8R starts changing (changing display) when the reel rotates from the top of the right variable display area 8Rr to the bottom of the right variable display area 8Rr. The vertical distance dimension of the left variable display area 8Lr, the vertical distance dimension of the middle variable display area 8Cr, and the vertical distance dimension of the right variable display area 8Rr are the same vertical distance dimension, and further, the horizontal distance dimension of the left variable display area 8Lr, the horizontal distance dimension of the middle variable display area 8Cr, and the horizontal distance dimension of the right variable display area 8Rr are the same horizontal distance dimension.

Each decorative pattern in the three-dimensional image is composed of a number design (numbers "1" to "9") with multiple colored (full color) character designs added to it, with the character designs being the main focus and displayed large. For this reason, the number designs are smaller than the character designs added to the number designs. Note that the character designs added to the number designs are all different character designs.

Specifically, for example, the left decorative pattern 8L is configured by attaching a character pattern 8Lb to a bright blue number "6" pattern 8La (see FIG. 62(B)), the middle decorative pattern 8C is configured by attaching a character pattern 8Cb to a bright red number "3" pattern 8Ca (see FIG. 62(B)), and the right decorative pattern 8R is configured by attaching a character pattern 8Rb to a bright blue number "4" pattern 8Ra (see FIG. 62(B)).

The decorative symbols change appearance (changing display) in such a way that the reels spin in the following order: Number "1" → Number "2" → Number "3" → Number "4" → Number "5" → Number "6" → Number "7" → Number "8" → Number "9" → Number "1" → Number "2" → ...

The number designs (hereinafter, sometimes simply referred to as the number "X." X stands for a number) are colored. Specifically, of the numbers "1" to "9," the odd numbers "1," "3," "5," and "9" (excluding the number "7") are bright red, while the even numbers "2," "4," "6," and "8" are bright blue, and the number "7" is yellow (gold). The size of the decorative designs consisting of the number designs and character designs is normal, with the vertical distance dimension being approximately one-third the vertical distance dimension of the left variable display area 8Lr (middle variable display area 8Cr, right variable display area 8Rr) and the horizontal distance dimension being approximately one-half the horizontal distance dimension of the left variable display area 8Lr (middle variable display area 8Cr, right variable display area 8Rr). In this case, the size of the numbers that make up the decorative pattern is the normal size. The numbers "1" to "9" are written in a special font (a uniquely created font) that is different from existing fonts (generally available fonts) such as regular script, Gothic, and Ming style, and is newly created for the purpose of presentation.

In the normal game mode, when the decorative pattern change performance (changing display) starts, the decorative pattern displayed as still changes from an opaque state to a semi-transparent state while gradually increasing its speed from a low speed, and changes at high speed. This allows the background image placed behind the decorative pattern to be viewed through the semi-transparent decorative pattern that is changing at high speed. The decorative pattern slows down just before stopping, changes from a semi-transparent state to an opaque state again, and is displayed as temporarily stopped, or as still (displayed as temporarily stopped, then displayed as still). When the decorative pattern is displayed as temporarily stopped, it moves slowly up and down in small movements.

In addition, on the upper right side of the display screen 7a, there is provided a sub-variable area KSZ having a horizontally long rectangular shape in which small left decorative patterns, small middle decorative patterns, and small right decorative patterns corresponding to the left decorative pattern 8L, middle decorative pattern 8C, and right decorative pattern 8R, respectively, are displayed in a variable manner (variable display). The background image of the sub-variable area KSZ is fixed to a single color (for example, a dark color (dark-dark color series) or a color close to a dark color (for example, deep green) and does not change to other colors. The sub-variable area KSZ is located on the upper right side of the display screen 7a, so it overlaps with the right variable display area 8Rr, which is the variable area of the right decorative pattern 8R. However, by arranging the sub-variable area KSZ to be the foremost side, the right decorative pattern 8R is positioned behind the sub-variable area KSZ and the sub-variable area KSZ is not obstructed by the right decorative pattern 8R. Even if other performance images appear, the other performance images are positioned behind the sub-variable area KSZ and are not obstructed by the other performance images. In other words, the visibility of the content displayed in the sub-variable area KSZ is not hindered by the right decorative pattern 8R or other performance images.

The small decorative pattern is a number pattern, and is in a different font (e.g., Mincho) from the fonts of the left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R, and is unified in another solid color (e.g., a light color (yellow or white)) that contrasts highly with the solid color of the background image of the sub-variable area KSZ, and will not change to another color. The small decorative pattern is positioned in front of the background image of the sub-variable area KSZ and is always opaque; even when it starts to change, it will not become translucent, and will not disappear from the display screen 7a.

Unlike the left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R, the small decorative pattern is not changed (displayed) by the reel being rotated, but by the number pattern appearing one after the other in the same display position, of the same size, and in an opaque state.

When the variable performance (variable display) of the left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R starts, a variable performance (variable display) of the small left decorative pattern, the small middle decorative pattern, and the small right decorative pattern starts in the sub-variable area KSZ, and the left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R are all displayed frozen, while the small left decorative pattern, the small middle decorative pattern, and the small right decorative pattern are also all displayed frozen.

Even if any one or more of the left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R are temporarily stopped (for example, the left decorative pattern 8L and the right decorative pattern 8R are temporarily stopped with the same pattern and a reach is formed), the small left decorative pattern, the small middle decorative pattern, and the small right decorative pattern are all in a state of continuing the variable performance (variable display). Specifically, even if the left decorative pattern 8L is temporarily stopped, the variable performance (variable display) of the small left decorative pattern continues, and even if the right decorative pattern 8R is temporarily stopped, the variable performance (variable display) of the small right decorative pattern continues, and at the same time that the left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R are all stopped, the small left decorative pattern, the small middle decorative pattern, and the small right decorative pattern are all stopped.

In addition, when the left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R are all stopped and displayed, and the same pattern is not aligned and a miss occurs, the small left decorative pattern, the small middle decorative pattern, and the small right decorative pattern may be the same as the left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R, or may be completely different patterns. Specifically, for example, when the left decorative pattern 8L is stopped and displayed with the number "1", the middle decorative pattern 8C is stopped and displayed with the number "2", and the right decorative pattern 8R is stopped and displayed with the number "3", the small left decorative pattern may be stopped and displayed with the number "1", the small middle decorative pattern may be stopped and displayed with the number "2", and the small right decorative pattern may be stopped and displayed with the number "3", or the small left decorative pattern may be stopped and displayed with the number "5", the small middle decorative pattern may be stopped and displayed with the number "6", and the small right decorative pattern may be stopped and displayed with the number "7".

In contrast, when the left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R are all stopped and displayed, and they line up to form the same pattern, resulting in a win, the small left decorative pattern, the small middle decorative pattern, and the small right decorative pattern will line up to form the same pattern as the left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R.

The variable icons 9C corresponding to the left decorative pattern 8L, middle decorative pattern 8C, and right decorative pattern 8R that are currently fluctuating as the first special chart reservation is consumed are displayed (placed) at the variable display position 9Cd (above a rectangular image (pedestal image)) displayed in the lower center of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7. In the area of the display screen 7a to the left of the variable display position 9Cd, a reserve display area is provided for the first special chart reservation. In this reserve display area, reserve icons 9A can be displayed (placed) at each of the four reserve display positions 9Ad (above a rectangular image (pedestal image)), and a maximum of four reserve icons 9A can be stored. The four hold display positions 9Ad are aligned and displayed in a straight line along the bottom edge of the display screen 7a in the following order from the position closest to the variable display position 9Cd toward the left edge of the display screen 7a: first hold display position 9Ad, second hold display position 9Ad, third hold display position 9Ad, and fourth hold display position 9Ad.

The variable display position 9Cd is located in the lower center of the display screen 7a, and the first reserved display position 9Ad is located to the left of the variable display position 9Cd, so that the variable display position 9Cd and the first reserved display position 9Ad overlap with the middle variable display area 8Cr, which is the variable area of the middle decorative pattern 8C, but the middle decorative pattern 8C is located behind the variable display position 9Cd and the first reserved display position 9Ad, so the variable display position 9Cd and the first reserved display position 9Ad are not blocked by the middle decorative pattern 8C. However, when another performance image appears, if the other performance image is located behind the variable display position 9Cd and the first reserved display position 9Ad, the variable display position 9Cd and the first reserved display position 9Ad will not be blocked by the other performance image, but if the other performance image is located in front of the variable display position 9Cd and the first reserved display position 9Ad, the variable display position 9Cd and the first reserved display position 9Ad will be blocked by the other performance image.

Since the second hold display position 9Ad to the fourth hold display position 9Ad are arranged on the lower left side of the display screen 7a, the second hold display position 9Ad to the fourth hold display position 9Ad overlap with the left variable display area 8Lr, which is the variable area of the left decorative pattern 8L, but the left decorative pattern 8L is arranged behind the second hold display position 9Ad to the fourth hold display position 9Ad and the left decorative pattern 8L does not block the second hold display position 9Ad to the fourth hold display position 9Ad. However, when another effect image appears, if the other effect image is arranged behind the second hold display position 9Ad to the fourth hold display position 9Ad, the second hold display position 9Ad to the fourth hold display position 9Ad will not be blocked by the other effect image, but if the other effect image is arranged in front of the second hold display position 9Ad to the fourth hold display position 9Ad, the second hold display position 9Ad to the fourth hold display position 9Ad will be blocked by the other effect image.

In this way, of the first hold display position 9Ad to the fourth hold display position 9Ad, the first hold display position 9Ad overlaps with the middle variable display area 8Cr, which is the variable area of the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the second hold display position 9Ad to the fourth hold display position 9Ad overlap with the left variable display area 8Lr, which is the variable area of the left decorative pattern 8L, so that the hold display area as the first special pattern hold consisting of the first hold display position 9Ad to the fourth hold display position 9Ad is arranged across the middle variable display area 8Cr and the left variable display area 8Lr.

Here, the change display position 9Cd displays the change icon 9C in the form of a white sphere, and the first hold display position 9Ad to the fourth hold display position 9Ad display the hold icon 9A. In other words, there are four hold icons that have not been consumed and are stored. In the following explanation, it is assumed that during the change display (change display) of the decorative pattern, a game ball enters the first start hole 20, resulting in a state in which three or four hold icons are present (i.e., the number of holds is three or four), but no game ball enters the second start hole 21. In addition, as the number of holds increases, the time from the start to the end of the change display (change display) (change time) becomes shorter. For example, in this embodiment, when the number of holds is three or four, the change time is 5000 milliseconds (0.5 seconds) in the case of a no-reach miss.

In addition, on the upper left side of the display screen 7a, facing the above-mentioned sub-variable area KSZ (along the same horizontal line), there is provided a reserve number display area HS having a horizontally long rectangular shape in which the first special reserve based on the game ball entering the first starting hole 20 and the second special reserve based on the game ball entering the second starting hole 21 are displayed as reserve numbers (numbers). The vertical distance dimension of the reserve number display area HS and the vertical distance dimension of the sub-variable area KSZ are the same vertical distance dimension, and the horizontal distance dimension of the reserve number display area HS and the horizontal distance dimension of the sub-variable area KSZ are the same horizontal distance dimension. In other words, the shape of the reserve number display area HS and the shape of the sub-variable area KSZ are the same shape.

The background image of the reserved number display area HS is fixed as colorless and transparent, unlike the background image of the sub-variable area KSZ, and does not become opaque or change to another color. The reserved number display area HS is positioned on the upper left side of the display screen 7a, and therefore overlaps with the left variable display area 8Lr, which is the variable area of the left decorative pattern 8L. However, by positioning the reserved number display area HS as the foremost side, the left decorative pattern 8L is positioned behind the reserved number display area HS and the reserved number display area HS is not obstructed by the left decorative pattern 8L, and even if another performance image appears, the other performance image is positioned behind the reserved number display area HS and the reserved number display area HS is not obstructed by the other performance image.

The number of reserved first special figures (reserved number (number)) and the number of reserved second special figures (reserved number (number)) are in a font (e.g., Gothic) different from the font of the small decorative pattern, and are set to other solid colors that have high contrast with the solid color of the background image of the reserved number display area HS, and do not change to other colors. The number of reserved first special figures (reserved number (number)) and the number of reserved second special figures (reserved number (number)) are arranged on the front side of the background image of the reserved number display area HS and are always opaque, and do not disappear from the display screen 7a. Specifically, the number of reserved first special figures based on the entry of game balls into the first starting hole 20 is always displayed as a blue number on the left side of the reserved number display area HS, and the number of reserved second special figures based on the entry of game balls into the second starting hole 21 is always displayed as a red number on the right side of the reserved number display area HS, spaced apart from each other. These numbers are displayed as the number of reserved balls, so they are easy to distinguish from the various background images and decorative images displayed on the display screen 7a, making them intuitively easy to understand. In other words, the content displayed in the reserved number display area HS is not hindered in visibility by other performance images. The blue color indicating the number of reserved first special symbols is a different color (not the same color) from the bright blue of the even-numbered symbols "2", "4", "6", and "8", but is a similar color. The red color indicating the number of reserved second special symbols is a different color (not the same color) from the bright red of the odd-numbered symbols "1", "3", "5", and "9", excluding the number "7", but is a similar color.

Here, briefly explaining the reserved icon 9A and the variable icon 9C (hereinafter sometimes simply referred to as "icon"), the differences in shape and color represent the differences in the expectation of winning at the time of the lottery corresponding to the icon. For example, of the four icons, namely, the yellow (gold) star icon, the black spherical icon, the smiling sphere icon, and the white spherical icon, the yellow (gold) star icon has the highest expectation of winning, the black spherical icon has the second highest expectation of winning, the smiling sphere icon has the third highest expectation of winning, and the white spherical icon has the lowest expectation of winning. For the smiling sphere icon, the expectation of winning is further set in the order of, for example, blue → green → red → gold (yellow) → seven colors (rainbow (high probability of winning)).

In the normal game mode, as shown in FIG. 62(A), the decorative pattern change performance (changing display) is started, and then the left decorative pattern 8L, which changes from the top to the bottom in the left changing display area 8Lr, is displayed temporarily stopped in the center of the left changing display area 8Lr, and moves slowly in small increments in the up and down direction. Then, the right decorative pattern 8R, which changes from the top to the bottom in the right changing display area 8Rr, is displayed temporarily stopped in the center of the right changing display area 8Rr, and moves slowly in small increments in the up and down direction. Then, the middle decorative pattern 8C, which changes from the top to the bottom in the middle changing display area 8Cr, is displayed temporarily stopped in the center of the middle changing display area 8Cr, and moves slowly in small increments in the up and down direction.

In addition, in the normal game mode, multiple types of background images for normal gameplay are provided as background images, and the background images are switched appropriately.

After that, as shown in FIG. 62(B), the left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R are all displayed (confirmed) as stopped in the center of their respective variable display areas, so that the left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R are displayed (confirmed) side-by-side on the same horizontal line. As a result, the variable icon 9C disappears from the display screen 7a.

Next, when the player starts moving toward the variable display position 9Cd to consume the reserved icon 9A placed at the first reserved display position 9Ad, as shown in FIG. 62(C), the left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, the right decorative pattern 8R, the variable display position 9Cd, the first reserved display position 9Ad to the fourth reserved display position 9ad, the variable icon 9C, and all the reserved icons 9A disappear from the display screen 7a. In the second sub-variable area CSZ described later, a variable performance (variable display) using medium-sized decorative patterns is started, and then the background image is switched from the background image for normal play to the background image for A mode only, and a large message image MSG saying "Enter A mode" is displayed in the center of the display screen 7a. This A mode is a special play mode. In the A mode, a decorative pattern stop position indefinite performance C is started, which is a display mode different from the variable performance (variable display) of the decorative pattern in the play mode in the normal play state of FIG. 62(A) and (B) described above.

The A-mode exclusive background image is a background image that is different from the normal game background image that is used as the background image in the game mode in the normal game state, and is a background image that is used exclusively in A-mode. There may be only one A-mode exclusive background image prepared, or multiple types may be prepared.

In this embodiment, the condition for the decorative pattern stop position uncertain performance C to occur is, for example, when the number of times a variable performance (variable display) has been performed without a win reaching 2.5 to 3 times the normal probability state (non-high probability state, low probability state, normal state). Also, in the decorative pattern stop position uncertain performance C, a predetermined number of variable performances (variable display) are performed. This "predetermined number" is, for example, up to 3.8 times the normal probability state (non-high probability state, low probability state, normal state), which is 115 times in this case.

When the decorative symbol stop position indefinite performance C starts, a second sub-variable area CSZ having a horizontally long rectangular shape is provided on the lower left side of the display screen 7a, in which a medium-sized left decorative symbol, a medium-sized middle decorative symbol, and a medium-sized right decorative symbol corresponding to the left decorative symbol 8L, the middle decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R, respectively, are displayed in a variable manner (variable display). The vertical distance dimension of the second sub-variable area CSZ is approximately five times larger than the vertical distance dimension of the sub-variable area KSZ, and the horizontal distance dimension of the second sub-variable area CSZ is approximately five times larger than the horizontal distance dimension of the sub-variable area KSZ, and they have similar shapes.

The sizes of the medium-sized left decorative pattern, medium-sized middle decorative pattern, and medium-sized right decorative pattern that are displayed (displayed) in the second sub-variable area CSZ are larger (about 5 times larger) than the sizes of the small-sized left decorative pattern, small middle decorative pattern, and small right decorative pattern that are displayed (displayed) in the sub-variable area KSZ, but are smaller than the sizes of the left decorative pattern 8L, middle decorative pattern 8C, and right decorative pattern 8R. Also, unlike the small-sized left decorative pattern, small middle decorative pattern, and small right decorative pattern, the medium-sized left decorative pattern, medium middle decorative pattern, and medium-sized right decorative pattern have smaller shapes than the left decorative pattern 8L, middle decorative pattern 8C, and right decorative pattern 8R, have similar shapes, and are the same color. In other words, the medium-sized left decorative pattern is a smaller version of the left decorative pattern 8L and has the same color as the left decorative pattern 8L, the medium-sized middle decorative pattern is a smaller version of the middle decorative pattern 8C and has the same color as the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the medium-sized right decorative pattern is a smaller version of the right decorative pattern 8R and has the same color as the right decorative pattern 8R.

The background image of the second sub-variable area CSZ is fixed to be colorless and transparent, unlike the background image of the sub-variable area KSZ, and does not become opaque or change to another color. The second sub-variable area CSZ is arranged on the lower left side of the display screen 7a, and therefore overlaps with the left variable display area 8Lr, which is the variable area of the left decorative pattern 8L. However, in this embodiment, during the period in which the second sub-variable area CSZ is displayed on the display screen 7a, the left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R are in a state of disappearing from the display screen 7a, so that the left decorative pattern 8L does not block the sub-variable area KSZ. In addition, by arranging the second sub-variable area CSZ to be the foremost side, even if another performance image appears, the other performance image is arranged behind the second sub-variable area CSZ, and the second sub-variable area CSZ is not blocked by the other performance image. In other words, the visibility of the content displayed in the second sub-variable area CSZ is not hindered by the left decorative pattern 8L or other performance images.

Unlike the left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R, the medium-sized decorative pattern does not undergo a variable performance (variable display) in a display mode in which the reels are rotated, but instead undergoes a variable performance (variable display) in the same display position, for example, from the left edge of the medium-sized decorative pattern through the front to the right edge of the medium-sized decorative pattern, as if a coin were spinning. And when the variable performance (variable display) starts at the same timing for the medium-sized decorative patterns, that is, the medium-sized left decorative pattern, the medium-sized middle decorative pattern, and the medium-sized right decorative pattern, the medium-sized left decorative pattern, and the medium-sized middle decorative pattern, are displayed stopped at the same timing.

In this embodiment, when the decorative pattern stop position indefinite performance C, in which a maximum of 115 changing performances (changing displays) are performed, is started, a changing performance (changing display) using a medium-sized decorative pattern is started in the second sub-changing area CSZ, and is performed a predetermined number of times (10 times in this embodiment). During the period in which the changing performance (changing display) using a medium-sized decorative pattern is performed a predetermined number of times (10 times) in the second sub-changing area CSZ, the left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R are in a state of having disappeared from the display screen 7a. When the changing performance (changing display) using a medium-sized decorative pattern is started in the second sub-changing area CSZ and the second changing performance (changing display) is performed, a message image MSG with a gold color (gold color) saying "Entering A mode" is displayed. This message image MSG is displayed for a predetermined time (in this embodiment, 5 seconds) and then disappears from the display screen 7a. Thereafter, a message image saying "A mode" is displayed as a caption TP1 (see, for example, FIG. 61(D)) along the top edge of the display screen 7a, moving repeatedly from the right side to the left side of the display screen 7a in the caption display mode, for the period during which the decorative pattern stop position indefinite performance C is being performed.

The caption TP1, which is a message image saying "A mode", is the same color (gold) as the message image MSG saying "Entering A mode". The area in which the caption TP1 is displayed and moved is a strip-shaped area having a predetermined distance dimension from the top edge of the display screen 7a, and is about four times larger than the vertical distance dimension of the sub-variable area KSZ (or the reserved number display area HS). The area in which the caption TP1 is displayed and moved overlaps with the sub-variable area KSZ and the reserved number display area HS, but since the sub-variable area KSZ and the reserved number display area HS are positioned to be the foremost side as described above, the caption TP1 is positioned behind the sub-variable area KSZ and the reserved number display area HS, and the sub-variable area KSZ and the reserved number display area HS are not obstructed by the caption TP1. In other words, the visibility of the contents displayed in the sub-variable area KSZ and the reserved number display area HS is not hindered by the caption TP1.

As described above, the area in which the telop TP1 is displayed is a band-shaped area having a predetermined distance from the top edge of the display screen 7a, and this area overlaps with the upper area of the left variable display area 8Lr, which is the variable area of the left decorative pattern 8L, with the upper area of the middle variable display area 8Cr, which is the variable area of the middle decorative pattern 8C, and with the upper area of the right variable display area 8Rr, which is the variable area of the right decorative pattern 8R. In this embodiment, the area in which the telop TP1 is displayed is arranged behind the left variable display area 8Lr, the middle variable display area 8Cr, and the right variable display area 8Rr. Therefore, the left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R are not obstructed by the area in which the telop TP1 is displayed. In other words, the visibility of the left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R is not hindered by the area in which the telop TP1 is displayed.

When the caption TP1 is displayed moving from the right side to the left side of the display screen 7a along the top side of the display screen 7a, it does not suddenly disappear along the way, nor does it break down into particles and gradually disappear. The caption TP1 is displayed moving at a constant speed, which is the caption TP1 speed.

When the decorative pattern stop position indefinite performance C is performed and the medium-sized decorative pattern in the second sub-variable area CSZ starts a predetermined number of times (10th time) of variable performance (variable display), just before this variable performance (variable display) ends, as shown in FIG. 62 (D), a counter image CNT with the message "105 remaining" is displayed in the lower center of the display screen 7a. The counter image CNT is arranged in front of the background image for the counter image having a semi-transparent horizontally elongated rectangular shape, and the vertical distance dimension of this background image for the counter image having a semi-transparent horizontally elongated rectangular shape is about three times larger than the vertical distance dimension of the sub-variable area KSZ (or the reserved number display area HS), and the horizontal distance dimension of this background image for the counter image having a semi-transparent horizontally elongated rectangular shape is about six times larger than the horizontal distance dimension of the sub-variable area KSZ (or the reserved number display area HS).

Although this translucent horizontally elongated rectangular background image for the counter image overlaps with the middle variable display area 8Cr, which is the variable area of the middle decorative pattern 8C, the background image for the counter image is positioned so that the middle decorative pattern 8C is positioned behind the background image for the counter image and the counter image CNT positioned in front of the background image for the counter image is not obscured by the middle decorative pattern 8C, and even if other performance images appear, the other performance images are positioned behind the background image for the counter image and do not obscure the counter image CNT positioned in front of the background image for the counter image by the other performance images. In other words, the visibility of the counter image CNT positioned in front of the background image for the counter image is not hindered by the middle decorative pattern 8C or other performance images. In addition, because the background image for the counter image is semi-transparent, in the area of the background image for the counter image where the counter image CNT is not placed (i.e., the area of the background image for the counter image that does not correspond to the counter image CNT), the middle decorative pattern 8C and other presentation images (background images of the left decorative pattern 8L, middle decorative pattern 8C, and right decorative pattern 8R) can be seen through the semi-transparent background image for the counter image.

Also, when a counter image CNT saying "105 remaining" is displayed in the lower center of the display screen 7a, the left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R appear again (slightly delayed from the start of the display of the counter image CNT) and are displayed still. At this time, the character pattern 8Lb constituting the left decorative pattern 8L, the character pattern 8Cb constituting the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the character pattern 8Rb constituting the right decorative pattern 8R are not displayed again, and only the number pattern 8La constituting the left decorative pattern 8L, the number pattern 8Ca constituting the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the number pattern 8Ca constituting the right decorative pattern 8R are displayed again. Furthermore, the sizes of the number pattern 8La constituting the left decorative pattern 8L, the number pattern 8Ca constituting the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the number pattern 8Ra constituting the right decorative pattern 8R that have reappeared are different from the sizes before they disappeared, that is, the sizes of the left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R in the game mode shown in Figures 62 (A) and (B), and the orientation of the number pattern 8La constituting the left decorative pattern 8L, the number pattern 8Ca constituting the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the number pattern 8Ra constituting the right decorative pattern 8R that have reappeared In this case, the orientation of the left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R in the game mode shown in Figures 62 (A) and (B) may be different, and the positions at which the number pattern 8La constituting the left decorative pattern 8L, the number pattern 8Ca constituting the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the number pattern 8Ra constituting the right decorative pattern 8R that have reappeared are temporarily stopped and displayed as stopped are different from the positions at which the left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R in the game mode shown in Figures 62 (A) and (B) are temporarily stopped and displayed as stopped.

Specifically, the size of the number pattern 8La constituting the left decorative pattern 8L that is temporarily stopped and stopped in the decorative pattern stop position indefinite performance C of Fig. 62 (D) is larger than the normal size of the number pattern of the number pattern 8La constituting the left decorative pattern 8L that is temporarily stopped and stopped in the game mode of Fig. 62 (B). Also, the position where the left decorative pattern 8L is temporarily stopped and stopped in the game mode of Fig. 62 (B) is the center of the left variable display area 8Lr, which is the variable area of the left decorative pattern 8L, whereas the position where the number pattern 8La constituting the left decorative pattern 8L is temporarily stopped and stopped in the decorative pattern stop position indefinite performance C of Fig. 62 (D) is not the center of the left variable display area 8Lr, which is the variable area of the left decorative pattern 8L, but is the upper right side of the left variable display area 8Lr, and a part of the upper side of the left decorative pattern 8L protrudes from the upper side of the left variable display area 8Lr, making it difficult to see. In addition, in the game mode of FIG. 62(B), the left decorative pattern 8L that is temporarily stopped and stopped is not tilted (the vertical lines passing through the midpoints of the upper and lower sides of the left decorative pattern 8L are parallel to the vertical direction in which the reel rotates), whereas in the decorative pattern stop position indefinite performance C of FIG. 62(D), the inclination of the number pattern 8La that constitutes the left decorative pattern 8L that is temporarily stopped and stopped is such that the vertical lines passing through the midpoints of the upper and lower sides of the number pattern 8La are slightly tilted counterclockwise with respect to the vertical direction in which the reel rotates, and the number pattern 8La that constitutes the left decorative pattern 8L is slightly tilted to the left. At this time, when the medium-sized left decorative pattern is stopped and displayed with the number "1" in the second sub-variable area CSZ, the left decorative pattern 8L is stopped and displayed with the number "1".

In the decorative pattern stop position uncertain performance C of Figure 62 (D), the size of the number pattern 8Ra that constitutes the right decorative pattern 8R that is temporarily stopped and stopped is slightly larger than the normal size of the number pattern of the number pattern 8Ra that constitutes the right decorative pattern 8R that is temporarily stopped and stopped in the game mode of Figure 62 (B), but is smaller than the size of the left decorative pattern 8L. In addition, in the game mode of Fig. 62(B), the position where the right decorative pattern 8R is temporarily stopped and stopped is the center of the right variable display area 8Rr, which is the variable area of the right decorative pattern 8R, whereas in the decorative pattern stop position indefinite performance C of Fig. 62(D), the position where the number pattern 8Ra constituting the right decorative pattern 8R is temporarily stopped and stopped is not the center of the right variable display area 8Rr, which is the variable area of the right decorative pattern 8R, but the upper left side of the right variable display area 8Rr, and a part of the upper side of the right decorative pattern 8R protrudes from the upper side of the right variable display area 8Rr, making it difficult to see. Although the sub-variable area KSZ is provided on the upper side of the right variable display area 8Rr, since the sub-variable area KSZ is arranged on the front side, a part of the right decorative pattern 8R of the number "2" is covered by the sub-variable area KSZ. In addition, in the game mode of FIG. 62(B), the right decorative pattern 8R that is temporarily stopped and stopped is not tilted (the vertical lines passing through the midpoints of the upper and lower sides of the right decorative pattern 8R are parallel to the vertical direction in which the reel rotates), whereas in the decorative pattern stop position indefinite performance C of FIG. 62(D), the inclination of the number patterns 8Ra that make up the right decorative pattern 8R that is temporarily stopped and stopped is such that the vertical lines passing through the midpoints of the upper and lower sides of the right decorative pattern 8R are slightly tilted clockwise with respect to the vertical direction in which the reel rotates, and the number patterns 8Ra that make up the right decorative pattern 8R are slightly tilted to the right. At this time, when the medium-sized right decorative pattern is stopped and displayed with the number "2" in the second sub-variable area CSZ, the right decorative pattern 8R is stopped and displayed with the number "2".

The size of the number pattern 8Ca constituting the middle decorative pattern 8C that is temporarily stopped and stopped in the decorative pattern stop position undefined performance C of Fig. 62 (D) is considerably larger than the normal size of the number pattern of the number pattern 8Ca constituting the middle decorative pattern 8C that is temporarily stopped and stopped in the game mode of Fig. 62 (B), and is larger than the size of the left decorative pattern 8L. Also, the position where the middle decorative pattern 8C is temporarily stopped and stopped in the game mode of Fig. 62 (B) is the center of the middle variable display area 8Cr that is the variable area of the middle decorative pattern 8C, whereas the position where the number pattern 8La constituting the middle decorative pattern 8C is temporarily stopped and stopped in the decorative pattern stop position undefined performance C of Fig. 62 (D) is not the center of the middle variable display area 8Cr that is the variable area of the middle decorative pattern 8C, but is below the middle variable display area 8Cr. In addition, in the game mode of Fig. 62 (B), the right decorative pattern 8R displayed as a temporary stop and stopped is not tilted (the vertical lines passing through the midpoints of the upper and lower sides of the right decorative pattern 8R are parallel to the vertical direction in which the reel rotates), and in the decorative pattern stop position indefinite performance C of Fig. 61 (D), the inclination of the number pattern 8Ca constituting the right decorative pattern 8R displayed as a temporary stop and stopped is such that the vertical lines passing through the midpoints of the upper and lower sides of the right decorative pattern 8R are parallel to the vertical direction in which the reel rotates, and the number pattern 8La constituting the middle decorative pattern 8C is not tilted. At this time, when the medium-sized middle decorative pattern is stopped and displayed as the number "3" in the second sub-variable area CSZ, the middle decorative pattern 8C is stopped and displayed as the number "3". Although the counter image CNT is provided below the middle variable display area 8Cr, because the counter image CNT is positioned at the frontmost side, part of the middle decorative pattern 8C of the number "3" is covered by the counter image CNT.

In this embodiment, a predetermined number of times (10th time) of medium-sized decorative patterns are used in the second sub-variable area CSZ to perform a variable performance (variable display), and just before this variable performance (variable display) ends, a counter image CNT reading "105 remaining" is displayed in the center of the lower part of the display screen 7a, and only the number pattern 8La constituting the left decorative pattern 8L, the number pattern 8Ca constituting the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the number pattern 8Ra constituting the right decorative pattern 8R reappear and are displayed stationary. However, once the decorative pattern stop position indefinite performance C begins and a predetermined time (for example, 10 seconds) has elapsed, the counter image CNT may be displayed, and just before the time arrives when the left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R are displayed stationary, only the number pattern 8La constituting the left decorative pattern 8L, the number pattern 8Ca constituting the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the number pattern 8Ra constituting the right decorative pattern 8R reappear. When the number pattern 8La constituting the left decorative pattern 8L, the number pattern 8Ca constituting the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the number pattern 8Ra constituting the right decorative pattern 8R appear again, the second sub-variable area CSZ disappears from the display screen 7a, and the medium-sized decorative patterns also disappear from the display screen 7a.

Hereafter, for convenience of explanation, the "numerical design 8La constituting the left decorative design 8L" may be simply referred to as the "left decorative design 8L", the "numerical design 8Ca constituting the middle decorative design 8C" may be simply referred to as the "middle decorative design 8C", and the "numerical design 8Ca constituting the right decorative design 8R" may be simply referred to as the "right decorative design 8R".

When the predetermined number (10 times) of fluctuation performances (fluctuating display) ends, then the predetermined number (10 times) + 1 (i.e. 11th) of fluctuation performances (fluctuating display) begins, and the medium-sized left decorative pattern, the medium-sized middle decorative pattern, and the medium-sized right decorative pattern start to rotate as coins at the same timing, as shown in Figure 62 (E), the second sub-fluctuating area CSZ disappears from the display screen 7a, the medium-sized decorative pattern also disappears from the display screen 7a, and the left decorative pattern 8L, middle decorative pattern 8C, and right decorative pattern 8R each emit light, and a fluctuation performance (fluctuating display) is performed in which the reels rotate downward in the corresponding left variable display area 8Lr, middle variable display area 8Cr, and right variable display area 8Rr, and the counter image CNT is updated to "104 remaining" and displayed. In other words, the left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R start changing (changing display) at the same timing as the medium-sized left decorative pattern, the medium-sized middle decorative pattern, and the medium-sized right decorative pattern. The left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R are stopped and displayed at the same timing.

At this time, the changing presentation (changing display) of the left decorative pattern 8L, middle decorative pattern 8C, and right decorative pattern 8R in the decorative pattern stopping position indefinite presentation C is displayed in a different manner from the changing presentation (changing display) of the left decorative pattern 8L, middle decorative pattern 8C, and right decorative pattern 8R in the game mode shown in Figures 62 (A) and (B). In the changing presentation (changing display) of each decorative pattern in the game modes shown in Figures 62 (A) and (B), as described above, the changing presentation (changing display) is performed in a display mode in which the reels rotate in the order of number "1" → number "2" → number "3" → number "4" → number "5" → number "6" → number "7" → number "8" → number "9" → number "1" → number "2" → ..., whereas in the decorative pattern stop position indefinite presentation C, when the changing presentation (changing display) of each decorative pattern that is stopped and displayed begins, each decorative pattern emits light and then is changed toward the bottom of the changing display area of each decorative pattern, or each decorative pattern emits light and is changed toward the bottom of the changing display area of each decorative pattern, and then the number following each decorative pattern that is stopped and displayed does not appear, and a random number appears and is stopped and displayed opaquely as the number following each decorative pattern. This occurs when the second sub-variable area CSZ disappears from the display screen 7a, and the medium-sized decorative patterns also disappear from the display screen 7a, which makes it possible to realize a display mode in which random numbers suddenly appear, remaining opaque, as the number following each decorative pattern and are displayed stationary.

Specifically, when the variable performance (variable display) of the left decorative pattern 8L of the number "1" displayed as stopped in Fig. 62(D) starts, the left decorative pattern 8L emits light, and the number "2" following the number "1" of the left decorative pattern 8L displayed as stopped in Fig. 62(D) appears opaque and is not displayed as a stopped left decorative pattern 8L in Fig. 62(E), and a random number "4" appears opaque and is displayed as stopped. Furthermore, the size of the left decorative pattern 8L displayed as a provisional stop and as a stopped number in Fig. 62(E) is larger than the size of the left decorative pattern 8L of the number "1" displayed as stopped in Fig. 62(D). Furthermore, the position of the left decorative pattern 8L of the number "1" displayed in FIG. 62(D) is the upper right side of the left variable display area 8Lr, whereas the position of the left decorative pattern 8L of the number "4" displayed in FIG. 62(E) after the variable performance (variable display) is started is the lower side of the left variable display area 8Lr, not the upper right side. Furthermore, the inclination of the left decorative pattern 8L displayed in the provisional stop display and the stopped display in FIG. 62(D) is such that the vertical lines passing through the midpoints of the upper and lower sides of the left decorative pattern 8L are slightly inclined counterclockwise with respect to the vertical direction in which the reel rotates, and the left decorative pattern 8L is slightly inclined to the left, whereas the inclination of the left decorative pattern 8L displayed in the provisional stop display and the stopped display in FIG. 62(E) is such that the vertical lines passing through the midpoints of the upper and lower sides of the left decorative pattern 8L are parallel to the vertical direction in which the reel rotates.

When the variable performance (variable display) of the right decorative pattern 8R of the number "2" displayed in Fig. 62(D) starts, the right decorative pattern 8R emits light, and the number "3" following the number "2" of the right decorative pattern 8R displayed in Fig. 62(D) becomes opaque and is not displayed as the right decorative pattern 8R in Fig. 62(E), and a random number "5" appears opaque and is displayed as a stopped display. Furthermore, the size of the right decorative pattern 8R displayed as a provisional stop and a stopped display in Fig. 62(E) is considerably larger than the size of the right decorative pattern 8R of the number "2" displayed in Fig. 62(D), and is larger than the size of the left decorative pattern 8L. Furthermore, the position of the right decorative pattern 8R of the number "2" displayed in a stopped state in Figure 62 (D) is on the upper left side of the right variable display area 8Rr, whereas after the variable performance (variable display) starts, the position of the right decorative pattern 8R of the number "5" displayed in a stopped state in Figure 62 (E) is closer to the upper center of the right variable display area 8Rr rather than the upper left side of the right variable display area 8Rr, and a portion of the upper side and a portion of the right side of the right decorative pattern 8R protrude from the upper edge and right edge of the right variable display area 8Rr, respectively, making them difficult to see. Furthermore, in FIG. 62(D), the inclination of the right decorative pattern 8R that is temporarily stopped and stopped is such that the vertical lines passing through the midpoints of the upper and lower sides of the right decorative pattern 8R are tilted slightly clockwise with respect to the up-down direction in which the reel spins, so that the right decorative pattern 8R is tilted slightly to the right, whereas in FIG. 62(E), the inclination of the right decorative pattern 8R that is temporarily stopped and stopped is such that the vertical lines passing through the midpoints of the upper and lower sides of the right decorative pattern 8R are tilted significantly counterclockwise with respect to the up-down direction in which the reel spins, so that the right decorative pattern 8R is tilted significantly to the left.

When the moving effect (variable display) of the central decorative pattern 8C of the number "3" displayed in a stopped state in Fig. 62(D) starts, the central decorative pattern 8C emits light, and the number "4" following the number "3" of the central decorative pattern 8C displayed in a stopped state in Fig. 62(D) appears opaque and is not displayed as a stopped central decorative pattern 8C in Fig. 62(E), and a random number "1" appears opaque and is displayed as a stopped central decorative pattern. Furthermore, the size of the central decorative pattern 8C displayed in a provisional stop state and as a stopped state in Fig. 62(E) is significantly smaller than the size of the central decorative pattern 8C of the number "3" displayed in a provisional stop state and as a stopped state in Fig. 62(D), and is also significantly smaller than the normal size of the number pattern. Furthermore, the position of the central decorative pattern 8C of the number "3" displayed in FIG. 62(D) is the lower side of the central variable display area 8Cr, whereas the position of the central decorative pattern 8C of the number "1" displayed in FIG. 62(E) after the variable performance (variable display) is started is not the lower side of the central variable display area 8Cr but slightly to the left of the center of the central variable display area 8Cr. Furthermore, the inclination of the central decorative pattern 8C displayed in the temporary stop display and the stopped display in FIG. 62(D) is such that the vertical lines passing through the midpoints of the upper and lower sides of the central decorative pattern 8C are parallel to the vertical direction in which the reel rotates, whereas the inclination of the central decorative pattern 8C displayed in the temporary stop display and the stopped display in FIG. 62(E) is such that the vertical lines passing through the midpoints of the upper and lower sides of the central decorative pattern 8C are slightly inclined counterclockwise with respect to the vertical direction in which the reel rotates, and the central decorative pattern 8C is slightly inclined to the left.

When the predetermined number (10 times) + 1 (i.e. 11th) of medium-sized decorative pattern fluctuation effects (fluctuation display) starts in the second sub-fluctuation area CSZ, a message image "It's still going on..." (here, three telops TP2) is displayed in a telop display mode, moving from the right side to the left side of the display screen 7a so as to be parallel to the top side of the display screen 7a. The telop TP2 is white, and the expectation of a win is higher for other colors (e.g., blue, red, rainbow) than for white (e.g., the expectation of a win is lowest for white, followed by blue, red, and then rainbow). The vertical distance dimension of the telop TP2 is about twice as large as the vertical distance dimension of the sub-fluctuation area KSZ (or the reserved number display area HS). The area in which the telop TP2 is moved and displayed is between the bottom side of the area in which the telop TP1 is moved and the top side of the background image for the counter image, and it straddles the left variable display area 8Lr which is the variable area of the left decorative pattern 8L, the middle variable display area 8Cr which is the variable area of the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right variable display area 8Rr which is the variable area of the right decorative pattern 8R. By arranging the telop TP2 so that it is the foremost side, even if the telop TP2 straddles the right variable display area 8Rr, the middle variable display area 8Cr, and the left variable display area 8Lr, the telop TP2 is arranged in front of the right decorative pattern 8R, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the left decorative pattern 8L, and the telop TP2 is not blocked by the right decorative pattern 8R, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the left decorative pattern 8L. In this respect, it differs in that the above-mentioned caption TP1 is placed behind the sub-variable area KSZ and the reserved number display area HS, and the caption TP1 is obscured by the sub-variable area KSZ and the reserved number display area HS.

Note that the telop TP2 differs from the above-mentioned telop TP1 in that once it reaches the left side of the display screen 7a, it does not reappear from the right side of the display screen 7a, and is instead repeatedly moved and displayed. The multiple telops TP2 may be set to move at different speeds, or may be set to the same speed. The multiple telops TP2 appear from the right side of the display screen 7a at different times, so that in the relevant fluctuation, some will reach the left side of the display screen 7a and disappear, some will reach the left side of the display screen 7a over the next fluctuation and disappear, and some will reach the left side of the display screen 7a over the next fluctuation (multiple fluctuations) and disappear.

Furthermore, when the caption TP2 appears from the right side of the display screen 7a and moves toward the left side of the display screen 7a, it may suddenly disappear along the way, become particleized and gradually disappear, or may be displayed in a manner that causes image information to be missing (for example, an image is divided into small blocks and arranged irregularly rather than regularly, resulting in an unclear image) making it difficult to read. The caption TP2 differs from the caption TP1 described above in that when it appears from the right side of the display screen 7a and moves toward the left side of the display screen 7a along the top side of the display screen 7a, it does not suddenly disappear along the way, do not become particleized and gradually disappear, or do not appear in a manner that causes image information to be missing.

Furthermore, the telop TP2 may be displayed moving at the same constant speed as the telop TP1 (the speed for telop TP1), may be displayed moving at a constant speed faster than the constant speed of the telop TP1 (the speed for telop TP1), or may be displayed moving at a constant speed slower than the constant speed of the telop TP1 (the speed for telop TP1). The speed of the telop TP2 may be accelerated when it is displayed moving from the right side to the left side of the display screen 7a, may be decelerated when it is displayed moving from the right side to the left side of the display screen 7a, or may be accelerated or decelerated when it is displayed moving from the right side to the left side of the display screen 7a. In this respect as well, it differs from the telop TP1 described above.

Furthermore, when the caption TP2 appears from the right side of the display screen 7a and moves toward the left side of the display screen 7a, it may suddenly stop midway, or it may decelerate and stop. When the caption TP2 stops, it may explode and simply disappear from the display screen 7a, or the display screen 7a may go black (a completely dark screen), as described below, and then the lottery results may be displayed. In this respect as well, it differs from the caption TP1 described above.

In addition, when the telop TP2 appears from the right side of the display screen 7a and moves toward the left side of the display screen 7a, the typeface may change along the way (for example, the font of all or some of the characters in the telop TP2 may change, all or some of the characters in the telop TP2 may become bold, all or some of the characters in the telop TP2 may become thin, all or some of the characters in the telop TP2 may become italic, the size of all or some of the characters in the telop TP2 may change significantly, the size of all or some of the characters in the telop TP2 may change significantly, or all or some of the characters in the telop TP2 may be underlined) or the content may change to something else. In these respects as well, it differs from the telop TP1 described above.

When the telop TP2 appears from the right side of the display screen 7a, the vertical distance dimension of the telop TP2 is about twice as large as the vertical distance dimension of the sub-variable area KSZ (or the reserved number display area HS), but there are cases where the vertical distance dimension of the telop TP2 is more than twice as large as the vertical distance dimension of the sub-variable area KSZ (or the reserved number display area HS) and the vertical distance dimension of the telop TP2 is less than twice as large as the vertical distance dimension of the sub-variable area KSZ (or the reserved number display area HS). When the vertical distance dimension of the telop TP2 is more than twice as large as the vertical distance dimension of the sub-variable area KSZ (or the reserved number display area HS) and the vertical distance dimension of the telop TP2 is less than twice as large as the vertical distance dimension of the sub-variable area KSZ (or the reserved number display area HS), the telop TP2 may be red or rainbow colored. This point also differs from the telop TP1 described above.

There are multiple contents of the telop TP2, and the player can select and set it by operating the effect button 63. The contents of the telop TP2 can be, for example, a comment made by a character selected from among a number of characters that represent the worldview of the gaming machine, or a comment that includes part of the lyrics of the music played in the decorative pattern stop position indefinite effect C, or a comment made by multiple people that expresses the worldview of the background image of the decorative pattern stop position indefinite effect C. Of course, it is also possible to select and set whether to display the telop TP2 or not. Such selection and setting may be made by the player in a setting mode during play, or in a setting mode in the waiting state (waiting for players).

In the decorative pattern stop position indefinite performance C, the variable icon 9C and the reserved icon 9A disappear from the display screen 7a, so the display mode of the variable icon 9C cannot be changed to notify the expectation of a big win for the variable, and the display mode of the reserved icon 9A cannot be changed by the pre-reading performance to suggest the expectation of a win. Therefore, in the decorative pattern stop position indefinite performance C, the display mode of the telop TP2 can be changed in various ways to suggest the expectation of a win. The telop TP1 notifies the player that it is in "A mode" and does not convey other information to the player. For this reason, the telop TP2, which can suggest the expectation of a win to the player, is placed in front of the left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R, while the telop TP1, which does not convey other information to the player other than the information that it is in "A mode," is placed behind the left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R. In addition, an A-mode exclusive background image is displayed as the background image in the decorative pattern stop position indefinite performance C. Therefore, if multiple types of A-mode exclusive background images are prepared, an A-mode exclusive background image corresponding to the expected degree of winning may be displayed.

In this way, unlike caption TP1, caption TP2 has a wide variety of presentations, and can contribute to suppressing a decrease in the player's desire to play due to the decorative pattern changing presentation (changing display) of the decorative pattern, which is an indefinite decorative pattern stopping position presentation C.

When the predetermined number (10 times) + 1 (i.e. 11th) of variable effects (variable display) ends and the predetermined number (10 times) + 2 (i.e. 12th) of variable effects (variable display) starts, as shown in FIG. 62 (F), the left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R each emit light, and the corresponding left variable display area 8Lr, middle variable display area 8Cr, and right variable display area 8Rr are displayed with the reels spinning downward, and the counter image CNT is updated to "103 remaining" and displayed.

At this time, in the decorative pattern stop position indefinite performance C, the left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R are displayed as a changing performance (changing display) in which a random number appears opaquely as the number following each decorative pattern, as described above. When the changing performance (changing display) of the left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R starts at the same timing, they are displayed as stopped at the same timing.

Specifically, when the variable performance (variable display) of the left decorative pattern 8L of the number "4" displayed in a stopped state in Fig. 62(E) starts, the left decorative pattern 8L emits light, and the number "5" following the number "4" of the left decorative pattern 8L displayed in a stopped state in Fig. 62(E) appears opaque and is not displayed as a stopped left decorative pattern 8L in Fig. 62(F), and a random number "6" appears opaque and is displayed as a stopped left decorative pattern. Furthermore, the size of the left decorative pattern 8L displayed in a provisional stopped state and a stopped state in Fig. 62(F) is slightly smaller than the size of the left decorative pattern 8L of the number "4" displayed in a stopped state in Fig. 62(E), but is larger than the normal size of the number pattern. Furthermore, the position of the left decorative pattern 8L of the number "4" displayed in FIG. 62(E) is the lower side of the left variable display area 8Lr, whereas the position of the left decorative pattern 8L of the number "6" displayed in FIG. 62(F) after the variable performance (variable display) is started is the center of the left variable display area 8Lr, not the lower side. Furthermore, the inclination of the left decorative pattern 8L displayed in the temporary stop display and the stopped display in FIG. 62(E) is such that the vertical lines passing through the midpoints of the upper and lower sides of the left decorative pattern 8L are parallel to the vertical direction in which the reel rotates, whereas the inclination of the left decorative pattern 8L displayed in the temporary stop display and the stopped display in FIG. 62(F) is such that the vertical lines passing through the midpoints of the upper and lower sides of the left decorative pattern 8L are greatly tilted counterclockwise with respect to the vertical direction in which the reel rotates, and the left decorative pattern 8L is greatly tilted to the left.

When the variable performance (variable display) of the right decorative pattern 8R of the number "5" displayed in Fig. 62(E) starts, the right decorative pattern 8R emits light, and the number "6" following the number "5" of the right decorative pattern 8R displayed in Fig. 62(E) becomes opaque and is not displayed as the right decorative pattern 8R in Fig. 62(F), and a random number "8" appears opaque and is displayed as a stopped pattern. Furthermore, the size of the right decorative pattern 8R displayed in Fig. 62(F) as a provisional stop display and a stopped display is considerably smaller than the size of the right decorative pattern 8R of the number "5" displayed in Fig. 62(E), and is slightly smaller than the normal size of the number pattern. Furthermore, the position of the right decorative pattern 8R of the number "5" displayed in the stopped state in Fig. 62(E) is near the upper center of the right variable display area 8Rr, whereas the position of the right decorative pattern 8R of the number "8" displayed in the stopped state in Fig. 62(F) after the variable performance (variable display) is started is not near the upper center of the right variable display area 8Rr but is slightly to the upper left of the center of the right variable display area 8Rr. Furthermore, the inclination of the right decorative pattern 8R displayed in the provisional stop display and the stopped state in Fig. 62(E) is such that the vertical lines passing through the midpoints of the upper and lower sides of the right decorative pattern 8R are greatly inclined counterclockwise with respect to the vertical direction in which the reel rotates, and the right decorative pattern 8R is greatly inclined to the left, whereas the inclination of the right decorative pattern 8R displayed in the provisional stop display and the stopped state in Fig. 62(F) is such that the vertical lines passing through the midpoints of the upper and lower sides of the right decorative pattern 8R are parallel to the vertical direction in which the reel rotates.

When the moving effect (variable display) of the central decorative pattern 8C of the number "1" displayed in a stopped state in Fig. 62(E) starts, the central decorative pattern 8C emits light, and the number "2" following the number "1" of the central decorative pattern 8C displayed in a stopped state in Fig. 62(E) appears opaque and is not displayed as a stopped central decorative pattern 8C in Fig. 62(F), and a random number "8" appears opaque and is displayed as a stopped central decorative pattern. Furthermore, the size of the central decorative pattern 8C displayed in a provisionally stopped state and as a stopped central decorative pattern in Fig. 62(F) is considerably larger than the size of the central decorative pattern 8C of the number "1" displayed in a provisionally stopped state and as a stopped central decorative pattern in Fig. 62(E), and is larger than the size of the left decorative pattern 8L. Furthermore, the position of the central decorative pattern 8C of the number "1" displayed in the stopped state in Fig. 62(E) is slightly to the left of the center of the central variable display area 8Cr, whereas the position of the central decorative pattern 8C of the number "8" displayed in the stopped state in Fig. 62(F) after the variable performance (variable display) is started is not slightly to the left of the center of the central variable display area 8Cr but is on the upper right side of the central variable display area 8Cr, and a part of the upper side of the central decorative pattern 8C of the number "8" jumps out from the upper side of the central variable display area 8Cr and is difficult to see, and the right side of the central decorative pattern 8C of the number "8" jumps over the right side of the central variable display area 8Cr and straddles the right variable display area 8Rr. Therefore, a part of the central decorative pattern 8C of the number "8" and the right decorative pattern 8R of the number "8" overlap. In other words, the central decorative pattern 8C of the number "8" is displayed in the direction in which the right decorative pattern 8R of the number "8" is changed (changed display) (the direction in which the right decorative pattern 8R changes toward the bottom of the right change display area 8Rr (the direction of progress)) (the right decorative pattern 8R of the number "8" is displayed in the direction in which the central decorative pattern 8C of the number "8" is changed (the direction in which the central decorative pattern 8C changes toward the bottom of the central change display area 8Cr (the direction of progress))). Here, since the size of the central decorative pattern 8C is larger than the size of the right decorative pattern 8R, the central decorative pattern 8C of the number "8" which is larger in size is arranged in front of the right decorative pattern 8R of the number "8", and the central decorative pattern 8C of the number "8" covers a part of the right decorative pattern 8R of the number "8". Furthermore, in FIG. 62(E), the inclination of the central decorative pattern 8C displayed as a temporary stop and a stopped state is such that the vertical lines passing through the midpoints of the upper and lower sides of the central decorative pattern 8C are tilted slightly counterclockwise with respect to the up-down direction in which the reels spin, and the central decorative pattern 8R is tilted slightly to the left, whereas in FIG. 62(F), the inclination of the central decorative pattern 8C displayed as a temporary stop and a stopped state is such that the vertical lines passing through the midpoints of the upper and lower sides of the central decorative pattern 8C are tilted slightly clockwise with respect to the up-down direction in which the reels spin, and the central decorative pattern 8C is tilted slightly to the right.

When the predetermined number (10 times) + 2 times (i.e. 12 times) of variable performance (variable display) ends and then the predetermined number (10 times) + 3 times (i.e. 13 times) of variable performance (variable display) starts, as shown in Figure 62 (G), the left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R each emit light, and the variable performance (variable display) is performed so that the reels rotate downward in the corresponding left variable display area 8Lr, middle variable display area 8Cr, and right variable display area 8Rr, and the counter image CNT is updated to "102 remaining" and displayed.

At this time, in the decorative pattern stop position indefinite performance C, the left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R are displayed as a changing performance (changing display) in which a random number appears opaquely as the number following each decorative pattern, as described above. When the changing performance (changing display) of the left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R starts at the same timing, they are displayed as stopped at the same timing.

Specifically, when the variable performance (variable display) of the left decorative pattern 8L of the number "6" displayed in Fig. 62(F) starts, the left decorative pattern 8L emits light, and the number "7" following the number "6" of the left decorative pattern 8L displayed in Fig. 62(F) becomes opaque and is not displayed as a left decorative pattern 8L in Fig. 62(G), and a random number "1" appears opaque and is displayed as a stopped pattern. Furthermore, the size of the left decorative pattern 8L displayed in Fig. 62(G) as a provisional stop display and a stopped display is slightly smaller than the size of the left decorative pattern 8L of the number "6" displayed in Fig. 61(F), but is larger than the normal size of the number pattern. Furthermore, the position of the left decorative pattern 8L of the number "6" displayed in a stopped state in Fig. 62(F) is the center of the left variable display area 8Lr, whereas the variable performance (variable display) is started and the position of the left decorative pattern 8L of the number "1" displayed in a stopped state in Fig. 62(G) is not the center of the left variable display area 8Lr but the upper left side of the left variable display area 8Lr, and a part of the upper side of the left decorative pattern 8L protrudes from the upper edge of the left variable display area 8Lr and is difficult to see. Although the reserved number display area HS is provided on the upper left side of the left variable display area 8Lr, since the left variable display area 8Lr is positioned on the front side, a part of the left decorative pattern 8L of the number "1" is covered by the reserved number display area HS. Furthermore, in FIG. 62(F), the inclination of the left decorative pattern 8L displayed as a temporary stop and a stopped stop is such that the vertical lines passing through the midpoints of the upper and lower sides of the left decorative pattern 8L are tilted significantly counterclockwise with respect to the up-down direction in which the reel spins, with the left decorative pattern 8L tilted significantly to the left, whereas in FIG. 62(G), the inclination of the left decorative pattern 8L displayed as a temporary stop and a stopped stop is such that the vertical lines passing through the midpoints of the upper and lower sides of the left decorative pattern 8L are tilted significantly clockwise with respect to the up-down direction in which the reel spins, with the left decorative pattern 8L tilted significantly to the right.

When the variable performance (variable display) of the right decorative pattern 8R of the number "8" displayed in Fig. 62(F) starts, the right decorative pattern 8R emits light, and the number "9" following the number "8" of the right decorative pattern 8R displayed in Fig. 62(F) becomes opaque and is not displayed as the right decorative pattern 8R in Fig. 62(G), and a random number "2" appears opaque and is displayed as a stopped pattern. Furthermore, the size of the right decorative pattern 8R displayed in Fig. 62(G) as a provisional stop display and a stopped display is larger than the size of the right decorative pattern 8R of the number "8" displayed in Fig. 62(F), and is slightly larger than the normal size of the number pattern. Furthermore, the position of the right decorative pattern 8R of the number "8" displayed in a stopped state in Figure 62 (F) is slightly to the upper left of the center of the right variable display area 8Rr, whereas after the variable performance (variable display) starts, the position of the right decorative pattern 8R of the number "2" displayed in a stopped state in Figure 62 (G) is not slightly to the upper left of the center of the right variable display area 8Rr but to the lower right of the right variable display area 8Rr, and part of the lower side of the right decorative pattern 8R protrudes from the bottom edge of the right variable display area 8Rr, making it difficult to see. Furthermore, in FIG. 62(F), the inclination of the right decorative pattern 8R that is temporarily stopped and stopped is such that the vertical lines passing through the midpoints of the top and bottom edges of the right decorative pattern 8R are parallel to the up-down direction in which the reel spins, whereas in FIG. 62(G), the inclination of the right decorative pattern 8R that is temporarily stopped and stopped is such that the vertical lines passing through the midpoints of the top and bottom edges of the right decorative pattern 8R are slightly tilted counterclockwise with respect to the up-down direction in which the reel spins, causing the right decorative pattern 8R to be tilted slightly to the left.

When the moving effect (variable display) of the central decorative pattern 8C of the number "8" displayed in a stopped state in Fig. 62(F) starts, the central decorative pattern 8C emits light, and the number "9" following the number "8" of the central decorative pattern 8C displayed in a stopped state in Fig. 62(F) appears opaque and is not displayed as a stopped central decorative pattern 8C in Fig. 62(G), and a random number "7" appears opaque and is displayed as a stopped central decorative pattern. Furthermore, the size of the central decorative pattern 8C displayed in a provisionally stopped state and as a stopped central decorative pattern in Fig. 62(G) is slightly larger than the size of the central decorative pattern 8C of the number "8" displayed in a provisionally stopped state and as a stopped central decorative pattern in Fig. 62(F), and is larger than the size of the left decorative pattern 8L. Furthermore, the position of the central decorative pattern 8C of the number "8" displayed in a stopped state in Figure 62 (F) is on the upper right side of the central variable display area 8Cr, whereas after the variable performance (variable display) is started, the position of the central decorative pattern 8C of the number "7" displayed in a stopped state in Figure 62 (G) is not on the upper right side of the central variable display area 8Cr but on the right center side of the central variable display area 8Cr, and the central decorative pattern 8C of the number "7" jumps over the central variable display area 8Cr and straddles the right variable display area 8Rr. Furthermore, in FIG. 62(F), the inclination of the central decorative pattern 8C displayed as a temporary stop and a stopped state is such that the vertical lines passing through the midpoints of the upper and lower sides of the central decorative pattern 8C are tilted slightly clockwise with respect to the up-down direction in which the reels spin, and the right decorative pattern 8R is tilted slightly to the right, whereas in FIG. 62(G), the inclination of the central decorative pattern 8C displayed as a temporary stop and a stopped state is such that the vertical lines passing through the midpoints of the upper and lower sides of the central decorative pattern 8C are tilted significantly clockwise with respect to the up-down direction in which the reels spin, and the right decorative pattern 8R is tilted significantly to the right.

When the specified number (10 times) + 3 times (i.e. the 13th time) of changing effects (changing display) starts, the message image "Now, now..." (telop TP2) is displayed in a telop display mode, moving from the right side to the left side of the display screen 7a so that it is parallel to the top side of the display screen 7a. The telop TP2 is white.

When the predetermined number (10 times) + 3 times (i.e. 13 times) of variable performance (variable display) ends and then the predetermined number (10 times) + 4 times (i.e. 14 times) of variable performance (variable display) starts, as shown in Figure 62 (H), the left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R each emit light, and the variable performance (variable display) is performed so that the reels rotate downward in the corresponding left variable display area 8Lr, middle variable display area 8Cr, and right variable display area 8Rr, and the counter image CNT is updated to "101 remaining" and displayed.

At this time, in the decorative pattern stop position indefinite performance C, the left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R are displayed as a changing performance (changing display) in which a random number appears opaquely as the number following each decorative pattern, as described above. When the changing performance (changing display) of the left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R starts at the same timing, they are displayed as stopped at the same timing.

Specifically, when the variable performance (variable display) of the left decorative pattern 8L of the number "1" displayed in a stopped state in Fig. 62(G) starts, the left decorative pattern 8L emits light, and the number "2" following the number "1" of the left decorative pattern 8L displayed in a stopped state in Fig. 62(G) appears opaque and is not displayed as a stopped left decorative pattern 8L in Fig. 62(H), and a random number "9" appears opaque and is displayed as a stopped left decorative pattern. Furthermore, the size of the left decorative pattern 8L displayed in a provisional stopped state and as a stopped left decorative pattern in Fig. 62(H) is significantly smaller than the size of the left decorative pattern 8L of the number "1" displayed in a stopped state in Fig. 62(G), and is also smaller than the normal size of the number pattern. Furthermore, the position of the left decorative pattern 8L of the number "1" displayed in a stopped state in Figure 62 (G) is on the upper left side of the left variable display area 8Lr, whereas after the variable performance (variable display) is started, the position of the left decorative pattern 8L of the number "9" displayed in a stopped state in Figure 62 (H) is on the lower right side of the left variable display area 8Lr rather than the upper left side of the left variable display area 8Lr. Furthermore, in FIG. 62(G), the inclination of the left decorative pattern 8L displayed as a temporary stop and a stopped state is such that the vertical lines passing through the midpoints of the upper and lower sides of the left decorative pattern 8L are tilted at a large angle clockwise with respect to the up-down direction in which the reel spins, with the left decorative pattern 8L tilted significantly to the right, whereas in FIG. 62(H), the inclination of the left decorative pattern 8L displayed as a temporary stop and a stopped state is such that the vertical lines passing through the midpoints of the upper and lower sides of the left decorative pattern 8L are tilted even more clockwise with respect to the up-down direction in which the reel spins, with the left decorative pattern 8L tilted significantly to the right from the tilted state in FIG. 62(G).

When the variable performance (variable display) of the right decorative pattern 8R of the number "2" displayed in a stopped state in Fig. 62(G) starts, the right decorative pattern 8R emits light, and the number "3" following the number "2" of the right decorative pattern 8R displayed in a stopped state in Fig. 62(G) appears opaque and is not displayed as the right decorative pattern 8R in a stopped state in Fig. 62(H), and a random number "4" appears opaque and is displayed as a stopped state. Furthermore, the size of the right decorative pattern 8R displayed in a provisional stopped state and as a stopped state in Fig. 62(H) is significantly larger than the size of the right decorative pattern 8R of the number "2" displayed in a stopped state in Fig. 62(G), and is also significantly larger than the normal size of the number pattern. Furthermore, the position of the right decorative pattern 8R of the number "2" displayed in a stopped state in Figure 62 (G) is on the lower right side of the right variable display area 8Rr, whereas after the variable performance (variable display) is started, the position of the right decorative pattern 8R of the number "4" displayed in a stopped state in Figure 62 (H) is closer to the upper left side of the right variable display area 8Rr rather than the lower right side of the right variable display area 8Rr, and the right decorative pattern 8R of the number "4" jumps over the right variable display area 8Rr and straddles the middle variable display area 8Cr. Furthermore, in FIG. 61(G), the inclination of the right decorative pattern 8R that is temporarily stopped and stopped is such that the vertical lines passing through the midpoints of the upper and lower sides of the right decorative pattern 8R are tilted slightly counterclockwise with respect to the up-down direction in which the reel spins, and the right decorative pattern 8R is tilted slightly to the left, whereas in FIG. 61(H), the inclination of the right decorative pattern 8R that is temporarily stopped and stopped is such that the vertical lines passing through the midpoints of the upper and lower sides of the right decorative pattern 8R are tilted significantly counterclockwise with respect to the up-down direction in which the reel spins, and the right decorative pattern 8R is tilted significantly to the left.

When the moving effect (variable display) of the central decorative pattern 8C of the number "7" displayed in a stopped state in Fig. 62(G) starts, the central decorative pattern 8C emits light, and the number "8" following the number "7" of the central decorative pattern 8C displayed in a stopped state in Fig. 62(G) appears opaque and is not displayed as a stopped central decorative pattern 8C in Fig. 62(H), and a random number "3" appears opaque and is displayed as a stopped central decorative pattern. Furthermore, the size of the central decorative pattern 8C displayed in a provisional stop state and as a stopped state in Fig. 62(H) is smaller than the size of the central decorative pattern 8C of the number "7" displayed in a provisional stop state and as a stopped central decorative pattern in Fig. 62(G), but is larger than the normal size of the number pattern and is larger than the size of the left decorative pattern 8L. Furthermore, the position of the central decorative pattern 8C of the number "7" displayed in the stopped state in Fig. 62(G) is the center right side of the central variable display area 8Cr, whereas the position of the central decorative pattern 8C of the number "3" displayed in the stopped state in Fig. 62(H) after the variable performance (variable display) is started is not the center right side of the central variable display area 8Cr but the upper right side of the central variable display area 8Cr. Therefore, the central decorative pattern 8C of the number "3" and the right decorative pattern 8R of the number "4" partially overlap each other. In other words, the central decorative pattern 8C of the number "3" is displayed in the direction in which the right decorative pattern 8R of the number "4" is changed (changed display) (the direction in which the right decorative pattern 8R changes toward the bottom of the right variable display area 8Rr (the direction of progress)) (the right decorative pattern 8R of the number "4" is displayed in the direction in which the central decorative pattern 8C of the number "3" is changed (the direction in which the central decorative pattern 8C changes toward the bottom of the central variable display area 8Cr (the direction of progress))). Here, since the size of the right decorative pattern 8R is larger than the size of the central decorative pattern 8C, the right decorative pattern 8R of the number "4" which is larger in size is arranged in front of the central decorative pattern 8C of the number "3" in the front-back relationship between the central decorative pattern 8C of the number "3" and the right decorative pattern 8R of the number "4", and the right decorative pattern 8R of the number "4" is displayed in a manner in which it covers a part of the central decorative pattern 8C of the number "3". Furthermore, in FIG. 62(G), the inclination of the central decorative pattern 8C that is temporarily stopped and stopped is such that the vertical lines passing through the midpoints of the upper and lower sides of the central decorative pattern 8C are tilted significantly clockwise with respect to the up-down direction in which the reels spin, and the right decorative pattern 8R is tilted significantly to the right, whereas in FIG. 62(H), the inclination of the central decorative pattern 8C that is temporarily stopped and stopped is such that the vertical lines passing through the midpoints of the upper and lower sides of the central decorative pattern 8C are parallel to the up-down direction in which the reels spin.

When the specified number (10 times) + 54th (i.e. 64th) of changing effects (changing displays) begins, multiple (here, six) captions TP2, which are message images saying "Coming soon...", are displayed in a caption display format, moving from the right side to the left side of the display screen 7a so that they are parallel to the top side of the display screen 7a. The captions TP2 are rainbow colored, suggesting that the chances of a win are increasing.

As the change performance (change display) progresses and the specified number (10 times) + 54th (i.e. 64th) change performance (change display) ends, and then the specified number (10 times) + 55th (i.e. 65th) change performance (change display) begins, as shown in Figure 62 (I), the display screen 7a goes black (becomes a completely black screen), and white shining light converges toward the center of the display screen 7a and eventually disappears, just like the power to an analog TV cathode ray tube has been turned off. At this time, the contents of the reserved number display area HS and the sub-change area KSZ remain displayed. In other words, in the sub-change area KSZ, the change performance (change display) continues with the small left decorative pattern, small middle decorative pattern, and small right decorative pattern.

After that, as shown in FIG. 62(J), the left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R appear as the number "7" in the center of the corresponding left variable display area 8Lr, middle variable display area 8Cr, and right variable display area 8Rr, respectively, and are temporarily stopped in a line on the same horizontal line, and then displayed as a fixed display indicating that the winning result is a win, and the winning game begins. Note that when a winning result is announced as a winning result, the left decorative pattern 8L, middle decorative pattern 8C, and right decorative pattern 8R are displayed as a fixed display (fixed display), and at the same time, in the sub-variable area KSZ, the small left decorative pattern, small middle decorative pattern, and small right decorative pattern are also displayed as a fixed display (fixed display) with the number "7", which is the same number (number pattern) as the left decorative pattern 8L, middle decorative pattern 8C, and right decorative pattern 8R.

After that, when the winning game ends, A mode is forcibly ended at this point, and the decorative pattern stop position indefinite presentation C is also ended. When returning to the game mode in the normal game state, a variable presentation (variable display) will be performed with the left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R, as shown in Figures 62 (A) and (B).

In the decorative pattern stop position indefinite performance C, the performance in the case of "no reach and miss" is shown from Figure 62 (C) to Figure 62 (H), but in the case of "reach and miss", the left decorative pattern 8L and the right decorative pattern 8R are not temporarily stopped side by side on the same horizontal line, the display screen 7a goes black (becomes a completely black screen), and white shining light converges toward the center of the display screen 7a and then disappears, like the power to the cathode ray tube of an analog television is turned off. At this time, the contents of the reserved number display area HS and the sub-variable area KSZ are maintained in the displayed state. In other words, in the sub-variable area KSZ, the variable performance (variable display) of the small left decorative pattern, small middle decorative pattern, and small right decorative pattern continues. This state is maintained until the time arrives to notify the result of the lottery (miss). Then, when the time to announce the winning or losing result (losing) comes, as shown in Figures 62(C) to 62(H), the left decorative pattern 8L, the center decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R change appearance (changing display) as described above, with random numbers appearing opaquely as the number following each decorative pattern, and stopping and displaying at the same timing.

In decorative pattern stop position indefinite performance C, the longer the period during which the display screen 7a is blacked out (the period during which the screen is completely black), the higher the expectation of a win becomes. Therefore, even though the display screen 7a is a monotonous blacked-out screen (a completely black screen), it is possible to heighten and excite the player's sense of expectation.

In this way, in the decorative pattern stop position indefinite performance C, the stop positions of the left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R can change randomly (irregularly) each time the left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R stop in a definite manner. At this time, when one decorative pattern and another decorative pattern are displayed overlapping among the left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R, for example, in the positional relationship between the middle decorative pattern 8C and the right decorative pattern 8R among the left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R, when the middle decorative pattern 8C and the right decorative pattern 8R in FIG. 62(F) are displayed overlapping, the middle decorative pattern 8C, which is larger, is positioned in front of the right decorative pattern 8R, resulting in a display mode in which the middle decorative pattern 8C, which is larger, covers a part of the right decorative pattern 8R, whereas when the middle decorative pattern 8C and the right decorative pattern 8R in FIG. 62(H) are displayed overlapping, the right decorative pattern 8R, which is larger, is positioned in front of the middle decorative pattern 8C, resulting in a display mode in which the right decorative pattern 8R, which is larger, covers a part of the middle decorative pattern 8C. For this reason, in the decorative pattern stop position undefined performance C, the stop positions of the left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R change randomly (irregularly) each time the left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R are fixedly stopped, and the positional relationship (front-to-back relationship) between the middle decorative pattern 8C and the right decorative pattern 8R also changes randomly (irregularly) so that the larger decorative pattern is at the front, so that the variation in the left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R can be increased. This can contribute to suppressing a decrease in the player's desire to play the decorative pattern stop position undefined performance C.

Furthermore, in the decorative pattern stop position indefinite performance C, the sizes of the left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R can also change randomly (irregularly) each time the left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R are fixedly stopped. Therefore, in the decorative pattern stop position indefinite performance C, there is a wide variety of variations in the change performance (change display) of the left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R, which can further contribute to suppressing a decrease in the player's motivation to play in the decorative pattern stop position indefinite performance C.

Furthermore, in the decorative pattern stop position indefinite performance C, the inclination of the left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R can also change randomly (irregularly) each time the left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R are fixedly stopped. Therefore, in the decorative pattern stop position indefinite performance C, there is an even greater variety in the change performance (change display) of the left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R, which can further contribute to suppressing the decrease in the player's motivation to play with the decorative pattern stop position indefinite performance C.

[Example of effect]
Below is an example of the effect of the decorative pattern stopping position indefinite presentation.
[Effect 1]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, for example, in the decorative pattern stop position undefined performance A of FIG. 60, the decorative pattern stop position undefined performance B of FIG. 61, and the decorative pattern stop position undefined performance C of FIG. 62, an image display device 7 (display means) is provided that can perform a variable performance (variable display) of the left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R (multiple patterns), and a first performance (FIGS. 60(C) to (J) for decorative pattern stop position undefined performance A, FIGS. 61(C) to (J) for decorative pattern stop position undefined performance B, and FIGS. 62(C) to (H) for decorative pattern stop position undefined performance C) in which the stop positions of the left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R (each pattern) change randomly (irregularly) for each fixed stop (fixed stop of the patterns) of the left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R can be executed. According to this configuration, in the first performance, the stop positions of the left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R can be changed randomly (irregularly) every time the left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R are fixed, which contributes to eliminating monotony in the variable performance (variable display) of the left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R. Therefore, it is possible to improve the interest.

[Effect 2]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, for example, the first effect in the decorative pattern stop position uncertain effect B in Figure 61 and the decorative pattern stop position uncertain effect C in Figure 62 (Figures 61 (D) to (J) for decorative pattern stop position uncertain effect B, and Figures 62 (D) to (H) for decorative pattern stop position uncertain effect C) includes an effect in which the size of each pattern changes randomly (irregularly) each time the left decorative pattern 8L, middle decorative pattern 8C, and right decorative pattern 8R (patterns) are fixedly stopped. According to this configuration, the sizes of the left decorative pattern 8L, middle decorative pattern 8C, and right decorative pattern 8R that were previously determined and stopped, and the sizes of the left decorative pattern 8L, middle decorative pattern 8C, and right decorative pattern 8R that are currently determined and stopped are each changed randomly (irregularly). Therefore, by displaying the large decorative pattern (design) in an emphasized and conspicuous manner, the player can be given the feeling that the history of the large decorative pattern (design) thus far may be some kind of hint for the performance that is about to begin, which can contribute to the player coming up with his or her own ideas about the rules of the performance.

[Effect 3]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, for example, the first effect in the decorative pattern stop position uncertain effect B in Figure 61 and the decorative pattern stop position uncertain effect C in Figure 62 (Figures 61 (D) to (J) in the decorative pattern stop position uncertain effect B, and Figures 62 (D) to (H) in the decorative pattern stop position uncertain effect C) includes an effect in which the inclination of each pattern changes irregularly each time the left decorative pattern 8L, middle decorative pattern 8C, and right decorative pattern 8R (patterns) are fixedly stopped. According to this configuration, the inclination of the left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R that were previously determined and stopped, and the inclination of the left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R that were currently determined and stopped are each changed randomly (irregularly). Therefore, for example, the history of the inclination of the left decorative pattern 8L (pattern) may give the player the feeling that it may be some kind of hint for the performance that is about to begin, which can contribute to the player coming up with his own ideas about the rules of the performance.

[Effect 4]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, for example, the first effect in the decorative pattern stop position uncertain effect A in Figure 60, the decorative pattern stop position uncertain effect B in Figure 61, and the decorative pattern stop position uncertain effect C in Figure 62 (Figures 60 (F), (H) to (J) for decorative pattern stop position uncertain effect A, Figures 61 (F), (H) to (J) for decorative pattern stop position uncertain effect B, and Figures 62 (F) and (H) for decorative pattern stop position uncertain effect C) includes an effect in which one pattern is displayed overlapping another pattern when the left decorative pattern 8L, middle decorative pattern 8C, and right decorative pattern 8R (patterns) are stopped at a fixed point. According to this configuration, for example, the middle decorative pattern 8C and the right decorative pattern 8R are displayed so as to overlap, and therefore there is absolutely no idea of making the confirmed displayed pattern easier to see as in the past, and a new and innovative confirmed display of the decorative pattern (design) can be achieved, and even if the decorative pattern (design) is repeatedly changed (changed display) and the confirmed display (as a winning or losing result) shows repeated losses, this contributes to making the player less likely to feel monotonous.

[Effect 5]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, for example, the first effect in the decorative pattern stop position uncertain effect A in Figure 60, the decorative pattern stop position uncertain effect B in Figure 61, and the decorative pattern stop position uncertain effect C in Figure 62 (Figures 60 (F), (H) to (J) for decorative pattern stop position uncertain effect A, Figures 61 (F), (H) to (J) for decorative pattern stop position uncertain effect B, and Figures 62 (F) and (H) for decorative pattern stop position uncertain effect C) includes an effect in which one pattern is displayed in the direction of progression of another pattern when the left decorative pattern 8L, middle decorative pattern 8C, and right decorative pattern 8R (patterns) are stopped at a fixed point. Specifically, for example, in the decorative pattern stop position undefined performance A in Fig. 60 (F), the decorative pattern stop position undefined performance B in Fig. 61 (F), and the decorative pattern stop position undefined performance C in Fig. 62 (F), the center decorative pattern 8C (one pattern) is displayed in the direction of movement of the right decorative pattern 8R (another pattern) (the direction in which the right decorative pattern 8R changes toward the lower side of the right variable display area 8Rr). According to this configuration, a display mode in which a part of one pattern and a part of another pattern overlap in the vertical direction can be achieved. Also, one pattern and another pattern can be arranged so that they are not aligned on the same horizontal line.

[Effect 6]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, for example, the first effects in the decorative pattern stop position undefined effect A in Fig. 60, the decorative pattern stop position undefined effect B in Fig. 61, and the decorative pattern stop position undefined effect C in Fig. 62 (Figs. 60(D), (E), (G), (I) in the decorative pattern stop position undefined effect A, Figs. 61(D), (E), (G), (I) in the decorative pattern stop position undefined effect B, and Figs. 62(D), (E), (G) in the decorative pattern stop position undefined effect C) include effects in which the display mode changes with each change of the same pattern. Specifically, for example, in the decorative pattern stop position undefined effect A in Figs. 60(D), (E), (G), (I), the display mode is such that the position of the number "1", which is the same pattern, changes randomly (irregularly). According to this configuration, even if the same pattern is frequently stopped by the repeated variable performance (variable display), the position of the same pattern that is stopped is changed randomly (irregularly), which can contribute to reducing the monotony of the performance by the same pattern that is stopped. Also, for example, in the decorative pattern stop position indefinite performance B of Fig. 61 (D), (E), (G), (I) and the decorative pattern stop position indefinite performance C of Fig. 62 (D), (E), (G), the display mode is such that the position, size, and inclination of the number "1", which is the same pattern, change randomly (irregularly). According to this configuration, even if the variable performance (variable display) is repeatedly performed and the same pattern is frequently stopped by the repeated variable performance, the position, size, and inclination of the same pattern that is stopped by the repeated variable performance are changed randomly (irregularly), which can contribute to reducing the monotony of the performance by the same pattern that is stopped by the repeated variable performance.

[Effect 7]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, for example, in the decorative symbol stop position variable performance A of FIG. 60, the decorative symbol stop position variable performance B of FIG. 61, and the decorative symbol stop position variable performance C of FIG. 62, the image display device 7 (display means) can display a message image MSG, a telop TP1, and a telop TP2 (multiple types of images) in addition to the left decorative symbol 8L, the center decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R (multiple patterns), and the first performance (in the decorative symbol stop position variable performance A, FIGS. 60(C) to (J), and in the decorative symbol stop position variable performance 61(C)-(J) for the output B, and 62(C)-(H) for the decorative pattern stop position indefinite performance C, include a performance in which a telop TP2 (first image) is displayed in front of the left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R (patterns) during the fluctuation and fixed stop of the left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R (patterns), and a telop TP1 (second image) is displayed in the rear of the left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R (patterns). This configuration makes it easier for the player to recognize that the telop TP2 (first image) is displayed, and the suggestion by the telop TP2 (first image) can be emphasized in an easy-to-understand manner for the player.

[Effect 8]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, for example, in the first performance in the decorative pattern stop position uncertain performance A in Figure 60, the decorative pattern stop position uncertain performance B in Figure 61, and the decorative pattern stop position uncertain performance C in Figure 62 (Figures 60 (D) to (J) in the decorative pattern stop position uncertain performance A, Figures 61 (D) to (J) in the decorative pattern stop position uncertain performance B, and Figures 62 (D) to (H) in the decorative pattern stop position uncertain performance C), the left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R (multiple patterns) are temporarily stopped at the same timing and then stopped for a definite purpose. According to this configuration, each time the left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R are changed (changed display), the left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R are temporarily stopped at the same time and then fixedly stopped. Therefore, when the left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R are changed (changed display) and fixedly displayed, the left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R are Although they are images, the left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R can give the player a sense of weight, and this sense of weight gives the player a "boom" impact when the left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R are temporarily stopped in a display mode, and the rhythmic changing performance (changing display) of the left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R can be repeated, which contributes to reducing monotony.

[Modification]
Below, a modified example of the decorative pattern stopping position indefinite effect is shown.
[Modification 1]
The decorative symbol stop position undefined performance A in Fig. 60, the decorative symbol stop position undefined performance B in Fig. 61, and the decorative symbol stop position undefined performance C in Fig. 62 are performed based on the game ball entering the first starting hole 20. In other words, they are performed in a game state of so-called left-hand hitting. However, they may be performed based on the game ball entering the second starting hole 21. In other words, they may be performed in a game state of so-called right-hand hitting.

[Modification 2]
In the decorative pattern stop position uncertain performance A in Figure 60, the decorative pattern stop position uncertain performance B in Figure 61, and the decorative pattern stop position uncertain performance C in Figure 62, these were performed when there was a transition from the game mode in the normal game state to the special game mode (A mode) in the normal game state, but the special game mode (A mode) may also be performed not in the normal game state, but when there is a transition from the normal game state to the above-mentioned b time reduction (play time).

[Modification 3]
In the decorative pattern stop position uncertain performance A in Figure 60, the decorative pattern stop position uncertain performance B in Figure 61, and the decorative pattern stop position uncertain performance C in Figure 62, one of the left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R crosses over into the variable display area corresponding to another decorative pattern, but the other decorative pattern may also be displayed in a manner in which it crosses over into the variable display area corresponding to one decorative pattern. Specifically, for example, in the decorative pattern stop position undefined performance A in Fig. 60 (F), the decorative pattern stop position undefined performance B in Fig. 61 (F), and the decorative pattern stop position undefined performance C in Fig. 62 (F), the center decorative pattern 8C of the number "8" jumps over the right side of the center variable display area 8Cr and straddles the right variable display area 8Rr, and further, the right decorative pattern 8R of the number "8" may also jump over the left side of the right variable display area 8Rr and straddle the center variable display area 8Cr. This can contribute to increasing the variety of the variable performance (variable display) of the left decorative pattern 8L, the center decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R. In addition, the middle decorative pattern 8C of the number "8" is displayed in the direction in which the right decorative pattern 8R of the number "8" is changed (displayed) (the direction (progress) in which the right decorative pattern 8R changes toward the bottom of the right changing display area 8Rr) (the right decorative pattern 8R of the number "8" is displayed in the direction in which the middle decorative pattern 8C of the number "8" is changed (displayed) (the direction (progress) in which the middle decorative pattern 8C changes toward the bottom of the middle changing display area 8Cr)).

[Modification 4]
In the decorative pattern stop position uncertain performance A in Figure 60, the decorative pattern stop position uncertain performance B in Figure 61, and the decorative pattern stop position uncertain performance C in Figure 62, the number following each decorative pattern that was stopped and displayed last time does not appear, and a random number appears opaquely as the number following each decorative pattern and is displayed as stopped. However, because it is random, the decorative pattern that is stopped and displayed this time may happen to be the same decorative pattern as the decorative pattern that was stopped and displayed last time, or the decorative pattern that is stopped and displayed this time may happen to be the decorative pattern that is one number following the decorative pattern that was stopped and displayed last time.

[Modification 5]
In the decorative pattern stop position undefined effect A in Fig. 60, the decorative pattern stop position undefined effect B in Fig. 61, and the decorative pattern stop position undefined effect C in Fig. 62, when the A mode, which is a special game mode, is started, this is the trigger for starting, in other words, it is started suddenly. Therefore, it is possible to perform an effect that suggests that the start time of the A mode is approaching. For example, it is possible to display the number of remaining variable effects (variable display) that will be the start time of the A mode as a numerical value in the upper center of the display screen 7a. Specifically, first, when the number of remaining variable performances (variable displays) that will be the start time of A mode reaches 100 times, a white message image saying "100 times more" is displayed in the upper center of the display screen 7a and then hidden; when the number of remaining variable performances (variable displays) that will be the start time of A mode reaches 50 times, a blue message image saying "50 times more" is displayed in the upper center of the display screen 7a and then hidden; when the number of remaining variable performances (variable displays) that will be the start time of A mode reaches 25 times, a yellow message image saying "25 times more" is displayed in the upper center of the display screen 7a and then hidden; and when the number of remaining variable performances (variable displays) that will be the start time of A mode reaches 10 times, a red message image saying "10 times more" is displayed in the upper center of the display screen 7a, and the red message image continues to be displayed in the upper center of the display screen 7a as it counts down with each change until A mode starts. Then, after a red message image "0 (zero) remaining" is displayed in the upper center of the display screen 7a, the red message image "0 (zero) remaining" is hidden just before a yellow (gold) message image MSG "Entering A mode" is displayed. The color of the message image indicating the remaining number of variable performances (variable displays) until the start of A mode changes in the order of white → blue → yellow → red as the start of A mode approaches, so that the player's expectations for A mode can be aroused.

[Modification 6]
In the decorative pattern stop position undefined performance B in Fig. 61 and the decorative pattern stop position undefined performance C in Fig. 62, the stop positions of the left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R change randomly (irregularly) every time the left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R are fixed, and further, the size of the left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R and the inclination of the stop positions of the left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R change randomly (irregularly). However, the stop positions of the left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R and the size of the left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R may be changed randomly (irregularly) every time the left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R are fixed. This helps to eliminate monotony in the changing presentation (changing display) of the left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R.

[Modification 7]
In the decorative pattern stop position undefined performance B in Fig. 61 and the decorative pattern stop position undefined performance C in Fig. 62, the stop positions of the left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R change randomly (irregularly) every time the left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R are fixed, and further, the size of the left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R and the inclination of the stop positions of the left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R change randomly (irregularly). However, the stop positions of the left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R and the inclination of the left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R may be changed randomly (irregularly) every time the left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R are fixed. This helps to eliminate monotony in the changing presentation (changing display) of the left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R.

[Modification 8]
In the decorative pattern stop position undefined performance A in Fig. 60, the decorative pattern stop position undefined performance B in Fig. 61, and the decorative pattern stop position undefined performance C in Fig. 62, since the display mode of the reserved icon 9A cannot be changed by the pre-reading performance to suggest the expectation of a jackpot, the display mode of the telop TP2 can be changed in various ways to suggest the expectation of a jackpot. For example, the reserved icon 9A is a smiling sphere icon, and the expectation of a jackpot is set to be high in the order of blue → green → red → gold (yellow) → seven colors (rainbow (high probability of a jackpot)). Therefore, the expectation of a jackpot may be set to be high in the order of blue → green → red → gold (yellow) → seven colors (rainbow (high probability of a jackpot)) as the colors of the telop TP2 by the pre-reading performance.

[Modification 9]
In the decorative pattern stop position uncertain performance A in Figure 60, the decorative pattern stop position uncertain performance B in Figure 61, and the decorative pattern stop position uncertain performance C in Figure 62, three vertically long rectangular areas (i.e., areas obtained by dividing the display screen 7a into three equal rows) are provided on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 as variable display areas for the three decorative patterns (variable display areas of the decorative patterns), and the decorative pattern variable performance (variable display) is started in a display mode in which the left decorative pattern 8L is rotated from the upper side of the left variable display area 8Lr toward the lower side of the left variable display area 8Lr, the decorative pattern variable performance (variable display) is started in a display mode in which the middle decorative pattern 8C is rotated from the upper side of the middle variable display area 8Cr toward the lower side of the middle variable display area 8Cr, and the decorative pattern variable performance (variable display) is started in a display mode in which the right decorative pattern 8R is rotated from the upper side of the right variable display area 8Rr toward the lower side of the right variable display area 8Rr. However, the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 may be provided with three horizontally elongated rectangular areas (i.e., areas dividing the display screen 7a into three equal rows) as variable display areas for the three decorative patterns (variable areas for decorative patterns).

In this case, the decorative pattern change performance (changing display) begins with the left decorative pattern 8L as the upper decorative pattern, in a display mode in which the reel rotates from the right side of the upper changing display area to the left side of the upper changing display area, and is then temporarily stopped in the center of the upper changing display area and then displayed as stopped, the decorative pattern change performance (changing display) begins with the middle decorative pattern 8C as the middle decorative pattern, in a display mode in which the reel rotates from the right side of the middle changing display area to the left side of the middle changing display area, and is then temporarily stopped in the center of the middle changing display area and then displayed as stopped, and the decorative pattern change performance (changing display) begins with the right decorative pattern 8R as the lower decorative pattern, in a display mode in which the reel rotates from the right side of the lower changing display area to the left side of the lower changing display area, and is then temporarily stopped in the center of the lower changing display area and then displayed as stopped. Also, for example, a part of the upper decorative pattern may jump out from the upper variation display area to the middle variation display area and be displayed stationary across the upper variation display area and the middle variation display area, a part of the middle decorative pattern may jump out from the middle variation display area to the upper variation display area and be displayed stationary across the middle variation display area and the upper variation display area, or a part of the middle decorative pattern may jump out from the middle variation display area to the lower variation display area and be displayed stationary across the middle variation display area and the lower variation display area, and a part of the lower decorative pattern may jump out from the lower variation display area to the middle variation display area and be displayed stationary across the lower variation display area and the middle variation display area. Of course, a part of the upper decorative pattern may jump out from the right side, upper side, or left side of the upper variation display area and be difficult to see, a part of the middle decorative pattern may jump out from the right side or left side of the middle variation display area and be difficult to see, and a part of the lower decorative pattern may jump out from the right side, lower side, or left side of the lower variation display area and be difficult to see.

[Modification 10]
In the first performance in the decorative pattern stop position undefined performance A in FIG. 60, the decorative pattern stop position undefined performance B in FIG. 61, and the decorative pattern stop position undefined performance C in FIG. 62, the stop positions of the left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R can be changed randomly (irregularly) every time the left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R are fixedly stopped. At this time, various effect sounds (various sound effects) and performance sounds may suddenly be muted, and the first performance may proceed across multiple variations. In this way, it is possible to create a sense of incongruity due to the muted state, and the longer this state continues (the longer it is), the higher the expectation of a win becomes, and this can contribute to reducing the monotony of the variable performance (variable display) of the left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R.

[Modification 11]
In the first performance in the decorative pattern stop position undefined performance A in Fig. 60, the decorative pattern stop position undefined performance B in Fig. 61, and the decorative pattern stop position undefined performance C in Fig. 62, the stop positions of the left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R can be changed randomly (irregularly) every time the left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R are fixed. However, it is also possible to have a performance in which two decorative patterns among the left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R are stopped and displayed side by side on the same horizontal line, and the remaining one decorative pattern is not stopped and displayed on this same horizontal line, or such a performance may be included. For example, when the left decorative pattern 8L and the middle decorative pattern 8C are stopped and displayed side by side on the same horizontal line, the right decorative pattern 8R is not stopped and displayed on this same horizontal line. When the left decorative pattern 8L and the right decorative pattern 8R are displayed side by side on the same horizontal line, the middle decorative pattern 8C is not displayed on the same horizontal line. When the middle decorative pattern 8C and the right decorative pattern 8R are displayed side by side on the same horizontal line, the left decorative pattern 8L is not displayed on the same horizontal line. In addition, when two decorative patterns among the left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R are displayed side by side on the same horizontal line, they may be arranged on the left side, center, or right side of each variable display area on the same horizontal line in each variable table area where the two decorative patterns are displayed as long as they are on the same horizontal line. For example, when the left decorative pattern 8L and the middle decorative pattern 8C are displayed side by side on the upper side of the display screen 7a as the same horizontal line, the left decorative pattern 8L is arranged and displayed on the upper right side of the left variable display area 8Lr, and the middle decorative pattern 8C is arranged and displayed on the upper left side of the middle variable display area 8Cr.

[Modification 12]
In the first performance in the decorative pattern stop position undefined performance B in FIG. 61 and the decorative pattern stop position undefined performance C in FIG. 62, the inclination of each of the left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R (patterns) can be changed irregularly every time the pattern is fixed. However, two of the left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R may be stopped and displayed at the same inclination, and the remaining one decorative pattern may be stopped and displayed at a different inclination from the same inclination, or such a performance may be included. For example, as an example in which the rotation directions are completely different, the left decorative pattern 8L and the middle decorative pattern 8C are stopped and displayed at a slightly inclined angle by rotating counterclockwise, and the left decorative pattern 8L and the middle decorative pattern 8C are stopped and displayed at a slightly inclined angle to the left, and the right decorative pattern 8R is stopped and displayed at a slightly inclined angle by rotating clockwise, which is different from the same inclination. As another example, the rotation direction is the same but the inclination is different, as the left decorative pattern 8L and the right decorative pattern 8R rotate significantly clockwise to an angle of inclination, and the left decorative pattern 8L and the right decorative pattern 8R are displayed stopped in a state where they are significantly inclined to the right, and the middle decorative pattern 8C is displayed at an angle where it is slightly rotated clockwise and inclined to the right, which is a different inclination from the same inclination.

[Modification 13]
In the decorative pattern stop position uncertain performance A in Figure 60, the decorative pattern stop position uncertain performance B in Figure 61, and the decorative pattern stop position uncertain performance C in Figure 62, when the left decorative pattern 8L, middle decorative pattern 8C, and right decorative pattern 8R jump out of their own variable display area (left variable display area 8Lr, middle variable display area 8Cr, right variable display area 8Rr) and are temporarily stopped (stopped) in a state where they straddle other variable display areas, and overlap in the front-to-back direction with part of a decorative pattern that is temporarily stopped (stopped) in the other variable display area, the positional relationship (front-to-back relationship) changes randomly (irregularly). However, when the left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R are temporarily stopped (stopped) in a state where they jump over their own variable display area (left variable display area 8Lr, middle variable display area 8Cr, right variable display area 8Rr) and straddle over to another variable display area, the decorative pattern that is temporarily stopped (stopped) across their own variable display area and the other variable display area may be positioned in front of the decorative pattern that is temporarily stopped (stopped) in the other variable display area. In other words, when the left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, or the right decorative pattern 8R is temporarily stopped (stopped) while jumping over its own variable display area (left variable display area 8Lr, middle variable display area 8Cr, right variable display area 8Rr) and straddling into another variable display area, the decorative pattern temporarily stopped (stopped) across its own variable display area and the other variable display area may be displayed in a manner that covers a portion of the decorative pattern temporarily stopped (stopped) in the other variable display area.

[Modification 14]
In the decorative pattern stop position uncertain performance B in Figure 61 and the decorative pattern stop position uncertain performance C in Figure 62, when the left decorative pattern 8L, middle decorative pattern 8C, and right decorative pattern 8R are temporarily stopped (stopped) while jumping over their own variable display area (left variable display area 8Lr, middle variable display area 8Cr, right variable display area 8Rr) and straddling into another variable display area, and overlap in the front-to-back direction with a part of a decorative pattern temporarily stopped (stopped) in the other variable display area, the display mode is such that the larger decorative pattern is positioned forward in terms of the positional relationship (front-to-back relationship). However, when the left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R are temporarily stopped (stopped) while jumping over their own variable display area (left variable display area 8Lr, middle variable display area 8Cr, right variable display area 8Rr) and straddling into another variable display area, the size of the decorative pattern temporarily stopped (stopped) across their own variable display area and the other variable display area may be compared with the size of the decorative pattern temporarily stopped (stopped) in the other variable display area, and the smaller decorative pattern may be placed forward. In other words, when the left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R are temporarily stopped (stopped) while jumping over their own variable display area (left variable display area 8Lr, middle variable display area 8Cr, right variable display area 8Rr) and straddling into another variable display area, when the decorative pattern temporarily stopped (stopped) straddling their own variable display area and the other variable display area overlaps with the decorative pattern temporarily stopped (stopped) in the other variable display area, the smaller decorative pattern may be positioned in front of the larger decorative pattern and cover part of the larger decorative pattern.

[Modification 15]
In the decorative pattern stopping position uncertain performance A in Figure 60, the decorative pattern stopping position uncertain performance B in Figure 61, and the decorative pattern stopping position uncertain performance C in Figure 62, some of the performances described may not be included, or other performances may be added.

[Example of embodiment]
In the gaming machine of this embodiment, the following aspects can be realized.
◇[Aspect A4-1]
A gaming machine having a display means capable of variably displaying a plurality of symbols,
A first effect can be executed in which the stop positions of the symbols change irregularly each time the symbols are determined to stop.
A gaming machine characterized by:

◇ [Aspect A4-2]
The gaming machine according to Aspect A4-1,
The first effect includes an effect in which the size of each symbol changes irregularly every time the symbol is determined and stopped.
A gaming machine characterized by:

◇[Aspect A4-3]
A gaming machine according to aspect A4-1 or A4-2,
The first effect includes an effect in which the inclination of each symbol changes irregularly each time the symbol is determined and stopped.
A gaming machine characterized by:

◇[Aspect A4-4]
A gaming machine according to any one of Aspects A4-1 to A4-3,
The first effect includes an effect in which one symbol is displayed overlapping with another symbol when the symbols are fixed and stopped.
A gaming machine characterized by:

◇[Aspect A4-5]
A gaming machine according to any one of Aspects A4-1 to A4-4,
The first effect includes an effect in which one symbol is displayed in the direction of progression of another symbol when the symbols are fixed and stopped.
A gaming machine characterized by:

◇[Aspect A4-6]
A gaming machine according to any one of Aspects A4-1 to A4-5,
The first effect includes an effect in which the display mode of the same pattern changes with each change,
A gaming machine characterized by:

◇[Aspect A4-7]
A gaming machine according to any one of Aspects A4-1 to A4-6,
The display means is capable of displaying a plurality of types of images in addition to the plurality of patterns,
The first effect includes an effect of moving a first image in front of the pattern during the variation of the pattern and when the pattern is fixed and stopped, and moving a second image behind the pattern.
A gaming machine characterized by:

◇[Aspect A4-8]
A gaming machine according to any one of Aspects A4-1 to A4-7,
The first performance includes temporarily stopping the plurality of symbols at the same timing and then determining the stop.
A gaming machine characterized by:

The decorative pattern sudden confirmation stop performances A to C are explained below using Figures 63 to 65. This decorative pattern sudden confirmation stop performance is executed during the decorative pattern variation performance, etc. In other words, the image control microcomputer 101 analyzes the command received from the sub-control board 90, and if it contains an instruction to execute the decorative pattern sudden confirmation stop performance, it reads out the corresponding image data from the ROM 103 and displays the image on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 and the sub-display screen 64 (right sub-display screen 64R, left sub-display screen 64L, and upper sub-display screen 64U). It also reads out the corresponding drive data from the ROM 103 and drives the first movable role piece 14.

[Decorative pattern sudden confirmation stop effect A]
FIG. 63 is a diagram for explaining the decoration pattern sudden confirmation stop performance A. The decoration pattern sudden confirmation stop performance is a performance in which a set of decoration patterns is displayed as stopped (confirmed stop) in a winning state without being displayed in a reach state. In the decoration pattern sudden confirmation stop performance A, first, as shown in FIG. 63 (A), the display screen 7a displays the decoration patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R that are stopped (confirmed stop). Here, the display of the reserved icon 9A and the variable icon (reserved icon) 9C is omitted. The reserved icon 9A and the variable icon (reserved icon) 9C may or may not be displayed.

The decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R are a set of patterns including a left decorative pattern 8L, a middle decorative pattern 8C, and a right decorative pattern 8R displayed approximately in the center of the display screen 7a, and the variable display of the set of patterns represents the variable display of the special pattern (special pattern variation), and the static display of the set of patterns notifies the result of the special pattern selection. The special pattern here may be either the first special pattern or the second special pattern. The decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R are statically displayed at "234." Here, it is assumed that the game state is normal (low probability low base state), and that the reserved consumption of special pattern 1 has started, and that the special pattern 1 variation will now be executed. It is also assumed here that the lottery result of this special pattern 1 is a jackpot, and that the variation pattern corresponding to the jackpot has been selected.

As shown in FIG. 63(B), the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R are displayed to change in response to the current special pattern change (the change in question). Here, the change in the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R is displayed so that the left, center, and right patterns each move from top to bottom. Here, the patterns are not visible because they are moving at high speed. The change in the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R may be any change. For example, the left, center, and right patterns may each be displayed to rotate horizontally around the vertical axis.

As shown in Fig. 63(C)(D), when a predetermined time has elapsed since the start of the variable display of the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R, a performance is executed in which a set of decorative patterns 8l, 8c, and 8r different from the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R frame in while the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R are variable. The decorative patterns 8l, 8c, and 8r have the same shape and size as the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R, and the left decorative pattern 8l, the middle decorative pattern 8c, and the right decorative pattern 8r move toward the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R from different directions. The left decorative pattern 8l, the middle decorative pattern 8c, and the right decorative pattern 8r are the same pattern, and are "7" in this case. The shape and size of the decorative patterns 8l, 8c, and 8r are the same as those of the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R, but may be different.

The left decorative pattern 8l frames in from the left edge of the display screen 7a toward the right, overlaps with the variably displayed left decorative pattern 8L, and is displayed in front of the left decorative pattern 8L. The middle decorative pattern 8c frames in from the bottom edge of the display screen 7a toward the top, overlaps with the variably displayed middle decorative pattern 8C, and is displayed in front of the middle decorative pattern 8C. The right decorative pattern 8r frames in from the right edge of the display screen 7a toward the left, overlaps with the variably displayed right decorative pattern 8R, and is displayed in front of the right decorative pattern 8R.

As shown in FIG. 63(E), the left decorative pattern 8l, the middle decorative pattern 8c, and the right decorative pattern 8r stop in a horizontal line, and at the same time, the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R that were being displayed in a variable manner disappear at almost the same time. As a result, the decorative patterns 8l, 8c, and 8r are displayed in a stopped state (determined stop) at "777", and then the big win performance is executed. In this way, in the decorative pattern sudden definite stop performance A, after the special pattern starts to change, the set of decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R are displayed in a variable manner, and then are not displayed in a reach state, but rather the set of decorative patterns 8l, 8c, and 8r are displayed in a stopped state in a big win state, which takes the player by surprise and increases the interest.

Figures 63(F) to 63(J) are other examples of the decorative pattern sudden confirmation stop effect A described in Figures 63(A) to 63(E). In Figures 63(F) to 63(J), when the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R are displayed as stopped, an effect is executed in which decorative patterns 8l, 8c, and 8r, which are different from the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R, come into the frame.

Figure 63 (F) shows the same state as Figure 63 (A). That is, the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are displayed on the display screen 7a as stopped (confirmed) at "234."

In FIG. 63(G), even though the special pattern change has started due to the consumption of the reserved special pattern 1, the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R are maintained as still patterns without corresponding to the current special pattern change (the change in question). In other words, the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R that were displayed as still patterns in response to the previous special pattern change are maintained during the change in question.

As shown in FIG. 63(H)(I), when a predetermined time has elapsed since the start of the current special pattern change (the change in question), a performance is executed in which a set of decorative patterns 8l, 8c, and 8r different from the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R frame in while the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R are displayed as stopped. The decorative patterns 8l, 8c, and 8r have the same shape and size as the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R, and the left decorative pattern 8l, the middle decorative pattern 8c, and the right decorative pattern 8r move toward the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R from different directions. The left decorative pattern 8l, the middle decorative pattern 8c, and the right decorative pattern 8r are the same pattern, and in this case, they are "7". The shape and size of the decorative patterns 8l, 8c, and 8r are the same as those of the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R, but they may be different.

The left decorative pattern 8l frames in from the left edge of the display screen 7a toward the right, overlaps with the variably displayed left decorative pattern 8L, and is displayed in front of the left decorative pattern 8L. The middle decorative pattern 8c frames in from the bottom edge of the display screen 7a toward the top, overlaps with the variably displayed middle decorative pattern 8C, and is displayed in front of the middle decorative pattern 8C. The right decorative pattern 8r frames in from the right edge of the display screen 7a toward the left, overlaps with the variably displayed right decorative pattern 8R, and is displayed in front of the right decorative pattern 8R.

As shown in FIG. 63(J), when the left decorative pattern 8l, the center decorative pattern 8c, and the right decorative pattern 8r stop in a horizontal line, the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R that were displayed as stopped at "234" disappear at almost the same time. As a result, the decorative patterns 8l, 8c, and 8r are displayed as stopped at "777" (fixed stop), and then the big win performance is executed. In this way, in the decorative pattern sudden fixed stop performance A, after the special pattern change starts, the display of the set of decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R that were displayed as stopped after the previous special pattern change is maintained, and then the set of decorative patterns 8l, 8c, and 8r are displayed as stopped in the big win mode without being displayed in the reach mode, which takes the player by surprise and increases the interest.

[Decorative pattern sudden confirmation stop effect B]
FIG. 64 is a diagram for explaining the decorative pattern sudden confirmation stop performance B. The decorative pattern sudden confirmation stop performance is a performance in which a set of decorative patterns is not displayed in a reach state but is stopped (confirmed stop) in a winning state. The decorative pattern sudden confirmation stop performance B is mainly different from the decorative pattern sudden confirmation stop performance A in that a set of multiple decorative patterns is not displayed, and only the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R are displayed. In the decorative pattern sudden confirmation stop performance B, first, as shown in FIG. 64 (A), the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R that are stopped (confirmed stop) are displayed on the display screen 7a. Here, the display of the reserved icon 9A and the variable icon (reserved icon) 9C is omitted. The reserved icon 9A and the variable icon (reserved icon) 9C may or may not be displayed.

The decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R are a set of patterns including a left decorative pattern 8L, a middle decorative pattern 8C, and a right decorative pattern 8R displayed approximately in the center of the display screen 7a, and the variable display of the set of patterns represents the variable display of the special pattern (special pattern variation), and the static display of the set of patterns notifies the result of the special pattern selection. The special pattern here may be either the first special pattern or the second special pattern. The decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R are statically displayed at "234." Here, it is assumed that the game state is normal (low probability low base state), and that the reserved consumption of special pattern 1 has started, and that the special pattern 1 variation will now be executed. It is also assumed here that the lottery result of this special pattern 1 is a jackpot, and that the variation pattern corresponding to the jackpot has been selected.

When the reserved special chart 1 is consumed and the special chart change begins, in the decorative chart sudden confirmation stop performance B, as shown in Figure 64 (B), the decorative charts 8L, 8C, and 8R do not change and are displayed in accordance with the current special chart change (the change in question), but disappear.

As shown in FIG. 64(C), when a predetermined time has elapsed since the start of the current special pattern change (the change in question), the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R disappear, a text image showing "jackpot" is displayed, and it is immediately announced that the result of the special pattern lottery is a jackpot.

After that, as shown in FIG. 64(D), an effect is executed in which decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R come into the frame. Of the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R, the left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R move toward the center of the display screen 7a from different directions. The left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R are the same pattern, which is "7" in this case.

The left decorative pattern 8L frames in from the left edge of the display screen 7a toward the right, moves toward the center of the display screen 7a, and stops approximately near the left center of the display screen 7a. The middle decorative pattern 8C frames in from the bottom edge of the display screen 7a toward the top, moves toward the center of the display screen 7a, and stops approximately near the center of the display screen 7a. The right decorative pattern 8R frames in from the right edge of the display screen 7a toward the left, moves toward the center of the display screen 7a, and stops approximately near the right center of the display screen 7a.

As shown in FIG. 64(E), the left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R stop in a horizontal row. As a result, the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R are displayed as stopped (confirmed stop) at "777", and then the jackpot performance is executed. In this way, in the decorative pattern sudden confirmed stop performance B, after the special pattern change starts, the set of decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R are not displayed as changing or in a reach state, but are displayed as stopped in a jackpot state, which takes the player by surprise and increases the excitement.

Figures 64(F) to 64(J) are other examples of the decorative pattern sudden confirmation stop effect B described in Figures 64(A) to 64(E). In Figures 64(F) to 64(J), the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R that are displayed in a stopped state fade out from the display screen 7a while moving separately, and then an effect is executed in which a jackpot is announced.

Figure 64 (F) shows the same state as Figure 64 (A). That is, the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are displayed on the display screen 7a as stopped (confirmed) at "234."

In FIG. 64 (G), even though the special chart change has started due to the consumption of reserved special chart 1, the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R remain stationary and do not correspond to the current special chart change (the change in question). After that, the left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R move in different directions and fade out from the display screen 7a. The left decorative pattern 8L frames out toward the bottom left of the display screen 7a, the middle decorative pattern 8C frames out toward the bottom of the display screen 7a, and the right decorative pattern 8R frames out toward the bottom right of the display screen 7a.

Figure 64 (H) shows the same state as Figure 64 (C). That is, a predetermined time has passed since the current special pattern change (the change in question) started, and the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R have faded out and disappeared. Then, a text image showing "Jackpot" is displayed, and it is suddenly announced that the result of the special pattern lottery is a jackpot.

After that, as shown in FIG. 64(I), an effect is executed in which the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R frame in. The decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R move from the top to the bottom of the display screen 7a with the left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R aligned. The left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R are the same pattern, which is "7" in this case.

As shown in Figure 64 (J), the left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R are lined up in a horizontal row and stop near the center of the display screen 7a. This causes the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R to stop (confirmed stop) at "777", after which the jackpot performance is executed. In this way, in the decorative pattern sudden confirmed stop performance B, after the special pattern change starts, the set of decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R are not displayed in a changing state or in a reach state, but are instead displayed in a jackpot state, which takes the player by surprise and increases the player's interest.

[Decorative pattern sudden confirmation stop effect C]
FIG. 65 is a diagram for explaining the decorative pattern sudden confirmation stop performance C. The decorative pattern sudden confirmation stop performance is a performance in which a set of decorative patterns is displayed in a winning state (confirmed stop) without being displayed in a reach state. The decorative pattern sudden confirmation stop performance C is mainly different from the decorative pattern sudden confirmation stop performance A in that a set of multiple decorative patterns is not displayed, and only the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R are displayed, and the operation of the first movable role 14 is included. In the decorative pattern sudden confirmation stop performance C, first, as shown in FIG. 65 (A), the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R that are displayed as stopped (confirmed stop) are displayed on the display screen 7a. Here, the display of the reserved icon 9A and the variable icon (reserved icon) 9C is omitted. The reserved icon 9A and the variable icon (reserved icon) 9C may or may not be displayed. The first movable role 14 is stationary at a retreat position on the left side of the display screen 7a.

The decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R are a set of patterns including a left decorative pattern 8L, a middle decorative pattern 8C, and a right decorative pattern 8R displayed approximately in the center of the display screen 7a, and the variable display of the set of patterns represents the variable display of the special pattern (special pattern variation), and the static display of the set of patterns notifies the result of the special pattern selection. The special pattern here may be either the first special pattern or the second special pattern. The decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R are displayed statically at "234." Here, it is assumed that the game state is normal (low probability low base state), the consumption of the reserved special pattern 1 has started, and the special pattern 1 variation will now be executed. It is also assumed here that the lottery result of this special pattern 1 is a jackpot, and the variation pattern corresponding to the jackpot has been selected.

When the special chart change starts due to the consumption of the reserved special chart 1, as shown in FIG. 65(B), the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are maintained as stopped without corresponding to the current special chart change (the change in question). In this state, the first movable role object 14 moves rightward in front of the display screen 7a, from the left end to the right end of the display screen 7a. In accordance with the movement of the first movable role object 14, an effect is executed in which the display contents of the display screen 7a are switched. Specifically, the first screen, which displays the stopped decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R, is switched to the second screen, which displays the text image of "jackpot". Here, the first screen does not move, and the second screen moves in front of the first screen to cover the first screen, thereby performing an effect in which the display contents are switched.

When the first movable device 14 moves to the rightmost advance position, it stops at the advance position. At this time, as shown in FIG. 65(C), the display screen 7a is in a state where only the second screen is displayed, showing the word "jackpot". This immediately notifies the user that the special drawing result is a jackpot.

After that, as shown in FIG. 65(D), the first movable gadget 14 moves leftward in front of the display screen 7a, from the right edge to the left edge of the display screen 7a. In conjunction with this movement of the first movable gadget 14, an effect is executed in which the display content of the display screen 7a is switched. Specifically, the second screen, which displays the word image "jackpot", switches to the first screen, which displays the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R stopped at "777". Here, the second screen does not move, but the first screen moves in front of the second screen, covering it, thereby performing an effect in which the display content is switched.

When the first movable device 14 moves to the leftmost retracted position, it stops at the retracted position. At this time, as shown in FIG. 65(E), the display screen 7a will only show the first screen, which displays the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R stopped at "777". The big win performance is then executed. In this way, in the decorative pattern sudden confirmation stop performance C, after the special pattern change starts, the set of decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R are not displayed in a changing state or in a reach state, but are instead displayed in a big win state, which takes the player by surprise and increases the excitement.

Figures 65(F) to 65(J) are other examples of the decorative pattern sudden confirmation stop effect C described in Figures 65(A) to 65(E). In Figures 65(F) to 65(J), the manner in which the first screen displaying the stopped decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R is switched to the second screen displaying the word "Jackpot" is different from Figures 65(A) to 65(E).

Figure 65 (F) is in the same state as Figure 65 (A). That is, the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are displayed as stopped (confirmed) at "234" on the display screen 7a. Also, the first movable reel 14 is stationary in a retracted position on the left side of the display screen 7a.

In Fig. 65(G), as in Fig. 65(B), the first movable gadget 14 moves to the right and switches from the first screen, which displays the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R that are stopped, to the second screen, which displays the word "jackpot." Here, the first and second screens both move to the right, creating an effect in which the display content slides and switches.

Figure 65 (H) shows the same state as Figure 65 (C). That is, when the first movable device 14 moves to the rightmost advance position, it stops at the advance position. Also, the display screen 7a shows only the second screen on which the word "Jackpot" is displayed. This immediately notifies the player that the special drawing result is a jackpot.

In Fig. 65(I), as in Fig. 65(D), the first movable gadget 14 moves leftward and switches from the second screen, which displays the word "jackpot", to the first screen, which displays the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R stopped at "777". Here, the first and second screens both move leftward, creating an effect in which the display content slides and switches.

Figure 65 (J) is in the same state as Figure 65 (E). That is, when the first movable part 14 moves to the retracted position at the left end, it stops at the retracted position. Also, the display screen 7a becomes a state in which only the first screen is displayed, showing the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R stopped at "777". After that, the big win performance is executed. In this way, in the decorative pattern sudden confirmation stop performance C, after the special pattern change starts, the set of decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R are not displayed in a changing state or in a reach state, but are displayed in a big win state, so that the player can be surprised and the interest can be increased.

[Example of effect]
Below is an example of the effect of the decorative pattern suddenly stopping.
[Effect 1]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in Fig. 63, after the start of the special pattern variation, a performance can be executed in which a set of decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R are not displayed in a reach state, but the decorative patterns 8l, 8c, and 8r are displayed in a winning state. According to this configuration, a novel performance that has never been seen before can visually entertain the player, and can increase the interest. The same applies to Figs. 64 and 65.
[Effect 2]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in Figures 63(A) to 63(E), in this performance, after the special pattern starts to change, a set of decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R are displayed to change, and a set of decorative patterns 8l, 8c, and 8r are displayed to stop to show the winning state. According to this configuration, the player can be visually entertained by the unprecedented novel performance, and the interest can be improved.
[Effect 3]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in Fig. 63(F)-(J), in this performance, after the start of the special pattern change, the display of a set of decorative patterns 8L, 8C, 8R that were stopped and displayed after the previous special pattern change is maintained, and then the display of the set of decorative patterns 8l, 8c, 8r corresponding to the current special pattern change is not displayed, and a stop display of the winning mode is displayed. According to this configuration, a novel performance that has never been seen before can visually entertain the player, and can increase the interest. The same applies to Fig. 65.
[Effect 4]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in Fig. 63, in this effect, the decorative symbols 8l, 8c, and 8r that are stopped and displayed in a winning state are displayed in a frame-in. With this configuration, a novel effect that has never been seen before can visually entertain the player, and can increase the interest. The same applies to Figs. 64 and 65.
[Effect 5]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in Fig. 64 and Fig. 65, in this performance, the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are not displayed in a reach state, but a win is notified by displaying a text image of "win", and after the notification, the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are displayed in a stopped state of win. With this configuration, a novel performance that has never been seen before can visually entertain the player, and can increase the interest. The same applies to the modified example of Fig. 63.
[Effect 6]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in Fig. 64, in this performance, after the display of a set of decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R disappears, a winning is notified by displaying a text image of "Win", and after the notification, a set of decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R that have been stopped and displayed in the winning state are displayed in a frame-in. With this configuration, a novel performance that has never been seen before can visually entertain the player, and can increase the interest. The same applies to the modified example of Fig. 65.

[Modification]
Below, a modified example of the decorative pattern sudden confirmation stop effect is shown.
[Modification 1]
In the decorative symbol sudden fixed stop performance A, after Fig. 63(B), the variable display of the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R disappears, and in Fig. 63(C), in a state where the variable display of the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R is not displayed on the display screen 7a, the left decorative symbol 8L, the center decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R may frame in as "7". Then, in Fig. 63(E), the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R may be fixed and stopped at "777", and a big win may be announced.

[Modification 2]
In Figure 63 (B) of the decorative pattern sudden confirmation stop performance A, when the changing display of decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R is displayed, a text image of "Jackpot" may appear to notify of a jackpot.

[Modification 3]
In the decorative symbol sudden confirmation stop performance A, the left decorative symbol 8l, the middle decorative symbol 8c, and the right decorative symbol 8r are framed in as "7". However, the left decorative symbol 8l, the middle decorative symbol 8c, and the right decorative symbol 8r may be numbers other than "7" or images other than number images. In addition, the left decorative symbol 8l, the middle decorative symbol 8c, and the right decorative symbol 8r may be framed in as different numbers from each other and stopped and displayed as a losing symbol.

[Modification 4]
In the decorative pattern sudden confirmation stop performances B and C, the notification of the win may be an image other than the text image of "jackpot." In addition, the notification of the jackpot is not limited to the display of an image, and may be the activation of a role or the generation of a sound.

[Modification 5]
In the decorative pattern sudden confirmation stop performance C, after the stopping pattern "234" of the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R disappears, the first movable part 14 may move to the right from the retreated position toward the advanced position.

[Example of embodiment]
In the gaming machine of this embodiment, the following aspects can be realized.
◇[Aspect A5-1]
A gaming machine having a display means capable of displaying a plurality of types of images,
One of the plurality of types of images is a set of decorative patterns capable of informing a winner or loser,
After the special chart variation starts, the set of decorative patterns can be displayed in a winning state without being displayed in a reach state,
A gaming machine characterized by:
◇[Aspect A5-2]
The gaming machine according to aspect A5-1,
In the performance, after the special pattern variation starts, the variation display of the set of decorative patterns and the stop display of the winning mode are displayed.
A gaming machine characterized by:
◇[Aspect A5-3]
The gaming machine according to aspect A5-1,
In the performance, after the start of the special chart change, the display of the set of decorative patterns that was stopped and displayed after the previous special chart change is maintained, and then the display of the stop of the winning mode is displayed without displaying the change display of the set of decorative patterns corresponding to the current special chart change.
A gaming machine characterized by:
◇[Aspect A5-4]
A gaming machine according to any one of Aspects A5-1 to A5-3,
In the performance, the set of decorative symbols stopped and displayed in a winning state are displayed in a frame-in state.
A gaming machine characterized by:
◇[Aspect A5-5]
A gaming machine according to any one of Aspects A5-1 to A5-4,
In the performance, a win is notified without the set of decorative symbols being displayed in a ready-to-win state, and after the notification, the set of decorative symbols is stopped and displayed in a winning state.
A gaming machine characterized by:
◇[Aspect A5-6]
The gaming machine according to aspect A5-5,
In the performance, after the display of the set of decorative symbols disappears, the winning is notified, and after the notification, the set of decorative symbols that have been stopped and displayed in the winning state are displayed in a frame-in state.
A gaming machine characterized by:

As shown in the game state management process of FIG. 28, in the gaming machine 1 of this embodiment, when the number of times the special symbol changes during the low probability state (normal state) reaches 500 (when the ceiling counter reaches 0), the game transitions to Yu-Time (low probability time-saving state). This Yu-Time continues until the special symbol changes 700 times.

Below, the reel-linked effects A to C will be explained using Figures 66 to 68. These reel-linked effects are executed during the decorative pattern variation effect when the game state is normal, time-saving (low probability, low base state), or probability change (high probability, high base state). That is, the image control microcomputer 101 analyzes the command received from the sub-control board 90, and if it contains an instruction to execute a reel-linked effect, it reads the corresponding image data from the ROM 103 and displays the image on the display screen 7a or sub-display screen 64 of the image display device 7.

[Feature Linkage Performance A]
FIG. 66 is a diagram for explaining the role-linked performance A. The role-linked performance A in FIG. 66 is a performance with the same variation of the special symbol. In the role-linked performance A, as shown in FIG. 66(A), first, a decorative symbol variation performance is performed. In this decorative symbol variation performance, the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R vary vertically in the approximate center of the display screen 7a. In addition, in the decorative symbol variation performance, the ally character CRA is displayed on the left side of the display screen 7a. In the display screen 7a, the reserved icon 9A and the variation icon 9C are displayed, but are omitted in the figure. Furthermore, in the display screen 7a, a predetermined background image HK is displayed.

Next, as shown in FIG. 66(B), a reel deployment performance is performed. In this reel deployment performance, the first movable reel 14 moves in front of the display screen 7a from a retreat position on the left of the display screen 7a to a deployment position (from the left to the right of the display screen 7a). In this case, the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R and the ally character CRA are moved to the right side of the display screen 7a in conjunction with the first movable reel 14 moving from the retreat position to the deployment position. In addition, the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R form a reach state in which the decorative symbol 8L and the right decorative symbol 8R are displayed as 7 symbols and the decorative symbol 8C fluctuates at high speed. In addition, in the display screen 7a, an effect image EF (e.g., a black effect image) is displayed instead of the background image HK in the area through which the first movable reel 14 has passed.

Next, as shown in FIG. 66(C), reel movement performance A is performed. In this reel movement performance A, the first movable reel 14 moves from the deployed position to the retracted position (to the left). At this time, decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R appear from the right end of the display screen 7a as the first movable reel 14 moves. The decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R are arranged such that the decorative pattern 8L is placed at the top, the decorative pattern 8C is placed in the center, and the decorative pattern 8R is placed at the bottom, each forming a 7 pattern, which forms a jackpot pattern. Note that the ally character CRA also moves leftward in conjunction with the movement of the first movable reel 14 to the left.

Next, as shown in FIG. 66 (D), reel movement performance B is performed. In this reel movement performance B, the first movable reel 14 moves further in the retreat direction (leftward). At this time, the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, 8R and the ally character CRA move leftward in conjunction with the first movable reel 14. In detail, the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, 8R and the ally character CRA move leftward at the same speed as the first movable reel 14 moves in the retreat direction (leftward). In this case, as the first movable reel 14 moves to the retreat position (leftward), the display area of the effect image EF becomes smaller and the display area of the background image HK becomes larger.

Next, as shown in Figure 66 (E), a reel movement performance C is performed. In this reel movement performance C, the first movable reel 14 moves to a retreat position, the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R are positioned approximately in the center of the display screen 7a, and the ally character CRA is positioned to the left of the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R. In this case, the effect image EF disappears and the background image HK is displayed.

Next, as shown in FIG. 66(F), a jackpot symbol notification effect is performed. In this jackpot symbol notification effect, the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are stopped near the center of the display screen 7a, and a jackpot symbol of 7 is notified. At this time, the ally character CRA is erased.

In the above-mentioned reel movement performances B and C, the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, 8R and the ally character CRA are linked (moved) to the left at the same speed as the first movable reel 14, but this is not limited to the above, and the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, 8R or the ally character CRA may be linked (moved) at a slower speed than the first movable reel 14, or may be linked (moved) at a faster speed than the first movable reel 14.

[Feature Linkage Performance B]
FIG. 67 is a diagram for explaining the role-linked performance B. The role-linked performance B in FIG. 67 is a performance with the same variation of the special symbol. In the role-linked performance B, as shown in FIG. 67(A), first, a decorative symbol variation performance is performed. In this decorative symbol variation performance, the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R vary vertically in the approximate center of the display screen 7a. In addition, in the decorative symbol variation performance, the ally character CRA is displayed on the left side of the display screen 7a. In the display screen 7a, the reserved icon 9A and the variation icon 9C are displayed, but are omitted in the figure. Furthermore, in the display screen 7a, a predetermined background image HK is displayed.

Next, as shown in FIG. 67(B), the reel deployment performance A is performed. In this reel deployment performance A, the first movable reel 14 moves in front of the display screen 7a from the retreat position on the left of the display screen 7a to the deployment position (from the left to the right of the display screen 7a). In this case, the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R and the ally character CRA are moved to the right side of the display screen 7a in conjunction with the first movable reel 14 moving from the retreat position to the deployment position. In addition, the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R form a reach state in which the decorative symbol 8L and the right decorative symbol 8R are displayed as six symbols and the decorative symbol 8C fluctuates at high speed. In addition, in the display screen 7a, the area through which the first movable reel 14 has passed is displayed with an effect image EF (e.g., a black effect image) instead of the background image HK.

Next, as shown in FIG. 67(C), reel movement performance A is performed. In this reel movement performance A, the first movable reel 14 moves from the deployed position to the retracted position (to the left). At this time, decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R appear from the right end of the display screen 7a as the first movable reel 14 moves. The decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R are arranged such that the decorative pattern 8L is placed at the top, the decorative pattern 8C is placed in the center, and the decorative pattern 8R is placed at the bottom, forming 6 patterns each, which form a jackpot pattern. Note that the ally character CRA also moves leftward in conjunction with the movement of the first movable reel 14 to the left.

Next, as shown in FIG. 67 (D), reel movement performance B is performed. In this reel movement performance B, the first movable reel 14 moves further in the retreat direction (leftward). At this time, the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, 8R and the ally character CRA move leftward in conjunction with the first movable reel 14. In detail, the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, 8R and the ally character CRA move leftward at the same speed as the first movable reel 14 moves in the retreat direction (leftward). In this case, as the first movable reel 14 moves to the retreat position (leftward), the display area of the effect image EF becomes smaller and the display area of the background image HK becomes larger.

Next, as shown in Figure 67 (E), a reel movement performance C is performed. In this reel movement performance C, the first movable reel 14 moves to a retreat position, the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R are positioned approximately in the center of the display screen 7a, and the ally character CRA is positioned to the left of the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R. In this case, the effect image EF disappears and the background image HK is displayed.

Next, as shown in FIG. 67 (F), a timer button effect is performed. In this timer button effect, a button image XA1 is displayed to encourage the player to press the effect button 63. This button image XA1 includes the word "PUSH" to encourage the player to press the effect button 63, and the word "3 seconds left" to represent the timer countdown.

Next, as shown in FIG. 67 (G), reel deployment performance B is performed. In this reel deployment performance B, the first movable reel 14 again moves in front of the display screen 7a from the retracted position on the left of the display screen 7a to the deployed position (from left to right on the display screen 7a). In this case, in the area of the display screen 7a through which the first movable reel 14 has passed, an effect image EF (e.g., a black effect image) is displayed instead of the background image HK, and the button image XA1 is erased.

Next, as shown in FIG. 67(H), a jackpot symbol promotion effect is performed. In this jackpot symbol promotion effect, the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are displayed stopped near the center of the display screen 7a, changed from a 6 symbol to a 7 symbol, and announced as a jackpot symbol. In other words, they have been promoted to a 7 symbol, which is more advantageous for the player than a 6 symbol. At this time, the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R, which have been promoted to a 7 symbol, are displayed without being linked to the first movable device 14.

In the above-mentioned reel movement performances B and C, the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, 8R and the ally character CRA are linked (moved) to the left at the same speed as the first movable reel 14, but this is not limited to the above, and the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, 8R or the ally character CRA may be linked (moved) at a slower speed than the first movable reel 14, or may be linked (moved) at a faster speed than the first movable reel 14.

[Feature Linkage Performance C]
FIG. 68 is a diagram for explaining the role-linked performance C. The role-linked performance C in FIG. 68 is a performance with the same variation of the special symbol. In the role-linked performance C, as shown in FIG. 68(A), first, a decorative symbol variation performance is performed. In this decorative symbol variation performance, the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R vary vertically in the approximate center of the display screen 7a. In addition, in the decorative symbol variation performance, the ally character CRA is displayed on the left side of the display screen 7a. In the display screen 7a, the reserved icon 9A and the variation icon 9C are displayed, but are omitted in the figure. Furthermore, in the display screen 7a, a predetermined background image HK is displayed.

Next, as shown in FIG. 68(B), the reel deployment performance A is performed. In this reel deployment performance A, the first movable reel 14 moves in front of the display screen 7a from the retreat position on the left of the display screen 7a to the deployment position (from the left to the right of the display screen 7a). In this case, the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R and the ally character CRA are moved to the right side of the display screen 7a in conjunction with the first movable reel 14 moving from the retreat position to the deployment position. In addition, the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R form a reach state in which the decorative symbol 8L and the right decorative symbol 8R are displayed as six symbols and the decorative symbol 8C fluctuates at high speed. In addition, in the display screen 7a, the area through which the first movable reel 14 has passed is displayed with an effect image EF (e.g., a black effect image) instead of the background image HK.

Next, as shown in FIG. 68(C), reel movement performance A is performed. In this reel movement performance A, the first movable reel 14 moves from the deployed position to the retracted position (to the left). At this time, decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R appear from the right edge of the display screen 7a as the first movable reel 14 moves. The decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R are arranged such that the decorative pattern 8L is placed at the top, the decorative pattern 8C is placed in the center, and the decorative pattern 8R is placed at the bottom, forming 6 patterns each, which form a jackpot pattern. Note that the ally character CRA also moves leftward in conjunction with the movement of the first movable reel 14 to the left.

Next, as shown in FIG. 68 (D), reel movement performance B is performed. In this reel movement performance B, the first movable reel 14 moves further in the retreat direction (leftward). At this time, the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, 8R and the ally character CRA move leftward in conjunction with the first movable reel 14. In detail, the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, 8R and the ally character CRA move leftward at the same speed as the first movable reel 14 moves in the retreat direction (leftward). In this case, as the first movable reel 14 moves to the retreat position (leftward), the display area of the effect image EF becomes smaller and the display area of the background image HK becomes larger.

Next, as shown in Figure 68 (E), a reel movement performance C is performed. In this reel movement performance C, the first movable reel 14 moves to a retreat position, the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R are positioned approximately in the center of the display screen 7a, and the ally character CRA is positioned to the left of the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R. In this case, the effect image EF disappears and the background image HK is displayed.

Next, as shown in FIG. 68(F), a jackpot symbol expansion effect is performed. In this jackpot symbol expansion effect, the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are expanded. At this time, the decorative symbols 8L and 8R are displayed so that they extend beyond the display screen 7a. In addition, the ally character CRA is erased.

Next, as shown in FIG. 68 (G), a timer button effect is performed. In this timer button effect, a button image XA1 is displayed to encourage the player to press the effect button 63. This button image XA1 includes the word "PUSH" to encourage the player to press the effect button 63, and the word "3 seconds left" to represent the timer countdown.

Next, as shown in FIG. 68 (H), reel deployment performance B is performed. In this reel deployment performance B, the first movable reel 14 again moves in front of the display screen 7a from the retracted position on the left of the display screen 7a to the deployed position (from left to right on the display screen 7a). In this case, in the area of the display screen 7a through which the first movable reel 14 has passed, an effect image EF (e.g., a black effect image) is displayed instead of the background image HK, and the button image XA1 is erased.

Next, as shown in FIG. 68(I), a jackpot symbol promotion effect is performed. In this jackpot symbol promotion effect, the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are displayed stationary near the center of the display screen 7a, and are changed from a 6 symbol to a 7 symbol, which is announced as a jackpot symbol. In other words, the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R have been promoted to a 7 symbol, which is more advantageous for the player than a 6 symbol. At this time, the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R, which have been promoted to a 7 symbol, are displayed without being linked to the first movable device 14.

In the above-mentioned reel movement performances B and C, the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, 8R and the ally character CRA are linked (moved) to the left at the same speed as the first movable reel 14, but this is not limited to the above, and the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, 8R or the ally character CRA may be linked (moved) at a slower speed than the first movable reel 14, or may be linked (moved) at a faster speed than the first movable reel 14.

[Modification]
In the above-mentioned reel-linked performances A to C, when linked with the first movable reel 14, the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R are configured to appear from the right end of the display screen 7a, but this is not limited to this, and the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R may be configured to link with the first movable reel 14 from the state in which they are displayed stopped on the display screen 7a.
In the above-mentioned reel-linked performances A to C, the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R linked with the first movable reel 14 are linked when a jackpot pattern is formed, but this is not limited thereto, and the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R may be linked with the first movable reel 14 when a losing pattern is formed.

[Example of effect]
In the above-mentioned role-linked performances A to C, after the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R change, the movement of the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R and the movement of the first movable role 14 are linked as shown in role-moving performances A to C. With this configuration, the movement of the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R and the movement of the first movable role 14 can be emphasized, and the player can be made to pay attention to the movement of the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R and the first movable role 14. As a result, the interest of the game can be improved.

In the above-mentioned reel linking performances A to C, as shown in reel movement performances A to C, when the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R and the first movable reel 14 move, the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R and the first movable reel 14 move in the same direction in conjunction with each other. With this configuration, the movement of the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R and the movement of the first movable reel 14 can be synchronized, so that the player can pay more attention to the movement of the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R and the first movable reel 14. As a result, the interest of the game can be improved.

In the above-mentioned reel linking performances A to C, as shown in reel movement performances A to C, when the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R and the first movable reel 14 move, the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R and the first movable reel 14 move in conjunction with each other at the same speed. With this configuration, the movement of the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R and the movement of the first movable reel 14 can be perfectly synchronized, so that the player can pay more attention to the movement of the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R and the first movable reel 14. As a result, the interest of the game can be improved.

In the above-mentioned reel linking performances A to C, as shown in reel movement performances A to C, when the movement of the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R and the movement of the first movable reel 14 are performed in conjunction with each other, the first movable reel 14 moves from the deployed position to the retracted position. With this configuration, when the first movable reel 14 moves in the direction of leaving the display screen 7a, the movement of the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R and the movement of the first movable reel 14 are linked, so that the movement of the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R and the first movable reel 14 can be emphasized to the player. As a result, the interest of the game can be improved.

In the above-mentioned role-linked performances A to C, as shown in the role-moving performances A to C, when the movement of the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R and the movement of the first movable role 14 are performed in conjunction with each other, the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R are gradually displayed on the display screen 7a from a state where they are not displayed on the display screen 7a as the first movable role 14 moves, and then the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R are displayed in their entirety on the display screen 7a. With this configuration, the movement of the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R and the movement of the first movable role 14 can be gradually synchronized, and the player can be made to pay more attention to the movement of the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R and the first movable role 14. As a result, the interest of the game can be improved.

In the above-mentioned role-linked effects A to C, as shown in role-moving effects A to C, when the movement of the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R and the movement of the first movable role 14 are linked, the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R form a jackpot pattern. With this configuration, the jackpot notification by the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R can be emphasized, and the player's joy at the jackpot can be amplified. As a result, the interest in the game can be improved.

[Example of embodiment]
In the gaming machine of this embodiment, the following aspects can be realized.
[Aspect XA-1]
A gaming machine having a display means capable of executing a plurality of display effects and a movable movable device,
A first display effect may be performed as one of the plurality of display effects,
A second display effect may be performed as one of the plurality of display effects,
The first display effect is an effect of moving a decorative pattern,
The second display performance is a performance in which the movable part is moved,
A combination effect including the first display effect and the second display effect may be performed,
In the combination performance, the first display performance and the second display performance are performed, and the movement of the decorative pattern in the first display performance and the movement of the movable role object in the second display performance are performed in conjunction with each other.
A gaming machine characterized by:
[Aspect XA-2]
The gaming machine according to aspect XA-1,
In the combination performance, the movement of the decorative pattern in the first display performance and the movement of the movable role object in the second display performance are performed in the same direction in conjunction with each other.
A gaming machine characterized by:
[Aspect XA-3]
The gaming machine according to aspect XA-2,
In the combination performance, the movement of the decorative pattern in the first display performance and the movement of the movable role object in the second display performance are performed in conjunction with each other at the same moving speed.
A gaming machine characterized by:
[Aspect XA-4]
The gaming machine according to aspect XA-3,
The movable part is movable between a retracted position and a deployed position,
In the combination performance, when the movement of the decorative pattern in the first display performance and the movement of the movable role object in the second display performance are performed in conjunction with each other, the movable role object moves from the deployed position to the retracted position.
A gaming machine characterized by:
[Aspect XA-5]
The gaming machine according to aspect XA-4,
In the combination performance, when the movement of the decorative pattern in the first display performance and the movement of the movable role object in the second display performance are performed in conjunction with each other, the decorative pattern is gradually displayed on the display means from a state where it is not displayed on the display means as the movable role object moves, and then the decorative pattern is displayed in its entirety on the display means.
A gaming machine characterized by:
[Aspect XA-6]
The gaming machine according to aspect XA-5,
The decorative pattern to be moved in the first display performance is a decorative pattern forming a big win pattern.
A gaming machine characterized by:

As shown in the game state management process of FIG. 28, in the gaming machine 1 of this embodiment, when the number of times the special symbol changes during the low probability state (normal state) reaches 500 (when the ceiling counter reaches 0), the game transitions to Yu-Time (low probability time-saving state). This Yu-Time continues until the special symbol changes 700 times.

Scroll effects A to C are explained below using Figures 69 to 71. This scroll effect is executed during the decorative pattern variation effect when the game state is normal, time-saving (low probability, low base state), or probability change (high probability, high base state). That is, the image control microcomputer 101 analyzes the command received from the sub-control board 90, and if the command includes an instruction to execute a scroll effect, it reads the corresponding image data from the ROM 103 and displays the image on the display screen 7a or sub-display screen 64 of the image display device 7.

[Scroll effect A]
FIG. 69 is a diagram for explaining the scroll performance A. The scroll performance A in FIG. 69 is a performance with the same variation of the special pattern. In the scroll performance A, as shown in FIG. 69(A), first, a decorative pattern variation performance is performed. In this decorative pattern variation performance, the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R vary vertically in the approximate center of the display screen 7a on the display screen 7a. In addition, in the decorative pattern variation performance, the ally character CRA is displayed on the left side of the display screen 7a. On the display screen 7a, the reserved icon 9A and the variable icon 9C are displayed, but are omitted in the figure.

Next, as shown in FIG. 69(B), a decorative pattern temporary stop performance is performed. In this decorative pattern temporary stop performance, the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R temporarily stop. Specifically, the decorative pattern 8L temporarily stops at the number 7, the decorative pattern 8C temporarily stops at the number 5, and the decorative pattern 8R temporarily stops at the number 3. The decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R are each temporarily stopped at a position corresponding to the vertex of a predetermined triangle. In this decorative pattern temporary stop performance, the ally character CRA is positioned in the upper right. In this decorative pattern temporary stop performance, the image including the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R and the ally character CRA, which is displayed on the display screen 7a, is also called the stop image XB1.

Next, as shown in FIG. 69(C), a downward scroll effect is performed. In this downward scroll effect, still images XB1 that are successively connected in the vertical direction scroll (move) from the top to the bottom of the display screen 7a. At this time, a border portion XB2 is provided between the successive still images XB1. This border portion XB2 is shown by hatching in the figure. In the figure, an arrow is used to indicate that the border portion XB2 is scrolling (moving) downward.

Next, as shown in FIG. 69(D), a downward scroll stop effect is performed. In this downward scroll stop effect, two still images XB1 that are consecutively connected in the vertical direction are frozen and displayed so that the boundary XB2 between the two still images XB1 is visible. In this case, only a portion of each of the two still images XB1 is displayed, and when the two are combined, they become one still image XB1. Specifically, in FIG. 69(C), when the upper still image XB1 is placed below the lower still image XB1, they become one complete still image XB1. In other words, one still image XB1 is displayed across the entire display screen 7a.

Next, as shown in Fig. 69 (E), a reach replacement performance is performed. In this reach replacement performance, two consecutive still images XB1 move downward, and the border XB2 moves to the lower end of the display screen 7a and stops, and the border XB2 disappears, and then the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R in the still image XB1 disappear, and new decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are displayed to form a reach state. At this time, the new decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are the seven symbols formed by the performance symbol 8L and the decorative symbol 8R, and the decorative symbol 8C is fluctuating at high speed. In addition, in this reach replacement performance, a new ally character CRA is transformed and displayed, adding to the mysterious atmosphere.
Thereafter, the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R all stop, and a symbol determination stop effect is performed, which indicates a miss or a big win.
It should be noted that the image displayed on the display screen 7a in the reach replacement effect is an image different from the still image XB1.

[Scroll effect B]
FIG. 70 is a diagram for explaining the scroll performance B. The scroll performance B in FIG. 70 is a performance with the same variation of the special pattern. In the scroll performance B, as shown in FIG. 70(A), first, a decorative pattern variation performance is performed. In this decorative pattern variation performance, the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R vary vertically in the approximate center of the display screen 7a on the display screen 7a. In addition, in the decorative pattern variation performance, the ally character CRA is displayed on the left side of the display screen 7a. On the display screen 7a, the reserved icon 9A and the variable icon 9C are displayed, but are omitted in the figure.

Next, as shown in FIG. 70(B), a decorative pattern temporary stop performance is performed. In this decorative pattern temporary stop performance, the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R temporarily stop. Specifically, the decorative pattern 8L temporarily stops at the number 7, the decorative pattern 8C temporarily stops at the number 5, and the decorative pattern 8R temporarily stops at the number 3. The decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R are each temporarily stopped at a position corresponding to the vertex of a predetermined triangle. In this decorative pattern temporary stop performance, the ally character CRA is positioned in the upper right. In this decorative pattern temporary stop performance, the image including the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R and the ally character CRA, which is displayed on the display screen 7a, is also called the stop image XB1.

Next, as shown in FIG. 70(C), a downward scroll effect is performed. In this downward scroll effect, still images XB1 that are successively connected in the vertical direction scroll (move) from the top to the bottom (first direction) on the display screen 7a. At this time, a border portion XB2 is provided between the successive still images XB1. This border portion XB2 is shown by hatching in the figure. In the figure, an arrow indicates that the border portion XB2 is scrolling (moving) downward.

Next, as shown in FIG. 70(D), a downward scroll stop effect is performed. In this downward scroll stop effect, two still images XB1 that are consecutively connected in the vertical direction are frozen and displayed so that the boundary XB2 between the two still images XB1 is visible. In this case, only a portion of each of the two still images XB1 is displayed, and when the two are combined, they become one still image XB1. Specifically, in FIG. 70(C), when the upper still image XB1 is placed below the lower still image XB1, they become one complete still image XB1. In other words, one still image XB1 is displayed across the entire display screen 7a.

Next, as shown in FIG. 70(E), an upward scroll effect is performed. In this upward scroll effect, the successive still images XB1 scroll (move) from the downward scroll stop effect state to an upward direction (second direction). In the figure, an arrow indicates that the boundary portion XB2 is also scrolling (moving) upward.

Next, as shown in FIG. 70(F), an upward scroll stop effect is performed. In this upward scroll stop effect, two still images XB1 that are consecutive in the vertical direction are frozen and displayed so that the boundary XB2 between the two still images XB1 is visible. In this case, only a portion of each of the two still images XB1 is displayed, and when the two still images XB1 are combined, they become one still image XB1. Specifically, in FIG. 70(F), when the upper still image XB1 is placed below the lower still image XB1, they become one complete still image XB1. In other words, one still image XB1 is displayed across the entire display screen 7a.

The stop position of the boundary portion XB2 in the downward scroll stop effect is different from the stop position of the boundary portion XB2 in the upward scroll stop effect. According to this configuration, since the stop positions are different depending on the scroll in the different directions, it is possible to provide the player with a mysterious atmosphere, and as a result, it is possible to increase the interest of the game.
However, without being limited to this, the stop position of the boundary portion XB2 in the above-mentioned downward scroll stop performance may be the same as the stop position of the boundary portion XB2 in the above-mentioned upward scroll stop performance.

Next, as shown in Fig. 70(G), a reach replacement performance is performed. In this reach replacement performance, two consecutive still images XB1 move downward, and the border XB2 moves to the lower end of the display screen 7a and stops, and the border XB2 disappears, and then the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R in the still image XB1 disappear, and new decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are displayed to form a reach state. At this time, the new decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are seven symbols, with the decorative symbol 8L and the decorative symbol 8R, and the decorative symbol 8C is fluctuating at high speed. In addition, in this reach replacement performance, a new ally character CRA is transformed and displayed, adding to the mysterious atmosphere.
Thereafter, the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R all stop, and a symbol determination stop effect is performed, which indicates a miss or a big win.
It should be noted that the image displayed on the display screen 7a in the reach replacement effect is an image different from the still image XB1.

[Scrolling effect C]
FIG. 71 is a diagram for explaining the scroll performance C. The scroll performance C in FIG. 71 is a performance with the same variation of the special pattern. In the scroll performance C, as shown in FIG. 71(A), first, a decorative pattern variation performance is performed. In this decorative pattern variation performance, the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R vary vertically in the approximate center of the display screen 7a on the display screen 7a. In addition, in the decorative pattern variation performance, the ally character CRA is displayed on the left side of the display screen 7a. On the display screen 7a, the reserved icon 9A and the variable icon 9C are displayed, but are omitted in the figure.

Next, as shown in FIG. 71(B), a decorative pattern temporary stop performance is performed. In this decorative pattern temporary stop performance, the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R temporarily stop. Specifically, the decorative pattern 8L temporarily stops at the number 7, the decorative pattern 8C temporarily stops at the number 5, and the decorative pattern 8R temporarily stops at the number 3. The decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R are each temporarily stopped at a position corresponding to the vertex of a predetermined triangle. In this decorative pattern temporary stop performance, the ally character CRA is positioned in the upper right. In this decorative pattern temporary stop performance, the image including the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R and the ally character CRA displayed on the display screen 7a is also called the stop image XB1.

Next, as shown in FIG. 71(C), a downward scroll effect is performed. In this downward scroll effect, still images XB1 that are successively connected in the vertical direction scroll (move) from the top to the bottom (first direction) on the display screen 7a. At this time, a border XB2 is provided between the successive still images XB1. This border XB2 is shown by hatching in the figure. In the figure, an arrow indicates that the border XB2 is scrolling (moving) downward.

Next, as shown in FIG. 71(D), a downward scroll stop effect is performed. In this downward scroll stop effect, two still images XB1 that are consecutively connected in the vertical direction are frozen and displayed so that the boundary XB2 between the two still images XB1 is visible. In this case, only a portion of each of the two still images XB1 is displayed, and when the two are combined, they become one still image XB1. Specifically, in FIG. 71(C), when the upper still image XB1 is placed below the lower still image XB1, they become one complete still image XB1. In other words, one still image XB1 is displayed across the entire display screen 7a.

Next, as shown in FIG. 71 (E), an upward scroll effect is performed. In this upward scroll effect, the successive still images XB1 scroll (move) from the downward scroll stopped effect state to an upward direction (second direction). In the figure, an arrow indicates that the boundary portion XB2 is also scrolling (moving) upward.

Next, as shown in FIG. 71(F), an upward scroll stop effect is performed. In this upward scroll stop effect, two still images XB1 that are consecutive in the vertical direction are frozen and displayed so that the boundary XB2 between the two still images XB1 is visible. In this case, only a portion of each of the two still images XB1 is displayed, and when the two are combined, they become one still image XB1. Specifically, in FIG. 71(F), when the upper still image XB1 is placed below the lower still image XB1, they become one complete still image XB1. In other words, one still image XB1 is displayed across the entire display screen 7a.

The stop position of the boundary portion XB2 in the downward scroll stop effect is different from the stop position of the boundary portion XB2 in the upward scroll stop effect. According to this configuration, since the stop positions are different depending on the scroll in the different directions, it is possible to provide the player with a mysterious atmosphere, and as a result, it is possible to increase the interest of the game.
However, without being limited to this, the stop position of the boundary portion XB2 in the above-mentioned downward scroll stop performance may be the same as the stop position of the boundary portion XB2 in the above-mentioned upward scroll stop performance.

Next, as shown in FIG. 71(G), boundary effect A is performed. In this boundary effect A, the boundary XB2 expands in the vertical direction, and three characters XB3 appear on the boundary XB2. These characters XB3 are characters that display smiling faces.

Next, as shown in FIG. 71 (H), boundary effect B is performed. In this boundary effect B, character XB3 jumps out (moves) from boundary XB2. In this case, character XB3 may jump out completely from boundary XB2, or may jump out only partially from boundary XB2. With this configuration, after a mysterious atmosphere is created by the scrolling effect and the scrolling stop effect, the player can be surprised by the boundary effect. As a result, the interest of the game can be increased.

Next, as shown in Fig. 71 (I), a reach replacement performance is performed. In this reach replacement performance, two consecutive still images XB1 move downward, and the border XB2 moves to the lower end of the display screen 7a and stops, and the border XB2 disappears, and then the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R in the still image XB1 disappear, and new decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are displayed to form a reach state. At this time, the new decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are the seven symbols formed by the performance symbol 8L and the decorative symbol 8R, and the decorative symbol 8C is fluctuating at high speed. In addition, in this reach replacement performance, a new ally character CRA is transformed and displayed, adding to the mysterious atmosphere.
Thereafter, the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R all stop, and a symbol determination stop effect is performed, which indicates a miss or a big win.
It should be noted that the image displayed on the display screen 7a in the reach replacement effect is an image different from the still image XB1.

[Modification]
A predetermined image (for example, an effect image, a character image) may be displayed in the border portion XB2.
In the above-mentioned scroll performances A to C, when the continuous still images XB1 are scrolled, the second movable part 15 may be moved in the scroll direction. That is, the scrolling of the still images XB1 and the movement of the second movable part 15 may be linked.

[Example of effect]
In the scroll effects A to C, a still image XB1 including the temporarily stopped decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R and the ally character CRA is displayed in the decorative pattern temporary stop effect, and then a plurality of consecutive still images XB1 are scrolled in a first direction (downward) on the display screen 7a, and then two consecutive still images XB1 are displayed so that the boundary portion XB2 of the two still images XB1 can be seen on the display screen 7a. According to this configuration, a plurality of consecutive still images XB1 are scrolled in a first direction (downward) on the display screen 7a, and then two consecutive still images XB1 are displayed so that the boundary portion XB2 of the two still images XB1 can be seen, so that a mysterious atmosphere can be provided to the player, and the player can be made to pay attention to the subsequent development (whether it will be scrolled again, or whether a different effect from scrolling (for example, a pseudo consecutive effect, a look-ahead effect, a chance-up effect) will be performed). As a result, the interest of the game can be improved.

In the above scroll effects A to C, multiple consecutive still images XB1 are scrolled in a first direction (downward) on the display screen 7a, then two consecutive still images XB1 are frozen and displayed on the display screen 7a so that the boundary XB2 between the two still images XB1 is visible, and then the multiple consecutive still images XB1 are scrolled in a second direction (upward) on the display screen 7a. This configuration can provide the player with a more mysterious atmosphere, and can make the player pay attention to the subsequent developments (whether they will scroll again, or whether an effect different from scrolling (for example, a pseudo consecutive effect, a look-ahead effect, or a chance-up effect) will be performed). As a result, the interest of the game can be increased.

In the above scroll effects A to C, multiple consecutive still images XB1 are scrolled in a first direction (downward) on the display screen 7a, and then two consecutive still images XB1 are displayed frozen on the display screen 7a so that the boundary XB2 between the two still images XB1 is visible. Then, multiple consecutive still images XB1 are scrolled in a second direction (upward) on the display screen 7a, and then the two still images XB1 are displayed frozen again so that the boundary XB2 between the two still images XB1 is visible. This configuration can incite a mysterious atmosphere for the player, and make them pay attention to the subsequent developments (whether they will scroll again, or whether an effect different from scrolling (for example, a pseudo consecutive effect, a look-ahead effect, or a chance-up effect) will be performed). As a result, the interest of the game can be increased.

In the above scroll effects B to C, the position of the border XB2 during the downward scroll stop effect is different from the position of the border XB2 during the upward scroll stop effect. With this configuration, it is possible to emphasize the difference between the downward scroll effect that scrolls in a first direction and the upward scroll effect that scrolls in a second direction, thereby increasing the interest of the game.

The above scroll effects A to C are performed during the same change of the special symbol. With this configuration, the above scroll effects A to C are each performed during the same change of the special symbol, so it is possible to provide the player with a mysterious atmosphere in a short period of time, and to draw attention to the subsequent developments (whether the reel will scroll again, or whether an effect different from the scroll (for example, a pseudo consecutive effect, a look-ahead effect, a chance-up effect) will be performed). As a result, it is possible to increase the interest of the game.

[Example of embodiment]
In the gaming machine of this embodiment, the following aspects can be realized.
[Aspect XB-1]
A gaming machine having a display means capable of executing a plurality of display effects and a movable movable device,
A first display effect may be performed as one of the plurality of display effects,
A second display effect may be performed as one of the plurality of display effects,
A third display effect may be performed as one of the plurality of display effects,
the first display effect is an effect of displaying a first image,
the second display presentation is a presentation in which a plurality of successive first images are scrolled in a first direction on the display means;
The third display effect is an effect of displaying two successive first images on the display means in a stopped state so that a boundary between the two successive first images is visible,
A combination effect including the first display effect, the second display effect, and the third display effect may be performed,
In the combination performance, the first display performance is performed, the second display performance is performed after the first display performance is performed, and the third display performance is performed after the second display performance is performed.
A gaming machine characterized by:
[Aspect XB-2]
The gaming machine according to aspect XB-1,
A fourth display effect may be performed as one of the plurality of display effects,
In the fourth display presentation, the plurality of consecutive first images are scrolled on the display means in a second direction opposite to the first direction,
The combination effect may include the fourth display effect,
In the combination performance, the fourth display performance is performed after the third display performance.
A gaming machine characterized by:
[Aspect XB-3]
A gaming machine according to aspect XB-2,
A fifth display effect may be performed as one of the plurality of display effects,
In the fifth display performance, the display means displays the two successive first images in a stopped state so that a boundary between the two successive first images is visible,
The combination effect may include the fifth display effect,
In the combination performance, the fifth display performance is performed after the fourth display performance.
A gaming machine characterized by:
[Aspect XB-4]
A gaming machine according to aspect XB-3,
The position of the boundary portion in the third display performance is different from the position of the boundary portion in the fifth display performance.
A gaming machine characterized by:
[Aspect XB-5]
A gaming machine according to aspect XB-4,
A variable display means for displaying a variable special symbol is provided,
The combination performance is performed during the same variation of the special symbols in the variation display means.
A gaming machine characterized by:

As shown in the game state management process of FIG. 28, in the gaming machine 1 of this embodiment, when the number of times the special symbol changes during the low probability state (normal state) reaches 500 (when the ceiling counter reaches 0), the game transitions to Yu-Time (low probability time-saving state). This Yu-Time continues until the special symbol changes 700 times.

The decorative pattern special variation effects A to C are explained below with reference to Figures 72 to 74. These decorative pattern special variation effects are executed during the decorative pattern variation effect when the game state is normal, time-saving (low probability, low base state), or probability variation (high probability, high base state). That is, the image control microcomputer 101 analyzes the command received from the sub-control board 90, and if it contains an instruction to execute the decorative pattern special variation effect, it reads the corresponding image data from the ROM 103 and displays the image on the display screen 7a or sub-display screen 64 of the image display device 7.

[Decorative pattern special change performance A]
FIG. 72 is a diagram for explaining the decorative pattern special change performance A. The decorative pattern special change performance A of FIG. 72 is a performance with the same change of the special pattern. In the decorative pattern special change performance A, as shown in FIG. 72(A), first, a decorative pattern change performance is performed. In this decorative pattern change performance, the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R change vertically in the approximate center of the display screen 7a on the display screen 7a. In addition, in the decorative pattern change performance, a right hit suggestion display XC1 is displayed in the upper left of the display screen 7a. This right hit suggestion display XC1 is a display that prompts the player to hit right. On the display screen 7a, a reserved icon 9A and a change icon 9C are displayed, but are omitted in the figure.

Next, as shown in FIG. 72(B), a performance before the moving object starts moving is performed. In this performance before the moving object starts moving, the display of the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R is erased. At this time, the right-hit suggestion display XC1 continues to be displayed.

Next, as shown in FIG. 72(C), a moving object movement performance A is performed. In this moving object movement performance A, a moving object XC2 appears from above the display screen 7a. The moving object XC2 is an image that imitates the second movable role object 15, and is specifically composed of a square-shaped image and a bar-shaped image. In addition, various letters and characters are displayed in the square-shaped portion of the moving object XC2. In this moving object movement performance A, when the moving object XC2 appears from above, a decorative pattern 8L is displayed according to the movement of the moving object XC2. The performance pattern 8L is a pattern 7. The right hit suggestion display XC1 continues to be displayed regardless of the movement of the moving object XC2.

Next, as shown in FIG. 72 (D), moving object movement presentation B is performed. In this moving object movement presentation B, the moving object XC2 moves upward. In this moving object movement presentation B, decorative pattern 8C is displayed in accordance with the movement of moving object XC2. Right hit suggestion display XC1 continues to be displayed regardless of the movement of moving object XC2.

Next, as shown in Fig. 72(E), a moving object movement presentation C is performed. In this moving object movement presentation C, the moving object XC2 moves downward. In this moving object movement presentation C, a decorative pattern 8R and a character XC4 are displayed in accordance with the movement of the moving object XC2. This character XC4 is a character with a smiling face. The right hit suggestion display XC1 continues to be displayed regardless of the movement of the moving object XC2.
Thereafter, regardless of the movement of the moving body XC2, the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are fixed and stopped to form a losing or big winning symbol.

[Decorative pattern special change performance B]
FIG. 73 is a diagram for explaining the decorative pattern special change performance B. The decorative pattern special change performance B in FIG. 73 is a performance with the same change of the special pattern. In the decorative pattern special change performance B, as shown in FIG. 73(A), first, a decorative pattern change performance is performed. In this decorative pattern change performance, the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R change vertically in the approximate center of the display screen 7a on the display screen 7a. In addition, in the decorative pattern change performance, a right hit suggestion display XC1 is displayed in the upper left of the display screen 7a. This right hit suggestion display XC1 is a display that prompts the player to hit right. On the display screen 7a, a reserved icon 9A and a change icon 9C are displayed, but are omitted in the figure.

Next, as shown in FIG. 73(B), an icon display effect is performed. In this icon display effect, the display of the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R is erased, and multiple icon images XC3 are displayed. These icon images XC3 represent a specific emblem, and are displayed scattered across the entire display screen 7a. At this time, the right-hit suggestion display XC1 continues to be displayed.

Next, as shown in FIG. 73(C), a moving object movement performance A is performed. In this moving object movement performance A, the moving object XC5 appears from the left side of the display screen 7a. The moving object XC5 moves from the left to the right on the display screen 7a. The moving object XC5 is an image imitating the first movable role object 14, and is specifically a rod-shaped image. In this moving object movement performance A, when the moving object XC5 passes through the icon image XC3, the icon image XC3 is erased from the part that touched the moving object XC5. Also, in the moving object movement performance A, in the post-movement area XC6 that expands as the moving object XC5 moves from the left to the right, the decorative pattern 8L is gradually displayed according to the movement of the moving object XC5. The post-movement area XC6 is the area after the movement of the moving object XC5 on the display screen 7a. The decorative pattern 8L is the 7 pattern. Regardless of the movement of the moving object XC5, the right-hit suggestion display XC1 continues to be displayed.

Next, as shown in FIG. 73 (D), a moving object movement performance B is performed. In this moving object movement performance B, the moving object XC5 moves further to the right on the display screen 7a. In this moving object movement performance B, when the moving object XC5 passes through the icon image XC3, the icon image XC3 is erased from the portion that touched the moving object XC5. Also, in the moving object movement performance B, the decorative pattern 8L is completely displayed in the post-movement area XC6 that expands as the moving object XC5 moves from the left to the right. The right hit suggestion display XC1 continues to be displayed regardless of the movement of the moving object XC5.

Next, as shown in FIG. 73(E), a moving object movement performance C is performed. In this moving object movement performance C, the moving object XC5 moves further to the right on the display screen 7a. In this moving object movement performance C, when the moving object XC5 passes through the icon image XC3, the icon image XC3 is erased from the portion that touched the moving object XC5. Also, in the moving object movement performance C, in the post-movement area XC6 that expands as the moving object XC5 moves from the left to the right, the decorative pattern 8C is gradually displayed in accordance with the movement of the moving object XC5. Regardless of the movement of the moving object XC5, the right hit suggestion display XC1 continues to be displayed.

Next, as shown in FIG. 73 (F), a moving object movement performance D is performed. In this moving object movement performance D, the moving object XC5 moves further to the right on the display screen 7a. In this moving object movement performance D, when the moving object XC5 passes through the icon image XC3, the icon image XC3 is erased from the portion that touched the moving object XC5. Also, in the moving object movement performance D, the decorative pattern 8C is completely displayed in the post-movement area XC6 that expands as the moving object XC5 moves from the left to the right. The right hit suggestion display XC1 continues to be displayed regardless of the movement of the moving object XC5.

Next, as shown in FIG. 73(G), a moving object movement performance E is performed. In this moving object movement performance E, the moving object XC5 moves further to the right on the display screen 7a. In this moving object movement performance E, when the moving object XC5 passes the icon image XC3, the icon image XC3 is erased from the portion that touched the moving object XC5. Also, in the moving object movement performance E, in the post-movement area XC6 that expands as the moving object XC5 moves from left to right, the decorative pattern 8R and the character XC4 are gradually displayed in accordance with the movement of the moving object XC5. This character XC4 is a character with a smiling face. Regardless of the movement of the moving object XC5, the right hit suggestion display XC1 continues to be displayed.

Next, as shown in FIG. 73 (H), a moving object movement performance F is performed. In this moving object movement performance F, the moving object XC5 moves further to the right on the display screen 7a. In this moving object movement performance F, when the moving object XC5 passes through the icon image XC3, the icon image XC3 is erased from the portion that touched the moving object XC5. Also, in the moving object movement performance F, the decorative pattern 8C and the character XC4 are completely displayed in the post-movement area XC6 that expands as the moving object XC5 moves from the left to the right. The right hit suggestion display XC1 continues to be displayed regardless of the movement of the moving object XC5.

Next, as shown in FIG. 73(I), a decorative pattern enlargement effect is performed. In this decorative pattern enlargement effect, the movement of the moving object XC5 is stopped and the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R are enlarged. At this time, the character XC4 does not enlarge. The character XC4 may be enlarged. The icon image XC3 that was not erased by the moving object XC5 continues to be displayed. The right hit suggestion display XC1 continues to be displayed.

Next, as shown in Fig. 73(J), a decorative symbol fade-out effect is performed. In this decorative symbol fade-out effect, the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R and the character XC4 gradually disappear. The icon image XC3 that has not been erased by the moving object XC5 continues to be displayed. The right-hit suggestion display XC1 continues to be displayed.
Thereafter, regardless of the movement of the moving body XC5, the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are fixed and stopped to form a losing or big winning symbol.

[Decorative pattern special change performance C]
FIG. 74 is a diagram for explaining the decorative pattern special change performance C. The decorative pattern special change performance C of FIG. 74 is a performance with the same change of the special pattern. In the decorative pattern special change performance C, as shown in FIG. 74(A), first, a decorative pattern change performance is performed. In this decorative pattern change performance, the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R change vertically in the approximate center of the display screen 7a on the display screen 7a. In addition, in the decorative pattern change performance, a right hit suggestion display XC1 is displayed in the upper left of the display screen 7a. This right hit suggestion display XC1 is a display that prompts the player to hit right. On the display screen 7a, a reserved icon 9A and a change icon 9C are displayed, but are omitted in the figure.

Next, as shown in FIG. 74(B), an icon display effect is performed. In this icon display effect, the display of the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R is erased, and multiple icon images XC3 are displayed. These icon images XC3 represent a specific emblem, and are displayed scattered across the entire display screen 7a. At this time, the right-hit suggestion display XC1 continues to be displayed.

Next, as shown in FIG. 74(C), a moving object movement performance A is performed. In this moving object movement performance A, the moving object XC5 appears from the left side of the display screen 7a. The moving object XC5 moves from the left to the right on the display screen 7a. The moving object XC5 is an image imitating the first movable role object 14, and is specifically a rod-shaped image. In this moving object movement performance A, when the moving object XC5 passes through the icon image XC3, the icon image XC3 is erased from the part that touched the moving object XC5. Also, in the moving object movement performance A, in the post-movement area XC6 that expands as the moving object XC5 moves from the left to the right, the decorative pattern 8L is gradually displayed according to the movement of the moving object XC5. The post-movement area XC6 is the area after the movement of the moving object XC5 on the display screen 7a. The decorative pattern 8L is the 7 pattern. Regardless of the movement of the moving object XC5, the right-hit suggestion display XC1 continues to be displayed.

Next, as shown in FIG. 74 (D), a moving object movement performance B is performed. In this moving object movement performance B, the moving object XC5 moves further to the right on the display screen 7a. In this moving object movement performance B, when the moving object XC5 passes through the icon image XC3, the icon image XC3 is erased from the portion that touched the moving object XC5. Also, in the moving object movement performance B, the decorative pattern 8L is completely displayed in the post-movement area XC6 that expands as the moving object XC5 moves from the left to the right. The right hit suggestion display XC1 continues to be displayed regardless of the movement of the moving object XC5.

Next, as shown in FIG. 74 (E), a moving object movement performance C is performed. In this moving object movement performance C, the moving object XC5 moves further to the right on the display screen 7a. In this moving object movement performance C, when the moving object XC5 passes through the icon image XC3, the icon image XC3 is erased from the portion that touched the moving object XC5. Also, in the moving object movement performance C, in the post-movement area XC6 that expands as the moving object XC5 moves from the left to the right, the decorative pattern 8C is gradually displayed in accordance with the movement of the moving object XC5. Regardless of the movement of the moving object XC5, the right hit suggestion display XC1 continues to be displayed.

Next, as shown in FIG. 74 (F), a moving object movement performance D is performed. In this moving object movement performance D, the moving object XC5 moves further to the right on the display screen 7a. In this moving object movement performance D, when the moving object XC5 passes through the icon image XC3, the icon image XC3 is erased from the portion that touched the moving object XC5. Also, in the moving object movement performance D, the decorative pattern 8C is completely displayed in the post-movement area XC6 that expands as the moving object XC5 moves from the left to the right. The right hit suggestion display XC1 continues to be displayed regardless of the movement of the moving object XC5.

Next, as shown in FIG. 74(G), a moving object movement performance E is performed. In this moving object movement performance E, the moving object XC5 moves further to the right on the display screen 7a. In this moving object movement performance E, when the moving object XC5 passes the icon image XC3, the icon image XC3 is erased from the portion touching the moving object XC5. Also, in the moving object movement performance E, in the post-movement area XC6 which expands as the moving object XC5 moves from left to right, a decorative pattern 8R and a character XC4 are gradually displayed in accordance with the movement of the moving object XC5. This character XC4 is a character with a smiling face. Regardless of the movement of the moving object XC5, the right hit suggestion display XC1 continues to be displayed.

Next, as shown in FIG. 74 (H), a moving object movement performance F is performed. In this moving object movement performance F, the moving object XC5 moves further to the right on the display screen 7a. In this moving object movement performance F, when the moving object XC5 passes through the icon image XC3, the icon image XC3 is erased from the portion that touched the moving object XC5. Also, in the moving object movement performance F, the decorative pattern 8C and the character XC4 are completely displayed in the post-movement area XC6 that expands as the moving object XC5 moves from left to right. The right hit suggestion display XC1 continues to be displayed regardless of the movement of the moving object XC5.

Next, as shown in FIG. 74 (I), a moving object movement presentation G is performed. In this moving object movement presentation G, the moving object XC5 is inverted and moves from right to left on the display screen 7a. In this moving object movement presentation G, the decorative pattern 8R and character XC4 are erased from the part that touches the moving object XC5. In other words, the decorative pattern 8R and character XC4 are gradually erased as the moving object XC5 moves. The right hit suggestion display XC1 continues to be displayed regardless of the movement of the moving object XC5.

Next, as shown in Figure 74 (J), a moving object movement effect H is performed. In this moving object movement effect H, the moving object XC5 moves further to the left on the display screen 7a. In this moving object movement effect H, the decorative pattern 8R and the character XC4 are completely erased. The right hit suggestion display XC1 continues to be displayed regardless of the movement of the moving object XC5.

Next, as shown in FIG. 74 (K), moving object movement presentation I is performed. In this moving object movement presentation I, the moving object XC5 moves further to the left on the display screen 7a. In this moving object movement presentation I, the decorative pattern 8C is erased from the portion that touches the moving object XC5. In other words, the decorative pattern 8C is gradually erased as the moving object XC5 moves. The right hit suggestion display XC1 continues to be displayed regardless of the movement of the moving object XC5.

Next, as shown in FIG. 74 (L), a moving object movement presentation J is performed. In this moving object movement presentation J, the moving object XC5 moves further to the left on the display screen 7a. In this moving object movement presentation J, the decorative pattern 8C is completely erased. The right hit suggestion display XC1 continues to be displayed regardless of the movement of the moving object XC5.

Next, as shown in FIG. 74 (M), a moving object movement presentation K is performed. In this moving object movement presentation K, the moving object XC5 moves further to the left on the display screen 7a. In this moving object movement presentation K, the decorative pattern 8L is erased from the portion that touches the moving object XC5. In other words, the decorative pattern 8L is gradually erased as the moving object XC5 moves. The right hit suggestion display XC1 continues to be displayed regardless of the movement of the moving object XC5.

Next, as shown in FIG. 74(N), a moving object movement performance L is performed. In this moving object movement performance L, the moving object XC5 moves further leftward on the display screen 7a. In this moving object movement performance L, the decorative pattern 8L is completely erased. The right hit suggestion display XC1 continues to be displayed regardless of the movement of the moving object XC5.
Thereafter, regardless of the movement of the moving body XC5, the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are fixed and stopped to form a losing or big winning symbol.

[Modification]
In the above decorative pattern special change performance C, in the moving body moving performances G to L, the decorative pattern or character is configured to be erased from the part that touches the moving body XC5, but this is not limited to this, and the decorative pattern or character may be configured to be erased from the part that is superimposed on the moving body XC5.
The decorative pattern special change performance B and the decorative pattern special change performance C can be executed in different changes, and may be executed, for example, during the same game state (time-saving state, special probability state).

[Example of effect]
In the decorative pattern special variation presentations A to C, the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R are gradually displayed as the moving object moves. With this configuration, the display presentation of the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R can be expressed by contrast with the moving object, and the display presentation of the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R can be made interesting. As a result, the interest of the game can be improved.

In the above decorative pattern special variation presentations B to C, in the moving object movement presentation, a part of the decorative pattern is displayed in a post-movement area XC6, which is the area after the moving object XC5 has moved, and the display area of the decorative pattern is displayed so as to gradually increase in size in the post-movement area XC6, which expands as the moving object XC5 moves. With this configuration, the movement of the moving object XC5 and the way the decorative patterns are displayed are linked, so that a new decorative pattern variation presentation can be provided to the player, and the decorative pattern variation presentation can be made mysterious and interesting. As a result, the interest of the game can be increased.

In the above decorative pattern special variation effects A to C, the decorative patterns are not displayed before the moving object movement effect in which the decorative patterns are gradually displayed. This configuration makes it possible to make the display of the decorative patterns in the moving object movement effect more mysterious and interesting. As a result, it is possible to increase the interest of the game.

In the decorative pattern special variation performance B, the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R are displayed in the moving object movement performance, and then in the decorative pattern fade-out performance, the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R are erased regardless of the movement of the moving object. With this configuration, the display of the decorative patterns in the moving object movement performance can be made more mysterious and interesting. As a result, the interest in the game can be increased.

In the decorative pattern special variation performance B, after the moving object movement performance, the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R expand in the decorative pattern expansion performance, while gradually fading and disappearing in the decorative pattern fade-out performance. With this configuration, the display of the decorative patterns in the moving object movement performance can be made more mysterious and interesting. As a result, the interest in the game can be increased.

The above decorative pattern special variation effects A to C are the same variation and are performed in a high base state (high probability game state or time-saving state) that is relatively advantageous to the player compared to a low base state (normal state). Players have higher expectations for a jackpot in a high base state than in a low base state. With this configuration, by performing a moving object movement effect during a specified variation in the high base state, it is possible to make the moving object movement effect more mysterious and to increase the sense of anticipation for the moving object movement effect. As a result, it is possible to increase the interest in the game.

[Example of embodiment]
In the gaming machine of this embodiment, the following aspects can be realized.
[Aspect XC-1]
A gaming machine having a display means capable of executing a plurality of display effects,
A first display effect may be performed as one of the plurality of display effects,
A second display effect may be performed as one of the plurality of display effects,
The first display effect is an effect of displaying a moving object,
The second display effect is an effect of displaying a decorative pattern,
A combination effect including the first display effect and the second display effect may be performed,
In the combination performance, when the first display performance is being performed, the second display performance is performed, and when the first display performance and the second display performance are performed, the decorative pattern is gradually displayed in the second display performance in accordance with the movement of the moving object in the first display performance.
A gaming machine characterized by:
[Aspect XC-2]
The gaming machine according to aspect XC-1,
In the combination performance, the second display performance displays a part of the decorative pattern in a post-movement area, which is an area after the moving body has moved, and displays the decorative pattern so as to gradually increase the display area in the post-movement area which is expanded as the moving body moves.
A gaming machine characterized by:
[Aspect XC-3]
The gaming machine according to aspect XC-2,
In the combination performance, the decorative pattern is not displayed before the second display performance is performed.
A gaming machine characterized by:
[Aspect XC-4]
The gaming machine according to aspect XC-3,
A third display effect may be performed as one of the plurality of display effects,
The third display effect is an effect in which the decorative pattern is erased,
The combination effect may include the third display effect,
In the combination performance, the third display performance is performed after the second display performance, and after the decorative pattern is displayed in the post-movement area in the second display performance, the decorative pattern is erased in the third display performance regardless of the movement of the moving body.
A gaming machine characterized by:
[Aspect XC-5]
The gaming machine according to aspect XC-4,
In the combination performance, in the third display performance, when the decorative pattern is erased, the decorative pattern is gradually faded while expanding and is erased.
A gaming machine characterized by:
[Aspect XC-6]
The gaming machine according to aspect XC-5,
The gaming state of the gaming machine is always one of a plurality of gaming states including a first gaming state that is relatively unfavorable to a player and a second gaming state that is relatively favorable to a player,
In the combination performance, the first display performance, the second display performance, and the third display performance are the same variation and are performed during the second game state.
A gaming machine characterized by:

As shown in the game state management process of FIG. 28, in the gaming machine 1 of this embodiment, when the number of times the special symbol changes during the low probability state (normal state) reaches 500 (when the ceiling counter reaches 0), the game transitions to Yu-Time (low probability time-saving state). This Yu-Time continues until the special symbol changes 700 times.

The decorative symbol missing effects A to C are explained below with reference to Figures 75 to 77. These decorative symbol missing effects are executed during decorative symbol variation effects when the game state is normal, time-saving (low probability, low base state), or probability change (high probability, high base state). That is, the image control microcomputer 101 analyzes the command received from the sub-control board 90, and if it contains an instruction to execute a decorative symbol missing effect, it reads out the corresponding image data from the ROM 103 and displays the image on the display screen 7a or sub-display screen 64 of the image display device 7.

[Decorative design missing effect A]
FIG. 75 is a diagram for explaining the decorative pattern missing performance A. The decorative pattern missing performance A of FIG. 75 is a performance with the same variation of the special pattern. In the decorative pattern missing performance A, as shown in FIG. 75(A), first, a decorative pattern variation performance is performed. In this decorative pattern variation performance, the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R vary vertically in the approximate center of the display screen 7a on the display screen 7a. On the display screen 7a, the reserved icon 9A and the variable icon 9C are displayed, but are omitted in the figure.

Next, as shown in FIG. 75(B), a reach state display effect is performed. In this reach state display effect, the decorative symbols 8L and 8R are displayed as tentatively stopped at 7 symbols, and the decorative symbol 8C is displayed as tentatively stopped at 4 symbols, forming a reach state. Also, in the reach state display effect, an icon image XD1 is displayed. This icon image XD1 represents a specified emblem. This icon image XD1 moves in the direction of the arrow in the figure (towards the decorative symbol 8C).

Next, as shown in FIG. 75(C), a moving object collision performance A is performed. In this moving object collision performance A, the icon image XD1 collides with the upper portion of the decorative pattern 8C. In this moving object collision performance A, the icon image XD1 collides with the decorative pattern 8C (four patterns), causing the collision portion of the decorative pattern 8C to be missing, resulting in a missing portion XD2.

Next, as shown in FIG. 75 (D), a moving object collision presentation B is performed. In this moving object collision presentation B, the decorative pattern 8C expands and deforms while the icon image XD1 collides with the center of the decorative pattern 8C. In this moving object collision presentation B, as the icon image XD1 collides with the decorative pattern 8C (four patterns), the colliding portion of the decorative pattern 8C is further damaged, resulting in a new damaged portion XD2. In other words, in this moving object collision presentation B, the decorative pattern 8C expands and deforms while the damaged portion XD2 expands.

Next, as shown in FIG. 75(D), a moving object collision presentation C is performed. In this moving object collision presentation C, the decorative pattern 8C expands and deforms further while the icon image XD1 collides with the lower portion of the decorative pattern 8C. In this moving object collision presentation C, as the icon image XD1 collides with the decorative pattern 8C (four patterns), the colliding portion of the decorative pattern 8C is further damaged, resulting in a new damaged portion XD2. In other words, in this moving object collision presentation C, the decorative pattern 8C expands and deforms while the damaged portion XD2 expands.

Next, as shown in FIG. 75 (F), a moving object collision presentation D is performed. In this moving object collision presentation D, the 4-symbol decorative pattern 8C having multiple missing parts XD2 (enlarged missing parts XD2) is erased, and a new decorative pattern 8C representing 5 symbols is displayed temporarily stopped to form a ready state. Also, the icon image XD1 is displayed with its position changed. This icon image XD1 moves in the direction of the arrow in the figure (towards the decorative pattern 8C).

Next, as shown in FIG. 75(G), a moving object collision effect E is performed. In this moving object collision effect E, the icon image XD1 collides with the upper portion of the decorative pattern 8C. In this moving object collision effect E, the icon image XD1 collides with the decorative pattern 8C (5 patterns), causing the collision portion of the decorative pattern 8C to be missing, resulting in a missing portion XD2.

Next, as shown in FIG. 75(H), a moving object collision performance F is performed. In this moving object collision performance F, the decorative pattern 8C expands and deforms while the icon image XD1 collides with the center of the decorative pattern 8C. In this moving object collision performance F, as the icon image XD1 collides with the decorative pattern 8C (5 patterns), the collision portion of the decorative pattern 8C is further damaged, resulting in a new damaged portion XD2. In other words, in this moving object collision performance F, the decorative pattern 8C expands and deforms while the damaged portion XD2 expands.

Next, as shown in FIG. 75(I), a moving object collision performance G is performed. In this moving object collision performance G, the decorative pattern 8C expands and deforms further while the icon image XD1 collides with the lower portion of the decorative pattern 8C. In this moving object collision performance G, as the icon image XD1 collides with the decorative pattern 8C (5 patterns), the colliding portion of the decorative pattern 8C is further damaged, resulting in a new damaged portion XD2. In other words, in this moving object collision performance G, the decorative pattern 8C expands and deforms while the damaged portion XD2 expands.

Next, as shown in Fig. 75(J), a super reach effect is performed. In this super reach effect, the decorative symbols 8L and 8R are temporarily stopped at 7 symbols, while the decorative symbol 8C fluctuates at high speed to form a reach state, and the ally character CRA and the icon image XD1 are displayed, with the icon image XD1 attacking the ally character CRA.
Thereafter, a losing symbol or a big winning symbol is displayed using the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R.

[Decorative design missing effect B]
FIG. 76 is a diagram for explaining the decorative pattern missing performance B. The decorative pattern missing performance B of FIG. 76 is a performance with the same variation of the special pattern. In the decorative pattern missing performance B, as shown in FIG. 76(A), first, a decorative pattern variation performance is performed. In this decorative pattern variation performance, the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R vary vertically in the approximate center of the display screen 7a on the display screen 7a. On the display screen 7a, the reserved icon 9A and the variable icon 9C are displayed, but are omitted in the figure.

Next, as shown in FIG. 76(B), a reach state display effect is performed. In this reach state display effect, the decorative symbols 8L and 8R are displayed as temporarily stopped at 7 symbols, and the decorative symbol 8C is displayed as temporarily stopped at 4 symbols, forming a reach state. Also, in the reach state display effect, an icon image XD1 is displayed. This icon image XD1 represents a specified emblem. This icon image XD1 moves in the direction of the arrow in the figure (towards the decorative symbol 8C).

Next, as shown in FIG. 76(C), a moving object collision presentation A is performed. In this moving object collision presentation A, the icon image XD1 collides with the upper portion of the decorative pattern 8C. In this moving object collision presentation A, the icon image XD1 collides with the decorative pattern 8C (four patterns), causing the collision portion of the decorative pattern 8C to be missing, resulting in a missing portion XD2.

Next, as shown in FIG. 76 (D), a moving object collision presentation B is performed. In this moving object collision presentation B, the decorative pattern 8C expands and deforms while the icon image XD1 collides with the center of the decorative pattern 8C. In this moving object collision presentation B, as the icon image XD1 collides with the decorative pattern 8C (four patterns), the colliding portion of the decorative pattern 8C is further damaged, resulting in a new damaged portion XD2. In other words, in this moving object collision presentation B, the decorative pattern 8C expands and deforms while the damaged portion XD2 expands.

Next, as shown in FIG. 76 (D), a moving object collision presentation C is performed. In this moving object collision presentation C, the decorative pattern 8C expands and deforms further while the icon image XD1 collides with the lower portion of the decorative pattern 8C. In this moving object collision presentation C, as the icon image XD1 collides with the decorative pattern 8C (four patterns), the colliding portion of the decorative pattern 8C is further damaged, resulting in a new damaged portion XD2. In other words, in this moving object collision presentation C, the decorative pattern 8C expands and deforms while the damaged portion XD2 expands.

Next, as shown in FIG. 76 (F), a moving object collision presentation D is performed. In this moving object collision presentation D, the 4-symbol decorative pattern 8C having multiple missing parts XD2 (enlarged missing parts XD2) is erased, and a new decorative pattern 8C representing 5 symbols is displayed temporarily stopped to form a ready state. In addition, the icon image XD1 is displayed with its position changed. This icon image XD1 moves in the direction of the arrow in the figure (towards the decorative pattern 8C).

Next, as shown in FIG. 76(G), a moving object collision effect E is performed. In this moving object collision effect E, the icon image XD1 collides with the upper portion of the decorative pattern 8C. In this moving object collision effect E, the icon image XD1 collides with the decorative pattern 8C (5 patterns), causing the collision portion of the decorative pattern 8C to be missing, resulting in a missing portion XD2.

Next, as shown in FIG. 76 (H), a moving object collision performance F is performed. In this moving object collision performance F, the decorative pattern 8C expands and deforms while the icon image XD1 collides with the center of the decorative pattern 8C. In this moving object collision performance F, as the icon image XD1 collides with the decorative pattern 8C (5 patterns), the colliding portion of the decorative pattern 8C becomes further missing, resulting in a new missing portion XD2. In other words, in this moving object collision performance F, the decorative pattern 8C expands and deforms while the missing portion XD2 expands.

Next, as shown in FIG. 76(I), a moving object collision performance G is performed. In this moving object collision performance G, the decorative pattern 8C expands and deforms further while the icon image XD1 collides with the lower portion of the decorative pattern 8C. In this moving object collision performance G, as the icon image XD1 collides with the decorative pattern 8C (5 patterns), the colliding portion of the decorative pattern 8C is further damaged, resulting in a new damaged portion XD2. In other words, in this moving object collision performance G, the decorative pattern 8C expands and deforms while the damaged portion XD2 expands.

Next, as shown in FIG. 76(J), decorative pattern repair performance A is performed. In this decorative pattern repair performance A, the decorative pattern 8C (5 patterns) is partially repaired by light emitted from the icon image XD1, and the area of the missing portion XD2 is reduced. Specifically, in decorative pattern repair performance A, the missing portions XD2 in the middle and lower parts of the decorative pattern 8C are repaired, returning it to the state it was in before it collided with the icon image XD1.

Next, as shown in FIG. 76 (K), decorative pattern repair performance B is performed. In this decorative pattern repair performance B, the decorative pattern 8C (5 patterns) is completely repaired by the light emitted from the icon image XD1, and the missing portion XD2 disappears. Specifically, in decorative pattern repair performance B, the upper part of the decorative pattern 8C is further repaired, and the decorative pattern 8C completely returns to the state it was in before colliding with the icon image XD1.

Next, as shown in Fig. 76(L), a super reach effect is performed. In this super reach effect, the decorative symbols 8L and 8R are temporarily stopped at 7 symbols, while the decorative symbol 8C fluctuates at high speed to form a reach state, and the ally character CRA and the icon image XD1 are displayed, with the icon image XD1 attacking the ally character CRA.
Thereafter, a losing symbol or a big winning symbol is displayed using the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R.

[Decorative design missing effect C]
FIG. 77 is a diagram for explaining the decorative pattern missing performance C. The decorative pattern missing performance C of FIG. 77 is a performance with the same variation of the special pattern. In the decorative pattern missing performance C, as shown in FIG. 77(A), first, a decorative pattern variation performance is performed. In this decorative pattern variation performance, the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R vary vertically in the approximate center of the display screen 7a on the display screen 7a. On the display screen 7a, the reserved icon 9A and the variable icon 9C are displayed, but are omitted in the figure.

Next, as shown in FIG. 77(B), a reach state display effect is performed. In this reach state display effect, the decorative symbols 8L and 8R are displayed as temporarily stopped at 7 symbols, and the decorative symbol 8C is displayed as temporarily stopped at 4 symbols, forming a reach state. Also, in the reach state display effect, an icon image XD1 is displayed. This icon image XD1 represents a specified emblem. This icon image XD1 moves in the direction of the arrow in the figure (towards the decorative symbol 8C).

Next, as shown in FIG. 77(C), a moving object collision performance A is performed. In this moving object collision performance A, the icon image XD1 collides with the upper portion of the decorative pattern 8C. In this moving object collision performance A, the icon image XD1 collides with the decorative pattern 8C (four patterns), causing the collision portion of the decorative pattern 8C to be missing, resulting in a missing portion XD2.

Next, as shown in FIG. 77(D), a moving object collision presentation B is performed. In this moving object collision presentation B, the decorative pattern 8C expands and deforms while the icon image XD1 collides with the center of the decorative pattern 8C. In this moving object collision presentation B, as the icon image XD1 collides with the decorative pattern 8C (four patterns), the colliding portion of the decorative pattern 8C is further damaged, resulting in a new damaged portion XD2. In other words, in this moving object collision presentation B, the decorative pattern 8C expands and deforms while the damaged portion XD2 expands.

Next, as shown in FIG. 77(D), a moving object collision presentation C is performed. In this moving object collision presentation C, the decorative pattern 8C expands and deforms further while the icon image XD1 collides with the lower portion of the decorative pattern 8C. In this moving object collision presentation C, as the icon image XD1 collides with the decorative pattern 8C (four patterns), the colliding portion of the decorative pattern 8C is further damaged, resulting in a new damaged portion XD2. In other words, in this moving object collision presentation C, the decorative pattern 8C expands and deforms while the damaged portion XD2 expands.

Next, as shown in FIG. 77(F), a moving object collision presentation D is performed. In this moving object collision presentation D, the 4-symbol decorative pattern 8C having multiple missing parts XD2 (enlarged missing parts XD2) is erased, and a new decorative pattern 8C representing 5 symbols is displayed temporarily stopped to form a ready state. In addition, the icon image XD1 is displayed with its position changed. This icon image XD1 moves in the direction of the arrow in the figure (towards the decorative pattern 8C).

Next, as shown in FIG. 77(G), a moving object collision effect E is performed. In this moving object collision effect E, the icon image XD1 collides with the upper portion of the decorative pattern 8C. In this moving object collision effect E, the icon image XD1 collides with the decorative pattern 8C (5 patterns), causing the collision portion of the decorative pattern 8C to be missing, resulting in a missing portion XD2.

Next, as shown in FIG. 77(H), a moving object collision performance F is performed. In this moving object collision performance F, the decorative pattern 8C expands and deforms while the icon image XD1 collides with the center of the decorative pattern 8C. In this moving object collision performance F, as the icon image XD1 collides with the decorative pattern 8C (5 patterns), the colliding portion of the decorative pattern 8C is further damaged, resulting in a new damaged portion XD2. In other words, in this moving object collision performance F, the decorative pattern 8C expands and deforms while the damaged portion XD2 expands.

Next, as shown in FIG. 77(I), a moving object collision performance G is performed. In this moving object collision performance G, the decorative pattern 8C expands and deforms further while the icon image XD1 collides with the lower portion of the decorative pattern 8C. In this moving object collision performance G, as the icon image XD1 collides with the decorative pattern 8C (5 patterns), the colliding portion of the decorative pattern 8C is further damaged, resulting in a new damaged portion XD2. In other words, in this moving object collision performance G, the decorative pattern 8C expands and deforms while the damaged portion XD2 expands.

Next, as shown in FIG. 77(J), a cut-in effect is performed. In this cut-in effect, a cut-in image XD3 is displayed so as to hide the decorative pattern 8C having the missing portion XD2, or the decorative patterns 8L and 8R. This cut-in image XD3 includes an icon image XD1 as a chance up, the words "It's super hot!" as a chance up, and an ally character CRA as a chance up.

Next, as shown in FIG. 77(K), decorative pattern repair performance A is performed. In this decorative pattern repair performance A, the decorative pattern 8C (5 patterns) is partially repaired by light emitted from the icon image XD1, and the area of the missing portion XD2 is reduced. Specifically, in decorative pattern repair performance A, the missing portions XD2 in the middle and lower parts of the decorative pattern 8C are repaired, returning it to the state it was in before it collided with the icon image XD1.

Next, as shown in FIG. 77 (L), decorative pattern repair performance B is performed. In this decorative pattern repair performance B, the decorative pattern 8C (5 patterns) is completely repaired by the light emitted from the icon image XD1, and the missing portion XD2 disappears. Specifically, in decorative pattern repair performance B, the upper portion of the decorative pattern 8C is further repaired, and the decorative pattern 8C completely returns to the state it was in before colliding with the icon image XD1.

Next, as shown in Fig. 77(M), a super reach effect is performed. In this super reach effect, the decorative symbols 8L and 8R are temporarily stopped at 7 symbols, while the decorative symbol 8C fluctuates at high speed to form a reach state, and the ally character CRA and the icon image XD1 are displayed, with the icon image XD1 attacking the ally character CRA.
Thereafter, a losing symbol or a big winning symbol is displayed using the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R.

[Modification]
In the decorative pattern loss performances A to C, the icon image XD1 is used as the moving object that collides with the decorative pattern, but this is not limited to this and anything that moves can be used, and a specified character, letter, effect, etc. can also be used as the moving object.
In the above decorative symbol missing effects A to C, the moving body collision effect is performed on the decorative symbols in the reach state, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the moving body collision effect may be performed on the decorative symbols in the moving state. In this case, the decorative symbols in the moving state may be decorative symbols in the moving state that are moving at a slower speed than the normal moving speed.
In the decorative pattern loss presentation C, the cut-in presentation is performed after the moving body collision presentation G, but this is not limited to this, and the cut-in presentation may be performed during any moving body collision presentation or any decorative pattern repair presentation.

[Example of effect]
In the decorative symbol missing effects A to C, the icon image XD1 as a moving body and the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are displayed, and then the icon image XD1 collides with the decorative symbol 8C, causing the colliding portion of the decorative symbol 8C to be missing, resulting in a missing portion XD2. According to this configuration, the action of the icon image XD1 as a moving body can make the decorative symbol variation effect mysterious, thereby increasing the interest of the game.

In the decorative pattern missing effects A to C described above, when a missing portion XD2 occurs in the decorative pattern 8C during a moving object collision effect, the decorative pattern 8C becomes larger as the missing portion XD2 expands. With this configuration, the decorative pattern becomes larger when the missing portion XD2 expands due to the icon image XD1, so the expansion of the missing portion XD2 due to the icon image XD1 can be emphasized, making the decorative pattern variation effect more mysterious and, as a result, increasing the interest of the game.

In the decorative pattern missing effects A to C described above, when a missing portion XD2 occurs in the decorative pattern 8C during a moving object collision effect, the decorative pattern 8C deforms as the missing portion XD2 expands. With this configuration, the decorative pattern deforms when the missing portion XD2 expands due to the icon image XD1, so the expansion of the missing portion XD2 due to the icon image XD1 can be emphasized, making the decorative pattern variation effect more mysterious and, as a result, increasing the interest of the game.

In the decorative symbol missing effects A to C, in the moving object collision effects A to C, a missing part XD2 appears in the decorative symbol 8C, which is a four-symbol pattern, and it expands, and these four symbols disappear, and then in the moving object collision effects D to G, a missing part XD2 appears in the decorative symbol 8C, which is a five-symbol pattern, and it expands. With this configuration, different symbols are missing in the decorative symbol 8C in order and expand, making the decorative symbol variation effect more mysterious, and as a result, the interest of the game can be increased.

In the decorative symbol missing performances A to C, in the moving body collision performances A to C, the missing part XD2 appears in the decorative symbol 8C, which is a four-symbol symbol, and the four symbols are expanded, and then in the moving body collision performances D to G, the decorative symbol 8C, which is a five-symbol symbol, has a missing part XD2 appear and expands, and then the super reach performance is performed. According to this configuration, in the decorative symbol 8C, different symbols are missing in order and expanded, and then the performance develops into the super reach performance, so that the decorative symbol variation performance can be made more mysterious, and further, the player can be made to pay attention to the subsequent super reach performance. As a result, the interest of the game can be improved.
[Example of embodiment]
In the gaming machine of this embodiment, the following aspects can be realized.
[Aspect XD-1]
A gaming machine having a display means capable of executing a plurality of display effects,
A first display effect may be performed as one of the plurality of display effects,
A second display effect may be performed as one of the plurality of display effects,
A third display effect may be performed as one of the plurality of display effects,
The first display effect is an effect of displaying a predetermined moving object,
The second display effect is an effect of displaying a first decorative pattern,
The third display effect is an effect in which the predetermined moving object collides with the first decorative pattern, and a collision portion of the first decorative pattern is damaged,
A combination effect including the first display effect, the second display effect, and the third display effect may be performed,
In the combination performance, when the first display performance is being performed, the second display performance is performed, and then the third display performance is performed.
A gaming machine characterized by:
[Aspect XD-2]
The gaming machine according to aspect XD-1,
In the third display performance of the combination performance, the first decorative pattern becomes larger as the missing portion expands.
A gaming machine characterized by:
[Aspect XD-3]
The gaming machine according to aspect XD-2,
In the third display performance of the combination performance, the first decorative pattern is deformed as the missing portion expands.
A gaming machine characterized by:
[Aspect XD-4]
A gaming machine according to aspect XD-3,
A fourth display effect may be performed as one of the plurality of display effects,
The fourth display effect is an effect in which a second decorative pattern different from the first decorative pattern is displayed, and the moving object collides with the second decorative pattern, causing a collision portion of the second decorative pattern to be damaged;
The combination effect may include a fourth display effect,
In the combination performance, in the third display performance, after the missing portion of the first decorative pattern is enlarged, the first decorative pattern disappears, and then the fourth display performance is performed.
A gaming machine characterized by:
[Aspect XD-5]
A gaming machine according to aspect XD-4,
In the fourth display performance of the combination performance, the missing portion of the second decorative pattern expands, and then the second decorative pattern disappears, and then a super reach performance is performed.
A gaming machine characterized by:

The following describes the ceiling reach indication effects A to C using Figures 78 to 80. These ceiling reach indication effects are executed during the decorative pattern change effect, etc. In other words, the image control microcomputer 101 analyzes the command received from the sub-control board 90, and if it contains an instruction to execute the ceiling reach indication effect, it reads out the corresponding image data from the ROM 103 and displays the image on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 and the sub-display screen 64 (right sub-display screen 64R, left sub-display screen 64L, and upper sub-display screen 64U).

[Ceiling Reaching Indication A]
FIG. 78 is a diagram for explaining the ceiling reaching scheduled indication effect A. The ceiling reaching scheduled indication effect is an effect that displays information (scheduled arrival information) related to the remaining number of fluctuations until b time reduction (play time) is reached in the normal state (normal probability state, non-time reduction state, and low base state) to suggest to the player the number of fluctuations (number of games) until the play time is reached. When the number of fluctuations reaches 600 times in the normal state (normal probability state, non-time reduction state, and low base state), the main control board 80 switches the game state to the time reduction state (normal probability state, time reduction state, and high base state). Here, the number of fluctuations that reaches the play time is also called the ceiling, and reaching that number of fluctuations is also called reaching the ceiling.

In ceiling reaching suggestion performance A, first, as shown in FIG. 78(A), the display screen 7a displays the change in decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R, and the game number display GS, which indicates the number of games (number of changes) since the end of the jackpot game. The change in decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R corresponds to the change in special symbol 1 in the normal state. The display of the reserved icon 9A and the change icon (respective reserved icon) 9C are omitted. The reserved icon 9A and the change icon (respective reserved icon) 9C may or may not be displayed.

The game count display GS is displayed in the bottom right corner of the display screen 7a, and contains a numerical value that indicates the number of games (number of changes) since the end of the jackpot game. In this example, the number of changes (number of games) since the end of the jackpot game is 400, and a text image of "game count 400" is displayed. The game count displayed in the game count display GS is not cleared by turning the power of the gaming machine 1 ON/OFF. Note that the game count displayed in the game count display GS may be cleared by turning the power ON/OFF.

In addition, in FIG. 78(A), the number of remaining fluctuations until the ceiling is reached is 200, and the value TC of the ceiling effect counter is 201 (TC=201). In the sub-RAM of the gaming machine 1, the following thresholds for the ceiling effect counter are set (stored): a first threshold TH1=201, a second threshold TH2=51, a third threshold TH3=11, and a fourth threshold TH4=1. Note that these threshold values are merely examples, and can be set to any numerical value.

The sub-control board 90 determines whether the value TC of the ceiling effect counter is equal to the first threshold value TH1 for each change. Then, when the value TC of the ceiling effect counter becomes equal to the first threshold value TH1 (TC = TH1 = 201), as shown in FIG. 78 (B), the sub-control board 90 displays the first expected arrival information TJ on the display screen 7a a predetermined time after the display of the changing decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R is displayed. The expected arrival information TJ is displayed in a first position in the center of the left edge of the display screen 7a, and includes a mode image MG and remaining number information CD.

The mode image MG represents the presentation mode that is executed after the number of fluctuations reaches 600 times in the normal state (after the ceiling is reached). In this embodiment of the gaming machine 1, the "Yu-time mode" presentation starts after the ceiling is reached, so an image showing the words "Yu-time mode" is displayed. The remaining number information CD is a text image of "200 times until", and is configured so that, together with the mode image MG displayed above, it can be read as "200 times until Yu-time mode". The "200 times" portion indicates the number of remaining fluctuations until the ceiling is reached as a number, and corresponds to the value of the ceiling presentation counter TC minus 1. When this expected reach information TJ is displayed, the player can know the remaining number of fluctuations until b time reduction (Yu-time) is reached.

The expected arrival information TJ disappears before the corresponding change (change of TC = TH1 = 201) ends (stops). In other words, the expected arrival information TJ is displayed after the change display of decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R is displayed when the value TC of the ceiling performance counter becomes equal to the first threshold value TH1, and disappears before the change display of decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R switches to a stop display. After the expected arrival information TJ disappears, the stop display of decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R is displayed.

After repeating the special pattern 1 variation multiple times from FIG. 78(B), the sub-control board 90 judges whether the value TC of the ceiling effect counter is equal to the second threshold value TH2 for each variation. Then, when the value TC of the ceiling effect counter becomes equal to the second threshold value TH2 (TC=TH2=51), as shown in FIG. 78(C)(D), the sub-control board 90 displays the second expected arrival information TJ on the display screen 7a a predetermined time after the display of the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R variations is displayed. The expected arrival information TJ is displayed in the second position in the center of the right edge of the display screen 7a, and includes the mode image MG and the remaining number of times information CD, just like the previous (first) display.

The mode image MG is a text image of "Yu-Time Mode" like the previous one. The remaining number information CD is a text image of "90% achieved until", and is configured so that it can be read as "90% achieved until Yu-Time Mode" together with the mode image MG displayed above. The "90%" part numerically indicates the ratio (%) of the number of fluctuations that have been performed up to now (required number minus remaining number) to the number of fluctuations required to reach the ceiling (for example, 600). This is the second time that the expected arrival information TJ has been displayed, and since the first expected arrival information TJ was displayed and erased last time in FIG. 78(B), 150 fluctuations have passed, so the player is nervous because after knowing the number of remaining fluctuations once, he or she does not know again. The second display of the expected arrival information TJ can give a sense of security after the nervousness.

The second expected arrival information TJ disappears before the change (change of TC = TH2 = 51) ends. In other words, the second expected arrival information TJ appears after the change display of decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R is displayed when the value TC of the ceiling performance counter becomes equal to the second threshold value TH2, and disappears before the change display of decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R switches to a stationary display. After the expected arrival information TJ disappears, the stationary display of decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R is displayed.

After repeating the special chart 1 variation multiple times from FIG. 78(D), the sub-control board 90 judges whether the ceiling performance counter value TC is equal to the third threshold value TH3 for each variation. Then, when the ceiling performance counter value TC becomes equal to the third threshold value TH3 (TC=TH3=11), as shown in FIG. 78(E), the sub-control board 90 displays the third expected arrival information TJ on the display screen 7a. The expected arrival information TJ is displayed in the first position at the center of the left edge of the display screen 7a, and includes the mode image MG and remaining number information CD, just like the first (previous) and second (previous) displays.

After the expected arrival information TJ is displayed on the display screen 7a for the third time, as shown in FIG. 78(F), the expected arrival information TJ moves downward toward the lower left edge of the display screen 7a. When it reaches the third position at the lower left edge of the display screen 7a, as shown in FIG. 78(G), the expected arrival information TJ moves rightward toward the fourth position at the lower right edge of the display screen 7a.

When the expected arrival information TJ reaches the fourth position at the bottom right edge of the display screen 7a, it is displayed adjacent to the game count display GS displayed at the bottom right edge of the display screen 7a, side by side vertically. Here, a new rectangular frame image is displayed, and inside the frame image, the remaining number information CD of "10 more games until" and the game count display GS of "590 games" are displayed vertically side by side.

After that, as shown in FIG. 78(H), even after the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are stopped and displayed, the third expected arrival information TJ remains displayed. The third expected arrival information TJ remains displayed in the fourth position at the bottom right edge of the display screen 7a until the ceiling is reached (until the number of fluctuations in the normal state reaches the ceiling arrival number).

When the special chart 1 changes several more times from FIG. 78 (H) and the value TC of the ceiling effect counter becomes equal to the fourth threshold value TH4 (TC = TH4 = 1), the remaining number of times information CD of the expected arrival information TJ becomes "0 times until" and the game number display GS becomes "600 games" as shown in FIG. 78 (I) (J).

When the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are displayed as stopped and the next change begins, the value TC of the ceiling effect counter becomes 0 (zero), and the main control board 80 switches the game state from the normal state (normal probability state, non-time-saving state, and low base state) to the time-saving state (normal probability state, time-saving state, and high base state). This causes the game to enter b time-saving (play time). Here, since the special symbol 1 reservation remains, a lottery for the special symbol 1 in the time-saving state is executed after entering.

As shown in Figure 78 (K), the expected arrival information TJ disappears from the display screen 7a, and the changing display of the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R is displayed. After that, as shown in Figure 78 (L), the mode image MG of the "Yu-time mode" and the start image TN of "enter" are displayed. This notifies the user that the ceiling has been reached and the "Yu-time mode" performance has begun.

[Ceiling Reaching Indication Performance B]
FIG. 79 is a diagram for explaining the ceiling reaching scheduled indication effect B. The ceiling reaching scheduled indication effect is an effect that displays information (scheduled arrival information) related to the remaining number of fluctuations until the b time reduction (play time) is reached in normal time (normal probability state, non-time reduction state, and low base state) to suggest to the player the number of fluctuations (number of games) until the play time is reached. When the number of fluctuations reaches 600 times in the normal state (normal probability state, non-time reduction state, and low base state), the main control board 80 switches the game state to the time reduction state (normal probability state, time reduction state, and high base state). Here, the number of fluctuations that reaches the play time is also called the ceiling, and reaching that number of fluctuations is also called reaching the ceiling.

In FIG. 79(A), the number of remaining fluctuations until the ceiling is reached is 200, and the value TC of the ceiling effect counter is 201 (TC=201). The sub-RAM of the gaming machine 1 has the following thresholds set (stored) for the ceiling effect counter: a first threshold TH1=201, a second threshold TH2=51, a third threshold TH3=11, and a fourth threshold TH4=1. Note that these threshold values are merely examples, and can be set to any numerical value.

For each change, the sub-control board 90 determines whether the value TC of the ceiling performance counter is equal to the first threshold value TH1. Then, when the value TC of the ceiling performance counter becomes equal to the first threshold value TH1 (TC = TH1 = 201), the sub-control board 90 displays the first expected arrival information TJ on the display screen 7a, as shown in FIG. 79 (A). The expected arrival information TJ is displayed large in a first position near the center of the display screen 7a, and includes a mode image MG and remaining number information CD.

The mode image MG represents a presentation mode that is executed after the number of fluctuations reaches 600 times (after the ceiling is reached) in the normal state. In the gaming machine 1 of this embodiment, the "Yu-Time Mode" presentation starts after the ceiling is reached, so an image showing the words "Yu-Time Mode" is displayed. The remaining number information CD includes a text image of "200 times left," a rectangular meter image, and a percentage image showing "40%."
The text image "200 times until", together with the mode image MG displayed above, is configured to read "200 times until Yu-time mode". The "200 times" portion numerically indicates the number of remaining fluctuations until the ceiling is reached, and corresponds to the value of the ceiling effect counter TC minus 1. The ratio image displayed as "40%" numerically indicates the percentage (%) of the number of remaining fluctuations until the ceiling is reached, relative to the number of fluctuations required to reach the ceiling (e.g., 600). The meter image corresponds the numerical value of the ratio image to the area of a specific color area, and the area of the specific color area decreases as the numerical value of the ratio image decreases. When this expected reach information TJ is displayed, the player can know the degree of the remaining number of fluctuations until the b time reduction (Yu-time) is reached.

As shown in FIG. 79(A), the display screen 7a also displays the change display of the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R, and the game number display GS, which indicates the number of games (number of changes) since the end of the jackpot game. The change display of the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R is a change display corresponding to the change of special symbol 1. The display of the reserved icon 9A and the change icon (relevant reserved icon) 9C are omitted. The reserved icon 9A and the change icon (relevant reserved icon) 9C may or may not be displayed.

The game count display GS is displayed in the bottom right corner of the display screen 7a, and contains a numerical value that indicates the number of games (number of changes) since the end of the jackpot game. In this example, the number of changes (number of games) since the end of the jackpot game is 400, and a text image of "game count 400" is displayed. The game count displayed in the game count display GS is not cleared by turning the power of the gaming machine 1 ON/OFF. Note that the game count displayed in the game count display GS may be cleared by turning the power ON/OFF.

The expected arrival information TJ disappears before the corresponding change (change of TC = TH1 = 201) ends. In other words, the expected arrival information TJ appears after the change display of decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R is displayed when the value TC of the ceiling performance counter becomes equal to the first threshold value TH1, and disappears before the change display of decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R switches to a stationary display. After the expected arrival information TJ disappears, a stationary display of "567" for decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R is displayed, as shown in FIG. 79 (B).

After repeating the special pattern 1 variation multiple times from FIG. 79(B), the sub-control board 90 judges whether the value TC of the ceiling effect counter is equal to the second threshold value TH2 for each variation. Then, when the value TC of the ceiling effect counter becomes equal to the second threshold value TH2 (TC=TH2=51), as shown in FIG. 79(C), the sub-control board 90 displays the second arrival schedule information TJ on the display screen 7a. The second arrival schedule information TJ is displayed in the same first position as the first arrival schedule information TJ. In other words, it is displayed near the center of the display screen 7a. The second arrival schedule information TJ includes the mode image MG and the remaining number information CD, just like when it was displayed last time. When the arrival schedule information TJ is displayed, the display area of the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R that were displayed in a variable manner is reduced.

The mode image MG is a text image of "Yu-Time Mode" like the previous one. The remaining number information CD includes a text image of "50 more", a rectangular meter image, and a ratio image displayed as "10%". The text image of "50 more", in conjunction with the mode image MG displayed above, is configured to read "50 more until Yu-Time Mode". The ratio image displayed as "10%" numerically indicates the ratio (%) of the number of remaining number of times to the ceiling to the number of necessary fluctuations (for example, 600) to reach the ceiling. The meter image corresponds the numerical value of the ratio image to the area of a specific color area, and the area of the specific color area decreases as the numerical value of the ratio image decreases. This is the second time that the expected arrival information TJ is displayed, and since 150 fluctuations have passed since the first expected arrival information TJ was displayed and erased last time in FIG. 79(A), the player is nervous because he does not know the remaining number of fluctuations after knowing it once. The display of the expected arrival information TJ for the second time can give a sense of security after the nervousness.

After the second expected arrival information TJ is displayed, as shown in FIG. 79 (D), the expected arrival information TJ moves toward the bottom right edge of the display screen 7a while shrinking. When it reaches the second position at the bottom right edge of the display screen 7a, it is displayed adjacent to the game count display GS displayed at the bottom right edge of the display screen 7a. The second expected arrival information TJ remains displayed at the second position at the bottom right edge of the display screen 7a until it reaches the ceiling (until the number of fluctuations in the normal state reaches the ceiling reach number). As the expected arrival information TJ shrinks, the display area of the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R that were being displayed in a variable manner is enlarged.

After that, as shown in FIG. 79(E), while the expected arrival information TJ is displayed, the false expected arrival information tj is displayed large. Whether or not the false expected arrival information tj is displayed is determined randomly by lottery for each fluctuation pattern, and here, it is assumed that the display is determined by lottery. Also, here, the false expected arrival information tj is displayed at the same fluctuation as the expected arrival information TJ, but it may be displayed at the fluctuation after the fluctuation in which the expected arrival information TJ is displayed. Also, the expected arrival information TJ may be displayed after the fluctuation in which the false expected arrival information tj is displayed. The false expected arrival information tj includes a mode image mg and false remaining number information cd, just like the expected arrival information TJ.

The mode image mg is a text image of "Yu-time mode" like the mode image MG. The fake remaining number information cd includes a text image of "10 times until", a rectangular meter image, and a ratio image represented as "2%". The text image of "10 times until", together with the mode image MG displayed above, is configured to be read as "10 times until Yu-time mode". The "10 times" part is a numerical value different from the remaining number of fluctuations until the ceiling is reached, and indicates the fake remaining number of fluctuations. The fake remaining number of fluctuations may be more or less than the actual remaining number of fluctuations, and is determined randomly. The "10 times" part is then decremented by one for each fluctuation. The ratio image represented as "2%" indicates the ratio (%) of the fake remaining number of fluctuations until the ceiling to the number of fluctuations required to reach the ceiling (for example, 600). The meter image corresponds the numerical value of the ratio image to the area of a specific color area, and the area of the specific color area decreases as the numerical value of the ratio image decreases. When this false expected arrival information tj is displayed, the player mistakenly believes it to be the number of remaining changes until b time reduction (play time) is reached.

After the false expected arrival information tj is displayed, as shown in FIG. 79 (F), the false expected arrival information tj moves toward the bottom left edge of the display screen 7a while being reduced in size. When it reaches the bottom left edge of the display screen 7a, it is displayed next to the expected arrival information TJ displayed at the bottom right edge of the display screen 7a. The player becomes confused and cannot tell which of the expected arrival information TJ or the false expected arrival information tj is correct. This makes the player excited and increases the interest.

After repeating the Special Chart 1 variation multiple times from FIG. 79(F), as shown in FIG. 79(G), when the text image included in the false remaining number information cd of the false expected arrival information tj becomes "0 times left", the text image "lie" is also displayed, informing the user that the false expected arrival information tj is fake. After that, as shown in FIG. 79(H), the display of the false expected arrival information tj disappears. The expected arrival information TJ continues to be displayed.

When the special chart 1 changes several more times from FIG. 79 (H) and the value TC of the ceiling effect counter becomes equal to the fourth threshold value TH4 (TC = TH4 = 1), the remaining number of times information CD of the expected arrival information TJ becomes "0 times until" and the game number display GS becomes "600 games" as shown in FIG. 79 (I) (J).

When the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R stop at "789" and the next change begins, the value TC of the ceiling effect counter becomes 0 (zero), and the main control board 80 switches the game state from the normal state (normal probability state, non-time-saving state, and low base state) to the time-saving state (normal probability state, time-saving state, and high base state). This causes the game to enter b time-saving (play time). Here, since the special symbol 1 reservation remains, a lottery for the special symbol 1 in the time-saving state is executed after entering.

As shown in Figure 79 (K), the expected arrival information TJ disappears from the display screen 7a, and the changing display of the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R is displayed. After that, as shown in Figure 79 (L), the mode image MG of the "Yu-time mode" and the start image TN of "enter" are displayed. This notifies the user that the ceiling has been reached and the "Yu-time mode" performance has begun.

[Ceiling Reaching Indication Performance C]
FIG. 80 is a diagram for explaining the ceiling reaching scheduled indication effect C. The ceiling reaching scheduled indication effect is an effect that displays information (scheduled arrival information) related to the remaining number of fluctuations until b time reduction (play time) is reached in normal time (normal probability state, non-time reduction state, and low base state) to suggest to the player the number of fluctuations (number of games) until the play time is reached. When the number of fluctuations reaches 600 times in the normal state (normal probability state, non-time reduction state, and low base state), the main control board 80 switches the game state to the time reduction state (normal probability state, time reduction state, and high base state). Here, the number of fluctuations that reaches the play time is also called the ceiling, and reaching that number of fluctuations is also called reaching the ceiling.

In FIG. 80(A), the number of remaining fluctuations until the ceiling is reached is 200, and the value TC of the ceiling effect counter is 201 (TC=201). In the sub-RAM of the gaming machine 1, the following thresholds for the ceiling effect counter are set (stored): a first threshold TH1=201, a second threshold TH2=51, a third threshold TH3=11, and a fourth threshold TH4=1. Note that these threshold values are merely examples, and can be set to any numerical value.

For each change, the sub-control board 90 determines whether the value TC of the ceiling performance counter is equal to the first threshold value TH1. Then, when the value TC of the ceiling performance counter becomes equal to the first threshold value TH1 (TC = TH1 = 201), the sub-control board 90 displays the first expected arrival information TJ on the display screen 7a, as shown in Figure 80 (A). The expected arrival information TJ is displayed large in a first position near the center of the display screen 7a, and includes a mode image MG and remaining number information CD.

The mode image MG represents the presentation mode that is executed after the number of fluctuations reaches 600 times in the normal state (after the ceiling is reached). In the gaming machine 1 of this embodiment, the mode presentation represented by the smiling face image starts after the ceiling is reached, so the smiling face image and the word "mode" are displayed. The remaining number information CD is a text image of "almost there", and is configured so that it can be read as "almost there until the smiling face image mode" together with the mode image MG displayed above. The "almost there" part qualitatively indicates the number of fluctuations remaining until the ceiling is reached, and corresponds to the value TC of the ceiling presentation counter. In this way, the remaining number information CD may be qualitative content other than a numerical value. Here, "not yet", "good", "almost there", "almost there", "almost there", and "almost there" are displayed in order according to the number of fluctuations remaining until the ceiling is reached. When this expected arrival information TJ is displayed, the player can roughly know the extent of the number of remaining fluctuations until the b time reduction (play time) is reached.

As shown in FIG. 80(A), the display screen 7a also displays the change display of the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R, and the game number display GS, which indicates the number of games (number of changes) since the end of the jackpot game. The change display of the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R is a change display corresponding to the change of special symbol 1. The display of the reserved icon 9A and the change icon (respective reserved icon) 9C are omitted. The reserved icon 9A and the change icon (respective reserved icon) 9C may or may not be displayed.

The game count display GS is displayed in the bottom right corner of the display screen 7a, and contains a numerical value that indicates the number of games (number of changes) since the end of the jackpot game. In this example, the number of changes (number of games) since the end of the jackpot game is 400, and a text image of "game count 400" is displayed. The game count displayed in the game count display GS is not cleared by turning the power of the gaming machine 1 ON/OFF. Note that the game count displayed in the game count display GS may be cleared by turning the power ON/OFF.

The expected arrival information TJ disappears before the change (change of TC = TH1 = 201) ends. In other words, the expected arrival information TJ is displayed after the changing display of decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R is displayed when the value TC of the ceiling performance counter becomes equal to the first threshold value TH1, and disappears before the changing display of decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R switches to a stationary display. After the expected arrival information TJ disappears, a stationary display of "567" for decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R is displayed, as shown in Figure 80 (B).

After repeating the special pattern 1 variation multiple times from FIG. 80(B), the sub-control board 90 judges whether the value TC of the ceiling effect counter is equal to the second threshold value TH2 for each variation. Then, when the value TC of the ceiling effect counter becomes equal to the second threshold value TH2 (TC=TH2=51), as shown in FIG. 80(C), the sub-control board 90 displays the second arrival schedule information TJ on the display screen 7a. The second arrival schedule information TJ is displayed in the same first position as the first arrival schedule information TJ. In other words, it is displayed near the center of the display screen 7a. The second arrival schedule information TJ includes the mode image MG and the remaining number information CD, just like when it was displayed last time. When the arrival schedule information TJ is displayed, the display area of the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R that were displayed in a variable manner is reduced.

The mode image MG is a text image of "Yu-time mode" just like the previous time. The remaining number information CD is a text image of "almost there", and together with the mode image MG displayed above, it is configured to read "almost there until the smiling face image mode". This is the second time that the expected reach information TJ has been displayed, and since the first expected reach information TJ was displayed and erased last time in Figure 80 (A), 150 changes have passed, so the player is nervous as after knowing the extent of the remaining number of changes once, he or she is now in a state of not knowing again. This second display can provide a sense of security after the nervousness.

After the second expected arrival information TJ is displayed, as shown in FIG. 80 (D), the expected arrival information TJ moves toward the bottom right edge of the display screen 7a while being reduced in size. When it reaches the second position at the bottom right edge of the display screen 7a, it is displayed adjacent to the game count display GS displayed at the bottom right edge of the display screen 7a, vertically. The second expected arrival information TJ remains displayed at the second position at the bottom right edge of the display screen 7a until it reaches the ceiling (until the number of fluctuations in the normal state reaches the ceiling reach number). As the expected arrival information TJ reduces and moves, the display area of the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R that were being displayed in a variable manner is enlarged.

After that, as shown in FIG. 80(E), even after the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R that were displayed in a changing state are displayed in a static state, the display of the expected arrival information TJ continues. As shown in FIG. 80(F), when the next change starts, the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R that were displayed in a static state are displayed in a changing state again. On the other hand, the expected arrival information TJ continues to be displayed with the same content as the previous change, without any changes. Also, as shown in FIG. 80(G), even after the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R that were displayed in a changing state are displayed in a static state, the display of the expected arrival information TJ continues. The expected arrival information TJ continues to be displayed with the same content as the previous change, without any changes. In other words, the remaining number of times information CD is a text image of "almost there," which does not change with each change, and the text content changes after a certain number of changes have passed.

After repeating the Special Chart 1 fluctuation multiple times from FIG. 80 (G), the sub-control board 90 judges for each fluctuation whether the value TC of the ceiling performance counter is equal to the third threshold value TH3. Then, when the value TC of the ceiling performance counter becomes equal to the third threshold value TH3 (TC = TH3 = 11), as shown in FIG. 80 (H), the sub-control board 90 changes the contents of the remaining number information CD of the expected achievement information TJ. Specifically, it changes the text image of "Almost there" to "Almost achieved."

When the special chart 1 fluctuation is repeated several more times from FIG. 80(H) and the value TC of the ceiling effect counter becomes equal to the fourth threshold value TH4 (TC=TH4=1), the contents of the remaining number of times information CD of the expected achievement information TJ are further changed as shown in FIG. 80(I)(J). Specifically, the text image of "Almost achieved" is changed to "Achieved". The game number display GS becomes "Game number 600".

When the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R stop at "678" and the next change begins, the value TC of the ceiling effect counter becomes 0 (zero), and the main control board 80 switches the game state from the normal state (normal probability state, non-time-saving state, and low base state) to the time-saving state (normal probability state, time-saving state, and high base state). This causes the game to enter b time-saving (play time). Here, since the special symbol 1 reservation remains, a lottery for the special symbol 1 in the time-saving state is executed after entering.

As shown in Figure 80 (K), the expected arrival information TJ disappears from the display screen 7a, and the changing display of the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R is displayed. After that, as shown in Figure 80 (L), the mode image MG of the "smile face image mode" and the start image TN of "enter" are displayed. This notifies the user that the ceiling has been reached and the "smile face image mode" performance has begun.

[Example of effect]
Below is an example of the effect of the ceiling reaching indication.
[Effect 1]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in Fig. 78 (A) to (E), in the normal state, a first effect is displayed in which the expected arrival information TJ, which is information related to the remaining number of fluctuations until the ceiling is reached, and after the first effect, in the normal state, a second effect is displayed in which the expected arrival information TJ disappears, and after the second effect, in the normal state, a third effect is displayed in which the expected arrival information TJ is displayed again. With this configuration, a novel effect that has never been seen before can be visually entertaining to the player, and can increase the interest. The same applies to Figs. 79 and 80.
[Effect 2]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in Fig. 78 (E) to (J), in the third presentation, the expected arrival information TJ continues to be displayed until the number of fluctuations in the normal state reaches the ceiling number of times. With this configuration, the player can be visually entertained by a novel presentation that has never been seen before, and the interest can be increased. The same applies to Fig. 79 and Fig. 80.
[Effect 3]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in Fig. 78, the expected reach information TJ includes a mode image representing a presentation mode (Yu-time mode) that is executed after the number of fluctuations in the normal state reaches the ceiling number of times. With this configuration, a novel presentation that has never been seen before can visually entertain the player, and increase the interest. The same is true for Figs. 79 and 80.
[Effect 4]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in Fig. 78(L), when the presentation mode executed after the ceiling is reached starts, a mode image representing the presentation mode is displayed. With this configuration, a novel presentation that has never been seen before can be visually entertaining to the player, and can increase the interest. The same is true for Figs. 79 and 80.
[Effect 5]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in Fig. 79, in the first effect, the arrival time information TJ is displayed at a first position on the display screen 7a, and in the third effect, the arrival time information TJ is displayed at the first position, then reduced and moved to a second position on the display screen 7a, and is continuously displayed at the second position. With this configuration, a novel effect that has never been seen before can visually entertain the player, and can increase the interest. The same applies to Fig. 80.
[Effect 6]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in Fig. 78, the expected reach information TJ includes a numerical image representing the remaining number of changes until the ceiling reach number is reached, and in the third presentation, a numerical image representing the number of games is displayed adjacent to the expected reach information TJ at the second position. With this configuration, a novel presentation that has never been seen before can visually entertain the player, and can increase the interest. The same is true for Fig. 79.

[Modification]
Below are some variations on the ceiling reaching indication.
[Modification 1]
In the ceiling reaching expected indication effects A and B, the remaining number of times information CD corresponds to the value of the ceiling effect counter TC minus 1. However, the remaining number of times information CD may correspond to the value of the ceiling effect counter TC. For example, in the above embodiment, the remaining number of times information CD is displayed as 0 at the time of the fluctuation just before the ceiling is reached, but the remaining number of times information CD may be 1 at the time of the fluctuation just before the ceiling is reached, and the Yu-time mode may be started without displaying the state where the remaining number of times information CD is 0.

[Modification 2]
In the ceiling reach indication performance B, the timing at which the false reach schedule information tj is displayed is determined randomly. That is, the false reach schedule information tj may be displayed before the reach schedule information TJ is displayed. Also, either the remaining number information CD of the reach schedule information TJ or the false remaining number information cd of the false reach schedule information tj may become 0 first. For example, in a state in which the false remaining number information cd of the false reach schedule information tj is not 0, the remaining number information CD of the reach schedule information TJ may become 0 first, and the game may enter the remaining number information CD play time mode.

[Modification 3]
In the ceiling reaching scheduled indication performance B, the remaining number information CD includes a text image of "200 times until", a rectangular meter image, and a percentage image of "40%". However, the remaining number information CD may be at least one of these.

[Example of embodiment]
In the gaming machine of this embodiment, the following aspects can be realized.
◇[Aspect A10-1]
A display means capable of displaying a plurality of types of images;
A gaming machine including a gaming state switching means for switching a gaming state to a second gaming state when a change count in a first gaming state reaches a specific count,
In the first gaming state, a first effect is displayed in which information relating to the remaining number of times of change until the specific number of times is reached is displayed;
a second effect in which the display of the expected arrival information disappears in the first gaming state after the first effect;
A third effect in which the expected arrival information is displayed again in the first gaming state after the second effect.
A gaming machine characterized by:
◇[Aspect A10-2]
The gaming machine according to aspect A10-1,
In the third performance, the display of the expected arrival information is continued until the number of fluctuations in the first gaming state reaches the specific number of times.
A gaming machine characterized by:
◇[Aspect A10-3]
A gaming machine according to aspect A10-1 or A10-2,
The expected arrival information includes a mode image representing a presentation mode to be executed after the number of fluctuations in the first gaming state reaches the specific number of times.
A gaming machine characterized by:
◇[Aspect A10-4]
The gaming machine according to aspect A10-3,
When the performance mode is started, the mode image is displayed.
A gaming machine characterized by:
◇[Aspect A10-5]
A gaming machine according to any one of Aspects A10-1 to A10-4,
In the first performance, the arrival schedule information is displayed at a first position on the display means;
In the third performance, the arrival schedule information is displayed at the first position, then moved to the second position of the display means while being reduced in size, and is continuously displayed at the second position.
A gaming machine characterized by:
◇[Aspect A10-6]
The gaming machine according to aspect A10-5,
The expected arrival information includes a numerical image representing the remaining number of changes until the specific number is reached,
In the third effect, a numerical image representing the number of games played is displayed adjacent to the expected achievement information at the second position.
A gaming machine characterized by:

In the gaming machine 1 of this embodiment, as shown in the game state management process of FIG. 28, when the number of times the special symbol changes during the low probability state (normal state) reaches 500 times (when the ceiling counter reaches 0, i.e., when the ceiling is reached), the game machine 1 transitions to Yu-Time (low probability time-saving state). This Yu-Time is designed to continue until the special symbol changes 700 times. In this embodiment, the display mode during the normal state is also called the normal mode, and the display mode during the low probability time-saving (Yu-Time) is also called the "bakusou time-saving mode." Hereinafter, during the low probability state (normal state), "when the number of times the special symbol changes reaches 500 times (when the ceiling counter reaches 0)" is also simply called "when the ceiling is reached."

Below, mode suggestion image display effects A to C are explained using Figures 81 to 83. This mode suggestion image display effect is executed during the decorative pattern variation effect when the game state is normal (low probability state) or time-saving state (low probability low base state). That is, the image control microcomputer 101 analyzes the command received from the sub-control board 90, and if an instruction to execute the mode suggestion image display effect is included, it reads out the corresponding image data from the ROM 103 and displays the image on the display screen 7a or the sub-display screen 64 of the image display device 7.

[Mode suggestion image display effect A]
81 is a diagram for explaining the mode suggestion image display effect A. This mode suggestion image display effect A shows each display effect in the number fluctuation before the number of times the special symbol fluctuates during the low probability state (normal state) reaches the ceiling (ceiling count is 0), when the ceiling is reached, and in the number fluctuation after the ceiling is reached. Specifically, in the mode suggestion image display effect A, the before-ceiling effect A is a display effect when the number of changes of the special pattern is 3 changes remaining until the ceiling is reached, the before-ceiling effect B is a display effect when the number of changes of the special pattern is 2 changes remaining until the ceiling is reached, the before-ceiling effect C is a display effect when the number of changes of the special pattern is 1 change remaining until the ceiling is reached, the ceiling reach effects A to C are display effects when the number of changes of the special pattern is 0 changes remaining until the ceiling is reached (ceiling reach), the ceiling reach effect D is a display effect when the number of changes of the special pattern has changed by 1 after reaching the ceiling, in other words, when it has changed by 1 after entering the explosive time-saving mode (Yu-time), and the ceiling reach effect E is a display effect when the number of changes of the special pattern has changed by a predetermined amount (for example, 10 changes) after reaching the ceiling, in other words, when it has changed by a predetermined amount (for example, 10 changes) after entering the explosive time-saving mode (Yu-time). In the mode suggestion image display presentation in Figure 81, a hold icon 9A and a variable icon 9C are displayed on the display screen 7a, but are omitted from the figure.

In this mode suggestion image display performance A, in the ceiling front performance A shown in FIG. 81 (A), the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R are displayed from approximately the center to the left side of the display screen 7a, and the first mode suggestion image XE1 and the remaining number of changes display XE2 are displayed from approximately the bottom of the center to the bottom right. The decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R are miss patterns, and specifically, the decorative pattern 8L is displayed as a stopped 7 pattern, the decorative pattern 8C is displayed as a stopped 4 pattern, and the decorative pattern 8R is displayed as an stopped 8 pattern. In addition, the first mode suggestion image XE1 is an image suggesting the explosive time-saving mode and is rectangular. That is, in this ceiling front performance A, the first mode suggestion image XE1 is displayed even though the game state is normal and the display mode is normal mode. In addition, the remaining number of changes display XE2 is displayed in correspondence with the first mode suggestion image XE1 and indicates the remaining number of changes until the ceiling is reached. In the pre-ceiling performance A, there are three special symbol changes remaining before the ceiling is reached, so the remaining change count display XE2 shows "3 changes remaining."

Next, as shown in FIG. 81(B), in the ceiling performance B, the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are displayed from approximately the center to the left side of the display screen 7a, and the first mode suggestion image XE1 and the remaining number of changes display XE2 are continuously displayed from approximately the bottom of the center to the bottom right. The decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are miss patterns, and specifically, the decorative symbol 8L is displayed as a stopped 9 symbol, the decorative symbol 8C is displayed as an stopped 8 symbol, and the decorative symbol 8R is displayed as a stopped 4 symbol. In this ceiling performance B, the first mode suggestion image XE1 is displayed even though the game state is normal and the display mode is normal mode. In addition, the remaining number of changes display XE2 is displayed in correspondence with the first mode suggestion image XE1. In the ceiling performance B, the number of changes of the special symbol is 2 changes remaining until the ceiling is reached, so the remaining number of changes display XE2 is displayed as "2 changes remaining".

Next, as shown in FIG. 81(C), in the ceiling performance C, the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are displayed from approximately the center to the left side of the display screen 7a, and the first mode suggestion image XE1 and the remaining number of changes display XE2 are continuously displayed from approximately the bottom of the center to the bottom right. The decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are miss patterns, and specifically, the decorative symbol 8L is displayed as a stopped 5 symbol, the decorative symbol 8C is displayed as a stopped 4 symbol, and the decorative symbol 8R is displayed as a stopped 7 symbol. In this ceiling performance C, the first mode suggestion image XE1 is displayed even though the game state is normal and the display mode is normal mode. In addition, the remaining number of changes display XE2 is displayed in correspondence with the first mode suggestion image XE1. In the ceiling performance C, the number of changes of the special symbol is one change remaining until it reaches the ceiling, so the remaining number of changes display XE2 is displayed as "one change remaining."

Next, as shown in FIG. 81(D), in the ceiling-reaching performance A, the remaining number of variations display XE2 continues to be displayed at the bottom of the display screen 7a, the right-hit display XE3 is displayed at the top right, and the speed-saving time-saving mode entry suggestion image XE4 is displayed approximately in the center. The right-hit display XE3 is a display that suggests to the player the direction in which the game ball should be shot, and more specifically, a display that suggests to the player to hit to the right. The speed-saving time-saving mode entry suggestion image XE4 is an image that suggests to the player that the speed-saving time-saving mode has been entered, and is displayed as "Congratulations!". In the ceiling-reaching performance A, the number of variations of the special pattern has reached its ceiling, so the remaining number of variations display XE2 is displayed as "0 times remaining."

Next, as shown in FIG. 81 (E), in the ceiling reaching performance B, the right hit display XE3 continues to be displayed in the upper right corner of the display screen 7a, and the second mode suggestion image XE5 is displayed in the lower left corner. The second mode suggestion image XE5 is an image suggesting the explosive time-saving mode. The second mode suggestion image XE5 is trapezoidal in shape, which is different from the shape of the first mode suggestion image XE1.

Next, as shown in FIG. 81(F), in the ceiling reaching performance C, the right hit display XE3 continues to be displayed in the upper right corner of the display screen 7a, and the mode explanation image XE6 is displayed approximately in the center. This mode explanation image XE6 is an image that shows an explanation of the speed-saving mode, and specifically displays "If the movable role moves, it's a big win", that is, the speed-saving mode indicates that a big win will occur if the movable role (for example, the first movable role 14 or the second movable role 15) moves (moves) from the retracted position to the deployed position.

Next, as shown in FIG. 81(G), in the ceiling reaching performance D, the right hit display XE3 is continuously displayed in the upper right corner of the display screen 7a, the second mode suggestion image XE5 is displayed in the lower left corner, and the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are displayed from roughly the center to the right side. The decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are miss symbols, and more specifically, the decorative symbol 8L is displayed as a stopped 9 symbol, the decorative symbol 8C is displayed as a stopped 4 symbol, and the decorative symbol 8R is displayed as an stopped 8 symbol. The decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R in the ceiling reaching performance D are the same size as the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R in the ceiling front performances A to C.

Next, after a predetermined change from the ceiling reaching performance D (for example, after 10 changes), in the ceiling reaching performance E, as shown in FIG. 81 (H), the right hit display XE3 continues to be displayed on the upper right of the display screen 7a, the second mode suggestion image XE5 is erased from the lower left, and the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R continue to be displayed from the center to the right side. The decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are miss patterns, and specifically, the decorative symbol 8L is displayed as a stopped 9 symbol, the decorative symbol 8C is displayed as a stopped 5 symbol, and the decorative symbol 8R is displayed as a stopped 7 symbol. The decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R in the ceiling reaching performance E are the same size as the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R in the ceiling front performances A to C.
After that, during the explosive speed reduction mode, an effect similar to the ceiling reaching effect E is performed.

[Mode suggestion image display effect B]
82 is a diagram for explaining the mode suggestion image display effect B. This mode suggestion image display effect B shows each display effect in the number fluctuation before the number of times the special symbol fluctuates during the low probability state (normal state) reaches the ceiling (ceiling count is 0), when the ceiling is reached, and in the number fluctuation after the ceiling is reached. Specifically, in the mode suggestion image display effect B, the before-ceiling effect A is a display effect when the number of changes of the special pattern is 3 changes remaining until the ceiling is reached, the before-ceiling effect B is a display effect when the number of changes of the special pattern is 2 changes remaining until the ceiling is reached, the before-ceiling effect C is a display effect when the number of changes of the special pattern is 1 change remaining until the ceiling is reached, the ceiling reach effects A to C are display effects when the number of changes of the special pattern is 0 changes remaining until the ceiling is reached (ceiling reach), the ceiling reach effect D is a display effect when the number of changes of the special pattern has changed by 1 after reaching the ceiling, in other words, when it has changed by 1 after entering the explosive time-saving mode (Yu-time), and the ceiling reach effect E is a display effect when the number of changes of the special pattern has changed by a predetermined amount (for example, 10 changes) after reaching the ceiling, in other words, when it has changed by a predetermined amount (for example, 10 changes) after entering the explosive time-saving mode (Yu-time). In the mode suggestion image display presentation in Figure 82, a hold icon 9A and a variable icon 9C are displayed on the display screen 7a, but are omitted from the figure.

In this mode suggestion image display performance B, in the ceiling front performance A shown in FIG. 82 (A), the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R are displayed from approximately the center to the left side of the display screen 7a, and the first mode suggestion image XE1 and the remaining number of changes display XE2 are displayed from approximately the bottom of the center to the bottom right. The decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R are miss patterns, and specifically, the decorative pattern 8L is displayed as a stopped 7 pattern, the decorative pattern 8C is displayed as a stopped 4 pattern, and the decorative pattern 8R is displayed as an stopped 8 pattern. In addition, the first mode suggestion image XE1 is an image suggesting the explosive time-saving mode and is rectangular. That is, in this ceiling front performance A, the first mode suggestion image XE1 is displayed even though the game state is normal and the display mode is normal mode. In addition, the remaining number of changes display XE2 is displayed in correspondence with the first mode suggestion image XE1 and indicates the remaining number of changes until the ceiling is reached. In the pre-ceiling performance A, there are three special symbol changes remaining before the ceiling is reached, so the remaining change count display XE2 shows "3 changes remaining."

Next, as shown in FIG. 82(B), in the ceiling performance B, the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are displayed from approximately the center to the left side of the display screen 7a, and the first mode suggestion image XE1 and the remaining number of changes display XE2 are continuously displayed from approximately the bottom of the center to the bottom right. The decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are miss patterns, and specifically, the decorative symbol 8L is displayed as a stopped 9 symbol, the decorative symbol 8C is displayed as an stopped 8 symbol, and the decorative symbol 8R is displayed as a stopped 4 symbol. In this ceiling performance B, the first mode suggestion image XE1 is displayed even though the game state is normal and the display mode is normal mode. In addition, the remaining number of changes display XE2 is displayed in correspondence with the first mode suggestion image XE1. In the ceiling performance B, the number of changes of the special symbol is 2 changes remaining until the ceiling is reached, so the remaining number of changes display XE2 is displayed as "2 changes remaining".

Next, as shown in FIG. 82(C), in the ceiling performance C, the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are displayed from approximately the center to the left side of the display screen 7a, and the first mode suggestion image XE1 and the remaining number of changes display XE2 are continuously displayed from approximately the bottom of the center to the bottom right. The decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are miss patterns, and specifically, the decorative symbol 8L is displayed as a stopped 5 symbol, the decorative symbol 8C is displayed as a stopped 4 symbol, and the decorative symbol 8R is displayed as a stopped 7 symbol. In this ceiling performance C, the first mode suggestion image XE1 is displayed even though the game state is normal and the display mode is normal mode. In addition, the remaining number of changes display XE2 is displayed in correspondence with the first mode suggestion image XE1. In the ceiling performance C, the number of changes of the special symbol is one change remaining until it reaches the ceiling, so the remaining number of changes display XE2 is displayed as "one change remaining."

Next, as shown in FIG. 82(D), in the ceiling-reaching performance A, the remaining number of variations display XE2 continues to be displayed at the bottom of the display screen 7a, the right-hit display XE3 is displayed at the top right, and the speed-saving time-saving mode entry suggestion image XE4 is displayed approximately in the center. The right-hit display XE3 is a display that suggests to the player the direction in which the game ball should be shot, and more specifically, a display that suggests to the player to hit to the right. The speed-saving time-saving mode entry suggestion image XE4 is an image that suggests to the player that the speed-saving time-saving mode has been entered, and is displayed as "Congratulations!". In the ceiling-reaching performance A, the number of variations of the special pattern has reached its ceiling, so the remaining number of variations display XE2 is displayed as "0 times remaining."

Next, as shown in FIG. 82(E), in the ceiling reaching performance B, the right hit display XE3 is continuously displayed in the upper right corner on the display screen 7a, and the second mode suggestion image XE5 is displayed from approximately the lower center to the lower right. The second mode suggestion image XE5 is an image suggesting the explosive time-saving mode. The second mode suggestion image XE5 is rectangular, and has the same shape as the first mode suggestion image XE1. However, the second mode suggestion image XE5 is formed larger than the first mode suggestion image XE1. The display position of the second mode suggestion image XE5 is the same as the display position of the first mode suggestion image XE1. However, this is not limited to this, and the display position of the second mode suggestion image XE5 may be different from the display position of the first mode suggestion image XE1.

Next, as shown in FIG. 82(F), in the ceiling reaching performance C, the right hit display XE3 continues to be displayed in the upper right corner of the display screen 7a, and the mode explanation image XE6 is displayed approximately in the center. This mode explanation image XE6 is an image that shows an explanation of the speed-saving mode, and specifically displays "If the movable role moves, it's a big win", that is, the speed-saving mode indicates that a big win will occur if the movable role (for example, the first movable role 14 or the second movable role 15) moves (moves) from the retracted position to the deployed position.

Next, as shown in FIG. 82(G), in the ceiling reaching performance D, the right hit display XE3 is continuously displayed in the upper right corner of the display screen 7a, the second mode suggestion image XE5 is displayed from approximately the lower center to the lower right, and the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are displayed from approximately the center to the right. The decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are miss symbols, and specifically, the decorative symbol 8L is displayed as a stopped 9 symbol, the decorative symbol 8C is displayed as a stopped 4 symbol, and the decorative symbol 8R is displayed as an stopped 8 symbol. The decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R in the ceiling reaching performance D are the same size as the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R in the ceiling front performances A to C.

Next, after a predetermined change from the ceiling reaching performance D (for example, after 10 changes), in the ceiling reaching performance E, as shown in FIG. 82(H), the right hit display XE3 continues to be displayed on the upper right of the display screen 7a, the second mode suggestion image XE5 is erased from the lower left, and the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R continue to be displayed from approximately the center to the right side. The decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are miss patterns, and specifically, the decorative symbol 8L is displayed as a stopped 9 symbol, the decorative symbol 8C is displayed as a stopped 5 symbol, and the decorative symbol 8R is displayed as a stopped 7 symbol. The decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R in the ceiling reaching performance E are the same size as the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R in the ceiling front performances A to C.
After that, during the explosive speed reduction mode, an effect similar to the ceiling reaching effect E is performed.

[Mode suggestion image display effect C]
83 is a diagram for explaining the mode suggestion image display effect C. This mode suggestion image display effect C shows each display effect in the number fluctuation before the number of times the special symbol fluctuates reaches the ceiling (ceiling count is 0) during the low probability state (normal state), when the ceiling is reached, and in the number fluctuation after the ceiling is reached. Specifically, in the mode suggestion image display effect C, the before-ceiling effect A is a display effect when the number of changes of the special pattern is 3 changes remaining until the ceiling is reached, the before-ceiling effect B is a display effect when the number of changes of the special pattern is 2 changes remaining until the ceiling is reached, the before-ceiling effect C is a display effect when the number of changes of the special pattern is 1 change remaining until the ceiling is reached, the ceiling reach effects A to C are display effects when the number of changes of the special pattern is 0 changes remaining until the ceiling is reached (ceiling reach), the ceiling reach effect D is a display effect when the number of changes of the special pattern has changed by 1 after reaching the ceiling, in other words, when it has changed by 1 after entering the explosive time-saving mode (Yu-time), and the ceiling reach effect E is a display effect when the number of changes of the special pattern has changed by a predetermined amount (for example, 10 changes) after reaching the ceiling, in other words, when it has changed by a predetermined amount (for example, 10 changes) after entering the explosive time-saving mode (Yu-time). In the mode suggestion image display presentation in Figure 83, a hold icon 9A and a variable icon 9C are displayed on the display screen 7a, but are omitted from the figure.

In this mode suggestion image display performance C, in the ceiling front performance A shown in FIG. 83 (A), the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R are displayed from approximately the center to the left side of the display screen 7a, and the first mode suggestion image XE1 and the remaining number of changes display XE2 are displayed from approximately the bottom of the center to the bottom right. The decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R are miss patterns, and specifically, the decorative pattern 8L is displayed as a stopped 7 pattern, the decorative pattern 8C is displayed as a stopped 4 pattern, and the decorative pattern 8R is displayed as an stopped 8 pattern. In addition, the first mode suggestion image XE1 is an image suggesting the explosive time-saving mode and is rectangular. That is, in this ceiling front performance A, the first mode suggestion image XE1 is displayed even though the game state is normal and the display mode is normal mode. In addition, the remaining number of changes display XE2 is displayed in correspondence with the first mode suggestion image XE1 and indicates the remaining number of changes until the ceiling is reached. In the pre-ceiling performance A, there are three special symbol changes remaining before the ceiling is reached, so the remaining change count display XE2 shows "3 changes remaining."

Next, as shown in FIG. 83(B), in the ceiling performance B, the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are displayed from approximately the center to the left side of the display screen 7a, and the first mode suggestion image XE1 and the remaining number of changes display XE2 are continuously displayed from approximately the bottom of the center to the bottom right. The decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are miss patterns, and specifically, the decorative symbol 8L is displayed as a stopped 9 symbol, the decorative symbol 8C is displayed as an stopped 8 symbol, and the decorative symbol 8R is displayed as a stopped 4 symbol. In this ceiling performance B, the first mode suggestion image XE1 is displayed even though the game state is normal and the display mode is normal mode. In addition, the remaining number of changes display XE2 is displayed in correspondence with the first mode suggestion image XE1. In the ceiling performance B, the number of changes of the special symbol is 2 changes remaining until the ceiling is reached, so the remaining number of changes display XE2 is displayed as "2 changes remaining".

Next, as shown in FIG. 83(C), in the ceiling performance C, the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are displayed from approximately the center to the left side of the display screen 7a, and the first mode suggestion image XE1 and the remaining number of changes display XE2 are continuously displayed from approximately the bottom of the center to the bottom right. The decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are miss patterns, and specifically, the decorative symbol 8L is displayed as a stopped 5 symbol, the decorative symbol 8C is displayed as a stopped 4 symbol, and the decorative symbol 8R is displayed as a stopped 7 symbol. In this ceiling performance C, the first mode suggestion image XE1 is displayed even though the game state is normal and the display mode is normal mode. In addition, the remaining number of changes display XE2 is displayed in correspondence with the first mode suggestion image XE1. In the ceiling performance C, the number of changes of the special symbol is one change remaining until the ceiling is reached, so the remaining number of changes display XE2 is displayed as "one change remaining."

Next, as shown in FIG. 83(D), in the ceiling-reaching performance A, the remaining number of variations display XE2 continues to be displayed at the bottom of the display screen 7a, the right-hit display XE3 is displayed at the top right, and the speed-saving time-saving mode entry suggestion image XE4 is displayed approximately in the center. The right-hit display XE3 is a display that suggests to the player the direction in which the game ball should be shot, and more specifically, a display that suggests to the player to hit to the right. The speed-saving time-saving mode entry suggestion image XE4 is an image that suggests to the player that the speed-saving time-saving mode has been entered, and is displayed as "Congratulations!". In the ceiling-reaching performance A, the number of variations of the special pattern has reached its ceiling, so the remaining number of variations display XE2 is displayed as "0 times remaining."

Next, as shown in FIG. 83(E), in the ceiling reaching performance B, the right hit display XE3 is continuously displayed in the upper right corner on the display screen 7a, and the second mode suggestion image XE5 is displayed from approximately the lower center to the lower right. The second mode suggestion image XE5 is an image suggesting the explosive time-saving mode. The second mode suggestion image XE5 is rectangular, and has the same shape as the first mode suggestion image XE1. However, the second mode suggestion image XE5 is formed larger than the first mode suggestion image XE1. The display position of the second mode suggestion image XE5 is the same as the display position of the first mode suggestion image XE1. However, this is not limited to this, and the display position of the second mode suggestion image XE5 may be different from the display position of the first mode suggestion image XE1.

Next, as shown in FIG. 83(F), in the ceiling reaching performance C, the right hit display XE3 continues to be displayed in the upper right corner of the display screen 7a, and the mode explanation image XE6 is displayed approximately in the center. This mode explanation image XE6 is an image that shows an explanation of the speed-saving mode, and specifically displays "If the movable role moves, it's a big win", that is, the speed-saving mode indicates that a big win will occur if the movable role (for example, the first movable role 14 or the second movable role 15) moves (moves) from the retracted position to the deployed position.

Next, as shown in FIG. 83(G), in the ceiling reaching performance D, the right hit display XE3 continues to be displayed in the upper right corner of the display screen 7a, the second mode suggestion image XE5 is displayed from approximately the lower center to the lower right, and the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are displayed from approximately the center to the right. The decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are miss symbols, and specifically, the decorative symbol 8L is displayed as a stopped 9 symbol, the decorative symbol 8C is displayed as a stopped 4 symbol, and the decorative symbol 8R is displayed as an stopped 8 symbol. The decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R in the ceiling reaching performance D are displayed smaller than the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R in the ceiling front performances A to C.

Next, after a predetermined change from the ceiling reaching performance D (for example, after 10 changes), in the ceiling reaching performance E, as shown in FIG. 83(H), the right hit display XE3 continues to be displayed in the upper right corner of the display screen 7a, the second mode suggestion image XE5 is erased from the lower left, and the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R continue to be displayed from approximately the center to the right side. The decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are miss patterns, and specifically, the decorative symbol 8L is displayed as a stopped 9 symbol, the decorative symbol 8C is displayed as a stopped 5 symbol, and the decorative symbol 8R is displayed as a stopped 7 symbol. The decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R in the ceiling reaching performance E are displayed smaller than the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R in the ceiling front performances A to C.
After that, during the explosive speed reduction mode, an effect similar to the ceiling reaching effect E is performed.

[Modification]
In the mode suggestive image display performance A, the first mode suggestive image XE1 and the second mode suggestive image XE5 have different shapes, but the characters "fast running time-saving mode" written in the first mode suggestive image XE1 and the second mode suggestive image XE5 are the same. However, this is not limited to this, and the characters written in the first mode suggestive image XE1 and the second mode suggestive image XE5 may be different.

[Example of effect]
In the above mode suggestion image display performances A to C, in the normal state, before the number of times the special symbols change reaches the ceiling, the first mode suggestion image XE1 suggesting the explosive time-saving mode (play time) is displayed even though the normal state is the normal mode in the normal state, and then, when the number of times the special symbols change reaches the ceiling and the display mode is changed from the normal state to the low probability time-saving mode and the normal mode is switched to the explosive time-saving mode, the second mode suggestion image XE5 suggesting the explosive time-saving mode is displayed. With this configuration, it is possible to give the player a sense of expectation for the explosive time-saving mode even before the ceiling is reached, and to increase the interest of the game.

In the above mode suggestion image display effects A to C, the first mode suggestion image XE1 is displayed in association with the remaining number of changes display XE2. This configuration can give the player a higher sense of anticipation for the explosive time-saving mode even before the ceiling is reached, thereby increasing the player's interest in the game.

In the above mode suggestion image display effects A to C, the second mode suggestion image XE5 is erased after a predetermined number of changes when the number of times the special symbol changes reaches the ceiling (a specified number of 500 times). With this configuration, the second mode suggestion image XE5 is erased after the display mode enters the speed-saving mode, so it is possible to draw the player's attention to the speed-saving mode display effect. As a result, it is possible to increase the player's interest in the game.

In the above mode suggestion image display effects A to C, when the ceiling is reached (before the second mode suggestion image XE5 is erased), a mode explanation image XE6 is displayed, which is an image that explains the super-speed time-saving mode. With this configuration, it is possible to convey details of the super-speed time-saving mode while giving the player a sense of anticipation for the super-speed time-saving mode, and therefore it is possible to dramatically increase the sense of anticipation for the super-speed time-saving mode. As a result, it is possible to increase the interest in the game.

In the above mode suggestion image display effects A to C, when the ceiling is reached, the right-hit display XE3 is displayed before the second mode suggestion image XE5 is displayed. With this configuration, the player can be encouraged to shoot the game ball when entering the explosive speed reduction mode, and the player can be prevented from suffering disadvantages. As a result, the interest of the game can be improved.

In the gaming machine of this embodiment, the following aspects can be realized.
[Aspect XE-1]
A gaming machine having a display means capable of executing a plurality of display effects,
The gaming machine is configured such that a game is played in one of a plurality of gaming states including a first gaming state and a second gaming state different from the first gaming state, and when a number of variations of a special symbol reaches a predetermined number in the first gaming state, the gaming state is changed to the second gaming state, and during the second gaming state, a display mode of the display means is shifted to a specific mode;
A first display effect may be performed as one of the plurality of display effects,
A second display effect may be performed as one of the plurality of display effects,
The first display effect is an effect in which, when the game state is the first game state and the number of times the special symbols change has not reached the predetermined number of times, a first mode suggesting image suggesting the specific mode in the second game state is displayed, even though the game state is the first game state;
The second display effect is an effect of displaying a second mode suggesting image suggesting the specific mode when the game state is changed from the first game state to the second game state and the display mode is transitioned to the specific mode as a result of the number of times the special symbols change reaches a predetermined number of times,
A combination effect including the first display effect and the second display effect may be performed,
In the combination performance, the first display performance is performed, and then the second display performance is performed.
A gaming machine characterized by:
[Aspect XE-2]
The gaming machine according to aspect XE-1,
In the first display effect of the combination effect, the first mode suggestion image is displayed in association with the remaining number of times up to the predetermined number of times.
A gaming machine characterized by:
[Aspect XE-3]
A gaming machine according to aspect XE-2,
In the second display performance of the combination performance, the second mode suggestion image is erased after the number of times of variation of the special symbol reaches a specific number after reaching the predetermined number.
A gaming machine characterized by:
[Aspect XE-4]
The gaming machine according to aspect XE-3,
A third display effect may be performed as one of the plurality of display effects,
The third display effect is an effect in which a mode explanation display showing an explanation of the specific mode is performed,
The combination effect may include the third display effect,
In the combination effect, the third display effect is performed before the second mode suggestion image is erased in the second display effect.
A gaming machine characterized by:
[Aspect XE-5]
A gaming machine according to aspect XE-4,
A fourth display effect may be performed as one of the plurality of display effects,
The fourth display effect is an effect in which a direction suggestion display is performed to suggest a direction in which a game ball is shot,
The combination effect may include the fourth display effect,
In the combination effect, the fourth display effect is performed before the second mode suggestion image in the second display effect is displayed.
A gaming machine characterized by:

In the gaming machine 1 of this embodiment, as shown in the game state management process of FIG. 28, when the number of times the special symbol changes during the low probability state (normal state) reaches 500 times (when the ceiling counter reaches 0, i.e., when the ceiling is reached), the game machine 1 transitions to Yu-Time (low probability time-saving state). This Yu-Time is designed to continue until the special symbol changes 700 times. In this embodiment, the display mode during the normal state is also called the normal mode, and the display mode during the low probability time-saving (Yu-Time) is also called the "bakusou time-saving mode." Hereinafter, during the low probability state (normal state), "when the number of times the special symbol changes reaches 500 times (when the ceiling counter reaches 0)" is also simply called "when the ceiling is reached."

In addition, in the gaming machine 1 of this embodiment, when the jackpot game ends, in the game state setting process of Figure 32, when the V flag is OFF (step 2301: NO) (i.e., when transitioning to a low-probability time-saving game state), the time-saving counter is set to 100 (step S2303) (i.e., the low-probability time-saving game state is maintained after the jackpot until the number of times the special pattern has changed reaches 100), but this is not limited to this, and when transitioning to the low-probability time-saving game state after the jackpot, the low-probability time-saving state may be continued until the number of times the special pattern has changed reaches 499. Also, in the game state setting process of FIG. 32, when the V flag is ON (step 2301: YES) (i.e., when transitioning to a high-probability time-saving game state), the time-saving count is set to 100 (step S2308), and the high-probability time-saving state is maintained after a jackpot until the number of times the special pattern has changed reaches 100; in this case, after the number of times the special pattern has changed reaches 100, the low-probability time-saving state may be continued until the number of times the special pattern has changed reaches 499.
The following mode suggestion image continuation effects A to C are effects that can occur when a low-probability time-saving state continues after a jackpot until the number of times the special pattern changes reaches 499, or when a low-probability time-saving state continues after a high-probability time-saving state until the number of times the special pattern changes reaches 499.
In addition, when the number of times the special symbols change after a jackpot reaches 499, or when the number of times the special symbols change after a high probability time-saving state reaches 499, this is referred to as "when a change occurs before reaching the ceiling."

Below, mode suggestive image continuation effects A to C will be explained using Figures 84 to 86. This mode suggestive image continuation effect is executed during the decorative pattern variation effect when the game state is normal (low probability state) or time-saving state (low probability low base state). That is, the image control microcomputer 101 analyzes the command received from the sub-control board 90, and if it contains an instruction to execute the mode suggestive image continuation effect, it reads the corresponding image data from the ROM 103 and displays the image on the display screen 7a or sub-display screen 64 of the image display device 7.

[Mode suggestion image continuation effect A]
FIG. 84 is a diagram for explaining the mode suggestive image continuation performance A. This mode suggestive image continuation performance A represents the number of fluctuations before the number of fluctuations of the special symbol reaches the pre-ceiling fluctuation during the low probability state (normal state), the pre-ceiling fluctuation, and each display performance in the fluctuation at the time of reaching the ceiling. Specifically, in the mode suggestive image continuation performance A, the pre-ceiling performance A is a display performance when the number of fluctuations of the special symbol is 3 fluctuations remaining until the pre-ceiling fluctuation, the pre-ceiling performance B is a display performance when the number of fluctuations of the special symbol is 2 fluctuations remaining until the pre-ceiling fluctuation, the pre-ceiling performance C is a display performance when the number of fluctuations of the special symbol is 1 fluctuation remaining until the pre-ceiling fluctuation, the pre-ceiling fluctuation performances A to B are display performances when the pre-ceiling fluctuation, and the ceiling reach performance is a display performance when the number of fluctuations of the special symbol is 0 fluctuations remaining until the ceiling is reached (ceiling reach), that is, when entering the explosive time-saving mode (play time). In this mode suggestion image continuation presentation A, a hold icon 9A and a variable icon 9C are displayed on the display screen 7a, but are omitted from the figure.

In this mode suggestion image continuation performance A, in the ceiling front performance A shown in FIG. 84 (A), the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R are displayed from approximately the center to the left side of the display screen 7a, and the explosive time-saving mode suggestion image XF1 and the remaining number of fluctuations display XF2 are displayed from approximately the bottom of the center to the bottom right. The decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R are miss patterns, and specifically, the decorative pattern 8L is displayed as a stopped 7 pattern, the decorative pattern 8C is displayed as a stopped 4 pattern, and the decorative pattern 8R is displayed as an stopped 8 pattern. The explosive time-saving mode suggestion image XF1 is an image that suggests that the game state is a low-probability time-saving state, that is, an image that suggests the explosive time-saving mode, and is trapezoidal. The explosive time-saving mode suggestion image XF1 includes the words "explosive time-saving mode" and various effects. The remaining number of variations XF2 is displayed in association with the explosive time-saving mode suggestion image XF1, and indicates the number of times remaining until the game state transitions from the low-probability time-saving state to the normal state, in other words, the number of times remaining until the pre-ceiling variation. In the pre-ceiling performance A, there are three variations of the special pattern remaining until the pre-ceiling variation, so the remaining number of variations XF2 is displayed as "3 times remaining."

Next, as shown in FIG. 84(B), in the performance B in front of the ceiling, the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are displayed from approximately the center to the left side of the display screen 7a, and the image XF1 suggesting the speed-saving mode and the remaining number of changes XF2 are continuously displayed from approximately the bottom of the center to the bottom right. The decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are miss symbols, and specifically, the decorative symbol 8L is displayed as a stopped 9 symbol, the decorative symbol 8C is displayed as an stopped 8 symbol, and the decorative symbol 8R is displayed as a stopped 4 symbol. The remaining number of changes XF2 is displayed in correspondence with the image XF1 suggesting the speed-saving mode. In the performance B in front of the ceiling, the number of changes of the special symbol is 2 changes remaining before the change before reaching the ceiling, so the remaining number of changes XF2 is displayed as "2 changes remaining."

Next, as shown in FIG. 84(C), in the performance C in front of the ceiling, the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are displayed from approximately the center to the left side of the display screen 7a, and the image XF1 suggesting the speed-saving mode and the remaining number of changes XF2 are continuously displayed from approximately the bottom of the center to the bottom right. The decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are miss symbols, and specifically, the decorative symbol 8L is displayed as a stopped 5 symbol, the decorative symbol 8C is displayed as a stopped 4 symbol, and the decorative symbol 8R is displayed as a stopped 7 symbol. The remaining number of changes XF2 is displayed in correspondence with the image XF1 suggesting the speed-saving mode. In the performance C in front of the ceiling, the number of changes of the special symbol is one change remaining until the change before reaching the ceiling, so the remaining number of changes XF2 is displayed as "one change remaining."

Next, as shown in FIG. 84(D), in the pre-ceiling-reaching variable performance A, an enlarged time-saving mode suggestion image XF1 is displayed approximately in the center of the display screen 7a.
Next, as shown in FIG. 84(E), in the pre-ceiling fluctuation performance B, the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are displayed from approximately the center to the left side of the display screen 7a, and the explosive speed reduction mode suggestion image XF1 and the remaining fluctuation number display XF2 are displayed from approximately the bottom of the center to the bottom right. The decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are miss patterns, and specifically, the decorative symbol 8L is displayed as a stopped 9 symbol, the decorative symbol 8C is displayed as a stopped 4 symbol, and the decorative symbol 8R is displayed as an stopped 8 symbol. The remaining fluctuation number display XF2 is displayed in correspondence with the explosive speed reduction mode suggestion image XF1. In the pre-ceiling fluctuation performance B, the performance is a fluctuation before the ceiling is reached, that is, the number of fluctuations of the special symbol is 0 fluctuations remaining until the ceiling is reached, so the remaining fluctuation number display XF2 is displayed as "0 number of times remaining". That is, in this pre-ceiling-reaching variable presentation B, even though the game state has changed from a low-probability time-saving state to a normal state, the image XF1 suggesting the explosive time-saving mode is displayed.

Next, as shown in FIG. 84(F), in the ceiling reaching performance, the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are displayed from the approximate center to the left side of the display screen 7a, the explosive speed reduction mode suggestion image XF1 is displayed from the approximate bottom of the center to the bottom right, and the right hit display XF4 is displayed in the upper right. The decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are miss symbols, specifically, the decorative symbol 8L is displayed as a stopped 9 symbol, the decorative symbol 8C is displayed as a stopped 5 symbol, and the decorative symbol 8R is displayed as a stopped 7 symbol. The right hit display XF4 is a display that suggests to the player the direction of the game ball, specifically, a display that suggests to the player to hit to the right.
After that, if there is no big win, the explosive speed reduction mode continues, and the performance continues in a low probability time reduction state like the ceiling reaching performance. In addition, after the ceiling is reached, when the number of times of fluctuation of the special pattern reaches 700 times, the game state changes from the low probability time reduction state to the normal state, the explosive speed reduction mode ends, and the display of the explosive speed reduction mode suggestion image XF1 also ends.

[Mode suggestion image continuation effect B]
FIG. 85 is a diagram for explaining the mode suggestive image continuation performance B. This mode suggestive image continuation performance B represents the number of fluctuations before the number of fluctuations of the special symbol reaches the pre-ceiling fluctuation during the low probability state (normal state), the pre-ceiling fluctuation, and each display performance in the fluctuation at the time of reaching the ceiling. Specifically, in the mode suggestive image continuation performance B, the pre-ceiling performance A is a display performance when the number of fluctuations of the special symbol is 3 fluctuations remaining until the pre-ceiling fluctuation, the pre-ceiling performance B is a display performance when the number of fluctuations of the special symbol is 2 fluctuations remaining until the pre-ceiling fluctuation, the pre-ceiling performance C is a display performance when the number of fluctuations of the special symbol is 1 fluctuation remaining until the pre-ceiling fluctuation, the pre-ceiling fluctuation performances A to B are display performances when the pre-ceiling fluctuation, and the ceiling reach performance is a display performance when the number of fluctuations of the special symbol is 0 fluctuations remaining until the ceiling is reached (ceiling reach), that is, when entering the explosive time-saving mode (play time). In this mode suggestion image continuation presentation B, a hold icon 9A and a variable icon 9C are displayed on the display screen 7a, but are omitted from the figure.

In this mode suggestion image continuation performance B, in the ceiling front performance A shown in FIG. 85 (A), the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are displayed from approximately the center to the left side of the display screen 7a, and the explosive time-saving mode suggestion image XF1 and the remaining number of fluctuations display XF2 are displayed on the lower side. The decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are miss patterns, and specifically, the decorative symbol 8L is displayed as a stopped 7 symbol, the decorative symbol 8C is displayed as a stopped 4 symbol, and the decorative symbol 8R is displayed as an stopped 8 symbol. The explosive time-saving mode suggestion image XF1 is an image that suggests that the game state is a low-probability time-saving state, that is, an image that suggests the explosive time-saving mode, and is trapezoidal. The explosive time-saving mode suggestion image XF1 includes the words "explosive time-saving mode" and various effects. The remaining number of variations display XF2 is displayed in correspondence with the speed-saving mode suggestion image XF1, and indicates the number of times remaining until the game state transitions from the low-probability time-saving state to the normal state, in other words, the number of times remaining until the pre-ceiling variation. In the pre-ceiling performance A, the number of variations of the special pattern remaining until the pre-ceiling variation is 3, so the remaining number of variations display XF2 is displayed as "3 times remaining." The speed-saving mode suggestion image XF1 and the number of variations display XF2 move from the right to the left on the display screen 7a, and when they reach the left end, they appear again from the right end and move left again.

Next, as shown in FIG. 85(B), in the performance B in front of the ceiling, the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are displayed from approximately the center to the left side of the display screen 7a, and the image XF1 suggesting the speed-saving mode and the remaining number of changes XF2 are continuously displayed at the bottom. The decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are miss patterns, and specifically, the decorative symbol 8L is displayed as a stopped 9 symbol, the decorative symbol 8C is displayed as an stopped 8 symbol, and the decorative symbol 8R is displayed as a stopped 4 symbol. The remaining number of changes XF2 is displayed in correspondence with the image XF1 suggesting the speed-saving mode. In the performance B in front of the ceiling, the number of changes of the special symbol is 2 changes remaining until the change before reaching the ceiling, so the remaining number of changes XF2 is displayed as "2 changes remaining." Additionally, the speed-saving mode suggestion image XF1 and the change count display XF2 move from right to left on the display screen 7a, and when they reach the left edge, they reappear from the right edge and move left again.

Next, as shown in FIG. 85(C), in the performance C in front of the ceiling, the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are displayed from approximately the center to the left side of the display screen 7a, and the image XF1 suggesting the speed-saving mode and the remaining number of changes XF2 are continuously displayed at the bottom. The decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are miss patterns, and specifically, the decorative symbol 8L is displayed as a stopped 5 symbol, the decorative symbol 8C is displayed as a stopped 4 symbol, and the decorative symbol 8R is displayed as a stopped 7 symbol. The remaining number of changes XF2 is displayed in correspondence with the image XF1 suggesting the speed-saving mode. In the performance C in front of the ceiling, the number of changes of the special symbol is one change remaining until the change before reaching the ceiling, so the remaining number of changes XF2 is displayed as "one change remaining." Additionally, the speed-saving mode suggestion image XF1 and the change count display XF2 move from right to left on the display screen 7a, and when they reach the left edge, they reappear from the right edge and move left again.

Next, as shown in FIG. 85(D), in the pre-ceiling-reaching variable performance A, an enlarged time-saving mode suggestion image XF1 is displayed approximately in the center of the display screen 7a.
Then, as shown in FIG. 85(E), in the pre-ceiling fluctuation performance B, the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are displayed from the approximate center to the left side of the display screen 7a, and the explosive speed reduction mode suggestion image XF1 and the remaining fluctuation number display XF2 are displayed on the lower side. The decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are miss patterns, and specifically, the decorative symbol 8L is displayed as a stopped 9 symbol, the decorative symbol 8C is displayed as a stopped 4 symbol, and the decorative symbol 8R is displayed as an stopped 8 symbol. The remaining fluctuation number display XF2 is displayed in correspondence with the explosive speed reduction mode suggestion image XF1. In the pre-ceiling fluctuation performance B, the performance is a pre-ceiling fluctuation, that is, the number of fluctuations of the special symbol is 0 fluctuations remaining until the pre-ceiling fluctuation, so the remaining fluctuation number display XF2 is displayed as "0 number of times remaining". That is, in this pre-ceiling fluctuation performance B, the explosive time-saving mode suggestion image XF1 is displayed even though the game state has changed from the low-probability time-saving state to the normal state. Also, the explosive time-saving mode suggestion image XF1 and the fluctuation count display XF2 move from the right to the left on the display screen 7a, and when they reach the left end, they appear again from the right end and move again to the left.

Next, as shown in FIG. 85(F), in the ceiling reaching performance, the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are displayed from the approximate center to the left side of the display screen 7a, the explosive speed reduction mode suggestion image XF1 is displayed at the bottom, and the right hit display XF4 is displayed at the upper right. The decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are miss symbols, specifically, the decorative symbol 8L is displayed as a 9 symbol, the decorative symbol 8C is displayed as a 5 symbol, and the decorative symbol 8R is displayed as a 7 symbol. The right hit display XF4 is a display that suggests to the player the direction of the ball to be shot, specifically, a display that suggests to the player to hit right. Also, the explosive speed reduction mode suggestion image XF1 moves from the right to the left on the display screen 7a, and when it reaches the left end, it appears again from the right end and moves again to the left.
After that, if there is no big win, the explosive speed reduction mode continues, and the performance continues in a low probability time reduction state like the ceiling reaching performance. In addition, after the ceiling is reached, when the number of times of fluctuation of the special pattern reaches 700 times, the game state changes from the low probability time reduction state to the normal state, the explosive speed reduction mode ends, and the display of the explosive speed reduction mode suggestion image XF1 also ends.

[Mode suggestion image continuation effect C]
FIG. 86 is a diagram for explaining the mode suggestive image continuation performance C. This mode suggestive image continuation performance C represents the number of fluctuations before the number of fluctuations of the special symbol reaches the pre-ceiling fluctuation during the low probability state (normal state), the pre-ceiling fluctuation, and each display performance in the fluctuation at the time of reaching the ceiling. Specifically, in the mode suggestive image continuation performance C, the pre-ceiling performance A is a display performance when the number of fluctuations of the special symbol is 3 fluctuations remaining until the pre-ceiling fluctuation, the pre-ceiling performance B is a display performance when the number of fluctuations of the special symbol is 2 fluctuations remaining until the pre-ceiling fluctuation, the pre-ceiling performance C is a display performance when the number of fluctuations of the special symbol is 1 fluctuation remaining until the pre-ceiling fluctuation, the pre-ceiling fluctuation performances A to B are display performances when the pre-ceiling fluctuation, and the ceiling reach performance is a display performance when the number of fluctuations of the special symbol is 0 fluctuations remaining until the ceiling is reached (ceiling reach), that is, when entering the explosive time-saving mode (play time). In this mode suggestion image continuation presentation C, a hold icon 9A and a variable icon 9C are displayed on the display screen 7a, but are omitted from the figure.

In this mode suggestion image continuation performance C, in the ceiling front performance A shown in FIG. 86 (A), the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R are displayed at the bottom left of the display screen 7a, and the explosive time-saving mode suggestion image XF1 and the remaining number of fluctuations display XF2 are displayed at the bottom. The decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R are miss patterns, and specifically, the decorative pattern 8L is displayed as a stopped 7 pattern, the decorative pattern 8C is displayed as a stopped 4 pattern, and the decorative pattern 8R is displayed as an stopped 8 pattern. The explosive time-saving mode suggestion image XF1 is an image that suggests that the game state is a low-probability time-saving state, that is, an image that suggests the explosive time-saving mode, and is formed in a strip shape from the bottom right to the bottom left of the display screen 7a. The explosive time-saving mode suggestion image XF1 includes the words "explosive time-saving mode" and various effects. In addition, the remaining number of changes display XF2 is displayed in correspondence with the speed-saving mode suggestion image XF1, and indicates the remaining number of times until the game state transitions from the low-probability time-saving state to the normal state, in other words, the remaining number of times until the change before reaching the ceiling. In the ceiling-before performance A, the number of changes of the special pattern is 3 changes remaining until the change before reaching the ceiling, so the remaining number of changes display XF2 is displayed as "3 times remaining". In addition, the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R are displayed in front of the speed-saving mode suggestion image XF1 (characters, effects, etc.). In other words, the speed-saving mode suggestion image XF1 is displayed behind the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R. In the speed-saving mode suggestion image XF1, the characters representing "speed-saving mode" move from the right to the left on the display screen 7a, and when they reach the left end, they appear again from the right end and move again to the left.

Next, as shown in FIG. 86(B), in the performance B in front of the ceiling, the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are displayed at the bottom left of the display screen 7a, and the Blast Time Shortening Mode suggestion image XF1 and the remaining number of changes display XF2 are continuously displayed at the bottom. The decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are miss patterns, and specifically, the decorative symbol 8L is displayed as a stopped 9 symbol, the decorative symbol 8C is displayed as an stopped 8 symbol, and the decorative symbol 8R is displayed as a stopped 4 symbol. In addition, the remaining number of changes display XF2 is displayed in correspondence with the Blast Time Shortening Mode suggestion image XF1. In the performance B in front of the ceiling, the number of changes of the special symbol is 2 changes remaining until the change before reaching the ceiling, so the remaining number of changes display XF2 is displayed as "2 times remaining". In addition, the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are displayed in front of the Blast Time Shortening Mode suggestion image XF1 (text, effects, etc.). In other words, the speed-saving mode suggestion image XF1 is displayed behind the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R. Also, in the speed-saving mode suggestion image XF1, the characters representing "speed-saving mode" move from right to left on the display screen 7a, and when they reach the left edge, they reappear from the right edge and move left again.

Next, as shown in FIG. 86(C), in the performance C before the ceiling, the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are displayed at the bottom left of the display screen 7a, and the image XF1 suggesting the speed-saving mode and the remaining number of changes XF2 are continuously displayed at the bottom. The decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are miss patterns, and specifically, the decorative symbol 8L is displayed as a stopped 5 symbol, the decorative symbol 8C is displayed as a stopped 4 symbol, and the decorative symbol 8R is displayed as a stopped 7 symbol. The remaining number of changes XF2 is displayed in correspondence with the image XF1 suggesting the speed-saving mode. In the performance C before the ceiling, the number of changes of the special symbol is one change remaining until the change before reaching the ceiling, so the remaining number of changes XF2 is displayed as "one change remaining." In addition, the speed-saving mode suggestion image XF1 and the change count display XF2 move from right to left on the display screen 7a, and when they reach the left end, they reappear from the right end and move left again. Also, the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R are displayed in front of the speed-saving mode suggestion image XF1 (text, effects, etc.). In other words, the speed-saving mode suggestion image XF1 is displayed behind the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R. In the speed-saving mode suggestion image XF1, the text representing "speed-saving mode" moves from right to left on the display screen 7a, and when they reach the left end, they reappear from the right end and move left again.

Next, as shown in FIG. 86(D), in the pre-ceiling-reaching variable performance A, an enlarged time-saving mode suggestion image XF1 is displayed approximately in the center of the display screen 7a.
Next, as shown in FIG. 86(E), in the pre-ceiling fluctuation performance B, the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are displayed at the bottom left, and the explosive speed reduction mode suggestion image XF1 and the remaining fluctuation number display XF2 are displayed at the bottom. The decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are miss patterns, and specifically, the decorative symbol 8L is displayed as a stopped 9 symbol, the decorative symbol 8C is displayed as a stopped 4 symbol, and the decorative symbol 8R is displayed as an stopped 8 symbol. The remaining fluctuation number display XF2 is displayed in correspondence with the explosive speed reduction mode suggestion image XF1. In the pre-ceiling fluctuation performance B, the performance is a fluctuation before the ceiling is reached, that is, the number of fluctuations of the special symbol is 0 fluctuations remaining until the ceiling is reached, so the remaining fluctuation number display XF2 is displayed as "0 number of times remaining". That is, in this pre-ceiling-reaching variable performance B, the speed-saving mode suggestion image XF1 is displayed even though the game state has changed from the low-probability time-saving state to the normal state. Also, the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R are displayed in front of the speed-saving mode suggestion image XF1 (characters, effects, etc.). In other words, the speed-saving mode suggestion image XF1 is displayed behind the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R. Also, in the speed-saving mode suggestion image XF1, the characters representing "speed-saving mode" move from the right to the left on the display screen 7a, and when they reach the left end, they appear again from the right end and move again to the left.

Next, as shown in FIG. 86(F), in the ceiling reaching performance, the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are displayed at the bottom left of the display screen 7a, the explosive driving time-saving mode suggestion image XF1 is displayed at the bottom, and the right-hand hit display XF4 is displayed at the top right. The decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are miss patterns, specifically, the decorative symbol 8L is displayed as a 9 symbol, the decorative symbol 8C is displayed as a 5 symbol, and the decorative symbol 8R is displayed as a 7 symbol. The right-hand hit display XF4 is a display that suggests to the player the direction of the ball to be shot, specifically, a display that suggests to the player to hit to the right. In addition, the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are displayed in front of the explosive driving time-saving mode suggestion image XF1 (such as letters and effects). In other words, the explosive driving time-saving mode suggestion image XF1 is displayed behind the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R. In addition, in the speed-saving mode suggestion image XF1, the letters representing "speed-saving mode" move from right to left on the display screen 7a, and when they reach the left end, they reappear from the right end and move left again.
After that, if there is no big win, the explosive speed reduction mode continues, and the performance continues in a low probability time reduction state like the ceiling reaching performance. In addition, after the ceiling is reached, when the number of times of fluctuation of the special pattern reaches 700 times, the game state changes from the low probability time reduction state to the normal state, the explosive speed reduction mode ends, and the display of the explosive speed reduction mode suggestion image XF1 also ends.

[Modification]
In the above-mentioned mode suggestion image continuation presentation C, the letters and effects contained in the speed-saving mode suggestion image XF1 move in a predetermined direction in the speed-saving mode suggestion image XF1, but this is not limited to this, and the letters and effects inside may also move as the speed-saving mode suggestion image XF1 moves.

In the above mode suggestion image continuation performances A to C, the speed-saving mode suggestion image XF1 in the performance before the ceiling and the speed-saving mode suggestion image XF1 in the performance before the ceiling reach fluctuation were the same, but the speed-saving mode suggestion image XF1 in the performance before the ceiling reach fluctuation may be different in shape, may contain different characters, may contain different effects, or may contain different images. Also, the speed-saving mode suggestion image XF1 in the performance before the ceiling and the speed-saving mode suggestion image XF1 in the performance before the ceiling reach were the same, but the speed-saving mode suggestion image XF1 in the performance before the ceiling reach and the speed-saving mode suggestion image XF1 in the performance before the ceiling reach fluctuation may be different in shape, may contain different characters, may contain different effects, or may contain different images. Furthermore, the image XF1 suggesting the explosive time-saving mode in the fluctuation before reaching the ceiling and the image XF1 suggesting the explosive time-saving mode in the ceiling reaching performance were the same, but the image XF1 suggesting the explosive time-saving mode in the fluctuation before reaching the ceiling and the image XF1 suggesting the explosive time-saving mode in the ceiling reaching performance may have different shapes, may contain different characters, may contain different effects, or may contain different images.

[Example of effect]
In the above-mentioned mode suggestion image continuation performances A to C, in the pre-ceiling performance of the number of fluctuations of the special symbol before reaching the pre-ceiling fluctuation during the low probability state (normal state), the blasting time-saving mode suggestion image XF1 is displayed, and then, in the pre-ceiling fluctuation performance in which the number of fluctuations of the special symbol reaches 499 times (corresponding to the second specified number) before the ceiling is reached, the blasting time-saving mode suggestion image XF1 indicating the low probability time-saving state is displayed even though the game state has changed from the low probability time-saving state to the normal state, and then, when the ceiling is reached, the blasting time-saving mode suggestion image XF1 is continuously displayed in the ceiling reach performance. According to this configuration, in the case where the low probability time-saving state returns to the normal state once before the ceiling is reached, and then returns to the low probability time-saving state immediately by reaching the ceiling, when the normal state is returned to, the blasting time-saving mode advantageous to the player is notified without notifying that the normal state has been returned to, it is possible to suppress the player's depression due to the return to the normal state, and the player can enjoy the blasting time-saving mode in a good mood. As a result, the enjoyment of the game can be improved.

In the above mode suggestion image continuation effects A to C, the speed-saving time-saving mode suggestion image XF1 in the effect before the ceiling and the speed-saving time-saving mode suggestion image XF1 in the effect before reaching the ceiling have the same configuration. With this configuration, when the low-probability time-saving state returns to the normal state before reaching the ceiling and then immediately returns to the low-probability time-saving state when the ceiling is reached, it is possible to suppress the player's mood from being depressed by returning to the normal state, and the player can enjoy the speed-saving time-saving mode in a good mood. As a result, it is possible to increase the interest in the game.

In the above mode suggestion image continuation effects A to C, the speed-saving time-saving mode suggestion image XF1 in the pre-ceiling effect and the speed-saving time-saving mode suggestion image XF1 in the ceiling-reaching effect have the same configuration. With this configuration, when the low-probability time-saving state returns to the normal state before the ceiling is reached and then immediately returns to the low-probability time-saving state upon reaching the ceiling, the player's mood can be suppressed from becoming depressed due to the return to the normal state once the normal state has been reached, and the player can enjoy the speed-saving time-saving mode in a good mood. As a result, the interest of the game can be increased.

In the mode suggestion image continuation performance C, the speed-saving mode suggestion image XF1 is configured so that the internal text and effects move. This configuration makes it possible to emphasize the speed-saving mode suggestion image XF1 to the player, allowing the player to enjoy the speed-saving mode in a good mood. As a result, the excitement of the game can be increased.

In the above mode suggestion image continuation effects A to C, the remaining number of changes display XF2 is performed in the ceiling front effects A to C. With this configuration, a countdown display can be performed from the low probability time-saving state to a return to the normal state, giving the player a sense of tension until the return to the normal state. As a result, the interest of the game can be improved.

In the gaming machine of this embodiment, the following aspects can be realized.
[Aspect XF-1]
A gaming machine comprising: a display means capable of executing a plurality of display effects; a game is played in one of a plurality of game states including a first game state which is relatively unfavorable to a player and a second game state which is relatively favorable to a player; and when the number of times that a special symbol changes in the first game state reaches a first specified number, the game state is changed to the second game state,
When the number of times the special symbols change during the second gaming state reaches a second specified number which is less than the first specified number, the gaming state of the gaming machine may be changed from the second gaming state to the first gaming state;
A first display effect may be performed as one of the plurality of display effects,
A second display effect may be performed as one of the plurality of display effects,
A third display effect may be performed as one of the plurality of display effects,
the first display effect is an effect of displaying, when the second gaming state is established, an advantageous mode suggesting image suggesting that the mode is advantageous to the player on the display means;
The second display effect is performed after the first display effect when the number of times the special symbols change reaches the second specified number of times, and is an effect in which the advantageous mode suggestion image is displayed even though the number of times the special symbols change reaches the second specified number of times and the game state is changed to the first game state,
The third display effect is performed after the second display effect when the number of times the special symbols change reaches the first specified number of times, and is an effect for displaying the advantageous mode suggestion image.
A gaming machine characterized by:
[Aspect XF-2]
The gaming machine according to aspect XF-1,
The advantageous mode suggestion image in the first display effect and the advantageous mode suggestion image in the second display effect are the same.
A gaming machine characterized by:
[Aspect XF-3]
The gaming machine according to aspect XF-2,
The advantageous mode suggestion image in the first display effect and the advantageous mode suggestion image in the third display effect are the same.
A gaming machine characterized by:
[Aspect XF-4]
The gaming machine according to aspect XF-3,
The advantageous mode suggestion image includes a moving image.
A gaming machine characterized by:
[Aspect XF-5]
A gaming machine according to aspect XF-4,
In the first display performance, a remaining number of variations is displayed to indicate the remaining number of variations until the number of variations of the special pattern becomes the second specified number.
A gaming machine characterized by:

As shown in the game state management process of FIG. 28, in the gaming machine 1 of this embodiment, when the number of times the special symbol changes during the low probability state (normal state) reaches 500 (when the ceiling counter reaches 0), the game transitions to Yu-Time (low probability time-saving state). This Yu-Time continues until the special symbol changes 700 times.

The multiple section display effects A to C are explained below with reference to Figures 87 to 89. The multiple section display effects are executed during the decorative pattern variation effect when the game state is normal, time-saving (low probability, low base state), or probability change (high probability, high base state). That is, the image control microcomputer 101 analyzes the command received from the sub-control board 90, and if it contains an instruction to execute the multiple section display effect, it reads the corresponding image data from the ROM 103 and displays the image on the display screen 7a or sub-display screen 64 of the image display device 7.

[Multiple-section display effect A]
FIG. 87 is a diagram for explaining the multi-section display performance A. The multi-section display performance A in FIG. 87 is a performance with the same variation of special symbols. In the multi-section display performance A, as shown in FIG. 87(A), first, a decorative symbol variation performance is performed. In this decorative symbol variation performance, the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R vary vertically in the approximate center of the display screen 7a on the display screen 7a. On the display screen 7a, the reserved icon 9A and the variable icon 9C are displayed, but are omitted in the figure.

Next, as shown in FIG. 87(B), a button display effect is performed. In this button display effect, decorative patterns 8L and 8R are displayed as stopped symbols, and a button image XG is displayed on the changing decorative pattern 8C. This button image XG is an image for encouraging the player to operate the effect button 63, and "PUSH" is displayed within the image. The decorative pattern 8L is displayed as a stopped symbol of 2 symbols, and the decorative pattern 8R is displayed as a stopped symbol of 3 symbols.

Next, as shown in FIG. 87(C), a split screen effect is performed. In this split screen effect, button image XG is continuously displayed on display screen 7a, and a predetermined area is divided into nine sections G11, G12, G13, G21, G22, G23, G31, G32, and G33 to form split areas G. Button image XG is displayed in section G22. In other words, in this split screen effect, split area G is formed so that button image XG is located in section G22. Each section of this split area G is formed in a matrix (grid, checkerboard).

Next, as shown in FIG. 87(D), a section image display performance is performed. In the section image display performance, in the divided area G, the second character group CRB is displayed in the section G11, then the first character group CRA is displayed in the section G21, then the first character group CRA is displayed in the section G31, then the first character group CRA is displayed in the section G32, then the first character group CRA is displayed in the section G33, then the first character group CRA is displayed in the section G23, then the first character group CRA is displayed in the section G13, then the second character group CRB is displayed in the section G12. That is, in the section image display performance, in the divided area G, the second character group CRB is displayed in the section G11, and then the first character group CRA or the second character group CRB is displayed in each section in order, clockwise from the button image XG. The first character group CRA is an image representing a battle between an ally character and an enemy character. The second character group CRB is an image that represents a character with a smiling face and an emblem made up of a circle and a triangle.

Next, as shown in Figure 87 (E), a section image erasure effect is performed. In this section image erasure effect, the first character group CRA, the second character group CRB, or the button image XG displayed in each section of the divided area G are erased all at once, resulting in a blackout effect. In the example of Figure 87 (E), the blackout state is represented by hatching. Note that instead of a blackout, other images, such as a sandstorm image, may be displayed.

Next, as shown in FIG. 87(F), an entire section image display is performed. In this entire section image display, a character image CRC that is different from the first character group CRA and the second character group CRB is displayed in the entire divided area G (each section). This character image CRC represents a fighting warrior character.

Next, as shown in Figure 87 (G), Super Reach performance A is performed. In this Super Reach performance A, a Reach state is formed by the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R. In more detail, the decorative symbols 8L and 8R are displayed as stopped 7 symbols, and the decorative symbol 8C is fluctuating at high speed.

Next, as shown in FIG. 87(H), a super reach effect B is performed. In this super reach effect B, the reach state is continued by the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R, and the first character group CRA that was displayed in the multiple sections of the divided area G of the section image display effect is displayed, and a predetermined action is performed.

87(I), a super reach effect C is performed. In this super reach effect C, the reach state is continued by the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R, and the character image CRC and the second character group CRB are displayed, and an action in which they face off against each other unfolds.
Thereafter, a losing symbol or a big winning symbol is displayed by the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R, and a losing symbol or a big winning symbol is notified.

[Multiple-section display effect B]
FIG. 88 is a diagram for explaining the multi-section display performance B. The multi-section display performance B in FIG. 88 is a performance with the same variation of special symbols. In the multi-section display performance B, as shown in FIG. 88(A), first, a decorative symbol variation performance is performed. In this decorative symbol variation performance, the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R vary vertically in the approximate center of the display screen 7a on the display screen 7a. On the display screen 7a, the reserved icon 9A and the variable icon 9C are displayed, but are omitted in the figure.

Next, as shown in FIG. 88(B), a button display effect is performed. In this button display effect, decorative patterns 8L and 8R are displayed as stopped symbols, and a button image XG is displayed on the changing decorative pattern 8C. This button image XG is an image for encouraging the player to operate the effect button 63, and "PUSH" is displayed within the image. The decorative pattern 8L is displayed as a stopped symbol of 2 symbols, and the decorative pattern 8R is displayed as a stopped symbol of 3 symbols.

Next, as shown in FIG. 88(C), a split screen effect is performed. In this split screen effect, button image XG is continuously displayed on display screen 7a, and a predetermined area is divided into nine sections G11, G12, G13, G21, G22, G23, G31, G32, and G33 to form split areas G. Button image XG is displayed in section G22. In other words, in this split screen effect, split area G is formed so that button image XG is located in section G22. Each section of this split area G is formed in a matrix (grid, checkerboard).

Next, as shown in FIG. 88(D), a section image display performance is performed. In the section image display performance, in the divided area G, the second character group CRB is displayed in the section G11, then the first character group CRA is displayed in the section G21, then the first character group CRA is displayed in the section G31, then the first character group CRA is displayed in the section G32, then the first character group CRA is displayed in the section G33, then the first character group CRA is displayed in the section G23, then the first character group CRA is displayed in the section G13, then the second character group CRB is displayed in the section G12. That is, in the section image display performance, in the divided area G, the second character group CRB is displayed in the section G11, and then the first character group CRA or the second character group CRB is displayed in each section in order, clockwise from the button image XG. The first character group CRA is an image representing a battle between an ally character and an enemy character. The second character group CRB is an image that represents a character with a smiling face and an emblem made up of a circle and a triangle.

In addition, in the divided area G, the frame of each section is given a predetermined color effect, and the color of the effect portion of the frame in each section varies depending on the image displayed. Specifically, the effect portion of the frame in sections G21, G31, G32, G33, G23, and G13, in which the first character group CRA is displayed, is red, the effect portion of the frame in sections G12 and G11, in which the second character group CRB is displayed, is blue, and the effect portion of the frame in section G22, in which the button image XG is displayed, is green.

Next, as shown in Figure 88 (E), a section image erasure effect is performed. In this section image erasure effect, the first character group CRA, the second character group CRB, or the button image XG displayed in each section of the divided area G are erased all at once, resulting in a blackout effect. In the example of Figure 88 (E), the blackout state is represented by hatching. Note that instead of a blackout, other images, such as a sandstorm image, may be displayed.

Next, as shown in FIG. 88(F), an entire section image display performance is performed. In this entire section image display performance, the first character group CRA and the second character group CRB displayed in each section in the section image display performance are displayed in the entire divided area G (each section).

Next, as shown in Figure 88 (G), Super Reach performance A is performed. In this Super Reach performance A, a Reach state is formed by the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R. In more detail, the decorative symbols 8L and 8R are displayed as stopped 7 symbols, and the decorative symbol 8C is fluctuating at high speed.

Next, as shown in FIG. 88 (H), a super reach effect B is performed. In this super reach effect B, the reach state is continued by the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R, and the first character group CRA that was displayed in the multiple sections of the divided area G of the section image display effect is displayed, and a predetermined action is performed.

Next, as shown in Fig. 88 (I), a super reach effect C is performed. In this super reach effect C, the reach state is continued by the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R, and the character image CRC and the second character group CRB are displayed, and an action in which they face off against each other unfolds. Note that this character image CRC represents a fighting warrior character.
Thereafter, a losing symbol or a big winning symbol is displayed by the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R, and a losing symbol or a big winning symbol is notified.

[Multiple-section display effect C]
FIG. 89 is a diagram for explaining the multi-section display performance C. The multi-section display performance C in FIG. 89 is a performance with the same variation of special symbols. In the multi-section display performance C, as shown in FIG. 89(A), first, a decorative symbol variation performance is performed. In this decorative symbol variation performance, the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R vary vertically in the approximate center of the display screen 7a on the display screen 7a. On the display screen 7a, the reserved icon 9A and the variable icon 9C are displayed, but are omitted in the figure.

Next, as shown in FIG. 89(B), a button display effect is performed. In this button display effect, decorative patterns 8L and 8R are displayed as stopped symbols, and a button image XG is displayed on the changing decorative pattern 8C. This button image XG is an image for encouraging the player to operate the effect button 63, and "PUSH" is displayed within the image. The decorative pattern 8L is displayed as a stopped symbol of 2 symbols, and the decorative pattern 8R is displayed as a stopped symbol of 3 symbols.

Next, as shown in FIG. 89(C), a screen division effect is performed. In this screen division effect, the button image XG is continuously displayed on the display screen 7a, and a predetermined area is divided into nine sections G11, G12, G13, G21, G22, G23, G31, G32, and G33 to form a divided area G. The button image XG is displayed in the section G22. In other words, in this screen division effect, the divided area G is formed so that the button image XG is located in the section G22. Each section of the divided area G is rectangular and formed in a substantially matrix shape (grid, checkerboard shape). The shape and size of each section of the divided area G are different.
In addition, adjacent sections of the divided area G are basically spaced a predetermined distance apart. However, adjacent sections of the divided area G may have some contact with each other. In the following section image display effect, section image erasing effect, and section whole image display effect, the distance between adjacent sections remains the same as the distance in the screen split effect.

Next, as shown in FIG. 89(D), a section image display performance is performed. In the section image display performance, in the divided area G, the second character group CRB is displayed in the section G11, then the first character group CRA is displayed in the section G21, then the first character group CRA is displayed in the section G31, then the first character group CRA is displayed in the section G32, then the first character group CRA is displayed in the section G33, then the first character group CRA is displayed in the section G23, then the first character group CRA is displayed in the section G13, then the second character group CRB is displayed in the section G12. That is, in the section image display performance, in the divided area G, the second character group CRB is displayed in the section G11, and then the first character group CRA or the second character group CRB is displayed in each section in order, clockwise from the button image XG. The first character group CRA is an image representing a situation in which an ally character and an enemy character are fighting. The second character group CRB is an image that represents a character with a smiling face and an emblem made up of a circle and a triangle.

In addition, in the divided area G, the frame of each section is given a predetermined color effect, and the color of the effect portion of the frame in each section varies depending on the image displayed. Specifically, the effect portion of the frame in sections G21, G31, G32, G33, G23, and G13, in which the first character group CRA is displayed, is red, the effect portion of the frame in sections G12 and G11, in which the second character group CRB is displayed, is blue, and the effect portion of the frame in section G22, in which the button image XG is displayed, is green.

Next, as shown in Figure 89 (E), a section image erasure effect is performed. In this section image erasure effect, the first character group CRA, the second character group CRB, or the button image XG displayed in each section of the divided area G are erased all at once, resulting in a blackout effect. In the example of Figure 89 (E), the blackout state is represented by hatching. Note that instead of a blackout, other images, such as a sandstorm image, may be displayed.

Next, as shown in FIG. 89(F), an entire section image display performance is performed. In this entire section image display performance, the first character group CRA and the second character group CRB displayed in each section in the section image display performance are displayed in the entire divided area G (each section).

Next, as shown in Figure 89 (G), Super Reach performance A is performed. In this Super Reach performance A, a reach state is formed by the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R. In more detail, the decorative symbols 8L and 8R are displayed as stopped 7 symbols, and the decorative symbol 8C is fluctuating at high speed.

Next, as shown in FIG. 89(H), a super reach effect B is performed. In this super reach effect B, the reach state is continued by the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R, and the first character group CRA that was displayed in the multiple sections of the divided area G of the section image display effect is displayed, and a predetermined action is performed.

Next, as shown in Fig. 89(I), a super reach effect C is performed. In this super reach effect C, the reach state is continued by the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R, and the character image CRC and the second character group CRB are displayed, and an action in which they face off against each other unfolds.
Thereafter, a losing symbol or a big winning symbol is displayed by the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R, and a losing symbol or a big winning symbol is notified.

[Modification]
In the above-mentioned multiple section display presentations B and C, in the section entire image presentation, the first character group CRA, which has the greater number of sections displayed, out of the first character group CRA and the second character group CRB, is displayed in the entire divided area G, but this is not limited to this, and the second character group CRB, which has the fewer number of sections displayed, out of the first character group CRA and the second character group CRB, may be displayed in the section image display presentation.
In the above multiple section display performances A to C, the button images XG used are of the same shape and size in the button display performance, the screen split performance, and the section image display performance, but this is not limited to this, and buttons of different shapes and/or sizes may be used in the button display performance, the screen split performance, and the section image display performance.

[Example of effect]
In the above-mentioned multiple section display effects A to C, in the screen division effect, a divided area G is displayed that divides a predetermined area of the display screen 7a, and in the section image display effect, the first character group CRA is displayed in six of the nine sections of the divided area G, and the second character group CRB is displayed in two of the nine sections of the divided area G, and then, in the section image erasure effect, the player presses the effect button 63, causing the first character group CRA displayed in the six sections and the second character group CRB displayed in the two sections to disappear. According to this configuration, since the different image groups displayed in the multiple sections disappear, a spectacular sight can be provided to the player in an instant, and the interest of the game can be improved.

In the above-mentioned multiple section display effects A to C, when the first character group CRA is displayed in six of the nine sections of the divided area G in the split screen effect and the second character group CRB is displayed in two of the nine sections of the divided area G, a button image XG representing the effect button 63 is displayed. With this configuration, the button image XG is displayed among the first character group CRA and the second character group CRB displayed in multiple sections, providing the player with a sense of mystery along with a spectacular appearance, thereby increasing the interest of the game.

In the above-mentioned multiple section display performance A, in the section image display performance, the first character group CRA is displayed in six of the nine sections of the divided area G, and the second character group CRB is displayed in two of the nine sections of the divided area G. Then, in the section image erasure performance, the player presses the performance button 63, causing the first character group CRA displayed in the six sections and the second character group CRB displayed in the two sections to disappear, and then, in the entire section image performance, a part of an image (character image CRC) different from the first character group CRA and the second character group CRB is displayed in the divided area G. With this configuration, a sense of mystery can be created by displaying the first character group CRA, the second character group CRB, and the button image XG in the divided area G, and the interest of the section image display performance can be improved. As a result, the interest of the game can be improved.

In the above-mentioned multiple section display performance A, in the section image display performance, the first character group CRA is displayed in six of the nine sections of the divided area G, the second character group CRB is displayed in two of the nine sections of the divided area G, and the button image XG is displayed in one section of the divided area G. Then, in the section image erasure performance, the player presses the performance button 63, and the first character group CRA displayed in the six sections, the second character group CRB displayed in the two sections, and the button image XG disappear, and then, in the entire section image performance, the first character group CRA, the second character group CRB, and an image (character image CRC) different from the button image XG are displayed in the divided area G. According to this configuration, a more mysterious feeling can be created by displaying the first character group CRA, the second character group CRB, and the button image XG in the divided area G, and the interest of the section image display performance can be improved. As a result, the interest of the game can be improved.

In the above multiple section display effects A to C, when the button image XG is displayed in the button display effect, a divided area G is formed in the split screen effect so that the button image XG is included in one section. This configuration allows the player to recognize that the divided area G is formed with the button image XG at its center, and gives the player a sense of anticipation for the effect using the effect button 63 corresponding to the button image XG. As a result, the interest of the game can be increased.

In the gaming machine of this embodiment, the following aspects can be realized.
[Aspect XG-1]
A gaming machine including a display means capable of executing a plurality of display effects and an operation means operable by a player,
A first display effect may be performed as one of the plurality of display effects,
A second display effect may be performed as one of the plurality of display effects,
The first display effect is an effect in which a display area of the display means is divided into a plurality of sections, a first image is displayed in a first number of the sections, and a second image is displayed in a second number of the sections,
the second display effect is an effect in which the first image displayed in the first number of sections and the second image displayed in the second number of sections disappear by a player's operation of the operation means,
A combination effect including the first display effect and the second display effect may be performed,
In the combination performance, the first display performance is performed, and then the second display performance is performed.
A gaming machine characterized by:
[XG-2]
A gaming machine according to the invention,
A third display effect may be performed as one of the plurality of display effects,
the third display effect is an effect in which an operation means image representing the operation means is displayed in a predetermined section among the plurality of sections of the display means,
The combination effect includes the third display effect,
In the combination effect, the third display effect is performed when the first display effect is being performed.
A gaming machine characterized by:
[XG-3]
A gaming machine according to the invention,
In the second display performance in the combination performance, the first image and the second image disappear, and an image different from the first image and the second image is displayed.
A gaming machine characterized by:
[XG-4]
A gaming machine according to the XG-3,
A fourth display effect may be performed as one of the plurality of display effects,
the fourth display effect is an effect in which a predetermined image is displayed using a section in which the first image is displayed, a section in which the second image is displayed, and a section in which the operation means image is displayed, in the plurality of sections of the display means;
The combination effect includes the fourth display effect,
In the combination performance, the fourth display performance is performed after the second display performance.
A gaming machine characterized by:
[XG-5]
A gaming machine according to the invention as described in XG-4,
When the first display effect and the third display effect of the combination effect are performed, if the display area of the display means is divided into a plurality of sections, the combination effect is performed in a state where the operation means image is displayed.
A gaming machine characterized by:

As shown in the game state management process of FIG. 28, in the gaming machine 1 of this embodiment, when the number of times the special symbol changes during the low probability state (normal state) reaches 500 (when the ceiling counter reaches 0), the game transitions to Yu-Time (low probability time-saving state). This Yu-Time continues until the special symbol changes 700 times.

The functional timer display effects A to C are explained below with reference to Figures 90 to 92. These functional timer display effects are executed during the decorative pattern variation effect when the game state is normal, time-saving (low probability, low base state), or probability change (high probability, high base state). That is, the image control microcomputer 101 analyzes the command received from the sub-control board 90, and if the command includes an instruction to execute the functional timer display effect, it reads the corresponding image data from the ROM 103 and displays the image on the display screen 7a or sub-display screen 64 of the image display device 7.

[Function-specific timer display effect A]
FIG. 90 is a diagram for explaining the function-specific timer display performance A. The function-specific timer display performance A in FIG. 90 is a performance with the same change of special symbols. In the function-specific timer display performance A, as shown in FIG. 90(A), first, a decorative symbol change performance is performed. In this decorative symbol change performance, the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R change vertically in the approximate center of the display screen 7a on the display screen 7a. On the display screen 7a, the hold icon 9A and the change icon 9C are displayed, but are omitted in the figure.

Next, as shown in FIG. 90(B), the first timer display performance A is performed. In this first timer display performance A, the first timer display XH1 is displayed at the top of the display screen 7a, and the ally character CRA is displayed below it. The first timer display XH1 is a countdown timer, and the timer value is displayed in a double rectangular frame, and the timer value can display two digits of seconds, and can also display seconds to two decimal places. In the example shown, the first timer display XH1 is set to a value of exactly 10 seconds as the initial timer value. The first timer display XH1 has a target timer value of 0 seconds (00:00).

Next, as shown in FIG. 90(C), the first timer display effect B is performed. In this first timer display effect B, the first timer display XH1 and the ally character CRA are continuously displayed in the same position, and the timer value of the first timer display XH1 becomes 0 seconds, which is the target timer value to be reached.

Next, as shown in Figure 90 (D), a movable role operation performance is performed. In this movable role operation performance, the first movable role 14 is activated and moves from a retracted position on the left side of the display screen 7a to an deployed position. At this time, the area on the display screen 7a through which the first movable role 14 has passed is displayed dark to emphasize that the first movable role 14 has been activated. In the example shown, the area on the display screen 7a that has become dark as the first movable role 14 has passed is shown with hatching.

Next, as shown in FIG. 90(E), jackpot pattern presentation A is performed. In this jackpot pattern presentation A, the jackpot pattern is formed using decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R. At this time, decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R are each composed of 6 symbols, that is, the jackpot pattern is formed by a repeat of 6 symbols. This jackpot pattern consisting of 6 symbols suggests that the game state after the jackpot will transition to a low-probability time-saving state (low-probability high-base state), and is a jackpot pattern that is less valuable to the player than a jackpot pattern consisting of 7 symbols, which will be described later.

Next, as shown in FIG. 90(F), a second timer display presentation is performed. In this second timer display presentation, a second timer display XH2 is displayed in the same position on the display screen 7a as the first timer display XH1 described above. This second timer display XH2 is a countdown timer, and displays the timer value in a single rectangular frame, which is different from the first timer display XH1. In addition, in the second timer display XH2, the timer value can be displayed in two digits, but the seconds after the decimal point are omitted. In the example shown in the figure, the second timer display XH2 is set to a value of 5 seconds as the initial timer value. The second timer display XH2 has a target timer value of 0 seconds.

Next, as shown in Figure 90 (G), a button image display effect is performed. In this button image display effect, a button image XH3 is displayed below the second timer display XH2 on the display screen 7a. The button image XH3 is an image for encouraging the player to press the effect button 63, and is displayed in association with the second timer display XH2. The button image XH3 is displayed a short time after the countdown of the second timer display XH2 begins. In the figure, the button image XH3 is displayed when the timer value of the second timer display XH2 is 3 seconds.

Next, as shown in Fig. 90(H), a jackpot pattern presentation B is performed. In this jackpot pattern presentation B, a jackpot pattern is formed using decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R. At this time, the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R are each composed of 7 symbols, that is, a jackpot pattern is formed by repeating 7 symbols. This jackpot pattern consisting of 7 symbols suggests that the game state after the jackpot transitions to a probability state (high probability time-shortened state), and is a jackpot pattern that is more valuable to the player than the jackpot pattern consisting of the 6 symbols described above.
Then, a jackpot game is played, and after the jackpot game, the game transitions to a probability variable state (high probability, high base state).

[Function-specific timer display effect B]
FIG. 91 is a diagram for explaining the function-specific timer display performance B. The function-specific timer display performance B in FIG. 91 is a performance with the same change of special symbols. In the function-specific timer display performance B, as shown in FIG. 91(A), first, a decorative symbol change performance is performed. In this decorative symbol change performance, the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R change vertically in the approximate center of the display screen 7a on the display screen 7a. On the display screen 7a, the hold icon 9A and the change icon 9C are displayed, but are omitted in the figure.

Next, as shown in FIG. 91(B), the first timer display performance A is performed. In this first timer display performance A, the first timer display XH1 is displayed at the top of the display screen 7a, and the ally character CRA is displayed below it. The first timer display XH1 is a countdown timer, and the timer value is displayed in a double rectangular frame, and the timer value can display two digits of seconds, and can also display seconds to two decimal places. In the example shown, the first timer display XH1 is set to a value of exactly 10 seconds as the initial timer value. The target timer value for the first timer display XH1 is 0 seconds (00:00).

Next, as shown in FIG. 91(C), the first timer display effect B is performed. In this first timer display effect B, the first timer display XH1 and the ally character CRA are continuously displayed in the same position, and the timer value of the first timer display XH1 becomes 0 seconds, which is the target timer value to be reached.

Next, as shown in Figure 91 (D), a movable role operation performance is performed. In this movable role operation performance, the first movable role 14 is activated and moves from a retracted position on the left side of the display screen 7a to an deployed position. At this time, the area on the display screen 7a through which the first movable role 14 has passed is displayed dark to emphasize that the first movable role 14 has been activated. In the example shown, the area on the display screen 7a that has become dark as the first movable role 14 has passed is shown with hatching.

Next, as shown in FIG. 91(E), jackpot pattern presentation A is performed. In this jackpot pattern presentation A, the jackpot pattern is formed using the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R. At this time, the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R are each composed of 6 symbols, that is, the jackpot pattern is formed by a repeat of 6 symbols. This jackpot pattern consisting of 6 symbols suggests that the game state after the jackpot will transition to a low-probability time-saving state (low-probability high-base state), and is a jackpot pattern that is less valuable to the player than a jackpot pattern consisting of 7 symbols, which will be described later.

Next, as shown in FIG. 91(F), a second timer display performance is performed. In this second timer display performance, a second timer display XH2 is displayed at a position on the display screen 7a different from the position where the first timer display XH1 described below was displayed. This second timer display XH2 is a countdown timer, and the timer value is displayed in a hexagonal frame, and has a different shape (form) from the first timer display XH1. In addition, in the second timer display XH2, the timer value can be displayed in two digits, but the seconds after the decimal point are omitted. In the example shown in the figure, the second timer display XH2 is set to a value of 5 seconds as the initial timer value. The second timer display XH2 has a target timer value of 0 seconds.

Next, as shown in Figure 91 (G), a button image display effect is performed. In this button image display effect, a button image XH3 is displayed below the second timer display XH2 on the display screen 7a. The button image XH3 is an image for encouraging the player to press the effect button 63, and is displayed in association with the second timer display XH2. The button image XH3 is displayed a short time after the countdown of the second timer display XH2 begins. In the figure, the button image XH3 is displayed when the timer value of the second timer display XH2 is 3 seconds.

Next, as shown in FIG. 91(H), the big win pattern presentation B is performed. In this big win pattern presentation B, the big win pattern is formed using the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R. At this time, the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R are each composed of 7 symbols, that is, the big win pattern is formed by the repeated number of 7 symbols. This big win pattern of 7 symbols suggests that the game state after the big win will move to a probability state (high probability time-shortened state), and is a big win pattern that is more valuable to the player than the big win pattern of 6 symbols described above.
Then, a jackpot game is played, and after the jackpot game, the game transitions to a probability variable state (high probability, high base state).

[Function-specific timer display C]
FIG. 92 is a diagram for explaining the function-specific timer display performance C. The function-specific timer display performance C of FIG. 92 is a performance with the same change of special symbols. In the function-specific timer display performance C, as shown in FIG. 92(A), first, a decorative symbol change performance is performed. In this decorative symbol change performance, the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R change vertically in the approximate center of the display screen 7a on the display screen 7a. On the display screen 7a, the reserved icon 9A and the change icon 9C are displayed, but are omitted in the figure.

Next, as shown in FIG. 92(B), the first timer display performance A is performed. In this first timer display performance A, the first timer display XH1 is displayed at the top of the display screen 7a, and the ally character CRA is displayed below it. The first timer display XH1 is a countdown timer, and the timer value is displayed in a double rectangular frame, and the timer value can display two digits of seconds, and can also display seconds to two decimal places. In the example shown, the first timer display XH1 is set to a value of exactly 10 seconds as the initial timer value. The target timer value for the first timer display XH1 is 0 seconds (00:00).

Next, as shown in FIG. 92(C), the first timer display presentation B is performed. In this first timer display presentation B, the first timer display XH1 and the ally character CRA are continuously displayed in the same position, and the timer value of the first timer display XH1 is 5 seconds before it reaches 0 seconds, which is the target timer value to be reached.

Next, as shown in FIG. 92(D), a movable role operation performance is performed. In this movable role operation performance, the first movable role 14 is operated and moves from the retracted position on the left side of the display screen 7a to the deployed position. In other words, this movable role operation performance is a performance in which the first movable role 14 is operated before the timer value of the first timer display XH1 becomes 0 seconds, which is the target timer value to be reached. At this time, the area on the display screen 7a through which the first movable role 14 has passed is displayed dark to emphasize that the first movable role 14 has been operated. In the example of the figure, the area on the display screen 7a that has become dark after the first movable role 14 has passed is shown by hatching. Also, in the figure, it is shown that the timer value in the first timer display XH1 is 04:50, which is before the target timer value to be reached.

Next, as shown in FIG. 92(E), jackpot pattern presentation A is performed. In this jackpot pattern presentation A, the jackpot pattern is formed using the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R. At this time, the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R are each composed of 6 symbols, that is, the jackpot pattern is formed by a repeat of 6 symbols. This jackpot pattern consisting of 6 symbols suggests that the game state after the jackpot will transition to a low-probability time-saving state (low-probability high-base state), and is a jackpot pattern that is less valuable to the player than a jackpot pattern consisting of 7 symbols, which will be described later.

Next, as shown in FIG. 92(F), a second timer display performance is performed. In this second timer display performance, a second timer display XH2 is displayed at a position on the display screen 7a different from the position where the first timer display XH1 described below was displayed. This second timer display XH2 is a countdown timer, and the timer value is displayed in a hexagonal frame, and has a different shape (form) from the first timer display XH1. In addition, in the second timer display XH2, the timer value can be displayed in two digits, but the seconds after the decimal point are omitted. In the example shown in the figure, the second timer display XH2 is set to a value of 5 seconds as the initial timer value. The second timer display XH2 has a target timer value of 0 seconds.

Next, as shown in Figure 92 (G), a button image display effect is performed. In this button image display effect, a button image XH3 is displayed below the second timer display XH2 on the display screen 7a. The button image XH3 is an image for encouraging the player to press the effect button 63, and is displayed in association with the second timer display XH2. The button image XH3 is displayed a short time after the countdown of the second timer display XH2 begins. In the figure, the button image XH3 is displayed when the timer value of the second timer display XH2 is 3 seconds.

Next, as shown in Fig. 92 (H), a jackpot pattern presentation B is performed. In this jackpot pattern presentation B, a jackpot pattern is formed using decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R. At this time, the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R are each composed of 7 symbols, that is, a jackpot pattern is formed by repeating 7 symbols. This jackpot pattern consisting of 7 symbols suggests that the game state after the jackpot will transition to a probability state (high probability time-shortened state), and is a jackpot pattern that is more valuable to the player than the jackpot pattern consisting of the 6 symbols described above.
Then, a jackpot game is played, and after the jackpot game, the game transitions to a probability variable state (high probability, high base state).

[Modification]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, the function-specific timer display presentations A to C are performed during the same change, but this is not limited to this, and the function-specific timer display presentations A to C may be performed across multiple changes.
In the above-mentioned functional timer display performances A to C, in the same variation, the first movable device 14 is operated based on the first timer display performance, a jackpot pattern performance is performed, and then a jackpot pattern performance is performed based on the second timer display performance, but this is not limited to this, and a jackpot pattern performance may be performed based on the second timer display performance, and then the first movable device 14 is operated based on the first timer display performance, and a jackpot pattern performance may be performed.
In the above-mentioned function-specific timer display performances A to C, the first timer display XH1 and the second timer display XH2 are countdown type timers, but this is not limited to this, and either one or both of the two timers may be count-up type timers.
In the above-mentioned function-specific timer display performances A to C, the first timer display XH1 and the second timer display XH2 are configured not to appear at the same timing, but this is not limited to this, and the first timer display XH1 and the second timer display XH2 may be configured to appear at the same timing.
In the above-mentioned function-specific timer display performances A to C, the button image XH3 is displayed after the second timer display XH2 is displayed, but this is not limited to this and the button image XH3 may be displayed before the second timer display XH2 is displayed or at the same time that the second timer display XH2 is displayed.
In the above-mentioned function-specific timer display effects A to C, when the second timer display XH2 appears and the button image XH3 is displayed, a jackpot pattern (a jackpot pattern of seven decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R) that is relatively more valuable to the player than in the jackpot pattern effect A is displayed. However, if the button image XH3 does not appear even when the second timer display XH2 appears, the jackpot pattern is not upgraded and the same jackpot pattern as in the jackpot pattern effect A may be displayed.

[Example of effect]
In the above-mentioned timer display performances A to C by function, the first movable device 14 is activated (moved) based on the first timer display XH1 in the same change, and then the big win symbol is displayed based on the second timer display XH2. With this configuration, two different timer displays are performed in the same change, each with a different role, one timer display activates the first movable device 14 and the other timer display displays the big win symbol, so that the timer performance does not become monotonous and the interest in the timer performance can be improved. As a result, the interest in the game can be improved.

In the above-mentioned timer display performances A to C by function, in the same change, the first movable device 14 is activated (moved) based on the first timer display XH1, and a 6-symbol jackpot symbol suggesting a jackpot with a low comparative value to the player is displayed, and then, based on the second timer display XH2, a 7-symbol jackpot symbol suggesting a jackpot with a relatively high value to the player is displayed. With this configuration, two different timer displays are performed in the same change, each with a different role, and one timer display activates the first movable device 14 and displays a 6-symbol jackpot symbol suggesting a jackpot with a low comparative value to the player, while the other timer display displays a 7-symbol jackpot symbol suggesting a jackpot with a relatively high value to the player, so that the player can enjoy each timer display, preventing the timer performance from becoming stale and increasing interest in the timer performance. As a result, interest in the game can be increased.

In the above-mentioned function-specific timer display performance C, in the first timer display performance, the initial timer value of the first timer display XH1 is set and counted down, and the first movable device 14 is activated before the timer value reaches the target value of 0 seconds. This configuration can surprise the player and increase the interest of the timer performance. As a result, the interest of the game can be increased.

In the above-mentioned function-specific timer display presentations B and C, the display position of the first timer display XH1 in the first timer display presentation is different from the display position of the second timer display XH2 in the second timer display presentation. With this configuration, the display position of the first timer display XH1 is different from the display position of the second timer display XH2, so the difference between the two timer displays can be clearly shown to the player. Therefore, the player can enjoy distinguishing between the two timer displays, preventing the timer presentation from becoming stale and increasing interest in the timer presentation. As a result, interest in the game can be increased.

In the above-mentioned function-specific timer display presentations B and C, the first timer display XH1 in the first timer display presentation and the second timer display XH2 in the second timer display presentation are configured to be different in size. With this configuration, the first timer display XH1 and the second timer display XH2 are different in size, so the difference between the two timer displays can be clearly shown to the player. Therefore, the player can enjoy distinguishing between the two timer displays, preventing the timer presentation from becoming stale and increasing interest in the timer presentation. As a result, interest in the game can be increased.

In the gaming machine of this embodiment, the following aspects can be realized.
[Aspect XH-1]
A gaming machine including a display means capable of executing a plurality of display effects and a movable member,
A first display effect may be performed as one of the plurality of display effects,
A second display effect may be performed as one of the plurality of display effects,
The first display effect is an effect in which the movable member is operated based on a timer display of a first mode,
The second display effect is an effect of displaying a first jackpot pattern based on a timer display of a second mode different from the timer display of the first mode,
A combination effect including the first display effect and the second display effect may be performed,
In the combination performance, the first display performance and the second display performance are performed in the same variation.
A gaming machine characterized by:
[Aspect XH-2]
The gaming machine according to aspect XH-1,
In the first display performance of the combination performance, the movable member is operated based on the timer display of the first mode, and a second jackpot pattern different from the first jackpot pattern is displayed,
The first jackpot symbol is a jackpot symbol having a higher value to a player than the second jackpot symbol.
A gaming machine characterized by:
[Aspect XH-3]
The gaming machine according to aspect XH-2,
In the first display performance of the combination performance, an initial timer value of the timer display of the first aspect is set and counted, and the movable member is operated before the timer value of the timer display of the first aspect reaches a target value.
A gaming machine characterized by:
[Aspect XH-4]
The gaming machine according to aspect XH-3,
In the combination performance, the timer display of the first aspect in the first display performance and the timer display of the second aspect in the second display performance are displayed at different positions on the display means.
A gaming machine characterized by:
[Aspect XH-5]
The gaming machine according to aspect XH-4,
In the combination performance, the timer display of the first aspect in the first display performance and the timer display of the second aspect in the second display performance are different in size.
A gaming machine characterized by:

Specific image transition effects A to C are explained below using Figures 93 to 95. These specific image transition effects can be executed during the performance of the changing performance of the performance pattern. That is, the image control microcomputer 101 analyzes the changing performance start command received from the sub-control board 90, and if it contains an instruction to execute a specific image transition effect, it reads out the corresponding image data from the ROM 103 and displays the image on the display screen 7a of the main display device 7.

[Specific image transition effect A]
FIG. 93 is a diagram for explaining specific image transition performance A.
First, as shown in Fig. 93 (A), a change start performance is executed. The change start performance is a performance in which the performance pattern starts changing. Here, the performance patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R start changing and are changing at high speed. At the bottom of the display screen 7a, three reserved icons 9A corresponding to the first special pattern reserved and the corresponding change icon 9C are displayed. The three reserved icons 9A corresponding to the first special pattern reserved correspond to the first storage area, the second storage area, and the third storage area of the first special pattern reserved storage area 85a, respectively.

Next, as shown in FIG. 93(B), a reach formation effect is executed. The reach formation effect is an effect in which the left effect pattern 8L and the right effect pattern 8R temporarily stop at the same numerical value. Here, the left effect pattern 8L and the right effect pattern 8R are both temporarily stopped at "5". The middle effect pattern 8C is fluctuating at high speed. Here too, the three hold icons 9A corresponding to the first special pattern hold and the corresponding fluctuating icon 9C are displayed at the bottom of the display screen 7a.

Next, as shown in FIG. 93(C), a battle start effect is executed. The battle start effect is the start of a battle effect in which the ally character CRA and the enemy character CRB fight. Here, the ally character CRA and the enemy character CRB are displayed facing each other in the center of the display screen 7a. The left effect pattern 8L is displayed in the upper left corner of the display screen 7a, and the right effect pattern 8R is displayed in the upper right corner of the display screen 7a.

Next, as shown in Figures 93 (D) to (F), an image transition effect is executed. In the image transition effect, four images G1, G2, G3, and G4 of "FIGHT" are displayed on the periphery of the display screen 7a. Specifically, image G1 is displayed at the top of the display screen 7a, image G2 is displayed at the left of the display screen 7a, image G3 is displayed at the bottom of the display screen 7a, and image G4 is displayed at the right of the display screen 7a.

In FIG. 93(D), the brightness of image G1, which is one of the four images of "FIGHT," is set higher than the other images G2 to G4. This makes image G1 appear brighter than the other images G2 to G4.

In FIG. 93(E), the brightness of image G2, which is one of the four images of "FIGHT," is set higher than the other images G1, G3, and G4. This makes image G2 appear brighter than the other images G1, G3, and G4.

In FIG. 93 (F), the brightness of image G4, which is one of the four images of "FIGHT," is set higher than the other images G1 to G3. This makes image G4 appear brighter than the other images G1 to G3.

In the image transition production, images with higher brightness than the other images are produced in the following order: image G1 → image G2 → image G3 → image G4 → image G1 → .... As a result, in the image transition production, the brightly displayed image of "FIGHT" is displayed rotating left (counterclockwise) around the periphery of the display screen 7a.

When the image transition effect is being executed, a battle effect between ally character CRA and enemy character CRB is played out in the center of the display screen 7a. During the image transition effect, the left effect pattern 8L is displayed in the upper left corner of the display screen 7a, and the right effect pattern 8R is displayed in the upper right corner of the display screen 7a.

Next, as shown in FIG. 93 (G), a victory or defeat determination effect is executed. The victory or defeat determination effect is an effect that notifies the result of the battle effect. Here, the ally character CRA is displayed in the center of the display screen 7a. This indicates that the ally character CRA has won the battle effect. If the ally character CRA were to lose the battle effect, the enemy character CRB would be displayed in the center of the display screen.

Next, as shown in Figure 93 (H), a confirmed stop effect (win) is executed. A confirmed stop effect (win) is an effect in which the effect patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R all show the same number and stop for a confirmed result. Here, the left effect pattern 8L, the middle effect pattern 8C, and the right effect pattern 8R all show a confirmed stop at "5."

[Specific image transition effect B]
Figure 94 is a diagram for explaining specific image transition presentation B.
First, as shown in Fig. 94 (A), a change start performance is executed. The change start performance is a performance in which the performance pattern starts changing. Here, the performance patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R start changing and are changing at high speed. At the bottom of the display screen 7a, three reserved icons 9A corresponding to the first special pattern reserved and the corresponding change icon 9C are displayed. The three reserved icons 9A corresponding to the first special pattern reserved correspond to the first storage area, the second storage area, and the third storage area of the first special pattern reserved storage area 85a, respectively.

Next, as shown in FIG. 94(B), a reach formation effect is executed. The reach formation effect is an effect in which the left effect pattern 8L and the right effect pattern 8R temporarily stop at the same numerical value. Here, the left effect pattern 8L and the right effect pattern 8R are both temporarily stopped at "5". The middle effect pattern 8C is fluctuating at high speed. Here too, the three hold icons 9A corresponding to the first special pattern hold and the corresponding fluctuating icon 9C are displayed at the bottom of the display screen 7a.

Next, as shown in FIG. 94(C), a battle start effect is executed. The battle start effect is the start of a battle effect in which the ally character CRA and the enemy character CRB fight. Here, the ally character CRA and the enemy character CRB are displayed facing each other in the center of the display screen 7a. The left effect pattern 8L is displayed in the upper left corner of the display screen 7a, and the right effect pattern 8R is displayed in the upper right corner of the display screen 7a.

Next, as shown in Figures 94 (D) to (F), an image transition effect is executed. In the image transition effect, six images G1, G2, G3, G4, G5, and G6 that make up the character string "BATTLE" are displayed on the periphery of the display screen 7a. Specifically, the image G1 of "B" is displayed at the top of the display screen 7a, the image G2 of "A" is displayed at the left of the display screen 7a, the image G3 of "T" is displayed at the bottom left of the display screen 7a, the image G4 of "T" is displayed at the bottom of the display screen 7a, the image G5 of "L" is displayed at the bottom right of the display screen 7a, and the image G6 of "E" is displayed at the top right of the display screen 7a.

In FIG. 94(D), the brightness of the image G1 of "B," which is one of the six images that make up the character string "BATTLE," is set higher than the other images G2 to G6. This makes the image G1 of "B" appear brighter than the other images G2 to G6.

In FIG. 94(E), the brightness of the image G4 of the letter "T," which is one of the six images that make up the character string "BATTLE," is set higher than the other images G1 to G3, G5, and G6. This makes the image G4 of the letter "T" appear brighter than the other images G1 to G3, G5, and G6.

In FIG. 94 (F), the brightness of the image G6 of the letter "E," which is one of the six images that make up the character string "BATTLE," is set higher than the other images G1 to G5. This makes the image G6 of the letter "E" appear brighter than the other images G1 to G5.

In the image transition production, images with higher brightness than the other images are produced in the following order: image G1 of "B" → image G2 of "A" → image G3 of "T" → image G4 of "T" → image G5 of "L" → image G6 of "E" → image G1 of "B" → .... As a result, in the image transition production, each of the letters that make up the word "BATTLE" is displayed rotating left (counterclockwise) around the periphery of the display screen 7a.

When the image transition effect is being executed, a battle effect between ally character CRA and enemy character CRB is played out in the center of the display screen 7a. During the image transition effect, the left effect pattern 8L is displayed in the upper left corner of the display screen 7a, and the right effect pattern 8R is displayed in the upper right corner of the display screen 7a.

Next, as shown in FIG. 94 (G), a victory or defeat determination effect is executed. The victory or defeat determination effect is an effect that notifies the result of the battle effect. Here, the ally character CRA is displayed in the center of the display screen 7a. This indicates that the ally character CRA has won the battle effect. If the ally character CRA were to lose the battle effect, the enemy character CRB would be displayed in the center of the display screen.

Next, as shown in Figure 94 (H), a confirmed stop effect (win) is executed. A confirmed stop effect (win) is an effect in which the effect patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R all show the same number and stop for a confirmed result. Here, the left effect pattern 8L, the middle effect pattern 8C, and the right effect pattern 8R all show a confirmed stop at "5."

[Specific image transition effect C]
Figure 95 is a diagram for explaining specific image transition presentation C.
First, as shown in Fig. 95 (A), a change start performance is executed. The change start performance is a performance in which the performance pattern starts changing. Here, the performance patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R start changing and are changing at high speed. At the bottom of the display screen 7a, three reserved icons 9A corresponding to the first special pattern reserved and the corresponding change icon 9C are displayed. The three reserved icons 9A corresponding to the first special pattern reserved correspond to the first storage area, the second storage area, and the third storage area of the first special pattern reserved storage area 85a, respectively.

Next, as shown in FIG. 95(B), a reach formation effect is executed. The reach formation effect is an effect in which the left effect pattern 8L and the right effect pattern 8R temporarily stop at the same numerical value. Here, the left effect pattern 8L and the right effect pattern 8R are both temporarily stopped at "5". The middle effect pattern 8C is fluctuating at high speed. Here too, the three hold icons 9A corresponding to the first special pattern hold and the corresponding fluctuating icon 9C are displayed at the bottom of the display screen 7a.

Next, as shown in FIG. 95(C), a battle start effect is executed. The battle start effect is the start of a battle in which the ally character CRA and the enemy character CRB fight. Here, the ally character CRA and the enemy character CRB are displayed facing each other in the center of the display screen 7a. The left effect pattern 8L is displayed in the upper left corner of the display screen 7a, and the right effect pattern 8R is displayed in the upper right corner of the display screen 7a.

Next, as shown in Figures 95 (D) to (F), an image transition effect is executed. In the image transition effect, six images G1, G2, G3, G4, G5, and G6 that make up the character string "BATTLE" are displayed on the periphery of the display screen 7a. Specifically, the image G1 of "B" is displayed in the upper left corner of the display screen 7a, the image G2 of "A" is displayed in the left corner of the display screen 7a, the image G3 of "T" is displayed in the lower left corner of the display screen 7a, the image G4 of "T" is displayed in the lower corner of the display screen 7a, the image G5 of "L" is displayed in the lower right corner of the display screen 7a, and the image G6 of "E" is displayed in the upper right corner of the display screen 7a.

In addition, in the image transition performance, the second movable part 15 moves (advances) downward from the retracted position and stops at the advanced position in front of the display screen 7a. The letters "OARO" on the second movable part 15 are configured to be able to emit light independently one by one. Also, they may be configured not only to emit light but also to have adjustable brightness.

In FIG. 95(D), the brightness of the image G1 of "B," which is one of the six images that make up the character string "BATTLE," is set higher than the other images G2 to G6. This makes the image G1 of "B" appear brighter than the other images G2 to G6.

In FIG. 95(E), the brightness of the image G6 of the letter "E," which is one of the six images that make up the character string "BATTLE," is set higher than the other images G1 to G5. This makes the image G6 of the letter "E" appear brighter than the other images G1 to G5.

In FIG. 95 (F), the luminance of the letter "O" (the "O" on the far right), one of the four letters that make up the string "OARO", is set higher than the other letters. This makes the letter "O" appear brighter than the other letters.

In the image transition production, images and letters with higher brightness than the other images are produced in the following order: Image G1 of "B" → Image G2 of "A" → Image G3 of "T" → Image G4 of "T" → Image G5 of "L" → Image G6 of "E" → Letter "O" → Letter "R" → Letter "A" → Letter "O" → Image G1 of "B" → .... As a result, in the image transition production, each of the letters that make up the strings of characters "BATTLE" and "OARO" are displayed rotating left (counterclockwise) around the periphery of the display screen 7a.

When the image transition effect is being executed, a battle effect between ally character CRA and enemy character CRB is played out in the center of the display screen 7a. During the image transition effect, the left effect pattern 8L is displayed in the upper left corner of the display screen 7a, and the right effect pattern 8R is displayed in the upper right corner of the display screen 7a.

Next, as shown in FIG. 95 (G), a victory or defeat determination effect is executed. The victory or defeat determination effect is an effect that notifies the result of the battle effect. Here, the ally character CRA is displayed in the center of the display screen 7a. This indicates that the ally character CRA has won the battle effect. If the ally character CRA were to lose the battle effect, the enemy character CRB would be displayed in the center of the display screen.

Next, as shown in Figure 95 (H), a confirmed stop effect (win) is executed. A confirmed stop effect (win) is an effect in which the effect patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R all show the same number and stop for a confirmed result. Here, the left effect pattern 8L, the center effect pattern 8C, and the right effect pattern 8R all show a confirmed stop at "5."

[Example of effect]
Below, examples of the effects of specific image transition presentations are shown.
[Effect 1]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, a plurality of images are displayed on the periphery of the display screen 7a of the display device 7, and a process is repeated in which a specific image among the plurality of images is made distinguishable from the remaining images by changing the brightness of the images, thereby transitioning the specific image among the plurality of images. Specifically, four images of "FIGHT" are displayed, and the character string "FIGHT" is transitioned by changing the brightness of the four images G1 to G4 (FIG. 93 (D) (E) (F)). Also, the respective characters are transitioned by changing the brightness of the six images G1 to G6 that compose the character string "BATTLE" (FIG. 94 (D) (E) (F), FIG. 95 (D) (E) (F)). According to this configuration, the display of the images on the periphery of the display screen 7a becomes novel, and the interest of the game can be improved.

Note that the images G1 to G4 of "FIGHT" and the images G1 to G6 that make up the character string "BATTLE" correspond to "predetermined images." Brightness corresponds to "color attributes." Furthermore, the image transition effects in Figures 93 to 95 correspond to "transition effects."

[Effect 2]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, in the image transition presentation, a specific image among a plurality of images transitions counterclockwise toward the display screen 7a (FIGS. 93(D)-(F), 94(D)-(F), 95(D)-(F)). With this configuration, it is possible to add a rotational movement to the image display on the periphery of the display screen 7a, thereby increasing the interest of the game.

[Effect 3]
The gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment is equipped with a second movable gadget 15, and the letters that make up the string "OARO" light up in accordance with the transition of the specific image (FIG. 95(F)). With this configuration, it is possible to add movement to the image display on the periphery, including the second movable gadget 15, and to increase the interest of the game. The second movable gadget 15 corresponds to the "light-emitting section" and the "gadget".

[Effect 4]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, when an image transition effect is being executed, a battle effect between the ally character CRA and the enemy character CRB is played out in the center of the display screen 7a. This configuration allows movement to be added to the periphery of the battle effect, making the game more interesting. Note that the moving image in which the ally character CRA and the enemy character CRB fight corresponds to the "image related to the predetermined image," and the battle effect corresponds to the "image display effect."

[Modification]
The following describes modified examples of specific image transition effects.
[Modification 1]
In the above, the brightness of the image is changed in the transition effect, but this is not limited to this, and it is sufficient if the color attribute, which is the attribute of the display color of the predetermined image, is changed. The color attribute here includes brightness, value, saturation, hue, etc.

[Modification 2]
In the above, the specific images are transitioned counterclockwise in the transition performance, but they may be transitioned clockwise. In addition, the specific images may be transitioned in a predetermined order other than clockwise or counterclockwise, or may be transitioned in a random order.

[Modification 3]
In the above, the second movable part 15 is used to illuminate the characters constituting the character string "OARO" in accordance with the transition of the specific image (FIG. 95(F)). In contrast, the "illuminating part" may be realized as an image. For example, the characters "OARO" may be displayed as an image on the display screen 7a.

[Modification 4]
In the above, the second movable part 15 is used as the "light-emitting part", but there may be multiple "light-emitting parts", and for example, four board lamps may be provided near the corners of the display screen 7a.

[Example of embodiment]
In the gaming machine of this embodiment, the following aspects can be realized.
[Aspect B6-1]
A gaming machine having a display device,
A process is repeated in which a plurality of predetermined images are displayed on the periphery of a display screen of the display device, and a specific image among the plurality of predetermined images is made distinguishable from the remaining images by changing a color attribute, which is an attribute of a display color of the plurality of predetermined images, thereby executing a transition effect in which the specific image is transitioned.
A gaming machine characterized by:

[Aspect B6-2]
The gaming machine according to aspect B6-1,
In the transition performance, the specific image among the plurality of predetermined images transitions clockwise or counterclockwise toward the display screen.
A gaming machine characterized by:

[Aspect B6-3]
The gaming machine according to aspect B6-1 or B6-2,
a light-emitting unit arranged near a periphery of the display screen and capable of emitting light;
The light emitting unit emits light in accordance with the transition of the specific image.
A gaming machine characterized by:

[Aspect B6-4]
The gaming machine according to aspect B6-3,
The light emitting portion is displayed as an image on the display screen.
A gaming machine characterized by:

[Aspect B6-5]
The gaming machine according to aspect B6-3,
The light-emitting unit is disposed on the periphery of the display screen as a special feature.
A gaming machine characterized by:

[Aspect B6-6]
A gaming machine according to any one of aspects B6-1 to B6-5,
In parallel with the transition effect, an image display effect can be executed in which an image related to the predetermined image is displayed in a specific area of the display screen.
A gaming machine characterized by:

The specific image absorption effects A to C are explained below using Figures 96 to 98. These specific image absorption effects can be executed during the performance of the varying performance patterns. That is, the image control microcomputer 101 analyzes the varying performance start command received from the sub-control board 90, and if it contains an instruction to execute a specific image absorption effect, it reads out the corresponding image data from the ROM 103 and displays the image on the display screen 7a of the main display device 7.

[Specific Image Absorption Presentation A]
Figure 96 is a diagram for explaining specific image absorption presentation A.
First, as shown in Fig. 96 (A), a change start performance is executed. The change start performance is a performance in which the performance pattern starts changing. Here, the performance patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R start changing and are changing at high speed. At the bottom of the display screen 7a, three reserved icons 9A corresponding to the first special pattern reserved and the corresponding change icon 9C are displayed. The three reserved icons 9A corresponding to the first special pattern reserved correspond to the first storage area, the second storage area, and the third storage area of the first special pattern reserved storage area 85a, respectively.

Next, as shown in FIG. 96(B), a reach formation effect is executed. The reach formation effect is an effect in which the left effect pattern 8L and the right effect pattern 8R temporarily stop at the same numerical value. Here, the left effect pattern 8L and the right effect pattern 8R are both temporarily stopped at "5". The middle effect pattern 8C is fluctuating at high speed. Here too, the three hold icons 9A corresponding to the first special pattern hold and the corresponding fluctuating icon 9C are displayed at the bottom of the display screen 7a.

Next, as shown in Figures 96 (C), (D), and (F), an image presentation is executed. The image presentation is executed in a state where the second movable part 15 has moved so as to overlap the upper part of the display screen 7a of the display device 7. The image presentation is also executed in the enlarged image display presentation of Figure 96 (G) and the display color change presentation of Figure 96 (H). The character string "OARO", which is made up of multiple letters, is written on the second movable part 15.

As shown in FIG. 96(C), in the image presentation (initial stage), images TG1, TG2, and TG3 corresponding to the leftmost "O", "A", and "R" of the multiple letters that make up the string "OARO" of the second movable character are displayed. Then, the image TG1 of "O" moves on the display screen 7a toward the leftmost "O" of the second movable character 15, as shown by the arrow Y1. The image TG2 of "A" moves on the display screen 7a toward the "A" of the second movable character 15, as shown by the arrow Y2. The image TG3 of "R" moves on the display screen 7a toward the "R" of the second movable character 15, as shown by the arrow Y3. Note that the image corresponding to the rightmost "O" that makes up the string "OARO" is not displayed here.

The images TG1 to TG3 may move at the same speed or at different speeds. As shown in FIG. 96(C), the images TG1 to TG3 may move in a straight line or in a curved line that sways back and forth. The images TG1 to TG3 may also move while rotating. The axis of rotation may be any, but it may be, for example, an axis perpendicular to the display screen 7a.

As shown in FIG. 96 (D), in the image presentation (middle stage), the image TG1 of "O" is closer to the "O" at the left end of the second movable role 15 than in the image presentation (initial stage). The image TG1 of "O" moves on the display screen 7a so as to approach the "O" at the left end of the second movable role 15 as shown by the arrow Y1. The image TG2 of "A" moves as shown by the arrow Y2 and disappears near the "A" of the second movable role 15 (shown by a dashed line in the figure). For example, the image TG2 of "A" is reduced as if it is absorbed into the "A" of the second movable role 15, and disappears with an increased transparency. When the image TG2 of "A" disappears, a new image TG4 of "A" is displayed. The image TG4 of "A" moves on the display screen 7a toward the "A" of the second movable role 15 as shown by the arrow Y4. Additionally, the image TG3 of "R" is closer to the "R" of the second movable prop 15 than in the image presentation (initial stage). The image TG3 of "R" moves on the display screen 7a so as to get even closer to the "R" of the second movable prop 15, as shown by the arrow Y3.

Next, as shown in FIG. 96 (E), a chance presentation is executed. The chance presentation is a presentation that is executed based on the expectation of a win. Here, the ally character CRA is displayed on the left side of the display screen 7a, and a message image MSG saying "Chance" is displayed. Note that the chance presentation is not limited to this type of presentation, and may be, for example, a sound presentation such as outputting a sound effect.

As shown in FIG. 96 (F), in the image presentation (later), the image TG5 of "O" moves on the display screen 7a toward the "O" on the left side of the second movable prop 15, as indicated by the arrow Y5. The image TG6 of "A" moves on the display screen 7a toward the "A" of the second movable prop 15, as indicated by the arrow Y6. The image TG7 of "R" moves on the display screen 7a toward the "R" of the second movable prop 15, as indicated by the arrow Y7. The image TG8 of "O" moves on the display screen 7a toward the "O" on the right side of the second movable prop 15, as indicated by the arrow Y8. The images TG5 to TG8 move toward the corresponding letters of the second movable prop 15 and disappear near the letters.

In the image performance (later), an image TG8 corresponding to the rightmost "O" of the character string "OARO" of the second movable role 15 is newly displayed and moves on the display screen 7a. In the image performance, an image corresponding to the character string "OARO" of the second movable role 15 is displayed, moves on the display screen 7a, and disappears, but compared to a performance using images corresponding to the leftmost "O", "A", and "R", a performance using images corresponding to "O", "A", "R", and "O" suggests that there is a higher expectation of a win. In other words, the corresponding letter is determined based on the expectation of a win. Therefore, when a performance is performed using an image corresponding to the "O" of "OARO", a performance may also be performed using images corresponding to the "O" and "A" of "OARO".

Note that in the subsequent performances, image effects are also executed in parallel, but as they are similar to the image effects (later), their explanation will be omitted.

Next, as shown in FIG. 96 (G), an enlarged image display effect is executed. The enlarged image display effect is an effect in which one of the letters that was the subject of the effect corresponding to "OARO" on the second movable role device 15 is enlarged and displayed in the lower center of the display screen 7a. Here, the image UG of "O" is shown being displayed. The degree of expectation of a win may differ depending on the letter. The display color of the image UG of "O" is blue. The display colors here could be, for example, blue, green, purple, red, gold, etc. The order of blue, green, purple, red, and gold suggests a higher degree of expectation of a win.

Next, as shown in FIG. 96 (H), a display color change effect is executed. The display color change effect is an effect that changes the display color of the image enlarged in the enlarged image display effect. Here, the color of the "O" image UG is shown changed to red. This is an effect that suggests a high probability of winning.

[Specific Image Absorption Presentation B]
Figure 97 is a diagram for explaining specific image absorption presentation B.
First, as shown in Fig. 97 (A), a change start performance is executed. The change start performance is a performance in which the performance pattern starts changing. Here, the performance patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R start changing and are changing at high speed. At the bottom of the display screen 7a, three reserved icons 9A corresponding to the first special pattern reserved and the corresponding change icon 9C are displayed. The three reserved icons 9A corresponding to the first special pattern reserved correspond to the first storage area, the second storage area, and the third storage area of the first special pattern reserved storage area 85a, respectively.

Next, as shown in FIG. 97(B), a reach formation effect is executed. The reach formation effect is an effect in which the left effect pattern 8L and the right effect pattern 8R temporarily stop at the same numerical value. Here, the left effect pattern 8L and the right effect pattern 8R are both temporarily stopped at "5". The middle effect pattern 8C is fluctuating at high speed. Here too, the three hold icons 9A corresponding to the first special pattern hold and the corresponding fluctuating icon 9C are displayed at the bottom of the display screen 7a.

Next, as shown in Figures 97 (C), (D), and (F), an image presentation is executed. The image presentation is executed in a state where the second movable part 15 has moved so as to overlap the upper part of the display screen 7a of the display device 7. The image presentation is also executed in the enlarged image display presentation of Figure 97 (G) and the battle presentation of Figure 97 (H). The character string "OARO", which is made up of multiple letters, is written on the second movable part 15.

As shown in FIG. 97(C), in the image presentation (initial stage), images TG1, TG2, TG3, TG4, and TG5 corresponding to the leftmost "O", "A", and "R" of the multiple letters that make up the string "OARO" of the second movable role are displayed. Then, the image TG1 of "O" moves on the display screen 7a toward the leftmost "O" of the second movable role 15 as shown by the arrow Y1. The image TG2 of "O" moves on the display screen 7a toward the leftmost "O" of the second movable role 15 as shown by the arrow Y2. The image TG3 of "A" moves on the display screen 7a toward the "A" of the second movable role 15 as shown by the arrow Y3. The image TG4 of "A" moves on the display screen 7a toward the "A" of the second movable role 15 as shown by the arrow Y4. The "R" image TG5 moves on the display screen 7a toward the "R" of the second movable character 15, as indicated by the arrow Y5. Note that the image corresponding to the "O" at the right end of the character string "OARO" is not displayed here.

The images TG1 to TG5 may move at the same speed or at different speeds. As shown in FIG. 97(C), the images TG1 to TG5 may move in a straight line or in a curved line that sways back and forth. Furthermore, the images TG1 to TG5 may move while rotating. The axis of rotation may be any, but it may be, for example, an axis perpendicular to the display screen 7a.

Here, images TG1 and TG2 correspond to the "O" at the left end of the string of characters "OARO" on the second movable prop 15. Images TG3 and TG4 correspond to the "A" in the string of characters "OARO" on the second movable prop 15. In this way, multiple images may correspond to each of the characters that make up the string of characters on the second movable prop 15. For example, three or more images may be associated with each character.

As shown in FIG. 97 (D), in the image presentation (middle stage), the image TG1 of "O" is closer to the "O" at the left end of the second movable prop 15 than in the image presentation (initial stage). The image TG1 of "O" moves on the display screen 7a so as to approach the "O" at the left end of the second movable prop 15 further as shown by the arrow Y1. The image TG2 of "O" is closer to the "O" at the left end of the second movable prop 15 than in the image presentation (initial stage). The image TG2 of "O" moves on the display screen 7a so as to approach the "O" at the left end of the second movable prop 15 further as shown by the arrow Y2. The image TG3 of "A" also moves as shown by the arrow Y3 and disappears near the "A" of the second movable prop 15 (shown by the dashed line in the figure). For example, the image TG3 of "A" shrinks as if it is being sucked into the "A" of the second movable prop 15, becomes more transparent, and disappears. The image TG4 of "A" is closer to the "A" of the second movable prop 15 than in the image presentation (initial stage). The image TG4 of "A" moves on the display screen 7a so as to get even closer to the "A" of the second movable prop 15, as shown by the arrow Y4. The image TG5 of "R" is closer to the "R" of the second movable prop 15 than in the image presentation (initial stage). The image TG5 of "R" moves on the display screen 7a so as to get even closer to the "R" of the second movable prop 15, as shown by the arrow Y5.

Next, as shown in FIG. 97(E), a chance presentation is executed. The chance presentation is a presentation executed based on the expectation of a win. Here, the ally character CRA is displayed on the left side of the display screen 7a, and a message image MSG saying "Chance" is displayed. Note that the chance presentation is not limited to this type of presentation, and may be, for example, a presentation using sound such as outputting a sound effect.

As shown in FIG. 97(F), in the image performance (later), the image TG6 of "O" moves on the display screen 7a toward the "O" at the left end of the second movable role 15, as shown by the arrow Y6. The image TG7 of "O" moves on the display screen 7a toward the "O" at the left end of the second movable role 15, as shown by the arrow Y7. The image TG8 of "A" moves on the display screen 7a toward the "A" of the second movable role 15, as shown by the arrow Y8. The image TG9 of "R" moves on the display screen 7a toward the "R" of the second movable role 15, as shown by the arrow Y9. The image TG10 of "O" moves on the display screen 7a toward the "O" at the right end of the second movable role 15, as shown by the arrow Y10. The images TG6 to TG10 move toward the corresponding letters of the second movable role 15 and disappear near the letters.

In the image performance (later), an image TG10 corresponding to the "O" at the right end of the character string "OARO" on the second movable role 15 is newly displayed and moves on the display screen 7a. In the image performance, an image corresponding to the character string "OARO" on the second movable role 15 is displayed, moves on the display screen 7a, and disappears, but compared to a performance using images corresponding to the left ends "O", "A", and "R", a performance using images corresponding to "O", "A", "R", and "O" suggests that there is a higher expectation of a win. In other words, the corresponding letter is determined based on the expectation of a win. Therefore, when a performance is performed using an image corresponding to the "O" of "OARO", a performance may also be performed using images corresponding to the "O" and "A" of "OARO".

Note that in the subsequent performances, image effects are also executed in parallel, but as they are similar to the image effects (later), their explanation will be omitted.

Next, as shown in FIG. 97(G), an enlarged image display effect is executed. The enlarged image display effect is an effect in which one of the letters that was the subject of the effect corresponding to "OARO" on the second movable role device 15 is enlarged and displayed in the lower center of the display screen 7a. Here, the image UG of "O" is shown being displayed. The degree of expectation of a win may differ depending on the letter. The display color of the image UG of "O" is assumed to be red. The display colors here could be, for example, blue, green, purple, red, gold, etc. The order of blue, green, purple, red, and gold suggests a higher degree of expectation of a win.

Next, as shown in FIG. 97(H), a battle performance is executed. The battle performance is a performance in which a battle unfolds between an ally character CRA and an enemy character CRB. The battle performance unfolds in the display area of the "O" image UG after the "O" image UG disappears. Note that a win is confirmed by winning the battle performance.

[Specific Image Absorption Rendering C]
Figure 98 is a diagram for explaining specific image absorption presentation C.
First, as shown in Fig. 98 (A), a change start performance is executed. The change start performance is a performance in which the performance pattern starts changing. Here, the performance patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R start changing and are changing at high speed. At the bottom of the display screen 7a, three reserved icons 9A corresponding to the first special pattern reserved and the corresponding change icon 9C are displayed. The three reserved icons 9A corresponding to the first special pattern reserved correspond to the first storage area, the second storage area, and the third storage area of the first special pattern reserved storage area 85a, respectively.

Next, as shown in FIG. 98(B), a reach formation effect is executed. The reach formation effect is an effect in which the left effect pattern 8L and the right effect pattern 8R temporarily stop at the same numerical value. Here, the left effect pattern 8L and the right effect pattern 8R are both temporarily stopped at "5". The middle effect pattern 8C is fluctuating at high speed. Here too, the three hold icons 9A corresponding to the first special pattern hold and the corresponding fluctuating icon 9C are displayed at the bottom of the display screen 7a.

Next, as shown in Figures 98 (C), (D), and (F), an image presentation is executed. The image presentation is executed in a state where the second movable part 15 has moved so as to overlap the upper part of the display screen 7a of the display device 7. The image presentation is also executed in the enlarged image display presentation of Figure 98 (G) and the display color change presentation of Figure 98 (H). The character string "OARO", which is made up of multiple letters, is written on the second movable part 15.

As shown in FIG. 98 (C), in the image performance (initial stage), an image TG1 corresponding to "OA" is displayed among the multiple characters that make up the string of characters "OARO" on the second movable part. Then, as shown by the arrow Y1, the image TG1 of "OA" moves on the display screen 7a toward the "OA" on the second movable part 15. Also, here, the image of "OA" is larger than the "OA" on the second movable part 15. Note that, as with the specific image absorption performance B, there may be two or more images of "OA".

As shown in FIG. 98(C), the image TG1 may move in a straight line or in a curved line that sways back and forth. Furthermore, the image TG1 may move while rotating. The axis of rotation may be any, but for example, the axis may be perpendicular to the display screen 7a.

As shown in Figure 98 (D), in the image presentation (middle stage), the "OA" image TG1 moves as indicated by the arrow Y1, and disappears near the "OA" of the second movable prop 15 (shown by a dashed line in the figure). For example, the "OA" image TG1 shrinks as if it is being sucked into the "OA" of the second movable prop 15, and disappears as it becomes more transparent. Note that the "OA" image TG1 shrinks and becomes smaller as it moves.

Next, as shown in FIG. 98(E), a chance effect is executed. The chance effect is an effect that is executed based on the expectation of a win. Here, the ally character CRA is displayed on the left side of the display screen 7a, and a message image MSG saying "Chance" is displayed. Note that the chance effect is not limited to this type of effect, and may be, for example, an effect using sound such as outputting a sound effect.

As shown in Figure 98 (F), in the image presentation (later stage), the "OA" image TG2 moves on the display screen 7a toward the "OA" on the second movable prop 15, as indicated by the arrow Y2. The "RO" image TG3 moves on the display screen 7a toward the "RO" on the left edge of the second movable prop 15, as indicated by the arrow Y3. The images TG2 and TG3 move toward the corresponding character strings on the second movable prop 15 and disappear near the character strings.

In the image presentation (later stage), an image TG3 corresponding to the "RO" of the character string "OARO" on the second movable role device 15 is newly displayed and moves on the display screen 7a. In the image presentation, an image corresponding to the character string "OARO" on the second movable role device 15 is displayed, moves on the display screen 7a, and then disappears. However, compared to a presentation using an image corresponding to "OA", a presentation using images corresponding to "OA" and "RO" suggests that there is a higher expectation of a win. In other words, the corresponding character string is determined based on the expectation of a win.

Note that in the subsequent performances, image effects are also executed in parallel, but as they are similar to the image effects (later), their explanation will be omitted.

Next, as shown in FIG. 98 (G), an enlarged image display effect is executed. The enlarged image display effect is an effect in which one of the character strings that was the subject of the effect corresponding to "OARO" on the second movable gadget 15 is enlarged and displayed in the lower center of the display screen 7a. Here, the image UG of "OA" is shown being displayed. The degree of expectation of a win may differ depending on the character string. The display color of the image UG of "OA" is blue. The display colors here could be, for example, blue, green, purple, red, gold, etc. The order of blue, green, purple, red, and gold suggests a higher degree of expectation of a win.

Next, as shown in FIG. 98 (H), a battle performance is executed. The battle performance is a performance in which a battle unfolds between friendly character CRA and enemy character CRB. The battle performance unfolds in the display area of the "OA" image UG after the "OA" image UG disappears. Note that a win is confirmed by winning the battle performance.

[Example of effect]
Below are some examples of the effects of specific image absorption presentations.
[Effect 1]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, a character image similar to the character displayed by the second movable role 15 is displayed on the display screen 7a, moved on the display screen 7a so as to approach the character of the second movable role 15, and disappeared near the character of the second movable role 15 (FIG. 96(C)(D)(F), FIG. 97(C)(D)(F), FIG. 98(C)(D)(F)). According to this configuration, a performance linked with the second movable role 15 can be realized, and the interest of the game can be improved.

The second movable part 15 corresponds to the "display unit", the images TG1 to TG10 correspond to the "specific images", and the image presentation corresponds to the "specific image presentation".

[Effect 2]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, the second movable device 15 displays the letters "O", "A", "R", and "O", and the image presentation targets at least one of the letters "O", "A", "R", and "O" (Fig. 96(C)(D)(F), Fig. 97(C)(D)(F), Fig. 98(C)(D)(F)). With this configuration, the presentation linked to the second movable device 15 becomes more extensive, which can increase the interest of the game.

[Effect 3]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, the number of characters to be the subject of the image presentation among the character string "OARO" of the second movable role 15 is determined based on the expectation of a win. According to this configuration, the expectation of a win can be suggested by the presentation linked to the second movable role 15, and the interest of the game can be improved.

Note that a "win" corresponds to "advantageous play that is advantageous to the player," and "advantageous play" includes game states that are more advantageous than the normal state (low probability low base state), such as a big win, a small win, a high probability high base state, and a low probability high base state.

[Effect 4]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, the number of characters that are the subject of the image effect among the character string "OARO" of the second movable role 15 is increased during the change of the effect pattern (FIG. 96(F), FIG. 97(F), FIG. 98(F)). According to this configuration, the effect linked with the second movable role 15 can suggest the expectation of a win, and the interest of the game can be improved.

[Effect 5]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, an enlarged image display effect is executed in which an image UG corresponding to one of the characters (character strings) that are the subject of the image effect among the character string "OARO" of the second movable role 15 is displayed in the lower center of the display screen 7a (FIG. 96(G), FIG. 97(G), FIG. 98(G)). According to this configuration, one of the characters that was the subject of the effect is displayed in an enlarged manner, which can surprise the player and increase the interest of the game.

Note that image UG corresponds to the "corresponding image," and the enlarged image display effect corresponds to the "image display effect."

[Effect 6]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, the display color of the image UG corresponding to one of the characters (character strings) that are the subject of the image presentation among the character string "OARO" of the second movable gadget 15 is determined based on the expectation of a win (FIGS. 96(H), 97(G), and 98(G)). With this configuration, the expectation of a win can be suggested using the image UG corresponding to one of the characters (character strings) that are the subject of the image presentation, and the interest in the game can be increased.

[Effect 7]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, the display color of the image UG corresponding to one of the characters (character strings) that are the subject of the image presentation among the character string "OARO" of the second movable gadget 15 is changed during the movement (FIG. 96(H)). With this configuration, the image UG corresponding to one of the characters (character strings) that are the subject of the image presentation can be used to suggest the expectation of a win, thereby increasing the interest of the game.

In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, after the image UG is displayed, a battle effect is executed in place of the image UG (Fig. 97 (G) (H), Fig. 98 (G) (H)). This configuration allows for smooth transitions between effects, making the game more interesting.

[Modification]
Below, modified examples of specific image absorption effects are shown.
[Modification 1]
In the above, the image presentation was performed using the images of the letters "O", "A", "R", and "O" that make up the character string "OARO" on the second movable role object 15, or the image of the character string "OA" and "RO". However, it is not necessary to be limited to such letters. In other words, the "symbols displayed by the display unit" include figures with meanings such as marks and pictures.

[Modification 2]
In the above, the second movable device 15 displays the character string "OARO", but multiple display units may be provided, such as a device that displays "O", a device that displays "A", and a device that displays "R". For example, four display units may be provided near the corners of the display screen 7a.

[Modification 3]
In the above, the second movable part 15 is configured to be movable between a retracted position and an advanced position, but it may also be configured to use a display unit that is not movable.

[Example of embodiment]
In the gaming machine of this embodiment, the following aspects can be realized.
[Aspect B7-1]
A display device capable of displaying an image;
A display unit that is disposed adjacent to a periphery of a display screen of the display device and displays symbols,
A specific image that is the same as the symbol displayed on the display unit is displayed on the display screen, and the specific image is moved on the display screen so as to approach the symbol on the display unit, and disappears near the symbol on the display unit.
A gaming machine characterized by:

[Aspect B7-2]
The gaming machine according to aspect B7-1,
the display unit displays a plurality of symbols;
In the specific image effect, an effect is performed on at least one symbol among the plurality of symbols.
A gaming machine characterized by:

[Aspect B7-3]
The gaming machine according to aspect B7-2,
In the specific image effect, the number of symbols to be the target of the specific image effect among the plurality of symbols is determined based on an expectation of a transition to an advantageous game advantageous to a player.
A gaming machine characterized by:

[Aspect B7-4]
The gaming machine according to aspect B7-2 or B7-3,
In the specific image production, it is possible to increase the number of symbols that are the target of the specific image production among the plurality of symbols during the variation of the production pattern.
A gaming machine characterized by:

[Aspect B7-5]
A gaming machine according to any one of aspects B7-1 to B7-4,
The display device may be capable of executing an image display effect in which an image corresponding to one of the symbols that is a target of the specific image effect among the plurality of symbols is enlarged and displayed in a specific area of the display screen of the display device.
A gaming machine characterized by:

[Aspect B7-6]
The gaming machine according to aspect B7-5,
In the image display performance, a display color of the corresponding image is determined based on an expectation of a transition to an advantageous game advantageous to the player.
A gaming machine characterized by:

[Aspect B7-7]
The gaming machine according to aspect B7-5 or B7-6,
In the image display performance, it is possible to change the display color of the corresponding image while the performance pattern is fluctuating.
A gaming machine characterized by:

[Aspect B7-8]
A gaming machine according to any one of aspects B7-5 to B7-7,
In the image display performance, after the corresponding image is displayed, a moving image can be displayed in place of the corresponding image.
A gaming machine characterized by:

The character string disassembly effects A to C are explained below using Figures 99 to 101. This character string disassembly effect can be executed during the performance of the changing effect of the performance pattern. That is, the image control microcomputer 101 analyzes the change effect start command received from the sub-control board 90, and if it contains an instruction to execute the character string disassembly effect, it reads out the corresponding image data from the ROM 103 and displays the image on the display screen 7a of the main display device 7.

[String Decomposition A]
Figure 99 is a diagram to explain character string decomposition performance A.
First, as shown in FIG. 99(A), a change start performance is executed. The change start performance is a performance in which the performance pattern starts changing. Here, the performance patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R start changing and are changing at high speed. At the bottom of the display screen 7a, three reserved icons 9A corresponding to the first special pattern reserved and the corresponding change icon 9C are displayed. The three reserved icons 9A corresponding to the first special pattern reserved correspond to the first storage area, the second storage area, and the third storage area of the first special pattern reserved storage area 85a, respectively.

Next, as shown in FIG. 99(B), a reach formation effect is executed. The reach formation effect is an effect in which the left effect pattern 8L and the right effect pattern 8R temporarily stop at the same numerical value. Here, the left effect pattern 8L and the right effect pattern 8R are both temporarily stopped at "5". The middle effect pattern 8C is fluctuating at high speed. Here too, the three hold icons 9A corresponding to the first special pattern hold and the corresponding fluctuating icon 9C are displayed at the bottom of the display screen 7a.

Next, as shown in FIG. 99(C), a character string display effect is executed. The character string display effect is an effect in which an image of a character string is displayed on the display screen 7a. Here, a character string image MG saying "Chance!" is displayed, and a frame image WG surrounding the character string image MG is displayed.

Next, as shown in FIG. 99(D), a frame line change effect is executed. The frame line change effect is an effect in which the frame image WG displayed in accordance with the character string image MG is enlarged. Here, the frame image WG is enlarged to the periphery of the display screen 7a.

Next, as shown in Figures 99 (E) and (F), a constituent character effect is executed. The constituent character effect is an effect in which the characters "cha", "ya", "n", "su", and "!" that make up the string "Chance!" each move in a predetermined direction.

As shown in FIG. 99 (E), in the constituent character presentation (first half), the character image K1 of "chi" moves diagonally downward and left on the display screen 7a as indicated by the arrow Y1. The character image K2 of "ya" moves almost upward on the display screen 7a as indicated by the arrow Y2. The character image K3 of "n" moves diagonally downward and right on the display screen 7a as indicated by the arrow Y3. The character image K4 of "su" moves diagonally upward and right on the display screen 7a as indicated by the arrow Y4. The character image K5 of "!" moves diagonally downward and right on the display screen 7a as indicated by the arrow Y5.

As shown in FIG. 99(F), in the constituent character presentation (second half), in addition to the movements in the constituent character presentation (first half), each character image K1 to K5 moves further. The character image K1 of "chi" moves diagonally downward and left on the display screen 7a as shown by the arrow Y1. The character image K2 of "ya" moves almost upward on the display screen 7a as shown by the arrow Y2. The character image K3 of "n" moves diagonally downward and right on the display screen 7a as shown by the arrow Y3. The character image K4 of "su" moves diagonally upward and right on the display screen 7a as shown by the arrow Y4. The character image K5 of "!" moves diagonally downward and right on the display screen 7a as shown by the arrow Y5. The character image K5 of "!" reaches the boundary of the frame image WG.

The moving speeds of the images K1 to K5 may be the same or different. Furthermore, the images K1 to K5 may move in a straight line or in a curved line that sways back and forth.

Next, as shown in FIG. 99(G), a battle performance is executed. The battle performance is a performance in which an ally character CRA and an enemy character CRB fight each other. If the ally character CRA wins the battle performance, a win is confirmed. On the other hand, if the ally character CRA is defeated in the battle performance, a loss is confirmed.

Next, as shown in Figure 99 (H), a confirmed stop effect (miss) is executed. A confirmed stop effect (miss) is an effect in which the effect patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R are confirmed and stopped in a missing manner. Here, the left effect pattern 8L and the right effect pattern 8R are confirmed and stopped at "5", and the center effect pattern 8C is confirmed and stopped at "6". At the same time as the confirmed stop effect, the variable icon 9C is hidden.

[String decomposition effect B]
Figure 100 is a diagram for explaining character string decomposition performance B.
First, as shown in FIG. 100(A), a change start performance is executed. The change start performance is a performance in which the performance pattern starts changing. Here, the performance patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R start changing and are changing at high speed. At the bottom of the display screen 7a, three reserved icons 9A corresponding to the first special pattern reserved and the corresponding change icon 9C are displayed. The three reserved icons 9A corresponding to the first special pattern reserved correspond to the first storage area, the second storage area, and the third storage area of the first special pattern reserved storage area 85a, respectively.

Next, as shown in FIG. 100(B), a reach formation effect is executed. The reach formation effect is an effect in which the left effect pattern 8L and the right effect pattern 8R temporarily stop at the same numerical value. Here, the left effect pattern 8L and the right effect pattern 8R are both temporarily stopped at "5". The middle effect pattern 8C is fluctuating at high speed. Here too, the three hold icons 9A corresponding to the first special pattern hold and the corresponding fluctuating icon 9C are displayed at the bottom of the display screen 7a.

Next, as shown in FIG. 100(C), a character string display effect is executed. The character string display effect is an effect in which an image of a character string is displayed on the display screen 7a. Here, a character string image MG saying "Chance!" is displayed, and a frame image WG surrounding the character string image MG is displayed.

Next, as shown in FIG. 100(D), a frame line change effect is executed. The frame line change effect is an effect in which the frame image WG displayed in accordance with the character string image MG is enlarged. Here, the frame image WG is enlarged to the periphery of the display screen 7a.

Next, as shown in Fig. 100 (E) and (F), a constituent character effect is executed. The constituent character effect is an effect in which the characters "cha", "ya", "n", "su", and "!" that make up the string "Chance!" each rotate and move in a predetermined direction.

As shown in FIG. 100(E), in the constituent character presentation (first half), the character image K1 of "chi" moves diagonally downward to the left on the display screen 7a as indicated by the arrow Y1. The character image K1 of "chi" rotates left (counterclockwise) around an axis perpendicular to the display screen 7a. The character image K2 of "ya" moves almost upward on the display screen 7a as indicated by the arrow Y2. The character image K2 of "ya" rotates right (clockwise) around an axis perpendicular to the display screen 7a. The character image K3 of "n" moves diagonally downward to the right on the display screen 7a as indicated by the arrow Y3. The character image K3 of "n" rotates right (clockwise) around an axis perpendicular to the display screen 7a. The character image K4 of "su" moves diagonally upward to the right on the display screen 7a as indicated by the arrow Y4. The "su" character image K4 rotates left (counterclockwise) around an axis perpendicular to the display screen 7a. The "!" character image K5 moves diagonally downward to the right on the display screen 7a as shown by the arrow Y5. The "!" character image K5 rotates right (clockwise) around an axis perpendicular to the display screen 7a.

As shown in FIG. 100 (F), in the constituent character presentation (second half), in addition to the movements in the constituent character presentation (first half), each character image K1 to K5 further moves. The character image K1 of "chi" moves diagonally downward to the left on the display screen 7a as shown by the arrow Y1. The character image K1 of "chi" rotates left (counterclockwise) around an axis perpendicular to the display screen 7a. The character image K2 of "ya" moves almost upward on the display screen 7a as shown by the arrow Y2. The character image K2 of "ya" rotates right (clockwise) around an axis perpendicular to the display screen 7a. The character image K3 of "n" moves diagonally downward to the right on the display screen 7a as shown by the arrow Y3. The character image K3 of "n" rotates right (clockwise) around an axis perpendicular to the display screen 7a. The character image K4 of "su" moves diagonally to the upper right on the display screen 7a as indicated by the arrow Y4. The character image K4 of "su" rotates left (counterclockwise) around an axis perpendicular to the display screen 7a. The character image K5 of "!" moves diagonally to the lower right on the display screen 7a as indicated by the arrow Y5. The character image K5 of "!" rotates right (clockwise) around an axis perpendicular to the display screen 7a. The character image K5 of "!" reaches the boundary of the frame image WG.

The images K1 to K5 may move at the same speed or at different speeds. The images K1 to K5 may move in a straight line or in a curved line that sways back and forth. The rotation axis of the images K1 to K5 is not limited. For example, the rotation axis may be the left-right direction parallel to the display screen 7a, or the up-down direction parallel to the display screen 7a. A rotation axis having a predetermined angle may also be set.

Next, as shown in FIG. 100(G), a battle performance is executed. The battle performance is a performance in which an ally character CRA and an enemy character CRB fight each other. If the ally character CRA wins in the battle performance, a win is confirmed. On the other hand, if the ally character CRA is defeated in the battle performance, a loss is confirmed.

Next, as shown in FIG. 100 (H), a confirmed stop effect (miss) is executed. A confirmed stop effect (miss) is an effect in which the effect patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R are confirmed and stopped in a miss mode. Here, the left effect pattern 8L and the right effect pattern 8R are confirmed and stopped at "5", and the center effect pattern 8C is confirmed and stopped at "6". At the same time as the confirmed stop effect, the variable icon 9C is hidden.

[String decomposition performance C]
Figure 101 is a diagram for explaining character string decomposition performance C.
First, as shown in FIG. 101(A), a change start performance is executed. The change start performance is a performance in which the performance pattern starts changing. Here, the performance patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R start changing and are changing at high speed. At the bottom of the display screen 7a, three reserved icons 9A corresponding to the first special pattern reserved and the corresponding change icon 9C are displayed. The three reserved icons 9A corresponding to the first special pattern reserved correspond to the first storage area, the second storage area, and the third storage area of the first special pattern reserved storage area 85a, respectively.

Next, as shown in FIG. 101(B), a reach formation effect is executed. The reach formation effect is an effect in which the left effect pattern 8L and the right effect pattern 8R temporarily stop at the same numerical value. Here, the left effect pattern 8L and the right effect pattern 8R are both temporarily stopped at "5". The middle effect pattern 8C is fluctuating at high speed. Here too, the three hold icons 9A corresponding to the first special pattern hold and the corresponding fluctuating icon 9C are displayed at the bottom of the display screen 7a.

Next, as shown in FIG. 101(C), a character string display effect is executed. The character string display effect is an effect in which an image of a character string is displayed on the display screen 7a. Here, a character string image MG saying "Chance!" is displayed, and a frame image WG surrounding the character string image MG is displayed. The border of the frame image WG is assumed to be white.

Next, as shown in FIG. 101 (D), a frame line change effect is executed. The frame line change effect is an effect in which the frame image WG displayed in accordance with the character string image MG is enlarged. Here, the frame image WG is enlarged to the periphery of the display screen 7a. In particular, the border of the frame image is thicker, and the border is displayed in red. The border display color of the frame image WG indicates the likelihood of a win. For example, the likelihood of a win increases in the order of white → blue → green → purple → red → gold.

Next, as shown in Fig. 101 (E) and (F), a constituent character effect is executed. The constituent character effect is an effect in which the characters "cha", "ya", "n", "su", and "!" that make up the string "Chance!" each rotate and move in a predetermined direction.

As shown in FIG. 101 (E), in the constituent character presentation (first half), the character image K1 of "chi" moves diagonally downward to the left on the display screen 7a as indicated by the arrow Y1. The character image K1 of "chi" rotates left (counterclockwise) around an axis perpendicular to the display screen 7a. The character image K2 of "ya" moves almost upward on the display screen 7a as indicated by the arrow Y2. The character image K2 of "ya" rotates right (clockwise) around an axis perpendicular to the display screen 7a. The character image K3 of "n" moves diagonally downward to the right on the display screen 7a as indicated by the arrow Y3. The character image K3 of "n" rotates right (clockwise) around an axis perpendicular to the display screen 7a. The character image K4 of "su" moves diagonally upward to the right on the display screen 7a as indicated by the arrow Y4. The "su" character image K4 rotates left (counterclockwise) around an axis perpendicular to the display screen 7a. The "!" character image K5 moves diagonally downward to the right on the display screen 7a as shown by the arrow Y5. The "!" character image K5 rotates right (clockwise) around an axis perpendicular to the display screen 7a.

As shown in FIG. 101 (F), in the constituent character presentation (second half), in addition to the movements in the constituent character presentation (first half), each character image K1 to K5 further moves. The character image K1 of "chi" moves diagonally downward to the left on the display screen 7a as shown by the arrow Y1. The character image K1 of "chi" rotates left (counterclockwise) around an axis perpendicular to the display screen 7a. The character image K2 of "ya" moves almost upward on the display screen 7a as shown by the arrow Y2. The character image K2 of "ya" rotates right (clockwise) around an axis perpendicular to the display screen 7a. The character image K3 of "n" moves diagonally downward to the right on the display screen 7a as shown by the arrow Y3. The character image K3 of "n" rotates right (clockwise) around an axis perpendicular to the display screen 7a. The character image K4 of "su" moves diagonally to the upper right on the display screen 7a as indicated by the arrow Y4. The character image K4 of "su" rotates left (counterclockwise) around an axis perpendicular to the display screen 7a. The character image K5 of "!" moves diagonally to the lower right on the display screen 7a as indicated by the arrow Y5. The character image K5 of "!" rotates right (clockwise) around an axis perpendicular to the display screen 7a. The character image K5 of "!" reaches the boundary of the frame image WG.

The images K1 to K5 may move at the same speed or at different speeds. The images K1 to K5 may move in a straight line or in a curved line that sways back and forth. The rotation axis of the images K1 to K5 is not limited. For example, the rotation axis may be the left-right direction parallel to the display screen 7a, or the up-down direction parallel to the display screen 7a. A rotation axis having a predetermined angle may also be set.

Next, as shown in FIG. 101(G), a battle performance is executed. The battle performance is a performance in which an ally character CRA and an enemy character CRB fight each other. If the ally character CRA wins in the battle performance, a win is confirmed. On the other hand, if the ally character CRA is defeated in the battle performance, a loss is confirmed.

Next, as shown in FIG. 101 (H), a confirmed stop effect (win) is executed. A confirmed stop effect (win) is an effect in which the effect patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R stop in a confirmed winning state. Here, the left effect pattern 8L, the middle effect pattern 8C, and the right effect pattern 8R are all shown to have stopped in a confirmed "5" state. At the same time as the confirmed stop effect, the variable icon 9C is hidden.

[Example of effect]
Below are some examples of the effects of string decomposition.
[Effect 1]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, a character string display effect is executed in which the character string "Chance!" is displayed on the display screen 7a of the display device 7 (Fig. 99(C), Fig. 100(C), Fig. 101(C)), and then a character component effect is executed in which the characters "cha", "ya", "n", "su", and "!" that make up the character string are moved in predetermined directions (Fig. 99(E)(F), Fig. 100(E)(F), Fig. 101(E)(F)). This configuration provides a stronger message than an effect that simply displays a character string, and can increase the interest of the game.

The character string "Chance!" corresponds to a "symbol string" and a "character string", the character string display effect corresponds to the "first effect", the characters "cha", "ya", "n", "su", and "!" that make up the string correspond to "constituent symbols" and "constituent characters", and the constituent character effect corresponds to the "second effect".

In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, in the constituent character presentation, the characters "cha", "ya", "n", "su", and "!" that make up the character string are rotated and moved in a predetermined direction (Fig. 100 (E) (F), Fig. 101 (E) (F)). This configuration conveys a stronger message than a presentation that simply displays a character string, and can increase the interest of the game.

[Effect 3]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, in the character string display effect, a frame image WG is displayed surrounding the character string image MG. According to this configuration, the character string image MG is emphasized by the frame image WG, which can increase the interest of the game.
The frame image WG may be, for example, a "speech bubble" indicating a line from a character.

[Effect 4]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, before executing the constituent character effect, a frame line change effect is executed, and the boundary of the frame image WG is expanded to the peripheral portion of the display screen 7a (FIG. 99(D), FIG. 100(D), FIG. 101(D)). This configuration increases the possibility of drawing attention to the next constituent character effect, and can increase the interest of the game. The frame line change effect is included in the "second effect."

[Effect 5]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, in the constituent character presentation, the character "!" that constitutes the character string reaches the boundary of the frame image WG (FIG. 99(F), FIG. 100(F), FIG. 101(F)). This configuration makes the constituent character presentation dynamic, and can increase the interest of the game.

[Modification]
Below, modified examples of string decomposition effects are shown.
[Modification 1]
Although the above is an example of displaying the character string "Chance!", the present invention is not limited to such character strings. The "symbol string" includes figures with meanings such as marks and pictures.

[Modification 2]
In the above, the characters "cha", "ya", "n", "su", and "!" that make up the character string are rotated around the axis of rotation perpendicular to the display screen 7a, but the characters may be rotated around any axis of rotation. In that case, it is conceivable to model the characters "cha", "ya", "n", "su", and "!" as three-dimensional models.

[Example of embodiment]
In the gaming machine of this embodiment, the following aspects can be realized.
[Aspect B8-1]
A gaming machine having a display device capable of displaying an image,
A first effect of displaying a symbol string on a display screen of the display device;
and a second performance in which each of the constituent symbols constituting the symbol string displayed in the first performance is moved in a predetermined direction.
A gaming machine characterized by:

[Aspect B8-2]
The gaming machine according to aspect B8-1,
The symbol string is a character string, and the constituent symbols are constituent characters.
A gaming machine characterized by:

[Aspect B8-3]
The gaming machine according to aspect B8-1 or B8-2,
In the second performance, the configuration symbol is moved while being rotated.
A gaming machine characterized by:

[Aspect B8-4]
A gaming machine according to any one of Aspects B8-1 to B8-3,
In the first performance, the symbol string is displayed and a frame image surrounding the symbol string is displayed.
A gaming machine characterized by:

[Aspect B8-5]
The gaming machine according to aspect B8-4,
In the second performance, the frame image is transformed, and then the constituent symbol is moved.
A gaming machine characterized by:

[Aspect B8-6]
The gaming machine according to aspect B8-4 or B8-5,
In the second performance, at least a part of the constituent symbol reaches a boundary of the frame image.
A gaming machine characterized by:

[Aspect B8-7]
The gaming machine according to aspect B8-4 or B8-6,
The display color of the frame image indicates the expectation of a transition to an advantageous gaming state that is advantageous to the player.
A gaming machine characterized by:

In the gaming machine 1 of this embodiment, as shown in the game state management process of FIG. 28, when the number of times the special symbol changes during the low probability state (normal state) reaches 500 (when the ceiling counter reaches 0), the game moves to the play time (low probability time-saving state). This play time is designed to continue until the special symbol changes 700 times. In the case of a 2R jackpot, two rounds of play are played at the first big prize winning port 30. In this case, in one round of play, the first big prize winning port 30 is closed when 10 game balls enter the first big prize winning port 30, and when one game ball enters the first big prize winning port 30, 10 game balls are paid out, that is, the game balls paid out in one round of play are 100 (when there is no over-winning). Therefore, the game balls that can be paid out in a 2R jackpot are 200 when there is no over-winning.
The jackpot game count display effects A to C shown below are effects that can appear when either of the two types of 2R jackpots is won.

The jackpot game count display effects A to C are explained below with reference to Figures 102 to 104. This jackpot game count display is executed during the decorative pattern variation effect when the game state is normal, time-saving (low probability, low base state), or probability change (high probability, high base state). That is, the image control microcomputer 101 analyzes the command received from the sub-control board 90, and if it contains an instruction to execute the jackpot game count display effect, it reads out the corresponding image data from the ROM 103 and displays the image on the display screen 7a or sub-display screen 64 of the image display device 7.

[Big Win Game Count Display A]
FIG. 102 is a diagram for explaining the big win game count display performance A. The big win game count display performance A in FIG. 102 is a performance with the same variation of the special symbol. In the big win game count display performance A, as shown in FIG. 102(A), first, a decorative symbol variation performance is performed, followed by a reach performance. In this reach performance, the decorative symbols 8L and 8R are displayed as 7 symbols temporarily stopped in the approximate center of the display screen 7a, and the decorative symbol 8C is rapidly varied in the vertical direction to form a reach state. In addition, in this reach performance, a variation count display XI6 is displayed near the bottom left of the display screen 7a. This variation count display XI6 indicates the number of variations of the special symbol since the end of the previous big win. In addition, the reserved icon 9A and the variation icon 9C are displayed on the display screen 7a, but are omitted in the figure.

Next, as shown in FIG. 102(B), a special jackpot notification effect is performed. In this special jackpot notification effect, the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R form a 2R jackpot pattern indicating a 2R jackpot. Specifically, in the special jackpot notification effect, the decorative symbols 8L and 8R are displayed as 7 symbols, and the decorative symbol 8C is displayed as a special symbol (a triangle inside a circle). The special symbol displayed as the decorative symbol 8C suggests a 2R jackpot. In addition, in the special jackpot notification effect, the variation count display XI6 is displayed continuously.

Next, as shown in FIG. 102(C), a jackpot game presentation A is performed. In this jackpot game presentation A, on the display screen 7a, an acquired game ball count display XI1 is displayed on the right side, a count display XI2 is displayed approximately at the bottom center, and a count target suggestion display XI3 is displayed from the left side to the center. The acquired game ball count display XI1 indicates the number of game balls acquired through the jackpot game (round game) during the jackpot game (from the start of the round game). The count display XI2 indicates the count in a count-up method, and is displayed as an integer of 0 or more within a hexagonal frame. In this jackpot game presentation A, the acquired game ball count display XI1 indicates the number of acquired balls of "0", and the count display XI2 indicates "0" within a hexagonal frame. The count target suggestion display XI3 is a display suggesting the target count value (possible final count value) of the count display XI2, and is written as "Aim for count 20!", suggesting that the target value of the count display of the count display XI2 is "20". Note that in this jackpot game presentation A, the display of the number of times of change display XI6 is erased.

Next, as shown in FIG. 102(D), jackpot game presentation B is performed. In this jackpot game presentation B, the acquired game ball count display XI1, the count display XI2, and the count target suggestion display XI3 are continuously displayed on the display screen 7a. The count display XI2 is larger than in jackpot game presentation A. Also, in this jackpot game presentation B, the acquired game ball count display XI1 shows the acquired balls as "100", and the count display XI2 shows "10" in a hexagonal frame. Here, as the number of acquired balls displayed in the acquired game ball count display XI1 increases, the count in the count display XI2 also increases. Specifically, when the number of balls acquired in the acquired ball count display XI1 increases by "10", the count in the count display XI2 increases by "1", and when the number of balls acquired increases by "100", the count in the count display XI2 increases by "10". In other words, when one round of play (10 balls entering the first large prize opening 30) ends, the count display XI2 increases by "10". In the big win game presentation B, the acquired ball count display XI1 and the count display XI2 are displayed at the end of the first round of play. In this case, the acquired ball count display XI1 does not include the game balls that entered the first large prize opening 30 in excess of 10.

Next, as shown in FIG. 102(E), jackpot game presentation C is performed. In this jackpot game presentation C, acquired game ball count display XI1, count display XI2, and count target suggestion display XI3 are continuously displayed on the display screen 7a. Count display XI2 is larger than in jackpot game presentation B. Also, in this jackpot game presentation C, acquired game ball count display XI1 shows the acquired balls as "200", and count display XI2 shows "20" in a hexagonal frame. Here, as the number of acquired balls displayed in acquired game ball count display XI1 increases, the count in count display XI2 also increases. Specifically, when the number of balls acquired in the acquired ball count display XI1 increases by "10", the count in the count display XI2 increases by "1", and when the number of balls acquired increases by "100", the count in the count display XI2 increases by "10". In other words, when one round of play (10 balls entering the first large prize opening 30) ends, the count display XI2 increases by "10". In the big win game presentation C, the acquired ball count display XI1 and the count display XI2 are displayed at the end of the second round of play. In this case, the acquired ball count display XI1 does not include the game balls that entered the first large prize opening 30 in excess of 10.

Of the two types of 2R jackpots, if the current jackpot is a 2R variable jackpot, the following jackpot game presentation D will be performed, and if the current jackpot is a 2R latent variable jackpot, the following jackpot game presentation E will be performed.

If the current jackpot is a 2R variable probability jackpot, a jackpot game presentation D is performed as shown in Fig. 102 (F). In this jackpot game presentation D, a super-bomb mode suggestion image XI4 is displayed on the display screen 7a. This super-bomb mode suggestion image XI4 is written as "entering super-bomb mode" and is an image suggesting that the display mode after the jackpot will be the super-bomb mode, and more specifically, is an image suggesting that the game state after the jackpot is a variable probability state.
Thereafter, on the display screen 7a, an effect based on the super explosive mode is performed, that is, an effect suggesting that the game is in a probability variable state is performed.

If the current jackpot is a 2R latent probability variable jackpot, the jackpot game presentation E is performed as shown in Fig. 102 (G). In this jackpot game presentation E, a relaxed mode suggestion image XI5 is displayed on the display screen 7a. This relaxed mode suggestion image XI5 is written as "entering relaxed mode" and is an image suggesting that the display mode after the jackpot will be the relaxed mode, and more specifically, is an image suggesting that the game state after the jackpot is a latent probability variable state.
Thereafter, on the display screen 7a, an effect based on the Yururi mode is performed, that is, an effect suggesting that a latent probability change state is occurring.

[Big Win Game Count Display Presentation B]
FIG. 103 is a diagram for explaining the big win game count display performance B. The big win game count display performance B in FIG. 103 is a performance with the same variation of the special symbol. In the big win game count display performance B, as shown in FIG. 103(A), first, a decorative symbol variation performance is performed, followed by a reach performance. In this reach performance, the decorative symbols 8L and 8R are displayed as 7 symbols temporarily stopped in the approximate center of the display screen 7a, and the decorative symbol 8C is rapidly varied in the vertical direction to form a reach state. In addition, in this reach performance, a variation count display XI6 is displayed near the bottom left of the display screen 7a. This variation count display XI6 indicates the number of variations of the special symbol since the end of the previous big win. In addition, the reserved icon 9A and the variation icon 9C are displayed on the display screen 7a, but are omitted in the figure.

Next, as shown in FIG. 103(B), a special jackpot notification effect is performed. In this special jackpot notification effect, the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R form a 2R jackpot pattern indicating a 2R jackpot. Specifically, in the special jackpot notification effect, the decorative symbols 8L and 8R are displayed as 7 symbols, and the decorative symbol 8C is displayed as a special symbol (a triangle inside a circle). The special symbol displayed as the decorative symbol 8C suggests a 2R jackpot. In addition, in the special jackpot notification effect, the variation count display XI6 is displayed continuously.

Next, as shown in FIG. 103(C), the jackpot game presentation A is performed. In this jackpot game presentation A, the display screen 7a displays the acquired game ball count display XI1 on the right side, the count display XI2 at the approximate bottom center, and the count target suggestion display XI3 from the left side to the center. The acquired game ball count display XI1 indicates the number of game balls acquired through the jackpot game (round game) during the jackpot game (from the start of the round game). The count display XI2 indicates a countdown method count, and is displayed as an integer of 0 or more within a hexagonal frame. In this jackpot game presentation A, the acquired game ball count display XI1 indicates the acquired ball output of "0", and the count display XI2 indicates "20" within a hexagonal frame. The count target suggestion display XI3 is a display suggesting the target count value (possible final count value) of the count display XI2, and is written as "Aim for count 0!", suggesting that the target value of the count display of the count display XI2 is "0". Note that in this jackpot game presentation A, the display of the number of times the number of times the number of times fluctuates XI6 is erased.

Next, as shown in FIG. 103(D), jackpot game presentation B is performed. In this jackpot game presentation B, acquired game ball count display XI1, count display XI2, and count target suggestion display XI3 are continuously displayed on the display screen 7a. Count display XI2 is larger than in jackpot game presentation A. Also, in this jackpot game presentation B, acquired game ball count display XI1 shows the acquired balls as "100", and count display XI2 shows "10" in a hexagonal frame. Here, as the number of acquired balls displayed in acquired game ball count display XI1 increases, the count in count display XI2 decreases. Specifically, when the number of balls acquired in the acquired ball count display XI1 increases by "10", the count in the count display XI2 decreases by "1", and when the number of balls acquired increases by "100", the count in the count display XI2 decreases by "10". In other words, when one round of play (10 balls entering the first large prize opening 30) ends, the count display XI2 decreases by "10". In the big win game presentation B, the acquired ball count display XI1 and the count display XI2 are displayed at the end of the first round of play. In this case, the acquired ball count display XI1 does not include the acquired balls that entered the first large prize opening 30 in excess of 10.

Next, as shown in FIG. 103(E), jackpot game presentation C is performed. In this jackpot game presentation C, acquired game ball count display XI1, count display XI2, and count target suggestion display XI3 are continuously displayed on the display screen 7a. Count display XI2 is larger than in jackpot game presentation B. Also, in this jackpot game presentation C, acquired game ball count display XI1 shows the number of acquired balls as "200", and count display XI2 shows "0" in a hexagonal frame. Here, as the number of acquired balls displayed in acquired game ball count display XI1 increases, the count in count display XI2 decreases. Specifically, when the number of balls acquired in the acquired ball count display XI1 increases by "10", the count in the count display XI2 decreases by "1", and when the number of balls acquired increases by "100", the count in the count display XI2 decreases by "10". In other words, when one round of play (10 balls entering the first large prize opening 30) ends, the count display XI2 decreases by "10". In the big win game presentation C, the acquired ball count display XI1 and the count display XI2 are displayed at the end of the second round of play. Note that in this case, the acquired ball count display XI1 does not include the game balls acquired that entered the first large prize opening 30 in excess of 10.

Of the two types of 2R jackpots, if the current jackpot is a 2R variable jackpot, the following jackpot game presentation D will be performed, and if the current jackpot is a 2R latent variable jackpot, the following jackpot game presentation E will be performed.

If the current jackpot is a 2R variable probability jackpot, a jackpot game presentation D is performed as shown in Fig. 103 (F). In this jackpot game presentation D, a super-bomb mode suggestion image XI4 is displayed on the display screen 7a. This super-bomb mode suggestion image XI4 is written as "entering super-bomb mode" and is an image suggesting that the display mode after the jackpot will be the super-bomb mode, and more specifically, is an image suggesting that the game state after the jackpot is a variable probability state.
Thereafter, on the display screen 7a, an effect based on the super explosive mode is performed, that is, an effect suggesting that the game is in a probability variable state is performed.

If the current jackpot is a 2R latent probability variable jackpot, the jackpot game presentation E is performed as shown in Fig. 103 (G). In this jackpot game presentation E, a relaxed mode suggestion image XI5 is displayed on the display screen 7a. This relaxed mode suggestion image XI5 is written as "entering relaxed mode" and is an image suggesting that the display mode after the jackpot will be the relaxed mode, and more specifically, is an image suggesting that the game state after the jackpot is a latent probability variable state.
Thereafter, on the display screen 7a, an effect based on the Yururi mode is performed, that is, an effect suggesting that a latent probability change state is occurring.

[Big Win Game Count Display Presentation C]
FIG. 104 is a diagram for explaining the big win game count display performance C. The big win game count display performance C in FIG. 104 is a performance with the same variation of the special symbol. In the big win game count display performance C, as shown in FIG. 104(A), first, a decorative symbol variation performance is performed, followed by a reach performance. In this reach performance, the decorative symbols 8L and 8R are displayed as 7 symbols temporarily stopped in the approximate center of the display screen 7a on the display screen 7a, and the decorative symbol 8C is rapidly varied in the vertical direction to form a reach state. In addition, in this reach performance, a variation count display XI6 is displayed near the bottom left of the display screen 7a. This variation count display XI6 indicates the number of variations of the special symbol since the end of the previous big win. In addition, the reserved icon 9A and the variation icon 9C are displayed on the display screen 7a, but are omitted in the figure.

Next, as shown in FIG. 104(B), a special jackpot notification effect is performed. In this special jackpot notification effect, a 2R jackpot pattern indicating a 2R jackpot is formed by decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R. Specifically, in the special jackpot notification effect, decorative patterns 8L and 8R are displayed as 7 patterns, and decorative pattern 8C is displayed as a special pattern (a pattern in which a triangle is placed inside a circle). The special pattern displayed as decorative pattern 8C suggests a 2R jackpot. In addition, in the special jackpot notification effect, the variation count display XI6 is displayed continuously.

Next, as shown in FIG. 104(C), the jackpot game presentation A is performed. In this jackpot game presentation A, the display screen 7a displays the acquired game ball count display XI1 on the right side, the count display XI2 at the approximate bottom center, the count target suggestion display XI3 from the left side to the center, and the expectation suggestion effect image XI7 at the top. The acquired game ball count display XI1 indicates the number of game balls acquired by the jackpot game (round game) during the jackpot game (from the start of the round game). The count display XI2 indicates the countdown method, and is displayed as an integer of 0 or more in a hexagonal frame. In this jackpot game presentation A, the acquired game ball count display XI1 indicates the acquired ball output of "0", and the count display XI2 indicates "20" in a hexagonal frame. The count target suggestion display XI3 is a display suggesting the target count value (possible final count value) of the count display XI2, and is written as "Aim for count 0!", suggesting that the target value of the count display of the count display XI2 is "0". Note that in this jackpot game presentation A, the display of the number of times the number of times the number of times fluctuates XI6 is erased.

The expectation suggestion effect image XI7 is an image suggesting the expectation that the jackpot in the special jackpot notification performance will be a 2R variable probability jackpot, and suggests the expectation by the color of the effect. When the effect color is blue, the expectation of the 2R variable probability jackpot is the lowest, when the effect color is yellow, the expectation of the 2R variable probability jackpot is higher than blue, when the effect color is green, the expectation of the 2R variable probability jackpot is higher than yellow, when the effect color is purple, the expectation of the 2R variable probability jackpot is higher than green, and when the effect color is red, the expectation of the 2R variable probability jackpot is the highest.
The effect color of the expectation indication effect image XI7 in this big win game presentation A is blue.

Next, as shown in FIG. 104(D), jackpot game presentation B is performed. In this jackpot game presentation B, the acquired game ball count display XI1, the count display XI2, the count target suggestion display XI3, and the expectation suggestion effect image XI7 are continuously displayed on the display screen 7a. The count display XI2 is larger than in jackpot game presentation A. Also, in this jackpot game presentation B, the acquired game ball count display XI1 shows the acquired balls as "100", and the count display XI2 shows "10" in a hexagonal frame. Here, as the acquired ball count of the acquired game ball count display XI1 increases, the count of the count display XI2 decreases. Specifically, when the number of balls acquired in the acquired ball count display XI1 increases by "10", the count in the count display XI2 decreases by "1", and when the number of balls acquired increases by "100", the count in the count display XI2 decreases by "10". In other words, when one round of play (10 balls entering the first large winning hole 30) ends, the count display XI2 decreases by "10". In the big win game presentation B, the acquired ball count display XI1 and the count display XI2 are displayed at the end of the first round of play. In this case, the acquired balls in the acquired ball count display XI1 do not include the game balls that entered the first large winning hole 30 in excess of 10. In addition, the effect color of the expectation indication effect image XI7 has changed from blue to green, indicating that the expectation of a 2R special big win has increased.

Next, as shown in FIG. 104(E), jackpot game presentation C is performed. In this jackpot game presentation C, the acquired game ball count display XI1, the count display XI2, the count target suggestion display XI3, and the expectation suggestion effect image XI7 are continuously displayed on the display screen 7a. The count display XI2 is larger than in jackpot game presentation B. Also, in this jackpot game presentation C, the acquired game ball count display XI1 shows the acquired balls as "200", and the count display XI2 shows "0" in a hexagonal frame. Here, as the acquired ball count of the acquired game ball count display XI1 increases, the count of the count display XI2 decreases. Specifically, when the number of balls acquired in the acquired ball count display XI1 increases by "10", the count in the count display XI2 decreases by "1", and when the number of balls acquired increases by "100", the count in the count display XI2 decreases by "10". In other words, when one round of play (10 balls entering the first large winning hole 30) ends, the count display XI2 decreases by "10". In the big win game presentation C, the acquired ball count display XI1 and the count display XI2 are displayed at the end of the second round of play. In this case, the acquired balls in the acquired ball count display XI1 do not include the game balls that entered the first large winning hole 30 in excess of 10. In addition, the expectation indication effect image XI7 changes from green to red, indicating that the expectation for a 2R special big win has reached its peak.

Of the two types of 2R jackpots, if the current jackpot is a 2R variable jackpot, the following jackpot game presentation D will be performed, and if the current jackpot is a 2R latent variable jackpot, the following jackpot game presentation E will be performed.

In the case where the current jackpot is a 2R variable probability jackpot, a jackpot game presentation D is performed as shown in FIG. 104(F). In this jackpot game presentation D, a super-bomb mode suggestion image XI4 is displayed on the display screen 7a. This super-bomb mode suggestion image XI4 is written as "entering super-bomb mode" and is an image suggesting that the display mode after the jackpot will be the super-bomb mode, and more specifically, is an image suggesting that the game state after the jackpot is a variable probability state.
Thereafter, on the display screen 7a, an effect based on the super explosive mode is performed, that is, an effect suggesting that the game is in a probability variable state is performed.

If the current jackpot is a 2R latent probability variable jackpot, the jackpot game presentation E is performed as shown in Fig. 104 (G). In this jackpot game presentation E, a relaxed mode suggestion image XI5 is displayed on the display screen 7a. This relaxed mode suggestion image XI5 is written as "entering relaxed mode" and is an image suggesting that the display mode after the jackpot will be the relaxed mode, and more specifically, is an image suggesting that the game state after the jackpot is a latent probability variable state.
Thereafter, on the display screen 7a, an effect based on the Yururi mode is performed, that is, an effect suggesting that a latent probability change state is occurring.

[Modification]
In the above-mentioned big win game count display effects A to C, the acquired balls in the acquired game ball count display XI1 do not include the acquired game balls that have won more than 10 balls in the first big winning opening 30. Not limited to this, the acquired balls in the acquired game ball count display XI1 may include the acquired game balls that have won more than 10 balls in the first big winning opening 30.
In the above-mentioned jackpot game count display effects A to C, in the case of a special jackpot, i.e., a 2R jackpot, the jackpot game effects A to E are performed, and in the case of a 16R jackpot, the above-mentioned jackpot game count display effects A to C are not performed. However, this is not limited to this, and the jackpot game effects in the above-mentioned jackpot game count display effects A to C may be performed even in the case of a 16R jackpot.

[Example of effect]
In the jackpot game count display effects A to C, during the jackpot game, the acquired game ball number display XI1, which indicates the number of game balls acquired by the jackpot game, and the count display XI2, which indicates the count, are displayed, and then the count display XI2 is changed according to the change in the acquired game ball number display XI1. According to this configuration, the count display XI2 also progresses as the jackpot game (round game) progresses (as the game is consumed), so that the expectation that the mode announced at the end of the jackpot game is the super-explosive mode can be gradually built up, and the relatively boring jackpot game (round game) can be made more exciting. As a result, the interest in the game can be improved.

In the jackpot game count display effects A to C, the acquired game ball count display XI1 does not change depending on the game balls acquired by winning in a winning port other than the first large winning port 30, but only changes depending on the acquisition of game balls based on winning in the first large winning port 30. With this configuration, the count display XI2 is clearly linked to the winning in the first large winning port 30, so the player can easily recognize the progress of the jackpot game (round game), and the expectation that the mode announced at the end of the jackpot game will be the super-explosive mode can be gradually built up, making the relatively boring jackpot game (round game) more exciting. As a result, the interest in the game can be improved.

In the jackpot game count display effects A to C, before the jackpot game effect (i.e., during the reach effect or special jackpot notification effect), a change count display XI6 is displayed, which indicates the number of times the special symbol changes. With this configuration, by displaying the change count display XI6 before the jackpot game effect, the more you get hooked, the more your anticipation for a jackpot will gradually increase, further livening up the subsequent jackpot game effect (round play). As a result, the excitement of the game can be improved.

In the jackpot game count display effects A to C, the change count display XI6, which shows the number of times the special symbol changes, is displayed before the jackpot game effect (i.e., during the reach effect or special jackpot notification effect), and is reset (deleted) during the jackpot game effect. With this configuration, by displaying the change count display XI6 before the jackpot game effect, the more you get hooked, the more your anticipation for a jackpot will gradually increase, and the reset will give you a sense of relief that you have won, further livening up the subsequent jackpot game effect (round play). As a result, the excitement of the game can be improved.

In the jackpot game count display performances A to C, in the jackpot game performance, the count display XI2 is changed according to the change in the acquired game ball number display XI1, and then at the end of the jackpot game, in the case of a 2R probability variable jackpot, a super explosive mode suggestion image XI4 is displayed, suggesting that the game state after the jackpot is a probability variable state, and in the case of a 2R latent probability variable jackpot, a relaxed mode suggestion image XI5 is displayed, suggesting that the game state after the jackpot is a time-saving state (low probability high base state). According to this configuration, the acquired game ball number display XI1 and the count display XI2 are displayed during the jackpot game, and the super explosive mode suggestion image XI4 or the mode suggestion image XI5 is displayed at the end of the jackpot game, so that the player can recognize the next mode before the excitement of the acquired game ball number display XI1 and the count display XI2 cools down, and can greatly enjoy the relatively boring performance during the jackpot game. As a result, the interest in the game can be improved.

In the gaming machine of this embodiment, the following aspects can be realized.
[Aspect I-1]
A gaming machine having a display means capable of executing a plurality of display effects,
A first display effect may be performed as one of the plurality of display effects,
A second display effect may be performed as one of the plurality of display effects,
The first display effect is an effect of displaying the number of acquired game media, which indicates the number of game media acquired by the jackpot game, and displaying a count, which indicates a count, during the jackpot game;
the second display effect is performed after the first display effect, and is an effect of changing the count display in accordance with a change in the display of the number of acquired game media;
A gaming machine characterized by:
[Aspect I-2]
The gaming machine according to aspect I-1,
The acquired game medium display in the second display performance does not change depending on game media acquired by winning in a winning port other than the big winning port during a big win game, but changes depending on acquisition of game media based on winning in the big winning port.
A gaming machine characterized by:
[Aspect I-3]
The gaming machine according to aspect I-2,
A third display effect may be performed as one of the plurality of display effects,
The third display performance is performed before the first display performance, and is a performance of displaying the number of variations of the special pattern.
A gaming machine characterized by:
[Aspect I-4]
The gaming machine according to aspect I-3,
The change count display in the third display performance is erased before the first display performance is performed.
A gaming machine characterized by:
[Aspect I-5]
The gaming machine according to aspect I-4,
In the case of a jackpot, the gaming machine selects one jackpot from a plurality of jackpots including a first jackpot and a second jackpot that is more advantageous to the player than the first jackpot;
A fourth display effect may be performed as one of the plurality of display effects,
A fifth display effect may be performed as one of the plurality of display effects,
The fourth display effect is performed after the second display effect when the jackpot is a first jackpot, and is an effect that performs a first display;
The fifth display effect is performed after the second display effect when the jackpot is a second jackpot, and is an effect of performing a second display different from the first display,
the second display suggests a gaming state that is more advantageous to the player than the first display;
A gaming machine characterized by:

As shown in the game state management process of FIG. 28, in the gaming machine 1 of this embodiment, when the number of times the special symbol changes during the low probability state (normal state) reaches 500 (when the ceiling counter reaches 0), the game transitions to Yu-Time (low probability time-saving state). This Yu-Time continues until the special symbol changes 700 times.

The double timer display effects A to C are explained below with reference to Figures 105 to 107. The double timer display effect is executed during the decorative pattern variation effect when the game state is normal, time-saving (low probability, low base state), or probability change (high probability, high base state). That is, the image control microcomputer 101 analyzes the command received from the sub-control board 90, and if it contains an instruction to execute the double timer display effect, it reads the corresponding image data from the ROM 103 and displays the image on the display screen 7a or sub-display screen 64 of the image display device 7.

[Double timer display effect A]
FIG. 105 is a diagram for explaining the double timer display performance A. The double timer display performance A in FIG. 105 is a performance with the same variation of the special pattern. In the double timer display performance A, as shown in FIG. 105(A), first, a decorative pattern variation performance is performed. In this decorative pattern variation performance, the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R vary vertically in the approximate center of the display screen 7a. In addition, the reserved icon 9A and the variable icon 9C are displayed in the lower left of the display screen 7a. At this time, the reserved icon 9A and the variable icon 9C are white in color. The reserved icon 9A or the variable icon 9C indicates the jackpot expectation degree by the color of the icon. In this case, the white color of the icon indicates the lowest jackpot expectation degree, the yellow color indicates the third highest jackpot expectation degree, the green color indicates the second highest jackpot expectation degree, and the red color indicates the highest jackpot expectation degree.

Next, as shown in FIG. 105(B), the first timer display is performed. In this first timer display, the first timer display XJ1 is displayed in the approximate center of the display screen 7a. This first timer display XJ1 is a display that indicates a count-up (timer operation) at a longer time interval than the second timer display XJ2 described below, and specifically, a display that indicates a count-up every 15 seconds. The first timer display XJ1 displays the timer value in a rectangular frame. At this time, as shown in FIG. 105(B), the first timer display XJ1 displays "00:00", which indicates that the timer value is 0 seconds, and the frame is blue. This first timer display XJ1 disappears after this display and is displayed again when the count-up occurs. Note that the first timer display XJ1 may be any display that indicates a count-up at an interval longer than 1 second, for example.

Next, as shown in FIG. 105(C), a second timer display performance is performed. In this second timer display performance, a second timer display XJ2 is displayed in the upper right corner of the display screen 7a. During this second timer display performance, the first timer display XJ1 is turned off. This second timer display XJ2 is a display that indicates a count-up (timer operation) at a shorter time interval than the above-mentioned first timer display XJ1, and specifically, a display that indicates a count-up every second. At this time, as shown in FIG. 105(C), the second timer display XJ2 displays "0", indicating that the timer value is 0 seconds. This second timer display XJ2 continues to be displayed in the upper right corner of the display screen 7a even after this display. Note that the second timer display XJ2 may be any display that indicates a count-up at intervals of, for example, 1 second or less.

Next, as shown in FIG. 105(D), the first timer appearance effect is performed. In this first timer appearance effect, the second timer display XJ2 continues to be displayed in the upper right corner of the display screen 7a, and the first timer display XJ1 is redisplayed approximately in the center of the display screen 7a. The second timer display XJ2 counts up every second and the timer value is "10", while the first timer display XJ1 counts up every 15 seconds and the timer value is "15:00".

Next, as shown in FIG. 105(E), a first timer mode change presentation is performed. In this first timer mode change presentation, the second timer display XJ2 continues to be displayed in the upper right corner of the display screen 7a, and the mode of the first timer display XJ1 changes in approximately the center of the display screen 7a. Specifically, the first timer display XJ1 rotates and expands on the surface of the display screen 7a, while the color of the frame changes from blue to green, red, etc. However, this is not limited to this, and the first timer display XJ1 may rotate on the display screen 7a from the front to the back, the font of the timer value may be changed, or it may move.

Next, as shown in FIG. 105(F), the first timer disappearance effect is performed. In this first timer disappearance effect, the second timer display XJ2 continues to be displayed in the upper right corner of the display screen 7a, while the first timer display XJ1 gradually disappears.

Next, as shown in FIG. 105 (G), a time-up performance A is performed. In this time-up performance A, the second timer display XJ2 continues to be displayed in the upper right corner of the display screen 7a, and the first timer display XJ1 is redisplayed approximately in the center of the display screen 7a. At this time, the first timer display XJ1 changes state as in the first timer state change performance described above. In this case, the first timer display XJ1 shows that the timer value is "30:00" (30 seconds) and the time is up. The first timer display XJ1 is erased after the state change. At this time, the second timer display XJ2 shows that the timer value is "25" (25 seconds).

Next, as shown in FIG. 105(H), chance-up effect A is performed. This chance-up effect A is performed when the first timer display XJ1 times out, and a chance-up image XJ3 is displayed in the position on the display screen 7a where the first timer display XJ1 was displayed, and the reserved icon 9A changes from blue to green (the hatched portion in the figure). This reserve change indicates that the likelihood of a jackpot increase in the fluctuation corresponding to the reserved icon 9A that has been reserved. The chance-up image XJ3 is an image that suggests that the likelihood of a jackpot has increased, and is written as "chance" in FIG. 105(H).

Next, as shown in FIG. 105(I), a time-up effect B is performed. In this time-up effect B, the second timer display XJ2 continues to be displayed in the upper right corner of the display screen 7a. In this case, the second timer display XJ2 displays a timer value of "30" (30 seconds), and the time is up.

Next, as shown in FIG. 105(J), chance up performance B is performed. This chance up performance B is performed when the second timer display XJ2 times out, and a chance up image XJ3 is displayed approximately in the center of the display screen 7a, and the reserved icon 9A changes from green to red (cross-hatched portion in the figure). This reserved change indicates that the likelihood of a jackpot in the fluctuation corresponding to the reserved icon 9A that has changed has increased even more than in chance up performance A. In FIG. 105(J), the chance up image XJ3 is displayed as "super hot," suggesting that the likelihood of a jackpot has increased even more than in chance up performance A.

[Double timer display effect B]
FIG. 106 is a diagram for explaining the double timer display performance B. The double timer display performance B in FIG. 106 is a performance with the same variation of the special pattern. In the double timer display performance B, as shown in FIG. 106(A), first, a decorative pattern variation performance is performed. In this decorative pattern variation performance, the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R vary vertically in the approximate center of the display screen 7a. In addition, the reserved icon 9A and the variable icon 9C are displayed in the lower left of the display screen 7a. At this time, the reserved icon 9A and the variable icon 9C are white in color. The reserved icon 9A or the variable icon 9C indicates the jackpot expectation by the color of the icon. In this case, the white color of the icon indicates the lowest jackpot expectation, the yellow color indicates the third highest jackpot expectation, the green color indicates the second highest jackpot expectation, and the red color indicates the highest jackpot expectation.

Next, as shown in FIG. 106(B), the first timer display performance is performed. In this first timer display performance, the first timer display XJ1 is displayed in approximately the center of the display screen 7a. This first timer display XJ1 is a display that indicates a countdown (timer operation) at a longer time interval than the second timer display XJ2 described below, and specifically, a display that indicates a countdown of the timer value every 20 seconds. The first timer display XJ1 displays the timer value in a rectangular frame. At this time, as shown in FIG. 106(B), the first timer display XJ1 displays "40:00", which indicates a timer value of 40 seconds, and the frame is colored blue. This first timer display XJ1 disappears after this display and is displayed again during the countdown. Note that the first timer display XJ1 may be any display that indicates a countdown at an interval longer than 1 second, for example.

Next, as shown in FIG. 106(C), a second timer display performance is performed. In this second timer display performance, a second timer display XJ2 is displayed in the upper right corner of the display screen 7a. During this second timer display performance, the first timer display XJ1 is turned off. This second timer display XJ2 is a display that indicates a count-up (timer operation) at a shorter time interval than the above-mentioned first timer display XJ1, and specifically, a display that indicates a countdown every second. At this time, as shown in FIG. 106(C), the second timer display XJ2 displays "20", indicating that the timer value is 20 seconds. This second timer display XJ2 continues to be displayed in the upper right corner of the display screen 7a even after this display. Note that the second timer display XJ2 may be any display that indicates a countdown at intervals of, for example, one second or less.

Next, as shown in FIG. 106(D), the first timer appearance effect is performed. In this first timer appearance effect, the second timer display XJ2 continues to be displayed in the upper right corner of the display screen 7a, and the first timer display XJ1 is redisplayed approximately in the center of the display screen 7a. The second timer display XJ2 counts down every second and the timer value is "10", while the first timer display XJ1 counts down every 20 seconds and the timer value is "20:00".

Next, as shown in FIG. 106(E), a first timer mode change presentation is performed. In this first timer mode change presentation, the second timer display XJ2 continues to be displayed in the upper right corner of the display screen 7a, and the mode of the first timer display XJ1 changes in approximately the center of the display screen 7a. Specifically, the first timer display XJ1 rotates and expands on the surface of the display screen 7a, while the color of the frame changes from blue to green, red, etc. However, this is not limited to this, and the first timer display XJ1 may rotate on the display screen 7a from the front to the back, the font of the timer value may be changed, or it may move.

Next, as shown in FIG. 106(F), the first timer disappearance effect is performed. In this first timer disappearance effect, the second timer display XJ2 continues to be displayed in the upper right corner of the display screen 7a, while the first timer display XJ1 gradually disappears.

Next, as shown in FIG. 106(G), a time-up effect A is performed. In this time-up effect A, the second timer display XJ2 continues to be displayed in the upper right corner of the display screen 7a, and the timer value becomes "0" (0 seconds), indicating that the timer is up.

Next, as shown in FIG. 106 (H), chance-up effect A is performed. This chance-up effect A is performed when the second timer display XJ2 times out, and a chance-up image XJ3 is displayed approximately in the center of the display screen 7a, and the reserved icon 9A changes from blue to green (the hatched portion in the figure). This indicates that the reserved change increases the likelihood of a jackpot in the fluctuation corresponding to the reserved icon 9A that has changed. The chance-up image XJ3 is an image that suggests that the likelihood of a jackpot has increased, and is written as "chance" in FIG. 106 (H).

Next, as shown in FIG. 106 (I), a time-up performance B is performed. In this time-up performance B, the first timer display XJ1 is redisplayed approximately in the center of the display screen 7a. At this time, the first timer display XJ1 changes state as in the first timer state change performance described above. In this case, the first timer display XJ1 displays a timer value of "00:00" (0 seconds), indicating that the time is up. The first timer display XJ1 is erased after the state change.

Next, as shown in FIG. 106(J), chance up performance B is performed. This chance up performance B is performed when the first timer display XJ1 times out, and a chance up image XJ3 is displayed approximately in the center of the display screen 7a, and the reserved icon 9A changes from green to red (cross-hatched portion in the figure). This reserved change indicates that the likelihood of a jackpot in the fluctuation corresponding to the reserved icon 9A that has changed has increased even more than in chance up performance A. In FIG. 106(J), the chance up image XJ3 is displayed as "super hot," suggesting that the likelihood of a jackpot has increased even more than in chance up performance A.

[Double timer display effect C]
FIG. 107 is a diagram for explaining the double timer display performance C. The double timer display performance C in FIG. 107 is a performance with the same variation of the special pattern. In the double timer display performance C, as shown in FIG. 107(A), first, a decorative pattern variation performance is performed. In this decorative pattern variation performance, the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R vary vertically in the approximate center of the display screen 7a. In addition, the reserved icon 9A and the variable icon 9C are displayed in the lower left of the display screen 7a. At this time, the reserved icon 9A and the variable icon 9C are white in color. The reserved icon 9A or the variable icon 9C indicates the jackpot expectation by the color of the icon. In this case, the white icon color indicates the lowest jackpot expectation, the yellow icon indicates the third highest jackpot expectation, the green icon indicates the second highest jackpot expectation, and the red icon indicates the highest jackpot expectation.

Next, as shown in FIG. 107(B), the first timer display performance is performed. In this first timer display performance, the first timer display XJ1 is displayed in approximately the center of the display screen 7a. This first timer display XJ1 is a display that indicates a countdown (timer operation) at a longer time interval than the second timer display XJ2 described below, and specifically, a display that indicates a countdown every 10 seconds. The first timer display XJ1 displays the timer value in a rectangular frame. At this time, as shown in FIG. 107(B), the first timer display XJ1 displays "20:00", which indicates 20 seconds, and the frame is blue in color. This first timer display XJ1 disappears after this display and is displayed again during the countdown. Note that the first timer display XJ1 may be any display that indicates a countdown at an interval longer than 1 second, for example.

Next, as shown in FIG. 107(C), a second timer display performance is performed. In this second timer display performance, a second timer display XJ2 is displayed in the upper right corner of the display screen 7a. During this second timer display performance, the first timer display XJ1 is turned off. This second timer display XJ2 is a display that indicates a count-up (timer operation) at a shorter time interval than the above-mentioned first timer display XJ1, and specifically, a display that indicates a countdown every second. At this time, as shown in FIG. 107(C), the second timer display XJ2 displays "20", which indicates 20 seconds. This second timer display XJ2 continues to be displayed in the upper right corner of the display screen 7a even after this display. Note that the second timer display XJ2 may be any display that indicates a countdown at intervals of, for example, one second or less.

Next, as shown in FIG. 107(D), the first timer appearance effect is performed. In this first timer appearance effect, the second timer display XJ2 continues to be displayed in the upper right corner of the display screen 7a, and the first timer display XJ1 is redisplayed approximately in the center of the display screen 7a. The second timer display XJ2 counts down every second to "10", while the first timer display XJ1 counts down in 10-second intervals to "10:00". In other words, the timer values of the first timer display XJ1 and the second timer display XJ2 are the same.

Next, as shown in FIG. 107(E), a first timer mode change presentation is performed. In this first timer mode change presentation, the second timer display XJ2 continues to be displayed in the upper right corner of the display screen 7a, and the mode of the first timer display XJ1 changes in approximately the center of the display screen 7a. Specifically, the first timer display XJ1 rotates and expands on the surface of the display screen 7a, while the color of the frame changes from blue to green, red, etc. However, this is not limited to this, and the first timer display XJ1 may rotate on the display screen 7a from the front to the back, the font of the timer value may be changed, or it may move.

Next, as shown in FIG. 107(F), the first timer disappearance effect is performed. In this first timer disappearance effect, the second timer display XJ2 continues to be displayed in the upper right corner of the display screen 7a, while the first timer display XJ1 gradually disappears.

Next, as shown in FIG. 107(G), a time-up effect is performed. In this time-up effect, the second timer display XJ2 continues to be displayed in the upper right corner of the display screen 7a, and the first timer display XJ1 is displayed approximately in the center. In this case, the first timer display XJ1 indicates that the timer value is "00:00" (0 seconds), indicating that the time is up, and further, the second timer display XJ2 indicates that the timer value is "0" (0 seconds), indicating that the timer is up. At this time, the first timer display XJ1 changes its appearance as in the first timer appearance change effect described above. The first timer display XJ1 is erased after the appearance change.

Next, as shown in FIG. 107(H), a chance-up effect is performed. This chance-up effect is performed when the first timer display XJ1 and the second timer display XJ2 time up, and a chance-up image XJ3 is displayed approximately in the center of the display screen 7a, and the reserved icon 9A changes from blue to red (cross-hatched portion in the figure). This indicates that the reserved change will significantly increase the likelihood of a jackpot in the fluctuation corresponding to the reserved icon 9A that has changed. The chance-up image XJ3 is an image suggesting that the likelihood of a jackpot has increased, and in FIG. 107(H) it is displayed as "super hot," suggesting that the likelihood of a jackpot has increased significantly.

In the above double timer display effects A to C, the appearance of the second timer display XJ2 does not change. However, the appearance of the second timer display XJ2 may be changed. For example, the second timer display XJ2 may expand or contract, change color, rotate, or display an effect.

[Example of effect]
In the above double timer display effects A to C, the first timer display XJ1 performs a timer operation display (count-up display or count-down display) at a relatively long time interval (20 seconds in the double timer display effect B) and the second timer display XJ2 performs a timer operation display at a relatively short time interval (0.01 seconds) in the same fluctuation. With this configuration, the two timer displays can be experienced on different time axes, and a sense of thrill and surprise can be imparted to the timer display, improving the interest of the timer effects. As a result, the interest of the game can be improved.

In the above double timer display effects A to C, the first timer display XJ1 is displayed at the timing when the timer operation display (count-up display or count-down display) is performed in the first timer mode change effect, and is displayed larger than the second timer display XJ2. With this configuration, the first timer display XJ1 can make an impression on the player, that is, it is possible to make it easier for the player to recognize the timer displays that are two different time axes, and the player's interest can be attracted to the two different timer displays. As a result, the excitement of the game can be increased.

In the above double timer display effects A to C, the first timer display XJ1 undergoes a predetermined change in appearance at the timing when the timer operation display (count-up display or count-down display) is performed. With this configuration, the change in appearance of the first timer display XJ1 can make an impression on the player with the first timer display XJ1, that is, it can make it easier for the player to recognize the timer displays that are two different time axes, and can attract the player's interest in the two different timer displays. As a result, the excitement of the game can be increased.

In the above double timer display effects A to C, the first timer display XJ1 rotates at the timing when the timer operation display (count up display or count down display) is performed. With this configuration, the rotation of the first timer display XJ1 can impress the player with the first timer display XJ1, that is, it can be made easier for the player to recognize the timer displays that are two different time axes, and the player's interest can be attracted to the two different timer displays. As a result, the excitement of the game can be increased.

In the above double timer display effects A to C, the first timer display XJ1 changes color at the timing when the timer operation display (count-up display or count-down display) is performed. With this configuration, the color change of the first timer display XJ1 can make an impression on the player, that is, it can make it easier for the player to recognize the timer displays that are two different time axes, and can attract the player's interest in the two different timer displays. As a result, the excitement of the game can be increased.

In the gaming machine of this embodiment, the following aspects can be realized.
[Aspect XJ-1]
A gaming machine having a display means capable of executing a plurality of display effects,
A first display effect may be performed as one of the plurality of display effects,
A second display effect may be performed as one of the plurality of display effects,
The first display effect is a first timer display effect that displays a timer operation at a relatively long time interval,
The second display effect is a second timer display effect that displays a timer operation at relatively short time intervals,
A combination effect including the first display effect and the second display effect may be performed,
The gaming machine is characterized in that, in the combination presentation, the first display presentation and the second display presentation are performed in the same variation.
[Aspect XJ-2]
The gaming machine according to aspect XJ-1,
In the combination effect, the first timer display of the first display effect is displayed larger than the second timer display at a timing when the timer operation display is performed.
A gaming machine characterized by:
[Aspect XJ-3]
A gaming machine according to aspect XJ-2,
In the combination performance, the first timer display of the first display performance changes in a predetermined manner at the timing of performing the timer operation display.
A gaming machine characterized by:
[Aspect XJ-4]
A gaming machine according to aspect XJ-3,
In the combination performance, the first timer display of the first display performance rotates as the predetermined change in appearance at the timing when the timer operation display is performed.
A gaming machine characterized by:
[Aspect XJ-5]
A gaming machine according to aspect XJ-3 or aspect XJ-4,
In the combination effect, the first timer display of the first display effect changes color as the predetermined change in appearance at the timing when the timer operation display is performed.
A gaming machine characterized by:

In the gaming machine 1 of the above-described embodiment, when a jackpot is hit, the game state after the jackpot can be either a sure-win game state (high probability, high base state) or a time-limited game state (low probability, high base state). In either the sure-win game state or the time-limited game state, when the number of times the special pattern has changed reaches 100, the game state transitions to the normal game state.
Here, in the gaming machine 1 of this embodiment, three big wins as described below may be provided.
1. After the jackpot, the game state becomes a probability variation game state, and when the number of times the special symbol changes becomes the first specified number of times, the jackpot K1 transitions to a normal game state.
2. After the jackpot, the game state becomes a probability variation game state, and when the number of times the special symbol changes becomes a second specified number of times, the jackpot K2 transitions to a normal game state.
3. After the jackpot, the game state becomes a probability variation game state, and when the number of times the special symbol changes reaches a first specified number of times, the game state transitions to a time-saving game state, and when the number of times the special symbol changes reaches a second specified number of times, the game state transitions to a normal game state.
The big wins K1 to K3 are selected with a predetermined probability when a big win occurs.

Final screen display performance A described below represents the display performance after a jackpot game based on jackpot K1, final screen display performance B represents the display performance after a jackpot game based on jackpot K2, and final screen display performance C represents the display performance after a jackpot game based on jackpot K3.
In the present embodiment, the first specified number is 100 times, and the second specified number is 200 times. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the first specified number may be any number as long as it is smaller than the second specified number. The second specified number may be any number as long as it is larger than the first specified number.
In addition, since the normal gaming state is a gaming state that is relatively disadvantageous to the player, it is also called the disadvantageous gaming state, while the time-saving gaming state and the special gaming state are gaming states that are relatively advantageous to the player, so they are collectively called advantageous gaming states.

The final screen display effects A to C are explained below with reference to Figures 108 to 110. These final screen display effects are executed during the decorative pattern variation effect when the game state is normal, time-saving (low probability, low base state), or probability change (high probability, high base state). That is, the image control microcomputer 101 analyzes the command received from the sub-control board 90, and if it contains an instruction to execute the final screen display effect, it reads out the corresponding image data from the ROM 103 and displays the image on the display screen 7a or sub-display screen 64 of the image display device 7.

[Final screen display effect A]
FIG. 108 is a diagram for explaining the final screen display performance A. This final screen display performance A includes a probability game performance, a result information display performance, and a normal game performance. The probability game performance is a display performance of the variation when the number of variations of the special pattern is 5 times remaining until the first specified number of times in the probability game state (high probability high base state) entered after the big win K1, the result information display performance is a display performance in the variation when the first specified number of times (100 times) is reached, and the normal game performance is a display performance in the variation when the game transitions to the normal game state. In this result information display performance A, the reserved icon 9A and the variation icon 9C are displayed on the display screen 7a, but are omitted in the figure.

In the final screen display performance A, in the high probability game state after the big win K1, as shown in FIG. 108(A), a high probability game performance is performed. In this high probability game performance, on the display screen 7a, a right hit suggestion display XK1 is displayed in the upper left, a high probability game suggestion display XK2 is displayed in the upper right, a high probability game remaining count display XK3 is displayed in the lower right, a variation display of the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R is performed in the approximate center, and an ally character CRA is displayed below. The right hit suggestion display XK1 is a display that encourages the player to hit right. The high probability game suggestion display XK2 is a display that suggests that the game state is a high probability game state. The high probability game remaining count display XK3 is a display that suggests how many more times the high probability game state will continue. This number represents the number of times the special pattern will vary. In FIG. 108(A), there are 5 special symbol variations remaining until the first specified number of variations, so the remaining number of variations XK3 is displayed as "5 variations remaining."

Next, after the jackpot K1, when the first specified number of times (100 times) is reached, a result information display effect is performed as shown in FIG. 108 (B). In this result information display effect, a result information display XK4 is displayed on the display screen 7a. This result information display XK4 includes information that indicates the result of the current game state during the consecutive wins. "During consecutive wins" refers to the period after a jackpot (also called the first jackpot) in the normal game state, when the game enters a special game state or a time-limited game state, and then when the game returns to the normal game state (excluding during jackpot play). For example, "six consecutive wins" refers to six jackpots, including the first jackpot, occurring after the first jackpot and before the game returns to the normal game state (excluding during jackpot play). The information showing the result of the game state during the consecutive win includes acquired ball information showing the acquired balls acquired during the consecutive win (indicated as "acquired" in the result information display XK4), consecutive win count information showing the number of consecutive wins (indicated as "number of consecutive wins" in the result information display XK4), average time information showing the average time until a jackpot is acquired during the consecutive win (indicated as "average time" in the result information display XK4), and rank information showing a predetermined rank (indicated as "rank" in the result information display XK4). For example, if the number of consecutive wins is six and the time spent to acquire these six jackpots is 15 minutes, the average time is 2 minutes 30 seconds. The rank information is ranked up in proportion to the acquired balls and the number of consecutive wins. In the result information display XK4 of FIG. 108(B), the acquired ball information is "acquired: 5312 balls", the consecutive win count information is "number of consecutive wins: 6 times", the average time information is "average time: 2 minutes 30 seconds", and the rank information is "rank: A". In addition, during the result information display, the right-hit suggestion display XK1 continues to be displayed.

Next, when the game enters the normal game mode, the normal game presentation is performed as shown in FIG. 108(C). In this normal game presentation, the right-hit suggestion display XK1 is erased, and the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R change.

[Final screen display effect B]
109 is a diagram for explaining the final screen display effect B. This final screen display effect B includes a probability variable game effect A, a result information display effect A, an advantageous game state continuation effect, a probability variable game effect B, a result information display effect B, and a normal game effect. The probability variation game presentation A is a display presentation when the number of times the special symbol changes is 5 times remaining until the first specified number of times in the probability variation game state (high probability high base state) entered after the big win K2, the result information display presentation A is a display presentation at the time of the change when the first specified number of times (100 times), the advantageous game state continuation presentation is a display presentation at the time of the change when the first specified number of times (100 times) is reached and is a display presentation performed after the result information display presentation A, the probability variation game presentation B is a display presentation at the time of the change when the number of times the special symbol changes is 3 times remaining until the second specified number of times in the probability variation game state, the result information display presentation B is a display presentation at the time of the change when the second specified number of times is reached in the probability variation game state, and the normal game presentation is a display presentation at the time of the change when the game transitions to the normal game state. In this final screen display presentation B, the reserved icon 9A and the change icon 9C are displayed on the display screen 7a, but are omitted in the figure.

In the final screen display performance B, as shown in FIG. 109(A), in the high probability game state after the big win K2, the high probability game performance A is performed. In this high probability game performance A, on the display screen 7a, a right hit suggestion display XK1 is displayed in the upper left, a high probability game suggestion display XK2 is displayed in the upper right, a high probability game remaining count display XK3 is displayed in the lower right, a variation display of the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R is performed in the approximate center, and an ally character CRA is displayed below. The right hit suggestion display XK1 is a display that encourages the player to hit right. The high probability game suggestion display XK2 is a display that suggests that the game state is a high probability game state. The high probability game remaining count display XK3 is a display that suggests how many more times the high probability game state will continue. This number represents the number of times the special pattern will vary. In FIG. 109(A), there are 5 special symbol variations remaining until the first specified number of variations, so the remaining number of variations XK3 is displayed as "5 variations remaining."

Next, after the jackpot K2, when the first specified number of times (100 times) is reached, a result information display performance A is performed as shown in FIG. 109(B). In this result information display performance A, a result information display XK4 is displayed on the display screen 7a. This result information display XK4 includes information showing the results of the current consecutive win game. "Continuous win" refers to the period after a jackpot (also called the first jackpot) in the normal game state, when the game enters a special game state or a time-limited game state, and then when the game returns to the normal game state (excluding during a jackpot game). For example, "six consecutive wins" refers to six jackpots, including the first jackpot, occurring after the first jackpot and before the game returns to the normal game state (excluding during a jackpot game). The information showing the result of the game during the consecutive win includes the winning ball information showing the winning balls during the consecutive win (shown as "winning" in the result information display XK4), the consecutive win count information showing the number of consecutive wins (shown as "number of consecutive wins" in the result information display XK4), the average time information showing the average time until the big win is won during the consecutive win (shown as "average time" in the result information display XK4), and the rank information showing a predetermined rank (shown as "rank" in the result information display XK4). For example, if the number of consecutive wins is six and the time spent to win these six big wins is 15 minutes, the average time is 2 minutes 30 seconds. The rank information is ranked up in proportion to the winning balls and the number of consecutive wins. In the result information display XK4 of FIG. 109(B), the winning ball information is "winning: 5312 balls", the consecutive win count information is "number of consecutive wins: 6 times", the average time information is "average time: 2 minutes 30 seconds", and the rank information is "rank: A". In addition, during the result information display, the right-hit suggestion display XK1 continues to be displayed.

Next, in the high probability game state, the first specified number of fluctuations (100 times) occur, and after the result information display presentation A ends, a favorable game state continuation presentation is performed, as shown in FIG. 109(C). In this favorable game state continuation presentation, a state suggestion display XK5 is displayed in approximately the center of the display screen 7a, suggesting that a favorable game state (here, a high probability game state) will be entered. In FIG. 109(C), the state suggestion display XK5 is written as "Favorable game state continues!" Note that in the favorable game state continuation display presentation, the right hit suggestion display XK1 continues to be displayed.

Next, the special chance game state continues, and special chance game state presentation B is performed, as shown in FIG. 109(D). In this special chance game presentation B, the right hit suggestion display XK1 continues to be displayed in the upper left of the display screen 7a, the special chance suggestion display XK2 is displayed in the upper right, the remaining special chance number display XK3 is displayed in the lower right, the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R are displayed in the approximate center, and the ally character CRA is displayed below. In FIG. 109(D), there are three remaining times for the special pattern to change until the second specified number of times, so the remaining special chance number display XK3 is displayed as "3 more".

Next, when the second specified number of times is reached in the probability variation game state, the result information display effect B is performed as shown in FIG. 109 (E). In this result information display effect B, the result information display XK6 is displayed on the display screen 7a. This result information display XK6 includes information that represents the result of the game during the current consecutive win. In addition, the information that represents the result of the game during the consecutive win in the result information display XK6 includes, as in the result information display XK4, acquired ball information that represents the acquired balls acquired during the consecutive win (indicated as "acquired" in the result information display XK4), consecutive win count information that represents the number of consecutive wins (indicated as "consecutive win count" in the result information display XK4), average time information that represents the average time until a jackpot is acquired during the consecutive win (indicated as "average time" in the result information display XK4), and rank information that represents a predetermined rank (indicated as "rank" in the result information display XK4). In the result information display XK6 in FIG. 109(E), the winning ball information is "Winning: 10,000 balls", the consecutive win count information is "Number of consecutive wins: 12 times", the average time information is "Average time: 2 minutes 22 seconds", and the rank information is "Rank: S". In addition, in the result information display performance, the right hit suggestion display XK1 is continuously displayed.

Next, when the normal game state changes, the normal game presentation is performed as shown in FIG. 109 (F). In this normal game presentation, the right-hit suggestion display XK1 is erased, and the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R change.

[Final screen display effect C]
110 is a diagram for explaining the final screen display effect C. This final screen display effect C includes a probability variation game effect, a result information display effect A, a favorable game state continuation effect, a time-saving game effect, a result information display effect B, and a normal game effect. The probability variation game presentation is a display presentation when the number of times of variation of the special symbol is 5 times remaining until the first specified number of times in the probability variation game state (high probability high base state) entered after the big win K3, the result information display presentation A is a display presentation at the time of variation when the first specified number of times (100 times), the advantageous game state continuation presentation is a display presentation at the time of variation when the first specified number of times (100 times) is reached and is a display presentation performed after the result information display presentation A, the time-saving game presentation is a display presentation at the time of variation when the number of times of variation of the special symbol is 10 times remaining until the second specified number of times in the time-saving game state to which the transition is made after the first specified number of times, the result information display presentation B is a display presentation at the time of variation when the second specified number of times is reached in the time-saving game state, and the normal game presentation is a display presentation at the time of variation when the transition is made to the normal game state. In this final screen display presentation C, the reserved icon 9A and the variable icon 9C are displayed on the display screen 7a, but are omitted in the figure.

In the final screen display effect C, in the high probability game state after the big win K3, as shown in FIG. 110(A), a high probability game effect is performed. In this high probability game effect, on the display screen 7a, a right hit suggestion display XK1 is displayed in the upper left, a high probability game suggestion display XK2 is displayed in the upper right, a high probability game remaining count display XK3 is displayed in the lower right, a variation display of the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R is performed in the approximate center, and an ally character CRA is displayed below. The right hit suggestion display XK1 is a display that encourages the player to hit right. The high probability game suggestion display XK2 is a display that suggests that the game state is a high probability game state. The high probability game remaining count display XK3 is a display that suggests how many more times the high probability game state will continue. This number represents the number of times the special pattern will vary. In FIG. 110(A), there are 5 special symbol variations remaining until the first specified number of variations, so the remaining number of variations XK3 is displayed as "5 variations remaining."

Next, after the jackpot K3, when the first specified number of times (100 times) is reached, a result information display performance A is performed as shown in FIG. 110(B). In this result information display performance A, a result information display XK4 is displayed on the display screen 7a. This result information display XK4 includes information that indicates the result of the current game state during the consecutive wins. "During consecutive wins" refers to the period after a jackpot (also called the first jackpot) in the normal game state, when the game enters a special game state or a time-limited game state, and then when the game returns to the normal game state (excluding during jackpot play). For example, "six consecutive wins" refers to six jackpots, including the first jackpot, occurring after the first jackpot and before the game returns to the normal game state (excluding during jackpot play). The information showing the result of the game state during the consecutive win includes acquired ball information showing the acquired balls acquired during the consecutive win (indicated as "acquired" in the result information display XK4), consecutive win count information showing the number of consecutive wins (indicated as "number of consecutive wins" in the result information display XK4), average time information showing the average time until a jackpot is acquired during the consecutive win (indicated as "average time" in the result information display XK4), and rank information showing a predetermined rank (indicated as "rank" in the result information display XK4). For example, if the number of consecutive wins is six and the time spent to acquire these six jackpots is 15 minutes, the average time is 2 minutes 30 seconds. The rank information is ranked up in proportion to the acquired balls and the number of consecutive wins. In the result information display XK4 of FIG. 110(B), the acquired ball information is "acquired: 5312 balls", the consecutive win count information is "number of consecutive wins: 6 times", the average time information is "average time: 2 minutes 30 seconds", and the rank information is "rank: A". In addition, during the result information display, the right-hit suggestion display XK1 continues to be displayed.

Next, after the first specified number of fluctuations (100 times) and the end of the result information display presentation A, as shown in FIG. 110(C), a favorable game state continuation presentation is performed. In this favorable game state continuation presentation, a state suggestion display XK7 is displayed in approximately the center of the display screen 7a, suggesting that a favorable game state (here, time-saving game state) will be entered. In FIG. 110(C), the state suggestion display XK7 is written as "Favourable game state continues! Entering time-saving game state". Note that in the favorable game state continuation display presentation, the right hit suggestion display XK1 continues to be displayed.

Next, when the time-saving game state is entered and there are 10 fluctuations remaining until the second specified number of times, a time-saving game presentation is performed as shown in FIG. 110(D). In this time-saving game presentation, on the display screen 7a, the right-hit suggestion display XK1 continues to be displayed in the upper left, the time-saving suggestion display XK8 is displayed in the upper right, the remaining time-saving number display XK9 is displayed in the lower right, the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R are displayed in the approximate center, and the ally character CRA is displayed below. In FIG. 110(D), since there are 10 remaining times for the special pattern to fluctuate until the second specified number of times, the remaining time-saving number display XK9 is displayed as "10 more."

Next, when the second specified number of times is reached in the probability variation game state, the result information display effect B is performed as shown in FIG. 110 (E). In this result information display effect B, the result information display XK10 is displayed on the display screen 7a. This result information display XK10 includes information that represents the result of the game during the current consecutive win. In addition, the information that represents the result of the game during the consecutive win in the result information display XK10 includes, as in the result information display XK4, acquired ball information that represents the acquired balls acquired during the consecutive win (indicated as "acquired" in the result information display XK4), consecutive win count information that represents the number of consecutive wins (indicated as "consecutive win count" in the result information display XK4), average time information that represents the average time until a jackpot is acquired during the consecutive win (indicated as "average time" in the result information display XK4), and rank information that represents a predetermined rank (indicated as "rank" in the result information display XK4). In the result information display XK6 in FIG. 110(E), the winning ball information is "Winning: 10,000 balls", the consecutive win count information is "Number of consecutive wins: 12 times", the average time information is "Average time: 2 minutes 22 seconds", and the rank information is "Rank: S". In addition, in the result information display performance, the right hit suggestion display XK1 is continuously displayed.

Next, when the normal game state changes, the normal game presentation is performed as shown in FIG. 110(F). In this normal game presentation, the right-hit suggestion display XK1 is erased, and the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R change.

In the above final screen display performances B to C, even though the result information display performance A is performed and the result information display XK4 is displayed, the game does not return to the normal game state and the advantageous game state continues. Then, game information such as the jackpot and the balls acquired in the advantageous game state after the result information display XK4 is included in the information indicating the result of the game during the consecutive wins in the result information display XK6 and the result information display XK10. For example, in the above final screen display performance B, if the acquired balls indicated by the balls acquired information in the result information display XK4 are 6000 balls, and in the advantageous game state after the result information display XK4 is displayed, a jackpot is won and an additional 1000 balls are acquired, and after the jackpot game, the special pattern is changed to display the result information display XK4 or the result information display XK6, the acquired balls indicated by the balls acquired information in the result information display XK4 or the result information display XK6 will be 7000 balls.

[Modification]
In the above final screen display effects A to C, when the normal game effect (normal game state) is entered and the third specified number of times is reached, the game state may be configured to transition to a time-saving game state. In this case, game information such as a jackpot and winning balls in this time-saving game state may be included in the information showing the result of the game during the winning streak in the result information display displayed thereafter.

[Example of effect]
In the above-mentioned final screen display performances B to C, when the game state is a favorable game state (probability game state, time-saving game state) that is relatively favorable to the player, a result information display XK4 is displayed based on the fact that the number of times the special symbol changes has reached a first specified value (for example, 100 times), which indicates that the favorable game state will end and the game state will transition to an unfavorable game state (normal game state) that is relatively unfavorable to the player, and then a display indicating that the game state is favorable (state indication display XK5 and probability game indication display XK2, or state indication display XK7 and time-saving game state indication display XK8) is displayed. According to this configuration, even if the result information display XK4 that indicates a transition to an unfavorable game state is displayed, the favorable game state can continue even after that, so the player can continue to hope for the continuation of the favorable game state even if the result information display XK4 is displayed, and a high interest can be given to the progress of the display performance until the game state actually transitions to the normal game state. As a result, the enjoyment of the game can be improved.

In the above-mentioned final screen display performance C, when the game state is in a probability variable game state, a result information display XK4 is displayed indicating that the probability variable game state will end and the game state will transition to a normal game state based on the number of times the special symbol changes reaching a first specified value, and the result information display XK4 indicates the result of the consecutive big wins, and then a state indication display XK7 is displayed indicating that the game state is in a time-limited game state. With this configuration, even if the result information display XK4 indicating a transition to a normal game state is displayed, the game state may still be in a time-limited game state after that, so the player can continue to hope for the time-limited game state to continue even if the result information display XK4 is displayed, and a high level of interest can be given to the progress of the display performance until the game state actually transitions to the normal game state. As a result, the interest of the game can be improved.

In the above-mentioned final screen display performance C, even though the result information display XK4 is performed, the state suggestion display XK7 is performed, and then the game state transitions to the time-saving game state, and based on the fact that the number of times the special symbol changes has reached a second specified value (e.g., 200), the result information display XK10 is performed, which shows the result of the jackpot game during the consecutive wins. That is, even if the result information display XK4, which suggests a transition to the normal game state, is displayed, the state suggestion display XK7 is displayed and the game continues to be in the time-saving game state, and then the number of times the special symbol changes reaches the second specified value and the result information display XK10 is performed. With this configuration, even if the first result information display XK4 is displayed, the player can continue to hope for the time-saving game state until the second result information display XK10 is displayed, and during that time, the player can be highly interested in the display performance. As a result, the interest in the game can be improved.

In the above-mentioned final screen display performance C, even though the result information display XK4 is performed, the state suggestion display XK7 is performed, and then the game state transitions to the time-saving game state, and based on the fact that the number of times the special symbol changes has reached a second specified value (e.g., 200), the result information display XK10 is performed, which indicates the result of the jackpot game during the consecutive wins, and the game state is changed from the time-saving game state to the normal game state. In other words, even if the result information display XK4, which suggests a transition to the normal game state, is displayed, the state suggestion display XK7 is displayed and the game state continues to be in the time-saving game state, and from there the number of times the special symbol changes reaches the second specified value, the result information display XK10 is performed, and the game state is changed from the time-saving game state to the normal game state. With this configuration, even if the first result information display XK4 is displayed, the player can continue to hope for the time-saving game state until the game actually transitions to the normal game state, and during that time, the player can be highly interested in the display performance. As a result, the enjoyment of the game can be improved.

In the above final screen display effects B to C, the result information display XK4 and the status suggestion display XK7 each contain information indicating the number of consecutive wins and information indicating the number of balls acquired. With this configuration, the number of consecutive wins and the number of balls acquired can be notified to the player at once, giving the player a sense of accomplishment from the consecutive wins. As a result, the interest in the game can be improved.

In the gaming machine of this embodiment, the following aspects can be realized.
[Aspect XK-1]
A gaming machine having a display means capable of executing a plurality of display effects,
The gaming machine is configured such that a game is played in one of a plurality of gaming states including a first gaming state that is relatively unfavorable to a player and a second gaming state that is relatively advantageous to a player;
A first display effect may be performed as one of the plurality of display effects,
A second display effect may be performed as one of the plurality of display effects,
The first display effect is a display that suggests that the second gaming state will end and transition to the first gaming state will occur based on the fact that the number of times a special symbol changes has reached a first specified value when the gaming state is the second gaming state, and is an effect that displays first result information that shows the result of a jackpot game during a winning streak;
The second display effect is an effect of performing a state suggesting display suggesting that the game is in the second game state,
A combination effect including the first display effect and the second display effect may be performed,
In the combination performance, the first display performance is performed, and then the second display performance is performed.
A gaming machine characterized by:
[Aspect XK-2]
A gaming machine according to aspect XK-1,
The second gaming state is either a probability variation gaming state or a time-saving gaming state,
In the combination presentation, in the first display presentation, when the game state is the high probability game state, a first result information display is performed, which indicates that the high probability game state will end and the game state will transition to the first game state based on the fact that the number of times the special symbols change has reached the first specified value, and which indicates the result of the jackpot game during the consecutive wins, and then, in the second display presentation, a state indication display is performed, which indicates that the game state is the time-saving game state.
A gaming machine characterized by:
[Aspect XK-3]
A gaming machine according to aspect XK-2,
In the combination presentation, after the state suggestion display is performed in the second display presentation, the game state transitions to the time-saving game state, and then, based on the number of times the special symbols change reaches a second specified value, a second result information display is performed showing the result of the jackpot game during the consecutive wins.
A gaming machine characterized by:
[Aspect XK-4]
A gaming machine according to aspect XK-3,
In the combination performance, after the second result information display is performed, the game state is changed from the time-saving game state to the first game state.
A gaming machine characterized by:
[Aspect XK-5]
A gaming machine according to aspect XK-4,
the first result information display and the second result information display each include information representing the number of consecutive wins and information representing the number of acquired gaming media;
A gaming machine characterized by:

The promotion hold consecutive performances A to C are explained below using Figures 111 to 113. The characteristic performance of this promotion hold consecutive performance is the promotion performance (with hold consecutive) that is executed after a hit is announced. In this embodiment, the performance during a jackpot is also explained as part of the promotion hold consecutive performance. Note that the promotion performance (with hold consecutive) is characterized by announcing that there is a hold that is a hit among the first special chart holds (hereinafter also referred to as a "hold consecutive").

[Promotion Hold Continuous Performance A]
Figure 111 is a diagram to explain the promotion hold consecutive performance A.
First, as shown in FIG. 111(A), a change start performance is executed. The change start performance is a performance in which the performance pattern starts changing. Here, the performance patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R start changing and are changing at high speed. At the bottom of the display screen 7a, three reserved icons 9A corresponding to the first special pattern reserved and the corresponding change icon 9C are displayed. The three reserved icons 9A corresponding to the first special pattern reserved correspond to the first storage area, the second storage area, and the third storage area of the first special pattern reserved storage area 85a, respectively.

Next, as shown in FIG. 111(B), a winning notification effect is executed. The winning notification effect is an effect that notifies the user that a winning has occurred by the state of the effect symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R. Here, the left effect symbol 8L, the center effect symbol 8C, and the right effect symbol 8R are all "4". This suggests that it is a "16R (actually 13R) V non-passing scheduled winning". Note that the winning notification effect stage is different from the confirmed stop effect, and the effect symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are in a provisionally stopped state. Here again, the three reserved icons 9A corresponding to the first special reserved symbol and the corresponding variable icon 9C are displayed at the bottom of the display screen 7a. In particular, it is assumed here that there is a reserved symbol that has become a winning symbol in the first special reserved symbol corresponding to the reserved icon 9A.

Next, as shown in FIG. 111(C), a sword operation promotion effect is executed. The sword operation promotion effect is an effect that encourages the operation of the sword member 65. Here, a sword image KG that imitates the sword member 65 is displayed in the center of the display screen 7a, and a message image MG saying "push" is displayed. When the player then operates the sword member 65, the next effect is executed. Note that even if the player does not operate the sword member 65, the next effect is executed when the effective time for operating the sword member 65 has elapsed.

Next, as shown in FIG. 111(D), a promotion effect (with reserved consecutive wins) is executed. In the promotion effect (with reserved consecutive wins), the first movable role 14 moves (advances) from the retreated position toward the right end of the display screen 7a and stops at the advanced position in the center in front of the display screen 7a. The display screen 7a is divided into two screens, a left screen and a right screen, by the first movable role 14. Here, the left screen displays the performance symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R as all "7". This means that what was announced as "16R (actually 13R) V non-passing scheduled jackpot" has been promoted to "16RV passing scheduled jackpot". In addition, a message image MG with "V" is displayed on the right screen. This is to announce the reserved consecutive wins. Here, the performance symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are fixed and stopped, and the next performance is executed.

Next, as shown in FIG. 111(E), the jackpot digestion presentation A is executed. The jackpot digestion presentation A is a presentation in which the jackpot from the previous variation (hereinafter also referred to as the "applicable jackpot"). Here too, the first movable device 14 remains stationary at the advance position in the center of the front of the display screen 7a. Then, the ally character CRA is displayed on the left screen, and the number of rounds of the jackpot game is displayed in the upper left corner of the left screen. Here, a round display RH of "1R" is displayed. This round display is performed from 1R to 16R. When the round display reaches 16R and the applicable jackpot is digested, the next presentation is executed. Here too, a message image MG of "V" is displayed on the right screen.

Next, as shown in FIG. 111(F), the moving body movement performance is executed. The moving body movement performance is a performance in which the first moving part 14, which has been stationary at the forward center position of the display screen 7a, slowly moves toward the left side of the display screen 7a as shown by the arrow Y. As the first moving part 14 moves, the area of the right screen expands. On this right screen, instead of the message display MG "V", the performance symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are displayed. Here, the performance symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are all "7". This means that the reserved series is "16RV passing scheduled big win". Note that the performance symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are not displayed at the start of the movement of the first moving part 14, and the performance symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are displayed at the stage when the first moving part 14 moves to a position close to the left edge of the display screen 7a, for example, to make the player have expectations regarding the big win type. The first movable part 14 returns to the retracted position and comes to rest.

Next, as shown in FIG. 111 (G), jackpot digestion presentation B is executed. Jackpot digestion presentation B is a presentation in which the reserved consecutive wins are digested. Here, the ally character CRA is displayed in the center of the display screen 7a, and the number of rounds of the jackpot game is displayed in the upper left. Here, a round display RH of "1R" is displayed. This round display is performed from 1R to 16R. When the round display reaches 16R and the jackpot is digested, the next presentation is executed.

Next, as shown in FIG. 111 (H), a status notification effect is executed. The status notification effect notifies the game status. Here, a message image MG saying "It's still going on!" is displayed. This means that the next change will result in a high probability game state (high base state).

[Promotion Hold Continuous Performance B]
Figure 112 is a diagram to explain the promotion hold consecutive performance B.
First, as shown in FIG. 112(A), a change start performance is executed. The change start performance is a performance in which the performance pattern starts changing. Here, the performance patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R start changing and are changing at high speed. At the bottom of the display screen 7a, three reserved icons 9A corresponding to the first special pattern reserved and the corresponding change icon 9C are displayed. The three reserved icons 9A corresponding to the first special pattern reserved correspond to the first storage area, the second storage area, and the third storage area of the first special pattern reserved storage area 85a, respectively.

Next, as shown in FIG. 112(B), a winning notification effect is executed. The winning notification effect is an effect that notifies the player that a winning has occurred by the state of the effect symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R. Here, the left effect symbol 8L, the center effect symbol 8C, and the right effect symbol 8R are all "4". This suggests that it is a "16R (actually 13R) V non-passing scheduled winning". Note that the winning notification effect stage is different from the confirmed stop effect, and the effect symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are in a provisionally stopped state. Here again, the three reserved icons 9A corresponding to the first special chart reserved and the corresponding variable icon 9C are displayed at the bottom of the display screen 7a. Here, it is assumed that there is a reserved icon that is a winning icon in the first special chart reserved corresponding to the reserved icon 9A.

Next, as shown in FIG. 112(C), a sword operation promotion effect is executed. The sword operation promotion effect is an effect that encourages the operation of the sword member 65. Here, a sword image KG that imitates the sword member 65 is displayed in the center of the display screen 7a, and a message image MG saying "push" is displayed. When the player operates the sword member 65 at this point, the next effect is executed. Note that even if the player does not operate the sword member 65, the next effect is executed when the effective time for operating the sword member 65 has elapsed.

Next, as shown in FIG. 112(D), the promotion effect (with reserved consecutive wins) is executed. In the promotion effect (with reserved consecutive wins), the first movable role 14 moves (advances) from the retreated position toward the right end of the display screen 7a and stops at the advanced position in the center in front of the display screen 7a. The display screen 7a is divided into two screens, a left screen and a right screen, by the first movable role 14. Here, a message image MG1 saying "MAX jackpot" is displayed on the left screen. This means that what was reported as "16R (actually 13R) V non-pass scheduled jackpot" has been promoted to "16RV passing scheduled jackpot". Also, a message image MG2 saying "MAX jackpot" is displayed on the right screen. This is to report the reserved consecutive wins, and also to report that it is a "16RV passing scheduled jackpot". Here, the performance patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R (not shown) are fixed and stopped, and the next performance is executed.

Next, as shown in FIG. 112(E), jackpot digestion presentation A is executed. Jackpot digestion presentation A is a presentation in which the jackpot is digested. Here too, the first movable gadget 14 remains stationary at the advance position in the center of the front of the display screen 7a. Then, the ally character CRA is displayed on the left screen, and the number of rounds of the jackpot game is displayed in the upper left corner of the left screen. Here, a round display RH of "1R" is displayed. This round display is performed from 1R to 16R. When the round display reaches 16R and the jackpot is digested, the next presentation is executed. Here too, a message image MG2 saying "MAX jackpot" is displayed on the right screen.

Next, as shown in FIG. 112 (F), a movable body movement performance is executed. In the movable body movement performance, the first movable part 14, which has been stationary in an advanced position in the center in front of the display screen 7a, slowly moves toward the left side of the display screen 7a, as indicated by arrow Y. As the first movable part 14 moves, the area of the right-side screen expands. As the right-side screen expands, a message image MG2 reading "MAX jackpot" is enlarged and displayed. The first movable part 14 returns to the retreat position and stops there.

Next, as shown in FIG. 112 (G), the jackpot digestion presentation B is executed. The jackpot digestion presentation B is a presentation in which the reserved consecutive wins are digested. Here, the ally character CRA is displayed in the center of the display screen 7a, and the number of rounds of the jackpot game is displayed in the upper left. Here, the round display RH "1R" is displayed. This round display is performed from 1R to 16R. When the round display reaches 16R and the jackpot is digested, the next presentation is executed.

Next, as shown in FIG. 112 (H), a status notification effect is executed. The status notification effect notifies the game status. Here, a message image MG saying "It's still going on!" is displayed. This means that the next change will result in a high probability game state (high probability high base state).

[Promotion Hold Continuous Performance C]
Figure 113 is a diagram to explain the promotion hold consecutive presentation C.
First, as shown in FIG. 113(A), a change start performance is executed. The change start performance is a performance in which the performance pattern starts changing. Here, the performance patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R start changing and are changing at high speed. At the bottom of the display screen 7a, three reserved icons 9A corresponding to the first special pattern reserved and the corresponding change icon 9C are displayed. The three reserved icons 9A corresponding to the first special pattern reserved correspond to the first storage area, the second storage area, and the third storage area of the first special pattern reserved storage area 85a, respectively.

Next, as shown in FIG. 113(B), a winning notification effect is executed. The winning notification effect is an effect that notifies the user that a winning has occurred by the state of the effect symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R. Here, the left effect symbol 8L, the center effect symbol 8C, and the right effect symbol 8R are all "4". This suggests that it is a "16R (actually 13R) V non-passing scheduled winning". Note that the stage of the winning notification effect is different from the confirmed stop effect, and the effect symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are in a provisionally stopped state. Here again, the three reserved icons 9A corresponding to the first special chart reserved and the corresponding variable icon 9C are displayed at the bottom of the display screen 7a. Here, it is assumed that there is a reserved icon that is a winning icon in the first special chart reserved corresponding to the reserved icon 9A.

Next, as shown in FIG. 113(C), a sword operation promotion effect is executed. The sword operation promotion effect is an effect that encourages the operation of the sword member 65. Here, a sword image KG that imitates the sword member 65 is displayed in the center of the display screen 7a, and a message image MG saying "push" is displayed. When the player operates the sword member 65 at this point, the next effect is executed. Note that even if the player does not operate the sword member 65, the next effect is executed when the effective time for operating the sword member 65 has elapsed.

Next, as shown in FIG. 113(D), an upgrade effect (with reserved consecutive wins) is executed. In the upgrade effect (with reserved consecutive wins), the effect symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are displayed in the center of the display screen 7a. Here, the left effect symbol 8L, the center effect symbol 8C, and the right effect symbol 8R are all "7". This means that what was announced as a "16R (actually 13R) V non-passing jackpot" has been upgraded to a "16RV passing jackpot". In addition, a message image MG saying "Next time is 777" is displayed at the bottom of the display screen 7a. This is to announce the reserved consecutive wins, and also to announce that it is a "16RV passing jackpot". At this point, the effect symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are fixed and stopped, and the next effect is executed.

Next, as shown in FIG. 113 (E), the jackpot digestion presentation A (first half) is executed. The jackpot digestion presentation A (first half) is the first half of the presentation in which the jackpot is digested. Here, the ally character CRA is displayed in the center of the display screen 7a, and round balls RB indicating the number of rounds of the jackpot game are displayed on both the left and right sides of the ally character CRA. Specifically, 16 round balls RB are displayed to the left of the ally character CRA. This indicates that the jackpot is 16 rounds. In addition, 16 round balls RB are displayed to the right of the ally character CRA. This indicates that the hit in the first special chart reservation is 16 rounds.

Next, as shown in FIG. 113 (F), the jackpot digestion presentation A (second half) is executed. The jackpot digestion presentation A (second half) is the second half of the presentation in which the jackpot is digested. Here too, the ally character CRA is displayed in the center of the display screen 7a, and round balls RB indicating the number of rounds of the jackpot game are displayed on both the left and right sides of the ally character CRA. Then, in the jackpot digestion presentation A, a cross is placed on the round ball RB to the left of the ally character CRA each time a round is digested. When all 16 round balls RB to the left of the ally character CRA have a cross, the jackpot is digested and the next presentation is executed.

Next, as shown in FIG. 113 (G), jackpot digestion presentation B is executed. Jackpot digestion presentation B is a presentation in which the reserved string is digested. Jackpot digestion presentation B is executed continuously while the screen remains the same as jackpot digestion presentation A. In jackpot digestion presentation B, a cross is placed on the round ball RB to the right of the ally character CRA each time a round is digested. When all 16 round balls RB to the right of the ally character CRA have a cross, the win in the first reserved special chart is digested and the next presentation is executed.

Next, as shown in FIG. 113 (H), a status notification effect is executed. The status notification effect notifies the game status. Here, a message image MG saying "It's still going on!" is displayed. This means that the next change will result in a high probability game state (high probability high base state).

[Example of effect]
Below are some examples of the effects of string decomposition.
[Effect 1]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, when the "16RV passing jackpot" is won, it is possible to execute a promotion effect in which the "16R (actually 13R) V non-passing jackpot" is pretended to be won, and then the "16RV passing jackpot" is announced. Furthermore, in the promotion effect, if there is a reserved streak, it is announced that there is a reserved streak (FIG. 111 (D), FIG. 112 (D), FIG. 113 (D)). With this configuration, it is possible to give surprise and joy to the player, and to increase the interest of the game.

In addition, a "16R (actually 13R) V non-passing jackpot" corresponds to the "first advantageous game", a "16RV passing jackpot" corresponds to the "second advantageous game", a promotion effect (with reserved consecutive wins) corresponds to a "promotion effect", a first special chart reserved corresponds to a "reserved memory", and information notified in a promotion effect (with reserved consecutive wins) corresponds to "winning information".

[Effect 2]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, in the promotion performance (with reserved consecutive wins), only the fact that there is a reserved consecutive win is notified (FIG. 111(D)). According to this configuration, since the type of the jackpot is unknown at the stage of the promotion performance (with reserved consecutive wins), it is possible to make the player feel a sense of expectation and to increase the interest of the game.

[Effect 3]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, in the promotion performance (with reserved consecutive wins), the player is notified that the reserved consecutive wins have occurred, and is notified as to whether the winnings are "a jackpot scheduled to pass 16RV" or "a jackpot scheduled not to pass 16R (actually 13R)V" (FIG. 112(D), FIG. 113(D)). According to this configuration, the type of jackpot is known at the promotion performance (with reserved consecutive wins), so that the player can feel happy and the interest of the game can be improved.

[Effect 4]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, a sword operation promotion effect is executed, and when the player pushes in the sword member 65, a promotion effect (with reserved consecutive wins) is executed (FIGS. 111(C)(D), 112(C)(D), 113(C)(D)). With this configuration, the player is highly likely to place his or her hopes on the operation of pushing in the sword member 65, and the interest of the game can be improved.

[Effect 5]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, the promotion to the "16RV passing jackpot" is performed on the left screen of the display screen 7a, and the pending streak is performed on the right screen of the display screen 7a (FIG. 111(D), FIG. 112(D)). Also, the promotion to the "16RV passing jackpot" is performed in the center of the display screen 7a, and the pending streak is performed in the lower center of the display screen 7a (FIG. 113(D)). According to this configuration, the promotion and the pending streak are notified in parallel on the display screen 7a, which can increase the interest of the game.

In the promotion hold consecutive performances A and B, the left area of the display screen 7a corresponds to the "first area" and the right area of the display screen 7a corresponds to the "second area." In the promotion hold consecutive performance C, the center of the display screen 7a corresponds to the "first area" and the lower center of the display screen 7a corresponds to the "second area."

[Effect 6]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, the left and right screens of the display screen 7a are separated by the first movable gadget 14 (Fig. 111 (D) (E) (F), Fig. 112 (D) (E) (F)). With this configuration, the information on the display screen 7a is organized, and the movement of the first movable gadget 14 can surprise the player, increasing the interest of the game. The first movable gadget 14 corresponds to the "movable gadget".

[Modification]
Below, a modified example of the promotion hold consecutive performance is shown.
[Modification 1]
Although the above is a configuration in which the promotion effect (with consecutive reserved balls) is executed before the big win game, the promotion effect (with consecutive reserved balls) may be executed during the big win game.

[Modification 2]
While the above involves executing a sword operation promotion effect to operate the sword component 65, it would also be acceptable to have the effect button 63 operated.

[Modification 3]
The above is an example assuming that there is a reserved sequence in the promotion performance, but if there is no reserved sequence, it is possible to display a message image such as "Too bad" on the right screen of the display screen 7a in Figure 111 (D) and Figure 112 (D). The same is true for Figure 113 (D).
Alternatively, if there is no pending streak, the presence or absence of a pending streak is not indicated, and, for example, without moving the first movable device 14, only the promotion effect is displayed in the center of the display screen 7a.

[Modification 4]
The above is an example of a reserved sequence with the first special chart reserved, but the same can be done with a reserved sequence with the second special chart reserved.

[Example of embodiment]
In the gaming machine of this embodiment, the following aspects can be realized.
[Aspect C4-1]
A gaming machine capable of storing a reserved memory for reserving a winning lottery which is triggered by a ball entering a predetermined ball entrance, and which executes an advantageous game advantageous to a player when the lottery is held and the player wins the lottery,
The advantageous games include a first advantageous game and a second advantageous game that is more advantageous to the player than the first advantageous game,
When the second advantageous game is won, a promotion effect can be executed in which the player pretends to win the first advantageous game and then notifies the player of the win in the second advantageous game;
In the promotion performance, when the reserved memory contains a reserved memory indicating a winning of the lottery at the time of execution of the promotion performance, a notification performance can be executed to notify winning information based on the winning.
A gaming machine characterized by:

[Aspect C4-2]
The gaming machine according to aspect C4-1,
The winning information is information that the reserved memory contains a winning reserved memory.
A gaming machine characterized by:

[Aspect C4-3]
The gaming machine according to aspect C4-1,
The winning information is information indicating whether the reserved memory contains a winning reserved memory and whether the first advantageous game or the second advantageous game has been won.
A gaming machine characterized by:

[Aspect C4-4]
A gaming machine according to any one of aspects C4-1 to C4-3,
Further comprising an operation unit operable by a player,
In the promotion performance, the promotion to the second advantageous game is notified at the timing of the operation of the operation unit, and the winning information is notified.
A gaming machine characterized by:

[Aspect C4-5]
A gaming machine according to any one of aspects C4-1 to C4-4,
Further comprising a display device capable of displaying an image,
In the promotion performance, the promotion to the second advantageous game is notified in a first area of the display screen of the display device, and the winning information is notified in a second area of the display screen of the display device.
A gaming machine characterized by:

[Aspect C4-6]
The gaming machine according to aspect C4-5,
Further comprising a movable accessory provided to be movable;
In the promotion performance, the first area and the second area are separated by the movable role object.
A gaming machine characterized by:

The operation instruction display effects A to C are explained below using Figures 114 to 116. These operation instruction display effects are executed during the decorative pattern variation effect, etc. In other words, the image control microcomputer 101 analyzes the command received from the sub-control board 90, and if the command to execute the operation instruction display effect is included, it reads out the corresponding image data from the ROM 103 and displays the image on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 and the sub-display screen 64 (right sub-display screen 64R, left sub-display screen 64L, and upper sub-display screen 64U).

[Operation instruction display performance A]
FIG. 114 is a diagram for explaining the operation instruction display performance A. The operation instruction display performance is a performance in which, after displaying an operation prompting image for prompting the player to operate the operation means, the display of the operation prompting image is erased when the operation means is operated, and when the operation of the operation means is stopped (stopped), the operation prompting image is displayed again. In the operation instruction display performance A, first, as shown in FIG. 114(A), the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R are displayed variably on the display screen 7a, and then the state of a reach is reached. Here, the left decorative pattern 8L and the right decorative pattern 8R are each temporarily stopped at "3", and become "3↓3". Then, a special performance start image BKH is displayed to notify that a battle performance as a special reach performance will start. The display of the reserved icon 9A and the variable icon (reserved icon) 9C is omitted. The reserved icon 9A and the variable icon (reserved icon) 9C may or may not be displayed.

As shown in FIG. 114(B), when the special reach effect starts, the "3" of the left decorative pattern 8L is reduced and moves toward the upper left of the display screen 7a while maintaining its display, and temporarily stops at that position. The "3" of the right decorative pattern 8R is reduced and moves toward the upper right of the display screen 7a while maintaining its display, and temporarily stops at that position. In the center of the display screen 7a, the ally character CRA, the enemy character CRB, the button image BTN, and the operation prompting image RND are displayed. The button image BTN is an image that imitates at least a part of the appearance of the effect button 63. The operation prompting image RND includes an arrow image that indicates the operation direction (downward) for the button image BTN and a text image that reads "continuous press", and prompts the player to operate (continuously press) the effect button 63. Here, an image of the ally character CRA and the enemy character CRB fighting is displayed in response to the operation (continuous press) of the effect button 63 by the player.

When the player operates (repeatedly taps) the effect button 63, the button image BTN and operation prompt image RND disappear, as shown in FIG. 114(C). In other words, since the player is operating the button, there is no need for an image prompting the player to operate the button. This allows more of the battle footage to be shown.

If the player stops operating (repeatedly tapping) the effect button 63 while the battle video is being displayed, the button image BTN and the operation prompting image RND are displayed again, as shown in FIG. 114(D). This prompts the player to operate (continuously press) the effect button 63 again. At this time, the progression of the video in which the ally character CRA and enemy character CRB fight may be interrupted, or may continue as is.

When the player operates (repeatedly taps) the effect button 63 again, the button image BTN and the operation prompt image RND disappear again, as shown in FIG. 114 (E). At this time, the battle video that was interrupted may resume.

Figure 114 (F) shows the climax part of the battle performance that is executed after a predetermined time has elapsed. At this time, the operation invalid image SMK and the button image BTN are displayed on the display screen 7a. The operation invalid image SMK is an image that notifies the player that operation of the performance button 63 is invalid during a period. An "X" image is superimposed on the button image BTN, notifying the player that operation is invalid. In this state, the climax part of the battle performance progresses.

After that, as shown in FIG. 114 (G), the selection images ST1 and ST2 are displayed on the display screen 7a. At this time, the operation invalid image SMK and the button image BTN with an "X" remain displayed. The selection images STG1 and STG2 are images containing multiple options that the player can select by operating the operating means, and here contain the first selection image STG1 represented as "repeated hits (punch)" and the second selection image STG2 represented as "long press (kick)". At this time, because operation of the effect button 63 is invalid, no corresponding change in effect occurs on the display screen 7a even if the player operates it.

After that, as shown in FIG. 114(H), after a predetermined time has passed, the operation invalid image SMK and the button image BTN with an "X" disappear. When these images disappear, operation of the effect button 63 becomes valid, and it becomes possible to select either the first selection image STG1 or the second selection image STG2 by operating the effect button 63. Here, the first selection image STG1 has been selected, and the display color of the first selection image STG1 has changed.

After a predetermined time has elapsed, as shown in FIG. 114(I), the display of the unselected second selection image STG2 of the selection images STG1 and STG2 disappears, and the display of the selected first selection image STG1 remains. After that, as shown in FIG. 114(J), the button image BTN, the valid period image TBI, and the operation prompting image RND are displayed. The valid period image TBI is a meter image that indicates the valid period of the operation of the effect button 63, and is a so-called timer bar that indicates the passage of time by increasing the area of a specific color. The operation prompting image RND includes an arrow image that indicates the operation direction (downward) for the button image BTN and a text image of "repeated hit", and prompts the player to operate (repeatedly hit) the effect button 63. This operation prompting image RND corresponds to the content selected from the selection images STG1 and STG2. Here, the first selection image STG1 represented as "repeated hit (punch)" was selected, so "repeated hit" is displayed. When the second selection image STG2, which is displayed as "long press (kick)," is selected, the operation prompting image RND is displayed as "long press." In other words, the operation prompting image RND is a selection result image that shows the option selected from the options of the first selection image STG1 and the second selection image STG2.

After that, as shown in FIG. 114(K), an effect is executed in which the ally character CRA wins against the enemy character CRB. This effect is executed regardless of whether or not the player repeatedly taps the effect button 63. This notifies the player of a big win. After that, as shown in FIG. 114(L), the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R are displayed stopped in the form of a big win of "333".

[Operation instruction display performance B]
Fig. 115 is a diagram for explaining operation instruction display presentation B. The operation instruction display presentation is a presentation in which, after displaying an operation prompting image that prompts the player to operate the operating means, when the operating means is operated the display of the operation prompting image is erased, and when the operation of the operating means is stopped the display of the operation prompting image is displayed again. Figs. 115(A)-(D) of operation instruction display presentation B are the same as Figs. 114(B)-(E) of operation instruction display presentation A. That is, Fig. 115(A) is executed after Fig. 114(A) of operation instruction display presentation A.

Figure 115 (E) shows the climax of the battle performance. At this time, if the player operates the performance button 63 (e.g. by repeatedly tapping it), an operation invalid image SMK and a button image BTN are displayed on the display screen 7a. The operation invalid image SMK is an image that notifies the player that operation of the performance button 63 is invalid. An image of an "X" is superimposed on the button image BTN, notifying the player that operation is invalid. In this state, the climax of the battle performance progresses.

When the player stops operating the effect button 63 (e.g., by repeatedly tapping it), the operation invalid image SMK and the button image BTN with an "X" disappear, as shown in FIG. 115 (F). This is because, since the player is not operating, there is no need for an image to notify that the operation is invalid. This allows more of the climax of the battle footage to be shown.

When the player operates the effect button 63 again (e.g., by repeatedly tapping it), the operation invalid image SMK and the button image BTN with an "x" are displayed again, as shown in FIG. 115(G). In this state, the climax part of the battle effect progresses.

When the player stops operating the effect button 63 again (e.g., by repeatedly tapping it), the operation invalid image SMK and the button image BTN with an "x" disappear, as shown in FIG. 115 (H). In other words, when the player operates the effect button 63, the operation invalid image SMK and the button image BTN with an "x" are displayed, and when the operation of the effect button 63 is stopped, these images disappear.

After that, as shown in FIG. 115(I), the selection images ST1 and ST2 are displayed on the display screen 7a. At this time, the operation invalid image SMK and the button image BTN with an "X" are not displayed. The selection images STG1 and STG2 are images containing multiple options that the player can select by operating the operating means, and here include the first selection image STG1 represented as "repeated hits (punch)" and the second selection image STG2 represented as "long press (kick)". By operating the effect button 63, it becomes possible to select either the first selection image STG1 or the second selection image STG2. Here, the display color of the selected image changes.

After that, when a predetermined time has elapsed, as shown in FIG. 115(J), an operation invalid image SMK and a button image BTN with an "x" are displayed. This makes the operation of the performance button 63 invalid, and the selection of the first selection image STG1 and the second selection image STG2 cannot be changed.

After that, as shown in FIG. 115(K), the display of the unselected second selection image STG2 of the selection images STG1 and STG2 disappears, and the display of the selected first selection image STG1 remains. After that, as shown in FIG. 115(L), the button image BTN, the valid period image TBI, and the operation prompting image RND are displayed. The valid period image TBI is a meter image that indicates the valid period of the operation of the effect button 63, and is a so-called timer bar that indicates the passage of time by increasing the area of a specific color. The operation prompting image RND includes an arrow image that indicates the operation direction (downward) for the button image BTN and a text image of "repeated hit", and prompts the player to operate (repeatedly hit) the effect button 63. This operation prompting image RND corresponds to the content selected from the selection images STG1 and STG2. Here, the first selection image STG1 displayed as "repeated hit (punch)" was selected, so "repeated hit" is displayed. When the second selection image STG2, which displays "long press (kick)," is selected, "long press" is displayed. In other words, the operation prompting image RND is a selection result image that displays the option selected from the options of the first selection image STG1 and the second selection image STG2.

Figure 115 (L) is similar to Figure 114 (J) of operation instruction display performance A. After Figure 115 (L), a performance similar to Figure 114 (K) (L) of operation instruction display performance A is executed.

[Operation instruction display performance C]
FIG. 116 is a diagram for explaining the operation instruction display performance C. The operation instruction display performance is a performance in which, after displaying an operation prompting image that prompts the player to operate the operation means, the display of the operation prompting image is erased when the operation means is operated, and when the operation of the operation means is stopped, the operation prompting image is displayed again. FIG. 116(A) of the operation instruction display performance C is the same as FIG. 114(A) of the operation instruction display performance A. That is, after the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R are displayed variably on the display screen 7a, the state of reach is reached. Here, the left decorative pattern 8L and the right decorative pattern 8R each temporarily stop at "3", and become "3↓3". After that, a special performance start image BKH is displayed to notify that the battle performance as the special reach performance will start.

As shown in FIG. 116(B), when the special reach performance starts, the "3" of the left decorative pattern 8L is reduced and moves toward the upper left of the display screen 7a while maintaining its display, and temporarily stops at that position. The "3" of the right decorative pattern 8R is reduced and moves toward the upper right of the display screen 7a while maintaining its display, and temporarily stops at that position. In the center of the display screen 7a, the ally character CRA, the enemy character CRB, the meter image MG, the button image BTN, and the operation prompting image RND are displayed. The meter image MG indicates the amount of energy required for the ally character CRA to unleash a special move. Note that the target represented by the meter image MG can be set to any object. The button image BTN is an image that imitates at least a part of the appearance of the select button 68. The operation prompting image RND includes a text image of "Press and hold to charge," and prompts the player to operate (press and hold) the select button 68. Here, of the four buttons of the select button 68 represented by the button image BTN, the color of the top button has changed, informing the player to press the top button. In response to the player pressing and holding the top button of the select button 68, an effect is executed in which the meter of the meter image MG is charged.

When the player presses and holds the top button of the select button 68, the button image BTN and the operation prompting image RND disappear, as shown in FIG. 116(C). This is because the player is performing the operation, and so there is no need for an image prompting the player to operate. This allows more of the battle footage to be shown. Also, pressing and holding the top button of the select button 68 executes an effect in which the energy of the meter image MG is charged.

If the player stops pressing and holding the up button of the select button 68 while the battle video is being displayed, the button image BTN and the operation prompting image RND are displayed again, as shown in FIG. 116(D). This prompts the player to press and hold the up button of the select button 68 again. At this time, an effect may be executed in which the energy of the meter image MG decreases.

When the player presses and holds the up button of the select button 68 again, the button image BTN and the operation prompt image RND disappear again, as shown in FIG. 116 (E). At this time, an effect is executed in which the energy of the meter image MG rises (charges) again.

Figure 116 (F) shows the climax part of the battle performance that is executed after a predetermined time has elapsed. At this time, if the up button of the select button 68 is pressed and held, the operation invalid image SMK and the button image BTN are displayed on the display screen 7a. The operation invalid image SMK is an image that notifies the player that operation of the select button 68 is invalid. An image of an "X" is superimposed on the button image BTN, notifying the player that operation is invalid. In this state, the climax part of the battle performance progresses.

After that, as shown in FIG. 116(G), after a predetermined time has elapsed, the operation invalid image SMK and the button image BTN with an "X" disappear, and the selection images ST1, ST2, button image BTN, and selection prompt image NTK are displayed. The selection images STG1, STG2 are images that include multiple options that can be selected by the player, and here include a first selection image STG1 that is displayed as "repeated hits (punch)" and a second selection image STG2 that is displayed as "long press (kick)."

As already described, the button image BTN is an image that mimics at least a part of the appearance of the select button 68, and here, of the four buttons of the select button 68 represented by the button image BTN, the left and right buttons have changed color, informing the player to press either the left or right button. The selection prompting image NTK includes a text image of "Select", and prompts the player to select either the first selection image STG1 or the second selection image STG2 by operating the left or right button of the select button 68. By operating the left or right button of the select button 68, it is possible to select either the first selection image STG1 or the second selection image STG2. Here, the first selection image STG1 has been selected, and the display color of the second selection image STG2 has changed.

After that, when a predetermined time has passed, as shown in FIG. 116(H), of the selection images STG1 and STG2, the unselected second selection image STG2 disappears, and the selected first selection image STG1 remains. The button image BTN and selection prompting image NTK remain displayed. Then, as shown in FIG. 116(I), the button image BTN and selection prompting image NTK disappear. In this state, when the player operates the select button 68, as shown in FIG. 116(J), an operation invalid image SMK and a button image BTN with an "X" are displayed. This notifies the player that the operation of the select button 68 is invalid.

After that, as shown in FIG. 116(K), an effect is executed in which the ally character CRA is defeated by the enemy character CRB. After that, as shown in FIG. 116(L), the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R are stopped and displayed in the losing form of "323".

[Example of effect]
Below are some examples of the effects of the operation instruction display.
[Effect 1]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in Fig. 114 (B) to (E), after displaying an operation prompting image RND to prompt the player to operate the operation means, when the operation means is operated, the operation prompting image is erased, and when the operation of the operation means is stopped, the operation prompting image RND is displayed again, which is a first effect. With this configuration, a novel effect that has never been seen before can visually entertain the player, and can increase the interest. The same applies to Fig. 115 and Fig. 116.
[Effect 2]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in Fig. 114 (F) (G), after the first effect, when the operation means is being operated, a second effect can be executed in which an invalid operation image SMK is displayed, indicating that at least one of the operations of the operation means is invalid. With this configuration, a novel effect that has never been seen before can be visually entertaining to the player, and can increase the interest of the player. The same applies to Fig. 115 and Fig. 116.
[Effect 3]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in Fig. 114(G), in the second presentation, the operation invalid image SMK is displayed, and then the selection images STG1 and STG2 including a plurality of options that the player can select by operating the operation means are displayed. With this configuration, the player can be visually entertained by the unprecedented novel presentation, and the interest can be enhanced. The same applies to Figs. 115 and 116.
[Effect 4]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in Fig. 114(J), in the second presentation, when the selection images STG1, STG2 are displayed and the player selects one of the multiple options included in the selection images STG1, STG2, a selection result image (operation prompt image RND) representing the selected option is displayed. With this configuration, a novel presentation that has never been seen before can visually entertain the player, and can increase the player's interest. The same applies to Fig. 115.
[Effect 5]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in Fig. 114 (B) (D), in the first effect, an operation prompting image RND and an operation means image BTN that imitates at least a part of the appearance of the operation means are displayed. With this configuration, a novel effect that has never been seen before can visually entertain the player, and can increase the interest. The same applies to Fig. 115 and Fig. 116.

[Modification]
Below, modified examples of the operation instruction display presentation are shown.
[Modification 1]
In the operation instruction display performance A, in the climax portion of the battle performance shown in Figures 114 (F) (G), the operation invalid image SMK is displayed regardless of whether the performance button 63 is operated or not. However, the operation invalid image SMK may be configured to be displayed when the performance button 63 is operated and not displayed when the performance button 63 is not operated.

[Modification 2]
In the operation instruction display performances A and B, when the operation invalid image SMK is displayed, all operations of the performance buttons 63 may be invalid, or only a specific operation (e.g., rapid tapping) may be invalid and other operations (e.g., long press) may be valid. Similarly, in the operation instruction display performance C, when the operation invalid image SMK is displayed, the operations of all four buttons of the select button 68 may be invalid, or only a specific button (e.g., up and down buttons) may be invalid and other operations (e.g., left and right buttons) may be valid.

[Example of embodiment]
In the gaming machine of this embodiment, the following aspects can be realized.
◇[Aspect A22-1]
An operation means operable by a player;
A gaming machine including a display means capable of displaying a plurality of types of images,
one of the plurality of types of images is an operation prompting image for prompting the player to operate the operation means;
A first performance is executed in which, after the operation prompting image is displayed, when the operation means is operated, the display of the operation prompting image is erased, and when the operation of the operation means is stopped, the operation prompting image is displayed again.
A gaming machine characterized by:
◇[Aspect A22-2]
The gaming machine according to aspect A22-1,
one of the plurality of types of images is an invalid operation image indicating that at least one of the operations of the operation means is invalid,
After the first performance, a second performance is executed in which the operation invalid image is displayed when the operation means is operated.
A gaming machine characterized by:
◇[Aspect A22-3]
The gaming machine according to aspect A22-2,
one of the plurality of types of images is a selection image including a plurality of options selectable by the player through the operation of the operation means;
In the second performance, a third performance can be executed in which the selection image is displayed while the operation invalid image is displayed.
A gaming machine characterized by:
◇[Aspect A22-4]
The gaming machine according to aspect A22-3,
In the second presentation, when the selection image is displayed and a player selects one of a plurality of options included in the selection image, a selection result image representing the selected option is displayed.
A gaming machine characterized by:
◇[Aspect A22-5]
A gaming machine according to any one of Aspects A22-1 to A22-3,
one of the plurality of types of images is an operation means image that imitates at least a part of an external appearance of the operation means;
In the first performance, the operation means image is displayed together with the operation prompt image.
A gaming machine characterized by:

Below, special button display effects A to C will be explained using Figures 117 to 119. These special button display effects are executed in standby mode (when the demo screen is displayed and the player is not playing), or during the decorative pattern change effect. That is, the image control microcomputer 101 analyzes the command received from the sub-control board 90, and if the command includes an instruction to execute a special button display effect, it reads the corresponding image data from the ROM 103 and displays the image on the display screen 7a or sub-display screen 64 of the image display device 7.

The gaming machine 1 of this embodiment is equipped with a select button 68. This select button 68 is a cross button type button with buttons on the top, bottom, left and right, and each of the top, bottom, left and right buttons of the select button 68 can independently accept operation by the player. In other words, the sub-control board 90 can detect the operation (pressing) of each of the top, bottom, left and right buttons of the select button 68 independently via the select button detection switch 68a.

[Special button display effect A]
Fig. 117 is a diagram for explaining the button special display performance A. The button special display performance A in Fig. 117 includes a standby performance, a decorative pattern change performance, a mode change performance, and a non-changeable performance. The decorative pattern change performance, the mode change performance, and the non-changeable performance other than the standby performance are performances in the same change. In these performances in the same change other than the standby performance, the hold icon 9A and the change icon 9C are displayed on the display screen 7a, but are omitted in the figure.

In the special button display effect A, first, as shown in FIG. 117(A), a standby effect is performed. This standby effect is performed when the player has not operated the handle 60 to play for a predetermined period of time, that is, when the display screen 7a is showing a predetermined demonstration screen, and the player presses the select button 68 or effect button 63. In the standby effect, a mode suggestion image XL1, a select button image XL4, a select button corresponding image XL4A, a effect button image XL5, and an effect button corresponding image XL5A are displayed.

The mode suggestion image XL1 is an image suggesting one display mode. The select button image XL4 is an image imitating the select button 68, and is an image that prompts the operation of the select button 68. The select button corresponding image XL4A is displayed to the right of the select button image XL4, and is represented as "Select". The select button corresponding image XL4A suggests that the display mode can be selected by operating the select button 68. The effect button image XL5 is an image imitating the effect button 63, and is an image that prompts the operation of the effect button 63. The effect button corresponding image XL5A is displayed to the right of the effect button image XL5, and is represented as "Confirm". The effect button corresponding image XL5A suggests that the selected display mode will be confirmed by operating the effect button 63. In the example of FIG. 117(A), the mode suggestion image XL1 shows that "Mode B" has been selected.

During standby, when the player fires a game ball into the first starting hole 20, the special symbol starts to change, and a decorative symbol change effect is performed as shown in FIG. 117(B). In this decorative symbol change effect, decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are displayed from the center to the right side of the display screen 7a, and change vertically. In addition, in the decorative symbol change effect, a mode suggestion image XL1 and a select button image XL4 are displayed in the lower left of the display screen 7a. In this case, the mode suggestion image XL1 is displayed so as to correspond to the select button image XL4. Specifically, the mode suggestion image XL1 is displayed above the select button image XL4, that is, the mode suggestion image XL1 is displayed so as to correspond to the up button of the cross button of the select button image XL4.

Next, as shown in FIG. 117(C), a mode change presentation is performed. In this mode change presentation, the mode suggestion image XL1 continues to be associated with the select button image XL4. In addition, in the mode change presentation, the player operates (presses) the up button of the select button 68, thereby changing the display mode in the mode suggestion image XL1 even while the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R are changing. In the example of FIG. 117(C), the mode suggestion image XL1 has been changed to "mode C." When the display mode in the mode suggestion image XL1 is changed to mode B, the display mode on the display screen 7a becomes mode B.

Next, as shown in Fig. 117(D), a change-prohibited effect is executed. In this change-prohibited effect, a mode change-prohibited image XL6 is displayed so as to hide the mode suggesting image XL1 and the select button image XL4. The mode change-prohibited image XL6 is represented by a lightly darkened square with an x mark, and suggests that the mode suggesting image XL1 cannot be changed for a predetermined period of time (until the change is over in this embodiment). In other words, the mode change-prohibited image XL6 suggests that input of the select button 68 will be disabled for a predetermined period of time (until the change is over in this embodiment).
Thereafter, a reach effect is performed, a miss symbol or a big win symbol is displayed, and a big win game effect is performed.

Note that in the above standby effect, decorative pattern change effect, mode change effect, and non-changeable effect, the mode suggestion image XL1 and the select button image XL4 are displayed, but the appearance may be different in each effect. For example, the size, color, shape, etc. of the mode suggestion image XL1 in the standby effect and the mode suggestion image XL1 in the decorative pattern change effect may be different.

[Special button display effect B]
Fig. 118 is a diagram for explaining the button special display effect B. The button special display effect B in Fig. 118 includes a standby effect, a decorative pattern change effect, a mode change effect, a language change effect, an automatic button change effect, and an unchangeable effect. The decorative pattern change effect, the mode change effect, the language change effect, the automatic button change effect, and the unchangeable effect other than the standby effect are effects in the same change. In these effects in the same change other than the standby effect, the hold icon 9A and the change icon 9C are displayed on the display screen 7a, but are omitted in the figure.

In the special button display effect B, first, as shown in FIG. 118(A), a standby effect is performed. This standby effect is performed when the player has not operated the handle 60 to play for a predetermined period of time, i.e., when the display screen 7a is displaying a predetermined demonstration screen, and the player presses the select button 68 or the effect button 63. In the standby effect, a mode suggestion image XL1, a button auto on/off suggestion image XL2, a language suggestion image XL3, a select button image XL4, a select button corresponding image XL4A, a effect button image XL5, and an effect button corresponding image XL5A are displayed.

The mode suggestion image XL1 is an image suggesting one display mode. The button auto availability suggestion image XL2 is an image showing whether the button auto mode, which is automatically pressed without pressing the effect button 63 when a button image prompting the pressing of the effect button 63 appears on the display screen 7a, is ON or OFF. The language suggestion image XL3 is an image suggesting the language to be used in the display effect on the display screen 7a. For example, when the language is indicated as "English" in the language suggestion image XL3, the language mode is English, and English is used partially or entirely in the display effect on the display screen 7a. The select button image XL4 is an image imitating the select button 68, and is an image that prompts the operation of the select button 68. The select button corresponding image XL4A is displayed to the right of the select button image XL4 and is indicated as "select". The select button corresponding image XL4A suggests that the display mode, the presence or absence of the button auto mode, and the language mode can be selected by operating the select button 68. The effect button image XL5 is an image that imitates the effect button 63, and is an image that prompts the operation of the effect button 63. The effect button corresponding image XL5A is displayed to the right of the effect button image XL5, and is indicated as "Confirm." The effect button corresponding image XL5A suggests that the selected display mode, the presence or absence of button auto mode, and the language mode will be confirmed by operating the effect button 63. In the example of FIG. 118(A), the mode suggestion image XL1 selects "Mode B," the button auto presence/absence suggestion image XL2 selects "Auto ON," and the language suggestion image XL3 selects "Japanese."

During standby, when the player shoots a game ball and the game ball enters the first starting hole 20, the special symbol starts to change, and as shown in FIG. 118(B), a decorative symbol change performance is performed. In this decorative symbol change performance, the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are displayed from the center to the right side of the display screen 7a, and change in the vertical direction. In addition, in the decorative symbol change performance, a mode suggestion image XL1, a button auto on/off suggestion image XL2, a language suggestion image XL3, and a select button image XL4 are displayed in the lower left of the display screen 7a. In this case, the mode suggestion image XL1, the button auto on/off suggestion image XL2, and the language suggestion image XL3 are displayed so as to correspond to the select button image XL4. Specifically, the mode suggestion image XL1 is displayed above the select button image XL4, that is, the mode suggestion image XL1 is displayed so as to correspond to the up button of the cross button of the select button image XL4. In addition, the button auto on/off suggestion image XL2 is displayed to the left of the select button image XL4, i.e., the button auto on/off suggestion image XL2 is displayed so as to correspond to the left button of the cross button of the select button image XL4. The language suggestion image XL3 is displayed below the select button image XL4, i.e., the language suggestion image XL3 is displayed so as to correspond to the down button of the cross button of the select button image XL4.

Next, as shown in FIG. 118(C), a mode change presentation is performed. In this mode change presentation, the mode suggestion image XL1, the button auto on/off suggestion image XL2, and the language suggestion image XL3 continue to be associated with the select button image XL4. In addition, in the mode change presentation, the player operates (presses) the up button of the select button 68, thereby changing the display mode in the mode suggestion image XL1 even while the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R are changing. In the example of FIG. 118(C), the mode suggestion image XL1 has been changed to "mode C." When the display mode in the mode suggestion image XL1 is changed to mode B, the display mode on the display screen 7a becomes mode B.

Next, as shown in FIG. 118(D), a language change presentation is performed. In this language change presentation, the mode suggestion image XL1, the button auto on/off suggestion image XL2, and the language suggestion image XL3 continue to be associated with the select button image XL4. In addition, in the language change presentation, the player operates (presses) the lower button of the select button 68, and the language mode in the language suggestion image XL3 changes even while the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R are changing. In the example of FIG. 118(D), the language mode of the language suggestion image XL3 has been changed to "Chinese". When the language is changed to Chinese in the language suggestion image XL3, the language displayed on the display screen 7a becomes Chinese.

Next, as shown in FIG. 118(E), an auto button change effect is performed. In this auto button change effect, the mode suggestion image XL1, the button auto on/off suggestion image XL2, and the language suggestion image XL3 are continuously associated with the select button image XL4. In addition, in the auto button change effect, the player operates (presses) the left button of the select button 68 to change the button auto mode ON or OFF in the button auto on/off suggestion image XL2 even while the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R are changing. In the example of FIG. 118(E), the button auto on/off suggestion image XL2 shows that the button auto mode has been changed from ON to OFF, and is now "auto OFF." When the button auto mode is changed to auto OFF in the button auto on/off suggestion image XL2, it is considered that the effect button 63 has been operated even if the effect button 63 has not been operated, and the operation of the effect button 63 becomes effective.

Next, as shown in FIG. 118(F), a change-prohibited effect is executed. In this change-prohibited effect, a mode change-prohibited image XL6 is displayed so as to hide the mode suggestion image XL1, the button auto-enabled/disabled suggestion image XL2, the language suggestion image XL3, and the select button image XL4. The mode change-prohibited image XL6 is represented by a lightly darkened square with an x mark, and suggests that the mode suggestion image XL1, the button auto-enabled/disabled suggestion image XL2, or the language suggestion image XL3 cannot be changed for a predetermined period (until the change is over in this embodiment). In other words, the mode change-prohibited image XL6 suggests that input of the select button 68 will be disabled for a predetermined period (until the change is over in this embodiment).
Thereafter, a reach effect is performed, a miss symbol or a big win symbol is displayed, and a big win game effect is performed.

Note that in the above standby effect, decorative pattern change effect, mode change effect, language change effect, auto button change effect, and no-change effect, a mode suggestion image XL1, button auto on/off suggestion image XL2, language suggestion image XL3, and select button image XL4 are displayed, but the appearance may be different for each effect. For example, the size, color, shape, etc. of the mode suggestion image XL1 in the standby effect and the mode suggestion image XL1 in the decorative pattern change effect may be different.

[Special button display effect C]
Fig. 119 is a diagram for explaining the button special display effect C. The button special display effect C in Fig. 119 includes a standby effect, a decorative pattern change effect, a mode change effect, a language change effect, an auto button change effect, a change not possible effect, and super reach effects A to D. The decorative pattern change effect, the mode change effect, the language change effect, the auto button change effect, the change not possible effect, and the super reach effects A to D other than the standby effect are effects in the same change. In these effects in the same change other than the standby effect, the hold icon 9A and the change icon 9C are displayed on the display screen 7a, but are omitted in the figure.

In the special button display effect C, first, as shown in FIG. 119(A), a standby effect is performed. This standby effect is performed when the player has not operated the handle 60 to play for a predetermined period of time, i.e., when the display screen 7a is showing a predetermined demonstration screen, and the player presses the select button 68 or the effect button 63. In the standby effect, a mode suggestion image XL1, a button auto on/off suggestion image XL2, a language suggestion image XL3, a select button image XL4, a select button corresponding image XL4A, a performance button image XL5, and a performance button corresponding image XL5A are displayed.

The mode suggestion image XL1 is an image suggesting one display mode. The button auto availability suggestion image XL2 is an image showing whether the button auto mode, which is automatically pressed without pressing the effect button 63 when a button image prompting the pressing of the effect button 63 appears on the display screen 7a, is ON or OFF. The language suggestion image XL3 is an image suggesting the language to be used in the display effect on the display screen 7a. For example, when the language is indicated as "English" in the language suggestion image XL3, the language mode is English, and English is used partially or entirely in the display effect on the display screen 7a. The select button image XL4 is an image imitating the select button 68, and is an image that prompts the operation of the select button 68. The select button corresponding image XL4A is displayed to the right of the select button image XL4 and is indicated as "select". The select button corresponding image XL4A suggests that the display mode, the presence or absence of the button auto mode, and the language mode can be selected by operating the select button 68. The effect button image XL5 is an image that imitates the effect button 63, and is an image that prompts the operation of the effect button 63. The effect button corresponding image XL5A is displayed to the right of the effect button image XL5, and is indicated as "Confirm." The effect button corresponding image XL5A suggests that the selected display mode, the presence or absence of button auto mode, and the language mode will be confirmed by operating the effect button 63. In the example of FIG. 119(A), the mode suggestion image XL1 selects "Mode B," the button auto presence/absence suggestion image XL2 selects "Auto ON," and the language suggestion image XL3 selects "Japanese."

During standby, when the player shoots a game ball and the game ball enters the first starting hole 20, the special symbol starts to change, and as shown in FIG. 119(B), a decorative symbol change performance is performed. In this decorative symbol change performance, the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are displayed from the center to the right side of the display screen 7a, and change in the vertical direction. In addition, in the decorative symbol change performance, a mode suggestion image XL1, a button auto on/off suggestion image XL2, a language suggestion image XL3, and a select button image XL4 are displayed in the lower left of the display screen 7a. In this case, the mode suggestion image XL1, the button auto on/off suggestion image XL2, and the language suggestion image XL3 are displayed so as to correspond to the select button image XL4. Specifically, the mode suggestion image XL1 is displayed above the select button image XL4, that is, the mode suggestion image XL1 is displayed so as to correspond to the up button of the cross button of the select button image XL4. In addition, the button auto on/off suggestion image XL2 is displayed to the left of the select button image XL4, i.e., the button auto on/off suggestion image XL2 is displayed so as to correspond to the left button of the cross button of the select button image XL4. The language suggestion image XL3 is displayed below the select button image XL4, i.e., the language suggestion image XL3 is displayed so as to correspond to the down button of the cross button of the select button image XL4.

Next, as shown in FIG. 119(C), a mode change presentation is performed. In this mode change presentation, the mode suggestion image XL1, the button auto on/off suggestion image XL2, and the language suggestion image XL3 continue to be associated with the select button image XL4. In addition, in the mode change presentation, the player operates (presses) the up button of the select button 68, thereby changing the display mode in the mode suggestion image XL1 even while the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R are changing. In the example of FIG. 119(C), the mode suggestion image XL1 has been changed to "mode C." When the display mode in the mode suggestion image XL1 is changed to mode B, the display mode on the display screen 7a becomes mode B.

Next, as shown in FIG. 119(D), a language change presentation is performed. In this language change presentation, the mode suggestion image XL1, the button auto on/off suggestion image XL2, and the language suggestion image XL3 continue to be associated with the select button image XL4. In addition, in the language change presentation, the player operates (presses) the lower button of the select button 68, and the language mode in the language suggestion image XL3 changes even while the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R are changing. In the example of FIG. 119(D), the language mode of the language suggestion image XL3 has been changed to "Chinese." When the language is changed to Chinese in the language suggestion image XL3, the language displayed on the display screen 7a becomes Chinese.

Next, as shown in FIG. 119(E), an auto button change effect is performed. In this auto button change effect, the mode suggestion image XL1, the button auto on/off suggestion image XL2, and the language suggestion image XL3 are continuously associated with the select button image XL4. In addition, in the auto button change effect, the player operates (presses) the left button of the select button 68 to change the button auto mode ON or OFF in the button auto on/off suggestion image XL2 even while the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R are changing. In the example of FIG. 119(E), the button auto on/off suggestion image XL2 shows that the button auto mode has been changed from ON to OFF, and is now "auto OFF." When the button auto mode is changed to auto OFF in the button auto on/off suggestion image XL2, it is considered that the effect button 63 has been operated even if the effect button 63 has not been operated, and the operation of the effect button 63 becomes effective.

Next, as shown in FIG. 119(F), a change-prohibited effect is executed. In this change-prohibited effect, a mode change-prohibited image XL6 is displayed so as to hide the mode suggestion image XL1, the button auto on/off suggestion image XL2, the language suggestion image XL3, and the select button image XL4. The mode change-prohibited image XL6 is represented by a lightly darkened cross in a square, and indicates that the mode suggestion image XL1, the button auto on/off suggestion image XL2, or the language suggestion image XL3 cannot be changed for a specified period of time (until the change is over in this embodiment). In other words, the mode change-prohibited image XL6 indicates that input to the select button 68 will be disabled for a specified period of time (until the change is over in this embodiment).

Next, as shown in FIG. 119(G), a super reach effect A is performed. In this super reach effect A, the mode change impossible image XL6 continues to be displayed, the decorative symbols 8L and 8R temporarily stop at the number 7, and the decorative symbol 8C rapidly changes to form a reach state, and an effect button image XL7 is displayed. This effect button image XL7 is an image that imitates the effect button 63, and is an image that prompts the player to operate (press) the effect button 63.

Next, as shown in FIG. 119(H), Super Reach Presentation B is performed. In this Super Reach Presentation B, the display of the mode unchangeable image XL6 and the reach state with the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R continue, and when the player presses the presentation button 63, the chance up image XL8 is displayed. This chance up image XL8 is an image suggesting that the chance of a big win has increased, and is written as "Super Hot."

Next, as shown in FIG. 119(I), a super reach effect C is performed. In this super reach effect C, the mode change impossible image XL6 is displayed, the reach state caused by the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R continues, and a select button image XL9 is displayed. This select button image XL9 is an image that imitates the select button 68, and is an image that prompts the player to operate (press) the select button 68.

Next, as shown in Fig. 119(J), a super reach effect D is performed. In this super reach effect D, while the mode change impossible image XL6 continues to be displayed, the player operates any one of the buttons on the top, bottom, left and right of the select button 68, and a jackpot pattern of 7 symbols is displayed by the decorative symbols 8L, 8C and 8R.
After that, a big win game performance is performed.

Note that in the above standby effect, decorative pattern change effect, mode change effect, language change effect, auto button change effect, change not possible effect, and super reach effects A to D, a mode suggestion image XL1, button auto on/off suggestion image XL2, language suggestion image XL3, and select button image XL4 are displayed, but the appearance may be different for each effect. For example, the size, color, shape, etc. of the mode suggestion image XL1 in the standby effect and the mode suggestion image XL1 in the decorative pattern change effect may be different.

[Modification]
In the above-mentioned button special display effects B to C, the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R may overlap with the mode suggestion image XL1, the button auto on/off suggestion image XL2, the language suggestion image XL3, the select button image XL4, and the mode change impossible image XL6. In this case, the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R may be arranged behind the mode suggestion image XL1, the button auto on/off suggestion image XL2, the language suggestion image XL3, the select button image XL4, and the mode change impossible image XL6.
In the above-mentioned button special display effects B to C, a reserved display showing the reserved number and a lottery result display showing the display result of the special pattern may be performed in association with the mode suggestion image XL1, the button auto on/off suggestion image XL2, the language suggestion image XL3, and the select button image XL4. This reserved display may be composed of only numbers showing the reserved number. In addition, this lottery result display may be displayed in the same arrangement as the stopping patterns of the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R. For example, if the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R are "777," the lottery result display will also be "777."

[Example of effect]
In the above-mentioned special button display effects A to C, when the display mode is changed in a state in which the mode suggestion image XL1 and the select button image XL4 are displayed in correspondence with each other in the mode change effect, the mode suggestion image XL1 is changed to the mode suggestion image XL1 of the corresponding display mode. According to this configuration, even when the display mode is changed, since the mode suggestion image XL1 is associated with the select button image XL4, the player can easily recognize that the select button image XL4 is used to change the mode suggestion image XL1, and can quickly change to a suitable display mode. As a result, the display mode can be changed smoothly, and the interest of the game can be improved.

As shown in the unchangeable effect, in the above-mentioned special button display effects A to C, after the display mode is changed, there is a period during which the display mode cannot be changed. With this configuration, a period during which the display mode cannot be changed is provided after the display mode is changed, so that the player is prevented from being distracted by changing the display mode, and the player can concentrate on the display effects on the display screen 7a. As a result, the interest of the game can be improved.

In the above-mentioned special button display effects A to C, a change-prohibited effect is performed after the mode change effect, and in the change-prohibited effect, the mode change-prohibited image XL6 is displayed so as to overlap the mode suggestion image XL1. With this configuration, the player can quickly recognize that the display mode cannot be changed, and can concentrate on the display effects on the display screen 7a without trying to change the display mode. As a result, the interest of the game can be improved.

In the above special button display effects B to C, when the mode suggestion image XL1 is displayed in association with the select button image XL4, the language suggestion image XL3 is displayed in association with the select button image XL4. With this configuration, even when the language suggestion image XL3 is changed, since the language suggestion image XL3 is associated with the select button image XL4, the player can easily recognize that to change the language suggestion image XL3, the select button image XL4 should be used, and the display mode can be quickly changed to a suitable one. As a result, the display mode can be changed smoothly, improving the enjoyment of the game.

In the above-mentioned special button display effects B to C, when the mode suggestion image XL1 is displayed in association with the select button image XL4, the button auto on/off suggestion image XL2 is displayed in association with the select button image XL4. With this configuration, even when the button auto on/off suggestion image XL2 is changed, since the button auto on/off suggestion image XL2 is associated with the select button image XL4, the player can easily recognize that to change the button auto on/off suggestion image XL2, the select button image XL4 should be used, and the display mode can be quickly changed to a suitable one. As a result, the display mode can be changed smoothly, improving the enjoyment of the game.

In the gaming machine of this embodiment, the following aspects can be realized.
[Aspect XL-1]
A gaming machine including a display means capable of executing a plurality of display effects and an operation means capable of operating the game,
The display means is capable of executing one of a plurality of display modes,
The display mode can be changed by operating the operation unit,
A first display effect may be performed as one of the plurality of display effects,
A second display effect may be performed as one of the plurality of display effects,
The first display effect is an effect of displaying a display mode suggestion image suggesting one display mode and an operation means image representing the operation unit in association with each other,
The second display effect is an effect of changing the display mode suggesting image suggesting the first display mode to the display mode suggesting image suggesting the second display mode when the display mode is changed from the first display mode to the second display mode,
A combination effect including the first display effect and the second display effect may be performed,
In the combination performance, when the first display performance is being performed during the variation of the special symbol, the second display performance is performed.
A gaming machine characterized by:
[Aspect XL-2]
The gaming machine according to aspect XL-1,
After the second display effect in the combination effect is performed, there is a display mode change-prohibited period during which the display mode cannot be changed.
A gaming machine characterized by:
[Aspect XL-3]
The gaming machine according to aspect XL-2,
A third display effect may be performed as one of the plurality of display effects,
The third display effect is an effect of displaying a display mode change impossible image indicating that the display mode cannot be changed during the display mode change impossible period,
The combination effect may include the third display effect,
In the combination effect, the third display effect is performed after the second display effect, and the display mode unchangeable image of the third display effect is displayed so as to overlap with the display mode suggestion image.
A gaming machine characterized by:
[Aspect XL-4]
The gaming machine according to aspect XL-3,
A fourth display effect may be performed as one of the plurality of display effects,
The fourth display effect is an effect of displaying a language suggestion image suggesting a language to be used in the display in association with the operation means image,
The combination effect may include the fourth display effect,
In the combination effect, the fourth display effect is performed when the first display effect is being performed.
A gaming machine characterized by:
[Aspect XL-5]
A gaming machine according to aspect XL-3 or aspect XL-4,
A fifth display effect may be performed as one of the plurality of display effects,
The fifth display effect is an effect of displaying an automatic image of the operation means, which suggests that the operation of the operation means is automatic, in association with the image of the operation means,
The combination effect may include the fifth display effect,
In the combination effect, the fifth display effect is performed when the first display effect is being performed.
A gaming machine characterized by:

Below, the button enable/disable display effects A to C are explained using Figures 120 to 122. In Figures 120 to 122, some of the various movable props arranged around the front (forward) of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 have been omitted for ease of viewing.

This effect button valid/invalid display effect is performed during the decorative pattern variable effect (variable display). That is, the image control microcomputer 101 analyzes various commands received from the sub-control board 90, and if an instruction to execute the effect button valid/invalid display effect is included, it reads corresponding image data from the ROM 103 and displays an image on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7. In addition, the lamp control board 107 analyzes various commands received from the sub-control board 90, and changes the position and light emission mode of the second movable role 15 provided on the game board 2.

Here, we will first explain effect button enable/disable display effect A, then effect button enable/disable display effect B, and effect button enable/disable display effect C.

[Effect button valid/invalid display effect A]
The effect button valid/invalid display effect A will be described with reference to Fig. 120. Fig. 120 is a diagram for explaining the effect button valid/invalid display effect A. The effect button valid/invalid display effect A is performed during the change effect (change display) of the decorative pattern.

First, as shown in FIG. 120(A), the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 has three vertically long rectangular areas (i.e. areas dividing the display screen 7a into three equal rows) as variable display areas for three decorative patterns (not shown) (also called "variable decorative pattern areas"). The display mode in which the reels rotate from the top of each variable display area to the bottom of the display screen 7a displays the left decorative pattern 8L of the stereoscopic image, the middle decorative pattern 8C of the stereoscopic image, and the right decorative pattern 8R of the stereoscopic image, starting with the reels rotating, starts a variable performance (variable display) of the decorative patterns (patterns: numbers "1" to "9").

Specifically, the decorative pattern change performance (changing display) starts when the left decorative pattern 8L is displayed in a display mode in which the reel rotates from the top of the left changing display area to the bottom of the left changing display area 8, the decorative pattern change performance (changing display) starts when the middle decorative pattern 8C is displayed in a display mode in which the reel rotates from the top of the middle changing display area to the bottom of the middle changing display area, and the decorative pattern change performance (changing display) starts when the right decorative pattern 8R is displayed in a display mode in which the reel rotates from the top of the right changing display area to the bottom of the right changing display area. The vertical distance dimension of the left changing display area, the vertical distance dimension of the middle changing display area, and the vertical distance dimension of the right changing display area are the same vertical distance dimension, and further, the horizontal distance dimension of the left changing display area, the horizontal distance dimension of the middle changing display area, and the right changing display area are the same horizontal distance dimension.

The decorative symbols change appearance (changing display) in such a way that the reels spin in the following order: Number "1" → Number "2" → Number "3" → Number "4" → Number "5" → Number "6" → Number "7" → Number "8" → Number "9" → Number "1" → Number "2" → ...

Of the numbers "1" to "9", the odd numbers "1", "3", "5" and "9" are bright red, while the even numbers "2", "4", "6" and "8" are bright blue, and the number "7" is yellow (gold). The sizes of the numbers "1" to "9" are normal sizes, with the vertical distance dimension being approximately one-third the vertical distance dimension of the left variable display area (middle variable display area, right variable display area) and the horizontal distance dimension being approximately one-half the horizontal distance dimension of the left variable display area (middle variable display area, right variable display area). The numbers "1" to "9" are formed in special fonts (originally created special fonts) that are different from existing fonts (generally distributed fonts) such as regular script, Gothic, and Ming style.

When the decorative pattern change performance (changing display) begins, the decorative pattern displayed as still changes from an opaque state to a semi-transparent state while gradually increasing its speed from a low speed, changing at high speed. This allows the background image placed behind the decorative pattern to be viewed through the semi-transparent decorative pattern that is changing at high speed. The decorative pattern slows down just before stopping and changes from a semi-transparent state back to an opaque state, appearing as a temporary stop, or as a stopped display (temporarily displayed, then stopped). When the decorative pattern is displayed as a temporary stop, it moves slowly up and down in small movements. Multiple types of background images are available, and the background images are switched as appropriate.

In addition, on the upper right side of the display screen 7a, there is provided a sub-variable area KSZ having a horizontally long rectangular shape in which small left decorative patterns, small middle decorative patterns, and small right decorative patterns corresponding to the left decorative pattern 8L, middle decorative pattern 8C, and right decorative pattern 8R, respectively, are displayed in a variable manner (variable display). The background image of the sub-variable area KSZ is fixed to a single color (for example, a dark color (dark-dark color series) or a color close to a dark color (for example, deep green) and does not change to other colors. The sub-variable area KSZ is located on the upper right side of the display screen 7a, so it overlaps with the right variable display area which is the variable area of the right decorative pattern 8R. However, by arranging the sub-variable area KSZ to be the foremost side, the right decorative pattern 8R is positioned behind the sub-variable area KSZ and the sub-variable area KSZ is not obstructed by the right decorative pattern 8R. Even if another performance image appears, the other performance image is positioned behind the sub-variable area KSZ and is not obstructed by the other performance image. In other words, the visibility of the content displayed in the sub-variable area KSZ is not hindered by the right decorative pattern 8R or other performance images.

The small decorative pattern is a number pattern, and is in a font (e.g., Mincho) different from the font of the left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R, and is unified in another monochrome color (e.g., a light color (yellow or white)) that contrasts highly with the monochrome color of the background image of the sub-variable area KSZ, and will not change to another color. The small decorative pattern is positioned in front of the background image of the sub-variable area KSZ and is always opaque; even when it starts to change, it will not become translucent, and will not disappear from the display screen 7a.

Unlike the left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R, the small decorative pattern is not changed (displayed) by the reel spinning, but by the number pattern appearing one after the other in the same size and opaque state in the same display position.

When the variable performance (variable display) of the left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R starts, a variable performance (variable display) of the small left decorative pattern, the small middle decorative pattern, and the small right decorative pattern starts in the sub-variable area KSZ, and the left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R are all displayed frozen, while the small left decorative pattern, the small middle decorative pattern, and the small right decorative pattern are also all displayed frozen.

Even if any one or more of the left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R are temporarily stopped (for example, the left decorative pattern 8L and the right decorative pattern 8R are temporarily stopped with the same pattern and a reach is formed), the small left decorative pattern, the small middle decorative pattern, and the small right decorative pattern are all in a state of continuing the variable performance (variable display). Specifically, even if the left decorative pattern 8L is temporarily stopped, the variable performance (variable display) of the small left decorative pattern continues, and even if the right decorative pattern 8R is temporarily stopped, the variable performance (variable display) of the small right decorative pattern continues, and at the same time that the left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R are all stopped, the small left decorative pattern, the small middle decorative pattern, and the small right decorative pattern are all stopped.

In addition, when the left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R are all stopped and displayed, and the same pattern is not aligned and a miss occurs, the small left decorative pattern, the small middle decorative pattern, and the small right decorative pattern may be the same as the left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R, or may be completely different patterns. Specifically, for example, when the left decorative pattern 8L is stopped and displayed with the number "1", the middle decorative pattern 8C is stopped and displayed with the number "2", and the right decorative pattern 8R is stopped and displayed with the number "3", the small left decorative pattern may be stopped and displayed with the number "1", the small middle decorative pattern may be stopped and displayed with the number "2", and the small right decorative pattern may be stopped and displayed with the number "3", or the small left decorative pattern may be stopped and displayed with the number "5", the small middle decorative pattern may be stopped and displayed with the number "6", and the small right decorative pattern may be stopped and displayed with the number "7".

In contrast, when the left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R are all stopped and displayed, and they line up to form the same pattern, resulting in a win, the small left decorative pattern, the small middle decorative pattern, and the small right decorative pattern will line up to form the same pattern as the left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R.

The variable icons 9C corresponding to the left decorative pattern 8L, middle decorative pattern 8C, and right decorative pattern 8R that are currently fluctuating as the first special chart reservation is consumed are displayed (placed) at the variable display position 9Cd (above a rectangular image (pedestal image)) displayed in the lower center of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7. In the area of the display screen 7a to the left of the variable display position 9Cd, a reserve display area is provided for the first special chart reservation. In this reserve display area, reserve icons 9A can be displayed (placed) at each of the four reserve display positions 9Ad (above a rectangular image (pedestal image)), and a maximum of four reserve icons 9A can be stored. The four hold display positions 9Ad are aligned and displayed in a straight line along the bottom edge of the display screen 7a in the following order from the position closest to the variable display position 9Cd toward the left edge of the display screen 7a: first hold display position 9Ad, second hold display position 9Ad, third hold display position 9Ad, and fourth hold display position 9Ad.

The variable display position 9Cd is located in the lower center of the display screen 7a, and the first reserved display position 9Ad is located to the left of the variable display position 9Cd. Therefore, although the variable display position 9Cd and the first reserved display position 9Ad overlap with the middle variable display area that is the variable area of the middle decorative pattern 8C, the middle decorative pattern 8C is located behind the variable display position 9Cd and the first reserved display position 9Ad, and the variable display position 9Cd and the first reserved display position 9Ad are not blocked by the middle decorative pattern 8C. However, when another performance image appears, if the other performance image is located behind the variable display position 9Cd and the first reserved display position 9Ad, the variable display position 9Cd and the first reserved display position 9Ad will not be blocked by the other performance image, but if the other performance image is located in front of the variable display position 9Cd and the first reserved display position 9Ad, the variable display position 9Cd and the first reserved display position 9Ad will be blocked by the other performance image.

Since the second hold display position 9Ad to the fourth hold display position 9Ad are arranged on the lower left side of the display screen 7a, the second hold display position 9Ad to the fourth hold display position 9Ad overlap with the left variable display area which is the variable area of the left decorative pattern 8L, but the left decorative pattern 8L is arranged behind the second hold display position 9Ad to the fourth hold display position 9Ad and the second hold display position 9Ad to the fourth hold display position 9Ad are not blocked by the left decorative pattern 8L. However, when another effect image appears, if the other effect image is arranged behind the second hold display position 9Ad to the fourth hold display position 9Ad, the second hold display position 9Ad to the fourth hold display position 9Ad will not be blocked by the other effect image, but if the other effect image is arranged in front of the second hold display position 9Ad to the fourth hold display position 9Ad, the second hold display position 9Ad to the fourth hold display position 9Ad will be blocked by the other effect image.

In this way, of the first hold display position 9Ad to the fourth hold display position 9Ad, the first hold display position 9Ad overlaps with the middle variable display area which is the variable area of the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the second hold display position 9Ad to the fourth hold display position 9Ad overlap with the left variable display area which is the variable area of the left decorative pattern 8L, so that the hold display area as the first special pattern hold consisting of the first hold display position 9Ad to the fourth hold display position 9Ad is arranged across the middle variable display area and the left variable display area.

Here, a white spherical variable icon 9C is displayed at the variable display position 9Cd, a reserved icon 9A is displayed at the first reserved display position 9Ad to the third reserved display position 9Ad, and no reserved icon 9A is displayed at the fourth reserved display position 9Ad. In other words, there are three reserved icons that have not been consumed and are stored. Note that the following explanation is based on the assumption that no game balls enter the first starting hole 20 and the second starting hole 21 during the decorative pattern variable performance (variable display).

In addition, on the upper left side of the display screen 7a, facing the above-mentioned sub-variable area KSZ (along the same horizontal line), there is provided a reserve number display area HS having a horizontally long rectangular shape in which the first special reserve based on the game ball entering the first starting hole 20 and the second special reserve based on the game ball entering the second starting hole 21 are displayed as reserve numbers (numbers). The vertical distance dimension of the reserve number display area HS and the vertical distance dimension of the sub-variable area KSZ are the same distance dimension, and the horizontal distance dimension of the reserve number display area HS and the horizontal distance dimension of the sub-variable area KSZ are the same distance dimension. In other words, the shape of the reserve number display area HS and the shape of the sub-variable area KSZ are the same shape.

The background image of the reserved number display area HS is fixed as colorless and transparent, unlike the background image of the sub-variable area KSZ, and does not become opaque or change to another color. The reserved number display area HS is positioned on the upper left side of the display screen 7a, so it overlaps with the left variable display area, which is the variable area of the left decorative pattern 8L. However, by positioning the reserved number display area HS as the foremost side, the left decorative pattern 8L is positioned behind the reserved number display area HS and the reserved number display area HS is not obstructed by the left decorative pattern 8L, and even if another performance image appears, the other performance image is positioned behind the reserved number display area HS and the reserved number display area HS is not obstructed by the other performance image.

The number of reserved first special figures (reserved number (number)) and the number of reserved second special figures (reserved number (number)) are in a font (e.g., Gothic) different from the font of the small decorative pattern, and are set to other solid colors that have high contrast with the solid color of the background image of the reserved number display area HS, and do not change to other colors. The number of reserved first special figures (reserved number (number)) and the number of reserved second special figures (reserved number (number)) are arranged on the front side of the background image of the reserved number display area HS and are always opaque, and do not disappear from the display screen 7a. Specifically, the number of reserved first special figures based on the entry of game balls into the first starting hole 20 is always displayed as a blue number on the left side of the reserved number display area HS, and the number of reserved second special figures based on the entry of game balls into the second starting hole 21 is always displayed as a red number on the right side of the reserved number display area HS, spaced apart from each other. These numbers are displayed as the number of reserved balls, so they are easy to distinguish from the various background images and decorative images displayed on the display screen 7a, making them intuitively easy to understand. In other words, the content displayed in the reserved number display area HS is not hindered in visibility by other performance images. The blue color indicating the number of reserved first special symbols is a different color (not the same color) from the bright blue of the even-numbered symbols "2", "4", "6", and "8", but is a similar color. The red color indicating the number of reserved second special symbols is a different color (not the same color) from the bright red of the odd-numbered symbols "1", "3", "5", and "9", excluding the number "7", but is a similar color.

Here, briefly explaining the reserved icon 9A and the variable icon 9C (hereinafter sometimes simply referred to as "icon"), the differences in shape and color represent the differences in the expectation of winning at the time of the lottery corresponding to the icon. For example, of the four icons, namely, the yellow (gold) star icon, the black spherical icon, the smiling sphere icon, and the white spherical icon, the yellow (gold) star icon has the highest expectation of winning, the black spherical icon has the second highest expectation of winning, the smiling sphere icon has the third highest expectation of winning, and the white spherical icon has the lowest expectation of winning. For the smiling sphere icon, the expectation of winning is further set in the order of, for example, blue → green → red → gold (yellow) → seven colors (rainbow (high probability of winning)).

The left decorative pattern 8L, middle decorative pattern 8C, and right decorative pattern 8R all start changing (changing display) at the same time, and as shown in FIG. 120(A), the left decorative pattern 8L starts changing (changing display) from the top to the bottom of the left changing display area, the middle decorative pattern 8C starts changing (changing display) from the top to the bottom of the left changing display area, and the right decorative pattern 8R starts changing (changing display) from the top to the bottom of the left changing display area.

After that, as shown in FIG. 120(B), the left decorative pattern 8L, which changes from top to bottom in the left changing display area, is temporarily stopped at the number "1" in the center of the left changing display area and moves slowly up and down in small increments, and then the right decorative pattern 8R, which changes from top to bottom in the right changing display area, is temporarily stopped at the number "1" in the center of the right changing display area and moves slowly up and down in small increments, and the left decorative pattern 8L and the right decorative pattern 8R become the same pattern (here, the number "1"), forming a reach. At this time, the middle decorative pattern 8C continues to change from top to bottom in the middle changing display area.

When a reach is reached and the button valid/invalid display effect A starts as shown in FIG. 120(C), the flash FL travels in from the outside of the bottom edge of the display screen 7a, as if drawing a counterclockwise elliptical orbit, passes toward the right edge of the display screen 7a, flies out to the outside of the right edge of the display screen 7a, then again travels in from the outside of the top edge of the display screen 7a, and stops near the center of the display screen 7a, exploding. Note that although the above-mentioned sub-variable area KSZ is provided on the upper right side of the display screen 7a, because the sub-variable area KSZ is located at the frontmost side, even if part of the flash FL passes through the sub-variable area KSZ, part of the flash FL will be covered by the sub-variable area KSZ.

When the flash FL stops near the center of the display screen 7a and explodes, as shown in FIG. 120(D), an effect button image BTN simulating the effect button 63 is displayed as an unclear image (out-of-focus image (unfocused image)) in the center of the display screen 7a. Even if the player presses the effect button 63 during the period when the effect button image BTN is displayed as this unclear image (out-of-focus image (unfocused image)), this is not reflected in the effect displayed on the display screen 7a. In other words, the period when the effect button image BTN is displayed as an unclear image (out-of-focus image (unfocused image)) is a period during which pressing the effect button 63 is disabled, and the effect button image BTN is displayed as an inactive display mode in which it is an unclear image (out-of-focus image (unfocused image)). In addition, in the effect button active/inactive display effect A, the display mode in which the effect button image BTN is displayed as an inactive display mode that is an unclear image (out-of-focus image (unfocused image)) is called the "operation inactive display mode."

After that, as shown in FIG. 120(E), the effect button image BTN, which was in the operation-invalid display mode, switches to a clear image (in-focus image). If the player presses the effect button 63 during the period in which the effect button image BTN is displayed as this clear image (in-focus image), an ally character CRA may be displayed (appear) on the display screen 7a, suggesting a development to a battle effect in which the expectation of a big win is preset high, and the effect displayed on the display screen 7a may be affected by the player's pressing of the effect button 63. In other words, the period in which the effect button image BTN is displayed as a clear image (in-focus image) is a period in which pressing the effect button 63 is enabled, and the effect button image BTN is displayed as an active display mode in which it becomes a clear image (in-focus image). In addition, in the effect button valid/invalid display effect A, the display mode in which the effect button image BTN is displayed as an active display mode in which it is a clear image (an image in focus) is called the "operation valid display mode."

Then, while the operation-enabled display mode remains active, the effect button image BTN is displayed, and the left decorative pattern 8L and the right decorative pattern 8R disappear from the display screen 7a. At this time, the middle decorative pattern 8C, which is undergoing a variable effect (variable display), also disappears from the display screen 7a, but in the sub-variable area KSZ, the variable effect (variable display) of the small left decorative pattern, small middle decorative pattern, and small right decorative pattern corresponding to the left decorative pattern 8L, middle decorative pattern 8C, and right decorative pattern 8R, respectively, continues without being temporarily stopped.

After that, as shown in FIG. 120(F), the second movable role 15 advances (moves) from a stationary state at a retreat position (home position) above the image display device 7 toward the front (front) of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, toward the center position (advance position) of the display screen 7a, and stops for a predetermined time (for example, about 5 seconds). When the second movable role 15 moves to the advance position and stops, the second movable role 15 covers the performance button image BTN, and the lower part of the performance button image BTN can be seen. In other words, the second movable role 15 covers a part of the performance button image BTN. Even if the second movable role 15 covers a part of the performance button image BTN, the performance button image BTN continues to be displayed in the operation-enabled display mode (that is, even if the second movable role 15 covers a part of the performance button image BTN, the active display mode of the performance button image BTN continues). Of course, even if the second movable device 15 covers a part of the effect button image BTN, the effect button image BTN is still displayed in an operationally active display state, so the effect displayed on the display screen 7a may be affected by the player pressing the effect button 63.

Then, the second movable device 15 returns from the advanced position to the retreated position (home position), and as shown in FIG. 120(G), the effect button image BTN continues to be displayed in an operation-enabled display mode. Of course, even when the second movable device 15 returns from the advanced position to the retreated position (home position), the effect button image BTN remains displayed in an operation-enabled display mode, so that the effect displayed on the display screen 7a may be affected by the player pressing the effect button 63.

If the player presses the effect button 63 while the effect button image BTN is displayed while the operation-enabled display mode is still in effect, and the second movable device 15 returns from the advanced position to the retreated position (home position), the left decorative pattern 8L and the right decorative pattern 8R are displayed again in a temporarily stopped state, the effect button image BTN disappears from the display screen 7a, the middle decorative pattern 8C in the variable effect (variable display) is displayed again, and the effect button valid/invalid display effect A ends.

After that, as shown in FIG. 120(H), the ally character CRA is displayed in the center of the display screen 7a (the center of the middle variable display area), and then, as shown in FIG. 120(I), a battle performance starts. In the battle performance, the ally character CRA appears from the right side of the display screen 7a, the enemy character CRB appears from the left side of the display screen 7a, and the ally character CRA and the enemy character CRB fight in the center of the display screen 7a, and this performance has a high expectation of a big win. In the battle performance, the left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R disappear again from the display screen 7a, and the variable display position 9Cd, the reserved display position 9Ad, the variable icon 9C, and the reserved icon 9A disappear from the display screen 7a. In the battle performance, in the sub-variable area KSZ, the variable performance (variable display) of the small left decorative pattern, small middle decorative pattern, and small right decorative pattern corresponding to the left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R, respectively, continues without being temporarily stopped. Also, in the reserved number display area HS, the first special reserved pattern and the second special reserved pattern are each displayed as reserved numbers (numbers).

When the friendly character CRA is defeated and the enemy character CRB wins in the battle performance, as shown in FIG. 120(J), the left decorative pattern 8L becomes the number "1", the middle decorative pattern 8C becomes the number "2", and the right decorative pattern 8R becomes the number "1", and are displayed (determined display) at the same timing, and the left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R do not match with the same pattern (here, the number "1"), resulting in a miss. At this time, the variable display position 9Cd, the reserved display position 9Ad, and the reserved icon 9A are displayed again on the display screen 7a, and the variable icon 9C is not displayed due to the end of the variable. Next, the reserved icon 9A displayed at the first reserved display position 9Ad moves to the variable display position 9Cd and becomes the variable icon 9C, and the variable performance (variable display) by the left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R starts.

When the friendly character CRA wins and the enemy character CRB is defeated in the battle performance, the left decorative pattern 8L, the center decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R are displayed as the same pattern, a jackpot is generated, and then the jackpot game (jackpot performance) starts. When a jackpot is confirmed, the variable display position 9Cd, the reserved display position 9Ad, and the reserved icon 9A are displayed again on the display screen 7a, and the variable icon 9C is no longer displayed due to the end of the variable.

In addition, in FIG. 120(H), the ally character CRA is displayed in the center of the display screen 7a (the center of the middle variable display area), but if the ally character CRA is not displayed in the center of the display screen 7a (the center of the middle variable display area), as shown in FIG. 120(J), the left decorative pattern 8L is the number "1", the middle decorative pattern 8C is the number "2", and the right decorative pattern 8R is the number "1", and they are displayed (confirmed) at the same timing, and the left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R do not line up with the same pattern (here, the number "1"), and a miss is displayed as the winning result. In other words, if the ally character CRA is not displayed in the center of the display screen 7a (the center of the middle variable display area) in FIG. 120(H), the game does not progress to a battle performance, and a miss is displayed as the winning result.

In addition, in Figures 120 (E) to (G), the effect button image BTN is a clear image (an image in focus), but in this case, the effect button image BTN may be in a state where it emits bright light (for example, white light). The bright light emission may indicate the expected probability of a win in the order of white → blue → red → yellow. In this way, it is possible to increase the variety of effects produced by the bright light emission of the effect button image BTN.

[Effect button valid/invalid display effect B]
Next, the effect button valid/invalid display effect B will be described with reference to Fig. 121. Fig. 121 is a diagram for explaining the effect button valid/invalid display effect B. The effect button valid/invalid display effect B is performed during the change effect (change display) of the decorative pattern.

First, as shown in FIG. 121(A), the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 has three vertically long rectangular areas (i.e. areas dividing the display screen 7a into three equal rows) as variable display areas for three decorative patterns (not shown) (also called "variable decorative pattern areas"). The display mode rotates the reels so that the left decorative pattern 8L of the stereoscopic image, the middle decorative pattern 8C of the stereoscopic image, and the right decorative pattern 8R of the stereoscopic image rotate from the top of each variable display area to the bottom of the display screen 7a, starting a variable performance (variable display) of the decorative patterns (patterns: numbers "1" to "9").

Specifically, the decorative pattern change performance (changing display) starts when the left decorative pattern 8L is displayed in a display mode in which the reel rotates from the top of the left changing display area to the bottom of the left changing display area 8, the decorative pattern change performance (changing display) starts when the middle decorative pattern 8C is displayed in a display mode in which the reel rotates from the top of the middle changing display area to the bottom of the middle changing display area, and the decorative pattern change performance (changing display) starts when the right decorative pattern 8R is displayed in a display mode in which the reel rotates from the top of the right changing display area to the bottom of the right changing display area. The vertical distance dimension of the left changing display area, the vertical distance dimension of the middle changing display area, and the vertical distance dimension of the right changing display area are the same vertical distance dimension, and further, the horizontal distance dimension of the left changing display area, the horizontal distance dimension of the middle changing display area, and the right changing display area are the same horizontal distance dimension.

The decorative symbols change appearance (changing display) in such a way that the reels spin in the following order: Number "1" → Number "2" → Number "3" → Number "4" → Number "5" → Number "6" → Number "7" → Number "8" → Number "9" → Number "1" → Number "2" → ...

Of the numbers "1" to "9", the odd numbers "1", "3", "5" and "9" are bright red, while the even numbers "2", "4", "6" and "8" are bright blue, and the number "7" is yellow (gold). The sizes of the numbers "1" to "9" are normal sizes, with the vertical distance dimension being approximately one-third the vertical distance dimension of the left variable display area (middle variable display area, right variable display area) and the horizontal distance dimension being approximately one-half the horizontal distance dimension of the left variable display area (middle variable display area, right variable display area). The numbers "1" to "9" are formed in special fonts (originally created special fonts) that are different from existing fonts (generally distributed fonts) such as regular script, Gothic, and Ming style.

When the decorative pattern change performance (changing display) begins, the decorative pattern displayed as still changes from an opaque state to a semi-transparent state while gradually increasing its speed from a low speed, changing at high speed. This allows the background image placed behind the decorative pattern to be viewed through the semi-transparent decorative pattern that is changing at high speed. The decorative pattern slows down just before stopping and changes from a semi-transparent state back to an opaque state, appearing as a temporary stop, or as a stopped display (temporarily displayed, then stopped). When the decorative pattern is displayed as a temporary stop, it moves slowly up and down in small movements. Multiple types of background images are available, and the background images are switched as appropriate.

In addition, on the upper right side of the display screen 7a, there is provided a sub-variable area KSZ having a horizontally long rectangular shape in which small left decorative patterns, small middle decorative patterns, and small right decorative patterns corresponding to the left decorative pattern 8L, middle decorative pattern 8C, and right decorative pattern 8R, respectively, are displayed in a variable manner (variable display). The background image of the sub-variable area KSZ is fixed to a single color (for example, a dark color (dark-dark color series) or a color close to a dark color (for example, deep green) and does not change to other colors. The sub-variable area KSZ is located on the upper right side of the display screen 7a, so it overlaps with the right variable display area which is the variable area of the right decorative pattern 8R. However, by arranging the sub-variable area KSZ to be the foremost side, the right decorative pattern 8R is positioned behind the sub-variable area KSZ and the sub-variable area KSZ is not obstructed by the right decorative pattern 8R. Even if another performance image appears, the other performance image is positioned behind the sub-variable area KSZ and is not obstructed by the other performance image. In other words, the visibility of the content displayed in the sub-variable area KSZ is not hindered by the right decorative pattern 8R or other performance images.

The small decorative pattern is a number pattern, and is in a font (e.g., Mincho) different from the font of the left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R, and is unified in another monochrome color (e.g., a light color (yellow or white)) that contrasts highly with the monochrome color of the background image of the sub-variable area KSZ, and will not change to another color. The small decorative pattern is positioned in front of the background image of the sub-variable area KSZ and is always opaque; even when it starts to change, it will not become translucent, and will not disappear from the display screen 7a.

Unlike the left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R, the small decorative pattern is not changed (displayed) by the reel spinning, but by the number pattern appearing one after the other in the same size and opaque state in the same display position.

When the variable performance (variable display) of the left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R starts, a variable performance (variable display) of the small left decorative pattern, the small middle decorative pattern, and the small right decorative pattern starts in the sub-variable area KSZ, and the left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R are all displayed frozen, while the small left decorative pattern, the small middle decorative pattern, and the small right decorative pattern are also all displayed frozen.

Even if any one or more of the left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R are temporarily stopped (for example, the left decorative pattern 8L and the right decorative pattern 8R are temporarily stopped with the same pattern and a reach is formed), the small left decorative pattern, the small middle decorative pattern, and the small right decorative pattern are all in a state of continuing the variable performance (variable display). Specifically, even if the left decorative pattern 8L is temporarily stopped, the variable performance (variable display) of the small left decorative pattern continues, and even if the right decorative pattern 8R is temporarily stopped, the variable performance (variable display) of the small right decorative pattern continues, and at the same time that the left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R are all stopped, the small left decorative pattern, the small middle decorative pattern, and the small right decorative pattern are all stopped.

In addition, when the left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R are all stopped and displayed, and the same pattern is not aligned and a miss occurs, the small left decorative pattern, the small middle decorative pattern, and the small right decorative pattern may be the same as the left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R, or may be completely different patterns. Specifically, for example, when the left decorative pattern 8L is stopped and displayed with the number "1", the middle decorative pattern 8C is stopped and displayed with the number "2", and the right decorative pattern 8R is stopped and displayed with the number "3", the small left decorative pattern may be stopped and displayed with the number "1", the small middle decorative pattern may be stopped and displayed with the number "2", and the small right decorative pattern may be stopped and displayed with the number "3", or the small left decorative pattern may be stopped and displayed with the number "5", the small middle decorative pattern may be stopped and displayed with the number "6", and the small right decorative pattern may be stopped and displayed with the number "7".

In contrast, when the left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R are all stopped and displayed, and they line up to form the same pattern, resulting in a win, the small left decorative pattern, the small middle decorative pattern, and the small right decorative pattern will line up to form the same pattern as the left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R.

The variable icons 9C corresponding to the left decorative pattern 8L, middle decorative pattern 8C, and right decorative pattern 8R that are currently fluctuating as the first special chart reservation is consumed are displayed (placed) at the variable display position 9Cd (above a rectangular image (pedestal image)) displayed in the lower center of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7. In the area of the display screen 7a to the left of the variable display position 9Cd, a reserve display area is provided for the first special chart reservation. In this reserve display area, reserve icons 9A can be displayed (placed) at each of the four reserve display positions 9Ad (above a rectangular image (pedestal image)), and a maximum of four reserve icons 9A can be stored. The four hold display positions 9Ad are aligned and displayed in a straight line along the bottom edge of the display screen 7a in the following order from the position closest to the variable display position 9Cd toward the left edge of the display screen 7a: first hold display position 9Ad, second hold display position 9Ad, third hold display position 9Ad, and fourth hold display position 9Ad.

The variable display position 9Cd is located in the lower center of the display screen 7a, and the first reserved display position 9Ad is located to the left of the variable display position 9Cd. Therefore, although the variable display position 9Cd and the first reserved display position 9Ad overlap with the middle variable display area that is the variable area of the middle decorative pattern 8C, the middle decorative pattern 8C is located behind the variable display position 9Cd and the first reserved display position 9Ad, and the variable display position 9Cd and the first reserved display position 9Ad are not blocked by the middle decorative pattern 8C. However, when another performance image appears, if the other performance image is located behind the variable display position 9Cd and the first reserved display position 9Ad, the variable display position 9Cd and the first reserved display position 9Ad will not be blocked by the other performance image, but if the other performance image is located in front of the variable display position 9Cd and the first reserved display position 9Ad, the variable display position 9Cd and the first reserved display position 9Ad will be blocked by the other performance image.

Since the second hold display position 9Ad to the fourth hold display position 9Ad are arranged on the lower left side of the display screen 7a, the second hold display position 9Ad to the fourth hold display position 9Ad overlap with the left variable display area which is the variable area of the left decorative pattern 8L, but the left decorative pattern 8L is arranged behind the second hold display position 9Ad to the fourth hold display position 9Ad and the second hold display position 9Ad to the fourth hold display position 9Ad are not blocked by the left decorative pattern 8L. However, when another effect image appears, if the other effect image is arranged behind the second hold display position 9Ad to the fourth hold display position 9Ad, the second hold display position 9Ad to the fourth hold display position 9Ad will not be blocked by the other effect image, but if the other effect image is arranged in front of the second hold display position 9Ad to the fourth hold display position 9Ad, the second hold display position 9Ad to the fourth hold display position 9Ad will be blocked by the other effect image.

In this way, of the first hold display position 9Ad to the fourth hold display position 9Ad, the first hold display position 9Ad overlaps with the middle variable display area which is the variable area of the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the second hold display position 9Ad to the fourth hold display position 9Ad overlap with the left variable display area which is the variable area of the left decorative pattern 8L, so that the hold display area as the first special pattern hold consisting of the first hold display position 9Ad to the fourth hold display position 9Ad is arranged across the middle variable display area and the left variable display area.

Here, a white spherical variable icon 9C is displayed at the variable display position 9Cd, a reserved icon 9A is displayed at the first reserved display position 9Ad to the third reserved display position 9Ad, and no reserved icon 9A is displayed at the fourth reserved display position 9Ad. In other words, there are three reserved icons that have not been consumed and are stored. Note that the following explanation is based on the assumption that no game balls enter the first starting hole 20 and the second starting hole 21 during the decorative pattern variable performance (variable display).

In addition, on the upper left side of the display screen 7a, facing the above-mentioned sub-variable area KSZ (along the same horizontal line), there is provided a reserve number display area HS having a horizontally long rectangular shape in which the first special reserve based on the game ball entering the first starting hole 20 and the second special reserve based on the game ball entering the second starting hole 21 are displayed as reserve numbers (numbers). The vertical distance dimension of the reserve number display area HS and the vertical distance dimension of the sub-variable area KSZ are the same distance dimension, and the horizontal distance dimension of the reserve number display area HS and the horizontal distance dimension of the sub-variable area KSZ are the same distance dimension. In other words, the shape of the reserve number display area HS and the shape of the sub-variable area KSZ are the same shape.

The background image of the reserved number display area HS is fixed as colorless and transparent, unlike the background image of the sub-variable area KSZ, and does not become opaque or change to another color. The reserved number display area HS is positioned on the upper left side of the display screen 7a, so it overlaps with the left variable display area, which is the variable area of the left decorative pattern 8L. However, by positioning the reserved number display area HS as the foremost side, the left decorative pattern 8L is positioned behind the reserved number display area HS and the reserved number display area HS is not obstructed by the left decorative pattern 8L, and even if another performance image appears, the other performance image is positioned behind the reserved number display area HS and the reserved number display area HS is not obstructed by the other performance image.

The number of reserved first special figures (reserved number (number)) and the number of reserved second special figures (reserved number (number)) are in a font (e.g., Gothic) different from the font of the small decorative pattern, and are set to other solid colors that have high contrast with the solid color of the background image of the reserved number display area HS, and do not change to other colors. The number of reserved first special figures (reserved number (number)) and the number of reserved second special figures (reserved number (number)) are arranged on the front side of the background image of the reserved number display area HS and are always opaque, and do not disappear from the display screen 7a. Specifically, the number of reserved first special figures based on the entry of game balls into the first starting hole 20 is always displayed as a blue number on the left side of the reserved number display area HS, and the number of reserved second special figures based on the entry of game balls into the second starting hole 21 is always displayed as a red number on the right side of the reserved number display area HS, spaced apart from each other. These numbers are displayed as the number of reserved balls, so they are easy to distinguish from the various background images and decorative images displayed on the display screen 7a, making them intuitively easy to understand. In other words, the content displayed in the reserved number display area HS is not hindered in visibility by other performance images. The blue color indicating the number of reserved first special symbols is a different color (not the same color) from the bright blue of the even-numbered symbols "2", "4", "6", and "8", but is a similar color. The red color indicating the number of reserved second special symbols is a different color (not the same color) from the bright red of the odd-numbered symbols "1", "3", "5", and "9", excluding the number "7", but is a similar color.

Here, briefly explaining the reserved icon 9A and the variable icon 9C (hereinafter sometimes simply referred to as "icon"), the differences in shape and color represent the differences in the expectation of winning at the time of the lottery corresponding to the icon. For example, of the four icons, namely, the yellow (gold) star icon, the black spherical icon, the smiling sphere icon, and the white spherical icon, the yellow (gold) star icon has the highest expectation of winning, the black spherical icon has the second highest expectation of winning, the smiling sphere icon has the third highest expectation of winning, and the white spherical icon has the lowest expectation of winning. For the smiling sphere icon, the expectation of winning is further set in the order of, for example, blue → green → red → gold (yellow) → seven colors (rainbow (high probability of winning)).

The left decorative pattern 8L, middle decorative pattern 8C, and right decorative pattern 8R all start changing (changing display) at the same time, and as shown in FIG. 121(A), the left decorative pattern 8L starts changing (changing display) from the top to the bottom of the left changing display area, the middle decorative pattern 8C starts changing (changing display) from the top to the bottom of the left changing display area, and the right decorative pattern 8R starts changing (changing display) from the top to the bottom of the left changing display area.

Then, as shown in FIG. 121(B), the corresponding variable icon 9C changes from a white sphere to a yellow (gold) star-shaped variable icon 9C, and the left decorative pattern 8L, which changes from top to bottom in the left variable display area, is temporarily stopped at the number "5" in the center of the left variable display area and moves slowly up and down in small increments, and then the right decorative pattern 8R, which changes from top to bottom in the right variable display area, is temporarily stopped at the number "5" in the center of the right variable display area and moves slowly up and down in small increments, and the left decorative pattern 8L and the right decorative pattern 8R become the same pattern (here, the number "5"), forming a reach. At this time, the middle decorative pattern 8C continues to change from top to bottom in the middle variable display area.

When a reach is formed and the button valid/invalid display effect B starts as shown in FIG. 121(C), the button image BTN simulating the button 63 is displayed in the center of the display screen 7a in an active display mode in which it emits light in a bright color (for example, white light). At this time, the button image BTN is displayed in front of the middle decorative pattern 8C, and a rapid-hit image MG that informs the player to repeatedly hit the button 63 is displayed in front of the middle decorative pattern 8C in the upper right of the button image BTN. When the player presses the button 63 during the period in which the button image BTN is displayed in this active display mode in which it emits light in a bright color, an ally character CRA that suggests a development to a battle effect in which the probability of winning a jackpot is set high in advance may be displayed (appear) on the display screen 7a, and the effect displayed on the display screen 7a may be affected by the player's pressing of the button 63. In other words, the period during which the effect button image BTN is displayed as an active display mode that emits bright light is the period during which pressing the effect button 63 is enabled. Note that in effect button enable/disable display effect B, the display mode in which the effect button image BTN is displayed as an active display mode that emits bright light is referred to as the "operation enabled display mode."

After that, as shown in FIG. 121(D), the effect button image BTN, which was in the operation-enabled display mode, switches to an inactive display mode in which it emits dark light (e.g., dark gray). Even if the player presses the effect button 63 during the period in which the effect button image BTN is displayed in this inactive display mode emitting dark light, this is not reflected in the effect displayed on the display screen 7a. In other words, the period in which the effect button image BTN is displayed in the inactive display mode emitting dark light is a period in which pressing the effect button 63 is disabled. Note that in the effect button enabled/disabled display performance B, the display mode in which the effect button image BTN is displayed in the inactive display mode emitting dark light is called the "operation-disabled display mode".

Then, the effect button image BTN is displayed while the operation disabled display mode remains, and the left decorative pattern 8L and the right decorative pattern 8R disappear from the display screen 7a. At this time, the middle decorative pattern 8C, which is undergoing a variable effect (variable display), also disappears from the display screen 7a, but in the sub-variable area KSZ, the variable effect (variable display) of the small left decorative pattern, small middle decorative pattern, and small right decorative pattern corresponding to the left decorative pattern 8L, middle decorative pattern 8C, and right decorative pattern 8R, respectively, continues without being temporarily stopped.

After that, as shown in FIG. 121(E), an image with a seven-color background image (so-called "rainbow image") is displayed on the display screen 7a, and the second movable role 15 advances (moves) from a stationary state at a retreat position (home position) above the image display device 7 toward the front (front) of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 and toward the center position (advance position) of the display screen 7a, and stops for a predetermined time (for example, about 5 seconds). When the second movable role 15 moves to the advance position and stops, the second movable role 15 covers the performance button image BTN, and the lower part of the performance button image BTN can be seen. In other words, the second movable role 15 covers a part of the performance button image BTN. Even if the second movable role 15 covers a part of the performance button image BTN, the performance button image BTN continues to be displayed in an operation-invalidated display mode. Of course, even if the second movable device 15 covers a part of the effect button image BTN, the effect button image BTN remains in the operation-invalid display mode, so there is no effect on the effect displayed on the display screen 7a when the player presses the effect button 63. The rainbow image is a special background image that notifies (suggests) the player that a jackpot has been confirmed.

Then, the second movable device 15 returns from the advanced position to the retreated position (home position), and as shown in FIG. 121(F), the effect button image BTN continues to be displayed in the operation-invalidated display mode. Of course, even if the second movable device 15 returns from the advanced position to the retreated position (home position), the effect button image BTN remains displayed in the operation-invalidated display mode, so that the player's pressing of the effect button 63 has no effect on the effect displayed on the display screen 7a.

If the player presses the effect button 63 while the effect button image BTN is displayed while the operation-enabled display mode is still in effect, and the second movable device 15 returns from the advanced position to the retreated position (home position), the left decorative pattern 8L and the right decorative pattern 8R are displayed again in a temporarily stopped state, the effect button image BTN disappears from the display screen 7a, the middle decorative pattern 8C in the variable effect (variable display) is displayed again, and the effect button valid/invalid display effect B ends.

After that, as shown in FIG. 121(G), the ally character CRA is displayed in the center of the display screen 7a (the center of the middle variable display area), and then, as shown in FIG. 121(H), a battle performance starts. In the battle performance, the ally character CRA appears from the right side of the display screen 7a, the enemy character CRB appears from the left side of the display screen 7a, and the ally character CRA and the enemy character CRB fight in the center of the display screen 7a, and this performance has a high expectation of a big win. In the battle performance, the left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R disappear again from the display screen 7a, and the variable display position 9Cd, the reserved display position 9Ad, the variable icon 9C, and the reserved icon 9A disappear from the display screen 7a. In the battle performance, in the sub-variable area KSZ, the variable performance (variable display) of the small left decorative pattern, small middle decorative pattern, and small right decorative pattern corresponding to the left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R, respectively, continues without being temporarily stopped. Also, in the reserved number display area HS, the first special reserved pattern and the second special reserved pattern are each displayed as reserved numbers (numbers).

In the battle performance, as shown in Fig. 121(I), when the winged ally character CRA is displayed large on the display screen 7a, the ally character CRA wins and the enemy character CRB is defeated, and as shown in Fig. 121(J), the left decorative pattern 8L, the center decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R are displayed as the same pattern (here, the number "5"), a jackpot is hit, and then the jackpot game (jackpot performance) begins. When the jackpot is confirmed, the variable display position 9Cd, the reserved display position 9Ad, and the reserved icon 9A are displayed again on the display screen 7a, and the variable icon 9C is no longer displayed due to the end of the change. Although the above-mentioned sub-variable area KSZ is provided on the upper right side of the display screen 7a, even if part of the wing of the winged ally character CRA in the form of a winged man overlaps with the sub-variable area KSZ in FIG. 121(I), the sub-variable area KSZ is located on the frontmost side, so part of the wing of the winged ally character CRA in the form of a winged man will be covered by the sub-variable area KSZ. Also, although the above-mentioned reserved number display area HS is provided on the upper left side of the display screen 7a, even if the winged ally character CRA moves and part of the wing overlaps with the reserved number display area HS, the reserved number display area HS is located on the frontmost side, so part of the wing of the winged ally character CRA in the form of a winged man will be covered by the reserved number display area HS.

In the battle performance, if the friendly character CRA is defeated and the enemy character CRB wins, the left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R are displayed stopped (confirmed) at the same timing, and the left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R do not line up with the same pattern (here, the number "5"), resulting in a miss. At this time, the variable display position 9Cd, the reserved display position 9Ad, and the reserved icon 9A are displayed again on the display screen 7a, and the variable icon 9C is not displayed due to the end of the variable. Next, the reserved icon 9A displayed at the first reserved display position 9Ad moves to the variable display position 9Cd and becomes the variable icon 9C, and the variable performance (variable display) of the left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R begins.

In addition, if a rainbow background image is not displayed as the background image of the display screen 7a in FIG. 121(E), and furthermore, if an ally character CRA is not displayed in the center of the display screen 7a (the center of the middle variable display area) in FIG. 121(G), the left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R are displayed stopped (determined) at the same timing, and the left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R do not match the same pattern (here, the number "5"), and a miss is displayed as the winning result. In other words, if a rainbow background image is not displayed as the background image of the display screen 7a in FIG. 121(E), and furthermore, if an ally character CRA is not displayed in the center of the display screen 7a (the center of the middle variable display area) in FIG. 121(G), the game does not progress to a battle performance, and a miss is displayed as the winning result.

In FIG. 121(C), the effect button image BTN is white as a bright light emission, but the expected probability of a win may be indicated in the order of white → blue → red → yellow. In this way, the variety of effects produced by the bright light emission of the effect button image BTN can be increased.

[Effect button valid/invalid display effect C]
Next, the effect button valid/invalid display effect C will be described with reference to Fig. 122. Fig. 122 is a diagram for explaining the effect button valid/invalid display effect C. The effect button valid/invalid display effect C is performed based on the change in the reserved icon due to the pre-reading effect.

First, as shown in FIG. 122(A), the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 has three vertically long rectangular areas (i.e., areas dividing the display screen 7a into three equal rows) as variable display areas for three decorative patterns (not shown) (also called "variable decorative pattern areas"). The display mode in which the reels rotate from the top of each variable display area to the bottom of the display screen 7a displays the left decorative pattern 8L of the stereoscopic image, the middle decorative pattern 8C of the stereoscopic image, and the right decorative pattern 8R of the stereoscopic image, starting with the reels rotating, starts a variable performance (variable display) of the decorative patterns (patterns: numbers "1" to "9").

Specifically, the decorative pattern change performance (changing display) starts when the left decorative pattern 8L is displayed in a display mode in which the reel rotates from the top of the left changing display area to the bottom of the left changing display area 8, the decorative pattern change performance (changing display) starts when the middle decorative pattern 8C is displayed in a display mode in which the reel rotates from the top of the middle changing display area to the bottom of the middle changing display area, and the decorative pattern change performance (changing display) starts when the right decorative pattern 8R is displayed in a display mode in which the reel rotates from the top of the right changing display area to the bottom of the right changing display area. The vertical distance dimension of the left changing display area, the vertical distance dimension of the middle changing display area, and the vertical distance dimension of the right changing display area are the same vertical distance dimension, and further, the horizontal distance dimension of the left changing display area, the horizontal distance dimension of the middle changing display area, and the right changing display area are the same horizontal distance dimension.

The decorative symbols change appearance (changing display) in such a way that the reels spin in the following order: Number "1" → Number "2" → Number "3" → Number "4" → Number "5" → Number "6" → Number "7" → Number "8" → Number "9" → Number "1" → Number "2" → ...

Of the numbers "1" to "9", the odd numbers "1", "3", "5" and "9" are bright red, while the even numbers "2", "4", "6" and "8" are bright blue, and the number "7" is yellow (gold). The sizes of the numbers "1" to "9" are normal sizes, with the vertical distance dimension being approximately one-third the vertical distance dimension of the left variable display area (middle variable display area, right variable display area) and the horizontal distance dimension being approximately one-half the horizontal distance dimension of the left variable display area (middle variable display area, right variable display area). The numbers "1" to "9" are formed in special fonts (originally created special fonts) that are different from existing fonts (generally distributed fonts) such as regular script, Gothic, and Ming style.

When the decorative pattern change performance (changing display) begins, the decorative pattern displayed as still changes from an opaque state to a semi-transparent state while gradually increasing its speed from a low speed, changing at high speed. This allows the background image placed behind the decorative pattern to be viewed through the semi-transparent decorative pattern that is changing at high speed. The decorative pattern slows down just before stopping and changes from a semi-transparent state back to an opaque state, appearing as a temporary stop, or as a stopped display (temporarily displayed, then stopped). When the decorative pattern is displayed as a temporary stop, it moves slowly up and down in small movements. Multiple types of background images are available, and the background images are switched as appropriate.

In addition, on the upper right side of the display screen 7a, there is provided a sub-variable area KSZ having a horizontally long rectangular shape in which small left decorative patterns, small middle decorative patterns, and small right decorative patterns corresponding to the left decorative pattern 8L, middle decorative pattern 8C, and right decorative pattern 8R, respectively, are displayed in a variable manner (variable display). The background image of the sub-variable area KSZ is fixed to a single color (for example, a dark color (dark-dark color series) or a color close to a dark color (for example, deep green) and does not change to other colors. The sub-variable area KSZ is located on the upper right side of the display screen 7a, so it overlaps with the right variable display area which is the variable area of the right decorative pattern 8R. However, by arranging the sub-variable area KSZ to be the foremost side, the right decorative pattern 8R is positioned behind the sub-variable area KSZ and the sub-variable area KSZ is not obstructed by the right decorative pattern 8R. Even if another performance image appears, the other performance image is positioned behind the sub-variable area KSZ and is not obstructed by the other performance image. In other words, the visibility of the content displayed in the sub-variable area KSZ is not hindered by the right decorative pattern 8R or other performance images.

The small decorative pattern is a number pattern, and is in a font (e.g., Mincho) different from the font of the left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R, and is unified in another monochrome color (e.g., a light color (yellow or white)) that contrasts highly with the monochrome color of the background image of the sub-variable area KSZ, and will not change to another color. The small decorative pattern is positioned in front of the background image of the sub-variable area KSZ and is always opaque; even when it starts to change, it will not become translucent, and will not disappear from the display screen 7a.

Unlike the left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R, the small decorative pattern is not changed (displayed) by the reel spinning, but by the number pattern appearing one after the other in the same size and opaque state in the same display position.

When the variable performance (variable display) of the left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R starts, a variable performance (variable display) of the small left decorative pattern, the small middle decorative pattern, and the small right decorative pattern starts in the sub-variable area KSZ, and the left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R are all displayed frozen, while the small left decorative pattern, the small middle decorative pattern, and the small right decorative pattern are also all displayed frozen.

Even if any one or more of the left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R are temporarily stopped (for example, the left decorative pattern 8L and the right decorative pattern 8R are temporarily stopped as the same pattern and a reach is formed), the small left decorative pattern, the small middle decorative pattern, and the small right decorative pattern are all in a state of continuing the variable performance (variable display). Specifically, even if the left decorative pattern 8L is temporarily stopped, the variable performance (variable display) of the small left decorative pattern continues, and even if the right decorative pattern 8R is temporarily stopped, the variable performance (variable display) of the small right decorative pattern continues, and at the same time that the left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R are all stopped, the small left decorative pattern, the small middle decorative pattern, and the small right decorative pattern are all stopped.

In addition, when the left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R are all stopped and displayed, and the same pattern is not aligned and a miss occurs, the small left decorative pattern, the small middle decorative pattern, and the small right decorative pattern may be the same as the left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R, or may be completely different patterns. Specifically, for example, when the left decorative pattern 8L is stopped and displayed with the number "1", the middle decorative pattern 8C is stopped and displayed with the number "2", and the right decorative pattern 8R is stopped and displayed with the number "3", the small left decorative pattern may be stopped and displayed with the number "1", the small middle decorative pattern may be stopped and displayed with the number "2", and the small right decorative pattern may be stopped and displayed with the number "3", or the small left decorative pattern may be stopped and displayed with the number "5", the small middle decorative pattern may be stopped and displayed with the number "6", and the small right decorative pattern may be stopped and displayed with the number "7".

In contrast, when the left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R are all stopped and displayed, and they line up to form the same pattern, resulting in a win, the small left decorative pattern, the small middle decorative pattern, and the small right decorative pattern will line up to form the same pattern as the left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R.

The variable icons 9C corresponding to the left decorative pattern 8L, middle decorative pattern 8C, and right decorative pattern 8R that are currently fluctuating as the first special chart reservation is consumed are displayed (placed) at the variable display position 9Cd (above a rectangular image (pedestal image)) displayed in the lower center of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7. In the area of the display screen 7a to the left of the variable display position 9Cd, a reserve display area is provided for the first special chart reservation. In this reserve display area, reserve icons 9A can be displayed (placed) at each of the four reserve display positions 9Ad (above a rectangular image (pedestal image)), and a maximum of four reserve icons 9A can be stored. The four hold display positions 9Ad are aligned and displayed in a straight line along the bottom edge of the display screen 7a in the following order from the position closest to the variable display position 9Cd toward the left edge of the display screen 7a: first hold display position 9Ad, second hold display position 9Ad, third hold display position 9Ad, and fourth hold display position 9Ad.

The variable display position 9Cd is located in the lower center of the display screen 7a, and the first reserved display position 9Ad is located to the left of the variable display position 9Cd. Therefore, although the variable display position 9Cd and the first reserved display position 9Ad overlap with the middle variable display area that is the variable area of the middle decorative pattern 8C, the middle decorative pattern 8C is located behind the variable display position 9Cd and the first reserved display position 9Ad, and the variable display position 9Cd and the first reserved display position 9Ad are not blocked by the middle decorative pattern 8C. However, when another performance image appears, if the other performance image is located behind the variable display position 9Cd and the first reserved display position 9Ad, the variable display position 9Cd and the first reserved display position 9Ad will not be blocked by the other performance image, but if the other performance image is located in front of the variable display position 9Cd and the first reserved display position 9Ad, the variable display position 9Cd and the first reserved display position 9Ad will be blocked by the other performance image.

Since the second hold display position 9Ad to the fourth hold display position 9Ad are arranged on the lower left side of the display screen 7a, the second hold display position 9Ad to the fourth hold display position 9Ad overlap with the left variable display area which is the variable area of the left decorative pattern 8L, but the left decorative pattern 8L is arranged behind the second hold display position 9Ad to the fourth hold display position 9Ad and the second hold display position 9Ad to the fourth hold display position 9Ad are not blocked by the left decorative pattern 8L. However, when another effect image appears, if the other effect image is arranged behind the second hold display position 9Ad to the fourth hold display position 9Ad, the second hold display position 9Ad to the fourth hold display position 9Ad will not be blocked by the other effect image, but if the other effect image is arranged in front of the second hold display position 9Ad to the fourth hold display position 9Ad, the second hold display position 9Ad to the fourth hold display position 9Ad will be blocked by the other effect image.

In this way, of the first hold display position 9Ad to the fourth hold display position 9Ad, the first hold display position 9Ad overlaps with the middle variable display area which is the variable area of the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the second hold display position 9Ad to the fourth hold display position 9Ad overlap with the left variable display area which is the variable area of the left decorative pattern 8L, so that the hold display area as the first special pattern hold consisting of the first hold display position 9Ad to the fourth hold display position 9Ad is arranged across the middle variable display area and the left variable display area.

Here, a white spherical variable icon 9C is displayed at the variable display position 9Cd, a reserved icon 9A is displayed at the first reserved display position 9Ad to the third reserved display position 9Ad, and no reserved icon 9A is displayed at the fourth reserved display position 9Ad. In other words, there are three reserved icons that have not been consumed and are stored. Note that the following explanation is based on the assumption that no game balls enter the first starting hole 20 and the second starting hole 21 during the decorative pattern variable performance (variable display).

In addition, on the upper left side of the display screen 7a, facing the above-mentioned sub-variable area KSZ (along the same horizontal line), there is provided a reserve number display area HS having a horizontally long rectangular shape in which the first special reserve based on the game ball entering the first starting hole 20 and the second special reserve based on the game ball entering the second starting hole 21 are displayed as reserve numbers (numbers). The vertical distance dimension of the reserve number display area HS and the vertical distance dimension of the sub-variable area KSZ are the same distance dimension, and the horizontal distance dimension of the reserve number display area HS and the horizontal distance dimension of the sub-variable area KSZ are the same distance dimension. In other words, the shape of the reserve number display area HS and the shape of the sub-variable area KSZ are the same shape.

The background image of the reserved number display area HS is fixed as colorless and transparent, unlike the background image of the sub-variable area KSZ, and does not become opaque or change to another color. The reserved number display area HS is positioned on the upper left side of the display screen 7a, so it overlaps with the left variable display area, which is the variable area of the left decorative pattern 8L. However, by positioning the reserved number display area HS as the foremost side, the left decorative pattern 8L is positioned behind the reserved number display area HS and the reserved number display area HS is not obstructed by the left decorative pattern 8L, and even if another performance image appears, the other performance image is positioned behind the reserved number display area HS and the reserved number display area HS is not obstructed by the other performance image.

The number of reserved first special figures (reserved number (number)) and the number of reserved second special figures (reserved number (number)) are in a font (e.g., Gothic) different from the font of the small decorative pattern, and are set to other solid colors that have high contrast with the solid color of the background image of the reserved number display area HS, and do not change to other colors. The number of reserved first special figures (reserved number (number)) and the number of reserved second special figures (reserved number (number)) are arranged on the front side of the background image of the reserved number display area HS and are always opaque, and do not disappear from the display screen 7a. Specifically, the number of reserved first special figures based on the entry of game balls into the first starting hole 20 is always displayed as a blue number on the left side of the reserved number display area HS, and the number of reserved second special figures based on the entry of game balls into the second starting hole 21 is always displayed as a red number on the right side of the reserved number display area HS, spaced apart from each other. These numbers are displayed as the number of reserved balls, so they are easy to distinguish from the various background images and decorative images displayed on the display screen 7a, making them intuitively easy to understand. In other words, the content displayed in the reserved number display area HS is not hindered in visibility by other performance images. The blue color indicating the number of reserved first special symbols is a different color (not the same color) from the bright blue of the even-numbered symbols "2", "4", "6", and "8", but is a similar color. The red color indicating the number of reserved second special symbols is a different color (not the same color) from the bright red of the odd-numbered symbols "1", "3", "5", and "9", excluding the number "7", but is a similar color.

Here, briefly explaining the reserved icon 9A and the variable icon 9C (hereinafter sometimes simply referred to as "icon"), the differences in shape and color represent the differences in the expectation of winning at the time of the lottery corresponding to the icon. For example, of the four icons, namely, the yellow (gold) star icon, the black spherical icon, the smiling sphere icon, and the white spherical icon, the yellow (gold) star icon has the highest expectation of winning, the black spherical icon has the second highest expectation of winning, the smiling sphere icon has the third highest expectation of winning, and the white spherical icon has the lowest expectation of winning. For the smiling sphere icon, the expectation of winning is further set in the order of, for example, blue → green → red → gold (yellow) → seven colors (rainbow (high probability of winning)).

The left decorative pattern 8L, middle decorative pattern 8C, and right decorative pattern 8R all start changing (changing display) at the same time, and as shown in FIG. 122(A), the left decorative pattern 8L starts changing (changing display) from the top to the bottom of the left changing display area, the middle decorative pattern 8C starts changing (changing display) from the top to the bottom of the left changing display area, and the right decorative pattern 8R starts changing (changing display) from the top to the bottom of the left changing display area.

After that, as shown in FIG. 122(B), when the white spherical reserved icon 9A displayed at the first reserved display position 9Ad changes to a yellow (gold) star-shaped reserved icon 9A and the effect button valid/invalid display effect C starts, the effect button image BTN simulating the effect button 63 is displayed in the center of the display screen 7a in an inactive display mode in which it emits dark light (for example, dark gray). In other words, the effect button valid/invalid display effect C starts based on the fact that the white spherical reserved icon 9A displayed at the first reserved display position 9Ad changes to a yellow (gold) star-shaped reserved icon 9A due to the pre-reading effect. Although the effect button image BTN displayed in this inactive display mode is located behind the middle decorative pattern 8C, it is in a state where the effect button image BTN can be seen through the semi-transparent middle decorative pattern 8C during the variable effect (variable display). The effect button 63 can display (appear) on the display screen 7a an ally character CRA that suggests development into a battle effect in which the expectation of a big win is set high in advance. Even if the player presses the effect button 63 during the period when the effect button image BTN is displayed in this dark-light emitting inactive display mode, this will not be reflected in any effect displayed on the display screen 7a. In other words, the period when the effect button image BTN is displayed in the dark-light emitting inactive display mode is a period during which pressing the effect button 63 is disabled. Note that in the effect button valid/invalid display effect C, the display mode in which the effect button image BTN is displayed in the dark-light emitting inactive display mode is referred to as the "invalid operation display mode."

After that, as shown in FIG. 122(C), the left decorative pattern 8L, which changes from the top to the bottom of the left variable display area, is temporarily stopped at the number "1" in the center of the left variable display area and moves slowly up and down in small increments, then the right decorative pattern 8R, which changes from the top to the bottom of the right variable display area, is temporarily stopped at the number "3" in the center of the right variable display area and moves slowly up and down in small increments, and then the middle decorative pattern 8C, which changes from the top to the bottom of the middle variable display area, is temporarily stopped at the number "2" in the center of the middle variable display area, and the left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R are all stopped (confirmed) at the same time and do not line up with the same pattern, resulting in a loss. At this time, the change ends and the variable icon 9C disappears from the display screen 7a. Even here, the effect button image BTN continues to be displayed in the operation disabled display mode.

Then, the hold icon 9A displayed at the first hold display position 9Ad moves to the variable display position 9Cd and becomes the variable icon 9C (at this time, the hold icon 9A displayed at the third hold display position 9Ad moves to the second hold display position 9Ad, and the hold icon 9A displayed at the second hold display position 9Ad moves to the first hold display position 9Ad). As shown in FIG. 122(D), when the variable performance (variable display) using the left decorative pattern 8L, middle decorative pattern 8C and right decorative pattern 8R begins, a performance button image BTN simulating the performance button 63 is displayed in the center of the display screen 7a in an active display mode in which it emits light in a bright color (for example, white light). If the player presses the effect button 63 during the period in which the effect button image BTN is displayed as this brightly emitting active display mode, an ally character CRA may be displayed (appear) on the display screen 7a, suggesting a progression to a battle effect in which the probability of winning a jackpot is preset high, and the effect displayed on the display screen 7a may be affected by the player's pressing of the effect button 63. In other words, the period in which the effect button image BTN is displayed as the brightly emitting active display mode is the period in which pressing the effect button 63 is enabled. Note that in the effect button enabled/disabled display effect C, the display mode in which the effect button image BTN is displayed as the brightly emitting active display mode is called the "operation enabled display mode."

Even when the effect button image BTN switches from the operation-disabled display mode to the operation-enabled display mode, the effect button image BTN continues to be positioned behind the middle decorative pattern 8C as before, but the effect button image BTN can be seen through the semi-transparent middle decorative pattern 8C during the variable effect (variable display).

Then, the left decorative pattern 8L, which changes from top to bottom in the left variable display area, is temporarily stopped at the number "7" in the center of the left variable display area and moves slowly up and down in small increments, and then the right decorative pattern 8R, which changes from top to bottom in the right variable display area, is temporarily stopped at the number "7" in the center of the right variable display area and moves slowly up and down in small increments, and the left decorative pattern 8L and the right decorative pattern 8R become the same pattern (here, the number "7"), forming a reach. At this time, the middle decorative pattern 8C continues to change from top to bottom in the middle variable display area. Note that even here, the performance button image BTN continues to be displayed in the operation-enabled display mode.

When a reach is formed, as shown in FIG. 122(E), the effect button image BTN is displayed in front of the middle decorative pattern 8C, and further, a rapid-hit image MG, which informs the player to repeatedly hit the effect button 63, is displayed in front of the middle decorative pattern 8C in the upper right corner of the effect button image BTN.

After that, as shown in FIG. 122(F), the effect button image BTN, which had been in the operation-enabled display mode, switches back to the operation-disabled display mode. After that, the effect button image BTN is displayed while still in the operation-disabled display mode, and the left decorative pattern 8L and the right decorative pattern 8R disappear from the display screen 7a. At this time, the middle decorative pattern 8C, which is undergoing a variable effect (variable display), also disappears from the display screen 7a, but in the sub-variable area KSZ, the variable effect (variable display) of the small left decorative pattern, small middle decorative pattern, and small right decorative pattern corresponding to the left decorative pattern 8L, middle decorative pattern 8C, and right decorative pattern 8R, respectively, continues without being temporarily stopped.

After that, as shown in FIG. 122(G), an image with a seven-color background image (so-called "rainbow image") is displayed on the display screen 7a, and the second movable role 15 advances (moves) from a stationary state at a retreat position (home position) above the image display device 7 toward the front (front) of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, toward the center position (advance position) of the display screen 7a, and stops for a predetermined time (for example, about 5 seconds). When the second movable role 15 moves to the advance position and stops, the second movable role 15 covers the performance button image BTN, and the lower part of the performance button image BTN can be seen. In other words, the second movable role 15 covers a part of the performance button image BTN. Even if the second movable role 15 covers a part of the performance button image BTN, the performance button image BTN continues to be displayed in an operation-invalidated display mode. Of course, even if the second movable device 15 covers a part of the effect button image BTN, the effect button image BTN remains in the operation-invalid display mode, so there is no effect on the effect displayed on the display screen 7a when the player presses the effect button 63. The rainbow image is a special background image that notifies (suggests) the player that a jackpot has been confirmed.

Then, the second movable device 15 returns from the advanced position to the retreated position (home position), and as shown in FIG. 122 (H), the effect button image BTN continues to be displayed in the operation-invalid display mode. Of course, even if the second movable device 15 returns from the advanced position to the retreated position (home position), the effect button image BTN remains displayed in the operation-invalid display mode, so that the player's pressing of the effect button 63 has no effect on the effect displayed on the display screen 7a.

If the player presses the effect button 63 while the effect button image BTN is displayed while the operation-enabled display mode is still in effect, and the second movable device 15 returns from the advanced position to the retreated position (home position), the left decorative pattern 8L and the right decorative pattern 8R are displayed again in a temporarily stopped state, the effect button image BTN disappears from the display screen 7a, the middle decorative pattern 8C in the variable effect (variable display) is displayed again, and the effect button valid/invalid display effect C ends.

After that, as shown in FIG. 122(I), a winged ally character CRA, unlike the normal ally character CRA, suddenly appears on the display screen 7a in the center (the center of the middle variable display area) and is displayed large, and as shown in FIG. 122(J), the left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R are displayed stopped with the same pattern (here, the number "7"), a jackpot is hit, and then the jackpot game (jackpot presentation) begins. In other words, when a winged ally character CRA, unlike the normal ally character CRA, suddenly appears, a jackpot is displayed as the winning or losing result without the battle presentation starting.

When the big win is confirmed, the variable display position 9Cd, the reserved display position 9Ad and the reserved icon 9A are displayed again on the display screen 7a, and the variable icon 9C is not displayed due to the end of the variable. Although the above-mentioned sub-variable area KSZ is provided on the upper right side of the display screen 7a, even if a part of the wing of the winged ally character CRA in the form of a winged man overlaps with the sub-variable area KSZ in FIG. 122 (I), the sub-variable area KSZ is located on the front side, so that a part of the wing of the winged ally character CRA in the form of a winged man is covered by the sub-variable area KSZ. Also, although the above-mentioned reserved number display area HS is provided on the upper left side of the display screen 7a, even if the winged ally character CRA in the form of a winged man moves and a part of the wing overlaps with the reserved number display area HS, the reserved number display area HS is located on the front side, so that a part of the wing of the winged ally character CRA in the form of a winged man is covered by the reserved number display area HS.

In FIG. 122(I), the winged ally character CRA suddenly appears on the display screen 7a, but is not displayed large. Instead, the ally character CRA is displayed in the center of the display screen 7a (the center of the middle variable display area), and then a battle performance begins. In the battle performance, the ally character CRA appears from the right side of the display screen 7a, the enemy character CRB appears from the left side of the display screen 7a, and the ally character CRA and the enemy character CRB fight in the center of the display screen 7a, and this performance has a high expectation of a big win. In the battle performance, the left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R disappear from the display screen 7a again, and the variable display position 9Cd, the reserved display position 9Ad, the variable icon 9C, and the reserved icon 9A disappear from the display screen 7a. In the battle performance, in the sub-variable area KSZ, the variable performance (variable display) of the small left decorative pattern, small middle decorative pattern, and small right decorative pattern corresponding to the left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R, respectively, continues without being temporarily stopped. Also, in the reserved number display area HS, the first special reserved pattern and the second special reserved pattern are each displayed as reserved numbers (numbers).

In the battle performance, when the ally character CRA wins and the enemy character CRB loses, the left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R are displayed as stopped with the same pattern (here, the number "7"), a jackpot is generated, and then the jackpot game (jackpot performance) starts. When the jackpot is confirmed, the variable display position 9Cd, the reserved display position 9Ad, and the reserved icon 9A are displayed again on the display screen 7a, and the variable icon 9C is not displayed due to the end of the variation. On the other hand, in the battle performance, when the ally character CRA loses and the enemy character CRB wins, the left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R are displayed as stopped (confirmed display) at the same timing, and the left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R do not match with the same pattern (here, the number "7"), resulting in a miss. At this time, the change display position 9Cd, the reserved display position 9Ad, and the reserved icon 9A are displayed again on the display screen 7a, and the reserved icon 9C is not displayed due to the end of the change. Next, the reserved icon 9A displayed at the first reserved display position 9Ad moves to the change display position 9Cd and becomes the reserved icon 9C, and the change performance (change display) of the left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R begins.

In addition, if a rainbow background image is not displayed as the background image of the display screen 7a in FIG. 122(G), and furthermore, if the winged ally character CRA does not suddenly appear and appear large on the display screen 7a in FIG. 122(I), the left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R are displayed stopped (confirmed) at the same timing, and the left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R do not match the same pattern (here, the number "7"), and a miss is displayed as the winning result. In other words, if a rainbow background image is not displayed as the background image of the display screen 7a in FIG. 122(G), and furthermore, if the winged ally character CRA does not appear on the display screen 7a in FIG. 122(I), the game does not progress to a battle performance, and a miss is displayed as the winning result.

In addition, in Fig. 122 (D) and (E), the effect button image BTN is white as a bright light emission, but the expected probability of a win may be indicated in the order of white → blue → red → yellow. In this way, it is possible to increase the variety of effects by brightly emitting the effect button image BTN.

[Example of effect]
Below are examples of the effects of the effect button enable/disable display effect.
[Effect 1]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, for example, in the effect button valid/invalid display effect A of FIG. 120, the effect button valid/invalid display effect B of FIG. 121, and the effect button valid/invalid display effect C of FIG. 122, the game machine 1 is equipped with an effect button 63 (operation means) that can be operated by a player, an image display device 7 (display means) that can display multiple types of images, and a second movable role 15 (movable body) that can be moved to a predetermined position in front of the image display device 7 (display means), and when the second movable role 15 (movable body) moves from the retreated position to the advanced position while the effect button image BTN (operation means image) that imitates the effect button 63 (operation means) is displayed, a first effect (FIG. 120 (F) in the effect button valid/invalid display effect A, FIG. 121 (E) in the effect button valid/invalid display effect B, and FIG. 122 (G) in the effect button valid/invalid display effect C) in which the second movable role 15 (movable body) and the effect button image BTN (operation means image) overlap in the front-to-back direction can be executed. According to this configuration, when the second movable role 15 (movable body) moves from the retreat position to the advance position while the effect button image BTN (operation means image) imitating the effect button 63 (operation means) is displayed, the second movable role 15 (movable body) covers the effect button image BTN (operation means image), and the effect button image BTN (operation means image) that prompts the player to operate the effect button 63 (operation means) is purposely covered by the second movable role 15 (movable body), so that such an effect with an unnatural feel can be provided to the player as a novel effect that has never been seen before. Therefore, it is possible to improve the interest.

[Effect 2]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, for example, the first effect in the effect button valid/invalid display effect A of Figure 120, the effect button valid/invalid display effect B of Figure 121, and the effect button valid/invalid display effect C of Figure 122 (Figure 120 (F) for effect button valid/invalid display effect A, Figure 121 (E) for effect button valid/invalid display effect B, and Figure 122 (G) for effect button valid/invalid display effect C) is such that when the second movable part 15 (movable body) moves from the retracted position to the advanced position, the second movable part 15 (movable body) can cover a part of the effect button image BTN (operation means image). According to this configuration, although the second movable part 15 (movable body) covers the effect button image BTN (operation means image), the entire effect button image BTN (operation means image) is not covered or concealed by the second movable part 15 (movable body), so that a portion of the effect button image BTN (operation means image) can be clearly seen. Therefore, the presence of the effect button image BTN (operation means image) can contribute to making the player look forward to the development of other effects.

[Effect 3]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, for example, the first effects in the effect button valid/invalid display effect A in FIG. 120, the effect button valid/invalid display effect B in FIG. 121, and the effect button valid/invalid display effect C in FIG. 122 (FIG. 120(G) in the effect button valid/invalid display effect A, FIG. 121(F) in the effect button valid/invalid display effect B, and FIG. 122(H) in the effect button valid/invalid display effect C) can continue to display the effect button image BTN (operation means image) even when the second movable role object 15 (movable body) has moved from the advanced position to the retreated position. According to this configuration, the display of the effect button image BTN (operation means image) continues even when the second movable role object 15 (movable body) has moved from the advanced position to the retreated position, making the presence of the effect button image BTN (operation means image) more unnatural.

[Effect 4]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, for example, in the effect button valid/invalid display effect A of FIG. 120, the effect button valid/invalid display effect B of FIG. 121, and the effect button valid/invalid display effect C of FIG. 122, the image display device 7 (display means) can variably display the left decorative pattern 8L, the center decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R (plural decorative patterns) among the multiple types of images, and the first effect (in the effect button valid/invalid display effect A, the display progresses from FIG. 120 (F) to FIG. 120 (G) During the performance, in the performance button enable/disable display performance B during the performance progressing from Figure 121 (D) to Figure 121 (E), and in the performance button enable/disable display performance C during the performance progressing from Figure 122 (F) to Figure 122 (G), the left decorative pattern 8L, middle decorative pattern 8C, and right decorative pattern 8R (multiple decorative patterns) during the changing performance (changing display) can be made hidden before the second movable part 15 (movable body) starts to move from the retracted position to the advanced position. According to this configuration, by the time the second movable role object 15 (movable body) starts moving from the retreat position to the advance position, the left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R (multiple decorative patterns) during the variable performance (variable display) are already hidden, while the display of the performance button image BTN (operation means image) continues, so that the player's line of sight is naturally directed to the performance button image BTN (operation means image) and the performance button image BTN (operation means image) can be focused on. As a result, it is possible to create a performance that creates an awkwardness in which the performance button image BTN (operation means image) stands out while the left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R (multiple decorative patterns) during the variable performance (variable display) are absent.

[Effect 5]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, for example, the first effect in the effect button valid/invalid display effect C in Fig. 122 (Fig. 122 (B) to (H) in the effect button valid/invalid display effect C) can be executed across the variable display (multiple variable displays) of the variable icon 9C by the left decorative pattern 8L, the center decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R (multiple decorative patterns) and the yellow (gold) star-shaped reserved icon 9A displayed at the first reserved display position 9Ad. According to this configuration, the effect button image BTN (operation means image) is displayed across multiple variable displays, making it easier for the player to recognize the presence of the effect button image BTN (operation means image).

[Effect 6]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, for example, the first effect in the effect button valid/invalid display effect B of Figure 121 and the effect button valid/invalid display effect C of Figure 122 (Figure 121 (D) for effect button valid/invalid display effect B, and Figure 122 (F) for effect button valid/invalid display effect C) is configured to switch the display mode of the effect button image BTN (operation means image) from an operation valid display mode suggesting that the operation of the effect button 63 (operation means) is valid to an operation invalid display mode suggesting that the operation of the effect button 63 (operation means) is invalid before the time arrives when the second movable part 15 (movable body) starts to move. According to this configuration, by the time the second movable part 15 (movable body) starts to move from the retracted position to the advanced position, the display mode of the effect button image BTN (operation means image) switches from an operation enabled display mode to an operation disabled display mode, and the effect button image BTN (operation means image) is displayed, which can contribute to giving the player a sense of anticipation that the effect will develop into another effect.

[Modification]
Below, modified examples of the effect button enable/disable display effect are shown.
[Modification 1]
The button valid/invalid display effect A in Fig. 120, the button valid/invalid display effect B in Fig. 121, and the button valid/invalid display effect C in Fig. 122 are performed based on the game ball entering the first starting hole 20. In other words, they are performed in a game state called left-handed hitting. However, they may be performed based on the game ball entering the second starting hole 21. In other words, they may be performed in a game state called right-handed hitting.

[Modification 2]
In the button valid/invalid display performance A in FIG. 120, the button valid/invalid display performance B in FIG. 121, and the button valid/invalid display performance C in FIG. 122, when the second movable role 15 (movable body) moves from the retreat position to the advance position, the second movable role 15 (movable body) can cover a part of the button image BTN (operation means image). In other words, a part of the button image BTN (operation means image) that imitates the button 63 (operation means) that can be operated by the player is covered by the second movable role 15 (movable body) that has advanced to the advance position. However, the select button 68 may be used instead of the button 63. In this case, a select button image (operation means image) that imitates the select button 68 is displayed on the display screen 7a, and the select button image (operation means image) that corresponds to at least one of the up button, right button, down button, and left button of the select button 68 may be covered by the second movable role 15 (movable body) that has advanced to the advance position.

[Modification 3]
In the effect button valid/invalid display effect A in Fig. 120, the effect button valid/invalid display effect B in Fig. 121, and the effect button valid/invalid display effect C in Fig. 122, the effect button image BTN (operation means image) was displayed in the center of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 (display means). However, as long as a part of the effect button image BTN is visible due to the operation of the second movable role object 15 (movable body), it may be displayed in a position other than the center of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 (display means).

[Modification 4]
In the effect button valid/invalid display performance A of Figure 120, the effect button valid/invalid display performance B of Figure 121, and the effect button valid/invalid display performance C of Figure 122, the effect button image BTN may be displayed on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 (display means) so that part of it is covered by an arm member that moves the second movable part 15 (movable body) back and forth between a retracted position and an advanced position.

[Modification 5]
In the effect button valid/invalid display effect A in FIG. 120, the effect button valid/invalid display effect B in FIG. 121, and the effect button valid/invalid display effect C in FIG. 122, the display mode of the effect button image BTN (operation means image) has already been switched from the operation valid display mode to the operation invalid display mode by the time the second movable role object 15 (movable body) starts moving from the retreat position to the advance position. However, when the left decorative pattern 8L is temporarily stopped and then the right decorative pattern 8R is temporarily stopped, the display mode of the effect button image BTN (operation means image) may be switched from the operation valid display mode to the operation invalid display mode. At this time, the variable performance (variable display) of the middle decorative pattern 8C is continued. Also, when the left decorative pattern 8L and the right decorative pattern 8R are temporarily stopped at the same timing, the display mode of the effect button image BTN (operation means image) may be switched from the operation valid display mode to the operation invalid display mode when the left decorative pattern 8L and the right decorative pattern 8R are temporarily stopped. At this time, the changing performance (changing display) of the middle decorative pattern 8C continues.

[Modification 6]
In the button valid/invalid display A in Fig. 120, the button valid/invalid display B in Fig. 121, and the button valid/invalid display C in Fig. 122, the button valid/invalid display B in Fig. 121 is displayed in the center of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 (display means) while the button image BTN (operation means image) is in the operation valid display mode, and when the player presses the performance button 63, an ally character CRA suggesting development to a battle performance in which the probability of winning is set high in advance may be displayed (appear) on the display screen 7a. However, when the player presses the performance button 63, instead of the ally character CRA suggesting development to a battle performance, the second movable role object 15 (movable body) may advance (move) from a state where it is stationary at a retreat position (home position) above the image display device 7 toward the front (front) of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, which is the center position (advance position) of the display screen 7a, and stop for a predetermined time (for example, about 5 seconds). In this case, when the second movable role 15 moves to the advance position and stops, the second movable role 15 covers the performance button image BTN, and the lower part of the performance button image BTN can be seen. In other words, the second movable role 15 covers a part of the performance button image BTN. Even when the second movable role 15 covers a part of the performance button image BTN, the performance button image BTN continues to be displayed in a state in which it is in an operation-enabled display mode. After that, the second movable role 15 returns from the advance position to the retreat position (home position) again, and the performance button image BTN continues to be displayed in a state in which it is in an operation-enabled display mode.

[Modification 7]
In the effect button valid/invalid display effect C in FIG. 122, the effect is performed based on the fact that the white spherical reserved icon 9A displayed at the first reserved display position 9Ad has changed to a yellow (gold) star-shaped reserved icon 9A due to the look-ahead effect, and the reserved icon 9A is displayed at the first reserved display position 9Ad to the third reserved display position 9Ad, and the reserved icon 9A is not displayed at the fourth reserved display position 9Ad, and it is assumed that the game ball does not enter the first start hole 20 and the second start hole 21 during the decorative pattern change effect (change display). However, instead of this, when the game ball enters the first start hole 20 during the change effect (change display) by the change icon 9C and the reserved icon 9A is displayed at the fourth reserved display position 9Ad, the effect button valid/invalid display effect C may be performed based on the fact that the yellow (gold) star-shaped reserved icon 9A is displayed at the fourth reserved display position 9Ad due to the look-ahead effect. In this case, when the effect button valid/invalid display effect C is started during the variable performance (variable display) by the current variable icon 9C, the reserved icon 9A at the fourth reserved display position 9Ad becomes the variable icon 9C, and the effect button valid/invalid display effect C continues to be performed even during the variable performance (variable display). In this way, the effect button valid/invalid display effect C can be performed across multiple variable displays by the left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern (multiple decorative patterns). Note that when the effect button valid/invalid display effect C is started, as shown in FIG. 122 (B) to (E), the effect button image BTN is maintained in a state of being arranged behind the middle decorative pattern 8C until the middle decorative pattern 8C disappears from the display screen 7a, but the effect button image BTN can be seen through the semi-transparent middle decorative pattern 8C during the variable performance (variable display).

[Modification 8]
In the effect button valid/invalid display effect C in FIG. 122, the effect button valid/invalid display effect C was performed based on the change of the white spherical reserved icon 9A displayed at the first reserved display position 9Ad to a yellow (gold) star-shaped reserved icon 9A due to the pre-reading effect. However, regardless of the pre-reading effect, during the variable performance (variable display) by any of the variable icons 9C, the start of the effect button valid/invalid display effect C may be determined, for example, by a lottery process in the sub-control board 90 itself, and the effect button valid/invalid display effect C may be performed over a predetermined number of variable displays (for example, 2 to 10 times). At this time, when the effect button valid/invalid display effect C is started, as shown in FIG. 122 (B) to (E), the effect button image BTN is maintained in a state of being arranged behind the middle decorative pattern 8C until the middle decorative pattern 8C disappears from the display screen 7a, but the effect button image BTN can be seen through the semi-transparent middle decorative pattern 8C during the variable performance (variable display).

[Modification 9]
The button enable/disable display effect A in Figure 120, the button enable/disable display effect B in Figure 121, and the button enable/disable display effect C in Figure 122 may not include some of the effects described, or other effects may be added.

[Example of embodiment]
In the gaming machine of this embodiment, the following aspects can be realized.
◇[Aspect D3-1]
A gaming machine comprising: an operating means operable by a player; a display means capable of displaying a plurality of types of images; and a movable body movable to a predetermined position in front of the display means,
When the movable body moves from a retreated position to an advanced position in a state in which an operation means image imitating the operation means is displayed, a first effect can be executed in which the movable body and the operation means image overlap in a front-rear direction.
A gaming machine characterized by:

◇ [Aspect D3-2]
The gaming machine according to aspect D3-1,
the first effect is that, when the movable body moves from the retreat position to the advance position, the movable body covers a part of the image of the operation means;
A gaming machine characterized by:

◇ [Aspect D3-3]
A gaming machine according to aspect D3-1 or D3-2,
The first effect continues to display the operation means image even when the movable body has moved from the advanced position to the retreated position.
A gaming machine characterized by:

◇ [Aspect D3-4]
A gaming machine according to any one of aspects D3-1 to D3-3,
The display means is capable of variably displaying a plurality of decorative patterns among the plurality of types of images,
The first performance includes making the multiple decorative patterns in a variable display invisible before the movable body starts moving from the retreat position to the advance position.
A gaming machine characterized by:

◇[Aspect D3-5]
The gaming machine according to aspect D3-4,
The first performance can be executed across a plurality of variable displays of the plurality of decorative patterns.
A gaming machine characterized by:

◇[Aspect D3-6]
A gaming machine according to any one of aspects D3-1 to D3-5,
The first performance includes switching a display mode of the image of the operation means from an operation valid display mode suggesting that the operation of the operation means is valid to an operation invalid display mode suggesting that the operation of the operation means is invalid before the time when the movable body starts to move arrives.
A gaming machine characterized by:

The operation automation effects A to C are explained below with reference to Figures 123 to 125. These operation automation effects can be executed during the performance of the changing effect of the performance pattern. That is, the image control microcomputer 101 analyzes the change effect start command received from the sub-control board 90, and if it contains an instruction to execute the operation automation effect, it reads the corresponding image data from the ROM 103 and displays the image on the display screen 7a of the main display device 7.

[Operation automation performance A]
FIG. 123 is a diagram for explaining operation automation presentation A.
In the automated operation presentation A, even if the player does not press the presentation button 63, a predetermined presentation is carried out as if the presentation button 63 had been pressed.

First, as shown in FIG. 123(A), a change start effect is executed. The change start effect is an effect in which the effect pattern starts changing. Here, the effect patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R start changing and are shown changing at high speed. Three hold icons 9A corresponding to the first special pattern hold and the corresponding change icon 9C are displayed at the bottom of the display screen 7a. The three hold icons 9A corresponding to the first special pattern hold correspond to the first memory area, second memory area, and third memory area of the first special pattern hold memory area 85a, respectively.

Next, as shown in FIG. 123(B), a reach formation effect is executed. The reach formation effect is an effect in which the left effect pattern 8L and the right effect pattern 8R temporarily stop at the same numerical value. Here, the left effect pattern 8L and the right effect pattern 8R are both temporarily stopped at "5". The middle effect pattern 8C is fluctuating at high speed. Here too, the three hold icons 9A corresponding to the first special pattern hold and the corresponding fluctuating icon 9C are displayed at the bottom of the display screen 7a.

Next, as shown in FIG. 123(C), an operation promotion effect is executed. The operation promotion effect is an effect that encourages the player to operate the effect button 63. Here, a button image BG that imitates the effect button 63 is displayed, and a message image MG saying "Press" is displayed. Also, here, the press surface (top surface) shown on the button image BG is white (normal color). Note that this button image BG is an image of the effect button 63 in a state where it is not being pressed (a state where the protruding portion is large). If the player operates the effect button 63 in this state, the operation of the effect button 63 will be invalid.

Next, as shown in FIG. 123 (D), an animation image display performance (initial stage) is executed. In the animation image display performance (initial stage), the game ball image KG frames in from the upper right corner of the display screen 7a, and then moves toward the press surface (top surface) shown on the button image BG, as shown by the arrow Y. At this time, a message image MG saying "Press" is also displayed. Note that the game ball image KG is white (normal color).

Next, as shown in FIG. 123(E), an animated image display effect (middle stage) is executed. In the animated image display effect (middle stage), the game ball image KG collides with the press surface (top surface) shown on the button image BG, and then, as shown by arrow Y, bounces off the press surface (top surface) shown on the button image BG and moves toward the upper left of the display screen 7a. Due to the collision of the game ball image KG, the button image BG becomes an image in which the effect button 63 has been pressed (the protruding portion has become smaller). At this time, a message image MG saying "Press" is also displayed.

Next, as shown in FIG. 123 (F), the animation display effect (later stage) is executed. In the animation display effect (later stage), the game ball image KG moves toward the upper left of the display screen 7a and frames out. At this time, the button image BG is an image of the effect button 63 in a state where it is not being pressed (the protruding portion is enlarged). At this time, the message image MG saying "Press" is also displayed.

Next, as shown in FIG. 123(G), a winning confirmation effect is executed. The winning confirmation effect is an effect that notifies the player that a winning has been confirmed. Here, the ally character CRA is displayed in the center of the display screen 7a, and a rainbow-colored effect is displayed around it. This allows the player to know that there has been a winning before the performance pattern is displayed as a repeat number.

Next, as shown in FIG. 123 (H), a confirmed stop effect (win) is executed. A confirmed stop effect (win) is an effect in which the effect patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R all show the same number and stop for a confirmed result. Here, the left effect pattern 8L, the center effect pattern 8C, and the right effect pattern 8R all show a confirmed stop at "5."

Whether or not to execute the animated image display effect (FIG. 123(D)-(F)) after the operation prompting effect (FIG. 123(C)) is stored as setting information in the sub-RAM 94 of the gaming machine 1. This setting information is configured to be set using, for example, the select button 68. Of course, it may also be configured to be set using the effect button 63 or the sword member 65. Specifically, by pressing a specific key on the select button 68, the animated image display effect is switched on and off. In other words, when the animated image display effect is on, the animated image display effect shown in FIG. 123(D)-(F) is executed. The operation automation effect A is an example in which the animated image display effect is on. On the other hand, when the animated image display effect is off, the winning confirmation effect in FIG. 123(G) is executed after the operation prompting effect in FIG. 123(C). In this case, the player's press of the effect button 63 in the operation prompting effect in FIG. 123(C) is valid.

[Operation automation performance B]
Figure 124 is a diagram for explaining operation automation presentation B.
In the operation automation presentation B, even if the player does not press the presentation button 63, a predetermined presentation is performed as if the presentation button 63 had been pressed. As with the above-mentioned operation automation presentation A, this is an example in which the animation display presentation is turned on.

First, as shown in FIG. 124(A), a change start effect is executed. A change start effect is an effect in which the effect pattern starts changing. Here, the effect patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R start changing and are shown changing at high speed. Three hold icons 9A corresponding to the first special pattern hold and the corresponding change icon 9C are displayed at the bottom of the display screen 7a. The three hold icons 9A corresponding to the first special pattern hold correspond to the first storage area, second storage area, and third storage area of the first special pattern hold memory area 85a, respectively. Here, in particular, an image T1 with the word "automatic" is displayed at the top right of the display screen 7a. This indicates that an animation image display effect is executed (the same applies to (B) to (H) below).

Next, as shown in FIG. 124(B), a reach formation effect is executed. The reach formation effect is an effect in which the left effect pattern 8L and the right effect pattern 8R temporarily stop at the same numerical value. Here, the left effect pattern 8L and the right effect pattern 8R are both temporarily stopped at "5". The middle effect pattern 8C is fluctuating at high speed. Here too, the three hold icons 9A corresponding to the first special pattern hold and the corresponding fluctuating icon 9C are displayed at the bottom of the display screen 7a.

Next, as shown in FIG. 124(C), an operation promotion effect is executed. The operation promotion effect is an effect that encourages the player to operate the effect button 63. Here, a button image BG that imitates the effect button 63 is displayed, and a message image MG saying "Press" is displayed. Here, the press surface (top surface) shown on the button image BG is colored red. Note that this button image BG is an image of the effect button 63 in a state where it is not being pressed (a state where the protruding portion is large). If the player operates the effect button 63 in this state, the operation of the effect button 63 will be invalid.

Next, as shown in FIG. 124 (D), an animation image display performance (initial stage) is executed. In the animation image display performance (initial stage), the game ball image KG frames in from the upper right corner of the display screen 7a, and then moves toward the press surface (top surface) shown on the button image BG, as shown by the arrow Y. At this time, a message image MG saying "Press" is also displayed. Note that the game ball image KG is red.

Next, as shown in FIG. 124 (E), an animated image display effect (middle stage) is executed. In the animated image display effect (middle stage), the game ball image KG collides with the press surface (top surface) shown on the button image BG, and then, as shown by arrow Y, bounces off the press surface (top surface) shown on the button image BG and moves toward the upper left of the display screen 7a. Here, the button image BG is in an image in which the effect button 63 has been pressed down (the protruding portion has become smaller) due to the collision of the game ball image KG. At this time, a message image MG saying "Press" is also displayed.

Next, as shown in FIG. 124 (F), the animation display effect (later stage) is executed. In the animation display effect (later stage), the game ball image KG moves toward the upper left of the display screen 7a and frames out. At this time, the button image BG is an image in which the effect button 63 is not pressed (the protruding portion is enlarged).

Next, as shown in FIG. 124 (G), a winning confirmation effect is executed. The winning confirmation effect is an effect that notifies the player that a winning has been confirmed. Here, the ally character CRA is displayed in the center of the display screen 7a, and a rainbow-colored effect is displayed around it. This allows the player to know that there has been a winning before the performance pattern is displayed as a repeat number.

Next, as shown in Figure 124 (H), a confirmed stop effect (win) is executed. A confirmed stop effect (win) is an effect in which the effect patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R all show the same number and stop for a confirmed result. Here, the left effect pattern 8L, the middle effect pattern 8C, and the right effect pattern 8R all show a confirmed stop at "5."

In operation automation presentation B, an image T1 saying "Automatic" is displayed in the upper right corner of the display screen 7a, making it easy to understand that an animation display presentation is being executed. In addition, the press surface (top surface) of the button shown in button image BG and the game ball image KG are "red". The display colors of the press surface of the button and the game ball image are set based on the expected probability of a win. For example, the expected probability of a win increases in the order of white → blue → green → red → gold. Therefore, operation automation presentation B is a presentation with a higher expected probability of a win than operation automation presentation A.

[Operation automation production C]
Figures 125 (A) to (D) are figures for explaining operation automation presentation C.
The operation automation effect C is an example of a case where the animation display effect is turned on by the setting information, but there is a right-hit instruction. When there is a right-hit instruction (high probability high base state, low probability high base state), the animation display effect is not executed.

First, as shown in FIG. 125(A), a change start effect is executed. The change start effect is an effect in which the effect pattern starts changing. Here, the effect patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R start changing and are shown changing at high speed. At the bottom of the display screen 7a, three hold icons 9B corresponding to the second special pattern hold and the corresponding change icon 9C are displayed. The three hold icons 9B corresponding to the second special pattern hold correspond to the first storage area, the second storage area, and the third storage area of the second special pattern hold memory area 85b, respectively. In particular, an image T2 that says "Manual" is displayed at the top right of the display screen 7a. This indicates that the animation display effect is not executed (the same applies to (B) to (D) below). At the bottom left of the display screen 7a, "Right hit" is displayed (the same applies to (B) to (D) below).

Next, as shown in FIG. 125(B), a reach formation effect is executed. The reach formation effect is an effect in which the left effect pattern 8L and the right effect pattern 8R temporarily stop at the same numerical value. Here, the left effect pattern 8L and the right effect pattern 8R are both temporarily stopped at "5". The middle effect pattern 8C is fluctuating at high speed. Here too, the three hold icons 9B corresponding to the first special pattern hold and the corresponding change icon 9C are displayed at the bottom of the display screen 7a.

Next, as shown in FIG. 125(C), an operation promotion effect is executed. The operation promotion effect is an effect that encourages the player to operate the effect button 63. Here, a button image BG that imitates the effect button 63 is displayed, and a message image MG saying "Press" is displayed. Here, the press surface (top surface) shown on the button image BG is white. Note that this button image BG is an image of the effect button 63 in a state where it is not being pressed (where the protruding portion is large).

Next, as shown in Figure 125 (D), a confirmed stop effect (miss) is executed. A confirmed stop effect (miss) is an effect in which the effect patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R are misses and stop confirmed. Here, it is shown that the left effect pattern 8L and the right effect pattern 8R are confirmed to stop at "5", and the center effect pattern 8C is confirmed to stop at "6".

In operation automation presentation C, an image T2 that says "Manual" is displayed in the upper right corner of the display screen 7a, making it easy to understand that the animation display presentation will not be executed.

The above-mentioned animation display effect involves operating the button shown on the button image BG only once when the game ball image KG collides with the button image BG. However, it is also possible to execute animation display effects that correspond to the operation of various effect buttons 63.

Figures 125 (E) and (F) show animation display effects corresponding to a "long press" of effect button 63.
125(E), an animated image display effect (long press 1) is executed. The animated image display effect (long press 1) is an effect in which a large game ball image KG frames in from the upper center of the display screen 7a and moves, as indicated by an arrow Y, toward the pressed surface (upper surface) of the button indicated by the button image BG.

Next, as shown in FIG. 125 (F), an animated image display effect (long press 2) is executed. The animated image display effect (long press 2) is an effect in which a large game ball image KG comes into contact with the press surface (top surface) of the button indicated by the button image BG and stops. At this time, the game ball image KG presses down on the button image BG, causing it to enter a pressed state (a state in which the protruding portion becomes smaller).

Figures 125 (G) and (H) show animation image display effects corresponding to "repeated taps" of the effect button 63.
125(G), an animated image display effect (continuous hit 1) is executed. The animated image display effect (continuous hit 1) is an effect in which a game ball image KG enters the frame from the upper center of the display screen and moves toward the pressed surface (upper surface) of the button indicated by the button image BG, as indicated by an arrow Y.

Next, as shown in FIG. 125 (H), an animated image display effect (repeated hits 2) is executed. The animated image display effect (repeated hits 2) is an effect in which the game ball image KG collides with the press surface (top surface) of the button indicated by the button image BG and bounces off. At this time, due to the collision of the game ball image KG, the button image BG goes into a state in which the effect button 63 is pressed (a state in which the protruding portion becomes smaller).

After this, the animation image display effect of FIG. 125(G) (rapid hit 1) and the animation image display effect of FIG. 125(H) (rapid hit 2) are executed alternately, so that the collision of the game ball image KG with the pressing surface (upper surface) shown on the button image BG is repeated.

[Example of effect]
Below are some examples of the effects of automated operation.
[Effect 1]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, a button image BG that imitates the effect button 63 is displayed on the display screen 7a of the display device 7, and an operation promotion effect is executed to encourage the player to operate the effect button 63 (FIG. 123(C), FIG. 124(C), FIG. 125(C)). After that, an animation image showing the button image BG being operated is displayed on the display screen 7a of the display device 7, and then a winning confirmation effect is executed assuming that the effect button 63 has been operated (FIG. 123(D)(E)(F)(G), FIG. 124(D)(E)(F)(G)). With this configuration, the operation of the effect button 63 can be automated, and the interest of the game can be improved.

In addition, the effect button 63 corresponds to the "operation unit," the button image BG corresponds to the "operation unit image," the operation promotion effect corresponds to the "first effect," the animation image display effect corresponds to the "second effect," and the win confirmation effect corresponds to the "predetermined effect."
The operating portion may be anything that can be operated by the player, and may be a sword member 65 or a select button 68.

[Effect 2]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, the animation display effect is executed based on setting information that is set from the outside. According to this configuration, the player can set the setting information using, for example, the select button 68, thereby automating the operation of the effect button 63, thereby making the game more interesting.

[Effect 3]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, even if the animation display effect is turned on by the setting information, if there is a right hit instruction (high probability high base state, low probability high base state), the animation display effect is not executed. With this configuration, in certain cases, it is possible to have the player operate the effect button 63, which can increase the interest of the game.

[Effect 4]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, when an animated image display effect is executed, an "automatic" image T1 is displayed in the upper right corner of the display screen (FIGS. 124(A)-(H)). This configuration makes it easy to understand that an animated image display effect is being executed, which can increase the interest in the game. The "automatic" image T1 corresponds to the "first mode display indicating that it is within the permitted period."

[Effect 5]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, when the animated image display effect is not executed, a "Manual" image T2 is displayed in the upper right corner of the display screen (FIGS. 125(A)-(D)). This configuration makes it easy to understand that the animated image display effect will not be executed, which can increase the interest in the game. The "Manual" image T2 corresponds to the "second mode display indicating a prohibited period."

[Effect 6]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, when the animation display effect is executed, the operation of the effect button 63 by the player in the operation prompting effect is invalid. According to this configuration, the animation display effect is executed regardless of whether the player operates the effect button 63, and a predetermined effect is executed as if the effect button 63 was operated, so that the interest in the game can be increased.

[Modification]
The following are modified examples of automated operation.
[Modification 1]
In the above, the display colors of both the button image BG and the game ball image KG are changed based on the expectation of a win.
In contrast to this, the display color of at least one of the button image BG and the game ball image KG may be changed based on the expectation of a win. Furthermore, not only the display color but also the display mode of at least one of the button image BG and the game ball image KG may be changed based on the expectation of a win. For example, it is conceivable to display a button image BG that is more luxurious than the button image BG in the normal state.

[Modification 2]
In the above, even if the animation image display effect is turned on by the setting information, if there is a right-hit instruction (high probability high base state, low probability high base state), the animation image display effect will not be executed.
The conditions for not executing the animation image display effect are not limited to this. For example, in one variation, the animation image display effect may be executed for the operation of the effect button 63 in the chance-up effect during the course of the variation, and the animation image display effect may not be executed for the operation of the effect button 63 in the final deciding effect.

[Modification 3]
In the above, images T1 and T2 indicating "automatic" and "manual" were displayed to indicate whether the animation display performance is to be performed or not. Any image may be used to indicate whether such an animation display performance is to be performed or not. It may be "auto" or "manual", or a symbol corresponding to "automatic" or "manual" may be used. Furthermore, since it is only necessary to know whether the animation display performance is to be performed or not, it is possible to display some kind of image only when the animation display performance is to be performed, and not to display that image when the animation display performance is not to be performed.

[Example of embodiment]
In the gaming machine of this embodiment, the following aspects can be realized.
[Aspect D4-1]
A display device for displaying an image;
An operation unit that can be operated by a player,
A gaming machine capable of executing a predetermined performance based on the operation of the operation unit,
a first effect of displaying an operation unit image simulating the operation unit on the display device and encouraging a player to operate the operation unit;
After the first performance, the operation unit image showing the operation state is displayed on the display device, and then a second performance is executed by assuming that the operation unit has been operated.
A gaming machine characterized by:

[Aspect D4-2]
The gaming machine according to aspect D4-1,
Whether or not to execute the second performance is determined based on setting information set from the outside.
A gaming machine characterized by:

[Aspect D4-3]
The gaming machine according to aspect D4-2,
Regardless of the setting information, execution of the second performance is prohibited during a specific period.
A gaming machine characterized by:

[Aspect D4-4]
A gaming machine according to any one of aspects D4-1 to D4-3,
During the permission period during which execution of the second performance is permitted, a first display mode indicating that the permission period is in progress is displayed on the display device.
A gaming machine characterized by:

[Aspect D4-5]
A gaming machine according to any one of aspects D4-1 to D4-4,
During a prohibited period in which execution of the second performance is prohibited, a display in a second mode indicating that the prohibition period is in progress is performed on the display device.
A gaming machine characterized by:

[Aspect D4-6]
A gaming machine according to any one of aspects D4-1 to D4-5,
During the permission period during which execution of the second performance is permitted, operation of the operation unit by the player during the first performance is invalidated.
A gaming machine characterized by:

[Aspect D4-7]
A gaming machine according to any one of aspects D4-1 to D4-6,
After waiting for a predetermined time for the operation of the operation unit by the player in the first performance, if the player does not operate the operation unit, the second performance is executed.
A gaming machine characterized by:

The relationship between the first movable role 14 and the frame movable role 69 will be explained below using FIG. 126, and the double role performances A and B will be explained using FIG. 127 to FIG. 128. In FIG. 127 to FIG. 128, the display performance on the display screen 7a is shown on the left, and the relationship between the frame movable role 69 and the handle 60 is shown on the right. This double role performance is executed during the decorative pattern variation performance when the game state is the normal state, the time-saving state (low probability low base state), or the probability change state (high probability high base state). In other words, the image control microcomputer 101 analyzes the command received from the sub-control board 90, and if an instruction to execute the double role performance is included, it reads the corresponding image data from the ROM 103 and displays the image on the display screen 7a or the sub-display screen 64 of the image display device 7.

Figure 126 is a diagram for explaining the relationship between the first movable role 14 and the frame movable role 69. In Figure 126 (A), the first movable role 14 is explained, and in Figure 126 (B), the frame movable role 69 is explained.
As shown in Figure 126 (A), when the first movable part 14 is movable, it moves to the right (in the direction of the arrow in the figure) from a retracted position located to the left of the display screen 7a to an advanced position.
The first movable part 14 is disposed in the space within the frame (see FIG. 1 ) formed by the gaming machine frame 50 and the gaming board 2 .

The handle 60 of the gaming machine 1 includes a button XMM. This button XMM has a button detection switch (not shown) and is connected to the main control board 80 via the launch control circuit 111 and the payout control board 110. When the button XMM is operated, the main control board 80 transmits the button operation information to the sub-control board 90. This allows a button image imitating the button XMM to be displayed on the display screen 7a, and a button performance can be performed in which a predetermined display performance is performed by operating the button XMM. In the handle 60, the button XMM is operated, for example, by the player pressing the button XMM to the right with the thumb of the right hand. Therefore, the operation direction of the button XMM is to the right as shown in the figure.
As shown in Fig. 126 (B), the movable frame part 69 is composed of a left member and a right member, and when the movable frame part 69 is located in the retracted position, the left member of the movable frame part 69 and the right member of the movable frame part 69 are arranged to sandwich the handle 60. That is, the left member of the movable frame part 69 is arranged on an extension line of the opposite direction (left direction) of the operation direction of the button XMM (right direction) with respect to the button XMM, and the right member of the movable frame part 69 is arranged on an extension line of the operation direction of the button XMM (right direction) with respect to the button XMM.
When the movable frame part 69 is moved to the advanced position, it moves in the direction toward the handle 60 as shown in Fig. 126 (B). Specifically, the movable frame part 69 arranged on the left side of the handle 60 moves to the right, and the movable frame part 69 arranged on the right side of the handle 60 moves to the left. Fig. 49 shows the state when the movable frame part 69 is moved to the advanced position.
When a player holds the handle 60 and touches the button XMM, the frame movable device 69 moves to the advanced position and the frame movable device 69 comes into contact with the player's hand.
In addition, when the first movable part 14 and the frame movable part 69 perform a movable performance, the operation direction of the button XMM, the movement direction of the first movable part 14, and the movement direction of the frame movable part 69 on the left side of the handle 60 are the same.

[Double role production A]
FIG. 127 is a diagram for explaining the double role performance A. The double role performance A in FIG. 127 is a performance with the same variation of the special symbol. In the double role performance A, as shown in the left diagram of FIG. 127(A), first, a decorative symbol variation performance is performed. In this decorative symbol variation performance, the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R vary vertically in the approximate center of the display screen 7a, and the ally character CRA is displayed on the left side of the display screen 7a. In addition, in the decorative symbol variation performance, as shown in the right diagram of FIG. 127(A), the player holds the handle 60, and the frame movable role 69 is located in the retreat position. In this state, the frame movable role 69 is not in contact with the player. In addition, in the decorative symbol special variation performance, the reserved icon 9A and the variation icon 9C are displayed on the display screen 7a, but are omitted in the figure.

Next, as shown in the left diagram of FIG. 127(B), a reach effect is performed. In this reach effect, the decorative symbols 8L and 8R are temporarily stopped at 7 symbols, a reach state in which the decorative symbol 8C fluctuates at high speed is formed in the upper left of the display screen 7a, and the ally character CRA is displayed large approximately in the center of the display screen 7a. In addition, in the reach effect, as shown in the right diagram of FIG. 127(B), the player holds the handle 60 and the movable frame device 69 is in the retreated position. When the reach effect is reached, the player may frequently operate the button XMM in the operating direction (to the right) in the hope of the appearance of a chance-up effect. In this state, the movable frame device 69 is not in contact with the player.

Next, as shown in the left diagram of FIG. 127(C), a movable role effect is performed. In this movable role effect, the first movable role 14 moves on the display screen 7a from the retreat position on the left side of the display screen 7a to the advance position. In the movable role effect, as shown in the right diagram of FIG. 127(C), when the player is holding the handle 60, or when the player is holding the handle 60 and operating the button XMM, the frame movable role 69 moves from the retreat position to the advance position, that is, the frame movable role 69 of the left member moves to the right, and the frame movable role 69 of the right member moves to the left. As a result, the frame movable role 69 of the left member comes into contact with the thumb of the player's hand, and the frame movable role 69 of the right member comes into contact with the little finger of the player's hand.

Next, as shown in the left side of FIG. 127(D), a big win symbol display performance is performed. In this big win symbol display performance, the first movable role 14 moves from the advance position to the retreat position (the first movable role 14 moves to the left), and the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R appear from the right side of the display screen 7a so as to be linked, and the big win symbol of 7 symbols is displayed approximately in the center of the display screen 7a. This linkage performance is the same as the role linkage performances A to C as shown in FIG. 66 to 68. In addition, in the big win symbol display performance, as shown in the right side of FIG. 127(D), the frame movable role 69 moves from the advance position to the retreat position, and contact with the player is released.
After that, a big win game performance is performed.

[Double role production B]
FIG. 128 is a diagram for explaining the double role performance B. The double role performance B in FIG. 128 is a performance with the same variation of the special symbol. In the double role performance B, as shown in the left diagram of FIG. 128(A), first, a decorative symbol variation performance is performed. In this decorative symbol variation performance, the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R vary vertically in the approximate center of the display screen 7a, and the ally character CRA is displayed on the left side of the display screen 7a. In addition, in the decorative symbol variation performance, as shown in the right diagram of FIG. 128(A), the player holds the handle 60, and the frame movable role 69 is located in the retreat position. In this state, the frame movable role 69 is not in contact with the player. In addition, in the decorative symbol special variation performance, the reserved icon 9A and the variation icon 9C are displayed on the display screen 7a, but are omitted in the figure.

Next, as shown in the left diagram of FIG. 128(B), a reach effect is performed. In this reach effect, the decorative symbols 8L and 8R are temporarily stopped at 7 symbols, a reach state in which the decorative symbol 8C fluctuates at high speed is formed in the upper left of the display screen 7a, and the ally character CRA is displayed large approximately in the center of the display screen 7a. In addition, in the reach effect, as shown in the right diagram of FIG. 128(B), the player holds the handle 60 and the movable frame device 69 is in the retreated position. When the reach effect is reached, the player may frequently operate the button XMM in the operating direction (to the right) in the hope of the appearance of a chance-up effect. In this state, the movable frame device 69 is not in contact with the player.

Next, as shown in the left diagram of FIG. 128(C), a button operation explanation performance A is performed. In this button operation explanation performance A, a button operation explanation image XM1 is displayed in approximately the center of the display screen 7a. This button operation explanation image XM1 is an image that represents the entire gaming machine 1 and suggests the positional relationship of the button XMM to the gaming machine 1. In detail, the button operation explanation image XM1 suggests that the button XMM is located at the position of the tip of the arrow (the position indicated as "here"). The button operation explanation image XM1 also suggests the positional relationship between the first movable role 14 and the button XMM. The button operation explanation image XM1 may be a diagram that represents the entire actual gaming machine 1. In addition, in the button operation explanation performance A, as shown in the right diagram of FIG. 128(C), the player is holding the handle 60, and the frame movable role 69 is located in the retracted position. In this state, the frame movable role 69 is not in contact with the player.

Next, as shown in the left diagram of FIG. 128(D), a button operation explanation performance B is performed. In this button operation explanation performance B, a button operation explanation image XM2 is displayed in the approximate center of the display screen 7a. This button operation explanation image XM2 shows the periphery of the handle 60 and the movable frame device 69, and is an image that suggests the positional relationship between the handle 60 and the movable frame device 69. Furthermore, the button operation explanation image XM2 is an image in which the words "PUSH ARROW" and an arrow are written, shows the position of the button XMM on the handle 60, and encourages the player to press (operate) the button XMM. In other words, the button operation explanation image XM2 is a diagram that shows a zoom-up of the actual button XMM. Also, in the button operation explanation performance B, as shown in the right diagram of FIG. 128(D), the player is holding the handle 60, and the movable frame device 69 is in the retreat position. The player, viewing the button operation explanation image XM2, presses the button XMM while gripping the handle 60. In this state, the movable frame device 69 is not in contact with the player.

Next, as shown in the left diagram of FIG. 128(E), a movable role effect is performed. In this movable role effect, the first movable role 14 moves on the display screen 7a from the retreat position on the left side of the display screen 7a to the advance position. In the movable role effect, as shown in the right diagram of FIG. 128(E), when the player is holding the handle 60, or when the player is holding the handle 60 and operating the button XMM, the frame movable role 69 moves from the retreat position to the advance position, that is, the frame movable role 69 of the left member moves to the right, and the frame movable role 69 of the right member moves to the left. As a result, the frame movable role 69 of the left member comes into contact with the thumb of the player's hand, and the frame movable role 69 of the right member comes into contact with the little finger of the player's hand.

Next, as shown in the left diagram of FIG. 128(F), a big win symbol display performance is performed. In this big win symbol display performance, the first movable role 14 moves from the advance position to the retreat position (the first movable role 14 moves to the left), and the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R appear from the right side of the display screen 7a so as to be linked, and the big win symbol of 7 symbols is displayed approximately in the center of the display screen 7a. This linkage performance is the same as the role linkage performances A to C as shown in FIG. 66 to 68. In addition, in the big win symbol display performance, as shown in the right diagram of FIG. 128(F), the frame movable role 69 moves from the advance position to the retreat position, and contact with the player is released.
After that, a big win game performance is performed.

[Modification]
In the above double role performances A to B, the frame movable role 69 is used as the movable role outside the frame in the role moving performance, but this is not limited to this. For example, the left and right members of the frame movable role 69 may be arranged to sandwich the performance button 63.
In the above double role performances A to B, in the role movement performance, the movement of the first movable role 14 and the frame movable role 69 was performed regardless of the player's operation of button XMM, but this is not limited to this, and for example, the movement of the first movable role 14 and the frame movable role 69 may be performed based on the player's operation of button XMM.

[Example of effect]
In the above double role performances A to B, when the first movable role 14 arranged inside the frame is moving, the frame movable role 69 arranged outside the frame is moved. With this configuration, a role performance with a sense of depth can be performed instantly using the first movable role 14 and the frame movable role 69, and a surprise can be given to the player efficiently in a short time. As a result, the interest of the game can be improved.

In the above double role performances A to B, the movement of the first movable role 14 placed inside the frame and the movement of the frame movable role 69 placed outside the frame each indicate a jackpot, and after a role movement performance in which the first movable role 14 and the frame movable role 69 are moved, a jackpot pattern display performance is performed. With this configuration, the first movable role 14 and the frame movable role 69 are used to perform a role performance that gives an instantaneous sense of depth, followed by the jackpot pattern display performance that the player has been waiting for, giving the player a great sense of bliss. As a result, the interest in the game can be improved.

In the above double role performances A to B, the first movable role 14 arranged inside the frame and the frame movable role 69 arranged outside the frame both move in a specified direction (to the right in this embodiment) during the role movement performance. With this configuration, the two movable roles can create a sense of unity in addition to a sense of depth. As a result, the interest in the game can be improved.

In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, the button XMM provided on the handle 60 is used for display effects and effects using movable parts, and can be operated by the player applying force in the operation direction (rightward). In addition, the frame movable part 69 (left side member) is arranged on an extension line in the opposite direction (leftward) of the operation direction (rightward) with respect to the button XMM. In the above double part effects A to B, when a part moving effect is performed while the player is touching the button XMM to apply force in the operation direction, the frame movable part 69 moves in the movement direction, so that the frame movable part 69 touches the player. With this configuration, the player can enjoy the effect physically in addition to visually, and the part moving effect can be maximized. As a result, the interest in the game can be improved.

In the above double role performances A to B, the movable frame role 69 is made of a softer material than the first movable role 14. This configuration helps prevent injury to the player and encourages the player to enjoy the game. As a result, the interest of the game can be improved.

In the gaming machine of this embodiment, the following aspects can be realized.
[Aspect XM-1]
A gaming machine that includes a gaming machine frame, a gaming board, a first movable member, and a second movable member, and is capable of executing a plurality of effects,
The first movable member is disposed in a frame space formed by the game machine frame and the game board,
the second movable member is disposed in an outer-frame space outside the inner-frame space,
A first effect may be performed as one of the plurality of effects,
A second effect may be performed as one of the multiple effects,
The first effect is an effect of moving the first movable member,
The second effect is an effect of moving the second movable member,
A combination effect including the first effect and the second effect may be performed,
In the combination effect, when the first effect is being performed, the second effect is performed.
A gaming machine characterized by:
[Aspect XM-2]
The gaming machine according to aspect XM-1,
Further comprising a display means capable of executing a display performance,
A third effect may be performed as one of the multiple effects,
The third effect is an effect of displaying a big win symbol on the display means,
The combination effect may include the third effect,
In the combination performance, the movement of the first movable member in the first performance and the movement of the second movable member in the second performance each indicate a big win, and the third performance is performed after the first performance and the second performance are performed.
A gaming machine characterized by:
[Aspect XM-3]
The gaming machine according to aspect XM-2,
In the combination performance, the first movable member in the first performance and the second movable member in the second performance both move in a predetermined direction.
A gaming machine characterized by:
[Aspect XM-4]
The gaming machine according to aspect XM-3,
The game device further includes an operating means that can be operated by a player applying a force in a predetermined operating direction,
the second movable member is disposed on an extension line of the operating means in a direction opposite to the operating direction,
In the combination presentation, when the player touches the operation means to apply a force in the operation direction, the second movable member moves in the predetermined direction, so that the second movable member touches the player.
A gaming machine characterized by:
[Aspect XM-5]
A gaming machine according to aspect XM-4,
The second movable member in the second performance is made of a material softer than the first movable member in the first performance.
A gaming machine characterized by:

The movable member contact effects A to C are explained below using Figures 129 to 131. In Figures 129 to 131, the various movable props arranged around the front (forward) of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 have been omitted for ease of viewing.

This movable member contact performance can be executed during the movement. That is, various commands received from the sub-control board 90 are analyzed, and when an instruction to execute a movable member contact performance is included, the lamp control board 107 analyzes various commands received from the sub-control board 90 (for example, a command including an instruction to execute a movable member contact performance), and operates the first movable role 14 and the second movable role 15 provided on the game board 2, operates the protrusion 603 (described later) provided on the handle 60 located at the lower end on the right side of the front frame 53, and operates the frame movable bodies 69a to 69d (described later) provided on the front frame 53 above, below, left, and right of the handle 60 located at the lower end on the right side of the front frame 53. The lamp control board 107 controls the electrical drive source (e.g., a motor) that operates the first movable part 14 and the electrical drive source (e.g., a motor) that operates the second movable part 15, and controls the electrical drive source (e.g., a motor or solenoid) that operates the protrusion 603 and the electrical drive source (e.g., a motor or solenoid) that operates the frame movable bodies 69a to 69d.

Here, we will first explain movable part contact effect A, then movable part contact effect B, and finally movable part contact effect C.

[Movable member contact effect A]
The movable member contact performance A will be described with reference to Fig. 129. Fig. 129 is a diagram for explaining the movable member contact performance A. The movable member contact performance A can be executed during the movement. Note that in Fig. 129, the touch switch 114 that detects the contact of the handle 60, the firing volume 115 that detects the amount of rotation of the handle 60, etc. are omitted.

First, the handle 60 is located at the lower end of the right side of the front frame 53, as described above. As shown in Figures 129 (A) and (B), the handle 60 is configured by a resin ring-shaped operating lever 601 that is rotatably arranged between a resin cylindrical handle base (not shown) and a resin spherical shell-shaped front cover 602. The operating lever 601 is formed to have an annular shape, and finger hook protrusions 601a are integrally formed at three points on its outer periphery. By placing the player's fingers between the spaces between these three finger hook protrusions 601a, the player can easily rotate the operating lever 601 by hooking the fingers on the finger hook protrusions 601a when rotating the operating lever 601.

The handle base is made of colored opaque (e.g., white) resin, the operating lever 601 is made of colored opaque (e.g., black, or it may be the same color as the handle base (e.g., white)) resin, the front cover 602 is made of colorless, transparent resin, an inner lens is provided at the front-most side housed inside the front cover 602, and a decorative board on which multiple full-color LEDs are mounted is provided behind the inner lens. The inner lens and decorative board have through holes formed in the parts corresponding to the ribs 602aa described below that are larger than the size of the outer circumference of the ribs 602aa. In other words, the inner lens and decorative board are designed not to interfere with the protrusions 603 described below.

The inner lens diffracts the light from the multiple full-color LEDs mounted on the decorative board, making it difficult to notice the presence of the decorative board located behind the inner lens. Therefore, even when all of the multiple full-color LEDs mounted on the decorative board are turned off, these multiple full-color LEDs are difficult to see through the inner lens. The inner lens may be transparent or translucent.

When the multiple full-color LEDs mounted on the decorative board emit light, the light refracted by the inner lens is emitted through the front cover 602, causing the front cover 602 to emit light. This makes it possible to change the light emission mode of the front cover 602 depending on the light emission mode of the multiple full-color LEDs mounted on the decorative board.

To operate the handle 60, the player first grips the handle 60 with the palm of his/her hand, wrapping it around the front of the handle, and places his/her fingers between the three finger hook protrusions 601a. Then, as the player rotates the operating lever 601 clockwise, increasing the amount of rotation, the launch strength of the game ball increases, and the launcher 112 launches the game ball toward the game area 3 partitioned and formed on the game board 2 with a game ball launch strength that corresponds to the amount of rotation. When the player releases the rotation of the operating lever 601 clockwise, the force of a return spring (not shown) provided on the handle 60 causes it to rotate counterclockwise, and the launch strength of the game ball decreases. Furthermore, if the player continues to loosen the rotation of the operating lever 601 in the clockwise direction, or if the player removes his or her hand from the handle 60, the biasing force of a return spring (not shown) attached to the handle 60 will return the operating lever 601 to its original position, and the launch of the game balls will stop.

The spherical surface of the spherical shell-shaped front cover 602 has multiple long holes 602a (12 long holes 602a in this example) arranged radially on the same circumference with their longitudinal direction facing the outer periphery. Ribs 602aa are formed on the periphery of the long holes 602a, protruding a predetermined distance (approximately 10 mm in this embodiment) toward the inner space (depth direction) of the front cover 602, and the inner periphery of the long holes 602a is smoothly formed.

In the internal space between the front cover 602 and the operating lever 601, protrusions 603 that move in the front-rear direction from the internal space of the front cover 602 along the inner circumferential surface of the long hole 602a are provided in correspondence with each long hole 602a, and further, a front-rear movement mechanism 604 is provided that has an electric drive source (e.g., a motor or a solenoid) that moves the protrusions 603 in the front-rear direction along the inner circumferential surface of the long hole 602a. In addition to the electric drive source, the front-rear movement mechanism 604 is composed of, for example, a reducer that slows down the rotation of the motor when the electric drive source is a motor, a motion conversion mechanism that converts the rotational motion of the motor (rotational motion with the rotation of the motor slowed down) into the linear motion of the protrusions 603, a mechanism for transmitting the linear motion of the solenoid plunger to the linear motion of the protrusions 603 when the electric drive source is a solenoid, and in addition to these mechanisms, a return spring, a contact spring that constitutes an overload prevention mechanism, and the like.

The protrusion 603 can move back and forth between a retracted position (home position) and an advanced position, and is formed of a colored, opaque (e.g., red) flexible material. As described above, the front cover 602 is provided with an inner lens formed in a predetermined shape at the front-most side housed inside the front cover 602, and a decorative board on which multiple full-color LEDs are mounted is provided behind the inner lens. However, even if the light emission mode of the front cover 602 can be changed depending on the light emission mode of the multiple full-color LEDs mounted on the decorative board, the light emission mode of the protrusion 603 cannot be changed because the protrusion 603 is colored and opaque (e.g., red).

The multiple full-color LEDs mounted on the decorative board start emitting light in a predetermined light-emitting mode before the protrusion 603 is activated (the timing when the operation mode of the protrusion 603 starts) (for example, 5 seconds before the protrusion 603 is activated (the timing when the operation mode of the protrusion 603 starts)), and continue emitting light over a period until the operation of the protrusion 603 ends. In other words, the multiple full-color LEDs mounted on the decorative board are a performance that notifies the operation of the protrusion 603. The predetermined light-emitting modes are blue light, green light, red light, purple light, golden (yellow) light, and rainbow light, and the expectation of a win increases in the order of blue light → green light → red light → purple light → golden (yellow) light → rainbow light (high probability of winning). In other words, the expectation of a win due to the operation of the protrusion 603 can be suggested by the light-emitting mode of the multiple full-color LEDs mounted on the decorative board housed inside the front cover 602.

When the protrusion 603 is located in the retreat position (home position), the front surface of the protrusion 603 is located on the inner circumferential surface of the long hole 602a, and specifically, the protrusion 603 is retracted from the spherical surface of the front cover 602 by a predetermined distance dimension (half the length of the rib 602aa (5 mm) in this embodiment) in the depth direction (Fig. 129 (A)). In other words, even if the player holds the handle 60 in such a way that the palm of the hand is wrapped around the front of the handle 60 and the player's fingers are placed between the three finger hook protrusions 601a, the protrusion 603 is located in the retreat position (home position), so that the player's palm does not come into contact with the tip of the protrusion 603 at all. Note that the biasing force of the return spring is applied to the protrusion 603, so that when the gaming machine 1 is not powered on or when a power outage occurs during play and the power is cut off, the biasing force of the return spring returns the protrusion 603 to the retreat position (home position).

On the other hand, when the protrusion 603 is located in the advanced position, the protrusion 603 protrudes from the spherical surface of the front cover 602 by a predetermined distance (up to about 10 mm in this embodiment) through the long hole 602a (FIG. 129(B)). In other words, when the player holds the handle 60 with his palm wrapped around the front of the handle and places his fingers between the three finger hook protrusions 601a, the protrusion 603 is located in the advanced position, so that the player's palm comes into contact with the tip of the protrusion 603. Note that even if the player's palm comes into contact with the tip of the protrusion 603, an overload prevention mechanism is provided in the forward/backward movement mechanism 604 to prevent the tip of the protrusion 603 in contact with the player's palm from moving any further (not to pull the player's palm away from the handle 60) so that the forward/backward movement mechanism 604 does not become overloaded. This overload prevention mechanism is mainly composed of a contact spring.

The operation modes of the protrusions 603 are as follows: Operation mode 1 in which all of the protrusions 603 move simultaneously from the retracted position (home position) to the advanced position and then simultaneously return to the retracted position (home position); Operation mode 2 in which one protrusion 603 moves in a clockwise order from the retracted position (home position) to the advanced position and then returns to the retracted position (home position); Operation mode 3 in which one protrusion 603 moves in a counterclockwise order from the retracted position (home position) to the advanced position and then returns to the retracted position (home position). Examples of such operation modes include operation mode 3, which is a return operation mode; operation mode 4, in which the protrusions 603 are moved from the retracted position (home position) to the advanced position so that a wave is formed from three to four protrusions 603 and the wave propagates in a clockwise order, and then returned to the retracted position (home position); and operation mode 5, in which the protrusions 603 are moved from the retracted position (home position) to the advanced position so that a wave is formed from three to four protrusions 603 and the wave propagates in a counterclockwise order, and then returned to the retracted position (home position).

Next, the timing at which the protrusion 603 is activated (the timing at which the operation mode of the protrusion 603 is started) will be described. First, on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, the left decorative pattern of the stereoscopic image, the center decorative pattern of the stereoscopic image, and the right decorative pattern of the stereoscopic image are displayed from the top to the bottom of the display screen 7a in a display mode in which the reels are rotated, and the decorative pattern (pattern: number "1" to number "9") variation performance (variable display) is started. When the decorative pattern variation performance (variable display) is started, the decorative pattern displayed as stopped moves slowly (at a low speed) once in a display mode in which it floats a predetermined distance (for example, about 5 mm) toward the top (in other words, after the display mode in which the decorative pattern is about to move due to the stop display of the decorative pattern being released), and then changes from an opaque state to a semi-transparent state while gradually increasing the speed from a low speed toward the bottom, and becomes a display mode in which it varies at high speed. As a result, the background image arranged behind the decorative pattern can be viewed through the semi-transparent decorative pattern that is varying at high speed. The decorative symbols slow down just before stopping, changing from a semi-transparent state to an opaque state again, and are displayed temporarily stopped or stopped (temporarily stopped, then stopped). When the decorative symbols are displayed temporarily stopped, they are displayed in a manner that moves slowly in small vertical movements. There are multiple background images for displaying the changing decorative symbols, and one of the multiple background images is selected.

The variable icons 9C corresponding to the left decorative pattern, middle decorative pattern, and right decorative pattern currently changing as the first special pattern reservation is consumed are displayed (placed) at the variable display position 9Cd (above the rectangular image (pedestal image)) displayed in the lower center of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7. In the area of the display screen 7a to the left of the variable display position 9Cd, a reservation display area is provided as the first special pattern reservation. In this reservation display area, reservation icons 9A can be displayed (placed) at four reservation display positions 9Ad (above the rectangular image (pedestal image)), and a maximum of four reservation icons 9A can be stocked. The four reservation display positions 9Ad are aligned and displayed in a straight line along the bottom edge of the display screen 7a in the order of the first reservation display position 9Ad, the second reservation display position 9Ad, the third reservation display position 9Ad, and the fourth reservation display position 9Ad, from the position closest to the variable display position 9Cd toward the left edge of the display screen 7a.

Note that both the variable display position 9Cd and the hold display position 9Ad have a rectangular shape, but they may be the same size or different sizes. In this embodiment, both the variable display position 9Cd and the hold display position 9Ad have a rectangular shape, and the size (horizontal distance dimension) of the variable display position 9Cd is larger than the size (horizontal distance dimension) of the hold display position 9Ad (both vertical distance dimensions are the same). This is to make it possible to distinguish between the variable icon 9C displayed in the variable display position 9Cd and the hold icon 9A displayed in the hold display position 9Ad.

Here, a yellow (gold) star-shaped variable icon 9C is displayed at the variable display position 9Cd, a white spherical reserved icon 9A is displayed at the first reserved display position 9Ad, and no reserved icons are displayed at the second reserved display position 9Ad to the fourth reserved display position 9Ad. In other words, there is only one white spherical reserved icon that has not been consumed and is stored. Note that the following explanation is based on the assumption that no game balls will enter the first starting hole 20 or the second starting hole 21 from this point on.

To briefly explain the reserved icon 9A and the variable icon 9C (hereinafter sometimes simply referred to as "icons"), the differences in shape and color represent the differences in the likelihood of winning at the time of the lottery that corresponds to the icon. For example, of the six icons, namely, the yellow (gold) star icon, the black spherical icon, the smiling spherical icon, the red spherical icon, the blue spherical icon, and the white spherical icon, the yellow (gold) star icon has the highest likelihood of winning, the black spherical icon has the second highest likelihood of winning, the smiling spherical icon has the third highest likelihood of winning, the red spherical icon has the fourth highest likelihood of winning, the blue spherical icon has the fifth highest likelihood of winning, and the white spherical icon has the lowest likelihood of winning.

The decorative pattern variation performance (variable display) begins, then the left decorative pattern is temporarily stopped at the number "2" and changes to a display mode that moves slowly up and down in small increments, the right decorative pattern is temporarily stopped at the number "2" and changes to a display mode that moves slowly up and down in small increments, and the left decorative pattern and the right decorative pattern become the same pattern (here, the number "2") and a reach is formed. At this time, the middle decorative pattern continues to vary (variable display).

Next, when the battle performance begins, an ally character appears from the right side of the display screen 7a, an enemy character appears from the left side of the display screen 7a, and an performance unfolds in which the ally character and enemy character fight in the center of the display screen 7a. The battle performance is a performance in which the expectation of a big win is set high in advance. In the battle performance, the left decorative pattern, the center decorative pattern, and the right decorative pattern disappear from the display screen 7a.

In a battle performance, when an ally character wins and an enemy character loses, the left decorative pattern, middle decorative pattern, and right decorative pattern are displayed as stopped (confirmed display) with the same pattern, a win occurs, and then a win game (win performance) begins. When a win is confirmed, the change ends and the variable icon 9C disappears from the display screen 7a. In contrast, in a battle performance, when an ally character loses and an enemy character wins, the left decorative pattern, middle decorative pattern, and right decorative pattern are displayed as stopped (confirmed display) at the same time, and the left decorative pattern, middle decorative pattern, and right decorative pattern do not line up with the same pattern, resulting in a miss. At this time, the change ends and the variable icon 9C disappears from the display screen 7a.

When an ally character and an enemy character are fighting in a battle effect, and the ally character moves to the right side of the display screen 7a and the enemy character moves to the left side of the display screen 7a, a button image imitating the effect button 63 is displayed toward the bottom center of the display screen 7a, and a message image saying "Press repeatedly!" is displayed above the button image to encourage the player to press the effect button 63. The message images MG increase in the order of "Press!" → "Press repeatedly!" → "Long press!". Note that an arrow image pointing downward is also displayed on the display screen 7a between the button image and the message image, and the arrow image moves back and forth repeatedly up and down, so that the arrow image can also encourage the player to press the effect button 63 (press the pressing part of the effect button 63 downward). The button images, message images, and arrow images are configured to disappear from the display screen 7a when the player presses the effect button 63, or to disappear from the display screen 7a after a predetermined period of time (e.g., 5 seconds) has elapsed if the player does not press the effect button 63.

When the effect button 63 is pressed, or when a predetermined period of time has elapsed without the effect button 63 being pressed, as shown in FIG. 129 (C), a first premium background image having seven colors as the background image (so-called "first rainbow background image") is displayed on the display screen 7a, the friendly characters and enemy characters disappear from the display screen 7a, and the second movable device 15 provided on the game board 2 advances (moves) from a stationary state in a retracted position (home position) above the image display device 7 toward the front (forward) of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, which is the center position (advance position) of the display screen 7a, and stops for a predetermined time (for example, approximately 5 seconds). After a predetermined time has passed, the second movable device 15 returns from the advanced position to the retreated position (home position), a special victory background image that conveys the victory of the friendly character is displayed on the display screen 7a as a background image, an enemy character appears (is displayed) in the center of the display screen 7a, the enemy character gets smaller as it moves away in the depth direction, flashes of light are emitted in all directions from the center of the display screen 7a, and an explosion is displayed. After that, a special winning background image that conveys the win is displayed on the display screen 7a as a background image, and the left decorative pattern, center decorative pattern, and right decorative pattern are stopped and displayed with the same pattern (here, the number "2").

When the second movable device 15 provided on the game board 2 starts to advance (move) from a stationary state in a retracted position (home position) above the image display device 7 toward the front (forward) of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, which is the center position of the display screen 7a (advance position), operation mode 1 of the protrusion 603 provided on the handle 60 located at the lower end on the right side of the front frame 53 is started in conjunction with this.

In other words, the operation of the second movable device 15 on the game board 2 and the operation of the protrusion 603 on the handle 60 located at the lower end of the right side of the front frame 53 are linked together and each begins to move.

Specifically, in conjunction with the second movable part 15 starting to advance (move) from a stationary state in a retracted position (home position) above the image display device 7 toward the front (front) of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 and toward the center position (advance position) of the display screen 7a, the protrusion 603 starts to advance (move) from the retracted position (home position) toward the advance position, and in conjunction with the second movable part 15 stopping at the advance position for a predetermined time (for example, about 5 seconds), the protrusion 603 stops at the advance position for a predetermined time, and after the predetermined time has elapsed, the second movable part 15 starts to return from the advance position to the retracted position (home position), and in conjunction with the protrusion 603 starting to return from the advance position to the retracted position (home position).

Here, the operation mode of the protruding portion 603 is operation mode 1, but of course, any of operation modes 2 to 5 may be used. In this case, the sub-control board 90 determines the operation mode of the protruding portion 603. In operation modes 2 to 5, the second movable part 15 advances (moves) from a stationary state in a retracted position (home position) above the image display device 7 toward the front (forward) of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 and toward the center position (advance position) of the display screen 7a, and then continues for the second movable part operation period until it returns to the retracted position (home position) again.

Specifically, in operation mode 2 of the protrusion 603, during the second movable body role operation period, one protrusion 603 moves in a clockwise order from the retracted position (home position) to the advanced position and then returns to the retracted position (home position) again in a continuous manner. When the second movable body role operation period has elapsed, all of the protrusions 603 return to the retracted position (home position). In operation mode 3 of the protrusion 603, during the second movable body role operation period, one protrusion 603 moves in a counterclockwise order from the retracted position (home position) to the advanced position and then returns to the retracted position (home position) again in a continuous manner. When the second movable body role operation period has elapsed, all of the protrusions 603 return to the retracted position (home position). In operation mode 4 of the protrusion 603, During the period, the protrusions 603 move from the retracted position (home position) to the advanced position so that the three to four protrusions 603 form a wave shape and the waves propagate in a clockwise order, and then continuously return to the retracted position (home position). When the second movable body role operation period has elapsed, all of the protrusions 603 return to the retracted position (home position). In operation mode 5 of the protrusions 603, during the second movable body role operation period, the protrusions 603 move from the retracted position (home position) to the advanced position so that the three to four protrusions 603 form a wave shape and the waves propagate in a counterclockwise order, and then continuously return to the retracted position (home position). When the second movable body role operation period has elapsed, all of the protrusions 603 return to the retracted position (home position).

As shown in FIG. 129(C), when the effect button 63 is pressed, or when a predetermined period of time has elapsed without the effect button 63 being pressed, a first premium background image having seven colors (so-called "first rainbow background image") is displayed on the display screen 7a as a background image, and operation mode 1 of the protrusion 603 provided on the handle 60 located at the lower end on the right side of the front frame 53 is started in conjunction with the operation of the second movable part 15 provided on the game board 2. However, instead of the second movable part 15, operation mode 1 of the protrusion 603 may be started in conjunction with the operation of the first movable part 14 provided on the game board 2.

Specifically, when the effect button 63 is pressed, or when a predetermined period of time has elapsed without the effect button 63 being pressed, as shown in FIG. 129 (D), a second premier background image (so-called a "second rainbow background image") different from the first premier background image having seven colors as a background image is displayed on the display screen 7a, the friendly characters and enemy characters disappear from the display screen 7a, and the first movable gadget 14 provided on the game board 2 advances (moves) from a stationary state in a retreat position (home position) to the left of the image display device 7 toward the front (forward) of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 and toward the center position (advance position) of the display screen 7a, and then repeatedly moves back and forth in short bursts in the left and right directions at the center position (advance position) for a predetermined period of time (for example, approximately 5 seconds). After a predetermined time has passed, the first movable gadget 14 returns from the advanced position to the retreated position (home position), a special victory background image that conveys the victory of the friendly character is displayed on the display screen 7a as a background image, an enemy character appears (is displayed) in the center of the display screen 7a, the enemy character gets smaller as it moves away in the depth direction, flashes of light are emitted in all directions from the center of the display screen 7a, and an explosion is displayed. After that, a special winning background image that conveys a win is displayed on the display screen 7a as a background image, and the left decorative pattern, center decorative pattern, and right decorative pattern are stopped and displayed with the same pattern (here, the number "2").

When the first movable device 14 on the game board 2 starts to advance (move) from a stationary state in a retreated position (home position) to the left of the image display device 7 toward the front (forward) of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, which is the center position of the display screen 7a (advance position), operation mode 1 of the protrusion 603 on the handle 60 located at the lower end on the right side of the front frame 53 is started.

In other words, the operation of the first movable device 14 on the game board 2 and the operation of the protrusion 603 on the handle 60 located at the lower end of the right side of the front frame 53 are linked together and each begins to move.

Specifically, when the first movable part 14 starts moving (advancing) from a stationary state in a retracted position (home position) to the left of the image display device 7 toward the front (front) of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 toward the central position (advance position) of the display screen 7a, the protrusion 603 starts moving (advancing) from the retracted position (home position) toward the advance position, and when the first movable part 14 moves back and forth repeatedly in short increments in the left and right directions at the central position (advance position) for a predetermined time (for example, about 5 seconds), the protrusion 603 stops at the advance position for a predetermined time, and when the predetermined time has elapsed, the first movable part 14 starts moving back again from the advance position to the retracted position (home position), and when the first movable part 14 starts moving back again from the advance position to the retracted position (home position), the protrusion 603 starts moving back again from the advance position to the retracted position (home position).

Here, the operation mode of the protruding portion 603 is operation mode 1, but of course, any of operation modes 2 to 5 may be used. In this case, the sub-control board 90 determines the operation mode of the protruding portion 603. In operation modes 2 to 5, the first movable part 14 advances (moves) from a stationary state in a retracted position (home position) to the left of the image display device 7 toward the front (forward) of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 and toward the center position (advance position) of the display screen 7a, and then continues for the first movable part operation period until it returns to the retracted position (home position).

Specifically, in operation mode 2 of the protrusion 603, during the first movable body role operation period, one protrusion 603 moves in a clockwise order from the retracted position (home position) to the advanced position and then returns to the retracted position (home position) again in a continuous manner. When the first movable body role operation period has elapsed, all of the protrusions 603 return to the retracted position (home position). In operation mode 3 of the protrusion 603, during the first movable body role operation period, one protrusion 603 moves in a counterclockwise order from the retracted position (home position) to the advanced position and then returns to the retracted position (home position) again in a continuous manner. When the first movable body role operation period has elapsed, all of the protrusions 603 return to the retracted position (home position). In operation mode 4 of the protrusion 603, During the period, the protrusions 603 move from the retracted position (home position) to the advanced position so that the three to four protrusions 603 form a wave shape and the waves propagate in a clockwise order, and then continuously return to the retracted position (home position). When the first movable body role operation period has elapsed, all of the protrusions 603 return to the retracted position (home position). In operation mode 5 of the protrusions 603, during the first movable body role operation period, the protrusions 603 move from the retracted position (home position) to the advanced position so that the three to four protrusions 603 form a wave shape and the waves propagate in a counterclockwise order, and then continuously return to the retracted position (home position). When the first movable body role operation period has elapsed, all of the protrusions 603 return to the retracted position (home position).

In the above embodiment, the biasing force of the return spring acts on the protrusion 603 as described above. When the gaming machine 1 is not powered on, or when a power outage occurs during play and the power is cut off, the biasing force of the return spring returns the protrusion 603 to the retreat position (home position). Also, the protrusion 603 does not protrude to the advance position unless the protrusion 603 is activated (when the operation mode of the protrusion 603 is started). Therefore, even if a player who is about to start playing or a staff member such as a store clerk at the game center disinfects the handle 60 with alcohol, the protrusion 603 cannot be disinfected with alcohol. Therefore, in this embodiment, when a demo performance for waiting for customers is being performed, the protrusion 603 is in a state of protruding to the advance position, and when the demo performance for waiting for customers is finished, the protrusion 603 is returned to the retreat position (home position). When a demo performance for waiting customers is being performed and the protruding portion 603 is in the advanced position, if a player or an attendant such as an arcade clerk touches the handle 60, the protruding portion 603 is returned to the retreated position (home position) after a predetermined period of time (for example, about 5 seconds to allow the protruding portion 603 to be disinfected with alcohol) has elapsed since the player or the attendant touched the handle 60.

In the above embodiment, the protrusion 603 is biased by the return spring as described above, so that when the gaming machine 1 is not powered on or when a power outage occurs during play and the power is cut off, the protrusion 603 is returned to the retreated position (home position) by the biasing force of the return spring. However, when the gaming machine 1 is not powered on or when a power outage occurs during play and the power is cut off, the protrusion 603 may be moved to the advanced position by the biasing force of the return spring. In this way, for example, a staff member or other attendant at the game arcade can disinfect the protrusion 603 with alcohol before opening or after closing the game arcade, since the protrusion 603 can be moved to the advanced position and protruded when the gaming machine 1 is not powered on (when the gaming machine 1 is powered off).

[Movable part contact effect B]
Next, the movable member contact performance B will be described with reference to Fig. 130. Fig. 130 is a diagram for explaining the movable member contact performance B. The movable member contact performance B can be executed during the movement. Note that in Fig. 130, the touch switch 114 that detects the contact of the handle 60, the launch volume 115 that detects the amount of rotation of the handle 60, etc. are omitted.

First, the handle 60 is located at the lower end of the right side of the front frame 53, as described above. As shown in Figures 130 (A) and (B), the handle 60 is configured by a resin ring-shaped operating lever 601 that is rotatably arranged between a resin cylindrical handle base (not shown) and a resin spherical shell-shaped front cover 602. The operating lever 601 is formed to have an annular shape, and finger hook protrusions 601a are integrally formed at three points on its outer periphery. By placing the player's fingers between the spaces between these three finger hook protrusions 601a, the player can easily rotate the operating lever 601 by hooking the fingers on the finger hook protrusions 601a when rotating the operating lever 601.

The handle base is made of colored opaque (e.g., white) resin, the operating lever 601 is made of colored opaque (e.g., black, or it may be the same color as the handle base (e.g., white)) resin, the front cover 602 is made of colorless, transparent resin, an inner lens is provided at the front-most side housed inside the front cover 602, and a decorative board on which multiple full-color LEDs are mounted is provided behind the inner lens. The inner lens and decorative board have through holes formed in the parts corresponding to the ribs 602aa described below that are larger than the size of the outer circumference of the ribs 602aa. In other words, the inner lens and decorative board are designed not to interfere with the protrusions 603 described below.

The inner lens diffracts the light from the multiple full-color LEDs mounted on the decorative board, making it difficult to notice the presence of the decorative board located behind the inner lens. Therefore, even when all of the multiple full-color LEDs mounted on the decorative board are turned off, these multiple full-color LEDs are difficult to see through the inner lens. The inner lens may be transparent or translucent.

When the multiple full-color LEDs mounted on the decorative board emit light, the light refracted by the inner lens is emitted through the front cover 602, causing the front cover 602 to emit light. This makes it possible to change the light emission mode of the front cover 602 depending on the light emission mode of the multiple full-color LEDs mounted on the decorative board.

To operate the handle 60, the player first grips the handle 60 with the palm of his/her hand, wrapping it around the front of the handle, and places his/her fingers between the three finger hook protrusions 601a. Then, as the player rotates the operating lever 601 clockwise, increasing the amount of rotation, the launch strength of the game ball increases, and the launcher 112 launches the game ball toward the game area 3 partitioned and formed on the game board 2 with a game ball launch strength that corresponds to the amount of rotation. When the player releases the rotation of the operating lever 601 clockwise, the force of a return spring (not shown) attached to the handle 60 causes it to rotate counterclockwise, and the launch strength of the game ball decreases. Furthermore, if the player continues to loosen the rotation of the operating lever 601 in the clockwise direction, or if the player removes his or her hand from the handle 60, the biasing force of a return spring (not shown) attached to the handle 60 will return the operating lever 601 to its original position, and the launch of the game balls will stop.

A large hole 602a is provided in the center of the spherical surface of the spherical shell-shaped front cover 602. A rib 602aa is formed on the periphery of the hole 602a, protruding a predetermined distance (approximately 10 mm in this embodiment) toward the inner space (depth direction) of the front cover 602, and the inner periphery of the hole 602a is formed smoothly.

In the internal space between the front cover 602 and the operating lever 601, a protrusion 603 that moves from the internal space of the front cover 602 in the front-rear direction along the inner circumferential surface of the hole 602a is provided, and further, a forward-rear movement mechanism 604 is provided that has an electric drive source (e.g., a motor or a solenoid) that moves the protrusion 603 in the front-rear direction along the inner circumferential surface of the hole 602a. In addition to the electric drive source, the forward-rear movement mechanism 604 is composed of, for example, a reducer that slows down the rotation of the motor when the electric drive source is a motor, a motion conversion mechanism that converts the rotational motion of the motor (rotational motion with the rotation of the motor slowed down) into the linear motion of the protrusion 603, a mechanism for transmitting the linear motion of the solenoid plunger to the linear motion of the protrusion 603 when the electric drive source is a solenoid, and further, in addition to these mechanisms, a return spring, a contact spring that constitutes an overload prevention mechanism, and the like.

The protrusion 603 can move back and forth between a retracted position (home position) and an advanced position, and is formed of a colored, opaque (e.g., red) flexible material. As described above, the front cover 602 is provided with an inner lens formed in a predetermined shape at the front-most side housed inside the front cover 602, and a decorative board on which multiple full-color LEDs are mounted is provided behind the inner lens. However, even if the light emission mode of the front cover 602 can be changed depending on the light emission mode of the multiple full-color LEDs mounted on the decorative board, the light emission mode of the protrusion 603 cannot be changed because the protrusion 603 is colored and opaque (e.g., red).

The multiple full-color LEDs mounted on the decorative board start emitting light in a predetermined light-emitting mode before the protrusion 603 is activated (the timing when the operation mode of the protrusion 603 starts) (for example, 5 seconds before the protrusion 603 is activated (the timing when the operation mode of the protrusion 603 starts)), and continue emitting light over a period until the operation of the protrusion 603 ends. In other words, the multiple full-color LEDs mounted on the decorative board are a performance that notifies the operation of the protrusion 603. The predetermined light-emitting modes are blue light, green light, red light, purple light, golden (yellow) light, and rainbow light, and the expectation of a win increases in the order of blue light → green light → red light → purple light → golden (yellow) light → rainbow light (high probability of winning). In other words, the expectation of a win due to the operation of the protrusion 603 can be suggested by the light-emitting mode of the multiple full-color LEDs mounted on the decorative board housed inside the front cover 602.

When the protrusion 603 is located in the retreat position (home position), the front surface of the protrusion 603 is located on the inner circumferential surface of the hole 602a, and specifically, the protrusion 603 is retracted from the spherical surface of the front cover 602 by a predetermined distance (half the length of the rib 602aa (5 mm) in this embodiment) in the depth direction (Fig. 130 (A)). In other words, even if the player holds the handle 60 from the front and places his/her fingers between the three finger hook protrusions 601a, the protrusion 603 is located in the retreat position (home position), so that the player's palm does not come into contact with the tip of the protrusion 603 at all. Note that the biasing force of the return spring is applied to the protrusion 603, so that when the gaming machine 1 is not powered on or when a power outage occurs during play and the power is cut off, the biasing force of the return spring returns the protrusion 603 to the retreat position (home position).

On the other hand, when the protrusion 603 is located in the advanced position, the protrusion 603 protrudes through the hole 602a from the spherical surface of the front cover 602 by a predetermined distance (up to about 10 mm in this embodiment) (FIG. 130(B)). In other words, when the player holds the handle 60 with his palm wrapped around the front of the handle and places his fingers between the three finger hook protrusions 601a, the protrusion 603 is located in the advanced position, so that the player's palm comes into contact with the tip of the protrusion 603. Note that even if the player's palm comes into contact with the tip of the protrusion 603, an overload prevention mechanism is provided in the forward/backward movement mechanism 604 to prevent the tip of the protrusion 603 in contact with the player's palm from moving any further (it does not try to pull the player's palm away from the handle 60) so that the forward/backward movement mechanism 604 does not become overloaded. This overload prevention mechanism is mainly composed of a contact spring.

The operation mode of the protrusion 603 is that the protrusion 603 moves from a retracted position (home position) to an advanced position and then returns to the retracted position (home position). By utilizing this operation mode, for example, it is possible to realize an operation in which the protrusion 603 maintains a protruding state in the advanced position for a predetermined period of time, to realize an operation in which the protrusion 603 intermittently protrudes to the advanced position, or to realize an operation in which the protrusion 603 continuously protrudes to the advanced position and retracts to the retracted position (home position) like a piston movement.

Next, the timing at which the protrusion 603 is activated (the timing at which the operation mode of the protrusion 603 is started) will be described. First, on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, the left decorative pattern of the stereoscopic image, the center decorative pattern of the stereoscopic image, and the right decorative pattern of the stereoscopic image are displayed from the top to the bottom of the display screen 7a in a display mode in which the reels are rotated, and the decorative pattern (pattern: number "1" to number "9") variation performance (variable display) is started. When the decorative pattern variation performance (variable display) is started, the decorative pattern displayed as stopped moves slowly (at a low speed) once in a display mode in which it floats a predetermined distance (for example, about 5 mm) toward the top (in other words, after the display mode in which the decorative pattern is about to move due to the stop display of the decorative pattern being released), and then changes from an opaque state to a semi-transparent state while gradually increasing the speed from a low speed toward the bottom, and becomes a display mode in which it varies at high speed. As a result, the background image arranged behind the decorative pattern can be viewed through the semi-transparent decorative pattern that is varying at high speed. The decorative symbols slow down just before stopping, changing from a semi-transparent state to an opaque state again, and are displayed temporarily stopped or stopped (temporarily stopped, then stopped). When the decorative symbols are displayed temporarily stopped, they are displayed in a manner that moves slowly in small vertical movements. There are multiple background images for displaying the changing decorative symbols, and one of the multiple background images is selected.

The variable icons 9C corresponding to the left decorative pattern, middle decorative pattern, and right decorative pattern currently changing as the first special pattern reservation is consumed are displayed (placed) at the variable display position 9Cd (above the rectangular image (pedestal image)) displayed in the lower center of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7. In the area of the display screen 7a to the left of the variable display position 9Cd, a reservation display area is provided as the first special pattern reservation. In this reservation display area, reservation icons 9A can be displayed (placed) at four reservation display positions 9Ad (above the rectangular image (pedestal image)), and a maximum of four reservation icons 9A can be stocked. The four reservation display positions 9Ad are aligned and displayed in a straight line along the bottom edge of the display screen 7a in the order of the first reservation display position 9Ad, the second reservation display position 9Ad, the third reservation display position 9Ad, and the fourth reservation display position 9Ad, from the position closest to the variable display position 9Cd toward the left edge of the display screen 7a.

Note that both the variable display position 9Cd and the hold display position 9Ad have a rectangular shape, but they may be the same size or different sizes. In this embodiment, both the variable display position 9Cd and the hold display position 9Ad have a rectangular shape, and the size (horizontal distance dimension) of the variable display position 9Cd is larger than the size (horizontal distance dimension) of the hold display position 9Ad (both vertical distance dimensions are the same). This is to make it possible to distinguish between the variable icon 9C displayed in the variable display position 9Cd and the hold icon 9A displayed in the hold display position 9Ad.

Here, a yellow (gold) star-shaped variable icon 9C is displayed at the variable display position 9Cd, a white spherical reserved icon 9A is displayed at the first reserved display position 9Ad, and no reserved icons are displayed at the second reserved display position 9Ad to the fourth reserved display position 9Ad. In other words, there is only one white spherical reserved icon that has not been consumed and is stored. Note that the following explanation is based on the assumption that no game balls will enter the first starting hole 20 or the second starting hole 21 from this point on.

To briefly explain the reserved icon 9A and the variable icon 9C (hereinafter sometimes simply referred to as "icons"), the differences in shape and color represent the differences in the likelihood of winning at the time of the lottery that corresponds to the icon. For example, of the six icons, namely, the yellow (gold) star icon, the black spherical icon, the smiling spherical icon, the red spherical icon, the blue spherical icon, and the white spherical icon, the yellow (gold) star icon has the highest likelihood of winning, the black spherical icon has the second highest likelihood of winning, the smiling spherical icon has the third highest likelihood of winning, the red spherical icon has the fourth highest likelihood of winning, the blue spherical icon has the fifth highest likelihood of winning, and the white spherical icon has the lowest likelihood of winning.

The decorative pattern variation performance (variable display) begins, then the left decorative pattern is temporarily stopped at the number "3" and changes to a display mode that moves slowly up and down in small increments, the right decorative pattern is temporarily stopped at the number "3" and changes to a display mode that moves slowly up and down in small increments, and the left decorative pattern and the right decorative pattern become the same pattern (here, the number "3") and a reach is formed. At this time, the middle decorative pattern continues to vary (variable display).

Next, when the battle performance begins, an ally character appears from the right side of the display screen 7a, an enemy character appears from the left side of the display screen 7a, and an performance unfolds in which the ally character and enemy character fight in the center of the display screen 7a. The battle performance is a performance in which the expectation of a big win is set high in advance. In the battle performance, the left decorative pattern, the center decorative pattern, and the right decorative pattern disappear from the display screen 7a.

In a battle performance, when an ally character wins and an enemy character loses, the left decorative pattern, middle decorative pattern, and right decorative pattern are displayed as stopped (confirmed display) with the same pattern, a win occurs, and then a win game (win performance) begins. When a win is confirmed, the change ends and the variable icon 9C disappears from the display screen 7a. In contrast, in a battle performance, when an ally character loses and an enemy character wins, the left decorative pattern, middle decorative pattern, and right decorative pattern are displayed as stopped (confirmed display) at the same time, and the left decorative pattern, middle decorative pattern, and right decorative pattern do not line up with the same pattern, resulting in a miss. At this time, the change ends and the variable icon 9C disappears from the display screen 7a.

When an ally character and an enemy character are fighting in a battle effect, and the ally character moves to the right side of the display screen 7a and the enemy character moves to the left side of the display screen 7a, a button image imitating the effect button 63 is displayed toward the bottom center of the display screen 7a, and a message image urging the player to press the effect button 63, "Long press!", is displayed above the button image. The message images MG increase in the order of "Press!" → "Continuously press!" → "Long press!". Note that an arrow image pointing downward is also displayed on the display screen 7a between the button image and the message image, and the arrow image moves back and forth repeatedly up and down, so that the arrow image can also urge the player to press the effect button 63 (press the pressing part of the effect button 63 downward). The button images, message images, and arrow images are configured to disappear from the display screen 7a when the player presses the effect button 63, or to disappear from the display screen 7a after a predetermined period of time (e.g., 5 seconds) has elapsed if the player does not press the effect button 63.

When the effect button 63 is pressed, or when a predetermined period of time has elapsed without the effect button 63 being pressed, as shown in FIG. 130 (C), a first premium background image (so-called "first rainbow background image") having seven colors as the background image is displayed on the display screen 7a, the friendly characters and enemy characters disappear from the display screen 7a, and the second movable part 15 provided on the game board 2 advances (moves) from a stationary state in a retracted position (home position) above the image display device 7 toward the front (forward) of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, which is the center position (advance position) of the display screen 7a, and stops for a predetermined time (for example, approximately 5 seconds). After a predetermined time has passed, the second movable device 15 returns from the advanced position to the retreated position (home position), a special victory background image that conveys the victory of the friendly character is displayed on the display screen 7a as a background image, an enemy character appears (is displayed) in the center of the display screen 7a, the enemy character gets smaller as it moves away in the depth direction, flashes of light are emitted in all directions from the center of the display screen 7a, and an explosion is displayed. After that, a special winning background image that conveys a win is displayed on the display screen 7a as a background image, and the left decorative pattern, center decorative pattern, and right decorative pattern are stopped and displayed with the same pattern (here, the number "3").

When the second movable device 15 on the game board 2 starts to advance (move) from a stationary state in a retracted position (home position) above the image display device 7 toward the front (forward) of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, which is the center position of the display screen 7a (advance position), the protrusion 603 on the handle 60 located at the lower end on the right side of the front frame 53 starts to operate in conjunction with this.

In other words, the operation of the second movable device 15 on the game board 2 and the operation of the protrusion 603 on the handle 60 located at the lower end of the right side of the front frame 53 are linked together and each begins to move.

Specifically, in conjunction with the second movable part 15 starting to advance (move) from a stationary state in a retracted position (home position) above the image display device 7 toward the front (front) of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 and toward the center position (advance position) of the display screen 7a, the protrusion 603 starts to advance (move) from the retracted position (home position) toward the advance position, and in conjunction with the second movable part 15 stopping at the advance position for a predetermined time (for example, about 5 seconds), the protrusion 603 stops at the advance position for a predetermined time, and after the predetermined time has elapsed, the second movable part 15 starts to return from the advance position to the retracted position (home position), and in conjunction with the protrusion 603 starting to return from the advance position to the retracted position (home position).

Here, the operation mode of the protrusion 603 is that the protrusion 603 moves from the retracted position (home position) to the advanced position, stops for a predetermined period of time, and then returns to the retracted position (home position), but of course other operation modes are also possible. In this case, the sub-control board 90 determines the operation mode of the protrusion 603. In other operation modes, the second movable part 15 advances (moves) from a stationary state in the retracted position (home position) above the image display device 7 toward the front (forward) of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 and toward the center position (advanced position) of the display screen 7a, and then continues for the second movable part operation period until it returns to the retracted position (home position) again.

Specifically, during the second movable body role operation period, the protrusion 603 intermittently protrudes to the advanced position (the protrusion 603 does not perform a continuous movement back and forth between the retracted position (home position) and the advanced position, but performs an intermittent movement), and when the second movable body role operation period has elapsed, the protrusion 603 returns to the retracted position (home position), or during the second movable body role operation period, the protrusion 603 continuously protrudes to the advanced position and retracts to the retracted position (home position) like a piston (the protrusion 603 continuously performs a movement back and forth between the retracted position (home position) and the advanced position), and when the second movable body role operation period has elapsed, the protrusion 603 returns to the retracted position (home position).

As shown in FIG. 130(C), when the effect button 63 is pressed or when a predetermined period of time has elapsed without the effect button 63 being pressed, a first premium background image having seven colors (so-called "first rainbow background image") is displayed on the display screen 7a as a background image, and the operation mode of the protrusion 603 provided on the handle 60 located at the lower end on the right side of the front frame 53 (the protrusion 603 moves from the retreat position (home position) to the advance position, stops for a predetermined period of time, and then returns to the retreat position (home position)) is started in conjunction with the operation of the second movable role 15 provided on the game board 2. However, instead of the second movable role 15, the operation mode of the protrusion 603 may be started in conjunction with the operation of the first movable role 14 provided on the game board 2.

Specifically, when the effect button 63 is pressed, or when a predetermined period of time has elapsed without the effect button 63 being pressed, as shown in FIG. 130 (D), a second premier background image (so-called a "second rainbow background image") different from the first premier background image having seven colors as the background image is displayed on the display screen 7a, the friendly characters and enemy characters disappear from the display screen 7a, and the first movable part 14 provided on the game board 2 advances (moves) from a stationary state in a retreat position (home position) to the left of the image display device 7 toward the front (forward) of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 and toward the center position (advance position) of the display screen 7a, and then repeatedly moves back and forth in short bursts in the left and right directions at the center position (advance position) for a predetermined period of time (for example, approximately 5 seconds). After a predetermined time has passed, the first movable device 14 returns from the advanced position to the retreated position (home position), a special victory background image that conveys the victory of the friendly character is displayed on the display screen 7a as a background image, an enemy character appears (is displayed) in the center of the display screen 7a, the enemy character gets smaller as it moves away in the depth direction, flashes of light are emitted in all directions from the center of the display screen 7a, and an explosion is displayed. After that, a special winning background image that conveys a win is displayed on the display screen 7a as a background image, and the left decorative pattern, center decorative pattern, and right decorative pattern are stopped and displayed with the same pattern (here, the number "3").

When the first movable device 14 on the game board 2 starts to advance (move) from a stationary state in a retreated position (home position) to the left of the image display device 7 toward the front (forward) of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, which is the center position of the display screen 7a (advance position), the protrusion 603 on the handle 60 located at the lower end on the right side of the front frame 53 starts to operate in conjunction with this.

In other words, the operation of the first movable device 14 on the game board 2 and the operation of the protrusion 603 on the handle 60 located at the lower end of the right side of the front frame 53 are linked together and each begins to move.

Specifically, when the first movable part 14 starts moving (advancing) from a stationary state in a retracted position (home position) to the left of the image display device 7 toward the front (front) of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 toward the central position (advance position) of the display screen 7a, the protrusion 603 starts moving (advancing) from the retracted position (home position) toward the advance position, and when the first movable part 14 moves back and forth repeatedly in short increments in the left and right directions at the central position (advance position) for a predetermined time (for example, about 5 seconds), the protrusion 603 stops at the advance position for a predetermined time, and when the predetermined time has elapsed, the first movable part 14 starts moving back again from the advance position to the retracted position (home position), and when the first movable part 14 starts moving back again from the advance position to the retracted position (home position), the protrusion 603 starts moving back again from the advance position to the retracted position (home position).

Here, the operation mode of the protrusion 603 is that the protrusion 603 moves from the retracted position (home position) to the advanced position, stops for a predetermined period of time, and then returns to the retracted position (home position), but of course other operation modes are also possible. In this case, the sub-control board 90 determines the operation mode of the protrusion 603. In other operation modes, the first movable part 14 advances (moves) from a stationary state in the retracted position (home position) to the left of the image display device 7 toward the front (forward) of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 and toward the center position (advanced position) of the display screen 7a, and then continues for the first movable part operation period until it returns to the retracted position (home position) again.

Specifically, during the first movable body role operation period, the protrusion 603 performs an intermittent protruding operation (the protrusion 603 performs an intermittent operation of repeatedly moving back and forth between the retracted position (home position) and the advanced position, rather than continuously), and when the first movable body role operation period has elapsed, the protrusion 603 returns to the retracted position (home position), or during the first movable body role operation period, the protrusion 603 performs a continuous protruding and retracting operation like a piston (the protrusion 603 performs a continuous operation of repeatedly moving back and forth between the retracted position (home position) and the advanced position), and when the first movable body role operation period has elapsed, the protrusion 603 returns to the retracted position (home position).

In the above embodiment, the biasing force of the return spring acts on the protrusion 603 as described above. When the gaming machine 1 is not powered on, or when a power outage occurs during play and the power is cut off, the biasing force of the return spring returns the protrusion 603 to the retreat position (home position). Also, the protrusion 603 does not protrude to the advance position unless the protrusion 603 is activated (when the operation mode of the protrusion 603 is started). Therefore, even if a player who is about to start playing or a staff member such as a store clerk at the game center disinfects the handle 60 with alcohol, the protrusion 603 cannot be disinfected with alcohol. Therefore, in this embodiment, when a demo performance for waiting for customers is being performed, the protrusion 603 is in a state of protruding to the advance position, and when the demo performance for waiting for customers is finished, the protrusion 603 is returned to the retreat position (home position). When a demo performance for waiting customers is being performed and the protruding portion 603 is in the advanced position, if a player or an attendant such as an arcade clerk touches the handle 60, the protruding portion 603 is returned to the retreated position (home position) after a predetermined period of time (for example, about 5 seconds to allow the protruding portion 603 to be disinfected with alcohol) has elapsed since the player or the attendant touched the handle 60.

In the above embodiment, the protrusion 603 is biased by the return spring as described above, so that when the gaming machine 1 is not powered on or when a power outage occurs during play and the power is cut off, the protrusion 603 is returned to the retreated position (home position) by the biasing force of the return spring. However, when the gaming machine 1 is not powered on or when a power outage occurs during play and the power is cut off, the protrusion 603 may be moved to the advanced position by the biasing force of the return spring. In this way, for example, a staff member or other attendant at the game arcade can disinfect the protrusion 603 with alcohol before opening or after closing the game arcade, since the protrusion 603 can be moved to the advanced position and protruded when the gaming machine 1 is not powered on (when the gaming machine 1 is powered off).

[Movable member contact effect C]
Next, the movable member contact performance C will be described with reference to Fig. 131. Fig. 131 is a diagram for explaining the movable member contact performance C. The movable member contact performance C can be executed during the movement. Note that in Fig. 131, the touch switch 114 that detects the contact of the handle 60, the firing volume 115 that detects the amount of rotation of the handle 60, etc. are omitted.

First, the handle 60 is located at the lower end of the right side of the front frame 53, as described above. As shown in Figures 131 (A) and (B), the handle 60 is configured by a resin ring-shaped operating lever 601 that is rotatably arranged between a resin cylindrical handle base (not shown) and a resin spherical shell-shaped front cover 602. The operating lever 601 is formed to have an annular shape, and finger hook protrusions 601a are integrally formed at three points on its outer periphery. By placing the player's fingers between the spaces between these three finger hook protrusions 601a, the player can easily rotate the operating lever 601 by hooking the fingers on the finger hook protrusions 601a when rotating the operating lever 601.

The handle base is made of colored opaque resin (e.g., white), the operating lever 601 is made of colored opaque resin (e.g., black, or it may be the same color as the handle base (e.g., white)), and the front cover 602 is made of colorless, transparent resin. An inner lens is provided at the front-most part housed inside the front cover 602, and a decorative board on which multiple full-color LEDs are mounted is provided behind the inner lens.

The inner lens diffracts the light from the multiple full-color LEDs mounted on the decorative board, making it difficult to notice the presence of the decorative board located behind the inner lens. Therefore, even when all of the multiple full-color LEDs mounted on the decorative board are turned off, these multiple full-color LEDs are difficult to see through the inner lens. The inner lens may be transparent or translucent.

When the multiple full-color LEDs mounted on the decorative board emit light, the light refracted by the inner lens is emitted through the front cover 602, causing the front cover 602 to emit light. This makes it possible to change the light emission mode of the front cover 602 depending on the light emission mode of the multiple full-color LEDs mounted on the decorative board.

To operate the handle 60, the player first grips the handle 60 with the palm of his/her hand, wrapping it around the front of the handle, and places his/her fingers between the three finger hook protrusions 601a. Then, as the player rotates the operating lever 601 clockwise, increasing the amount of rotation, the launch strength of the game ball increases, and the launcher 112 launches the game ball toward the game area 3 partitioned and formed on the game board 2 with a game ball launch strength that corresponds to the amount of rotation. When the player releases the rotation of the operating lever 601 clockwise, the force of a return spring (not shown) attached to the handle 60 causes it to rotate counterclockwise, and the launch strength of the game ball decreases. Furthermore, if the player continues to loosen the rotation of the operating lever 601 in the clockwise direction, or if the player removes his or her hand from the handle 60, the operating lever 601 will return to its original position due to the biasing force of a return spring (not shown) attached to the handle 60, and the launch of the game balls will stop.

The front frame 53 is provided with frame movable bodies 69a-69d on the top, bottom, left and right sides of the handle 60 (i.e., around the handle 60). In other words, the frame movable bodies 69a-69d are provided on the front frame 53 separately from the handle 60. The right and left sides of the handle 60 shown in FIG. 1 were provided with frame movable bodies 69 (also called frame movable gadgets 69), which are movable gimmicks, but here the frame movable bodies 69a-69d are formed with a motif of flower petals surrounding the periphery of the handle 60.

In addition to the movable frame bodies 69a-69d formed with a petal motif, the front frame 53 is provided with a rotational movement mechanism 534 equipped with an electric drive source (e.g., a motor or solenoid) that rotates the movable frame bodies 69a-69d to the bud state or the blooming state. In addition to the electric drive source, the rotational movement mechanism 534 is composed of, for example, a reducer that slows down the rotation of the motor when the electric drive source is a motor, a motion conversion mechanism that converts the rotational motion of the motor (rotational motion with the rotation of the motor slowed down) into the rotational motion of the movable frame bodies 69a-69d, a mechanism for transmitting the linear motion of the solenoid plunger to the rotational motion of the movable frame bodies 69a-69d when the electric drive source is a solenoid, and in addition to these mechanisms, a return spring, a contact spring that constitutes an overload prevention mechanism, and the like.

The movable frame bodies 69a to 69d can move back and forth between a retracted position (home position) and an advanced position, and are each formed of a colored, opaque (e.g., red) flexible material. As described above, the front cover 602 is provided with an inner lens formed in a predetermined shape at the front end housed inside the front cover 602, and a decorative board on which multiple full-color LEDs are mounted is provided behind the inner lens. However, even if the light emission mode of the front cover 602 can be changed depending on the light emission mode of the multiple full-color LEDs mounted on the decorative board, the movable frame bodies 69a to 69d are provided on the front frame 53 separately from the handle 60, and furthermore, since the movable frame bodies 69a to 69d are colored and opaque (e.g., red), the light emission mode of the movable frame bodies 69a to 69d cannot be changed.

The multiple full-color LEDs mounted on the decorative board start emitting light in a predetermined light-emitting mode before the frame movable bodies 69a to 69d are activated (the timing when the operating mode of the frame movable bodies 69a to 69d is started) (for example, 5 seconds before the frame movable bodies 69a to 69d are activated (the timing when the operating mode of the frame movable bodies 69a to 69d is started)), and continue emitting light over the period until the operation of the frame movable bodies 69a to 69d ends. In other words, the multiple full-color LEDs mounted on the decorative board are a performance that notifies the operation of the frame movable bodies 69a to 69d. The predetermined light-emitting modes are blue light, green light, red light, purple light, golden (yellow) light, and rainbow light, and the expectation of a win increases in the order of blue light → green light → red light → purple light → golden (yellow) light → rainbow light (high probability of winning). In other words, the expected probability of a win resulting from the operation of the movable frame bodies 69a-69d, which are provided on the front frame 53 separately from the handle 60, can be indicated by the illumination state of multiple full-color LEDs mounted on a decorative board housed inside the front cover 602 of the handle 60.

When the frame movable bodies 69a to 69d are located in the retracted position (home position), the frame movable bodies 69a to 69d are located in the open state (the state shown in FIG. 131(A)). Even if the player holds the handle 60 with the palm of his/her hand enveloping it from the front and places his/her fingers between the three finger hook protrusions 601a, the frame movable bodies 69a to 69d are located in the open state, so that the back of the player's hand and fingers do not come into contact with the inner surfaces of the frame movable bodies 69a to 69d at all. In addition, since the biasing force of a return spring is acting on the frame movable bodies 69a to 69d, when the gaming machine 1 is not powered on, or when a power outage occurs during play and the power is cut off, the biasing force of the return spring returns the frame movable bodies 69a to 69d to the open state.

In contrast, when the frame movable bodies 69a to 69d are positioned in the advanced position, they are positioned in a bud state (the state shown in FIG. 131(B)). When the player holds the handle 60 with the palm of his/her hand enveloping it from the front and places his/her fingers between the three finger hook protrusions 601a, the frame movable bodies 69a to 69d are positioned in a bud state, so that the back of the player's hand and fingers are covered by the frame movable bodies 69a to 69d and come into contact with the inner surfaces of the frame movable bodies 69a to 69d. In order to prevent the rotational movement mechanism 534 from being overloaded even if the back of the player's hand or fingers come into contact with the inner surfaces of the frame movable bodies 69a to 69d, an overload prevention mechanism is provided in the rotational movement mechanism 534 so that the inner surfaces of the frame movable bodies 69a to 69d in contact with the back of the player's hand or fingers do not press further against the back of the player's hand or fingers. This overload prevention mechanism is primarily composed of a contact spring.

The operating modes of the frame movable bodies 69a to 69d include an operating mode in which the frame movable bodies 69a to 69d move from a retracted position (home position) to an advanced position and then return to the retracted position (home position). By using this operating mode, for example, it is possible to realize an operation in which the frame movable bodies 69a to 69d protrude to the advanced position for a predetermined period of time to maintain the bud state, an operation in which the frame movable bodies 69a to 69d protrude to the advanced position intermittently to maintain the bud state, an operation in which the frame movable bodies 69a to 69d protrude to the advanced position continuously to maintain the bud state and retract to the retracted position (home position) to maintain the blooming state, and an operation in which the frame movable bodies 69a to 69d protrude to the advanced position continuously to maintain the bud state and retract to the retracted position (home position) to maintain the blooming state. Of the frame movable bodies 69a to 69d, first the left frame movable body 69c, then the upper frame movable body 69a, the right frame movable body 69d, and then the lower It is possible to realize an operation in which the frame movable bodies 69a to 69d move clockwise from the retracted position (home position) to the advanced position in the order of the left frame movable body 69c, the lower frame movable body 69b, the right frame movable body 69d, and the upper frame movable body 69a, and then all of the frame movable bodies 69a to 69d return to their retracted positions (home positions) again in unison. It is also possible to realize an operation in which the frame movable bodies 69a to 69d move counterclockwise from the retracted position (home position) to the advanced position in the order of the left frame movable body 69c, the lower frame movable body 69b, the right frame movable body 69d, and the upper frame movable body 69a, and then all of the frame movable bodies 69a to 69d return to their retracted positions (home positions) again in unison.

Next, the timing at which the frame movable bodies 69a to 69d are operated (the timing at which the operation mode of the frame movable bodies 69a to 69d is started) will be described. First, on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, the left decorative pattern of the stereoscopic image, the center decorative pattern of the stereoscopic image, and the right decorative pattern of the stereoscopic image are displayed in a display mode in which the reels are rotated from the top to the bottom of the display screen 7a, and the decorative pattern (pattern: number "1" to number "9") variation performance (variable display) is started. When the decorative pattern variation performance (variable display) is started, the decorative pattern displayed as stopped moves slowly (at a low speed) once in a display mode in which it floats a predetermined distance (for example, about 5 mm) toward the top (in other words, after the display mode in which the decorative pattern is about to move due to the stop display of the decorative pattern being released), it gradually increases its speed from a low speed toward the bottom, changing from an opaque state to a semi-transparent state and changing at high speed. This allows the background image arranged behind the decorative pattern to be viewed through the semi-transparent decorative pattern that is changing at high speed. The decorative pattern slows down just before stopping and changes from a semi-transparent state to an opaque state again, appearing temporarily stopped or stopped (displayed temporarily stopped, then displayed stopped). When the decorative pattern is displayed temporarily stopped, it moves slowly in small vertical movements. There are multiple background images for displaying the changing decorative patterns, and one of the multiple background images is selected.

The variable icons 9C corresponding to the left decorative pattern, middle decorative pattern, and right decorative pattern currently changing as the first special pattern reservation is consumed are displayed (placed) at the variable display position 9Cd (above the rectangular image (pedestal image)) displayed in the lower center of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7. In the area of the display screen 7a to the left of the variable display position 9Cd, a reservation display area is provided as the first special pattern reservation. In this reservation display area, reservation icons 9A can be displayed (placed) at four reservation display positions 9Ad (above the rectangular image (pedestal image)), and a maximum of four reservation icons 9A can be stocked. The four reservation display positions 9Ad are aligned and displayed in a straight line along the bottom edge of the display screen 7a in the order of the first reservation display position 9Ad, the second reservation display position 9Ad, the third reservation display position 9Ad, and the fourth reservation display position 9Ad, from the position closest to the variable display position 9Cd toward the left edge of the display screen 7a.

Note that both the variable display position 9Cd and the hold display position 9Ad have a rectangular shape, but they may be the same size or different sizes. In this embodiment, both the variable display position 9Cd and the hold display position 9Ad have a rectangular shape, and the size (horizontal distance dimension) of the variable display position 9Cd is larger than the size (horizontal distance dimension) of the hold display position 9Ad (both vertical distance dimensions are the same). This is to make it possible to distinguish between the variable icon 9C displayed in the variable display position 9Cd and the hold icon 9A displayed in the hold display position 9Ad.

Here, a yellow (gold) star-shaped variable icon 9C is displayed at the variable display position 9Cd, a white spherical reserved icon 9A is displayed at the first reserved display position 9Ad, and no reserved icons are displayed at the second reserved display position 9Ad to the fourth reserved display position 9Ad. In other words, there is only one white spherical reserved icon that has not been consumed and is stored. Note that the following explanation is based on the assumption that no game balls will enter the first starting hole 20 or the second starting hole 21 from this point on.

To briefly explain the reserved icon 9A and the variable icon 9C (hereinafter sometimes simply referred to as "icons"), the differences in shape and color represent the differences in the likelihood of winning at the time of the lottery that corresponds to the icon. For example, of the six icons, namely, the yellow (gold) star icon, the black spherical icon, the smiling spherical icon, the red spherical icon, the blue spherical icon, and the white spherical icon, the yellow (gold) star icon has the highest likelihood of winning, the black spherical icon has the second highest likelihood of winning, the smiling spherical icon has the third highest likelihood of winning, the red spherical icon has the fourth highest likelihood of winning, the blue spherical icon has the fifth highest likelihood of winning, and the white spherical icon has the lowest likelihood of winning.

The decorative pattern variation performance (variable display) begins, then the left decorative pattern is temporarily stopped at the number "8" and changes to a display mode that moves slowly up and down in small increments, the right decorative pattern is temporarily stopped at the number "8" and changes to a display mode that moves slowly up and down in small increments, and the left decorative pattern and the right decorative pattern become the same pattern (here, the number "8") and a reach is formed. At this time, the middle decorative pattern continues to vary (variable display).

Next, when the battle performance begins, an ally character appears from the right side of the display screen 7a, an enemy character appears from the left side of the display screen 7a, and an performance unfolds in which the ally character and enemy character fight in the center of the display screen 7a. The battle performance is a performance in which the expectation of a big win is set high in advance. In the battle performance, the left decorative pattern, the center decorative pattern, and the right decorative pattern disappear from the display screen 7a.

In a battle performance, when an ally character wins and an enemy character loses, the left decorative pattern, middle decorative pattern, and right decorative pattern are displayed as stopped (confirmed display) with the same pattern, a win occurs, and then a win game (win performance) begins. When a win is confirmed, the change ends and the variable icon 9C disappears from the display screen 7a. In contrast, in a battle performance, when an ally character loses and an enemy character wins, the left decorative pattern, middle decorative pattern, and right decorative pattern are displayed as stopped (confirmed display) at the same time, and the left decorative pattern, middle decorative pattern, and right decorative pattern do not line up with the same pattern, resulting in a miss. At this time, the change ends and the variable icon 9C disappears from the display screen 7a.

When an ally character and an enemy character are fighting in a battle effect, and the ally character moves to the right side of the display screen 7a and the enemy character moves to the left side of the display screen 7a, a button image imitating the effect button 63 is displayed toward the bottom center of the display screen 7a, and a message image saying "Press repeatedly!" is displayed above the button image to encourage the player to press the effect button 63. The message images MG increase in the order of "Press!" → "Press repeatedly!" → "Long press!". Note that an arrow image pointing downward is also displayed on the display screen 7a between the button image and the message image, and the arrow image moves back and forth repeatedly up and down, so that the arrow image can also encourage the player to press the effect button 63 (press the pressing part of the effect button 63 downward). The button images, message images, and arrow images are configured to disappear from the display screen 7a when the player presses the effect button 63, or to disappear from the display screen 7a after a predetermined period of time (e.g., 5 seconds) has elapsed if the player does not press the effect button 63.

When the effect button 63 is pressed, or when a predetermined period of time has elapsed without the effect button 63 being pressed, as shown in FIG. 131 (C), a first premium background image (so-called "first rainbow background image") having seven colors as the background image is displayed on the display screen 7a, the friendly characters and enemy characters disappear from the display screen 7a, and the second movable part 15 provided on the game board 2 advances (moves) from a stationary state in a retracted position (home position) above the image display device 7 toward the front (forward) of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, which is the center position (advance position) of the display screen 7a, and stops for a predetermined time (for example, approximately 5 seconds). After a predetermined time has passed, the second movable device 15 returns from the advanced position to the retreated position (home position), a special victory background image that conveys the victory of the friendly character is displayed on the display screen 7a as a background image, an enemy character appears (is displayed) in the center of the display screen 7a, the enemy character gets smaller as it moves away in the depth direction, flashes of light are emitted in all directions from the center of the display screen 7a, and an explosion is displayed. After that, a special winning background image that conveys a win is displayed on the display screen 7a as a background image, and the left decorative pattern, center decorative pattern, and right decorative pattern are stopped and displayed with the same pattern (here, the number "8").

When the second movable device 15 provided on the game board 2 starts to advance (move) from a stationary state in a retracted position (home position) above the image display device 7 toward the front (forward) of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, which is the center position of the display screen 7a (advance position), the frame movable bodies 69a-69d provided on the front frame 53 around the handle 60 start to operate in conjunction with this.

In other words, the operation of the second movable device 15 provided on the game board 2 and the operation of the frame movable bodies 69a to 69d provided on the front frame 53 separately from the handle 60 are linked together and each begins to move.

Specifically, when the second movable part 15 starts moving (advancing) from a stationary state in a retracted position (home position) above the image display device 7 toward the center position (advance position) of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, the frame movable bodies 69a to 69d start moving (advancing) from the retracted position (home position) toward the advance position in conjunction with the second movable part 15 stopping at the advance position for a predetermined time (for example, about 5 seconds), the frame movable bodies 69a to 69d stop at the advance position for a predetermined time and become in a bud state, and when the predetermined time has elapsed, the second movable part 15 starts moving back from the advance position to the retracted position (home position), and the frame movable bodies 69a to 69d start moving back from the advance position to the retracted position (home position) in conjunction with the second movable part 15 starting moving back from the advance position to the retracted position (home position).

Here, the operating mode of the frame movable bodies 69a to 69d is that the frame movable bodies 69a to 69d move from the retracted position (home position) to the advanced position, stop for a predetermined period of time, and then return to the retracted position (home position), but of course other operating modes are also possible. In this case, the sub-control board 90 determines the operating mode of the frame movable bodies 69a to 69d. In other operating modes, the second movable role 15 advances (moves) from a stationary state in the retracted position (home position) above the image display device 7 toward the front (forward) of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 and toward the center position (advanced position) of the display screen 7a, and then continues for the second movable role operation period until it returns to the retracted position (home position) again.

Specifically, during the second movable body role operation period, the frame movable bodies 69a to 69d intermittently protrude to the advanced position to put the flowers in a bud state (the frame movable bodies 69a to 69d perform an intermittent operation of repeatedly moving back and forth between the retracted position (home position) and the advanced position, not continuously, but intermittently), and when the second movable body role operation period has elapsed, the frame movable bodies 69a to 69d return to the retracted position (home position), and during the second movable body role operation period, the frame movable bodies 69a to 69d continuously protrude to the advanced position to put the flowers in a bud state, and retract to the retracted position (home position) to put the flowers in a blooming state (the frame movable bodies 69a to 69d continuously perform an operation of repeatedly moving back and forth between the retracted position (home position) and the advanced position), and when the second movable body role operation period has elapsed, the frame movable bodies 69a to 69d return to the retracted position (home position). During the second movable body role operation period, the frame movable bodies 69a to 69d move clockwise from the retracted position (home position) to the advanced position in the order of the left frame movable body 69c, the upper frame movable body 69a, the right frame movable body 69d, and the lower frame movable body 69b, and when the second movable body role operation period has elapsed, all of the frame movable bodies 69a to 69d return to the retracted position (home position) all at once. During the second movable body role operation period, the frame movable bodies 69a to 69d move counterclockwise from the retracted position (home position) to the advanced position in the order of the left frame movable body 69c, the lower frame movable body 69b, the right frame movable body 69d, and the upper frame movable body 69a, and when the second movable body role operation period has elapsed, all of the frame movable bodies 69a to 69d return to the retracted position (home position) all at once.

As shown in FIG. 131(C), when the effect button 63 is pressed or when a predetermined period of time has passed without the effect button 63 being pressed, a first premium background image having seven colors (so-called "first rainbow background image") is displayed on the display screen 7a as a background image, and the operation mode of the frame movable bodies 69a to 69d provided on the front frame 53 around the handle 60 (the frame movable bodies 69a to 69d move from the retreat position (home position) to the advance position, stop for a predetermined period of time, and then return to the retreat position (home position)) is started in conjunction with the operation of the second movable role 15 provided on the game board 2. However, instead of the second movable role 15, the operation mode of the frame movable bodies 69a to 69d may be started in conjunction with the operation of the first movable role 14 provided on the game board 2.

Specifically, when the effect button 63 is pressed, or when a predetermined period of time has elapsed without the effect button 63 being pressed, as shown in FIG. 131 (D), a second premier background image (so-called a "second rainbow background image") different from the first premier background image having seven colors as the background image is displayed on the display screen 7a, the friendly characters and enemy characters disappear from the display screen 7a, and the first movable part 14 provided on the game board 2 advances (moves) from a stationary state in a retreat position (home position) to the left of the image display device 7 toward the front (forward) of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 and toward the center position (advance position) of the display screen 7a, and then repeatedly moves back and forth in short bursts in the left and right directions at the center position (advance position) for a predetermined period of time (for example, approximately 5 seconds). After a predetermined time has passed, the first movable gadget 14 returns from the advanced position to the retreated position (home position), a special victory background image that conveys the victory of the friendly character is displayed on the display screen 7a as a background image, an enemy character appears (is displayed) in the center of the display screen 7a, the enemy character gets smaller as it moves away in the depth direction, flashes of light are emitted in all directions from the center of the display screen 7a, and an explosion is displayed. After that, a special winning background image that conveys a win is displayed on the display screen 7a as a background image, and the left decorative pattern, center decorative pattern, and right decorative pattern are stopped and displayed with the same pattern (here, the number "8").

When the first movable device 14 provided on the game board 2 starts to advance (move) from a stationary state in a retreated position (home position) to the left of the image display device 7 toward the front (forward) of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, which is the center position of the display screen 7a (advance position), the frame movable bodies 69a to 69d provided on the front frame 53 around the handle 60 start to operate in conjunction with this.

In other words, the operation of the first movable part 14 provided on the game board 2 and the operation of the frame movable bodies 69a to 69d provided on the front frame 53 separately from the handle 60 are linked together and each begins to move.

Specifically, when the first movable role 14 starts moving (advancing) from a stationary state in a retracted position (home position) to the left of the image display device 7 toward the front (front) of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 toward the center position (advance position) of the display screen 7a, the frame movable bodies 69a-69d start moving (advancing) from the retracted position (home position) toward the advance position, and when the first movable role 14 moves back and forth repeatedly in short increments in the left and right directions at the center position (advance position) for a predetermined time (for example, about 5 seconds), the frame movable bodies 69a-69d stop at the advance position for a predetermined time and become in a bud state, and when the predetermined time has elapsed, the first movable role 14 starts moving back again from the advance position to the retracted position (home position), and when the predetermined time has elapsed, the frame movable bodies 69a-69d start moving back again from the advance position to the retracted position (home position).

Here, the operating mode of the frame movable bodies 69a to 69d is that the frame movable bodies 69a to 69d move from the retracted position (home position) to the advanced position, stop for a predetermined period of time, and then return to the retracted position (home position), but of course other operating modes are also possible. In this case, the sub-control board 90 determines the operating mode of the frame movable bodies 69a to 69d. In other operating modes, the first movable role 14 advances (moves) from a stationary state in the retracted position (home position) to the left of the image display device 7 toward the front (forward) of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 and toward the center position (advanced position) of the display screen 7a, and then continues for the first movable role operation period until it returns to the retracted position (home position) again.

Specifically, during the first movable body role operation period, the frame movable bodies 69a to 69d intermittently protrude to the advanced position to put the flowers in a bud state (the frame movable bodies 69a to 69d perform an intermittent operation of repeatedly moving back and forth between the retracted position (home position) and the advanced position, not continuously, but intermittently), and when the first movable body role operation period has elapsed, the frame movable bodies 69a to 69d return to the retracted position (home position), and during the first movable body role operation period, the frame movable bodies 69a to 69d continuously protrude to the advanced position to put the flowers in a bud state, and retract to the retracted position (home position) to put the flowers in a blooming state (the frame movable bodies 69a to 69d continuously perform an operation of repeatedly moving back and forth between the retracted position (home position) and the advanced position), and when the first movable body role operation period has elapsed, the frame movable bodies 69a to 69d return to the retracted position (home position). During the first movable body role operation period, the frame movable bodies 69a to 69d move clockwise from the retracted position (home position) to the advanced position in the order of the left frame movable body 69c, the upper frame movable body 69a, the right frame movable body 69d, and the lower frame movable body 69b, and when the first movable body role operation period has elapsed, all of the frame movable bodies 69a to 69d return to the retracted position (home position) all at once. During the first movable body role operation period, the frame movable bodies 69a to 69d move counterclockwise from the retracted position (home position) to the advanced position in the order of the left frame movable body 69c, the lower frame movable body 69b, the right frame movable body 69d, and the upper frame movable body 69a, and when the first movable body role operation period has elapsed, all of the frame movable bodies 69a to 69d return to the retracted position (home position) all at once.

In the above embodiment, as described above, the frame movable bodies 69a to 69d are subjected to the biasing force of the return spring, so that when the gaming machine 1 is not powered on, or when a power outage occurs during play and the power is cut off, the frame movable bodies 69a to 69d are returned to the open state by the biasing force of the return spring. This allows a player about to start playing, or a staff member such as a game center clerk, to disinfect the handle 60 with alcohol, and also disinfect the frame movable bodies 69a to 69d with alcohol.

In addition, in the above-described embodiment, as described above, the frame movable bodies 69a to 69d are subjected to the biasing force of the return spring, so that when the gaming machine 1 is not powered on or when a power outage occurs during play and the power is cut off, the frame movable bodies 69a to 69d are returned to the bloomed state by the biasing force of the return spring; however, when the gaming machine 1 is not powered on or when a power outage occurs during play and the power is cut off, the frame movable bodies 69a to 69d may be moved to the advanced position by the biasing force of the return spring and placed in a bud state. Even with this configuration, as described above, even if the back of the player's hand or fingers come into contact with the inner circumferential surface of the frame movable bodies 69a to 69d, the rotational movement mechanism 534 is provided with an overload prevention mechanism that prevents the inner circumferential surface of the frame movable bodies 69a to 69d that is in contact with the back of the player's hand or fingers from further compressing the back of the player's hand or fingers, so that the rotational movement mechanism 534 is not overloaded. Therefore, even if a player who is about to start playing or a staff member such as an amusement facility attendant inserts their finger into the part where the handle 60 and the frame movable bodies 69a to 69d contact each other in an attempt to disinfect the handle 60 with alcohol, the handle 60 and the inner circumferential surface of the frame movable bodies 69a to 69d can be disinfected with alcohol against the biasing force of the contact spring that constitutes the overload prevention mechanism.

[Example of effect]
Below are some examples of the effects of moving part contact presentations.
[Effect 1]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, for example, in the movable member contact presentation A of Figure 129 and the movable member contact presentation B of Figure 130, the game machine 1 is equipped with a handle 60 (operation means) that can be operated by a player, and has a movable protrusion 603 (movable member) that is actuated by an electrical drive source such as a motor or solenoid, and when the protrusion 603 (movable member) is actuated to start moving, a first presentation (Figure 129 (B) for movable member contact presentation A, Figure 130 (B) for movable member contact presentation B) can be executed in which the protrusion 603 (movable member) can come into contact with the hand of the player operating the handle 60 (operation means). According to this configuration, even if the movable members such as the first movable part 14 and the second movable part 15 provided on the conventional game board start to move, these movable members do not come into contact with the player at all, whereas when the protruding part 603 (movable member) starts to move while the player is holding the handle 60 (operation means) in such a way that the player's hand suddenly comes into contact with the protruding part 603, it is possible to provide the player with an unprecedented and novel presentation of the contact between the protruding part 603 (movable member) and the player. Therefore, it is possible to improve the interest.
In addition, in the movable member contact presentation C of Figure 131, the game is equipped with a handle 60 (operation means) that can be operated by the player, and has movable frame movable bodies 69a-69d (movable members) that are actuated by an electrical drive source such as a motor or solenoid, and when the frame movable bodies 69a-69d (movable members) are actuated to start moving, a first presentation (Figure 131 (B) in movable member contact presentation C) can be executed in which the frame movable bodies 69a-69d (movable members) can come into contact with the hand of the player operating the handle 60 (operation means). According to this configuration, even if the movable members such as the first movable role 14 and the second movable role 15 provided on the conventional game board start to move, these movable members do not come into contact with the player at all, whereas when the frame movable members 69a to 69d (movable members) start to move while the player is holding the handle 60 (operation means) in such a way that the player's hands suddenly come into contact with the frame movable members 69a to 69d (movable members), it is possible to provide the player with an unprecedented and novel presentation of the frame movable members 69a to 69d (movable members) coming into contact with the player. Therefore, it is possible to improve the interest.

[Effect 2]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, for example, in the movable member contact presentation A in Fig. 129 and the movable member contact presentation B in Fig. 130, the handle 60 (operation means) and the protruding portion 603 (movable member), or the handle 60 (operation means) and the frame movable bodies 69a to 69d (movable members) in the movable member contact presentation C in Fig. 131, are provided on the front frame 53 side of the gaming machine 1. With this configuration, the player can directly touch the movable members, which contributes to improving the player's motivation to play.

[Effect 3]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, for example, in the movable member contact performance A in Fig. 129 and the movable member contact performance B in Fig. 130, the protruding portion 603 (movable member) is provided inside the handle 60 (operation means), and is difficult to contact with the hand of the player who operates the handle 60 (operation means) at the retreated position (home position) (first position), and is able to contact the hand of the player who operates the handle 60 (operation means) at the advanced position (second position). According to this configuration, since it is possible to control the protruding portion 603 (movable member) between a state where it contacts the player's hand and a state where it does not contact the player's hand, it is possible to surprise the player (provide a sense of tension) and realize an impactful performance by shifting the control from a state where the protruding portion 603 (movable member) does not contact the player's hand to a state where it contacts the player's hand.

[Effect 4]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, for example, in the movable member contact performance C of Fig. 131, the frame movable members 69a to 69d (movable members) are provided outside the handle 60 (operation means) and do not cover the hand of the player who operates the handle 60 (operation means) at the retreat position (home position) (first position), but cover the hand of the player who operates the handle 60 (operation means) at the advance position (second position). According to this configuration, since it is possible to control the frame movable members 69a to 69d (movable members) to be in contact with the player's hand and to be in a non-contact state, it is possible to give the player a surprise (to give a sense of tension) and realize an impactful performance by shifting the control from a non-contact state to a contact state of the frame movable members 69a to 69d (movable members) with the player's hand.

[Effect 5]
In the above embodiment of the gaming machine 1, the gaming board 2 is provided with a game board 2 that can be seen through an opening formed in the center of the front frame 53, and the game board 2 is provided with a first movable part 14 (movable part on the game board side) and a second movable part 15 (movable part on the game board side). For example, in the movable part contact performance A of Figure 129 and the movable part contact performance B of Figure 130, the first performance can start moving in conjunction with the operation of the protrusion 603 (movable part) provided on the front frame 53 side and the operation of the first movable part 14 (movable part on the game board side) and the second movable part 15 (movable part on the game board side) provided on the game board 2 (Figures 129 (C) and (D) for movable part contact performance A, and Figures 130 (C) and (D) for movable part contact performance B). According to this configuration, even when the movable member on the game board provided on the conventional game board is activated, it is possible to give the player a sense of surprise. However, by linking the operation of the protrusion 603 (movable member) provided on the front frame 53 side with the operation of the first movable device 14 (movable member on the game board side) and the second movable device 15 (movable member on the game board side) provided on the game board 2, it is possible to give the player a greater sense of surprise (create more tension) and realize a more innovative presentation than when only the movable member on the game board provided on the conventional game board is activated.
In addition, in the movable member contact presentation C of Figure 131, the first presentation can begin to move in conjunction with the operation of the frame movable bodies 69a to 69d (movable members) provided on the front frame 53 side and the operation of the first movable part 14 (movable member on the game board side) and the second movable part 15 (movable member on the game board side) provided on the game board 2 (Figures 131 (C) and (D) in movable member contact presentation C). According to this configuration, even when the movable member on the game board provided on the conventional game board is activated, it is possible to give the player a sense of surprise. However, by linking the operation of the frame movable bodies 69a to 69d (movable members) provided on the front frame 53 side with the operation of the first movable device 14 (movable member on the game board side) and the second movable device 15 (movable member on the game board side) provided on the game board 2, it is possible to give the player a greater sense of surprise (create more tension) and realize a more innovative presentation than when only the movable member on the game board provided on the conventional game board is activated.

[Modification]
Below, modified examples of the movable member contact presentation are shown.
[Modification 1]
The movable member contact presentation A in Fig. 129, the movable member contact presentation B in Fig. 130, and the movable member contact presentation C in Fig. 131 are performed based on the game ball entering the first starting hole 20. In other words, they are performed in a game state of so-called left-handed hitting. However, they may be performed based on the game ball entering the second starting hole 21. In other words, they may be performed in a game state of so-called right-handed hitting.

[Modification 2]
In the movable member contact performance A in FIG. 129 and the movable member contact performance B in FIG. 130, when the protruding portion 603 (movable member) is operated to start moving, the protruding portion 603 (movable member) can come into contact with the hand of the player who operates the handle 60 (operation means). Also, in the movable member contact performance C in FIG. 131, when the frame movable members 69a to 69d (movable members) are operated to start moving, the frame movable members 69a to 69d (movable members) can come into contact with the hand of the player who operates the handle 60 (operation means). However, instead of such movable members, it may be something that carries the world view of the performance unfolding in the gaming machine 1. For example, it may be an item or a part of an item that the character possesses, or a part of the character (for example, wings, fangs, claws, fingers, scales, etc.).

[Modification 3]
In the movable member contact performance A in Fig. 129 and the movable member contact performance B in Fig. 130, when the protruding portion 603 (movable member) is operated to start moving, the protruding portion 603 (movable member) can come into contact with the hand of the player who operates the handle 60 (operation means). Also, in the movable member contact performance C in Fig. 131, when the frame movable body 69a-69d (movable member) is operated to start moving, the frame movable body 69a-69d (movable member) can come into contact with the hand of the player who operates the handle 60 (operation means). However, instead of such a movable member, a capsule made of a colorless and transparent resin that is divided into left and right and covers the performance button 63 may be provided, and a left capsule and a right capsule that are divided into left and right and can be moved may be applied as the movable member.

Specifically, the left and right capsules are provided on the front frame 53 side, and when the left and right capsules are in a retracted position (home position) covering the performance button 63, the right end of the left capsule and the left end of the right capsule are in face-to-face contact on a vertical line passing through the center of the performance button 63, and are combined. When the left and right capsules advance to an advanced position that releases the performance button 63, the left capsule moves horizontally to the left of the vertical line passing through the center of the performance button 63, so that the right end of the left capsule is significantly separated from the left end of the performance button 63, and further, the right capsule moves horizontally to the right of the vertical line passing through the center of the performance button 63, so that the left end of the right capsule is significantly separated from the right end of the performance button 63.

In addition to the left and right capsules and the performance button 63, the front frame 53 is provided with a rotational movement mechanism equipped with an electrical drive source (e.g., a motor or solenoid) that retracts the left and right capsules to a retreated position (home position) or advances them to an advanced position. In addition to the electrical drive source, the rotational movement mechanism is composed of, for example, a reducer that slows down the rotation of the motor when the electrical drive source is a motor, a motion conversion mechanism that converts the rotational motion of the motor (rotational motion with the rotation of the motor slowed down) into translational motion of the left and right capsules, and a mechanism for transmitting the linear motion of the solenoid plunger to translational motion of the left and right capsules when the electrical drive source is a solenoid, and in addition to these mechanisms, a return spring, a contact spring that constitutes an overload prevention mechanism, and the like.

When the left or right capsule is placed in the retreat position (home position), it is positioned so as to cover the performance button 63. Even if the player tries to press the performance button 63, it is blocked by the left or right capsule. In addition, since the left or right capsule is biased by the return spring, when the gaming machine 1 is not turned on, or when a power outage occurs during play and the power is cut off, the left or right capsule is positioned in the retreat position (home position) by the force of the return spring, and is positioned so as to cover the performance button 63.

In contrast, when the left or right capsule is placed in the advanced position, the left or right capsule is placed in a state in which it releases the performance button 63. In this state, the player can press the performance button 63 without being blocked by the left or right capsule. In order to prevent the rotation mechanism from becoming overloaded even if the player's hand comes into contact with the right end of the left capsule or the left end of the right capsule when the player presses the performance button 63, the rotation mechanism is provided with an overload prevention mechanism that moves in parallel so that the right end of the left capsule and the left end of the right capsule that are in contact with the player's hand do not further press against the player's hand. This overload prevention mechanism is mainly composed of a contact spring.

The left and right capsules can move from a retreat position (home position) to an advance position and then return to the retreat position (home position). By using this mode of operation, for example, it is possible to realize an operation in which the left and right capsules move to the advance position for a predetermined period of time and maintain the performance button 63 in an open state, or to realize an operation in which the left and right capsules move to the advance position intermittently and open the performance button 63, or to realize an operation in which the left and right capsules move to the advance position continuously and open the performance button 63 or retract to the retreat position (home position) and close the performance button 63.

When the left and right capsules start to operate, the left and right capsules may move to the retreat position (home position) while the player is pressing the performance button 63 (repeatedly, long press, etc.), causing the player's hand to come into contact with the right end of the left capsule and the left end of the right capsule. For this reason, even if the movable member on the game board provided on the game board in the conventional manner starts to move (operates), the movable member on the game board does not come into contact with the player at all. However, after the left and right capsules move to the advance position and the performance button 63 is released, when the left and right capsules start to move to the retreat position (home position) while the player is pressing the performance button 63, the player's hand suddenly comes into contact with the right end of the left capsule and the left end of the right capsule, so that a novel performance that has never been seen before, namely a contact performance between the left and right capsules (movable member) and the player, can be provided to the player. Therefore, it is possible to improve the interest.

[Modification 4]
In the movable member contact performance A of FIG. 129 and the movable member contact performance B of FIG. 130, the protrusion 603 is formed of a colored opaque (e.g., red) flexible material. However, the protrusion 603 may be formed of a colored (single-colored or multi-colored) semi-transparent flexible material, or a colorless transparent flexible material. In this case, a protrusion decorative board that causes the protrusion 603 to emit light is housed inside the handle 60. A plurality of full-color LEDs are mounted on the protrusion decorative board, and the protrusion 603 emits light when the full-color LEDs emit light. In other words, the light emission mode of the protrusion 603 can be changed by the plurality of full-color LEDs mounted on the protrusion decorative board. An inner lens formed in a predetermined shape is provided at the frontmost side housed inside the front cover 602 of the handle 60, and a decorative board on which a plurality of full-color LEDs are mounted is provided behind the inner lens. For this reason, a partition is formed inside the handle 60 so that the light emitted by the multiple full-color LEDs mounted on the protrusion decorative board does not interfere with (do not affect) the light emitted by the multiple full-color LEDs mounted on the decorative board housed inside the front cover 602. A light-guiding member is provided at the lower end of the protrusion 603, and when light emitted by the multiple full-color LEDs mounted on the protrusion decorative board is incident on the lower end of the light-guiding member, it is incident on the lower end of the protrusion 603 through the upper end of the light-guiding member and is emitted from the upper end of the protrusion 603, causing the upper end of the protrusion 603 and the vicinity of its surrounding side surfaces (the front surface of the protrusion 603 and its surrounding side surfaces) to emit light.
In addition, in the movable member contact performance C of FIG. 131, the frame movable bodies 69a to 69d are formed of a colored opaque (e.g., red) flexible material. However, the frame movable bodies 69a to 69d may be formed of a colored (single-colored or multi-colored) semi-transparent flexible material, or a colorless transparent flexible material. In this case, a protrusion decorative board that causes the frame movable bodies 69a to 69d to emit light is housed inside the front frame 53. A plurality of full-color LEDs are mounted on the protrusion decorative board, and the frame movable bodies 69a to 69d emit light when the full-color LEDs emit light. In other words, the light emission mode of the frame movable bodies 69a to 69d can be changed by the plurality of full-color LEDs mounted on the protrusion decorative board. An inner lens formed into a predetermined shape is provided at the frontmost side housed inside the front cover 602 of the handle 60, and a decorative board on which multiple full-color LEDs are mounted is provided behind the inner lens; however, since the frame movable bodies 69a to 69d are provided on the front frame 53 separately from the handle 60, the light emitted by the multiple full-color LEDs mounted on the decorative board for the protrusion on the front frame 53 side and the light emitted by the multiple full-color LEDs mounted on the decorative board housed inside the front cover 602 on the handle 60 side do not interfere with each other (they do not affect each other).

[Modification 5]
In the movable member contact effect C of FIG. 131, the frame movable bodies 69a to 69d were provided on the front frame 53 on the top, bottom, left and right sides of the handle 60 (i.e., around the handle 60). In other words, the frame movable bodies 69a to 69d were provided on the front frame 53 separately from the handle 60. These frame movable bodies 69a to 69d were formed with a motif of flower petals surrounding the periphery of the handle 60. However, it is also possible to operate either one or both of the frame movable bodies 69 (also called the frame movable device 69), which are movable so-called gimmicks on the right and left sides of the handle 60 shown in FIG. 1. In this way, when the player holds the handle 60 (operation means) in such a way that the palm of the player's hand is wrapped around the front of the handle 60, the player's hand can suddenly come into contact with the frame movable body 69 (frame movable device 69), so that a novel and unprecedented effect of a contact effect between the frame movable body 69 (frame movable device 69) and the player can be provided to the player. Therefore, interest can be enhanced.

[Modification 6]
Movable part contact performance A in Figure 129, movable part contact performance B in Figure 130, and movable part contact performance C in Figure 131 may not include some of the effects described above, or other effects may be added.

[Example of embodiment]
In the gaming machine of this embodiment, the following aspects can be realized.
◇ [Aspect D6-1]
A gaming machine having an operation means operable by a player,
A movable member is movable and operated by an electric drive source.
When the movable member is actuated to start moving, a first effect is executed in which the movable member is contactable with the hand of a player operating the operation means.
A gaming machine characterized by:

◇ [Aspect D6-2]
The gaming machine according to aspect D6-1,
The operating means and the movable member are provided on the front frame side of the gaming machine.
A gaming machine characterized by:

◇ [Aspect D6-3]
A gaming machine according to aspect D6-1 or D6-2,
the movable member is provided inside the operation means, and is difficult to contact with a hand of a player operating the operation means at a first position, and is accessible to a hand of a player operating the operation means at a second position;
A gaming machine characterized by:

◇ [Aspect D6-4]
A gaming machine according to aspect D6-1 or D6-2,
the movable member is provided outside the operation means, does not cover the hand of a player operating the operation means at a first position, and covers the hand of a player operating the operation means at a second position;
A gaming machine characterized by:

◇[Aspect D6-5]
A gaming machine according to any one of aspects D6-2 to D6-4,
A game board is provided which can be seen through an opening formed in the center of the front frame,
The game board is provided with a game board side movable member,
In the first performance, the movable member and the game board side movable member start moving in conjunction with each other.
A gaming machine characterized by:

[Other Modifications]
The various display effects described above may not include some of the effects, or may include effects other than those described above.

The gaming machine 1 in the above embodiment has been described using a pachinko gaming machine as an example, but is not limited to this. For example, instead of a pachinko gaming machine, the present invention may be applied to a reel-type gaming machine such as a slot machine, an arrange ball gaming machine, or a mahjong ball gaming machine. When the gaming machine 1 is a slot machine, the gaming medium can be changed from gaming balls to gaming medals.

In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, the operation units operated by the player are provided with the effect button 63, the sword member 65, and the select button 68, but are not limited to these, and the operation units operated by the player may also be levers, triggers, etc. Also, in the display performance of the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, the display performance may be executed using a button image representing the effect button 63, but instead, the display performance may be executed using an image representing the sword member 65, or the display performance may be executed using an image representing a lever or trigger.

The gaming machine 1 in the above embodiment is a gaming machine equipped with a payout device for paying out balls, but is not limited to this. For example, instead of the gaming machine 1, the present invention may be applied to a gaming machine that does not have a payout device, such as a so-called enclosed gaming machine.

The gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment is configured to execute various effects using the display devices (main display screen 7a, sub display screen 64, etc.). In the gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment, these effects may be combined with each other to form one display effect. In other words, two or more of the above-mentioned multiple effect examples and/or modified examples may be combined.
Furthermore, the gaming machine 1 is equipped with a sub-display screen 64 in addition to the image display device 7 (main display screen 7a), and the display effects performed on the main display screen 7a may be performed on the sub-display screen 64, and the display effects performed on the sub-display screen 64 may be performed on the main display screen 7a.

Although the present aspect has been described above based on the embodiment and modified examples, the above-mentioned embodiment of the aspect is intended to facilitate understanding of the present aspect and does not limit the present aspect. The present aspect may be modified or improved without departing from the spirit and scope of the claims, and equivalents thereof are included in the present aspect.

1: gaming machine 3: playing area 5: board lamp 7: image display device 9A, 9B: reserved image (reserved icon)
9C…Relevant hold image (hold icon)
14 ... First movable part 15 ... Second movable part 17 ... Big prize opening start hole 20 ... First start hole (first ball entry hole)
21...Second starting port (second ball entry port)
64: Sub-display screen 69: Movable frame accessory 66: Frame lamp 81: Game control microcomputer 91: Performance control microcomputer 101: Image control microcomputer

Claims (1)

A gaming machine having a display means capable of executing a plurality of display effects,
A first display effect may be performed as one of the plurality of display effects,
A second display effect may be performed as one of the plurality of display effects,
A third display effect may be performed as one of the plurality of display effects,
A fourth display effect may be performed as one of the plurality of display effects,
The first display effect is an effect of displaying a first decorative pattern,
The second display effect is an effect in which a part of the first decorative pattern is missing ,
The third display effect is an effect in which a part of the missing part of the first decorative pattern returns to its original state,
The fourth display effect is an effect in which another part of the missing part returns to its original state,
A combination effect including the first display effect, the second display effect, the third display effect, and the fourth display effect may be performed.
In the combination performance, the first display performance is performed, then the second display performance is performed, then the third display performance is performed, and then the fourth display performance is performed.
A gaming machine characterized by:

Images